ExceptionalGeek
Managing Quality INTEGRATING THE SUPPLY CHAIN
This page intentionally left blank
F i f t h E d i t i o n
Managing Quality INTEGRATING THE SUPPLY CHAIN
S. Thomas Foster Brigham Young University
Boston Columbus Indianapolis New York San Francisco Upper Saddle River Amsterdam Cape Town Dubai London Madrid Milan Munich Montreal Paris Toronto
Delhi Hong Kong Mexico City São Paulo Seoul Singapore Sydney Taipei Tokyo
Editorial Director: Sally Yagan Editor in Chief: Donna Battista Senior Acquisitions Editor: Chuck Synovec Editorial Project Manager: Mary Kate Murray Editorial Assistant: Ashlee Bradbury Director of Marketing: Maggie Moylan Senior Marketing Manager: Jami Minard Production Project Manager: Clara Bartunek Creative Art Director: Jayne Conte Cover Designer: Bruce Kenselaar Image Lead Manager: Mike Lackey
Photo Researcher: Jason Perkins Manager, Rights and Permissions: Brooks Hill-Whilton Cover Art: Shutterstock Media Project Manager: John Cassar Media Editor: James Bateman Full-Service Project Management: Munesh Kumar/ Aptara®, Inc. Printer/Binder: Edwards Brothers Cover Printer: Lehigh / Phoenix, Hagerstown Text Font: Times Roman
Credits and acknowledgments borrowed from other sources and reproduced, with permission, in this textbook appear on the appropriate page within text.
Microsoft and/or its respective suppliers make no representations about the suitability of the information contained in the documents and related graphics published as part of the services for any purpose. All such documents and related graphics are provided “as is” without warranty of any kind. Microsoft and/or its respective suppliers hereby disclaim all warranties and conditions with regard to this information, including all warranties and conditions of merchantability, whether express, implied or statutory, fitness for a particular purpose, title and non-infringement. In no event shall Microsoft and/or its respective suppliers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of information available from the services.
The documents and related graphics contained herein could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically added to the information herein. Microsoft and/or its respective suppliers may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described herein at any time. Partial screen shots may be viewed in full within the software version specified.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. This book is not sponsored or endorsed by or affiliated with the Microsoft Corporation.
Copyright © 2013, 2010, 2007, 2004, 2001 by Pearson Education, Inc., publishing as Prentice Hall. All rights reserved. Manufactured in the United States of America. This publication is protected by Copyright, and permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. To obtain permission(s) to use material from this work, please submit a written request to Pearson Education, Inc., Permissions Department, One Lake Street, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey 07458, or you may fax your request to 201-236-3290.
Many of the designations by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their products are claimed as trademarks. Where those designations appear in this book, and the publisher was aware of a trademark claim, the designations have been printed in initial caps or all caps.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Foster, S. Thomas. Managing quality: integrating the supply chain / S. Thomas Foster.—5th ed. p. cm. ISBN-13: 978-0-13-273798-2 ISBN-10: 0-13-273798-1 1. Quality of products. 2. Quality control. I. Title. HF5415.157.F67 2013 658.4!013—dc23 2012020545
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ISBN 10: 0-13-273798-1 ISBN 13: 978-0-13-273798-2
To Camilleo: I owe you one.
BRIEF CONTENTS
PART 1 Understanding Quality Concepts 1 Chapter 1 Differing Perspectives on Quality 2 Chapter 2 Quality Theory 25 Chapter 3 Global Supply Chain Quality and International
Quality Standards 51
PART 2 Designing and Assuring Quality 85 Chapter 4 Strategic Quality Planning 86 Chapter 5 The Voice of the Customer 111 Chapter 6 The Voice of the Market 135 Chapter 7 Quality and Innovation in Product and
Process Design 158 Chapter 8 Designing Quality Services 187 Chapter 9 Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 219
PART 3 Implementing Quality 237 Chapter 10 The Tools of Quality 238 Chapter 11 Statistically Based Quality Improvement
for Variables 276 Chapter 12 Statistically Based Quality Improvement
for Attributes 314 Chapter 13 Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 337
PART 4 Forever Improving the Quality System 371 Chapter 14 Managing Quality Improvement Teams
and Projects 372 Chapter 15 Implementing and Validating the
Quality System 401
Appendix 422 Glossary 425 Index 440
vi
CONTENTS
Preface xviii
Part 1 Understanding Quality Concepts 1
Chapter 1 DIFFERING PERSPECTIVES ON QUALITY 2 Recognizing Different Perspectives on Quality 2
! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 1-1: What’s in an Airport? 3 What Is Quality? 3
Product Quality Dimensions 3 Service Quality Dimensions 5 Why Does It Matter That Different Definitions of Quality Exist? 6
Differing Functional Perspectives on Quality 7 A Supply Chain Perspective 7 An Engineering Perspective 8 An Operations Perspective 9 A Strategic Management Perspective 10 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 1-1: Quality Strategy at GE 12 A Marketing Perspective 13 A Financial Perspective 14 The Human Resources Perspective 16 Is Quality Management Its Own Functional Discipline? 17
Three Spheres of Quality 17 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 1-2: Federal Express Corporation 19
Other Perspectives on Quality 19 The Value-Added Perspective on Quality 19 Cultural Perspectives on Quality 20
Arriving at a Common Understanding of Quality Using a Contingency Perspective of Quality 20
Summary 20 Key Terms 21 Discussion Questions 21
" CASE 1-1: FedEx: Managing Quality Day and Night 22 " CASE 1-2: Granite Rock Company: Achieving Quality through Employees 23
Chapter 2 QUALITY THEORY 25 What Is Theory? 25
Is There a Theory of Quality Management? 27 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 2-1: Quality and Management Fads 27
History of Quality Management 28 Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: W. Edwards Deming 28
Deming’s 14 Points for Management 30
vii
viii Contents
Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Joseph M. Juran 33 The Juran Trilogy 33 Control versus Breakthrough 34 Project-by-Project Improvement 34 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 2-2: Juran on the Past Century of Quality 35 Pareto Analysis 36
Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Kaoru Ishikawa 36 Basic Tools of Quality 36 Ishikawa’s Quality Philosophy 36
Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Armand Feigenbaum 37 The 19 Steps of TQC 38
Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Philip Crosby 38 Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Genichi Taguchi 39
Definition of Quality 40 Quality Loss Function 40 Robust Design 40
Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: The Rest of the Pack 40 Robert C. Camp 40 Stephen R. Covey’s “8” Habits 41 Tom Peters 41 Michael Hammer and James Champy 42 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 2-3: Selling Quality Fads 42
Viewing Quality Theory from a Contingency Perspective 43 Resolving the Differences in Quality Approaches: An Integrative View 43
Leadership 45 Employee Improvement 45 Quality Assurance 45 Customer Focus 45 Quality Philosophy 45 Information Analysis 45 Strategic Planning 45 Environment or Infrastructure 46 Team Approach 46 Focus of the Quality Department 46 Breakthrough 47
Theoretical Framework for Quality Management 47 Summary 47 Key Terms 47 Discussion Questions 47
" CASE 2-1: Rheaco, Inc.: Making a Quality Turnabout by Asking for Advice 48 " CASE 2-2: Has Disney Developed a Theory of Quality Guest Services
Management? 49
Chapter 3 GLOBAL SUPPLY CHAIN QUALITY AND INTERNATIONAL QUALITY STANDARDS 51 Managing Quality for the Multinational Firm (MNF) 52
! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 3-1: Supply Chain Quality in the Global Context 55 Quality Improvement: The American Way 56 The Malcolm Baldrige Award 56
! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 3-1: Who Was Malcolm Baldrige? 61 The Baldrige Process 62 Baldrige Scoring 65 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 3-2: Honeywell Federal Manufacturing & Technologies 65 Being a Baldrige Examiner 66 State Awards 66
Quality Improvement: The Japanese Way 67 Deming Prize 67 Other Japanese Contributions to Quality Thought 68 Lean Production 68 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 3-3: The Humbling of Toyota 68 Japanese Total Quality Control (TQC) 69
Quality Improvement: The European Way 71 European Quality Award 71 ISO 9000:2008 72 Quality Management Principles Underlying ISO 9000:2008 74 Selecting a Registrar 75 The ISO 9000:2008 Process 75 ISO 14000 76
Quality Improvement: The Chinese Way 78 Does Chinese Quality Management Exist? 78 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 3-2: Outsourcing Woes 79
Are Quality Approaches Influenced by Culture? 80 Summary 81 Key Terms 81 Discussion Questions 81
" CASE 3-1: Denver International Airport Becomes ISO 14001 Certified 82 " CASE 3-2: Wainwright Industries: An Entirely New Philosophy of Business
Based on Customer Satisfaction and Quality 83
Part 2 Designing and Assuring Quality 85
Chapter 4 STRATEGIC QUALITY PLANNING 86 Strategy Content 86 The Importance of Time in Quality Improvement 86
! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 4-1: Problems with Measuring Educational Performance 88
Leadership for Quality 88 Leadership Dimensions 89
Contents ix
! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 4-1: Solectron Corporation 91 Quality and Ethics 92 Quality as a Strategy 92
Costs of Quality 92 PAF Paradigm 93 Accounting for Quality-Related Costs 94 Lundvall-Juran Quality Cost Model 95 Differentiation through Quality 96 Focus through Quality 96 Order Winners 97 Quality as a Core Competency 98
Quality Strategy Process 98 Forced-Choice Model 98
Deploying Quality (Hoshin Kanri) 99 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 4-2: A Mature Strategic Planning Process 99
Does Quality Lead to Better Business Results? 101 Quality and Price 102 Quality and Cost 102 Quality and Productivity 102 Quality and Profitability 103 Quality and Sustainability 103
Supply Chain Strategy 104 Summary 105 Key Terms 106 Discussion Questions 106 Problems 106
" CASE 4-1: Ames Rubber Corporation: Realizing Multiple Benefits through Improved Quality 108
" CASE 4-2: Midway USA 109
Chapter 5 THE VOICE OF THE CUSTOMER 111 Customer-Driven Quality 112
! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 5-1: Online Review of Merchandise 112 The Pitfalls of Reactive Customer-Driven Quality 113
Customer-Relationship Management 114 Complaint Resolution 114 Feedback 115 Guarantees 115 Corrective Action 116
The “Gaps” Approach to Service Design 116 Segmenting Customers and Markets 118 Strategic Supply Chain Alliances between Customers and Suppliers 119
The Role of the Customer in the Supply Chain 120
x Contents
Communicating Downstream 121 Actively Solicited Customer-Feedback Approaches 122
Telephone Contact 122 Focus Groups 122 Customer Service Surveys 123 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 5-2: Misusing Surveys 123
Passively Solicited Customer-Feedback Approaches 126 Customer Research Cards 127 Customer Response Lines 127 Web Site Inquiries 127
Managing Customer Retention and Loyalty 128 Customer-Relationship Management Systems 128 A Word on Excellent Design 130
Summary 130 Key Terms 131 Discussion Questions 131 Problems 132
" CASE 5-1: Customer Quality Feedback at Apple Computer 132 " CASE 5-2: Chaparral Steel: Achieving High Quality through a Commitment to
Both External and Internal Customers 133
Chapter 6 THE VOICE OF THE MARKET 135 What Do We Mean by the Voice of the Market? 135 Gaining Insight through Benchmarking 136
Process Benchmarking 137 Financial Benchmarking 137 Performance Benchmarking 137 Product Benchmarking 138 Strategic Benchmarking 138 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 6-1: Pal’s Sudden Service 138 Functional Benchmarking 139
Purposes of Benchmarking 139 Difficulties in Monitoring and Measuring Performance 140 Commonly Benchmarked Performance Measures 142
Why Collect All These Measures? 144 Key Business Factors 144
Business Process Benchmarking 144 Robert Camp’s Business Process Benchmarking Process 145
Leading and Managing the Benchmarking Effort 147 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 6-1: Benchmarking at Intuit 147 Training 148 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 6-2: The Legal Environment of
Benchmarking 148
Baselining and Reengineering 150
Contents xi
Problems with Benchmarking 150 Summary 151 Key Terms 151 Discussion Questions 151 Problems 152
" CASE 6-1: Amgen Corporation: Using Benchmarking as a Means of Coping with Rapid Growth 155
" CASE 6-2: AT&T Teleholdings: Making Benchmarking a Part of the Process Improvement Tool Kit 156
Chapter 7 QUALITY AND INNOVATION IN PRODUCT AND PROCESS DESIGN 158 Designing Products for Quality 158 The Design Process 159
! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 7-1: A Turnaround at Kellogg’s Cereals: Driven by Design 161
Quality Function Deployment (QFD) 163 Technology in Design 167 Other Design Methodologies 170
Organizing the Design Team 170 The Product Life Cycle 171 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 7-1: Ski Design 171 Product Families and the Product Life Cycle 172 Complementary Products 172 Designing Products That Work 172 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 7-2: It Takes a Scientist to Design a Winter
Coat 173
Design for Manufacture Method 174 Design for Maintainability 175
Designing for Reliability 176 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 7-2: Designing Reliable Luxury at Vuitton 176 Reliability Analysis Tools 177 Failure Modes and Effects Analysis 177 How FMEA Works 178 Fault-Tree Analysis 178 Failure Modes, Effects, and Criticality Analysis 180 Product Traceability and Recall Procedures 180
Environmental Considerations in Design 181 Summary 182 Key Terms 182 Discussion Questions 182 Problems 183
" CASE 7-1: Keeping Apple’s iPhone Competitive 185 " CASE 7-2: Nucor Corporation: Producing Quality Steel by Stressing Sound
Management Practices 186
xii Contents
Chapter 8 DESIGNING QUALITY SERVICES 187 Differences between Services and Manufacturing 188
Internal versus External Services 189 Voluntary versus Involuntary Services 189 How Are Service Quality Issues Different from Those of Manufacturing? 189 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 8-1: Service Warranties: Profitable or a
Rip-off—You Decide 190
How Are Service Quality Issues Similar to Manufacturing? 191 What Do Services Customers Want? 191
! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 8-1: Ritz-Carlton Hotels 192 SERVQUAL 193
Expectations 193 Perceptions 195 Gap Analysis 196 Assessing Differences in Expectations and Perceptions by Using the Differencing Technique 197
Designing and Improving the Services Transaction 200 Services Blueprinting 200 Moments of Truth 201 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 8-2: Quality in Health Care 202 Poka-yoke 203
The Customer Benefits Package 204 Service Transaction Analysis 205 Improving Customer Service in Government 208
! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 8-3: Government Service Quality: A Stop-and-Go Process 208
Quality in Health Care 209 Supply Chain Quality in Services 210 A Theory for Service Quality Management 210
Summary 211 Key Terms 212 Discussion Questions 212 Problems 213
" CASE 8-1: Yahoo! Designs Quality Services with Customers in Mind 216 " CASE 8-2: UPS: Delivering the Total Package in Customer Service 217
Chapter 9 MANAGING SUPPLIER QUALITY IN THE SUPPLY CHAIN 219 The Value Chain 219
The Chain of Customers 220 Managing the Supply Chain 220
Supplier Alliances 220 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 9-1: Supply Chains and Terrorism 223
Contents xiii
Single-Sourcing Examples 224 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 9-1: A Bumpy Ride at Boeing 224
Supplier Development 226 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 9-2: Integrating Forward along the Supply Chain:
3M Dental Products Division 226
Supplier Awards 228 Supplier Relationship Management Systems (SRMSs) 228
Applying the Contingency Perspective to Supplier Partnering 228 A Supplier Development Program: ISO/TS 16949:2009 228
ISO/TS 16949 228 Quality Management System 230 Management Responsibility 230 Resource Management 230 Product Realization 230 Measurement, Analysis, and Improvement 230
Acceptance Sampling and Statistical Sampling Techniques 230 Is Acceptance Sampling Needed? 230 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 9-2: For RFID to Take Hold, Reliability
Needs to Improve 231
Building an Understanding of Supply Chain Quality Management 232
Summary 232 Key Terms 233 Discussion Questions 233
" CASE 9-1: AT&T: Setting High Standards for Suppliers and Rewarding Supplier Performance 233
" CASE 9-2: Managing the Supply Chain at Honeywell 234
Part 3 Implementing Quality 237
Chapter 10 THE TOOLS OF QUALITY 238 Improving the System 238 Ishikawa’s Basic Seven Tools of Quality 239
Process Maps 240 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 10-1: Extended Value Stream Mapping of
Supply Chains 244
Check Sheets 246 Histograms 247 Scatter Diagrams 248 Control Charts 250 Cause-and-Effect (Ishikawa) Diagrams 250 Pareto Charts 252
The Seven New Tools for Improvement 255 The Affinity Diagram 257
xiv Contents
The Interrelationship Digraph 259 Tree Diagrams 260 Prioritization Grid 262 Matrix Diagram 264 Process Decision Program Chart 265 Activity Network Diagram 265 Reflections on the Managerial N7 Tools 267
Other Tools for Performance Measurement 267 Spider Charts 267 Balanced Scorecards 267 Dashboards 269
Summary 269 Key Terms 269 Discussion Questions 269 Problems 270
" CASE 10-1: Corporate Universities: Teaching the Tools of Quality 273 " CASE 10-2: Lanier: Achieving Maximum Performance by Supporting Quality
Products with Quality Services 274
Chapter 11 STATISTICALLY BASED QUALITY IMPROVEMENT FOR VARIABLES 276 Statistical Fundamentals 276
What Is Statistical Thinking? 276 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 11-1: Statistical Tools in Action 277 Why Do Statistics Sometimes Fail in the Workplace? 278 Understanding Process Variation 278 Process Stability 280 Sampling Methods 280 Random Samples 280 Systematic Samples 280 Sampling by Rational Subgroups 280 Planning for Inspection 281 Control Plans 281
Process Control Charts 281 Variables and Attributes Control Charts 281 A Generalized Procedure for Developing Process Charts 283 Understanding Process Charts 283 x _ and R Charts 285
Interpreting Control Charts 286 Using Excel to Draw x
_ and R Charts 290
X and Moving Range ( MR ) Charts for Population Data 291 Using Excel to Draw X and MR Charts 294 Median Charts 294
Contents xv
Using Excel to Draw Median Charts 296 x _ and s Charts 296
Using Excel to Draw s and x _ Charts 298
Other Control Charts 298 Moving Average Chart 298 Cusum Chart 299
Some Control Chart Concepts for Variables 299 Choosing the Correct Variables Control Chart 299 Corrective Action 301 How Do We Use Control Charts to Continuously Improve? 301 Tampering with the Process 301
Process Capability for Variables 301 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 11-1: A Justification for Meeting Standards in
Software Quality 302
Population versus Sampling Distributions 302 Capability Studies 304 Ppk 306 The Difference between Capability and Stability 306
Other Statistical Techniques in Quality Management 306 Summary 307 Key Terms 308 Discussion Questions 308 Problems 308
" CASE 11-1: Ore-Ida Fries 312
Chapter 12 STATISTICALLY BASED QUALITY IMPROVEMENT FOR ATTRIBUTES 314 Generic Process for Developing Attributes Charts 315 Understanding Attributes Charts 315
p Charts for Proportion Defective 315 Using Excel to Draw p Charts 317 np Charts 318 Using Excel to Draw np Charts 320 c and u Charts 320 Using Excel to Draw c and u Charts 322
Attributes Charts Summary 323 Choosing the Right Attributes Chart 323 Reliability Models 325
Series Reliability 325 Parallel Reliability 326 Measuring Reliability 327 Mean Time to Failure (MTTF) 328 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 12-1: Is Quality on the Decline? 328
xvi Contents
System Availability 329 Summary 330 Key Terms 330 Discussion Questions 330 Problems 331
" CASE 12-1: Decision Sciences Institute National Conference 334
Chapter 13 SIX SIGMA MANAGEMENT AND LEAN TOOLS 337 What Is Six Sigma? 337 Organizing Lean-Six Sigma 339
Packaging Lean with Six Sigma 341 DMAIC Overview 341
! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 13-1: DMAIC in Action 342 Define Phase 343
Developing the Business Case 343 Project Evaluation 344 Pareto Analysis 347 Problem Definition 347
Measure Phase 347 Selecting Process Outcomes 347 FMEA 351 Verifying Measurements 351 Gauge R&R 352 Using Excel to Perform Gauge R&R Analysis 355
Analyze Phase 355 Defining Objectives 355 Identifying X s 355 Analyzing Sources of Variation 355
Improve Phase 356 Control Phase 356 Taguchi Design of Experiments 357
Robust Design 357 Background of the Taguchi Method 358
Taguchi Definition of Quality 358 Quality Loss Function 358
The Taguchi Process 360 Using Excel to Solve Taguchi Experiments 362
Design for Six Sigma 364 Lean-Six Sigma from a Contingency Perspective 364
Summary 364 Key Terms 365 Discussion Questions 365 Problems 365
" CASE 13-1: The Neiman-Marcus Cookie 370
Contents xvii
Part 4 Forever Improving the Quality System 371
Chapter 14 MANAGING QUALITY IMPROVEMENT TEAMS AND PROJECTS 372
Why Employees Enjoy teams 373 Leading Teams for Quality Improvement 373
Employee Empowerment and Involvement 373 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 14-1: Empowerment in Action 374 Flattening Hierarchies for Improved Effectiveness 375 Team Leader Roles and Responsibilities 375 Team Roles and Responsibilities 376 Team Formation and Evolution 377 Team Rules 378
Types of Teams 378 Process Improvement Teams 379 Cross-Functional Teams 379 Tiger Teams 379 Natural Work Groups 379 Self-Directed Work Teams 379 Virtual Teams 380 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 14-2: Lessons from Effective Teams outside the
Business World 380
Implementing Teams 381 Meeting Management 381 Conflict Resolution in Teams 382 Saving Quality Teams from Failure: Diagnosing Problems and Intervening Before It Is Too Late 385
Managing and Controlling Projects 385 Qualifying Projects 386 Project Charters 387
Force-Field Analysis 388 Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) 389 Identifying Precedence Relationships 389 Identifying Outcome Measures 389 Identifying Task Times 390 Activity Network Diagrams 391 Arrow Gantt Charts 394 Managing Multiple Projects 394
Summary 395 Key Terms 396 Discussion Questions 396 Problems 397
" CASE 14-1: Whole Foods Market: Using Teamwork as a Recipe for Success 399
xviii Contents
Chapter 15 IMPLEMENTING AND VALIDATING THE QUALITY SYSTEM 401 Building Blocks for the system of Quality Improvement 402
People 402 Organizational Learning and Knowledge 403 Culture 404 Closeness to Customers 404 Information and Finance 405 The Three Spheres of Quality 405 The Integrative Approach 405 Alignment between the Quality System and Strategy 406 ! QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 15-1: Back to Basics at Ford 406
Internal Validation: Documenting and Assessing the Quality System 406 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 15-1: A Simple Self-Assessment Tool 409
Quality Audits 412 Quality Audit Process 413 Types of Audits 413 Operational Audits 414 Performance Audits 414 ! A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 15-2: Quality Audits in Action 416 Qualitative and Quantitative Elements in Audits 416
Validating the Quality System 417 Summary 418 Key Terms 418 Discussion Questions 419 Problems 419
" CASE 15-1: Setting Priorities Using the Baldrige Criteria 419
Appendix 422
Glossary 425
Index 440
Contents xix
PREFACE
Welcome to the fifth edition of Managing Quality: Integrating the Supply Chain . We are using the theme of supply chain management as a unifying theme for quality improvement. Previous adopters of Managing Quality will note that the coverage of quality topics is just as comprehen- sive as ever. We simply adopt the unifying theme of the supply chain to enhance our emphasis on the integration of systems with customers, suppliers, technology, and people. This is in response to changes in the marketplace and our customers—you! We think you will find that your custom- ers—the students—will find this change makes your quality management course ever more rel- evant and interesting. Of course, the new edition of the text has been updated with many changes to keep our coverage of quality topics on the cutting edge.
NEW TO THIS EDITION • You will notice more color in this edition of the text. This is because of you, our readers
and instructors who have made this book a best seller world wide. • Supply chain quality issues related to outsourcing have come to the forefront in recent
years, making this book even more relevant. With this, we have increased the coverage of outsourcing issues such as managing supplier alliances.
• We have turned a special eye towards updating vignettes such as the “Quality Highlights” and “Closer Looks at Quality,” with many updates including recent problems with Toyota, outsourcing to China, and Boeing. This provides a basis for discussing the causes of these problems.
• Many references have been updated to reflect the state of the art in research. • This book includes the ISO 9000:2008 standard and the most recent Baldrige criteria avail-
able at the time of publication. • We have increased the emphasis on emerging topics such as lean and sustainability. • There are many other recent topics added such as remote monitoring of product performance. • Many other changes, too numerous to mention, have been incorporated into this section of
the book. Look for the new problems on Service Transaction Analysis. However, while adding new content, we have not added to the bulk of the book. This allowed us to keep our focus on a lean and mean book that will hold the interest of students.
MAJOR THEMES
Supply Chain as a Unifying Theme Today’s firms are evermore focused on improving supply chain performance. Key to this improve- ment is quality management. As we look upstream, we need to develop our suppliers. Down- stream, we focus on customer service and after-sales service. Implicit in this process is service design. In your classes, you can drive these concepts home by emphasizing the systems view implicit in supply chain management. This unifying theme provides a linkage between the roots of quality management (Shewhart and Deming) with new developments such as Six Sigma and service quality. For clarification, this is not a supply chain management text. This is a quality management text that utilizes supply chain management as a unifying theme .
Integrative Approach Workers and managers in organizations are somewhat limited by their particular functional prep- aration and specialization (going back to their educational training). This narrow presentation filter is how they analyze and cognitively interpret information. However, quality management
xx
Preface xxi
has emerged as a discipline that is not owned by any of the functional areas such as operations management, supply chain management, human resources, or marketing. We all have to work together to satisfy customers.
Contingency Approach This is a concept we have emphasized for a long time that is gaining traction in the research and practitioner literature. We passionately believe that the future of quality management will involve learning the contingencies associated with managing quality. There is no “one way” or “magic pill” that companies can implement to improve quality. Therefore, the contingency approach is used to instruct students how to assess the current position of the firm and identify an effective strategy for improvement based on a profound understanding of their company, market, custom- ers, and so on. Thus improvement is based on the contingent variables that are operative in the firm as it exists. This contingency approach is introduced in Chapter 1 and permeates the rest of the text.
The author and over 300 universities around the world have successfully taught quality management using this contingency approach. This approach coupled with the unifying theme of the supply chain makes this pedagogically even more powerful. To manage quality effectively, a few conditions must be present: Students must understand their businesses, understand the qual- ity body of knowledge, understand the available tools, and have a method for planning quality based on this knowledge. This text provides a basis for accomplishing this—when combined with an instructor’s insight.
SUPPORT FOR THIS EDITION
Active Models There are interactive Excel spreadsheets located at www.pearsonhighered.com/foster that cor- respond to examples in Chapters 12 and 13 and allow the student to explore and better under- stand important quantitative concepts. Students or instructors can adjust inputs to the model and, in effect, they can answer a whole series of “what if” questions that are provided (e.g., What if variation in the process changes? What if the process indicates changes are needed? What if we change the sample size?). These Active Models are great for classroom presentation and/or homework.
FOR THE STUDENT
Companion Web Site By visiting www.pearsonhighered.com/foster , students will be able to find the following resources by chapter: online quizzes, direct links to company Web sites, quality tools, and knowledge base topics. The following features are also available:
• Online Chapter 9 Appendix —this online appendix covers acceptance sampling fundamentals. • Excel Files —for examples in Chapters 11 , 12 , and 13 . • Active Models —for selected textbook examples. • Video Clips —selected video clips (one to two minutes in length) that illustrate chapter-related
topics. • Excel Quality —plug-in files for selected examples in the text.
FOR THE INSTRUCTOR Besides the changes and additions to the text, we’ve made substantial revisions to the support materials for this book.
Instructor’s Resource Center A password-protected site at www.pearsonhighered.com/foster gives instructors access to the following resources:
• Instructor’s Manual —This manual includes solutions to practice problems, case study questions, sample syllabi, and teaching tips.
• PowerPoint Presentations —A set of PowerPoint presentations is available for each chapter. • Test Item File —The Test Item File contains a variety of true/false, multiple-choice, fill-in-
the-blank, short-answer, and problem-solving questions for each chapter. • TestGen-EQ Software — Pearson Education’s test-generating software is available from
www.pearsonhighered.com/irc . The software is PC/MAC compatible and preloaded with all of the Test Item File questions. You can manually or randomly view test questions and drag and drop to create a test. You can add or modify test-bank questions as needed. Our TestGens are converted for use in BlackBoard and WebCT. These conversions can be found in the Instructor’s Resource Center. Conversions to D2L or Angel can be requested through your local Pearson Sales Representative.
xxii Preface
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I wish to first thank my family for putting up with the fences left unmended, the mountains not explored, the rivers not rafted, the snow unskied, the music not played, and the many hours spent in front of a computer screen over the last years writing and updating this book. It has truly been a labor of love for me. I believe that these concepts are important for the future of the world.
I would like to thank my parents, who always emphasized the importance of education as a means of achieving a happy life. I thank Everett E. Adam Jr., for mentoring me. I would like to acknowledge my colleagues at Brigham Young University for providing encouragement for this project. Thanks to all of my students and those individuals who have hired me as a consultant. These people have helped me pursue lifelong learning.
I also wish to thank the following reviewers for their thoughtful comments: Susan Gary Bragar of Bloomfield College, Dennis Krumwiede Idaho State University, Jay Mabe of York Technical College, Steven F. Marsh of Clarkson University, Renae Neace of Hazard Community and Technical College, Dr. Floyd Olson of Utah Valley University, Samia M. Siha of Kennesaw State University, and Jim Vail of Elizabethtown Community and Technical College.
Chuck Synovec, my editor at Pearson, deserves recognition for the great encouragement he has given to me. Finally, I am thankful for my faith, which keeps me progressing eternally.
xxiii
ABOUT THE AUTHOR
Dr. Tom Foster is a professor, researcher, and consultant in the field of quality management. Among Dr. Foster’s areas of exper- tise are strategic quality planning, service quality, Six Sigma, government quality, and the role of technology in improving quality. Tom is the Donald L. Staheli Professor of quality and supply chain management in the Marriott School of Manage- ment at Brigham Young University. He has also taught at Pennsylvania State University and Boise State University. He received his Ph.D. from the University of Missouri-Columbia.
Dr. Foster has professional experience in manufacturing, financial services operations, and international oil exploration. He has consulted for over 30 companies, including Trus Joist MacMillan, the U.S. Department of Energy, Hewlett-Packard, Heinz Frozen Food, and Cutler Hammer/Eaton Corporation. Dr. Foster currently serves on the 12-person Board of Overseers for the Malcolm Bald-
rige Award and has served as a judge for state awards. Tom is on the editorial boards of the Journal of Operations Management, the Quality Man-
agement Journal, and Decision Sciences . He has published over 60 quality-related research arti- cles in journals such as The Journal of Operations Management, Decision Sciences , the International Journal of Production Research , the Quality Management Journal , and Quality Progress . He is listed in Who’s Who in America and Who’s Who in the World . Dr. Foster is founder of www.freequality.org , was awarded the ASBSU Outstanding Faculty Award, and served as guest editor for the Journal of Operations Management and Quality Management Journal special issue on supply chain quality. In addition, he was winner of the 2002 Decision Sciences Institute Innovative Education Award.
Tom has ten children, 8 grandchildren, and is married to the former Camille Curtis. In his spare time, he skis, enjoys the Rocky Mountains, and plays his Fender Stratocaster.
xxiv
P A R T O N E
Understanding Quality Concepts
To understand quality in the supply chain, we need a common language. In the general public, the language of quality is imprecise and inconsistent. The language of quality professionals is much more precise and consistent.
To understand the advanced concepts in the later chapters, in Chapters 1 through 3 we build a conceptual foundation of quality theory. This forms the basis of the contingency approach. To apply quality improvement on a contingent basis, you need to understand the foundation that has been laid by leaders in the quality movement such as W. Edwards Deming, Joseph Juran, Philip Crosby, Kaoru Ishikawa, and others. These people have made huge contributions to the well-being of the world, and a knowledge of their teachings and ideas is necessary for quality application.
In Chapter 3 we consider important frameworks, such as ISO 9000:2008, the Deming Prize, and the Baldrige criteria. These provide models for improvement that are being used in many countries around the world.
Those who are victorious plan effectively and change decisively. They are like a great river that maintains its course but adjusts its flow.
—Sun Tzu
C H A P T E R 1
Differing Perspectives on Quality
2
RECOGNIZING DIFFERENT PERSPECTIVES ON QUALITY
Quality management involves flows. There are process flows, information flows, material flows, and flows of funds. Each of these flows has to operate effectively, efficiently, and with outstand- ing quality. Like a river, we refer to upstream flows and downstream flows. The sums of these flows comprise the supply chain.
Considering the supply chain causes us to think about quality differently. One of the prob- lems with quality efforts has been that they tend to be too internally oriented. The supply chain causes us to expand our vision as we externalize processes that had previously been internalized. These include upstream processes relating to our dealing with suppliers—negotiating, selecting, and improving supplier performance—and downstream processes—delivering products and services and serving customers.
The supply chain encompasses many differing functions and processes. It includes all of the core activities from the raw materials stage to after-sale service. To execute all of these pro- cesses correctly involves integrating differing functions, expertise, and dimensions of quality. This need for integration increases the requirement for flexible, cross-functional problem solving and employees who can adapt to rapidly changing markets.
There are many different definitions and dimensions of quality in the supply chain. We present several of these definitions and dimensions in this chapter. For the present, you can view quality as a measure of goodness that is inherent to a product or service. Employees working for the same firm often view quality differently. Think of the different functions involved in creat- ing products and services. These include design engineering, marketing, operations, cost accounting, financial management, and others throughout the supply chain. A product design engineer might feel that customer satisfaction is mostly influenced by product design and prod- uct attributes and take great pains to design a product that satisfies the customer. However, the product also needs to satisfy marketing’s need for quick design cycle times and accounting’s
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 3
need for low-cost products. So perceptions differ on a variety of levels, including what our goals for the product or service are. A Closer Look at Quality 1-1 illustrates this point by com- paring people’s perceptions concerning service in airports.
Perceptions affect every aspect of our world—including the business world. To communi- cate effectively about quality, managers need to recognize that differences in perceptions of qual- ity exist. Although this observation may not seem too startling, many managers have strong opinions about what quality is. Sometimes these opinions can be at variance with the beliefs of the majority of their customers. This may hurt the competitiveness of a firm. For that reason, in this chapter we study quality from a variety of perspectives. Later we provide a means for recog- nizing and resolving differences in perception. Finally, we introduce the contingency view of quality management that we emphasize throughout this book.
WHAT IS QUALITY?
If you ask 10 people to define quality, you probably will get 10 definitions.
Product Quality Dimensions
There are several definitions of quality, or quality dimensions. One of the most respected col- lections of quality dimensions was compiled by David Garvin 2 of the Harvard Business School. Garvin found that most definitions of quality were either transcendent, product-based, user- based, manufacturing-based, or value-based. What does each of these terms mean?
Transcendent: Quality is something that is intuitively understood but nearly impossible to communicate, such as beauty or love.
Product-based: Quality is found in the components and attributes of a product. User-based: If the customer is satisfied, the product has good quality.
2 Garvin, D., “What Does ‘Product Quality’ Really Mean?” Sloan Management Review (Fall 1984): 25–43.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 1-1 What’s in an Airport? 1
All airports serve the same purpose: a place for planes to land and take off and for passengers to board and unload. Yet, with this similar purpose, Asian airports rank among the best in the world and U.S. airports lag behind. In the annual Airport Service Quality Survey, four of the five top spots were awarded to airports in Asia. The difference in U.S. and Asian quality rankings lies within the perception of the passengers. In the United States, airports are perceived as public facilities, a means to an end. In Asia, airports are service-oriented businesses. The ex-COO of Seoul’s airport remarked, “Our focus is to make airports convenient, attractive, and pleasant, even at fairly high costs.” This difference in passenger perception drives quality standards.
The commitment to service and quality begins before a new Asian airports opens. Task forces benchmark some of the world’s best airports and management spends to provide amenities. Once the airport is operating, this process continues as opportunities for enhancing service are identified and the necessary expenditures for upgrades are made. These efforts to provide a world class airport have paid off, and in the case of Seoul, the airport’s success has benefited multiple industries.
Customer perception can influence quality. As firms compete on quality, customers win. As U.S. passengers travel abroad, their perception of what an airport can and should be changes. These changes will be felt at home.
1 Based on Moon, I., “Why Asia Has the World’s Best Airports,” Business Week , 3 March 2009: 18.
4 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Manufacturing-based: If the product conforms to design specifications, it has good quality. Value-based: If the product is perceived as providing good value for the price, it has good quality.
Using these five definitions of quality, Garvin developed a list of eight quality dimensions (see Table 1-1 ). These dimensions describe product quality specifically in the following paragraphs.
Performance refers to the efficiency with which a product achieves its intended purpose. This might be the return on a mutual fund investment, the fuel efficiency of an automobile, or the acoustic range of a pair of stereo speakers. Generally, better performance is synonymous with better quality.
Features are attributes of a product that supplement the product’s basic performance. These include many of the “bells and whistles” contained in products. A visit to any television or computer retail store will reveal that features, such as surround sound, HDTV capability, 3-D, and size, are powerful marketing tools for which customers will pay a premium. A full-line tele- vision retail store may carry televisions priced from $200 to $12,000. This range represents a 6,000% price premium for additional features!
Reliability refers to the propensity for a product to perform consistently over its useful design life. A subfield in quality management has emerged, called reliability management , based on the application of probability theory to quality. A product is considered reliable if the chance that it will fail during its designed life is very low. For example, if a refrigerator has a 2% chance of failure in a useful life of 10 years, we say that it is 98% reliable.
Conformance is perhaps the most traditional dimension of quality. When a product is designed, certain numeric dimensions for the product’s performance are established, such as capacity, speed, size, durability, or the like. These numeric product dimensions are referred to as specifications. The number of ounces of pulp allowed in a half-gallon container of “pulp-free” orange juice is one example. Specifications typically are allowed to vary a small amount called tolerance. If a particular dimension of a product is within the allowable range of tolerance of the specification, it conforms.
The advantage of the conformance definition of quality for products is that it is easily quantified. However, it is often difficult for a service to conform to numeric specifications. For example, imagine trying to measure the quality of a counselor’s work versus that of a carmaker. Because counseling is intangible, it is almost impossible to measure.
Durability is the degree to which a product tolerates stress or trauma without failing. An example of a product that is not very durable is a lightbulb. Lightbulbs are damaged easily and cannot be repaired. In contrast, a trash can is a very durable product that can be subjected to much wear and tear.
TABLE 1-1 Garvin’s Product Quality Dimensions Performance Features Reliability Conformance Durability Serviceability Aesthetics Perceived quality
Adapted from Garvin, D., “What Does ‘Product Quality’ Really Mean?” MIT Sloan Management Review , Fall 1984, by permission of publisher. Copyright 1984 by Sloan Management Association. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 5
TABLE 1-2 PZ&B’s Service Quality Dimensions Tangibles Service reliability Responsiveness Assurance Empathy
Adapted from Parasuraman, A., Zeithamel, V., and Berry, L., “A Conceptual Model of Service Quality” (Report No. 84–106), Marketing Science Institute, 1984.
Serviceability is the ease of repair for a product. A product is very serviceable if it can be repaired easily and cheaply. Many products require service by a technician, such as the techni- cian who repairs your personal computer. If this service is rapid, courteous, easy to acquire, and competent, then the product generally is considered to have good serviceability. Note that differ- ent dimensions of quality are not mutually exclusive.
Aesthetics are subjective sensory characteristics such as taste, feel, sound, look, and smell. Although vinyl interiors in automobiles require less maintenance, are less expensive, and are more durable, leather interiors generally are considered more aesthetically pleasing. We measure aesthetic quality as the degree to which product attributes are matched to consumer preferences.
Perceived quality is based on customer opinion. As we said in the beginning of this chap- ter, quality is as the customer perceives it. Customers imbue products and services with their understanding of their goodness. This is perceived quality. We can witness an example of the effect of perceived quality every year in college football polls that rank teams. In many cases, the rankings are based on past records, team recognition, tradition of the university, and other factors that are generally poor indicators of team quality on a given Saturday. In the same way that these factors affect sportswriters’ perceptions, factors such as brand image, brand recognition, amount of advertising, and word of mouth can affect consumers’ perceptions of quality.
The Garvin list of quality dimensions, although it is the most widely cited and used, is not exhaustive. Other authors have proposed lists of additional quality measures, such as safety. Carol King 3 identified dimensions of service quality such as responsiveness, competence, access, courtesy, communication, credibility, security , and understanding. Allowed time, you probably could think of additional dimensions as well.
Service Quality Dimensions
Service quality is even more difficult to define than product quality. Although services and pro- duction share many attributes, services have more diverse quality attributes than products. This often results from wide variation created by high customer involvement. For example, the con- sumer of a fountain pen probably will not care that the factory worker producing the pen was in a foul mood (as long as the quality of the pen is good). However, excellent food served in a res- taurant generally will not suffice if the server is in a foul mood. In addition, a consumer probably will not consider a pen poor quality if he or she is in a bad mood when using the pen. However, food and service in a restaurant could be excellent and still be perceived poorly if the patron is feeling bad.
Parasuraman, Zeithamel, and Berry (PZ&B), three marketing professors from Texas A&M University, published a widely recognized set of service quality dimensions. These dimensions have been used in many service firms to measure quality performance. The PZ&B dimensions are defined here (see Table 1-2 ).
3 King, C., “A Framework for a Service Quality Assurance System,” Quality Progress 20, 9 (1987): 27–32.
6 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Tangibles include the physical appearance of the service facility, the equipment, the per- sonnel, and the communication materials. For example, a hotel with yellowed linens will be rated low for quality. Hair salons catering to an elite clientele might invest in ambient lighting and employ only well-dressed hairstylists. That the hairstylist is dressed well does not affect the ser- vice being provided; however, clients believe that their hair will be better styled by someone who is dressed stylishly.
Service reliability differs from product reliability in that it relates to the ability of the ser- vice provider to perform the promised service dependably and accurately. For example, a firm might hire a consultant based on reputation alone. If the consultant delivers what the customer wants, then the customer will be satisfied and pay the consultancy fee. If the consultant delivers something other than what the customer expects, the customer will not pay the consultancy fee.
Responsiveness is the willingness of the service provider to be helpful and prompt in pro- viding service. When you last called your bank for service, how long did it take for a response? Were your problems taken care of quickly, or did you have to wait while you listened to “elevator music” for an hour? Does your service provider always respond to you within three rings of the phone—without forwarding your call to another location?
Assurance refers to the knowledge and courtesy of employees and their ability to inspire trust and confidence. If you needed heart surgery, you probably would not opt for a doctor who appeared forgetful and disorganized during an office consultation. Rather, you would want assur- ance that the doctor is competent.
Finally, consumers of services desire empathy from the service provider. In other words, the customer desires caring, individualized attention from the service firm. A maxim in the res- taurant industry is that “if you are in it for the money, you probably won’t survive.” A restaurant where the employees are constantly focused on efficiency will not give the customers the feeling that their needs are important. Therefore, no empathy will be shared, and restaurant employees will not adequately provide service that will make customers want to return again and again.
Just as there are many quality dimensions relating to production, there are several other dimensions of service quality, such as availability, professionalism, timeliness, completeness , and pleasantness. Note that service design strives to address these different service dimensions simultaneously. It is not sufficient for a services firm to provide only empathy if responsiveness and service reliability are inadequate.
Why Does It Matter That Different Definitions of Quality Exist?
One problem with having multiple dimensions of quality is communication. It is difficult to devise a coherent strategic plan relating to quality when communication is imprecise. One important attribute of a strategic plan is functional alignment or consistency. If different depart- ments in a company understand quality differently, then the strategic plan will not be in align- ment. Understanding that different definitions and dimensions of quality exist allows measures to be taken to provide a good basis for communication and planning. By sharing a common definition of quality, each department within a company can work toward a common goal. In addition, understanding the multiple dimensions of quality desired by consumers can lead to improved product and service design. Hewlett-Packard Corporation, a producer of laser print- ers, understands this concept very well. Early in their quality journey, Hewlett-Packard devel- oped products that consistently conformed to specifications. This involved years of product design, process control, and process improvement. Once the printers conformed to specifica- tions, the company emphasized reliability. After the printers were found to be reliable, the com- pany was able to improve the aesthetics of their printers. After years of working on these different quality dimensions, Hewlett-Packard embarked on a “customer one-on-one” program that emphasized customer interaction with production workers. In this program, Hewlett-Packard production workers take time to call customers on the phone to assess and improve the “relation- ship” that the customer has with a printer.
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 7
DIFFERING FUNCTIONAL PERSPECTIVES ON QUALITY
One of the important determinants of how we perceive quality is the functional role we fulfill organizationally. Just as artists and scientists process information differently, so do employees who perform different functions in an organization.
Differences between artists and scientists are only one instance of different perspectives created by functional differences. Accountants are interested in information for accounting and tax purposes, operations people want information for process control and scheduling, finance people need information to manage cash, and marketing needs information to see if sales quotas are being met.
The organic view of the organization 4 sees the whole as the sum of different parts uniting to achieve an end. The heart and the liver do not perform the same function in a body, but they each perform processes that are necessary for survival of the whole. Just as the body is subject to breakdown when different parts do not perform properly, so are organizations. Unfortunately, firms do not have the magnificent communication network (i.e., the central nervous system) to coordinate activities that human bodies have. For this reason, firms must constantly improve their communication. Recognizing fundamental differences between how different functions view quality is an important first step in understanding and resolving problems associated with mismatches of quality perceptions within organizations.
As organizational processes become more cross-functional, many of these communica- tions issues will find resolution. However, experience with cross-functional teams has been dif- ficult for many firms because of poor communication skills among team members. Therefore, it is expected that cognitive differences between different functions will continue to be a major problem that firms must overcome.
This section of the chapter views quality management from the perspectives of several dif- ferent functions. Many of the topics discussed in this chapter are presented in concept only. More in-depth discussions of these topics appear in later chapters. This chapter is designed to lay out the field of quality management from an interdisciplinary, integrative perspective. The functions discussed here include supply chain management, engineering, operations, strategic manage- ment, marketing, finance/accounting, and human resources.
A Supply Chain Perspective
Supply chain management grew out of the concept of the value chain. The value chain includes inbound logistics, core processes, and outbound logistics. Other functions, such as human resources, information systems, and purchasing, support these core processes. Operations, pur- chasing, logistics, and marketing are the primary participants in the supply chain. In recent years, supply chain management has moved to the forefront in importance. This is largely due to the opportunity for cost savings along with quality and service improvement. There are many impor- tant quality-related activities that are part of supply chain management. We discuss these sepa- rately as upstream activities, core processes, and downstream activities.
Upstream activities include all of those activities involving interaction with suppliers. Sup- plier qualification involves evaluating supplier performance to determine whether or not they are worthy providers. This often requires grading suppliers using established criteria, such as conformance rates, cost levels, and delivery reliability. Many times, supplier filters are used, such as ISO 9000:2008, an international standard. This means that you can filter suppliers based on whether or not they are ISO 9000:2008 registered. Supplier development activities include evaluating, training, and implementing systems with suppliers. This often includes the use of electronic data interchange (EDI) to link customer purchasing systems to supplier enterprise resource planning systems. Acceptance sampling may be needed to determine whether supplier
4 Foster, S. T., Howard, L., and Shannon, P., “The Role of Quality Tools in Improving Satisfaction with Government,” Quality Management Journal 9, 3 (2002): 20–31.
8 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
products meet requirements. International sourcing is an important supply chain issue with many companies—especially in China. This is discussed in more depth in Chapter 3 .
Core process activities include traditional process improvement as well as value stream mapping. This requires flowcharting processes to determine where customer value is created as well as identifying non-value-added process steps. Value stream mapping also involves analyz- ing processes from a systems perspective such that upstream and downstream effects of core process changes can be evaluated. Six Sigma is a procedure for implementing quality improve- ment analysis to reduce costs and improve product, service, and process design. Six Sigma black belts become supply chain quality consultants who can lead value-adding improvements. The steps in Six Sigma include define, measure, analyze, improve, and control (DMAIC) –related activities. A major tool used in Six Sigma is the design of experiments (DOE).
Downstream activities include shipping and logistics, customer support, and focusing on delivery reliability. Supply chain management has also focused more attention on after-sale service.
An Engineering Perspective
Engineering is an applied science. As such, engineers are interested in applying mathematical problem-solving skills and models to the problems of business and industry. One outgrowth of this approach is the field of operations research. For example, in the early twentieth century, Sir R. A. Fisher and other researchers in England expanded the field of mathematical statistics to problems related to variation experienced in the production area.
Two of the major emphases in engineering are the areas of product design and process design. Product design engineering involves all those activities associated with developing a product from concept development to final design and implementation. Figure 1-1 demonstrates the six steps in the engineering life cycle for the design of products. The product design process
Idea Generation
Preliminary Design
Prototype Development
Prototype Iterations
Final Definition
Product Design and Evaluation
Implementation
FIGURE 1-1 Design Life Cycle
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 9
results in a final design, possibly generated using a computer-aided design (CAD) system. Prod- uct design is the key because quality is assured at the design stage.
Product and process design are fields of engineering that have experienced major changes in recent years. Whereas traditionally they were considered separate and in most cases sequential activities, concurrent engineering has resulted in the simultaneous performance of these activi- ties. Typically, concurrent engineering involves the formation of cross-functional teams. This allows engineers and managers of differing disciplines to work together simultaneously in devel- oping product and process designs. The result of concurrent design has been improved quality and faster speed to market for new products.
Engineers also have applied statistical thinking to the problem of reliability. As already discussed, reliability management is concerned with assessing and reducing the propensity of a product to fail. Reliability engineers use probability theory to determine the rate of failure a product will experience over its useful life. Life testing is a facet of reliability engineering that determines whether a product will fail under controlled conditions during a specified life. Also, reliability engineers are interested in knowing if failure of certain product components will result in failure of the overall product. If a component has a relatively high probability for failure that will affect the overall function of a product, then redundancy is applied so that a backup system can take over for the failed primary system. Many redundant systems are used on the NASA space shuttle in the case of primary system breakdown. After all, if a hard drive crashes in space, it is not easy to find a replacement close by.
Another engineering-related contribution to quality management is statistical process control (SPC), which is concerned with monitoring process capability and process stability. If a process is capable, it will consistently produce products that meet specification. If a process is stable, it will only exhibit random or common cause variation instead of nonrandom special cause variation. This type of variation is often acceptable, if kept within limits. The control process as specified by Walter Shewhart in his book Statistical Method from the Viewpoint of Quality Control (1939) is shown in Figure 1-2 . This is the process underlying SPC. A hypothesis is specified that the process meets a given specification, data about the process are gathered, and a hypothesis test is performed to see if the process is stable.
In summary, the engineering view of quality is technically oriented, focusing on statistics and technical specification that are needed to produce high-quality products.
An Operations Perspective
The operations management view of quality is rooted in the engineering approach. However, operations management has grown beyond the technical engineering perspective. In many ways, because of the close interplay between operations management and engineering, engineering also has extended its view of quality management.
Specify Hypothesis
Inspect Data for Consistency with Hypothesis
Produce Data by Performing an Experiment
FIGURE 1-2 Shewhart’s Control Process
10 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Operations was the first functional field of management to adopt quality as its own. Like engineers, operations managers are concerned about product and process design. However, rather than focusing on only the technical aspects of these activities, operations concentrates on the management of these activities. Initially, operations quality was focused almost entirely on SPC. Later, statistical quality control (SQC) courses became more managerial in nature, including teachings by W. E. Deming, an important quality expert, and others. Today, operations manage- ment has developed into an integrative field combining concepts from engineering, operations research, organizational theory, organizational behavior, and strategic management to address quality problems.
Operations management (OM) uses the systems view that underlies modern quality manage- ment thinking (see Figure 1-3 ). The systems view involves the understanding that product quality is the result of the interactions of several variables, such as machines, labor, procedures, planning, and management. OM focuses on the management and continual improvement of conversion processes. This systems view focuses on interactions between the various components (i.e., people, policies, machines, processes, and products) that combine to produce a product or service. The systems view also focuses management on the system as the cause of quality problems.
In summary, the historically internalized view of operations managers has become exter- nalized. Still, the customer needs to become more central in the thinking of many operations managers who still tend to be too product focused. This will occur as operations management becomes more service focused. One common complaint among critics of operations manage- ment is that too much credence is given to fads of the day rather than honestly improving the fundamentals of the business. To the field of operations management’s benefit, it is OM that has elevated quality management as a key area of business study.
A Strategic Management Perspective
Strategy refers to the planning processes used by an organization to achieve a set of long-term goals. The keys here are planning processes and a long-term orientation. Firms establish a planned course of action to attain their objectives. Further, this planned course of action must be cohesive and coherent in terms of goals, policies, plans, and sequencing to achieve quality improvement.
When the concept first arose, practitioners treated quality-related strategic planning as if it was a separate exercise from strategic planning. However, we soon realized that quality manage- ment, to become pervasive in a firm, needed to be included in all the firm’s business processes, including strategic planning. Thus quality-related goals, tactics, and strategies are becoming more a part of the strategic planning process instead of a separate entity.
Improving Impacting
Integrating
Inputs ConversionProcess Outputs Customer
Process Control
Customer Feedback
FIGURE 1-3 The Conversion System Model of Operations Management
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 11
Company strategies are rooted in the building blocks of mission and core values. An orga- nization’s mission states why the organization exists. The core values of an organization refer to guiding operating principles that simplify decision making in that organization. Therefore, if a company states “sustainability” as a core value, it will institute policies leading to practices that favor a clean environment. Companies go to great extents to establish, communicate, and rein- force a sense of mission and values in their organizations because mission and values strongly influence organizational culture. Organizational culture is often seen as a major determinant (and sometimes roadblock) to the successful implementation of quality improvement.
The quality movement has greatly influenced strategy process in recent years. Strategy process refers to the steps an organization uses in the development of its strategic plans. Although we discuss this in greater depth in Chapter 4 , strategic planning processes often involve a com- prehensive environmental analysis that includes the remote, operating, and external environ- ments that influence quality performance.
Figure 1-4 shows a generic strategic planning process and its components. Based on the analysis of mission, vision, and goals, strategic options and business-level and functional-level strategies are developed.
Firm Mission, Vision,
and Goals
Strategic Alignment between
Structure and Goals
Change Management
Strategic Options
Business-Level Strategy
Corporate-Level Strategy
Operational Subplans
External Analysis
Internal Analysis
Organizational Design
Organizational Reward Systems
FIGURE 1-4 A Generic Strategic Planning Process
12 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Development of functional-level strategies helps improve the coherence and alignment of strategic plans within an organization. Alignment refers to consistency between different opera- tional subplans and the overall strategic plan. For example, if an organization pursues a quality emphasis from a strategic standpoint, then the company should pursue supply chain, human resources, budgetary, or marketing courses of action that support a quality emphasis.
The ultimate goal of strategic quality planning is to aid an organization to achieve sustain- able competitive advantage. In many markets, such as the auto industry, it is becoming difficult to sustain a competitive advantage based on quality alone. By the late 1970s and into the 1980s, Japanese cars were perceived as superior. Recently, Japanese automakers are having a difficult time differentiating themselves based on quality alone. This is also true in many other markets where quality is an order qualifier. In some markets, such as semiconductors, where yield rates are low, competitive advantage in cost can be gained by a quality conformance strategy. Thereby, the quality–cost combination can be used as an order winner.
As quality has become integral to competitiveness, strategic planning for quality has become more important. Research shows that quality is still the major competitive concern of CEOs. Quality Highlight 1-1 shows how General Electric has made quality a key strategic imperative. This Highlight also demonstrates the interrelatedness among strategy, finance, and operations in achieving strategic objectives.
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 1-1 Quality Strategy at GE
www.GE.com
Although GE has been one of the world’s most profitable companies, its management nevertheless faces a vexing problem: What can they possibly do to sustain the performance levels they attained under Jack Welch? Many other executives are worrying about that, too. Investors are also wondering as earnings growth has slowed.
To keep GE ahead, managers have devised an array of corporate strategies. They put exception- ally heavy reliance on the quality control program that far outstrips run-of-the-mill efforts, shifting GE’s sales emphasis from manufacturing products to supplying services, pushing profitable niche acquisi- tions, and rapidly expanding abroad.
The quality control program was “a mammoth undertaking; I mean, I can’t even begin to describe the size of this undertaking,” stated Welch. A sure sign of top management’s determination was that 40% of GE executive bonuses, which ran as high as $1 million, depended on implementation of the program. Previously, bonuses were only based on profit and cash flow.
It could significantly bolster profits, some security analysts say, only if it may eliminate costly, embarrassing blunders. One of GE’s main mantras for growth has been new-product development. But some GE products ran into spectacular design and manufacturing snafus.
• GE’s locomotive unit in Erie, Pennsylvania, built motors for new rail cars that were put into ser- vice on a major transit line in Montreal. But in heavy snows the electric motors shorted out and broke down, stranding 8,000 commuters. After GE discovered it had insulated the motors inade- quately and had misdesigned auxiliary power systems, the entire transit line was shut down for 19 days while the company fixed the problem.
• A GE gas turbine sold to utility power plants around the world began cracking because of faulty design. GE’s cost of fixing the huge turbines climbed from $150 million to $200 million, the company says.
• Just four months before a new GE jet engine was to power Boeing planes for British Airways, the engine failed in a test and had to be redesigned. The plane’s delivery was seven weeks late. In addition, a Federal Aviation Administration report cited sloppy GE manufacturing as a reason for delaying permission for extended flights by the plane over water. Permission was granted a year later than expected.
(continued)
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 13
GE denied that such problems forced the company to adopt its new quality program. “We are not in trouble,” they said, citing the robust profits. But they conceded that “the time wasted, the money wasted, in field fixes, in quality problems, in working things out, across corporate America, across the world, is enormous.”
GE’s quality program, which was borrowed from Motorola, Inc., involves training “Black Belts” for four months in statistical and other quality-enhancing measures. The Black Belts then spend full time roaming GE plants and setting up quality improvement projects. The program is producing a vari- ety of benefits. “Your customers are happy with you, you are not firefighting, you are not running in a reactive mode.”
A Marketing Perspective
Traditionally, the term marketing has referred to activities involved with directing the flows of products and services from the producer to the consumer. More recently, in a trend known as customer relationship management, marketing has directed its attention toward satisfying the customer and delivering value to the customer.
More and more companies are basing sales commissions on perceptual measures of cus- tomer satisfaction rather than merely volume of sales. The reasons for this are obvious. Studies show that the value of the loyal customer is much greater than an individual transaction. For example, the profit on a single pizza might be $5, whereas the same customer, if he or she orders one pizza per month over 10 years, is worth $600. This figure becomes $3,600 if the satisfied customer influences five friends to buy one pizza a month over 10 years. If all customers are satis- fied, sales increase exponentially! Therefore, more firms are focusing on relationship manage- ment. This increases the importance of high levels of customer service and after-sales support.
The marketer focuses on the perceived quality of products and services. As opposed to the engineering-based conformance definition of quality, perceived quality means that quality is as the customer views it. Therefore, marketing efforts are often focused on managing quality perceptions.
The primary marketing tools for influencing customer perceptions of quality are price and advertising. However, these are imperfect mechanisms for influencing perceptions of quality. Toothpaste selling for four dollars is not necessarily better than toothpaste costing three dollars. The link between price and quality could be significant if all products were priced based on cost of materials and production only. However, not all products are priced this way.
Advertising and quality levels might be related. However, the relationship is not as straight- forward as one would hope. Tellis and Johnson 5 proposed a contingency theory of advertising and quality saying that this relationship is “more likely when product quality is produced at lower cost and consumers rely less on advertising for their information.” Their research showed that the posi- tive effects of quality also were more pronounced later in the life cycle of a product. In these later stages, products are more likely to be standardized. This would give consumers more time to become informed about products and give firms more time to standardize and control costs.
Marketing is also concerned about systems. The marketing system involves the interac- tions between the producing organization, the intermediary, and the final consumer (see Figure 1-5 ). Because of this relationship, it is often very difficult for firms and organizations to agree on who the customer is.
Another important contribution of the marketing perspective has been the focus on service at the time of the transaction and after-sales support.
One of the ways marketing has helped improve product and service quality has been to interact closely with engineering and operations in product design. The role of marketing in design has been to bring the voice of the customer 6 into the design process.
5 Tellis, G., and Johnson, J., “The Value of Quality,” Marketing Science 26, 6 (2007): 758–773. 6 Griffin, A., and Hauser, J., “The Voice of the Customer,” Marketing Science 12, 1 (1993): 1–26.
14 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Customer service surveys are important tools for assessing the multiple dimensions of quality. Surveys provide a means for developing multidimensional perceptual measures of quality.
In short, the marketing perspective on quality is unique because the customer is the focus of marketing-related quality improvement. In trying to satisfy customer needs, marketing often wants to develop specialized products for different customers to perfectly satisfy customer needs. This can make life more difficult for producers because operations wants to standardize products to reduce processing complexity. Often, quality strategies result in a compromise between these two polar positions.
A Financial Perspective
One of the most commonly asked questions about quality management is “will it pay us financial benefits?” The answer to this question is an unqualified “maybe.” As we read about in Quality Highlight 1-1 , G.E. management was pursuing quality improvement as a means of reducing waste and increasing profitability. Implemented correctly, improved quality reduces waste and can lead to reduced cost and improved profitability. However, these returns tend to be long term rather than short term. W. E. Deming, the influential quality expert, made the first theoretical attempt to link quality improvement to financial results through the “Deming value chain.” In his value chain (see Figure 1-6 ), Deming linked quality improvement to reduction in defects and improved organizational performance. He also stressed quality as a way to increase employment.
The finance function is primarily interested in the relationships between the risks of invest- ments and the potential rewards resulting from those investments. The goal of finance is to max- imize return for a given level of risk. A comptroller for a large U.S. corporation stated this as “helping the customer to decide where to buy assets.” In this sense, this comptroller viewed his primary customers as the stockholders (i.e., owners) of the corporation.
Communication relating to quality might be made more difficult for comptrollers and treasurers because accounting is the primary language of the financial function. Joseph Juran, another influential quality expert, referred to this communication problem when he stated that “ the language of management is money. ” One way to translate quality concerns is to identify and measure the costs of quality. These quality-related costs can be in lost sales because of a poor reputation for reliability. Also, training and inspection cost money. Therefore, trade-off and break-even analyses can be performed using the various costs of quality. Often what is dis- covered is that although improving quality seems expensive, the savings from reducing scrap, defects, and rework results in favorable returns on investment. This is why companies such as Motorola, Westinghouse, and GE are willing to pay millions of dollars to pursue quality.
However, the relationship between quality improvement and financial success is con- founded by several intervening variables. For example, a firm investing a great deal of effort and money to establish a quality program for a product in the decline stage of the product life cycle may not receive the expected benefits. Top management involvement that is limited to lip service often results in great expenditure, and great effort, but eventually, failure. The pursuit of quality does not safeguard a company against bad management.
Organization
IntermediaryOffering Payment
Offering Payment
Offering Payment
Customer
FIGURE 1-5 A Marketing System
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 15
Another concept that affects financial officers’ perceptions of quality improvement is the law of diminishing marginal returns. According to this law, there is a point at which invest- ment in quality improvement will become uneconomical. Figure 1-7 shows a quadratic eco- nomic quality level model. According to this model, the pursuit of higher levels of quality will result in higher expenditures. Hence to invest beyond the minimum cost level will result in non- economic decisions. This view is at odds with the ethic of continual improvement. Such debate has resulted in much controversy in the quality field. Although we save resolution of these issues
Total Quality Costs = Sum of Losses and Costs
Losses Due to Poor Quality
Optimum Quality Level
Costs of Improving Quality
Cost
Quality
Minimum Cost
FIGURE 1-7 Basic Economic Quality Level Model
Improve Quality
Productivity Improves
Capture the Market
Stay in Business
Provide Jobs and
More Jobs
Cost Decrease (less rework,
fewer mistakes, fewer delays,
snags, better use of machine time and materials)
FIGURE 1-6 The Deming Value Chain Source: Adapted from Deming, W. E. Out of the Crisis (Boston: MIT/ CAES, 1986).
16 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
for Chapter 4 , it should be emphasized that quality evangelizers who claim that the pursuit of quality is eternal and that any investment in quality is justified will be met with skepticism by financial officers trained in economics.
In summary, the financial perspective on quality relies more on quantified, measurable, results-oriented thinking. This has influenced quality thinking as quality professionals have had to seek approval for funding quality improvement efforts. If the objective of a firm is to return value to its shareholders, then the financial view toward quality must be well understood and used.
The Human Resources Perspective
Human resources (HR) managers are involved in enabling the workforce to develop and use its full potential to meet the company’s objectives. Understanding the HR perspective on quality is essential because it is impossible to implement quality without the commitment and action of employees. Although leadership is an important antecedent to successful quality efforts, the involvement and participation of employees is just as key. After all, it is the rank and file that implements quality throughout the organization.
Of particular interest to HR managers is employee empowerment. Empowering employ- ees involves moving decision making to the lowest level possible in the organization. For exam- ple, empowerment can involve something fairly minor, such as allowing employees to replace broken or worn-out tools without management approval. In more spectacular instances, empow- erment has resulted in the elimination of management as employees do their own scheduling, design, and performance of work.
The topic of empowerment is closely related to organizational design. HR managers are involved in many aspects of organizational design, such as the design of reward systems, pay systems, organizational structure, compensation, training mechanisms, and employee grievance arbitration.
HR balances the needs of the employee and the organization by advocating the employee to management and advocating the company’s needs to employees. Quality management flour- ishes where the workers’ and the company’s needs are closely aligned. When needs are aligned, actions that are good for the company are also good for the employee.
Job analysis is a major function of HR. 7 Job analysis involves collecting detailed informa- tion about a particular job. This information includes tasks, skills, abilities, and knowledge requirements that relate to certain jobs. The information then defines a job description that is used in setting pay levels. Job analysis sometimes has limited the ability of organizations to adapt to the flexibility needed for quality management. Important HR functions are recruitment and hiring of employees. A process called selection is employed. Traditionally, selection involved finding workers who have the technical preparation to perform the tasks associated with a job. Fast learners are becoming more valued by today’s organizations. Of course, this does not mean that nuclear engineers will be replaced by former romance languages majors. However, it could mean that groups of engineers might report directly to a romance languages expert.
HR departments typically administer and oversee performance appraisal and evaluation. Traditionally, these evaluations involved face-to-face reporting sessions with employees and supervisors. Although some critics, such as Deming, have found this system ineffective, many companies believe performance evaluations are a key method for motivating employees. One quality-related approach to improving the process of performance evaluation is the 360-degree evaluation, in which an employee’s peers, supervisors, and subordinates are involved in eval- uating the worker’s performance. The College of Business at the University of North Carolina at Greensboro performs 360-degree teaching evaluations for its faculty. Each semester, stu- dents fill out teaching evaluations. Fellow faculty members attend each other’s classes and
7 Morgeson, F., and Campion, M., “Accuracy in Job Analysis,” Journal of Organizational Behaviour, 21, 7 (2000): 819–827.
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 17
read each other’s student evaluations every semester. Then, a meeting is held at which the fac- ulty evaluates and critiques each other’s teaching performance. In this setting, the focus is on constructive criticism. Finally, the professor’s supervisor uses the student and peer input to complete an annual evaluation. This approach seems to be effective in improving teaching performance.
In summary, the focus of quality management is to manage properly the interactions among people, technology, inputs, processes, and systems to provide outstanding products and services to customers. HR managers have been very active in advocating quality approaches to improve organizational performance. Therefore, an HR focus on human performance provides important insights to quality thinking.
Is Quality Management Its Own Functional Discipline?
A quick read of the Wall Street Journal in any given week will reveal job openings for quality managers and engineers. The companies that run these ads seek people who, like you, are com- mitted to and interested in quality management. However, the roles of these departments and specialists are changing in the new century of quality.
Historically, the quality management department performed a policing function in the firm. Quality managers were responsible for quality conformance and spent their time ferret- ing out causes of defects. However, in the late 1950s, Armand Feigenbaum, a well-known quality consultant who is discussed in Chapter 2 , and others showed the limitations of this approach. Thus the movement began toward the total involvement of employees, spawning total quality management (TQM). TQM was the 1980s term to describe quality management programs.
With total involvement, the role of the quality department moved from a technical inspec- tion role to a supportive training and coaching role. As a manager or a quality specialist, you will be asked to either arrange or perform quality-related training. Thus the abilities to conduct effec- tive training and to facilitate teams are important tools for the quality professional.
Is quality management its own discipline? Yes and no. Consultants, quality engineers, Six Sigma black belts, trainers, coaches, and managers are still needed. Therefore, the demand for quality specialists persists. However, because the eventual goal is to completely immerse the organization in quality thinking and commitment, the need for the specialist decreases with time. Therefore, a strong knowledge of quality is best coupled with technical expertise in other areas such as materials management, supply chain management, finance, accounting, operations man- agement, HR management, strategy, industrial engineering, or myriad other disciplines. Indeed, the eventual goal of many companies is to completely distribute the quality management func- tion throughout the firm.
In this section of the chapter we have discussed many different functional perspectives toward quality. Skilled management must recognize that these functional differences exist and provide communication in a way that completely addresses the different perspectives. Recogni- tion that these multiple dimensions exist improves understanding among these disparate coali- tions and helps all members of an organization to work toward a common goal.
THE THREE SPHERES OF QUALITY
One way to conceptualize the field of quality management is known as the three spheres of quality. These spheres are quality control, quality assurance, and quality management, and their functions overlap as seen in Figure 1-8 .
The first sphere is quality control. The control process is based on the scientific method, which includes the phases of analysis, relation, and generalization. In the analysis phase, a pro- cess is broken into its fundamental pieces. Relation involves understanding the relationships between the parts. Finally, generalization involves perceiving how interrelationships apply to
18 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
the larger phenomenon of quality being studied. Activities relating to quality control include the following:
• Monitoring process capability and stability • Measuring process performance • Reducing process variability • Optimizing processes to nominal measures • Performing acceptance sampling • Developing and maintaining control charts
Quality assurance refers to activities associated with guaranteeing the quality of a prod- uct or service. Often, these activities are design-related. This view of quality states that quality control is reactive rather than proactive by detecting quality problems after they occur. Given this, the best way to ensure quality is in the design of products, services, and processes. Quality assurance activities include tasks such as
• Failure mode and effects analysis • Concurrent engineering • Experimental design • Process improvement • Design team formation and management • Off-line experimentation • Reliability/durability product testing
The management processes that overarch and tie together the control and assurance activities make up quality management. See Quality Highlight 1-2 for an example of a company with effec- tive quality management. The integrative view of quality management supports the idea that quality is the responsibility of all management, not just quality managers. For this reason, a number of managers, supervisors, and employees are involved in quality management activities such as
• Planning for quality improvement • Creating a quality organizational culture • Providing leadership and support • Providing training and retraining • Designing an organizational system that reinforces quality ideals • Providing employee recognition • Facilitating organizational communication
Quality Management
Quality Assurance
Quality Control
FIGURE 1-8 Three Spheres of Quality
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 19
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 1-2 Federal Express Corporation 8
www.fedex.com
Federal Express at a Glance Conceived by Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Frederick W. Smith, Federal Express began opera- tions in 1973. At that time, a fleet of eight small aircraft was sufficient to handle demand. The firm’s cargo fleet is now the world’s largest at more than 675.
FedEx’s “People–Service–Profit” philosophy guides management policies and actions. The com- pany has a well-developed and thoroughly deployed management evaluation system called SFA (survey/ feedback/action) that involves a survey of employees, analysis of each group’s results by the work group’s manager, and a discussion between the manager and the work group to develop written action plans for the manager to improve and become more effective. Data from the SFA process are aggregated at all levels in the organization for use in policy making.
Training of frontline personnel is a responsibility of managers, and “recurrency training” is a widely used instrument for improvement. Consistently included in listings of the best U.S. companies to work for, FedEx has a “no-layoff” philosophy, and its “guaranteed fair treatment procedure” for handling employee grievances is used as a model by firms in many industries. Frontline employees can participate in a program to qualify themselves for management positions. In addition, Federal Express has a well- developed recognition program for team and individual contributions to company performance.
Service Quality Indicators To spur progress toward its ultimate goal of 100% customer satisfaction, FedEx replaced its old measure of quality performance, percentage of on-time deliveries, with a 12-component index that comprehen- sively describes how its performance is viewed by its customers. Each item in the service quality indica- tor (SQI) is weighted to reflect how significantly it affects overall customer satisfaction.
To reach its aggressive quality goals, the company has set up one cross-functional team for each service component of the SQI. A senior executive heads each team for each service component of the SQI and ensures the involvement of frontline employees, support personnel, and managers from all parts of the corporation when needed. Two of these corporate-wide teams have a network of more than 1,000 people working on improvements.
Employees are encouraged to be innovative and to make decisions that advance quality goals. FedEx provides employees with the information and technology they need to continuously improve their performance. An example is the Digitally Assisted Dispatch System (DADS), which communi- cates to some 30,000 couriers through screens in their vans. The system enables quick response to pickup and delivery dispatches and allows couriers to manage their time and routes with great efficiency.
8 This information is adapted from the Malcolm Baldrige Award “Profiles of Malcolm Baldrige Award Winners,” National Institute for Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg, MD, 2012.
Many quality-related activities can occur simultaneously within the framework of the three spheres of quality. Because these activities overlap, communication between the protagonists performing the different activities becomes key.
OTHER PERSPECTIVES ON QUALITY
Although we have discussed a variety of perspectives on quality, there are a few others.
The Value-Added Perspective on Quality
A customer-based perspective on quality that is used by services, manufacturing, and public sec- tor organizations involves the concept of value. A value-added perspective on quality involves a
20 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
subjective assessment of the efficacy of every step of the process for the customer. A value-added activity can be pinpointed by asking, “Would this activity matter to the customer?” In other words, in most cases, a value-added activity will have economic value to the customer.
Cultural Perspectives on Quality
International marketers have long noted differences in tastes and preferences between cultures and nations. For example, Mexican food sold in the United States by the major restaurant chains is very different from the food sold in Mexico. This is so because American restaurant chains have found that customers prefer the Americanized versions of these foods.
Although it is somewhat obvious that differences in tastes and preferences exist between different cultures, it is not so obvious that approaches to quality improvement may differ accord- ing to culture. However, differences do exist. For example, Japanese companies tend to stress conformity and uniformity in producing quality. This results in high consistency among Japanese products. American firms are more likely to favor empowerment approaches that reward creativ- ity and individualism. Certainly, cultures that are more class conscious or command-and-control oriented might have trouble delegating decision making to lower levels of employees.
ARRIVING AT A COMMON UNDERSTANDING OF QUALITY USING A CONTINGENCY PERSPECTIVE OF QUALITY
Businesses differ in key areas such as mission, core competence, customer attributes, target mar- kets, technology deployment, employee knowledge, management style, culture, and a myriad of other environmental variables. Contingency theory presupposes there is no theory or method for operating a business that can be applied in all instances. A coherent quality strategy will need to address these key environmental variables. For example, a company that defines part of its mission as “valuing and satisfying our customers through personalized service” likely will pur- sue a different technological approach toward its customers than a company with the mission of “applying technology to solving customer problems.” One approach implies personalized ser- vice in interacting with customers, whereas the second company focuses on electronic data inter- change interfaces with the customer. Both companies are focused on satisfying the customer. The difference is that they pursue different paths and strategies to achieve customer service.
The contingency approach to quality also helps settle the different perceptions concerning the definition of quality. By adopting a contingency philosophy, we find that the definitions and dimensions of quality applied within organizations will, and should, vary. The definitions of qual- ity used by the Department of Agriculture, Ford Motor Company, and the University of Colorado at Boulder will not be the same. Different definitions of quality also might exist within an organi- zation, even though their quality definitions should be consistent. In an organization that adopts the contingency approach, the dimensions of quality will depend on the environment in which the company operates. This approach provides useful flexibility to managers in pursuing quality.
Summary There are many different perspectives on quality management. We found that customers and producers viewed quality differently. A focus on production and a focus on services provide two very different perspectives on quality.
There is even a great deal of disagreement about an appropriate definition of quality. A contingency perspective on quality shows that different definitions of quality are appropriate for different organizations.
The functional perspectives on quality vary greatly. As we understand these different func- tional perspectives, we form the basis for alignment in strategies and improvement in quality communication.
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 21
The fundamental areas of quality control, quality assurance, and quality management within the field of quality focus us on different aspects of quality. By designing plans and sys- tems in each of these areas simultaneously, we develop a robust system of quality improvement that will set the stage for improved competitiveness.
Something else that becomes apparent is that quality improvement, despite the simplicity of many principles, requires a complex mix of systems design, organizational design, rewards design, and process design. As discussed throughout this text, these issues can be tied together in a strategic framework.
Key Terms Acceptance sampling Aesthetics After-sale service Assurance Common cause variation Concurrent engineering Conformance Contingency theory Core processes Core values Customer relationship
management Define, measure, analyze,
improve, and control (DMAIC)
Design of experiments (DOE)
Downstream Durability
Electronic data interchange (EDI)
Empathy Employee empowerment Features Inbound logistics International sourcing ISO 9000:2008 ISO/TS 16949 Job analysis Law of diminishing
marginal returns Life testing Manufacturing-based Mission Organic organization Organizational design Outbound logistics Perceived quality
Performance Product-based Product design
engineering QS9000 Quality assurance Quality control Quality dimensions Quality management Redundancy Reliability Responsiveness Selection Service reliability Serviceability Six Sigma Special cause variation Statistical process
control (SPC)
Strategy Supplier development Supplier filters Supplier qualification Supply chain Systems view Tangibles 360-degree evaluation Three spheres
of quality Transcendent Upstream User-based Value-added Value-based Value stream mapping
Discussion Questions 1. Why is quality a difficult term to define? How can we improve our understanding of quality? 2. Briefly discuss Garvin’s eight dimensions of quality. Is Garvin’s multidimensional approach a step
forward in improving our understanding of quality? Why or why not? 3. Is there a difference between service quality and product quality? If so, what are the implications of
these differences for a manager of a service business, such as a restaurant or a retail store? 4. Define the concept of empathy. Provide an example of empathy as a dimension of service quality. 5. Why is communication within an organization an important part of the quality improvement process? 6. Compare and contrast the engineering perspective and the marketing perspective of quality. How could
an overemphasis on the engineering perspective work to the disadvantage of a business organization? 7. Describe the “systems view” that underlies modern quality management thinking. Which of the per-
spectives of quality discussed in Chapter 1 is most closely aligned with the systems view? 8. Why is planning an important part of the quality management process? How could a firm’s quality
management initiatives be adversely affected if planning was not a part of the process? 9. Research has shown that quality is still a major competitive concern of CEOs in American corpora-
tions. Is this level of concern about quality warranted? Explain your answer. 10. Summarize Jack Welch’s perspective on the importance of quality. Do Welch’s perspectives strengthen
or weaken your confidence in the future of the General Electric Corporation? Why?
22 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
11. What is meant by the phrase cost of quality ? How can this phrase help a firm address its quality concerns? 12. What are the major differences between traditional human resource management and total quality
human resource management? How does total quality human resource management transcend tradi- tional human resource management in regard to providing an environment that is supportive of quality concerns?
13. Describe the three spheres of quality. How do these spheres provide another way to place the field of quality in perspective?
14. Discuss the value-added perspective on quality. What are the implications of this perspective for the manager of a business organization?
15. How does contingency theory inform decision making when implementing improvement efforts? 16. Should a firm consider the law of diminishing marginal returns when striving to improve quality? Why
or why not? 17. Are the perspectives of quality independent of one another? If not, describe ways in which they are
interrelated. 18. How can an understanding of the multiple dimensions of quality lead to improved product and service
designs? 19. What is your concept of quality? Is it multidimensional, or does it focus on a single dimension such as
features, reliability, or conformance? Explain your answer. 20. Describe an instance in which you and a coworker (or superior) perceived the needs of a customer very
differently. How did your differences in perception influence how each of you wanted to meet your customer’s needs?
CASES
Case 1-1 FedEx: Managing Quality Day and Night FedEx Homepage: www.fedex.com
As darkness falls across America and most businesses are locking up for the evening, one company is gearing up for a long night’s work. FedEx, the world leader in the overnight package delivery market, delivers more than 7.6 million packages per business day. Most of us know FedEx as the overnight delivery company with white delivery vans, courteous drivers, and the distinc- tive purple-and-orange FedEx logo. But behind what the casual observer sees is a very complex company with the capacity to deliver millions of packages to mil- lions of addresses around the globe overnight. Through- out the course of virtually every day and night, FedEx mobilizes its army of 280,000 employees, 80,000 vans and trucks, and 684 planes to get the job done.
For FedEx, getting the job done means managing quality 24 hours a day, with a watchful eye on customer expectations. The company’s goals are simple: 100% customer satisfaction, 100% on-time deliveries, and 100% accurate information available on every shipment to every location around the world. Although these sound like far-fetched goals, the company goes to great lengths to try to make them a reality. One of the principal
weapons that FedEx uses in pursuit of its goals is its total commitment to quality management.
Quality management at FedEx encompasses all of its operations. Although the company is the acknowledged leader in the air freight industry, a formal Quality Improvement Process (QIP) plays an integral role in all of the company’s activities. 9
At the heart of the QIP program is the philosophy that quality must be a part of the way that FedEx does business, not part of the time, but all of the time. As a result, themes such as “Do it right the first time,” “Make the first time you do it the only time anyone has to,” and “Q = P” (quality = productivity) are important parts of the FedEx culture. To reinforce these themes, the com- pany teaches its employees the 1–10–100 rule. Accord- ing to the rule, if a problem is caught and fixed as soon as it occurs, it costs a certain amount of time and money to correct. If a mistake is caught later in a different department or location, it may cost 10 times that much to repair. And if a mistake is caught by a customer, it may cost 100 times as much to fix.
9 www.fedex.com .
Chapter 1 • Differing Perspectives on Quality 23
The company also reaches out to its employees in a number of substantive ways. To do this, the company adopted its People–Service–Profit (PSP) philosophy, which articulates the view that when people are placed first, service and profit follow. An aggressive training program, competitive wages and benefits, profit sharing, bonuses, and a state-of-the-art employee grievance pro- cess are all elements of the PSP philosophy. Employee recognition also plays an important role in the compa- ny’s quality pursuits. For example, each quarter FedEx divisions select their best quality success story, which is entered in a company-wide competition. Presentations are made by the finalists before the company’s CEO, executive vice president, and other top managers. The award for being a finalist is a gold quality pin for each member of the team and the opportunity to be inter- viewed on the company’s internal television network.
The quality efforts practiced by FedEx have paid off. The company has achieved a remarkable 99.7% on-time delivery level. The list of awards the company has won are too numerous to publish. The most impressive are the Malcolm Baldrige Award, the AT&T Top Performer Award, the Quality Carrier of the Year Award presented by Merck Pharmaceuticals, and the Company of the Year Distinguished Service Award presented by the National Alliance of Busi- nesses. Will FedEx’s pursuit of quality end here? Asked if winning the Malcolm Baldrige Award signi- fies that FedEx has achieved the ultimate level of qual- ity, CEO Fred Smith said, “Receipt of the award is simply our license to practice.” Apparently, the quest for improved quality at FedEx will continue, day and night.
A number of substantive strategies have been implemented by FedEx to support its quality efforts. Quality action teams (QATs) design work processes to support new product and service offerings. A set of service quality indicators (SQI) has been established to determine the main areas of customers’ perception of service. Through careful tracking of these indica- tors, the company generates a weekly summary of how well it is meeting its customer satisfaction tar- gets. An SQI team works through problems revealed by the indicators. For example, if problems were being created by confusion in FedEx labeling instruc- tions, the team would work on improving the clarity of the instructions. Some of the company’s tactics to ensure total quality are extraordinary. For example, every night FedEx launches an empty airliner from Portland, Oregon, bound for Memphis. The jet fol- lows a course that brings it close to several FedEx ter- minal airports. The purpose of the jet is to swoop down and pick up FedEx packages if any of the com- pany’s regularly scheduled airplanes is experiencing mechanical difficulty.
Along with a focus on its external customers, FedEx’s approach to quality also involves strengthening the bonds between its internal customers, or employees. To reinforce this notion, the company asks all its employees to ask the following three questions when they interface with a coworker:
1. What do you need from me? 2. What do you do with what I give you? 3. Are there any gaps between what I give you and
what you need?
Discussion Questions
1. What is FedEx’s “common language” of quality? Is it important for a company to establish a “com- mon language” of quality? If so, why?
2. There are several different perspectives of quality, including the operations perspective, the strategic perspective, the marketing perspective, the financial
perspective, the HR perspective, and the systems perspective. Which of these perspectives are being emphasized by FedEx? Why?
3. Is FedEx’s level of emphasis on quality appropri- ate? Why or why not?
Case 1-2 Granite Rock Company: Achieving Quality through Employees Granite Rock Homepage: www.graniterock.com
Granite Rock, a California-based mining and construc- tion company, was founded in 1900, but its journey toward improved quality did not start until many decades later. The managers at Granite Rock knew that
a resulting decline in customer satisfaction was inevita- ble and responded to this self-assessment by deciding it needed to become more customer focused. At Granite Rock, this meant not only learning more about the
24 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Discussion Questions
1. Rather than focusing on human resource manage- ment (HRM) as a means of supporting its quality initiatives, Granite Rock could have chosen another area as its focal point (e.g., marketing, operations, information systems, and so on). How does a focus on HRM support a company’s quality initiatives?
2. Discuss the different components of Granite Rock’s HRM initiatives. How can each of these
components support the company’s quality efforts?
3. Discuss CEO Woolpert’s feelings about commu- nication with the customers (paragraph 2). What happens when others in the company don’t know what has been promised to the customer? How can quality management help to overcome this situation?
customer but also providing its employees the training and skills necessary to properly implement the compa- ny’s new philosophy.
At first this focus on HR management was emphasized through employee training. As explained by CEO Bruce Woolpert, you can’t have employees out telling customers “yes” unless everyone else in the company knows how to follow up on “yes.” As a result, an aggressive training program was imple- mented involving on-the-job training and classroom time for the majority of the firm’s employees. A pro- gram called IPDP (Individual Personal Development Plan) was created to help each employee take respon- sibility for his or her own training program. As the program gained momentum, remarkable things started to happen. One employee indicated that he wanted to learn to read better. As a result of that request, the company initiated a reading program that has helped a number of Granite Rock’s employees improve their reading skills. As part of the company’s effort to reduce process variability and increase product reli- ability, many employees were trained in statistical pro- cess control, root-cause analysis, and other quality-minded competencies. Today, Granite Rock spends up to $1,600 per year for training of each
employee, which is more than 10 times the average for the mining and construction industries.
An equally important step in equipping its employ- ees to contribute to the firm’s efforts was establishing an atmosphere of trust between management and the rank- and-file employees. That effort has been pursued in a number of ways, and the trust developed throughout the company has resulted in the effective implementation of employee empowerment and teamwork. In addition, the company has done away with its conventional perfor- mance appraisal system (feeling that it was ineffective) and has incorporated performance appraisal into each employee’s IPDP. As part of this plan, at least once a year, each employee meets with his or her supervisor to discuss job responsibilities, review accomplishments, assess skills, and set skill and career development goals. Although the IPDP is not mandatory for the company’s unionized workers, overall participation stands at 83%. Because the IPDP approach to training and appraisal prepares employees to assume greater responsibilities, Granite Rock promotes heavily from within.
Granite Rock, having won the Malcolm Baldrige Award and one of Fortune magazine’s best 100 compa- nies to work for, is aggressively pursuing its quality ini- tiatives, with the cooperation of its 700 employees.
25
C H A P T E R 2
Quality Theory
For some reason, the word theory conjures negative thoughts among many students and businesspeople. There is a supposition that an emphasis on theory will somehow distance us from the real world and what “really works.” However, theories form the basis for much of what happens around us, and most of us use them every day without knowing it. For instance, mechanical theories are at work when you drive your car. When you turn on a light, theories are at work harnessing the power of electricity. The airplanes overhead benefit by Bernoulli’s theory. The organizations we work for are based on theories proposed by generations of organizational theorists. The money we spend is managed by macroeconomic theory. Because there can be no understanding of the phenomena that surround us without theory, shouldn’t there be a general theory of quality management? In other words, is there a model that explains how organizations such as Federal Express, Motorola, and Toyota have achieved such high levels of quality within the past generation?
Several theories on quality improvement are in practice currently. In this chapter we learn about the experts in this field, their theories, and how these theories have been used by various organizations.
WHAT IS THEORY?
The term theory is often misused. Generally, theory is a “coherent group of general propositions used as principles of explanation for a class of phenomena.” 2 For example, it might have been observed that many companies that have implemented quality improvement have experienced improved worker morale. Therefore, a theoretical model of quality and worker morale might be developed as shown in Figure 2-1 .
Experience alone, without theory, teaches management nothing about what to do to improve quality and competitive position, nor how to do it.
—W. Edwards Deming 1
1 Deming, W. E., Out of the Crisis (Boston: MIT CAES, 1986), p. 19 . 2 Random House Webster’s College Dictionary 2011.
26 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
The model in Figure 2-1 has two variables: quality improvement and worker morale. The arrow implies causality. Because the head of the arrow points to worker morale, this is the depen- dent variable , with quality improvement being the independent variable. Thus we can see that our small theoretical model is testable. To test our model, we formulate a hypothesis, gather data under controlled conditions, and analyze the data. There is no way to prove the theory. The results of our statistical research will only support the theory or fail to support the theory.
For a theory to be complete, it must have four elements 3 : what, how, why, and who-where- when. The what of the theory involves which variables or factors are included in the model. The variables in Figure 2-1 are the what of that model.
The how of a theoretical model involves the nature, direction, and extent of the relationship among the variables. For example, in our simple quality/morale model, we posited that quality improvement positively influences worker morale. This is represented by the plus sign in the model.
The why of the theory is the theoretical glue that holds the model together. For example, what are the psychological dynamics that could cause quality improvement to increase worker morale? Suppose we theorize that organizations using quality improvement are more organic in nature, stressing worker empowerment. Suppose further that worker empowerment lifts worker self-esteem by stressing increased decision making and control over his or her own job. Finally, we propose that this increase in self-esteem results in improved worker morale.
The who-where-when aspects place contextual bounds on the theory. For example, we might add a condition to our model stating that morale is improved only in companies that receive strong leadership by top management to implement quality improvement.
As shown in Figure 2-2 , theories are established in one of two ways. A theory generated by observation and description is said to have been developed by the process of induction. The process of induction is useful but is also subject to observer bias and misperception. Suppose we developed our quality/morale theory after visiting a series of Chicago, Illinois, firms that had implemented quality improvement. During our site visits, we found that employee morale was high in all the sites we visited. Our inductive observations of quality influencing morale might be
Quality Improvement
Worker Morale
+
FIGURE 2-1 A Theoretical Model Relating Quality Improvement to Worker Morale
Data Generalization
Generalization Supported by Data
Induction
Deduction
FIGURE 2-2 Inductive versus Deductive Reasoning
3 Davis, J., Eisenhardt, K., and Bingham, C., “Developing Theory through Simulation Methods,” Academy of Management Review, 32, 2 (2007): 480–499.
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 27
correct. However, as committed researchers, we are so enthralled by our discovery that we fail to notice that the Cubs (the Chicago baseball franchise) just won the World Series. Therefore, our inductively produced model of quality/morale might have been confounded by an intervening variable (the glorious win by the Cubs).
The more common theoretical approach used by researchers is deduction. Using deduc- tion, researchers propose a model based on prior research and design an experiment to test the theoretical model. These studies follow the scientific method discussed in Chapter 1 .
Many of the concepts and models proposed in this chapter are developed by induction. Therefore, when considering concepts put forth by experts such as Deming, Juran, and Crosby, note that their principles are based on years of experience with a wide variety of firms that have improved quality. Their models and principles are also laden with personal biases, judgments, and values. This is fine, as long as you recognize these limitations to their models.
Is There a Theory of Quality Management?
As yet, there is not a unified theory explaining quality improvement in the supply chain that is widely accepted by the quality community. In fact, as we saw in Chapter 1 , the literature con- cerning quality is contradictory and somewhat confusing. Different theories have been proposed by practitioners and researchers. Some of these theories have been drawn from organizational theory, behavioral theory, and statistical theory.
The differing approaches to quality improvement represent competing philosophies that have sought their places in the marketplace of ideas. Practicing quality managers must become familiar with these philosophies and apply those that are appropriate to their particular situations.
The diversity of approaches to quality contributes to variability in the approaches used by companies and increases the chance for failure in organizations. Some of these approaches are proven and others aren’t. This has spawned myriad consulting firms and consultants. As shown in A Closer Look at Quality 2-1 , some of these are legitimate and some are in it for profit only. In past decades, there has been an explosion of consulting firms around the world that taught a variety of means for achieving quality. In the following sections we discuss the problem of the fragmentation of the quality message from a managerial point of view.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 2-1 Quality and Management Fads 4
Every holiday season there are long lines at the toy stores. Everyone is hoping to purchase the popular toy. Walking down the street or in school hallways, people are wearing the same style of clothes. The latest trends are what people think about. But just as quickly as the toy or clothing fad comes, it will go away with the next “it” item. Fads are not confined to the fashion or toy industry but also exist in the area of business management and quality theories and practices.
Quality management can be a jumble of alphabet soup. Managers say, “We use TQM, lean and MBO” or “We are ISO registered.” Some of these programs add value to a company, while others may be fads without lasting effects. Danny Miller and Jon Hartwick state, “Fads like TQM can profoundly change companies, for better or for worse.”
So how does a firm avoid a fad and select a tool that might endure? Through research, Miller and Hartwick have identified several qualities of business fads. They define fads as simple, prescriptive, falsely encouraging, one-size-fits-all, easy to cut-and-paste, in tune with the zeitgeist, novel, not radical, and externally legitimized by gurus and disciples. These can serve as a set of criteria in evaluating busi- ness and quality programs.
4 Based on Miller, D., and Hartwick, J., “Spotting Management Fads,” Harvard Business Review 80, 10 (2002): 26–27.
(continued)
28 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Making changes in a company is not easy. The goal is to make a positive impact. As we discuss in this chapter, quality tools should be assessed based on their effects on the business. Following are some questions to consider:
• Is the approach utilized in the real world? • Is the approach a correct fit for or adaptable to the business? • Does the approach deliver measurable results? • Does the approach address the root cause of problems? • Does the approach challenge the status quo?
Proven tools come from responding to economic, social, and competitive challenges. Ultimately, lasting changes to the firm will come from management profoundly understanding the business and adapting quality tools to the particular needs of the business.
There is no perfect test to distinguish fads from proven tools. Some fads will have merit and make a positive lasting change. Management must perform due diligence in selecting tools for the organiza- tion. If done correctly, the firm will have its own distinct “style” when it comes to managing quality.
TABLE 2-1 History of Quality Early 1900s Frederick Taylor, Frank and Lillian Gilbreth, and scientific management 1920s Walter Shewhart and statistical process control 1930s Dodge and Romig introduce acceptance sampling 1940s Military standards introduced 1950s Deming and Juran introduce quality management to Japan 1960s Taguchi method and other tools developed 1970s Quality becomes strategic; beginning of major adoption in the United States 1980s “If Japan Can, Why Can’t We?” airs on U.S. TV; introduction of Lean with
Schonberger, Shingo, and Hall; TQM and empowerment become watchwords in quality field; Baldrige award program implemented
1990s Reengineering and Six Sigma become major movements with mixed results; wide dissemination of quality approaches
2000s Growth of supply chain management and improvement of supplier development; lean Six Sigma becomes popular; contingency theory in quality becomes recognized as important
2010s Supply chain quality management (SCQM) gains traction as a field.
HISTORY OF QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Table 2-1 outlines a brief history of the quality movement. Later in this chapter, we further develop the teachings of many of the key contributors in quality management. From the scientific management movement of the early twentieth century to the present focus on supply chain qual- ity, there has been a continual growth of the field.
LEADING CONTRIBUTORS TO QUALITY THEORY: W. EDWARDS DEMING
W. Edwards Deming (see Figure 2-3 ) was widely accepted as the world’s preeminent authority on quality management prior to his death on December 24, 1993. Deming gained credibility because of his influence on Japanese and American industry. In the late 1970s, when it became apparent that many Japanese products were of better quality than U.S. products, U.S. managers were surprised to learn that the Japanese had learned quality management from W. E. Deming, an American. In fact, the Japanese still use the original lectures given by Deming to train new generations of businesspeople.
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 29
Although Deming is best known for his emphasis on the management of a system for improving quality, his thinking was based on the use of statistics for continual improvement. In the 1920s, Deming worked in the Western Electric Hawthorne plant. Trained in engineer- ing and mathematical physics at the University of Wyoming and Yale University, he came to know Walter Shewhart, who influenced his thinking about improving quality through the use of statistics.
After working at the Hawthorne plant, Deming worked in government jobs with the U.S. Department of Agriculture and the Bureau of the Census, where he helped develop statistical sampling techniques. During World War II he worked with U.S. defense contractors to use statis- tics to identify systematic quality problems occurring within defense-related products.
After the war, Deming was sent to Japan by the U.S. secretary of war to work on a popula- tion census. During this time, the Japanese Union of Scientists and Engineers asked him to pro- vide lectures on statistical quality control applications. While in Japan, Deming became impressed by the precision and single-mindedness with which the Japanese pursued quality improvement. Late in his life, Deming commented that he had consulted around the world and had found that Japan’s commitment to quality was unparalleled. In his mind, this unwavering pursuit of quality improvement was the genius of the Japanese people. When the United States discovered that it was lagging behind the Japanese in quality, large corporations hired Deming to help them develop quality management programs.
Toward the end of his career, Deming gave seminars, wrote books, taught classes, and published articles to explain his approach to quality management. This led to wide dissemination of the Deming approach to quality. In part, because of the lack of focus in America, the results have been somewhat mixed.
Deming stressed that consumers are well served by insisting that service and product pro- viders deliver high quality. He believed that the more consumers demand high-quality products and services, the more firms will continually aspire to higher levels of performance. In fact, this has happened in the United States. As opposed to the past, consumers now expect high-quality products at a reasonable cost.
Deming’s mantra was “continual never-ending improvement.” The goal of higher levels of quality would perhaps never be completely met, but firms would continually exercise themselves
FIGURE 2-3 W. Edwards Deming © Catherine Karnow/Corbis.
30 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
to get better and better. This is why quality improvement is often referred to as a journey where the elusive destination is never reached.
Deming’s 14 Points for Management
Although Deming espoused the belief that theory was important to the understanding of qual- ity improvement, the closest he ever came to expounding a theory was in his 14 points for management. The foundation for the 14 points was Deming’s belief that the historic approach to quality used by American management was wrong in one fundamental aspect: Poor quality was not the fault of labor; it resulted from poor management of the system for continual improvement. Although this might now seem obvious, at the time Deming taught this, it was a revelation to managers. Taken as a whole, the 14 points for management (see Table 2-2 ) represent many of the key principles that provide the basis for quality management in many organizations. 5
1. Create constancy of purpose toward improvement of product and service with the aim to become competitive, stay in business, and provide jobs. Constancy of purpose means that man- agement commits resources—over the long haul—to see that the quality job is completed. This is in contrast to managers who wish to achieve quick returns and get bottom-line results after embarking on quality “programs.” In recent years, more people have come to realize that U.S. management is too short-term oriented in its thinking. Unfortunately, quality improvement requires time to be effective. The Japanese experience is instructive. Deming helped to begin the Japanese quality revolution in the early 1950s. As already stated, the Japanese displayed remark- able commitment to and focus on quality improvement. Even with all this effort, the Japanese were not really recognized as world leaders in quality until the late 1970s.
2. Adopt a new philosophy. We are in a new economic age. Western management must awaken to the challenge, must learn its responsibilities, and must take on leadership of change. Planned obsolescence was the order of the day when Deming first discussed the new economic age. During this time, automobiles were designed to last 80,000 miles. Deming referred to an age in which Americans would no longer accept defective products. Now that many firms have excellent quality at a reasonable cost, they are turning to service quality to make the next big advances. More and more, specification measurements are being replaced by customer service metrics as the important measures of quality.
3. Cease dependence on mass inspection to improve quality. Eliminate the need for inspec- tion on a mass basis by building quality into the product in the first place. In many companies still, the “quality department” performs in-process and final inspection of a product. In this sce- nario, responsibility for quality lies with the quality department. However, by the time the quality
TABLE 2-2 Deming’s 14 Points 1. Create constancy of purpose. 8. Drive out fear. 2. Adopt a new philosophy. 9. Break down barriers between 3. Cease mass inspection. departments. 4. End awarding business on 10. Eliminate slogans.
the basis of price tag. 11. Eliminate work standards. 5. Constantly improve the system. 12. Remove barriers to pride. 6. Institute training on the job. 13. Institute education and self-improvement. 7. Improve leadership. 14. Put everybody to work.
Source: Adapted from W. E. Deming, Out of the Crisis (Boston: MIT/CAES, 1986), pp. 18 – 96 .
5 Deming, W. E., Out of the Crisis (Boston: MIT/CAES, 1986).
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 31
department inspects the product, either the quality is built in or it is not built in. At this point, it is too late to add quality.
Deming’s alternative is quality at the source. This means that all workers are responsi- ble for their own work and perform needed inspections at each stage of the process to maintain process control. Of course, this is possible only if management trusts and trains its workers properly.
4. End the practice of awarding business on the basis of price tag alone. Instead, mini- mize total cost. Move toward a single supplier for any one item, based on a long-term relation- ship of loyalty and trust. Traditionally, U.S. firms maintained many suppliers. The theory behind this approach was that competition among suppliers would improve quality and decrease cost. In reality, however, the existence of many suppliers caused an overemphasis on cost and an increase in variability. For example, if a metal fabrication company has multiple suppliers, the result is great variability in the makeup and consistency of the incoming stock. The alternative supply chain approach used by many firms is just-in-time (JIT) purchasing. This approach minimizes the number of suppliers used, resulting in decreased variability. Also long-term contracts are used that result in the ability to develop and certify suppliers. Often these certifications are based on quality standards such as the Malcolm Baldrige Award criteria or the ISO 9000:2008 interna- tional standard for quality systems. In other cases, supplier certification is based on an internally developed standard.
5. Improve constantly and forever the system of production and service, to improve quality and productivity, and thus constantly decrease cost. This point focuses on the management of the system of production.
The system of production includes product design, process design, training, tools, machines, process flows, and a myriad of other variables that affect the system of production and service. In the final analysis, management is responsible for most of the system design elements because it is management that has the authority and the budget to implement systems. Therefore, the workers can be held responsible only for their inputs to the system. Mediocre or poor perfor- mance of a system is most often the result of the poor performance of management.
6. Institute training on the job. People must have the necessary training and knowledge to perform their work. Many companies employing laborers have found they must design job- related training. Note that training, although a necessary condition for improvement, is not suf- ficient to guarantee successful implementation of quality management. The design of effective training is important to quality improvement.
7. Improve leadership. The aim of supervision should be to help people, machines, and gadgets to do a better job. Supervision of management is in need of overhaul as well as supervi- sion of production workers. All quality experts agree that leadership is key to improving quality. If assembly line employees become enthusiastic about quality management, they will be able to make some small improvements to their organization. However, this improvement can occur only within the realm of influence of the employee. For wide-ranging improvements to occur, upper management must be involved. It is upper management that has the monetary and organi- zational authority to oversee the implementation of quality improvement. Without management support and leadership, quality improvement efforts will fail.
8. Drive out fear so that everyone may work effectively for the company. For the most part, Deming was referring to those situations in which employees were fearful to change or even admit that problems existed. Many of these problems still exist. At times, employees who surface problems and seek to create change are considered troublemakers or dissatisfied. It might be true that such employees are dissatisfied. However, does an organization want employees who are satisfied with the status quo? Often employees who seek to create change should be most prized. Some fear comes from making recommendations for improvement and having those rec- ommendations ignored.
32 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Another type of fear should be recognized by top managers who desire to improve quality. Many employees view process-improvement efforts as disguised excuses for major layoffs. Recent efforts at reengineering corporations have been synonymous with layoffs. Often, after pursuing the easy solution of downsizing, the same cultural and organizational barriers that impeded improvement are still there. However, the company has lost the ability to be creative and really improve its ability to increase value to the customer. One solution was offered by a major midwestern defense contractor. It developed a written policy stating that management reserved the right to reduce staffing levels as a result of economic downturns. However, the writ- ten policy also stated, “No layoffs will result from productivity or quality improvement projects or efforts.” Many Japanese firms overcome this same fear issue by offering lifetime employment.
9. Break down barriers between departments. People in research, design, sales, and pro- duction must work as a team to foresee problems of production and use that may be encountered with the product or service. In many companies, the time it takes to get design and marketing concepts to market is extremely long. Ingersoll-Rand produces a hand grinder that once required four years to develop a new generation of the product. One employee was quoted as saying, “It took us longer to develop a new generation of the product than it took the Allies to win World War II.” In the new competitive environment, such delays in design can jeopardize a company’s ability to compete. Honda nearly bankrupted Yamaha because of Honda’s ability to introduce new designs to market rapidly. One reason for slow design cycles was the sequential or departmental approach to design. This approach requires product designers, marketers, process designers, and production managers to work through organizational lines of authority to perform work. The alter- native is parallel processing in focused teams who work simultaneously on designs.
10. Eliminate slogans, exhortations, and targets for the workforce that ask for zero defects and new levels of productivity. Such exhortations only create adversarial relationships because the bulk of causes of low quality and low productivity belong to the system and thus lie beyond the power of the workforce. In Deming’s view, exhortations to “get it right the first time” and “zero defects forever” can have the opposite of the intended effect. By pressuring employees to higher levels of productivity and quality, managers place the onus for improve- ment on the employees. If systems or means for achieving these higher levels of performance are not provided, workers can become jaded and discouraged. Examples of providing systems to employees might be to provide better training, to empower employees to make process deci- sions, and to provide a strategic structure that ensures alignment of key strategic goals and operational subgoals.
11. Eliminate work standards on the factory floor. Eliminate management by objective. Eliminate management by numbers and numeric goals. Substitute leadership. Deming was very much opposed to work measurement standards on the shop floor. Note that work standards are used worldwide, and companies such as Lincoln Electric have been very successful with the skilled use of such standards. However, often work standards are implemented improperly. It is obvious that if quantity becomes the overriding concern, then quality suffers. More subtle, if work standards are in place, employees who perform at high levels might lose the impetus to continually improve because they already will have satisfied standards.
Management by objective refers to a process of setting annual goals, typically during a performance appraisal, that are binding on the employee. Although goals are set for employees, systems often are not provided by management to attain these goals. For this reason, Deming disdained performance appraisals.
12. Remove barriers that rob workers of their right to pride in the quality of their work. The responsibility of supervisors must be changed from sheer numbers to quality. Too often, hourly laborers are hired to perform only the physical tasks assigned by management. Such workers often suffer from low morale and low commitment to the organization. Unskilled man- agers often add to this problem by reinforcing the fact that employees cannot be trusted with decisions and self-determination. Once, while discussing self-directed work teams, a manager
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 33
commented that he feared he was “turning the asylum over to the inmates.” Such attitudes were obvious on the shop floor, and employees were very dissatisfied with their state. The upside is that after seeing the results of self-directed teams, this same manager became one of the biggest allies of the process of employee empowerment.
13. Institute a vigorous program of education and self-improvement. Point 6 referred to training on the job. Point 13 relates to more generalized education. Many quality experts have argued that firms must exhibit the ability to increase and “freeze” learning. Learning in an orga- nization is a function of the creativity of employees and the ability of the organization to institu- tionalize the lessons learned over time. This is difficult in firms that have high employee turnover. One of the benefits of the ISO 9000:2008 international quality standard is the requirement that firms document their processes and improvements to the processes. Procedure manuals can help make learning permanent. However, this is not enough. Organizational learning requires a structure that reinforces and rewards learning. Such an organization is difficult to create in a command- and-control environment because command-oriented managers will not understand what it takes to allow employees to achieve their best.
14. Put everybody in the company to work to accomplish the transformation. The transfor- mation is everybody’s job. Point 14 reinforces the fact that everyone in the organization is responsible for improving quality. This again reinforces the fact that a total system for improving quality is needed that includes all the people in the organization.
LEADING CONTRIBUTORS TO QUALITY THEORY: JOSEPH M. JURAN
Joseph Juran, born in Romania in 1904, was also responsible for the growth of quality in the past half-century. He also visited the Japanese Union of Scientists and Engineers to teach qual- ity concepts. Juran took a more strategic and planning-based approach to improvement than Deming. Juran promotes the view that organizational quality problems are largely the result of insufficient and ineffective planning for quality. He argues that companies must revise strate- gic planning processes and achieve mastery over these processes. The means proposed by Juran establish specific goals to be reached and plans for reaching those goals. In addition, Juran’s process assigns clear responsibility for meeting the goals and bases rewards on results achieved.
The Juran Trilogy
Juran identifies three basic processes that are essential for managing to improve quality. These pro- cesses are referred to as the Juran trilogy. The points of the Juran trilogy are interrelated. The three aspects of Juran’s trilogy are planning, control, and improvement. Juran discusses these as follows:
It all begins with quality planning. The purpose of quality is to provide the operating forces with the means of producing products that can meet the customer’s needs, products such as invoices, polyethylene film, sales contracts, service calls, and new designs for goods.
Once planning is complete, the plan is turned over to the operating forces. Their job is to produce the product. As operations proceed, we see that the process is deficient: 20% of the operating force is wasted, as the work must be redone due to quality deficiencies. The waste then becomes chronic because of quality deficiencies. The waste becomes chronic because it was planned that way.
Under conventional responsibility patterns the operating forces are unable to get rid of that planned chronic waste. What they do instead is carry out quality control to prevent things from getting worse. Control includes putting out the fires, such as sporadic spikes. 6
6 Juran, J. M., Juran on Planning for Quality (Boston: Free Press, 1988), p. 11 .
34 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Control versus Breakthrough
Another important Juran concept is control versus breakthrough. According to Juran, control is a process-related activity that ensures processes are stable and provides a relatively consistent out- come. Control involves gathering data about a process to ensure the process is consistent. Con- trol is discussed in more depth in Chapters 11 and 12 .
Breakthrough improvement implies the process has been studied and that some major improvement has resulted in large nonrandom improvement to the process. The difference between control and breakthrough can be understood when considering a disease such as polio. Control activities involved improving health by quarantining people who had the disease. Breakthrough improvement occurred with the development of the polio vaccine that eradicated the disease.
It is important to understand that control and breakthrough-related activities should occur simultaneously. This distinction clarifies a false dichotomy sometimes associated with continuous improvement versus reengineering. Some managers believe that continuous improvement prevents companies from pursuing large improvements because the focus on detail may lead to neglect of larger needed changes. However, there is nothing about continu- ous improvement that precludes large improvements. The optimal set of improvement activi- ties probably involves some mix of continuous improvement and breakthrough improvement activities.
Project-by-Project Improvement
Juran teaches that improvement in organizations is accomplished on a project-by-project basis “and in no other way.” The project-by-project approach advocated by Juran is a planning-based approach to quality improvement.
In planning for quality improvements, Juran states that managers must prioritize which projects will be undertaken first. Organizations involve a hierarchy of languages (see Figure 2-4 ). In this hierarchy, the work that is done operationally at the lowest level is performed by analysts who speak in the language of things. The language of things is typically technical, including jargon and engineering terminology. To help determine what projects should be undertaken, these technical people must use the language of management, that is, money. Therefore, projects identified for possible adoption are prioritized based on financial return. One of the problems many companies experience when implementing quality improvement is showing bottom-line results.
Juran has had a very profound impact on the practice of quality management worldwide. A Closer Look at Quality 2-2 discusses him further.
Management: The Language of Money
Workers: The Language of Things
FIGURE 2-4 The Hierarchy of Languages
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 35
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 2-2 Juran on the Past Century of Quality 7
Well into his nineties, Juran wrote about the history of quality. Following is a synopsis of some of his recollections.
The Taylor Revolution The driving force of the Century of Productivity was the movement known as scientific management. It was launched by the American engineer and manager Frederick W. Taylor. It made a basic change in managerial practice—the separation of planning from execution. The premise behind the change was that the workers and supervisors of that era lacked the education base needed to do planning. Hence Taylor gave the planning function to managers and engineers. He limited the supervisors and workers to the function of executing the plans.
Response to the Taylor Revolution The upper managers responded by revising the organization. They moved the inspectors out of the pro- duction departments and into a central inspection department headed by a chief inspector. To provide added independence, the chief inspector reported to the plant manager or to the vice president for manu- facturing. Those central inspection departments became the quality workhorses during the first half of the twentieth century.
In due course, the central inspection departments grew into the quality departments, which today are a feature of so many organizations. Often enough, they are headed by a vice president for quality who reports directly to the chief executive officer. It is a far cry from the days of the early 1900s.
Creation of the central quality departments also led to two developments which have done a lot of damage: First, many upper managers concluded that quality was the responsibility of the quality depart- ment. This belief then made it easier for departments such as production to give top priority to other parameters. Second, upper managers became detached from the quality function. Many concluded that by delegating quality to the quality manager, they could devote their own time to other matters. As they did so, they became progressively less and less informed about quality. Then when the crisis came, they lacked the knowledge needed to choose a proper course of action.
In retrospect, the use of inspection to attain quality involved inherent weaknesses such as high costs and shaky habits. Nevertheless, it made companies competitive in quality on condition that their competitors used the same strategy. That condition was largely met until the Japanese quality revolution came over the horizon.
The Japanese Quality Revolution We now turn to the events that followed World War II. By far, the most important of these was the Japa- nese quality revolution, which opened the way for Japan to become an economic superpower.
Japan’s efforts to achieve greatness through military conquest had failed. Now it would have to be done through trade. Lacking natural resources, this meant importing materials, processing them into finished goods, selling those goods, importing more materials, and so on. The major obstacle to creating such an upward spiral was Japan’s reputation as a producer of shoddy goods.
To improve that reputation required some fundamental changes in habit patterns. The Japanese CEOs were prepared to make such changes—the shock of losing the war had opened their minds. So they set out to improve their quality reputation. Through the Keidanren (the Federation of Economic Organi- zations) and the JUSE (Japanese Union of Scientists and Engineers) the companies acted collectively:
1. They sent teams abroad to learn how foreign countries achieved quality. 2. They translated foreign literature into Japanese. 3. They invited two American experts—Deming and myself—to give lectures.
Deming’s lectures were on statistical methods, especially the Shewhart control chart. My lectures were on managing for quality, especially on the concept and methodology of annual quality improvement. Let me here deal with a widespread misconception.
7 Juran, J. M., Architect of Quality (New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004). (continued)
36 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Some people believe that had these two Americans not given their lectures, the Japanese qual- ity revolution would not have happened. In my view, this belief has no relation to reality. Had Dem- ing and I never gone, the Japanese quality revolution would have taken place without us.
Each of us did bring to Japan a structured training package the Japanese had not yet devel- oped. In that sense, each of us gave the Japanese a degree of a jump start. But we also did the same for many other countries, none of which succeeded in building such a revolution. That is why I tell my audiences that the unsung heroes of the Japanese quality revolution were the Japanese managers.
Pareto Analysis
Joseph Juran identified an economic concept that he applied to quality problems. This economic concept is called Pareto’s law or the 80/20 rule. This law is named after Vilfredo Pareto (1848– 1923), an Italian economist, who modeled income distributions in Milan, Italy. Pareto found that 80% of the wealth in Milan was held by about 20% of the population. Applying Pareto’s law to quality problems, imagine a grocer who decides to survey his customers to investigate where quality improvement is needed in his store. He offers a free pound of hamburger to customers who agree to fill out the survey. One of the open-ended questions in the survey asks, “Where do we most need to improve?” Do you suppose that the responses will be uniformly distributed among several problems? No. The majority of the respondents will identify a certain aspect of the grocer’s business as the major quality issue. For example, out of 100 respondents, 80 answer, “The meat department needs to be improved.” Therefore, in this case, 80% of the dissatisfaction with quality is related to a single area: the meat department.
Using Pareto’s law, we see that the majority of quality problems are the result of relatively few causes. Juran dichotomizes the population of causes of quality problems as the “vital few” and the “trivial, but useful, many.” Pareto analysis is used as one of the basic seven tools of quality.
LEADING CONTRIBUTORS TO QUALITY THEORY: KAORU ISHIKAWA
The founder of the Japanese Union of Scientists and Engineers (JUSE) was the distinguished business leader Ichiro Ishikawa. His son, Kaoru Ishikawa, went on to lead JUSE during its growth years and became the foremost Japanese leader in the Japanese quality movement. 8 Kaoru Ishikawa provided tools that worked well within the Deming and Juran frameworks.
The Basic Tools of Quality
Ishikawa was a great believer in training. In fact, under his guidance, training was a key component of the mission of JUSE, including statistical quality control training. Perhaps Ishikawa’s greatest achievement was the development and dissemination of the basic seven tools of quality (B7). As the developer of these tools, Ishikawa is credited with democratizing statistics. Although statistical quality control traditionally had been the domain of specialized statisticians, Ishikawa felt that to be successful, firms must make everyone responsible for statistical analysis and interpretation.
Although not strictly a theoretical contribution, the tools are presented in Chapter 10 because they are used for continuous improvement. The major theoretical contribution of Ishi- kawa is his emphasis on total involvement of the operating employees in improving quality. Ishikawa is credited for coining the term company-wide quality control in Japan.
Ishikawa’s Quality Philosophy
Ishikawa spent his life working to improve quality in Japan. His ideas were synthesized into 11 points that made up his quality philosophy (see Table 2-3 ). Ishikawa is often overlooked in the
8 Many of the Ishikawa concepts discussed here are derived from his book, Guide to Quality Control (White Plains, NY: Quality Resources, 1968).
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 37
United States; however, every firm that pursues quality improvement uses his tools. By democra- tizing statistics, he allowed for the complete involvement of the workforce in improving quality and performance.
LEADING CONTRIBUTORS TO QUALITY THEORY: ARMAND FEIGENBAUM
During the years when quality was overlooked as a major competitive factor in the United States, two books were used by most every quality professional. These books were Statistical Quality Control 9 by Eugene Grant and Richard Leavenworth and Total Quality Control 10 by Armand Feigenbaum. Whereas the approach of the former was statistically oriented, Feigenbaum’s book studied quality in the context of the business organization. Feigenbaum’s primary contribution to quality thinking in America was his assertion that the entire organization should be involved in improving quality. He was the first in the United States to move quality from the offices of the specialist back to the operating workers. This occurred in the 1950s.
Feigenbaum proposes a three-step process to improving quality. These steps involve quality leadership, quality technology , and organizational commitment. Leadership is the motivating force for quality improvement. Quality technology includes statistics and machinery that can be used to improve technology. Organizational commitment includes everyone in the quality struggle.
Major impediments to improving quality included the four deadly sins of hothouse quality, wishful thinking, producing overseas, and confining quality to the factory. Hothouse quality refers to quality programs that receive a lot of hoopla and no follow-through. This is a failing of many firms that do not commit resources over time. Wishful thinking occurs with those who would pursue protectionism to keep American firms from having to compete on quality. Produc- ing overseas is a panacea sometimes undertaken by managers who wish that out of sight, out of mind could solve quality-related problems. Even well-run companies can fall prey to this think- ing. The disk-memory division of Hewlett-Packard offshored its production from the United States to Malaysia in a move to overcome its noncompetitiveness in the market. The move to Malaysia did nothing to solve its problems related to design and process. HP’s problems have not gotten better since the move—they have gotten worse. Confining quality to the factory means that quality historically has been viewed as simply a shop-floor concern. In actuality, it is every- one’s responsibility.
TABLE 2-3 Ishikawa’s 11 Points 1. Quality begins with education and ends 7. Put quality fi rst and set your with education. sights on long-term objectives. 2. The fi rst step in quality is to know the 8. Marketing is the entrance requirements of the customer. and exit of quality. 3. The ideal state of quality control is 9. Top management must not when inspection is no longer necessary. show anger when facts are 4. Remove the root causes, not the presented to subordinates. symptoms. 10. Ninety-fi ve percent of the problems 5. Quality control is the responsibility of in a company can be solved by all workers and all divisions. the seven tools of quality control. 6. Do not confuse the means with the 11. Data without dispersion objectives. information are false data.
Source: Adapted from K. Ishikawa, Guide to Quality Control (White Plains, NY: Quality Resources, 1968).
9 Grant, E., and Leavenworth, R., Statistical Quality Control (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1988; original 1946). 10 Feigenbaum, A., Total Quality Control (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1983; original 1951).
38 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
11 Crosby, P., Quality Is Free: The Art of Making Quality Certain (New York: Mentor Executive Library, 1979).
TABLE 2-4 Feigenbaum’s 19 Steps 1. Total quality control is defi ned as a 10. Control the process. system of improvement. 11. A total quality system involves the 2. Big Q quality (company-wide commit- entire company-wide operating ment to TQC) is more important than work structure. little q quality (improvements on the 12. There are many operating and fi nancial production line). benefi ts of quality. 3. Control is a management tool with 13. The costs of quality are a means for four steps. measuring quality control activities. 4. Quality control requires integration 14. Organize for quality control. of uncoordinated activities. 15. Managers are quality facilitators, 5. Quality increases profi ts. not quality cops. 6. Quality is expected, not desired. 16. Strive for continuous commitment. 7. Humans affect quality. 17. Use statistical tools. 8. TQC applies to all products and services. 18. Automation is not a panacea. 9. Quality is a total life-cycle consideration. 19. Control quality at the source.
Source: Based on A. Feigenbaum, Total Quality Control (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1991; original 1951).
The 19 Steps of TQC
Armand Feigenbaum proposed 19 steps for improving quality (see Table 2-4 ). These 19 steps outline his approach to the total quality control (TQC) system, which emphasizes organizational involvement in improving quality. In 2008, Feigenbaum was awarded the National Medal of Technology and Innovation by the U.S. president for his work in quality management.
LEADING CONTRIBUTORS TO QUALITY THEORY: PHILIP CROSBY
Philip Crosby was the most successful in marketing his quality expertise of all the leading qual- ity authors and thinkers. Although he began his career as a podiatrist (which he disliked), Crosby pursued a career as a reliability engineer with Crosley Corporation in Indiana. Later, he worked for Martin Corporation as a quality manager, and then he served as the director for quality at International Telephone and Telegraph. In 1979 he founded Crosby and Associates of Winter Park, Florida—the world’s largest and most successful quality consulting company. In 1991 he sold Crosby and Associates and founded Career IV to help train executives. Prior to his death in August 2001, he repurchased Crosby and Associates to “fix their image.”
Crosby became very well known for his authorship of the book Quality Is Free. 11 The pri- mary thesis of this book is that quality, as a managed process, can be a source of profit for an organization. Crosby specified a quality improvement program consisting of 14 steps (see Table 2-5 ). These steps underlie the Crosby zero-defects approach to quality improvement. His approach also emphasized the behavioral and motivational aspects of quality improvement rather than statistical approaches. In his 14 steps, Crosby prescribed actions for management and work- ers within the context of his program.
Crosby identified a period of enlightenment during which management becomes attuned to the importance of quality. This enlightenment can be achieved through exposure to videos, books, and seminars and by a sense of needing to respond to competitive challenges. A quality improvement team is then established. This team consists of a member from each department within the organization. Organizational quality measures are established and continually reviewed by the team.
Next, quality-related costs are evaluated. This effort is to be coordinated by the controller’s office by establishing the location of areas where corrective action would be most profitable.
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 39
TABLE 2-5 Crosby’s 14 Steps 1. Make it clear that management is 9. Hold a zero-defects day to let all committed to quality. employees realize that there has 2. Form quality improvement teams with been a change. representatives from each department. 10. Encourage individuals to establish 3. Determine how to measure where cur- improvement goals for themselves rent and potential quality problems lie. and their groups. 4. Evaluate the cost of quality and explain 11. Encourage employees to its use as a management tool. communicate to management the 5. Raise the quality awareness and per- obstacles they face in attaining sonal concern of all employees. their improvement goals. 6. Take formal actions to correct problems 12. Recognize and appreciate those identifi ed through previous steps. who participate. 7. Establish a committee for the 13. Establish quality councils to zero-defects program. communicate on a regular basis. 8. Train all employees to actively carry out 14. Do it all over again. their part of the quality improvement program.
Source: Based on P. Crosby, Quality Is Free: The Art of Making Quality Certain (New York: Mentor Executive Library, 1979). Reproduced with permission of The McGraw-Hill Companies.
Quality awareness is emphasized, which addresses the philosophical underpinnings of the Crosby approach. This step addresses the importance of the worker in ensuring quality and dem- onstrating the need to make the employee aware of the necessity for quality improvement.
The final steps are corrective action, establishing an ad hoc committee for the zero-defects program, supervisory training, the establishment of a zero-defects day, error-cause removal, employee recognition, and the establishment of quality councils. These steps then become ingrained by beginning the process over again.
Although he prescribes quality teams consisting of department heads, Crosby did not pro- mote the same kind of strategic planning proposed by Deming and Juran. Crosby adopted a human resources approach similar to Deming’s in that worker input is valued and is encouraged as central to the quality improvement program.
LEADING CONTRIBUTORS TO QUALITY THEORY: GENICHI TAGUCHI
The Taguchi method was first introduced by Dr. Genichi Taguchi to AT&T Bell Laboratories in the United States in 1980. Because of its increased acceptance and utilization, the Taguchi method for improving quality is now believed to be comparable in importance to the Deming approach and to the Ishikawa concept of total quality control. Taguchi’s method is a continuation of the work in quality improvement that began with Shewhart’s work in statistical quality control and Deming’s work in improving quality. Objectives of the Taguchi method are synopsized in Table 2-6 .
Among the unique aspects of the Taguchi method are the Taguchi definition of quality, the quality loss function (QLF), and the concept of robust design.
TABLE 2-6 The Taguchi Method The Taguchi method provides 1. A basis for determining the functional relationship between controllable product or service
design factors and the outcomes of a process. 2. A method for adjusting the mean of a process by optimizing controllable variables. 3. A procedure for examining the relationship between random noise in the process and product
or service variability.
40 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Definition of Quality
A number of definitions of quality have been identified in the literature. The traditional defini- tion of quality was conformance to specifications. However, as discussed in Chapter 1 , in recent years this narrow definition of quality has been extended.
Taguchi also diverges from the traditional definition of quality. In Taguchi’s terms, ideal qual- ity refers to a reference point for determining the quality level of a product or service. This reference point is expressed as a target value. Ideal quality is delivered if a product (or a service tangible) per- forms its intended function throughout its projected life under reasonable operating conditions with- out harmful side effects. In services, because production and consumption of the service often occur simultaneously, ideal quality is a function of customer perceptions and satisfaction. Taguchi mea- sures service quality in terms of loss to society if the service is not performed as expected.
Quality Loss Function
Taguchi doesn’t agree with traditional quality thought as it relates to specification. Normally, when specifications are set, a target is specified with some allowance for variation. Taguchi doesn’t agree with the notion of allowable variation. He states that any deviation from target specs results in loss to society. Alternatively, traditional thinking implies there is no loss to society if a measurement is near to being out of specification but, nevertheless, remains within the established specification limits. For example, if the quality standard for a restaurant is that 6 (!1) ounces of french fries be included in each order of french fries, an average of 6.90 ounces of french fries per order over long periods of time would increase costs by 15%, which could translate into hundreds or thousands of dollars in lost profit, depending on the size of the firm. The 6.90 value is closer to being out of specification than within specification, but traditional thinking asserts that no loss is incurred by the company because the variation is within specification limits (i.e., because 6.9 6 7, the process is in spec). Again, Taguchi would assert that processes should result in a fill of 6 ounces.
Robust Design
The Taguchi concept of robust design states that products and services should be designed so that they are inherently defect-free and of high quality. Taguchi devised a three-stage process that achieves robust design through what he terms concept design, parameter design , and tolerance design.
This section has emphasized the conceptual foundation to the Taguchi method of quality improvement. Chapter 13 further explores this approach to quality improvement from a quantita- tive perspective.
LEADING CONTRIBUTORS TO QUALITY THEORY: THE REST OF THE PACK
The contributors mentioned to this point have stood the test of time, but it is important to remem- ber that as practitioners, they suffered from the biases associated with inductive reasoning. How- ever, as we see in this section, inductive reasoning might be preferred to the deductive development of untested theories. In the following paragraphs, several well-known quality authors are consid- ered. Some of these individuals, such as Robert Camp and Stephen Covey, have made important contributions to our understanding of quality. Others have been proven wrong. Underlined in this section is the risk associated with following unsound quality approaches.
Robert C. Camp
Robert C. Camp is the principal pioneer of benchmarking, the sharing of information between companies so that both can improve. This was thought impossible just a few decades ago, but his efforts within Xerox Corporation have proved otherwise. As a result of the work of Xerox and other corporations, benchmarking is now a very important, proven practice used worldwide. Camp’s best-selling book, Benchmarking: The Search for Industry Best Practices That Lead to
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 41
Superior Performance , is an outstanding handbook. Benchmarking is discussed in greater depth in Chapter 6 .
Stephen R. Covey’s “8” Habits
Stephen Covey is a management consultant who leads FranklinCovey, one of the most successful management consulting companies in the world. Dr. Covey is best known for his book, The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People. His approach to management is value-based in that he proposes that people in management live a life that balances professional with personal and spiritual growth.
According to Covey, our beliefs affect how we interact with others, which in turn affects how they interact with us. As a result, we need to focus on how we approach our lives rather than focusing on external factors that affect our lives. Implicit in many of Covey’s basic teachings are many quality management principles from people such as Deming. These principles are woven together with a values-based approach to life.
His seven habits include:
1. Be proactive. This is the ability to control one’s environment, rather than have it control you, as is so often the case. Managers need to control their own environment, using self- determination, and to demonstrate the power to respond to various circumstances.
2. Begin with the end in mind. This means that the manager needs to be able to see the desired outcome and concentrate on activities that help in achieving that end.
3. Put first things first. Managers need to personally manage themselves and implement activi- ties that aim to achieve the second habit—looking to the desired outcome. Covey states that habit two is the first, or mental, creation; habit three is the second, or physical, creation.
4. Think win-win. This is the most important aspect of interpersonal leadership because most achievements are based on cooperative effort. Therefore, the aim needs to be win-win solu- tions for all.
5. Seek first to understand and then to be understood. By developing and maintaining posi- tive relationships through good communications, the manager can be understood and can understand subordinates.
6. Synergize. This is the habit of creative cooperation—the principle that collaboration often achieves more than could be achieved by individuals working independently.
7. Sharpen the saw. This involves learning from previous experience and encouraging others to do the same. Covey sees development as one of the most important aspects in being able to cope with challenges and aspire to higher levels of ability. 12
Covey also published a book with an eighth habit:
8. Find your voice, and inspire others to find theirs. This invites the merging of talent, passion, and conscience to achieve and to help others achieve. This is implicit in a life of service.
Covey is discussed here because wherever you work, around the world, people will be discussing Covey’s habits. You should be familiar with them.
Tom Peters
Tom Peters is a noted author, consultant, and speaker who is widely recognized. The Stanford- trained coauthor of the book In Search of Excellence , Peters gives very popular seminars. His approach to studying quality in excellent companies was empirically based. The research for his book involved a case study of several firms and resulted in eight basic practices found in the excellent firms. These eight practices include a bias for action, getting close to the customer,
12 Adapted from Covey, S., The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People (New York: Free Press, 2004).
42 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
promoting entrepreneurship, productivity through people, value-driven management, sticking to the core competencies, lean staff, and implementing appropriate amounts of supervision and empowerment. In Search of Excellence is a thought-provoking, although methodologically loose, approach to assessing business practice.
Michael Hammer and James Champy
Michael Hammer and James Champy urged a form of deductive reasoning combined with enter- tainment that has resulted in unfortunate consequences for many people and companies. The prod- uct of this collaboration is termed reengineering. The underlying precept of reengineering is sound: Firms can become inflexible and resistant to change and must be able to change in order to become competitive. The problem is in the process they promoted in the book Reengineering the Corporation. This process involves the CEO of the corporation developing a business case (the Harvard University B-School method) followed by a set of recommendations. He or she then charges others with rapidly implementing the recommendations without further study or analysis.
Granted that, to an extent, managers misapplied his ideas, the human and financial costs have been great. In looking for business solutions, management’s objective should not be to adopt whatever tool is currently “hot.” A Closer Look at Quality 2-3 looks at the available “gurus” willing to help businesses with a revolutionary idea. A firm’s focus needs to be on the root causes and not the next hot concept.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 2-3 Selling Quality Fads 13
The expansion of the management theory industry in the recent past relies on uncertainty in work and business. This uncertainty drives management to find solutions outside the organization. Management can be led to embrace the ideas of a quality management “guru.” There are plenty of people willing to consult with a business and to present the latest management theory. Similar to the discussion in A Closer Look at Quality 2-1 , how does a company decide which guru to endorse? Is it based on the num- ber of books sold, charisma, consulting or speaking fee, or clientele? The list of attributes can go on and on, but none are a clear indicator of who to select.
Gurus are persuasive. With today’s technology, their message can quickly go viral, thus establish- ing some perceived credibility. Gurus are their own brand and look to increase it. The ideas they pro- pound in subsequent activities such as speech-giving and private consulting work all have to work together, building on and extending what has gone before. There will always be an element of self- interest in the advice of a guru. A company needs to be a beneficiary of the work and not another data point for the next book.
There is no clear definition of a business guru. Some successful consultants are never thought of as gurus and some gurus have had well-known failures. Both will exist as businesses look for solutions to problems. Management must not be solely persuaded by the big new ideas or original thinking, but by results. As this textbook has pointed out, many quality leaders have good ideas. However, these ideas need to be adapted to fit the needs of the firm.
13 Based on “How to Succeed in the Guru Business,” The Guardian, 4 March 2000.
By ignoring the necessity for attention to detail and analysis that has characterized many world-class firms, Hammer and Champy led many firms to make radical changes that have led to major failures. If there is a lesson to be learned from the reengineering failures, it is this: Some quality and performance improvement approaches are brainchildren. Others have been observed to work in a number of organizations, in a variety of cultures, and in a number of economic sectors. Avoid the former until they become the latter. This is common sense that has been validated by unfortunate experience. The risk of failure must be considered
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 43
in decision making. Analysis and attention to detail cannot be overlooked. Fortunately, there are well-founded approaches to organizational redesign that can be applied and have been applied for decades. The backlash against reengineering is likely to make these efforts less positively viewed.
VIEWING QUALITY THEORY FROM A CONTINGENCY PERSPECTIVE
By now you might be asking, “With all this disagreement about how to approach quality improve- ment, how should I proceed?” Perhaps you have gained more empathy for CEOs and business leaders who are distrustful of quality management as a field. There is a great deal of contradic- tory information about how firms should improve quality.
This mass of contradictory information is not unique to quality. A similar state exists in finance, where much divergent advice is given on how best to invest funds. In marketing, new approaches are constantly emerging. In fact, much of leadership and management has to do with being able to sort through and make sense of conflicting advice.
Because a variety of approaches can work to improve quality, it is best to focus on funda- mental questions such as: What are our strengths? Where are our competencies? In what areas do we need to improve? What are our competitors doing to improve? What is our organizational structure? These are fundamental questions that are asked during the self-assessment phase of strategic planning.
Once these questions are answered, a profound understanding of the business emerges. Based on this knowledge of the business, an understanding of the major approaches to quality improvement will provide a means for selecting those points, philosophies, concepts, and tools that will form the basis for improvement.
As already stated, Baldrige winners and other firms well known for quality do not adopt only one quality philosophy. For example, firms that are successful in quality do not adopt a blanket “Deming approach to quality.” The successful firms adopt aspects of each of the various approaches that help them improve. This is called the contingency perspective.
The keys to the contingency approach are an understanding of quality approaches, an understanding of the business, and the creative application of these approaches to the business. Thus the optimal strategy will apply quality philosophies and approaches to business on a contin- gency basis. From your own perspective, you need to make correct quality-related decisions. In doing this, consider the different quality experts in this chapter and choose those concepts and approaches that make sense for you.
RESOLVING THE DIFFERENCES IN QUALITY APPROACHES: AN INTEGRATIVE VIEW
There are many differences among the approaches to quality management along the supply chain espoused by the experts mentioned in this chapter. However, rather than focusing on differences, it is instructional to review the literature to identify common themes and messages.
Table 2-7 provides a list of variables addressed by Deming, Juran, Crosby, Taguchi, Ishikawa, and Feigenbaum. Also included is the services approach to quality by Parasuraman, Zeithamel, and Berry (cited in Chapters 1 and 6 ).
By studying the common themes of the various experts, it is clear that some occur often, whereas others are more idiosyncratic. The target in Figure 2-5 shows the variables at the core of quality management and those variables that, although important, are less widely supported. The following list of variables is not intended to be all encompassing. At the same time, these are variables that firms should address when seeking to improve performance. The core variables include the following:
44 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
TABLE 2-7 Quality Improvement Content Variables
Variables Deming Juran Crosby Taguchi Ishikawa Feigenbaum PZB
Leadership y y y y y Information analysis y y y y Strategic planning y y y y Employee improvement y y y y y y Quality assurance of products and services y y
y y y y
Customer role in quality y y y y Role of quality department y y y Environmental characteristics and constraints y
y
Philosophy driven y y y y y y Quality breakthrough y Project/team-based improvement
y
y
y
y
Core Leadership
Employee improvement Quality assurance
Customer role Philosophy
Inner Ring Information analysis Strategic planning
Outer Ring Environmental characteristics
Quality breakthrough
Quality department focus Team approach
FIGURE 2-5 A Categorization of Quality Management Content Variables
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 45
Leadership
The role of the leader in being the champion and major force behind quality improvement is critical. The implication is clear—companies having weak leadership will not achieve a market advantage in quality. The task for leaders is to become conversant with quality management approaches. They must then be willing to lead by example, not just by words.
Employee Improvement
Once the leadership is enlightened and motivated to go forward in the quality effort, employees must be trained and developed. This training is a long-term undertaking that requires firms to invest in their employees. When budgeting for training, the direct training delivery costs are not the only costs that should be budgeted. There are also indirect costs associated with temporary lost productivity and time spent in training.
Quality Assurance
Quality experts agree that quality can be assured only during the design phase. Although statisti- cal inspection is an important approach to improving quality, it is inherently reactive. Therefore, efforts must be invested in designing products, services, and processes so that they are consis- tently of high quality. McDonald’s Corporation has built a huge competitive advantage by invest- ing in processes and standardizing those processes so they always produce the same products regardless of location.
Customer Focus
An understanding of the customer is key to quality management efforts. Unless firms are gather- ing data about customers and analyzing these data, they are poorly informed about customer needs and wants. The mantra of many businesses today involves customer satisfaction. This is closely related to customer service as a central role for quality.
Quality Philosophy
Adoption of a philosophy toward quality improvement is also important. Whether it is the Dem- ing philosophy of continual improvement, the Ishikawa philosophy of total involvement, the Juran philosophy of project-by-project improvement, or a contingency philosophy, establishing a clear message provides a company with a map to follow during their quest for improvement. It is up to each organization to determine its own philosophy.
The inner and outer rings of variables in the literature include the following:
Information Analysis
Fact-based improvement refers to an approach that favors information gathering and analysis. One of the weaknesses of the reengineering approach was that it overlooked the need for in- depth information gathering and analysis. Most of the experts cited agree that data gathering is a key variable for the improvement of quality. Included in data gathering are statistically related quality control activities.
Strategic Planning
Juran supported the notion that quality improvement should be strategically planned. This pro- vides a framework for a rational quality strategy that will provide alignment with key business factors relating to the company.
46 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Environment or Infrastructure
Quality environment or infrastructure must be created that supports quality management efforts. This infrastructure must provide human resource systems and technological networks that sup- port all the other variables mentioned here.
Team Approach
One of the contemporary approaches to quality management learned from the Japanese is team- work. More and more, companies are forming cross-functional teams to achieve process improve- ment. Many firms also have formed teams to manage key processes. In some organizations, employees’ jobs are defined by the teams in which they are involved. In such organizations, the firm is a collection of loosely related teams performing the work of the firm.
Two outer-ring variables are major themes emerging from several of the experts and have been adopted widely.
Focus of the Quality Department
As a result of the dispersion of responsibility for quality, the role of the quality department has changed significantly. Rather than performing the policing function, these departments are filling more of a coaching role. Also, the knowledge these quality specialists have is useful for training and in-house consulting. Many firms have now turned their quality departments into profit cen- ters by “selling” their services, on a consulting basis, to other firms.
Philosophy Development
Leadership
Quality Assurance
Employee Improvement
Information Analysis
Team Building
Strategic Planning
Quality Dept. Role
Breakthrough
Customer Focus
FIGURE 2-6 A Theoretical Framework for Quality Management
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 47
Breakthrough
The need to make large improvements is not precluded by continuous improvement. Firms must find ways to achieve radical improvements. The process used to achieve this often involves tech- nology or organizational redesign. Analysis and data are necessary for successful breakthrough implementation.
THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK FOR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
As we have discussed in this chapter, many variables build the framework for a quality manage- ment theory (see Figure 2-6 ). Quality management begins with leadership. The organizational leaders have the authority and monetary ability to drive quality assurance, employee improve- ment, and the creation of a corporate philosophy.
The quality philosophy influences and guides the organizational leader in making deci- sions concerning quality strategy. The philosophy also helps guide decisions concerning quality assurance and employee improvement.
Leadership, quality assurance, philosophy, and employees are encompassed by a focus on the customer. From this perspective, the customer is the focus of all the activities of the firm.
The outer boxes in Figure 2-6 refer to activities and processes that help improve the core systems relating to people. The breakthrough improvement, team building, information analysis, strategic planning, and quality department role are some of the major variables forming the inter- related set of activities making up the quality system.
Summary This chapter briefly introduced the major voices in the growth of the quality movement. Although there is no single theory that is widely adopted to explain the quality phenomenon, the basis for a theory exists. The variables proposed in Figure 2-6 form the basis of a model that is testable. We propose that the interaction of these variables forms the basis for a quality system that will result in improved quality.
We introduced a variety of models. The models discussed have been applied in many dif- ferent organizations and settings all over the world. Therefore, these approaches have worked in a variety of contexts. These are not philosophies that someone just “thought up.” They should be pondered and, when appropriate, implemented to achieve organizational improvement.
Key Terms Benchmarking Deduction Induction Just-in-time (JIT) purchasing
Parallel processing in focused teams
Pareto’s law (the 80/20 rule) Quality at the source
Reengineering Sequential or departmental
approach to design
Discussion Questions 1. Define theory . Why are theories important for managing quality in the supply chain? 2. Describe the differences between induction and deduction. If you developed a theory based solely on
your experiences of quality practices in business organizations, would you be basing your theory on induction or deduction? Why?
3. Do you believe that the development of a unified theory of quality management is possible? What is a unified theory?
48 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
4. Why do managers need to be cautious about purchasing material (e.g., courses, workbooks, videos, etc.) on quality management from trainers and consultants? How would you go about selecting this type of material?
5. Briefly describe the contributions W. Edwards Deming made to the field of quality management. Why do you believe he is the most influential quality expert?
6. Deming believed poor quality was not the fault of workers but resulted from poor management of the system for quality improvement. Do you agree with Deming’s stand on this issue? Why or why not?
7. Deming was not an advocate of mass inspection as a means of ensuring product quality. Explain Dem- ing’s beliefs in this area.
8. Select one of Deming’s 14 points for management and describe how this point could have resulted in quality improvements in a business or volunteer organization with which you have been involved.
9. Briefly describe the contributions that Joseph M. Juran made to the field of quality management. What do you believe was Juran’s most significant contribution?
10. Is the concept of scientific management compatible with employee empowerment? Why or why not? 11. Does the phrase “quality is the responsibility of the quality department” reflect a healthy perspective
of quality management? Explain your answer. 12. Briefly describe the Japanese quality revolution following World War II. What can modern-day man-
agers learn from studying the history of this era? 13. What was Joseph Juran’s primary contribution to quality thinking in America? Discuss Juran’s three-
step process to improving quality. 14. Hothouse quality refers to those quality programs that receive a lot of hoopla and no follow-through.
Provide several examples of management practices that can lead to hothouse quality. How can hot- house quality be avoided?
15. Compare and contrast Deming’s, Juran’s, and Crosby’s perspectives of quality management. What are the major similarities and differences between their perspectives?
16. Describe Taguchi’s perspective of ideal quality. Does this perspective have practical applications? If you were a manager, would you consider using the Taguchi method? Why?
17. Why do you think reengineering programs have such a high failure rate? Can you think of ways to improve the success rate of reengineering programs?
18. Describe how the contingency perspective helps us understand why a single approach to quality man- agement may never emerge.
19. How can a philosophy of quality improvement help a firm in its overall efforts of improving the quality of its products and services?
20. Do you believe that CEOs and business managers should be skeptical about the quality movement, or should they embrace the quality movement and try to involve their firms in as many quality initiatives as possible? Explain your answer.
CASES
Case 2-1 Rheaco, Inc.: Making a Quality Turnabout by Asking for Advice Rheaco Homepage: www.rheaco.com
Rheaco, a Grand Prairie, Texas, company that manufac- tures high-precision parts for the aerospace and defense industries, was in trouble. The company was behind on 50% of its deliveries, was receiving complaints from its customers about product quality, and was experiencing internal scheduling and capacity problems. To make mat- ters worse, its customer base was shrinking as a result of cutbacks in defense spending, and many of its customers were reducing the number of suppliers that they main- tained in an effort to improve their own product quality.
Rather than giving up, the top managers at Rheaco sought help. Instead of hiring a costly consultant,
Rheaco asked the Automation and Robotics Research Institute (ARRI) at the University of Texas for assis- tance. The ARRI is a university-based institute that works with private manufacturing firms in an effort to disseminate advanced manufacturing concepts and phi- losophies. Initially, ARRI personnel assisted Rheaco’s top management team in articulating a vision statement, examining the company’s strengths and weaknesses, and pinpointing areas of concern. A number of con- cerns were identified that were contributing both directly and indirectly to Rheaco’s problems. Surpris- ingly, a strength identified by ARRI’s analysis was that
Chapter 2 • Quality Theory 49
mentation of cellular manufacturing improved the effi- ciency of Rheaco’s operations to the extent that one Rheaco employee remarked, “Material flowed like water, and people moved to the work instead of work to the people.” As a result of this initiative, in one particu- lar instance, the time required to produce a component decreased from 40 to 2 hours.
Other improvements were made, particularly in the areas of shipping and receiving, inventory control, and human resource management. After ARRI had been working with Rheaco for a period of time, the company started identifying and correcting problems on its own, which is exactly what is supposed to hap- pen. The mission of ARRI is to transfer advanced man- ufacturing concepts and philosophies to a private firm and then to withdraw. ARRI also helps the firms that it works with establish relationships with other ARRI- assisted companies, which was important to Rheaco.
Rheaco got back on its feet, largely as a result of its willingness to ask for help. Its flow rate dramatically improved, its manufacturing capacity increased by 300%, and the company solidified customer relation- ships. The Rheaco story is a reminder that companies cannot always go it alone in terms of achieving higher quality and improving manufacturing effectiveness. Many organizations at the federal, state, and commu- nity levels are equipped to provide business organiza- tions assistance at little or no cost.
Rheaco’s employees, despite the company’s difficulties, had an overall positive attitude. This quality no doubt contributed to Rheaco’s ability to eventually work through its problems and return to profitability.
A team of Rheaco and ARRI personnel tackled the company’s problems ranging from poorly structured man- ufacturing processes to low cooperation among depart- ments. Rather than telling Rheaco what to do, the ARRI team worked with Rheaco’s management and frontline employees to further define problem areas and develop solutions. An Enterprise Excellence Plan was developed, which acted as a road map for Rheaco’s improvement efforts. Consistent with this plan, the following initiatives were implemented, all of which were new to Rheaco:
• Cellular manufacturing • Just-in-time inventory control • Total quality management • Employee empowerment
Each of these initiatives was implemented with a clear rationale and with the support of Rheaco’s man- agement and employees. For example, Rheaco had a problem in the area of product flow. Cellular manufac- turing is a technique designed to improve the product flow rate by placing all the parts associated with a given product area close to one another. This technique reduces travel time, improves communication, and facilitates continuous flow of the product. The imple-
Discussion Questions
1. Many companies fail in their efforts to improve quality without ever having asked for advice. In your opinion, what are some of the reasons that inhibit firms from asking for timely advice? If you were a manager at Rheaco, would you have sought out an agency like the ARRI?
2. Discuss ARRI’s recommendations to Rheaco. How did these recommendations help Rheaco improve its product quality?
3. ARRI’s initial evaluation of Rheaco indicated that Rheaco’s employees, despite the company’s dif- ficulties, had an overall positive attitude. Do you believe this factor contributed to ARRI’s ability to provide Rheaco advice? Why or why not?
Case 2-2 Has Disney Developed a Theory of Quality Guest Services Management? Disney Homepage: disney.go.com Walt Disney World: disneyworld.disney.go.com/
As you approach the Magic Kingdom at Walt Disney World in Orlando, Florida, the recorded voice on the monorail announces you are about to arrive at a “magical place” that appeals to both the young and the young at heart. As you enter the park, the surroundings are truly magical. The flower beds are beautiful, the grounds are
clean, the buildings are spotless, and if you’re lucky, you might even catch a glimpse of Mickey, Goofy, Tigger, or Winnie the Pooh. After a while, it is easy to start believ- ing in the myth—that this is indeed a magical place.
But what is the Magic Kingdom—really? At its essence, it is a carefully conceived, masterfully executed
(continued)
50 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Discussion Questions
1. Is Disney’s level of emphasis on anticipating the behavior of its guests appropriate, or does the company expend too much effort in this area? Explain your answer.
2. Is it appropriate to think in terms of developing a “theory” of how guests will behave in a theme park or any other setting? If so, why?
3. Think about the last time that you visited a theme park. Were your expectations met? Did you have a sense that the operator of the park attempts to “anticipate” the behavior of the guests? If so, pro- vide some specific examples.
theatrical production. The attention to detail is remark- able. Everything that happens in the park is carefully scripted, from the way the Disney characters interact with children to the way guests are moved through the park. For instance, if you stand at the base of Cinderel- la’s Castle and look back toward the entrance to the park, you’ll notice a subtle difference between the side- walks that lead guests either to the right or to the left as they exit Main Street and enter the attractions area. The sidewalk to the right is wider than the sidewalk to the left. Why? Because through years of experience Disney has learned that people have a natural tendency to turn to the right rather than to the left. By building bigger sidewalks on the right, Disney is better able to handle the early morning crowds. Similarly, when you stand in line waiting to go on a ride, you’ll notice that the line is designed to snake back and forth rather than extend in a straight line. Disney also has learned over the years that lines appear to be “shorter” if they snake back and forth rather than extend in a straight line. By reducing the perceived length of its lines, Disney is able to increase customer satisfaction.
Through this and similar examples, what Disney has done is develop a “theory” (or theories) of how guests will behave in the Magic Kingdom and its other parks. As a result, the company is able to “predict” how its guests will move through its park, how they will jockey for position in line, and how they will react to a variety of circumstances. This knowledge enhances Disney’s abil- ity to deliver a high level of customer service. The lines move smoothly, the rides are easy to board, the directions
are simple and clear, and the souvenir shops are right where they need to be, not by accident, but because Dis- ney knows what works. Far from being magic, it is care- fully executed guest service management based on Disney’s “predictions” of how its guests will behave. At times, Disney’s understanding of its guests seems almost fanatical. For instance, at the company’s theme parks, most of the drinking fountains come in pairs, one high and one low, to accommodate a parent and a child. The drinking spouts are directed toward one another, so if a parent and child drink at the same time, the parent can watch the child, rather than being turned in the opposite direction. That way, the parent and the child both feel secure and can share a drink and a smile.
In addition to anticipating how its guests will behave, Disney also enhances the quality of its guest ser- vices by “setting the stage” for good quality experiences. For instance, at the Polynesian Hotel directly across the Seven Seas Lagoon from the Magic Kingdom, you can hear Hawaiian music playing underneath the water in the hotel’s main pool. At the Wilderness Lodge, you’ll notice that pine needles cover the grounds. The funny thing is, there are no pine trees nearby. The pine needles are peri- odically brought to the property by Disney employees and spread out over the grounds. Other areas of customer service and guest relations are equally as surprising.
Can a company’s approach to quality be based on “theories”? At the Magic Kingdom, it appears to be. By developing theories of their customers and other rele- vant activities, companies like Disney are able to enhance the quality of their products and services.
51
International trade is not a new phenomenon. The Roman, Greek, Egyptian, Chinese, Prus-sian, and other great empires were built on international trade. Columbus encountered the Americas for Queen Isabella of Spain when he was trying to establish a trade route to the East Indies across the Atlantic Ocean from Europe.
Although international trade has existed for a long time, the volume of international trade exploded after World War II and has continued to reach tremendous levels. This international diversity can be seen all around us. Probably the watch you wear, the computer you use, the car you drive, or the frying pan you use to prepare breakfast are not produced in the country where you live. The nationalities of products are even obscured as companies become more internation- ally dispersed. The most famous electric guitar in the world is the Fender Stratocaster. If you go to your local music shop, you will find that Stratocasters vary in cost from $500 to around $3,000. Some of the variation in cost is because of different features and model names. However, closer inspection to the headstock will show that much of the price variation has to do with where the guitar is produced. Fender Stratocasters can be produced in Japan, Mexico, Korea, and the United States. You might wonder which nationality of Fender Stratocaster garners the highest price on the free market. The result might surprise you. American-made Stratocasters are the highest priced and the most coveted by guitar players. The Japanese models are judged by most guitar- ists to be of slightly lesser quality. The Mexican and Korean guitars generally are considered beginner’s guitars—not for the serious musician. However, the perceived quality might not match the reality. Certainly, for many products, Japanese, European, Chinese, or other nations may be the preferred source.
The task of managing quality is affected by this increased globalization. This chapter dis- cusses the opportunities and obstacles created by globalization. The differences between regions of the world also include discussions of various quality approaches that have been developed in those regions and the practices that act as quality barometers within each.
Global competition is played out by different rules and for different stakes at each level.
—C. K. Prahalad and Gary Hamel
C H A P T E R 3
Global Supply Chain Quality and International
Quality Standards
52 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
MANAGING QUALITY FOR THE MULTINATIONAL FIRM (MNF)
Firms must cope with more diversity now than in the past. One of the causes of this diversity challenge has been the increased emphasis on international trade over the past half century. This growth in international trade has occurred as companies have sought new markets. Figure 3-1 shows that although the trade deficit has remained relatively constant over time, both imports and exports of products have been increasing steadily.
There are a variety of mechanisms that firms use in globalizing. The first is licensing. By licensing, a U.S. corporation can allow foreign firms to sell in restricted markets while using the design of the original designer. Licensing often involves the sale of the same product with another trademark in different countries. Through licensing, firms are able to reach international markets without having to establish international supply chains or marketing arms.
Firms also seek international markets through joint ventures, or partnering. This agreement is often reached when two firms have technology, products, or access to markets that each other wants.
Another approach to capturing international markets is globalization. The benefits of licens- ing and partnering are that the exporting firm does not have to globalize to make sales in interna- tional markets. However, they do this at the cost of sharing profits with other firms. Globalization means that a firm fundamentally changes the nature of its business by establishing production and marketing facilities in foreign countries. We refer to these firms as multinational corporations. With growing economies in many parts of the world, such as Mexico, India, Brazil, Eastern Europe, China, and Russia, firms need to globalize to participate in these markets. However, there are effects of globalization that firms often overlook. By globalizing, firms significantly change the physical environment, the task environment, and the social environment in which they operate. By changing their physical environment, firms locate themselves near to or far away from natural
1960 1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 Year
1990 1995 2000 2005 2010
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
–500
–1000
500
0 Trade
Balance
Imports
Exports
$ B
ill io
ns
FIGURE 3-1 U.S. Trade 1960–2010 Source: U.S. Department of Commerce.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 53
resources. For example, semiconductor firms requiring large amounts of water probably will not locate in Saudi Arabia or arid parts of Mexico. However, they may locate in one of the Asian coun- tries to be close to ready supplies of water as well as expanding markets.
The advantage of saving labor costs is often overemphasized when deciding to change the physical environment. Figure 3-2 shows the fiscal contrast between making an automobile in Mexico and in the United States. It shows that overall, because component costs and supply chain costs are higher in Mexico, the wage savings alone are not sufficient to make automobile production less expensive in Mexico.
The task environment of the firm has to do with the operating structure that the firm encoun- ters when globalizing. The economic structures, skills of the employees, compensation structure, technologies, and government agencies all vary when globalizing. The regulatory structures that firms encounter when globalizing require an understanding of international law. Although many view the U.S. government as somewhat regulatory, many times firms find themselves having to deal with very complex regulatory structures when establishing operations in countries such as Germany, Japan, or Spain. Technological choices vary as firms globalize. What works at home may not serve customers adequately abroad. For example, tobacco producers who globalize find that mass-production tech- nologies used in the United States are not flexible enough for the European Economic Community, where regulations concerning tobacco products vary a great deal from country to country.
The social environment facing globalizing corporations refers to cultural factors such as language, business customs, customer preferences, and patterns of communication. The cultural factors facing globalizing firms are often the most complex and difficult issues they will encounter. For example, the American businessperson who likes to have breakfast meetings will be frus- trated in Spain, where people do not go to work until later in the day.
As shown in Figure 3-3 , physical, task, and social environments have implications for the choices made in improving quality, particularly in the area of quality management. Differences in the physical, task, and social variables all add to the complexity and variability that firms experience. Therefore, there is significant tension between a need for standardization/high cen- tral control and loss of control because of decentralization.
10,000
5,000
0 U.S. Mexico
The cost of making a car
U.S. Mexico
Parts, components $7,750 $8,000 Labor 700 140 Supply chain costs 300 1,000 Inventory 20 40
Total $8,770 $9,180
FIGURE 3-2 Wages and Costs in Mexico (Average Hourly Compensation for Manufacturing Workers in U.S. Dollars) Source: Bureau of Labor Statistics, Office of Technology Assessment, 1998.
54 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Market diversity drives the need for culture-specific research and development (R&D). Although this can be true within a nation that is culturally diverse, such as the United States, it is especially true on the global front. There are few products, such as Coca-Cola, that translate well across different cultural horizons. Many companies must adapt their products to the preferences of the markets they are serving. This greatly increases the complexity of international marketing and R&D. For example, in some European countries, McDonald’s sells wine with their meals because it is the European habit to drink wine with meals. Often globalized firms also must apply for patents in different places in the world to protect their domestic patents. Patent applications are an important indicator of R&D productivity. As shown in Table 3-1 , only 4 of the top 12
Quality Management
Physical Environment
Task Environment
Social Environment
FIGURE 3-3 Global Factors That Affect Quality-Related Decisions
TABLE 3-1 U.S. Patent Applications, 2009 Rank
in 2009 Number of
Patents in 2009 Organization
1 4887 International Business Machines Corporation 2 3592 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 3 2901 Microsoft Corporation 4 2200 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha 5 1759 Panasonic Corporation 6 1669 Toshiba Corporation 7 1656 Sony Corporation 8 1534 Intel Corporation 9 1328 Seiko Epson Corporation 10 1269 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. 11 1188 Fujitsu Limited 12 1064 LG Electronics Inc. 13 1051 Hitachi, Ltd. 14 985 Ricoh Company, Ltd. 15 976 General Electric Company 16 966 Micron Technology, Inc. 17 913 Cisco Technology, Inc. 18 873 Fujifilm Corporation 19 725 Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha (Honda Motor Co., Ltd.) 20 714 Broadcom Corporation
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 55
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 3-1 Supply Chain Quality in the Global Context
www.national.com
At one time, National Semiconductor (NSC) of Santa Clara, California, sought advantage by sourcing its output all over the world. These sourcing firms represented partnerships that NSC developed around the globe. However, dealing with a global network of partners can be difficult. Because of the global nature of its distribution, 40% of NSC’s order-to-delivery cycle was taken up with distribution and sup- ply chain processes.
Today, customers need much faster response times. So NSC resorted to globalized logistics. However, the company’s logistical system was poorly suited to the demands of globalized logistics. The company’s network was a tangle of unnecessary interchanges, propped up by 44 different international freight forwarders and 18 different air carriers. What NSC realized was that its primary competence was making semiconductors. It was not adept in the logistics of transporting them.
To compensate for the poorly developed logistics systems, NSC maintained “just-in-case” inventory centers around the world. In the existing system, delivery could vary from 5 to 18 days. This was too much variation and made NSC unresponsive to customer requirements because of the poor response times.
After analyzing the supply chain marketplace, NSC decided to partner with Business Logistics Service, a subsidiary of Federal Express. Because logistics was not the primary competence of NSC, Federal Express could provide the support needed for NSC to improve its customer service. Therefore, the partnership lowered costs for NSC and provided income for Federal Express. This was important because with semiconductors the time from production to purchase can be three times faster than for other products. Therefore, a repeatable, reliable distribution system was needed to meet customer requirements for dependable delivery.
applicants for patents in the United States in 2005 were American companies. Six of the other companies were Japanese; two were Korean. Quality Highlight 3-1 shows how one company has adapted its supply chain practice to provide high-quality service on a worldwide basis.
Another means of entering international markets is not to globalize but to become an exporter. Exporters produce their products and ship them internationally, incurring high shipping costs but avoiding many of the problems, such as loss of control associated with globalization, that have been discussed so far. However, success on a multinational scale may be more difficult to attain for exporters because they never develop the marketing expertise and logistical capabilities associated with entering foreign markets. Many times pure export- ers are subject to limitations that resident companies do not have in terms of import tariffs and import restrictions.
Companies wishing to export to Japan have found it easier to establish partnerships in Japan than to engage in pure exportation. It is very difficult to navigate the complex Japanese marketing structure without partnerships and long experience. This often involves ceding par- tial ownership of the firm to Japanese partners to obtain access to complicated distribution networks.
Another issue with exporting is that the United States developed a negative quality image during past decades. This image improved greatly as America reached quality levels similar to Japan’s in many markets. Research 1 shows that quality still is a significant factor in helping U.S. exporters achieve success. Figure 3-4 shows an empirically derived model for quality-based suc- cess for exporting companies. In this model, it is shown that firms that are characteristically
1 Barringer, B., Foster, S., and Macy, G., “The Role of Quality in Determining Export Success,” Quality Management Journal 6, 4 (1999): 55–70.
56 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
entrepreneurial in nature and plan their exports effectively tend to have higher quality. For exporting firms, quality leads to lower price and greater export success.
Although there are a variety of means for entering the global market, one thing is certain: The global market is a reality that must be addressed. Gibson Guitar in Bozeman, Montana, does not operate in a vacuum. Besides exporting guitars overseas, they must produce products that meet international standards of quality or they will not be able to sell their guitars—even in Bozeman. Through local vendors or by Internet order, Bozeman guitarists can buy many quality guitars that are made by Takamine, Yamaha, Ibanez, or other high-quality foreign companies that are com- peting in the local market.
Next we continue the theme of integrative quality by exploring quality improvement within U.S., Japanese, and European contexts.
QUALITY IMPROVEMENT: THE AMERICAN WAY
America has been home to many modern quality management leaders, such as Shewhart, Deming, Juran, and others. The U.S. military also was an early adopter of many quality techniques. Origi- nally, the main interest in quality in the United States was in the application of statistics to solve quality problems. In recent years, the approach has become much more behavioral as teams and other approaches have been applied. We begin by discussing a very important model for quality management in the United States, the Malcolm Baldrige Award.
THE BALDRIGE PERFORMANCE EXCELLENCE PROGRAM
At the end of Chapter 2 we discussed several operational variables that should be addressed in assessing our future directions for quality improvement. The power of these variables is that they focus management on systemic issues rather than the tactical day-to-day problems. However, management needs a means for assessing the approaches it has employed to improve operating performance. One of the most powerful self-assessment mechanisms is the Baldrige Performance Excellence Program (hereafter referred to as Baldrige) ( Figure 3-5 ). The success of the Baldrige program in the United States has influenced international practice and has formed the basis for several international awards. Table 3-2 shows a listing of Baldrige winners.
The Baldrige process is open to small (less than 500 employees) and large firms (more than 500 employees) in the manufacturing, health care, education not-for-profit, and service sectors.
Firm Characteristics
Product Strategy
Performance
Export Success
Entrepreneurship
Export Planning
Low Price
High Quality
Standardization
Promotion
FIGURE 3-4 Export Quality Model Source: Based on B. Barringer, S. Foster, and G. Macy, “The Role of Quality in Determining Export Success,” Quality Mangement Journal 6, 4 (1999): 64.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 57
FIGURE 3-5 Baldrige Award Source: Official contribution of the National Institute of Standards and Technology; not subject to copyright in the United States.
Some of the key characteristics of the quality award include the following attributes:
• The criteria focus on business results. Organizations must show outstanding results in areas such as financial performance, customer satisfaction, customer retention, product performance, service performance, productivity, supplier performance, and public citizen- ship. To win the award, applicants must show that they consistently have performance levels at best-in-class and best-of-the-best. Business results for the Baldrige winner must be exemplary and set the standard for the rest of the world. The importance of business results is reflected in the scoring of the Baldrige. The weight for results has ranged from 25% to 45% of the total score. The reason for the emphasis on results has to do with two related factors. It is quite embarrassing if a Baldrige winner has financial trouble, and the Baldrige winner must be able to serve as a role model to other firms.
• The Baldrige criteria are nonprescriptive and adaptable. Although the focus of the Baldrige is on results, the means for obtaining these results are not prescribed. Therefore, the crite- ria are not tactically prescriptive. For example, the criteria do not specify which tools, techniques, or organization a company should use to improve. However, at the strategic level, the Baldrige criteria can be viewed as prescriptive. In explanation, a company that does not gather data from its customers, or a company that does not have an effective benchmarking program, will not be Baldrige-qualified. Therefore, the core values and key characteristics of the Baldrige criteria can be viewed as strategically prescriptive.
• The criteria support company-wide alignment of goals and processes. Once organizational strategy is formulated, connecting and reinforcing measures are developed that support and monitor strategic outcomes. Measures aid in alignment and ensure consistency of purpose while supporting innovation. Alignment between strategic goals and operational subplans helps foster a learning-based system.
• The criteria permit goal-based diagnosis. The criteria and scoring guidelines provide assess- ment dimensions. These are approach, deployment, and results. The approach defines the method or system for addressing a particular performance objective. Deployment implies
58 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
TABLE 3-2 Baldrige Winners by Year Award Company
2011 Nonprofit Concordia Publishing House Health Care Henry Ford Health System Health Care Schneck Medical Center Health Care Southcentral Foundation
2010 Manufacturing MEDRAD Manufacturing Nestle Purina PetCare Co. Small Business Freese and Nichols Inc. Small Business K&N Management Small Business Studer Group Education Montgomery County Public Schools Health Care Advocate Good Samaratin Hospital
2009 Manufacturing Honeywell Federal Manufacturing & Technologies LLC Small Business MidwayUSA Health Care AtlantiCare Health Care Heartland Health Nonprofit VA Cooperative Studies Program Clinical Research Pharmacy
Coordinating Center 2008 Manufacturing Cargill Corn Milling (CCM) Education Iredell-Statesville Schools Health Care Poudre Valley Health System 2007 Small Business PRO-TEC Coating Company Nonprofit City of Coral Springs Health Care Mercy Health System Nonprofit U.S. Army Armament Research, Development, and Engineering
Center (ARDEC) Health Care Sharp HealthCare 2006 Service Premier Inc. Health Care North Mississippi Medical Center Small Business MESA Products Inc. 2005 Manufacturing Sunny Fresh Foods, Inc. Service DM Petroleum Operations Company Small Business Park Place Lexus Education Jenks Public Schools Education Richland College Health Care Bronson Methodist Hospital 2004 Manufacturing The Bama Companies, Inc. Education Kenneth W. Monfort College of Business Small Business Texas Nameplate Company, Inc. Health Care Robert Wood Johnson University Hospital Hamilton 2003 Manufacturing Medrad, Inc. Service Boeing Aerospace Support Service Caterpillar Financial Services Corporation—U.S. Small Business Stoner, Inc. Education Community Consolidated School District 15 Health Care Baptist Hospital, Inc. Health Care Saint Luke’s Hospital of Kansas City
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 59
Award Company
2002 Manufacturing Motorola Commercial, Government & Industrial Solutions Sector Health Care SSM Health Care Small Business Branch-Smith Printing Division 2001 Manufacturing Clarke American Checks, Inc. Education Pearl River School District Small Business Pal’s Sudden Service Education University of Wisconsin-Stout Education Chugach School District 2000 Manufacturing Dana Corporation—Spicer Driveshaft Division (now Torque Traction
Manufacturing Inc.) Manufacturing KARLEE Company, Inc. Service Operations Management International, Inc. Small Business Los Alamos National Bank 1999 Manufacturing STMicroelectronics, Inc.—Region Americas Service The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, L.L.C. Service BI Small Business Sunny Fresh Foods 1998 Manufacturing Boeing Airlift and Tanker Programs Small Business Texas Nameplate Company, Inc. Manufacturing Solar Turbines Incorporated 1997 Manufacturing 3M Dental Products Division Manufacturing Solectron Corporation Service Merrill Lynch Credit Corporation Service Xerox Business Services 1996 Manufacturing ADAC Laboratories Service Dana Commercial Credit Corporation Small Business Custom Research Inc. Small Business Trident Precision Manufacturing, Inc. 1995 Manufacturing Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Building Products Operations Manufacturing Corning Incorporated, Telecommunications Products Division 1994 Service AT&T Consumer Communications Services (Now the Consumer
Markets Division of AT&T) Small Business Wainwright Industries, Inc. Service Verizon Information Services (formerly GTE Directories
Corporation) 1993 Small Business Ames Rubber Corporation Manufacturing Eastman Chemical Company 1992 Manufacturing AT&T Network Systems Group Transmission Systems Business Unit
(Now part of Alcatel-Lucent) Service The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company (Now part of Marriott
International) Service AT&T Universal Card Services (Now part of Citigroup) Manufacturing Texas Instruments Incorporated Defense Systems & Electronics
Group (Now part of Raytheon Systems Co.) Small Business Granite Rock Company 1991 Small Business Marlow Industries, Inc. Manufacturing Zytec Corporation (Now part of Artesyn Technologies) Manufacturing Solectron Corporation (continued)
60 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
that the approach has been implemented in the organization. Results show the outcomes of the approach and deployment. By assessing approach, deployment, and results in several areas, firms are able to assess their current strengths and areas for improvement. Once areas for improvement are identified, these can be prioritized and tackled one by one.
The model for the Baldrige consists of seven interrelated categories that compose the orga- nizational system for performance. The seven Baldrige categories are shown in Figure 3-6 ,
Notice that the basis of the Baldrige model is information and analysis. This confirms the core value of management by fact. Business results are also highlighted, reinforcing the results orientation of the Baldrige framework and criteria. Each of these seven major categories is divided into items and areas to address. The items are denoted by a decimal number, such as 1.1, 2.2, and so on. The areas are given a letter, such as 1.1.a, 2.2.b, and so forth. The number of items and areas varies from year to year because the award criteria are constantly updated by the Bald- rige staff, examiners, and judges. We briefly discuss the Baldrige criteria. A complete set of the Baldrige criteria can be downloaded for free from www.nist.gov .
Category 1 provides the award criteria for leadership. This category is used to evaluate the extent to which top management is personally involved in creating and reinforcing goals, values,
4 Measurement, analysis, and knowledge management
Organizational Profile: Environment, Relationships, and Strategic
Situation
5 Workforce
focus
2 Strategic planning
1 Leadership
3 Customer
focus
6 Operations
focus
7 Results
FIGURE 3-6 Baldrige Award Framework Source: Foundation for the Malcolm Baldrige Award, 2011. Criteria for Performance Excellence, 2011.
Award Company
1990 Manufacturing Cadillac Motor Car Company Manufacturing IBM Rochester Service Federal Express Corporation Small Business Wallace Co., Inc. 1989 Manufacturing Milliken & Company Manufacturing Xerox Corporation, Business Products & Systems 1988 Small Business Globe Metallurgical, Inc. Manufacturing Westinghouse Electric Corporation Commerical Nuclear Fuel Division
Source: www.baldrige.nist.gov , 2010.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 61
directions, customer involvement, and a variety of other issues. Within Category 1, the applicant outlines what the firm is doing to fulfill its responsibility as a corporate citizen. Included with corporate citizenship is a documentation of measures and facts relating to how the company ful- fills its societal responsibilities.
Category 2 focuses on how the company establishes strategic directions and how it sets its tactical action plans to implement the strategic plans. In addressing how the company establishes strategic direction, the applicant should outline methods, measures, deployment, and evaluation/ improvement factors relating to establishing strategic plans.
Category 3 addresses customer focus. To be successful in serving the customer, firms must understand the product and service attributes that are important to the customer. This is documented as well as how the firm assesses the relative importance of product or service fea- tures. The processes for listening to and learning from customers and markets also must be eval- uated, improved, and kept current with changing business needs.
Category 4, measurement, analysis, and knowledge management, relates to the firm’s selection, management, and use of information to support company processes and to improve firm performance. These data include both financial information, such as sales, assets, and liabil- ities, and nonfinancial data, such as operating measures of quality, productivity, and speed of response to customer requests. These measures are only introduced at this point; no results are provided. The applicant then describes how these measures are integrated into an information system that can be used to track and improve company performance. Once data and measures are tracked in an information system, people must deploy the data to ensure that company goals and objectives are being achieved. Robust processes for knowledge management should be described.
Category 5 deals with the workforce focus. The workforce is to be enabled to develop and use its full potential, aligned with company objectives. This involves developing an internal envi- ronment conducive to full participation and personal growth, including human resources devel- opment. This initiative is directed toward process and performance improvement. Employees must be empowered to understand and respond to changes in customer needs and requirements. To facilitate this learning, skill sharing and open communication with employees are necessary to provide a cohesive work system. The applicant outlines the systems in place that provide com- pensation, recognition, and workforce engagement.
Category 6 examines key aspects of operations focus. These aspects include customer focus in design, work system, design for services and products, support processes, and processes relating to partners. The design of products must be changed and upgraded to reflect changes in customer requirements and technology. Systems are outlined that measure and assess these changes in requirements. Also addressed is readiness for emergencies and supply chain management.
Category 7 documents the results of the other categories and requires a series of tables and graphs that demonstrate the operational and business results of the firm. Although all the infor- mation provided by the applicant is considered by Baldrige examiners to be highly sensitive, Category 7 is often considered the most sensitive by the applicant. For example, because reporting requirements are less exacting for privately held firms, many of the results reported are proprie- tary. In spite of this, if a firm wishes to qualify for a site visit, the requested information must be made available to the examiners.
After this discussion of the Baldrige, you might be interested to learn about Malcolm Bal- drige. A Closer Look at Quality 3-1 gives some details about his life.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 3-1 Who Was Malcolm Baldrige?
Howard Malcolm Baldrige was the U.S. secretary of commerce from 1980 to 1987. He died while in office, doing what he loved best. He was riding his horse, practicing for the calf-roping event in a Cali- fornia rodeo, when the horse fell and fatally injured its rider. Secretary Baldrige was 64.
(continued)
62 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
The Baldrige Process
For the firm applying for the Baldrige award, the first step is eligibility determination. Because the Baldrige pertains only to firms chartered in the United States, eligibility must first be deter- mined by mailing an eligibility determination form to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Once eligibility is established, the applicant sends the completed applica- tion to NIST. The application is then subjected to first-round review by Baldrige examiners. Dur- ing this review, examiners read and score the applications. Judges then review the scoring to determine which applicants will continue to consensus. During the consensus phase, between five and eight examiners who have scored the application participate in a conference call to determine a consensus score for each of the scoring items.
Once consensus is reached, judges receive a consensus report from the senior examiner leading the examiner team. Judges then make a site-visit determination. At this point, applicants scoring sufficiently high are granted a site visit. In the past, simply the granting of a Baldrige site visit has been cited as evidence of high-quality processes. These firms sometimes refer to them- selves as “ Baldrige qualified. ”
The site visit consists of a team of four to six examiners visiting a company over a period not to exceed one week. Typically, the site visit consists of two to three days at the company site and another two days in the hotel to prepare the site-visit reports for the Baldrige judges. These reports show the results of the site visit. The purpose of the site visit is to verify and clarify those por- tions of the Baldrige application having the greatest impact on the judges’ scores. During the
The competitive spirit that spurred Secretary Baldrige to win rodeo events characterized his life. A graduate of Yale University, he entered the army just prior to World War II and quickly rose through the ranks. After the war, he took a job as a supervisor in a small Connecticut foundry. His business career was marked by much success. Toward the end of his career, he led a turnaround effort at Scovill Corporation in Waterbury, Connecticut, based on a steadfast commitment to quality and customer service.
Baldrige believed in good government and was active in politics. His political activity, along with his passion for quality and reputation as a quality leader, led to his appointment as the secretary of com- merce in 1980. As secretary of commerce, his top priority was strengthening American industry’s ability to compete successfully in international markets. He believed that the role of the U.S. government was to establish fair trade practices and that the role of private industry was to improve its technology and gain a global reputation for quality products and services.
The Baldrige award was a great tribute to Malcolm Baldrige. Some of the participants in the Bal- drige application process have been passionate about the value of the program. Following are two quota- tions that illustrate this point:
In my opinion, win or lose, the greatest value in applying for the Baldrige award is the feedback report compiled by the examiners. This objective evaluation prepared by a team of well-trained, hard working experts provided the information and focus necessary for us to
cause positive changes in our organization. —Henry A. Bradshaw
Armstrong Building Products
Participating in the Baldrige process energized improvement efforts. The energy resulted from the team motivation that occurs when pursuing a common goal. That trend has
continued. We have reduced the number of in-process defects to only one-tenth what they were at the time we won the Baldrige.
—Phil Roether Texas Instruments
The legacy of Malcolm Baldrige lives on in the benefits derived from the recipients and observers of the Malcolm Baldrige program competition. Much can be learned about quality by becoming a keen observer of the companies that win the coveted award.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 63
first round of scoring, examiners identify strengths, areas for improvement, and site-visit issues. Prior to the site visit, the site-visit team reviews and prioritizes the site-visit issues. Members of the site-visit team then assign responsibilities to team members to complete during the site-visit. After these assignments are complete, the examiners finish their reports while on the site visit. The results are transmitted for use by the judges in final determination of a winner.
One of the most important outcomes of the Baldrige process is examiner feedback to appli- cant companies. As shown in Figure 3-7 , feedback reports are provided to the applicants as part of the assessment process. Many firms have found these comments helpful in identifying gaps in deployment in their improvement processes. As the Baldrige process has matured and become more focused on overall company performance, the feedback reports have become more useful for improving overall management of processes and systems. The feedback report is one of the major benefits of the Baldrige process. The feedback report includes
• The scoring summary , which is a synthesis of the most important strengths and areas for improvement for each of the seven Baldrige categories.
Evaluation Process
Stage 1 Independent review
Stage 2 Consensus review
Stage 3 Site visit review
Select for consensus review?
Judges
Select for site visit? Judges
Review and recommend winners
Judges
Receive applications
Feedback report to applicant
No
Feedback report to applicant
No
Feedback report to applicant
Feedback Report
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
FIGURE 3-7 Baldrige Process Source: Foundation for the Malcolm Baldrige Award, 2011. Criteria for Performance Excellence, 2011.
64 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
TABLE 3-3 Baldrige Scoring Guidelines Score Process
0% or 5% • No SYSTEMATIC APPROACH to item requirements is evident; information is ANECDOTAL . • Little or no DEPLOYMENT of any SYSTEMATIC APPROACH is evident. • An improvement orientation is not evident; improvement is achieved through
reacting to problems. • No organizational ALIGNMENT is evident; individual areas or work units operate
independently. 10%, 15% 20%, or 25%
• The beginning of a SYSTEMATIC APPROACH to the BASIC REQUIREMENTS of the item is evident.
• The APPROACH is in the early stages of DEPLOYMENT in most areas or work units, inhibiting progress in achieving the BASIC REQUIREMENTS of the item.
• Early stages of a transition from reacting to problems to a general improvement orientation are evident.
• The APPROACH is ALIGNED with other areas or work units largely through joint problem solving.
30%, 35%, 40%, or 45%
• An EFFECTIVE , SYSTEMATIC APPROACH , responsive to the BASIC REQUIREMENTS of the item, is evident.
• The APPROACH is DEPLOYED , although some areas or work units are in early stages of DEPLOYMENT .
• The beginning of a SYSTEMATIC APPROACH to evaluation and improvement of KEY PROCESSES is evident.
• The APPROACH is in the early stages of ALIGNMENT with your basic organizational needs identifi ed in response to the Organizational Profi le and other process items.
50%, 55%, 60%, or 65%
• An EFFECTIVE , SYSTEMATIC APPROACH , responsive to the OVERALL REQUIREMENTS of the item, is evident.
• The APPROACH is well DEPLOYED , although DEPLOYMENT may vary in some areas or work units.
• A fact-based, SYSTEMATIC evaluation and improvement PROCESS and some organi- zational LEARNING , including INNOVATION , are in place for improving the effi ciency and EFFECTIVENESS of KEY PROCESSES .
• The APPROACH is ALIGNED with your overall organizational needs identifi ed in response to the Organizational Profi le and other process items.
70%, 75%, 80%, or 85%
• An EFFECTIVE , SYSTEMATIC APPROACH , responsive to the MULTIPLE REQUIREMENTS of the item, is evident.
• The APPROACH is well DEPLOYED , with no signifi cant gaps. • Fact-based, SYSTEMATIC evaluation and improvement and organizational LEARNING ,
including INNOVATION , are KEY management tools; there is clear evidence of refi nement as a result of organizational-level ANALYSIS and sharing.
• The APPROACH is INTEGRATED with your current and future organizational needs identi- fi ed in response to the Organizational Profi le and other process items.
90%, 95%, or 100%
• An EFFECTIVE , SYSTEMATIC APPROACH , fully responsive to the MULTIPLE REQUIREMENTS of the item, is evident.
• The APPROACH is fully DEPLOYED without signifi cant weaknesses or gaps in any areas or work units.
• Fact-based, SYSTEMATIC evaluation and improvement and organizational LEARNING through INNOVATION are KEY organization-wide tools; refi nement and INNOVATION , backed by ANALYSIS and sharing, are evident throughout the organization.
• The APPROACH is well INTEGRATED with your current and future organizational needs identifi ed in response to the Organizational Profi le and other process items.
Source: Foundation for the Malcolm Baldrige award, 2011. Criteria for Performance Excellence, 2011.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 65
• The individual scoring range , which provides a 20-point scoring range (e.g., item 2.1: 40%–60%). This gives insight concerning the relative areas of strength and areas that need improvement.
• The scoring distribution , which provides the percentage of applicants for a particular year that scored in each of the eight scoring bands.
• The examiner comments , which give feedback concerning the organization. These are created from actual examiner comments and are the meat of the feedback report.
Baldrige Scoring
The Baldrige applications are scored with supporting written guidelines. These guidelines are provided in Table 3-3 .
One of the unique attributes of Baldrige scoring is the 50% anchor. For an approach and deployment (A&D) item to score 50%, there must be a sound, systematic approach that is responsive to the overall purposes of the item. There also must be fact-based improvement processes in place in key areas, with emphasis on improvement rather than reaction to problems. Also, the approach is well deployed, although some areas or work units may be in very early stages of deployment. Trans- lated, this means a firm must have an approach that addresses all the aspects of the item, and the approaches must be deployed. This means that if you are doing everything according to the Baldrige criteria, you will score 50%. To score in the higher scoring bands, you must demonstrate in the appli- cation not only that you have all the major aspects of a quality system, but the quality system also must have been refined and improved over an extended period of time. Quality Highlight 3-2 shows how Honeywell won the Baldrige award by improving and refining its processes.
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 3-2 Honeywell Federal Manufacturing & Technologies
www.51.honeywell.com/aero/kcp
Honeywell Federal Manufacturing & Technologies (FM&T), LLC, is a management and operations contractor with the National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA) at its Kansas City, Missouri, plant and several locations on or around Kirtland Air Force Base in New Mexico. The facilities under its management are multidisciplinary engineering and manufacturing operations specializing in electrical, mechanical, and engineered material components for national defense systems. With a reputation for being able to do the “near impossible,” FM&T supports government agencies, national laboratories, universities, and U.S. industry.
Commitments to Quality With commercial best practices such as Six Sigma and Lean (waste reduction), FM&T has built its facilities into manufacturing centers of excellence. FM&T’s use of the Six Sigma Plus Continuous Improvement Model ensures integration of customer and business requirements into all design projects and has led to multiple cycles of learning and improvement for many of the organization’s work pro- cesses. The result is a business culture that pays precise attention to detail and insists on delivering results—a culture FM&T describes as “Commitments Made, Commitments Kept.”
Additionally, this approach has yielded impressive financial results:
• Cost savings from increased productivity and deployed innovations have been between $23.5 million and $27 million annually for the past three fiscal years.
• Energy conservation has improved by at least 20% each year from 2006 to 2009. • Supply-chain savings have increased from approximately $2 million in 2007 to approximately
$65 million in 2009. (continued)
66 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Being a Baldrige Examiner
Appointment to the board of examiners for the Malcolm Baldrige award is a very prestigious des- ignation. In recent years, the board of examiners has consisted of between 200 and 300 members from across the United States. Examiners for the board of examiners come from a variety of fields. There are CEOs, academics, physicians, quality specialists, consultants, and retirees. How- ever, all these people have one thing in common: They are committed to the core values of the Baldrige award. They demonstrate this commitment by being willing to give up approximately 10% of their year to serve on the board with no compensation. Besides scoring applications, examiners are asked to write training cases, update the criteria, and help to improve the Baldrige process. The examiners are expected to exhibit the highest professionalism, maintain absolute confidentiality, and be prompt and organized in responding to the requirements of the position.
The strictest standards to avoid conflict of interests are maintained by examiners. Examiners must divulge all their investments to NIST. They also must document for whom they have worked or consulted and who the major competitors, suppliers, and customers are for their present and former employers. This conflict-of-interest information is used by NIST to assign examiners to applicants.
State Awards
In recent years, the number of applicants for the Malcolm Baldrige award has decreased. There are numerous explanations for this. A major reason is that applications declined in number once firms realized how difficult it would be to actually win the Baldrige award. Another reason is the existence of state awards. In recent years, more than 1,000 firms in the United States applied for state quality awards. The state awards are important because they give firms a basis to become familiar with the Baldrige process. Many recent winners of the Baldrige award have previously won state awards.
A review of the different state award programs reveals three categories of approaches to state awards. The first approach is the full-Baldrige approach. In these states, the Baldrige cri- teria have been adopted, and firms apply using the Baldrige criteria. In these cases, the criteria are used, but the scores required to win the state awards are lower than those for the national awards. This approach occurs often in more populated states (e.g., Missouri, New York, and Florida) that have well-funded award programs.
An approach that some other states have taken is the Baldrige-lite approach. This approach uses the Baldrige criteria but with a simplified process and/or application. This occurs in states such as Massachusetts and California.
A Culture Aligned, Checked, and Filtered for Success FM&T’s vision is to be the preferred partner with the United States Government and its allies, distin- guished by our trusted relationships and recognized for our ability to deliver exceptional solutions for national and homeland security. This vision goes hand-in-hand with the organization’s mission to design and deliver products, manage operations, and provide targeted services to advance national and home- land security objectives for the United States Government and its allies. To support these goals, FM&T developed a robust, systematic governing system and planning process called the Management Assur- ance System. By incorporating strategic planning, checks that ensure processes align with goals, and feedback scorecards, the system identifies, implements, measures, and sustains the “critical-to-quality” needs necessary for desired performance.
Throughout the Management Assurance System is an emphasis on performance measurement and management by fact. This emphasis begins with the organization’s strategic plan, which annually follows eight steps to identify successes and challenges, and then uses the information obtained to improve processes. The Enterprise Alignment Process ensures that the daily accountability of the sala- ried and hourly workforce is aligned to the FM&T balanced scorecard and strategic plan.
The company also regularly identifies its core competencies by testing each one against a “VIRO” filter to see if each is Valuable, hard to Imitate, Rare, and an Opportunity to exploit. Recently, FM&T underwent realignment to better focus on its strengths and improve its support to customers.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 67
The third approach is the multilevel approach. Using the multilevel approach, often the top level includes the full-Baldrige criteria. At the second level, a Baldrige-lite approach is used. Then, in lower levels, recognition is provided for firms that are putting forth significant effort toward improving performance.
The state award programs are becoming important vehicles for promoting involvement in the Baldrige process. Top management might become interested in applying for a state quality award where the competition is less demanding than the Baldrige award. State awards also pro- vide important education for companies through conferences and the literature they provide. Examiner training given through state award programs helps to develop expertise among employ- ees of local companies. These examiners can then disseminate this training within the firms where they work.
QUALITY IMPROVEMENT: THE JAPANESE WAY
The Japanese must be credited with raising worldwide quality to a new level of competitiveness. They created competition through quality as their automobiles and electronic products were exported to the nations of the world in huge numbers. Using quality as a competitive weapon to win orders in the marketplace, the Japanese provided an example for the rest of the world that has benefited producers and consumers all over the world.
Deming Prize
Before discussing Japanese quality approaches, we first touch on the Deming Prize. The Deming Prize for quality was established in 1951 by the Japanese Union of Scientists and Engineers (JUSE). The award was funded by the proceeds from Deming’s book on statistical process control that resulted from his teachings in Japan. The award now commemorates the distinguished service to Japan by W. E. Deming. The Deming Prize is awarded to individuals and groups who have contributed to the field of quality control. The examination and award process is performed under the direction of the JUSE Deming Award Committee. The Deming Prize process is open to non- Japanese firms. For example, Florida Power and Light and AT&T have won the Deming Prize.
The Deming Prize is much more focused on processes than is the Baldrige. This is reflected in the categories and items contained in the Deming Prize. Table 3-4 compares categories of the Deming, Baldrige, and European Quality Award competitions. A review of these categories shows the Baldrige is more general and managerial. At the same time, the Deming Prize is more prescriptive. More information about the Deming Prize can be found at http://www.juse.or.jp/e/ .
TABLE 3-4 Comparison of the Baldrige Award, Deming Prize, and European Quality Award
Baldrige Award Deming Prize European Quality Award
Leadership Policy deployment Leadership Strategic planning New product development Strategy Customer focus Maintenance and improvement People Measurement, analysis, and knowledge management
Management system Partnerships and resources
Workforce focus Information analysis Processes, products, and services Operations focus Human resources development Customer results Results People results Society results Key results
68 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Other Japanese Contributions to Quality Thought
As Juran stated, the genius of the Japanese was in their ability to maintain a focus on the minu- tiae and detail associated with process improvement. They also set the world standard for effi- cient, clean, and waste-free processes. In this section we discuss the Japanese approach to production and service. We attempt to identify those contributions that are uniquely Japanese.
Lean Production
Two views emerge in the literature that pertain to lean manufacturing. The first view of lean is a philosophical view of waste reduction. This view asserts that anything in the process that does not add value for the customer should be eliminated. Given this view, quality problems cause scrap and rework and are wasteful. The second view of lean is a systems view stating that lean is a group of techniques or systems focused on optimizing quality processes. An example of this view is the lean production system refined by the Toyota Motor Company and spread to the rest of the world. For our purposes, we combine the philosophical and systems views to define lean as a productive system whose focus is on optimizing processes through the philosophy of con- tinual improvement.
LEAN AS A PHILOSOPHY As we showed in Chapter 2 , philosophy is an important element in improving quality. Perhaps it is because of the difficulty associated with communicating quality that philosophies are so important. Words and definitions help us communicate on a cerebral level. Philosophies, once internalized, help individuals and organizations to communicate on a feeling-based level. For Toyota Motor Company, the focus was on the continual reduction of waste. Shigeo Shingo, the industrial engineer who was fundamental in helping Toyota to reduce waste, identified a group of seven wastes that workers could address in improvement processes ( Table 3-5 ). Lean is a philosophy that requires discipline. As we see in Quality Highlight 3-3 problems occur when the discipline is lost.
TABLE 3-5 Shingo’s Seven Wastes
1. Waste of overproduction. 2. Waste of waiting. 3. Waste of transportation. 4. Waste of processing itself. 5. Waste of stocks. 6. Waste of motion. 7. Waste of making defective products.
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 3-3 The Humbling of Toyota 2
With a name that has been synonymous with quality, the Toyota Production System revolutionized industry and is the benchmark for many companies. No lean discussion is complete without a review of Toyota. A customer-centered focus led the company to produce quality cars at an affordable price. A trade-off between the two was not necessary. Jim Wiseman, Toyota’s vice president for North American corporate communication, summed up the company’s view, “It’s not true that by reducing cost you auto- matically reduce quality.”
2 Based on Chrisman, A., Green, J., and Inoue, K., “The Humbling of Toyota,” Bloomberg Businessweek , 22 March 2010: 32–36.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 69
Japanese Total Quality Control (TQC)
Just as the Japanese lean approach requires attention to detail in every aspect of the process, so does the TQC approach. This attention to detail runs deep in the Japanese culture. About 1,200 years ago, during the eighth century a.d. , Japanese swordsmiths hammered 10,000 microlayers of steel into the world’s finest blades.
Of course, the Japanese philosophy of continual improvement is reflected in Deming’s 14 points for management outlined previously. However, beyond Deming’s 14 points, there are sev- eral Japanese contributions to quality thought and practice that we outline here.
VISIBILITY An important aspect of the Japanese approach to quality is visibility. Often, when problems exist in business, the first reflex is to hide the problems as though they don’t exist. The Japanese approach does the opposite. In the Japanese approach to quality, problems must be made visible before they can be addressed. Among the approaches to improving quality is inventory reduction. Excess work-in-process inventory has the effect of hiding problems. Therefore, it is eliminated.
Another visibility technique the Japanese use is called andon, or warning lights. When- ever a defect occurs on the line, the line is stopped. This halts production in several worksta- tions, not just one workstation. As a result, workers from the production line all converge on the process where the warning light went off. Teams are used to identify and eliminate the fundamental causes of the defect. Once the cause is discovered and fixed, work resumes as normal. The lean process adds to visibility by stopping all the steps in the process when one step has a problem. The approval to stop the line whenever there is a problem is called line- stop authority.
IN-PROCESS INSPECTION Another contribution of the Japanese was to teach the rest of the world about in-process inspection. With in-process inspection, all work is inspected at each stage of the process, and the workers inspect their own work. This approach gives workers the authority to make quality-related decisions. The Japanese approach to inspection was in direct contrast to the American approach of inspecting quality at the final stage of production through a quality department specialist.
This philosophy has brought great success to Toyota over the years. The company is competitive in different categories with its strong lineup: 4-Runner, Prius, Tundra, Camry, etc. Toyota was gaining market share in the United States at a rapid pace and at one point became the world’s largest automaker. Things were looking good for Toyota, while other auto companies fought to keep up.
Over the past few years, the consumer’s perception of Toyota has changed as various quality issues have surfaced. The culmination was a recall of 8 million cars at the end of 2009 and the beginning of 2010. This was due to a much-publicized gas pedal malfunction. So how did a company doing so well fall so quickly? The lapse in quality did not happen overnight. A number of factors contributed to the lapse.
Reducing costs and maintaining quality require a balance. Over time, Toyota placed more empha- sis on costs. Suppliers felt the pressure to cut costs at every stage. Engineers redesigned parts to reduce material, even if it meant using an untested alternative material. Along with the intense cost cutting was the rapid expansion of the company. To keep up with demand, Toyota engineers had to outsource devel- opment work. The customer-first focus had been replaced by a financial focus.
Toyota had early signals of straying from quality. The National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- istration opened eight investigations of unintended acceleration of Toyota vehicles from 2003 to 2010. Other part failures were identified by the company as well. Top company executives were warned by other managers of slips in vehicle quality. Toyota was not staying disciplined to its quality philosophy.
The lasting effect of Toyota’s quality lapse is not known. Its previous customer goodwill may have buffered some of the drop in perception.
70 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
N ! 2 TECHNIQUE The N ! 2 technique is an alternative to acceptance sampling. In tradi- tional acceptance sampling (discussed in Chapter 9 ), when a company receives a shipment from its suppliers, the shipment is sampled and a determination is made as to whether the shipment should be accepted or rejected. Usually, an acceptance sampling plan involves rules such as
If 2 or fewer defects, accept the lot.
If more than 2 defects, reject the lot.
The N ! 2 technique involves developing and maintaining a close relationship with suppli- ers so that it is known if the supplier’s processes are in statistical control. If the supplier’s pro- cesses are in control and capable, and if the first and last pieces in the lot meet specification, then it is concluded that the entire lot of materials will meet specification. Therefore, only a sample size of 2 (the first and last pieces) is needed for acceptance inspection.
TOTAL INVOLVEMENT OF WORKFORCE As you may recall, Deming’s 14th point stated that all the operating forces should be put to work to improve quality. The Japanese are mas- ters at gaining organizational commitment to quality. By deploying quality improvement throughout the organization, we all become responsible for the aspects of quality we influ- ence in a day’s work. This includes vertical deployment and horizontal deployment of qual- ity management. Horizontal deployment means that all departments are involved in quality. Vertical deployment means that all levels of management and workers are actively involved in quality.
THE FIVE S ’s Many Japanese firms have adopted the five S ’s in an effort to improve operations. The five S ’s are a sequential process that companies follow to literally “clean up their acts.” The S ’s are
1. Seiri: Organizing by getting rid of the unnecessary. This may include old files, forms, tools, or other materials that have not been used within the past two or three years.
2. Seiton: Neatness that is achieved by straightening offices and work areas. 3. Seiso: Cleaning plant and equipment to eliminate dirtiness that can hide or obscure
problems. 4. Seiketsu: Standardizing locations for tools, files, equipment, and all other materials. This
often involves color coding and labeling areas so that materials are always found in a stan- dard location.
5. Shetsuke: Discipline in maintaining the prior four S ’s.
Quality circles are natural work teams made up of workers who are empowered to improve work processes and are used by Japanese companies to involve employees in improving pro- cesses and process capability. Using quality circles, Japanese employees brainstorm quality improvement methods and identify causes of quality problems using quality tools.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) Japanese manufacturers are known for their approach to maintenance of equipment and machines. The maintenance technique taught by the Japanese is preventive maintenance. The idea behind preventive maintenance is that the worst condition a machine should ever be in is on the day you purchase the machine. By maintaining scheduled maintenance and improvement to equipment, machinery actually can improve with age. In the 1980s, the Toyota Kamigo Plant 9 in Japan won the Deming Prize with aged equipment. The key was that the equipment was maintained very well. With preventive maintenance, heavy unsched- uled maintenance is still performed by shop engineers and maintenance specialists. However, regular cleaning, fluid changing, and light maintenance are handled on a regularly scheduled basis by the people who operate the machinery.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 71
QUALITY IMPROVEMENT: THE EUROPEAN WAY
In past decades, Europe found itself in a position similar to that of the United States. European producers of products were finding the Japanese to be formidable competitors and realized they needed to change.
It is difficult to tell where Europe now stands concerning quality management. Because of radical differences in infrastructure, politics, and business practices, it is easy to overgeneralize. ISO 9000:2008 is the European standard for quality that has been expanded worldwide. At the same time, there has been a perception in the quality community that Europe is behind the Japa- nese and the United States in improving quality. For example, French and German customer service has remained low by American and Japanese standards and has not shown great improve- ment. However, companies such as BMW, Mercedes, and Siemens produce products that set the standard for quality.
Culture plays a greater role in European quality practices than it does in the United States. For instance, many foreigners view German service as poor. There is a historical basis for this perception. Since medieval times, shopkeepers were considered part of the land-owning, privi- leged class in Germanic regions. As such, they enjoyed an elevated status in society. Therefore, a patron who entered an establishment would often look up to the service provider as someone of a higher social class. This created a situation in which the patron actually would be in a position of thanking the service provider for providing service.
Servers in fine Parisian restaurants are viewed by many visitors from other countries as rude. However, in France, the culinary experience is considered high art. Much as an art expert would be aghast if someone without a trained eye belittled great art, the French server might be displeased when an untrained customer ordered the wrong wine. Those are only two examples of why, if service is to be improved, not only business practices will have to change in parts of Europe but also ingrained culture must change.
European businesses are on the horns of a particularly difficult dilemma. Europe is a loose federation of sovereign nations. Each country is trying to protect its own culture while, at the same time, trying to cooperate with the other countries to introduce unified standards. Two types of quality recognition are widely used in Europe. These are the European Quality Award (EQA) and ISO 9000:2008 certification.
European Quality Award
In 1988 a group of 14 large European companies created the European Foundation for Quality Management in reaction to increased competition from overseas, the quick success of the Bald- rige award in the United States, and the recognition that changes were needed if Europe was to compete in the world market. The European Foundation for Quality Management administers the European Quality Award (EQA). The EQA has two levels. The highest level is the EQA for the most accomplished applicant in a given year. The second level given is the European Quality Prize for other firms that meet the award criteria.
The model for the EQA is shown in Figure 3-8 . Because the EQA is similar to the Baldrige in tone and process, we emphasize some of the differences between the two. The differences are found primarily in the categories of people, society results, and key results. The people category addresses the perceptions of employees concerning their employer. Items in this category include working environment, perception of management style, career planning and development, and job security. Whereas the Baldrige criterion of workforce and development focuses more on those things that lead to customer service and improved products, the EQA focuses more on employee satisfaction as an outcome of the quality system. From this standpoint, employee sat- isfaction becomes an indicator of satisfactory management. 3
3 Nakhai, B., and Neves, J., “The Deming, Baldrige, and European Quality Awards,” Quality Progress (April 1994): 33–37.
72 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
The EQA criterion of impact on society asks the applicant to document how the company is viewed by the society it affects. This includes the company’s approach to quality of life, the environment, and the preservation of global resources. Therefore, charitable activities, leisure- related activities, and employment stability are all important aspects of the quality system for the Europeans.
ISO 9000:2008
On a worldwide basis, ISO 9000:2008 has had a much more significant impact than any of the quality standards or recognitions in terms of the number of companies that have implemented the approach. The focus of ISO 9000:2008 is for companies to document their quality systems in a series of manuals to facilitate trade through supplier conformance. Once the quality sys- tem is documented, ISO 9000:2008 registration states a quality system is in place and being adhered to.
ISO is the Organization for International Standards of Geneva, Switzerland (the Greek word isos means “equal”). The ISO standard was developed so that an international standard for documentation of quality systems could be applied in many different cultures. The ISO standards are very broad and nonspecific, so they can be adapted to many different industries.
ISO 9000:2008 BASICS In this section we discuss ISO 9000:2008 and its requirements. ISO 9000:2008 is not a prescription for running a business or firm. However, its requirements pro- vide a recognized international quality standard that businesses can follow. It is interesting to note that more than 400,000 companies have registered using the ISO standard. To effectively use the ISO standard, you need to plan your processes, follow those processes, ensure that those processes are effective, correct deficiencies in your current processes, and continually improve your processes.
The original version of ISO 9000 was implemented internationally in 1994 after the Inter- national Organization for Standardization (ISO) Technical Committee (TC) 176 worked for eight years to develop the standard. The ISO 9000:1994 standard closely mirrored the prior British Standard 5750 in form and substance. By 1997, the ISO 9000 family of documents had become quite cumbersome, with 20 required elements and 12 standards. ISO 9000:2008 is a much sim- plified document with only six requirements and three standards. The three standards are
1. ISO 9000:2008—Quality management systems: Fundamentals and vocabulary. 2. ISO 9001:2008—Quality management systems: Requirements. This specifies the require-
ments of a quality management system. These requirements are used for internal imple- mentation, contractual purposes, or third-party registrations.
Leadership
Enablers Results
People results
Customer results
Society results
People
Processes, products,
and services
Key results
Partnerships and resources
Strategy
FIGURE 3-8 European Quality Award Model Source: European Foundation for Quality Management, Brussels, Belgium, 2011.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 73
3. ISO 9004:2008—Quality management: Guidelines for Performance Improvement. This broader document provides guidelines for objectives that are not included in ISO 9001:2008. These include continual improvement and enhancing overall performance.
ISO 9001:2008 consists of five clauses:
Clause 4: Quality Management System
Clause 5: Management System
Clause 6: Resource Management
Clause 7: Product Realization
Clause 8: Measurement, Analysis, and Improvement
As shown in Table 3-6 , the quality management system is documented using a variety of requirements. These include how you develop, design, implement, and maintain your quality management documents. Also, you must demonstrate how you use quality-related documenta- tion to manage your quality system.
As shown in Table 3-7 , the ISO 9001:2008 standard emphasizes top management’s role in the quality management system. Its requirements outline management’s responsibilities in devel- oping and maintaining a quality management system. Again, procedures are documented for each of these processes, and audits are used to ensure that these procedures are followed.
TABLE 3-6 ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management System Requirements
4.0 Quality Management System 4.1 General Requirements The organization shall establish, document, implement, and maintain a quality management
system and continually improve its effectiveness in accordance with the requirements of the international standard.
4.2 Documentation Requirements Quality management system documentation will include a quality policy and quality
objectives; a quality manual; documented procedures; documents to ensure effective planning, operation, and control of processes; and records required by the international standard.
Source: International Standards Organization, Geneva, Switzerland, 2008.
TABLE 3-7 ISO 9001:2008 Management Requirements
5.0 Management System 5.1 Management Commitment
a. Communication of meeting customer, statutory, and regulatory requirements b. Establishing a quality policy c. Establishing quality objectives d. Conducting management reviews e. Ensuring that resources are available
5.2 Top management shall ensure that customer requirements are determined and are met with the aim of enhancing customer satisfaction.
5.3 Management shall establish a quality policy. 5.4 Management shall ensure that quality objectives shall be established. 5.5 Management shall ensure that responsibilities and authorities are defined and
communicated. 5.6 Management shall review the quality management system at regular intervals.
Source: International Standards Organization, Geneva, Switzerland, 2008.
74 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
As shown in Table 3-8 , resource management requirements are outlined. These include providing needed resources, personnel, facilities, and the environment necessary to get the work done. Emphasis is placed on training and developing employees.
Table 3-9 shows requirements for product realization. These are all the requirements— including processes, documents, customer requirements, specifications, designs, and quality processes—needed to produce a product. Part of this requirement deals with selecting and devel- oping suppliers in a way that ensures that purchased components satisfy requirements.
Table 3-10 lists the standards for measurement, analysis, and improvement. Clause 8 has to do with analyzing process data and using the data to improve operations and service to the customer. This includes performing internal audits and monitoring and measuring processes and products. Also included in Clause 8.5 are corrective and preventive action for improve- ment.
Quality Management Principles Underlying ISO 9000:2008
The following eight principles provide the foundation for ISO 9000:2008. They are:
1. Customer focus 2. Leadership 3. Involvement of people 4. The process approach 5. A systems approach to management 6. Continual improvement 7. Factual approach to decision making 8. Mutually beneficial supplier relationship
TABLE 3-8 ISO 9001:2008 Resource Management Requirements
6.0 Resource Management 6.1 The organization shall determine and provide needed resources. 6.2 Workers will be provided necessary education, training, skills, and experience. 6.3 The organization shall determine, provide, and maintain the infrastructure needed to
achieve conformity to product requirements. 6.4 The organization shall determine and manage the work environment needed to
achieve conformity to product requirements.
Source: International Standards Organization, Geneva, Switzerland, 2008.
TABLE 3-9 ISO 9001:2008 Product Realization Requirements
7.0 Product Realization 7.1 The organization shall plan and develop processes needed for product realization. 7.2 The organization shall determine requirements as specified by customers. 7.3 The organization shall plan and control the design and development for its products. 7.4 The organization shall ensure that purchased product conforms to specified purchase
requirements. 7.5 The organization shall plan and carry out production and service under controlled
conditions. 7.6 The organization shall determine the monitoring and measurements to be undertaken
and the monitoring and measuring devices needed to provide evidence of conformity of product to determined requirements.
Source: International Standards Organization, Geneva, Switzerland, 2008.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 75
Most of these quality management principles are self-explanatory and discussed through- out this book. TC 176 has done an excellent job of responding to the critics of the original standard by focusing on these quality management principles. Note the similarities between these principles and the Baldrige categories.
Selecting a Registrar
The ISO 9000:2008 process is very different from any of the awards processes discussed previ- ously. To many who have implemented ISO 9000:2008, the selection of the registrar is the most important step in the ISO 9000:2008 process. This is also the messiest step of the ISO process. There is no centralized authority that qualifies ISO registrars. Although no European country requires ISO 9000:2008 registration, many firms require it. In fact, many countries officially encourage their firms to use only ISO-registered suppliers. However, certain ISO registrars have memoranda of agreement with the departments of commerce of individual countries. This means that out of the hundreds of registrars that exist in the world, only a relative few may be recog- nized in any particular country. Also, many registrars are not recognized officially anywhere. Therefore, when selecting a registrar, firms must be careful. They should check with customers and departments of commerce and customers within the countries to which they plan to export. This could save severe problems and a waste of money in the long run.
The ISO 9000:2008 Process
Although many companies have now transitioned from ISO 9001 (2000) to ISO 9000:2008, we identify a process for the first-time registering firm. The registration process for ISO 9000:2008 (including the new ISO 9001:2008) typically takes several months from initial meeting to final registration audit. This time frame differs from client to client, but each process usually follows the steps outlined in Figure 3-9 .
Step 1 is inquiry, where the client contacts registrars to investigate the terms for registration. The prospective client then makes a final selection of a registrar with whom he or she is comfortable.
In Step 2, the client contracts with the registrar. In this process, registration steps are deter- mined, and a price is negotiated. A client-signed quotation or purchase order leads to the first stage of the certification process. Some clients may wish to have a preassessment or gap-analysis audit.
Step 3 often involves a phase 1 audit. At this stage, the registrar performs an onsite audit of the documented quality system against the applicable standard.
TABLE 3-10 ISO 9001:2008 Measurement, Analysis, and Improvement Standards
8.0 Measurement, Analysis, and Improvement 8.1 The organization shall plan and implement the monitoring, measurement, analysis, and
improvement process as needed. 8.2 The organization shall monitor information relating to customer perceptions. 8.3 The organization shall ensure that product that does not conform to requirements is
identified and controlled to prevent its unintended use or delivery. 8.4 The organization shall determine, collect, and analyze data to demonstrate the suitability
and effectiveness of the quality management system, including a. Customer satisfaction b. Conformance data c. Trend data d. Supplier data
8.5 The organization shall continually improve the effectiveness of the quality management system.
Source: International Standards Organization, Geneva, Switzerland, 2008.
76 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Step 4 is the certification audit. Every element of the ISO 9000:2008 standard is audited several times during the registration process. A representative sample of an organization’s business processes is chosen for any audit. During each three-year period, 100% of the organiza- tion is audited. The audit program is a valuable tool that provides a clearly and mutually defined process and snapshot of auditing—past, present, and future.
Step 5 may involve process audits (optional). The client may choose business processes for auditing to the applicable standard, allowing the client to learn and experience the registrar’s auditing methods and style.
Step 6 involves the final certification audit. Once the client’s documented quality system has met the applicable standard, the registrar conducts an audit to determine the system’s effective implementation. This may involve interviewing the process owners and responsible personnel as designated in the documented quality system for processes chosen from the audit program.
After certification, Step 7 involves rolling certification audits. These are sometimes referred to as surveillance audits , where the registrar returns on either six-month or annual cycles.
ISO 14000
Given the success of ISO 9000:2008, ISO developed an international standard for environmental compliance called ISO 14000. ISO 14000 is a series of standards that provide guidelines and a compliance standard.
ISO 14000 uses the same basic approach as ISO 9000:2008 with documentation control, management system auditing, operational control, control of records, management policies, audits, training, statistical techniques, and corrective and preventive action. In addition to these controls, ISO 14000 includes quantified targets, established objectives, emergency and disaster preparedness, and disclosure of environmental policy. Such a system may provide the basis for developing a comprehensive environmental management system. Table 3-11 presents the ISO 14000 elements. The process for documenting these elements and seeking registration mirrors the ISO 9000:2008 process. Again, a key process has to do with selecting the appropriate registrar.
4. Certification Audit
3. Phase 1 Audit
2. Contract2. Contract
1. Inquiry1. Inquiry
5. Process Audits
6. Final Audit
7. Rolling Certification Audits
FIGURE 3-9 An Example of the ISO Registration Process
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 77
Outside of Europe, such as in the United States, firms have approached ISO 14000 carefully, with many firms deciding not to adopt the standard. 4 Is this because American firms are less committed to environmental quality than are European firms? The answer is probably no. ISO 14000 is very risky for U.S. firms. As a result of the self-study process incorporated in the ISO standard, firms can possibly discover violations regarding some envi- ronmental topic, such as hazardous waste. It would seem that these firms should be able to then clean up this waste. However, it is not so simple. Once these firms discover variances, they are required to report these variances to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Even if the firm discovers and cleans up environmental problems, the EPA has made it clear the firm will be subject to fines and penalties, which could include shutting down the business! As a result, firms are reticent to begin the process of self-discovery until the EPA changes its policy. Therefore, environmentally conscious firms that may want to improve their environmental management systems through ISO 14000 are potentially being dissuaded from doing so by the EPA. It will take several years for the courts to settle many of these issues. Until these issues are settled, adoption of ISO 14000 may be slow in many countries. Despite these problems, some American firms, such as Micron Technologies of Boise, Idaho, have adopted ISO 14000. It is expected that firms with little environmental exposure will adopt ISO 14000 first.
TABLE 3-11 ISO 14001 Elements Element Number Title
4.1 General requirements 4.2 Environmental policy 4.3 Planning 4.3.1 Environmental aspects 4.3.2 Legal and other requirements 4.3.3 Objectives and targets 4.3.4 Environmental management programs 4.4 Implementation and operation 4.4.1 Structure and responsibility 4.4.2 Training, awareness, and competence 4.4.3 Communication 4.4.4 Environmental management system documentation 4.4.5 Document control 4.4.6 Operational control 4.4.7 Emergency preparedness and response 4.5 Checking and corrective action 4.5.1 Monitoring and measurement 4.5.2 Nonconformance and corrective and preventive action 4.5.3 Records 4.5.4 Environmental management system audit 4.6 Management review
Source: International Standards Organization, Geneva, Switzerland, 2010. Used with permission of Capaccio.
4 Hale, G., and Hemenway, C., “ISO 14000 Will Likely Join the Regulatory Framework,” Quality Digest 16, 2 (1998): 29–34.
78 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
QUALITY IMPROVEMENT: THE CHINESE WAY
As you can see in Figure 3-10 , total trade between the United States and China doubled from 2000 to 2010. In that same time, Chinese imports to the United States increased from $100 bil- lion to almost $300 billion. Among the important reasons for this growth in trade have been the opening of the Chinese markets to foreign trade, the constant drumbeat of U.S. and European offshoring to China, and the low cost of doing business in China. Given the growing importance of China in international trade, the question then arises about Chinese quality.
Does Chinese Quality Management Exist?
What led up to this internationalization from the historically isolationist China? With the death of Chairman Mao Tse-tung in 1976, Deng Xiaoping took the reins of economic reform leading to a so-called open-door policy for trade and economic transfer. This resulted in the creation of a socialist market economy.
Historically, China was known for fine porcelain, silks, bronze, and construction. Trade between China and the West has existed for many centuries as is evidenced by the ancient Silk Road. Chinese products were held in such high regard that traders were willing to brave the for- bidding Taklimakan desert, or “road of death,” to bring Chinese products to European markets. These goods were of exceedingly high quality and value. However, it is not clear that China has continued this legacy of quality in the modern era.
Some factors have led to low quality in China. 5 Researchers state that these factors include the low level of education of some Chinese workers and lack of experience among agricultural
20012000 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 Year
2007 2008 2009
200
300
250
350
400
450
50
100
150
B ill
io ns
o f D
ol la
rs
FIGURE 3-10 Total Volume of Trade between the United States and China Source: U.S. Department of Commerce, 2010.
5 Glover, L., and Siu, N., “The Human Resource Barriers to Managing Quality in China,” International Journal of Human Resource Management 11, 5 (2000): 867–882.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 79
workers who have moved into the industrial sector. These same workers are often unfamiliar with the consumer goods they are making and may not have the commitment necessary to pro- vide long-term resources to quality improvement as they work for a short period of time and then return to their homes to farm.
Another factor omnipresent in Chinese business is guanxi , or “influence.” Guanxi can range from personal relationships to bribery. Here is an example of how guanxi can influence perceptions of quality in China:
We wanted to give some government officials some biscuits as presents (customary in China). The day that they came they said, “By the way, we want double.” If they wanted to penalize the company they could go to the media and say that Freshbake Biscuits’ products were contaminated.
In the last quarter of a century, the United States and Europe have had to improve quality as a result of international competition. As time passes, China will be subject to similar com- petitive pressures (see A Closer Look at Quality 3-2 ). Both Japan and Mexico have seen increases in salaries that have negatively impacted their cost advantages. Although it is not clear that Chinese products meet world standards for quality, over time, Chinese firms will need to meet interna- tional standards of quality if their standard of living is to increase proportionally. Foreign firms
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 3-2 Outsourcing Woes
It is difficult to pick up a newspaper without finding articles showing how some firm has experienced serious quality-related problems due to outsourcing. Outsourcing to developing countries has been a trend for decades. However, recent events show that outsourcing can be a risky venture. Mattel has recalled millions of toys due to leaded paint—when in fact, they had used a long-term, trusted supplier who used leaded paint his employees had purchased over the Internet. RC2 Corp., the company that makes Thomas the Train toys, had to recall several models for leaded paint. The interesting fact with their story is that they rewarded affected customers with a free toy for their trouble and ended up having to recall the free toy for leaded paint!
Although these stories are interesting, it should be recognized that this is not just a Chinese prob- lem. Similar things could happen to firms who outsource anywhere – across the street or across the world. It could be China, the United States, Latin America or anywhere else. It is not just in products either. Dell Corporation has now moved its customer support for business users back to the United States. The issue is not one nation. It is outsourcing. It is clear that we need to rethink outsourcing prac- tices and implement new quality practices to mitigate the loss of control associated with outsourcing.
Changing the Focus from Cost to Quality In point 4 of his 14 points for management, Deming stated, “End the practice of awarding business on the basis of price tag alone. Instead, minimize total cost.” These words seem more prescient now than when they were first written. It appears that the primary motivation for many firms to offshore produc- tion has been to take advantage of lower labor, land, and production costs. However, many firms have also found that moving overseas is not always cheap when the entire array of life cycle costs for prod- ucts and services are considered.
Firms offshoring to China and other countries place tremendous pressure for low cost on their overseas suppliers. This external pressure for low cost, when coupled with internal and external pres- sures to turn profits, inevitably leads to the cutting of corners. Realize that the same rules apply to sup- pliers overseas as domestic suppliers: These are partners. We do not want our partners to go broke. Otherwise, the partnership is not a true partnership. Negotiated costs should include room for the sup- plier to succeed without cutting corners. Deming was right: When there is too much focus on cost, qual- ity concerns are lessened. Many have predicted that a day of reckoning was coming. It appears to have come for a number of companies.
(continued)
80 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
who locate in China to take advantage of low cost and forget about quality will do so at their own peril in the long term.
It is clear that Chinese manufacturers are aware of quality management practices and have made some changes to adapt certain practices. 6 What form that will take is still unclear. What is clear is that China is an economic giant. The adoption of modern quality approaches will provide them further competitive advantage in the future.
ARE QUALITY APPROACHES INFLUENCED BY CULTURE?
As we have seen by discussing tools, techniques, and approaches adopted within different regions of the world, a picture of diversity emerges. The U.S. approach historically has been command-and-control oriented. This might be the result of a history of political and military management as a basis for business management. Americans tend to be results oriented. The implication is that if quality does not provide bottom-line results, it is often not something to be pursued.
The Japanese approach is based on an ethic of consistency and emphasis on reduction of waste. There are cultural underpinnings for this approach. The Japanese landmass is smaller in size than California. Given that many people are contained in a small landmass, it is no surprise that a premium would be placed on reducing waste. Also, consider the fact that the Japanese have almost no natural resources. For this reason, almost all raw materials must be imported at great cost. Again, this causes a cultural ethic of reduced waste. Finally, it is fairly obvious in observing Japanese business practices that they prize conformance and consistency.
The Europeans have adopted broad standards that can be adapted to the diverse nation- states in the European Union. There is also an apparent concern among the Europeans to sat- isfy employees, focus on work as art, and care for the environment. There are strong unions in Europe that cause the need for sensitivity toward employees. The work-as-art ethic has roots in medieval times when the artisan ethic was developed. As an example, in Germany, an aspiring shipbuilder would find employment as an apprentice with a master shipbuilder. After years as an apprentice, the student would become a journeyman shipbuilder, until one day, possibly, becoming a master shipbuilder. Again, the cultural roots of management and quality improve- ment run deep in different cultures.
Are other cultures developing quality methods that will be instructive for world com- petitors? The Russians have long used what is now called group technology to produce prod- ucts and to improve production. Several Asian Tiger nations, such as Malaysia, South Korea, and Singapore, have begun to make inroads in the field of quality and will become formidable competitors in the future. Chinese quality management is a work in process. We will keep watching.
6 Pun, Kit-Fai, “Cultural Influences on Total Quality Management Adoption in Chinese Enterprises: An Empirical Study,” Total Quality Management 12, 3 (2001): 323–342.
Firms who win in outsourcing internationally will be those companies who understand that quality is of primary importance—coupled with price. This is what is termed a value proposition. Customers will not return to a company or retail chain that provides a poor value proposition. To do this properly, you must know your suppliers and enhance their performance through development and partnering. If this is not present, then you are going to have to monitor your supplier’s performance. Ultimately, this will prove much more costly because not everything can be monitored. For example, it is not clear that RC2 Corp. would have recognized the need to test for leaded paint any more than to test to make sure that their products contained cyanide. There are too many unexpected ways a rogue supplier can destroy a customer’s reputation.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 81
Summary In an increasingly globalizing economy, it is important to understand the approaches that various nations use to improve quality. It is clear that the trend is toward greater participation in a global economy. As a result, the worker of the future will need to adapt to approaches having roots in other cultures.
In this chapter we discussed the global economy and the role played by quality in that world economy. We considered different quality models from different regions such as the Malcolm Baldrige award, the Deming Prize, the European Quality award, and ISO 9000:2008.
From an integrative perspective, it is reasonable to borrow from all these models if that will help your firm perform better. The underlying theme in this chapter is the importance of learning from other cultures to compete effectively.
Key Terms Andon Baldrige-lite Baldrige-qualified Deming Prize Exporter Full-Baldrige approach
Globalization Group technology Horizontal deployment In-process inspection ISO 9000:2008 Lean
Licensing Line-stop authority Malcolm Baldrige award Multilevel approach N ! 2 technique Partnering
Physical environment Preventive maintenance Quality circles Social environment Task environment Vertical deployment
Discussion Questions 1. What are the advantages or disadvantages of licensing as a means of gaining access to foreign
markets? 2. What are the advantages and disadvantages of globalization? Provide an example of a firm that has
engaged in globalization. What are some of the potential advantages and disadvantages of globaliza- tion for this particular organization?
3. What motivates U.S. firms to compete for the Malcolm Baldrige award? How could a firm benefit from participating in the Baldrige competition, even if it did not apply for the award?
4. Category 3 of the Baldrige criteria focuses on the importance of the customer in assessing the quality of the products and services that a firm sells. Why do you think the authors of the Baldrige criteria included this category? How is the customer important in assessing the quality of the products and services that a company sells?
5. Category 5 of the Baldrige criteria focuses on workforce. Why do you think the authors of the Baldrige criteria included this category? Why is human resource management an important consideration in quality planning and management?
6. Do you believe the Baldrige should include a category for not-for-profit organizations? If so, what adjustments should be made in the Baldrige criteria to make it applicable for this category?
7. If you were the CEO of a manufacturing firm, would you encourage your firm to apply for the Malcolm Baldrige award? Why or why not?
8. If you were presented the opportunity to be a Baldrige examiner, would you accept it? Why or why not? Make your answer as substantive as possible.
9. How can firms use lean production to improve quality? Is lean a useful concept for both service and manufacturing organizations?
10. Describe the concept of “visibility” in the context of the Japanese total quality approach. How does the concept of visibility help a firm identify problems in its production processes?
11. In what sense does excess inventory act as a “security blanket” for manufacturing firms?
82 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
12. Describe the concept of line-stop authority. If you were an operator in a production facility, would you want to have line-stop authority? Why or why not?
13. Why is it a good idea for workers to inspect their own work? 14. In what ways are the Malcolm Baldrige award and the Deming Prize similar, and in what ways are they
different? 15. Is it appropriate to use the criteria for quality awards as a framework for organizational improvement
and change? Why or why not? 16. What are the major substantive differences between the quality awards discussed in the chapter and
ISO 9000:2008? Are they intended for similar or entirely different purposes? 17. Describe the purpose and the intent of the ISO 9000:2008 program. What are the advantages of becoming
an ISO 9000:2008-certified company? Are there any disadvantages? 18. Describe the purpose and the intent of the ISO 14000 program. 19. What are the pros and cons for an American firm that is considering pursuing ISO 14000 certification?
If you were the CEO of a manufacturing firm, would you pursue ISO 14000? Why or why not? 20. Do you believe quality approaches are influenced by culture? How?
CASES
Case 3-1 Denver International Airport Becomes ISO 14001 Certified 7
Denver International Airport (DIA) aims to become a world-class airport by emphasizing service, on-time flights, and caring for the environment. Addressing environmental issues may be a new approach for an airport, but it has paid off for DIA. In 2005, it became the first international airport in the United States to be ISO 14001 (environmental management system, or EMS) registered. DIA did not set out to become certi- fied; it simply wanted a structure to handle environ- mental issues. ISO 14001 provided guidelines for establishing an EMS. With the amount of effort put into complying with the standards, the next logical step was to become certified.
There are more benefits to ISO 14001 certifica- tion than the credibility and additional transparency DIA has received. DIA has a structured and EMS pro- gram that allows it to do more with less. Processes are documented outlining employees’ duties. The employ- ees receive training and understand what is expected of them from an EMS compliance standpoint. DIA has been able to influence the environmental actions of oth- ers. Impressed by DIA’s accomplishments, the city and county of Denver have established environmental pro- grams for all their departments. DIA is working with other international airports to establish sustainability guidelines for the world’s airports.
DIA’s environmental initiatives have achieved quantitative and monetary results. The goals and results are highlighted in DIA’s annual reports. Following is a list of some accomplishments:
• $1.7 million in savings by recycling aircraft deic- ing fluid (ADF)
• $160,000 in savings from decreases in gasoline and diesel usage
• Over $2.1 million saved between 2007 and 2008 • 1,432 tons of solid waste (11.15% of total) gener-
ated in 2008 recycled • Hazardous solid wastes reduced from 20,000
pounds to 3,760 pounds in just one year
ISO 14001 certification is not the end result for DIA. Environmental management is now incorporated into the airport’s strategic planning process. The require- ments and structure of ISO registration motivate DIA to be aggressive in setting new initiatives and goals. The organi- zation wants to be proactive to stay ahead of environmen- tal regulation. DIA’s environmental impact extends beyond the company as it is involved in community outreach pro- grams and participates as a member of various environ- mental organizations. In the end, ISO 14001 certification has enabled Denver International Airport to progress toward environmental accountability and sustainability.
7 Based on Maldonado, L., “Denver Airport First to Be Certified to ISO 14001,” Business and the Environment 16, 3 (2005): 14–15.
Chapter 3 • Global Supply Chain Quality and International Quality Standards 83
Case 3-2 Wainwright Industries: An Entirely New Philosophy of Business Based on Customer Satisfaction and Quality Related Web page: wainwrightindustries.com
In the early 1980s, Wainwright Industries, a manufacturer of stamped and machine parts, was facing nothing less than a crisis. Increased competition, along with intensified customer scrutiny, was forcing Wainwright to either improve quality or lose its competitive stature. In the face of this challenge, the employees of the company, led by CEO Arthur D. Wainwright, decided to make radical changes. It was clear that business as usual with a few minor improvements would not save the company. What Wainwright needed was an entire new philosophy of doing business based on quality and total customer satisfaction.
To determine how to achieve this objective, Wain- wright used the criteria for the Malcolm Baldrige award as a road map. Drawing input from all levels of the company, the top management team led the process by setting goals, developing implementation strategies, and establishing key quality standards. Initially, the company emphasized three principles: employee empowerment, customer satisfaction, and continuous improvement. As a creative way of demonstrating the importance of working together, the company adopted the duck as its mascot, based on the fact that ducks fly in formation as a means of supporting one another in flight. In addition, whenever a duck falls out of forma- tion, it suddenly feels the drag and resistance of trying to fly alone and quickly returns to the flock. Wainwright used this analogy to support the concepts of teamwork and employee empowerment, which were integral parts of the company’s quality improvement efforts.
Along its journey toward improved quality, a number of specific initiatives were implemented. Lean manufacturing, statistical process control, computer- aided design, cross-training, profit sharing, and quality- minded manufacturing initiatives were put in place. Special emphasis was placed on training and bench- marking. Since it initiated its quality program, the com- pany has spent up to 7% of its annual payroll on training. To demonstrate its resolve in this area, the company has made training an important criterion for employee
advancement. Wainwright has benchmarked against a number of companies, including firms in the textiles, chemical, and electronics industries. For instance, after studying Milliken & Company, a previous Baldrige award winner, Wainwright implemented an employee suggestion program that has been very effective.
Along with the changes mentioned previously, Wainwright also has changed its culture to make it more egalitarian and quality minded. The employees at Wain- wright (including the CEO) now all wear the same uni- form, eat in the same cafeteria, and park in the same parking lot. Office walls have literally been torn down and replaced with glass, based on the premise that if the managers can watch the frontline employees work, the frontline employees should be able to watch the manag- ers work, too. As a result of these changes, the manag- ers of the company have become coaches and facilitators rather than supervisors and disciplinarians. This impor- tant change has helped facilitate the teamwork atmo- sphere that is supportive of high quality and total customer satisfaction.
The results of the company’s continuous improve- ment efforts are linked to five strategic indicators: safety, internal customer satisfaction, external customer satisfaction, design quality, and business performance. The status of each of these criteria is tracked by “mis- sion control,” a room set aside to document the compa- ny’s efforts. In mission control, each customer’s satisfaction is documented with a plaque, a current monthly satisfaction rating, and a red or green flag indi- cating the customer’s status relative to objectives.
As a result of these initiatives, Wainwright has met the challenge. It has not only survived but has emerged as an industry leader. The company has earned the status of preferred supplier to a growing number of quality-conscious customers and has received special recognition from General Motors, Ford, and IBM- Rochester. The goal of Six Sigma quality is being pur- sued. Perhaps most important, in the last decade, overall
Discussion Questions
1. What do you view as the benefits of ISO 14001 adoption and implementation?
2. Is ISO registration useful for airports? Why or why not?
3. How can the benefits of ISO registration extend outside the company?
84 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
Discussion Questions
1. In its pursuit of improved quality, Wainwright emphasized two sets of initiatives: one based on improvements in its manufacturing operations (e.g., just-in-time manufacturing, computer-aided design) and the other based on human resource management (e.g., employee empowerment, profit sharing). Why was it necessary for Wain- wright to emphasize both of these sets of initia- tives? How are they related?
2. What is an egalitarian culture? How does the development of an egalitarian culture help a com- pany like Wainwright Industries become more quality minded?
3. Although quality is important for every product or service, it may be particularly important for the precision auto parts industry. Do you agree with this statement? Why or why not?
customer satisfaction has increased from 84% to 95%, and the company’s market share, revenues, and profits are at record levels. Ironically, the company was one of
the recipients of the Malcolm Baldrige award, the very award against which the company benchmarked in its early days of quality improvement.
P A R T T W O
Designing and Assuring Quality
Much of the traditional approach to quality was reactive and after the fact. We have learned through experience that you can assure quality only through the proper design of products and services. The basis for assuring quality is strategic planning that prioritizes and plans quality improvement. The question is “If we want to achieve our goals, how are we going to get there?”
The voice of the customer is key in designing products. We must learn how to gather information about the customer. In Chapter 5 you will learn the tools used by firms who know their customers.
By benchmarking with other firms and competitors, we learn the voice of the market. To stay ahead, a firm must know what is happening around it. This provides a logical progression from average, to market leader, to world-class firm.
We then focus on designing products and services. Once we know what the customers want, how do we design goods and processes that will satisfy these wants?
Part of designing and assuring quality is the ability to deliver products to the customer. Thus supply chain management has become a key link in providing top- quality service.
Leaders. . . motivate and inspire others to go in the right direction and they, along with everyone else, sacrifice to get there.
—John Kotter Harvard Business School
C H A P T E R 4
Strategic Quality Planning
86
Quality is strategic. This may seem somewhat obvious, but the actions of companies imple-menting quality measures often obscure this fact. This is especially true when a company is in a reactive mode and does not use effective planning. In this chapter we discuss important aspects of strategic quality planning. Strategic planning has two important dimen- sions: content and process . Strategy content answers the question of what is to be contained in the strategic plan. Strategy process consists of the steps used to develop the strategy.
In this chapter we first discuss content and then process. Finally, we look at quality results and whether quality has been shown to yield bottom-line results along the supply chain.
STRATEGY CONTENT
Why is quality planning important? As we have discussed in previous chapters, quality improve- ment is a planned managerial activity. As shown in this chapter, quality improvement involves identifying potential improvements, prioritizing potential areas for improvement, and planning the implementation of projects and improvements.
What are the content variables that should be included in strategic quality planning? Among the variables we discuss are time, leadership, quality costs, generic strategies (cost, differentia- tion, and focus), order winners, and quality as a core competency. These content variables outline key considerations when developing a strategic plan. These considerations are either explicitly or implicitly addressed in the strategic planning processes discussed later in the chapter.
THE IMPORTANCE OF TIME IN QUALITY IMPROVEMENT
Real-life experience shows that time is a key variable in improving quality. We discuss two aspects of time: the time it takes to achieve business goals as a result of quality and the speed at which companies improve. A major study of best quality-related practices undertaken by Ernst
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 87
and Young was critical of total quality management (TQM) programs for not providing bottom- line results. At the same time, the Ernst and Young study advocated the gradual implementation of TQM. A comprehensive study by the U.S. General Accounting Office 1 stated that, on average, 3.5 years were required for companies to begin to see significant results from quality improve- ment programs. In a study of the U.S. auto industry, Narasimhan, Ghosh, and Mendez 2 found a 2.26-year lag between quality improvement and customer recognition of quality improvement. Shingo 3 stated that 25 years were required for Toyota Motor Company to achieve significant improvement and that this time could be reduced to 10 years for competitors. Deming 4 consis- tently stated that continuous quality improvement was a slow process that required commitment of resources and time. A review of these studies and writings suggests that time is an important variable to consider when managing successful quality improvement programs. Time is also an important component of strategy. Strategic planning implies planning for the long term. Thus strategic planning is important for continuous quality improvement.
Firms will seek after and attempt to attain rapid quality improvement in order to obtain the benefits associated with improved quality, such as greater market share and increased sales. However, setting short-term goals for higher quality levels and managing toward those goals actually may prove detrimental to the firm. Managerial action that will lead to an optimal rate of quality improvement requires an understanding of the effects of rapid quality improvement. A study by Foster and Adam 5 focused on this issue of speed of quality improvement. Although their findings were preliminary, in a case study of five plants in one company, they found those plants that improved quality conformance more quickly did not see costs improve as much as plants that improved more slowly. How could this be? Let’s examine this issue more closely.
We call one of the approaches that some managers use the “management by dictate” model. Using management by dictate, we set numeric goals for the coming year. For example, top man- agement might say, “I want to see a 50% reduction in defects during the coming year.” Thus a numerical goal has been put in place for lower-level managers to meet. This is analogous to what Deming (discussed in Chapter 2 ) referred to as creating goals and not providing systems to achieve the goals. According to Donald Wheeler, a quality expert, when goals such as these are set, one of three things will occur:
1. People will achieve the goals and positive results. 2. People will distort the data. 3. People will distort the system.
Achieving the goals is what management hopes will occur. Management truly would like to think that a goal can be attained without providing systems. Distorting the data may range from creative “cooking of the data” to finding honest data that shed the best light on the system in question. Distorting the system also can occur. For example, if we set a goal for reduction of defects, we can define defects as those occurring in final inspection. We can then implement more rigorous in-process inspection that will eliminate defects before they arrive at final inspec- tion. Voilà! A simultaneous reduction in defects and increase in costs. This is an example of distorting the system. A Closer Look at Quality 4-1 discusses an example of how measurement systems can be distorted.
1 U.S. General Accounting Office, “Management Practices: U.S. Companies Improve Performance through Quality Efforts” (Washington, DC: GAO Report to the Honorable Don Ritter, House of Representatives, 1991). 2 Narasimhan, R., Ghosh, S., and Mendez, D., “A Dynamic Model of Product Quality and Pricing Decision on Sales Response,” Decision Sciences 24, 5 (1993): 893–908. 3 Shingo, S., Foreword in Study of Toyota Production System from Industrial Engineering Viewpoint (Tokyo: Japan Man- agement Association, 1989). 4 Deming, W. E., Out of the Crisis (Boston: MIT/CAES, 1986). 5 Foster, S. T., and Adam, E. E., “Examining the Impact of Speed of Quality Improvement on Quality-Related Costs,” Decision Sciences 27, 4 (1996): 623–646.
Video Clip: Mission at the Ritz
88 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 4-1 Problems with Measuring Educational Performance 6
When measurement systems are tied to performance ratings and money, people begin to distort the results and the systems. Such is the case with the No Child Left Behind Act passed by Congress. At the core of the No Child Act is testing designed to evaluate the performance of schools and teachers.
At Sunset Ridge School in Northfield, Illinois, students complained that someone had changed answers to math questions on their state achievement tests. An inquiry found altered multiple-choice questions on 90% of the tests taken by the school’s eighth-graders. School officials say an eighth-grade teacher promptly resigned as a result. It appears that even among rich top-performing schools, teachers who are under pressure to show stellar results on state-mandated standardized tests are cheating.
An unfortunate by-product of the No Child law has been an unanticipated increase of cheating by teachers and administrators. From Pittsburgh to Milwaukee to Worcester, Massachusetts, and Spokane, Washington, hundreds of teachers, principals, and administrators have been accused of doing dishonest things to boost their schools’ test scores. Among the transgressions committed by these role models include changing test answers, handing out tests and answers in advance, blocking weak students from taking exams, and giving students extra time.
The rash of test rigging is driven largely by the goal of the No Child law, which is to assess school and not student performance. If a group fails for two consecutive years, parents can move their students to another school—and districts can lose funding. Eventually, failing schools can be closed. In addition, some states have tied teacher bonuses to student scores. According to Steven D. Levitt, a University of Chicago economics professor, “Teacher cheating is rising because the incentives to do so are increasing.”
Here are some examples of the cheating:
• Changing answers: Teachers in California, Illinois, and Michigan have been found changing answers.
• Coaching during exams: Instructors have helped students with their tests in Massachusetts, Nevada, and Washington.
• Handing out tests in advance: This has occurred in Pennsylvania and Wisconsin. • Not counting weaker students: Among the states of dubious distinction are New York, Tennessee,
and Texas.
6 Based on Grow, B. “A Spate of Cheating—by Teachers,” BusinessWeek (5 July, 2004): 94–95.
The key, then, is for firms to put in place a process that will allow learning to occur. The plan–do–check–act cycle discussed in Chapter 1 allows for organizational learning and freezing of learning to take place. Management looking for a quick fix to long-term problems probably will not be too satisfied with this fact.
We still do not know the optimal time for learning to take place. Indeed, there are stories of companies that have had the capacity to achieve rapid improvement. However, one suspects that each of these companies also provided enormous amounts of support for employees to achieve the goals. Providing such an infrastructure is the work of management because they have the budget and authority to do it.
LEADERSHIP FOR QUALITY
Leadership is a key strategic variable for quality management. A leader organizes, plans, con- trols, communicates, teaches, advises, and delegates. The existence of a leader implies the exis- tence of a follower. Therefore, the leading involves a power-sharing relationship between two or more individuals where the power is distributed unevenly. For example, the leader will have more monetary and organizational authority than the follower. Thus the leader will need to share authority for the follower to complete work assignments.
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 89
Leadership is the process by which a leader influences a group to move toward the attain- ment of superordinate goals . Superordinate goals are those goals that pertain to achieving a higher end that benefits not just the individual but the group. In some organizations, leaders emerge because they are the most powerful or the dominant voice. Some leaders are selected because they have the highest intellect. This occurs in many educational organizations where the leaders are chosen on the basis of the number of articles written or status within an academic field. In still other organizations, leaders are appointed. This can be by either popular voice, by a board of directors, or by upper management.
For followers to have power, leadership must share its power. As a result, leadership is about the sharing of power. This power takes many forms:
Power of expertise. Sometimes a leader has special knowledge (or is perceived to have special knowledge). Professors are leaders in the classroom because they have knowledge that they are sharing with the students. This type of power tends to have very narrow param- eters in that the followers will follow only within the confines of the leader’s expertise.
Reward power. If a leader has rewards that he or she can bestow on subordinates in return for some desirable action, the leader has reward power. This is often the case in the grant- ing of raises, promotions, rewards, recognition, or a variety of other incentives. Prior to the fall of communism in Russia, leaders often used this mechanism to maintain their author- ity. Perks and privileges came to those who favored the party bosses.
Coercive power. If the leader has power to punish the follower for not following rules or guidelines, the leader has coercive power. Such power often results in unintended responses, such as the follower giving up or circumventing the leader’s rule surreptitiously. Many times the follower will rebel and attempt to even the power relationship. In the 1920s, in response to unions, managers used police powers to squash unions. This resulted in violent responses from the unions.
Referent power. If a leader is charismatic or charming and is followed because he or she is liked, then the leader has referent power. A case of referent power is the mentor who is admired by his or her protégés who want to be like the mentor. Often people will follow referent leaders on the basis of reputation alone, imbuing the referent leader with qualities the leader may or may not possess. John Kennedy was well liked by those around him. He also was viewed as charismatic and intelligent. This made people want to follow him.
Legitimate power. As a result of the positions that different people hold within an organi- zation, the manager has the obligation to request things of subordinates, and the subordi- nates have the duty to comply with the request. This is the exercise of legitimate power. Legitimate power comes with the position. It has certain responsibilities and authorities. A newly appointed leader may have to rely on this positional authority in the early part of his or her tenure as a leader.
Leadership Dimensions
We have discussed leadership types. To better understand leaders, we now discuss leadership dimensions. These leadership dimensions help to define the effectiveness of leaders. One dimen- sion of leadership is the trait dimension . In his landmark research, Stogdill 7 found that leaders in organizations tended to be taller than the average. They also tended to be more intelligent than the average—although not too intelligent. Evidently, people are intimidated by leaders who are too bright. Leaders are also people who tend to be very productive and reach high levels of performance.
7 Stogdill, R., “Personal Factors Associated with Leadership,” Journal of Applied Psychology 25 (1948): 35–71.
90 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Another dimension of leadership research has to do with leader skills . For example, the grid in Table 4-1 shows a set of skills that effective leaders exhibit. Four important skills for lead- ers are knowledge, communication, planning, and vision. The different phases identify skill sets that are needed by managers.
In Phase 1, knowledge helps the leader accept risk and moderate the stress associated with the risk by using coping mechanisms or healthy outlets. In Phase 2, the leader must be able to communicate with other leaders and subordinates. In Phase 3, the leader must be able to plan and make decisions. Finally, in Phase 4, the leader must be able to formulate a coherent vision of the future toward which to plan.
Employees must trust that if they make recommendations for improvement, the recom- mendations will be taken seriously and considered for implementation by management. Nothing can damage a quality improvement effort faster than management’s failure to consider imple- menting changes that employees recommend . Employees may begin to think “nothing will really change.” Quality managers who find themselves in companies not implementing a majority of employee suggestions need to work to increase the percentage.
Another important attribute of quality managers is commitment over the long term . Too many leaders enter quality improvement efforts with the expectation that things will improve overnight. As we have discussed, quality management is hard, painstaking, slow work. Often, victories in quality are rare and should be celebrated—especially at first. GfK Custom Research Incorporated (CRI), the small service company that won a Malcolm Baldrige award, has weekly employee celebrations where the employees share good news and give each other pats on the back. Management of CRI admits that sometimes reasons for the pats on the back are difficult to find. However, the positive reinforcement has been central to their improvement of business results and customer service.
Commitment to quality means that leaders provide funding, slack time, and resources for quality improvement efforts to be successful. This commitment is measured in decades, not quarters or budget cycles. One company embarked on an expensive training process only to throw all its past efforts away by deciding to cut training in a budget cycle two years later. At last glance, this company’s quality and process improvement efforts had all but disappeared.
As we see in the case of Solectron ( Quality Highlight 4-1 ), the leadership of its CEO is key to its success. To foster a well-run workplace, leaders must be able to resolve conflict effectively.
TABLE 4-1 Leader Skills
Phase 1: Knowledge Phase 2: Communication Phase 3: Planning Phase 4: Vision
Acceptance of diversity Developing competence Health/wellness Learning style Time management Ethics Risk taking Coping skills
Assertiveness Conflict management Team building Trust building Motivating others Recruiting others Effective speaking Effective writing Effective listening Image building
Structuring (for task accomplishment) Decision making Evaluation skills Task and time management
Assessing the climate (internal and external) Identifying opportunities
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 91
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 4-1 Solectron Corporation
www.solectron.com
Solectron Corporation is an independent producer of high-tech manufacturing services. This manufac- turing includes the assembly of printed circuit boards and subsystems for computer makers and elec- tronics product producers. In addition, Solectron provides system-level assembly services, such as assembly of PCs and mainframe computers. Activities performed by Solectron include design, produc- tion, assembly, consultation, and testing. Solectron has achieved outstanding results because of its stra- tegic planning system and the personal leadership provided by its management.
By focusing on customer satisfaction, exploiting advanced manufacturing technology, and stress- ing continuous improvement in operations and service, the company has reached high levels of quality and efficiency, making it best-in-class and a world leader in production. Solectron is an American com- pany that has competed successfully in international markets. Many competitors of Solectron are now customers because they found it was better to outsource to Solectron than to produce many products in- house. In addition, about 90% of all new work comes from returning satisfied customers.
Assessing Customer Needs Solectron focused its planning processes on the customer. Solectron does not compete with its custom- ers in designing and marketing products. Although it offers an original equipment manufacturers (OEM) design service, usually the company produces to its customers’ specifications and designs. As a result of understanding its customers, the company develops strategies to meet its customers’ requirements in the areas of service, quality, and cost. Solectron continually monitors customer satisfaction levels and con- ducts exhaustive research on competitors and markets.
Surveys of customers are conducted on a weekly basis. The results of these surveys go directly to the CEO, who reviews the information with top management in one of three weekly meetings on quality-related issues. The survey information is used to grade the performance of each of Solectron’s nine divisions.
Culture of Continuous Improvement Solectron has developed a culture that reinforces continuous improvement. Developing this culture has required arduous strategic planning. A top management team is involved in an effort to revitalize American manufacturing through quality. This team sets corporate targets and then works with teams to set support- ing goals in functional areas. The company has pursued several strategies to achieve a high-energy, cus- tomer-focused workforce. These strategies include a strong family orientation, an effective communication system, and an innovative reward and recognition program. These strategies have helped the company to weather the rapid growth it has experienced. Management is participative with a focus on coaching and a high degree of autonomy for workers. The team-focused approach to employee involvement relies on train- ing and mentorship to overcome barriers to a multilingual workforce with more than 20 ethnic backgrounds.
Each Solectron customer is served by two teams. These teams ensure quality performance and on-time delivery. A project planning team is involved in planning, scheduling, and defining customer requirements. A quality control team meets weekly to monitor and evaluate production with the aim of preventing potential problems before they occur.
The Best and Getting Better Solectron uses a comprehensive information system, organized in a customized relational database that allows constant monitoring of internal quality performance and process control indicators. Key perfor- mance data are charted in all departments. Employees are trained and empowered to take corrective action.
Solectron works with suppliers to improve the quality and reliability of incoming components and subassemblies. Statistical process control (SPC) charts track and review results daily. These results are recorded on an automated SPC database. Division managers and the corporate quality director track these results on a daily basis. The company is partnering with its suppliers to improve design quality as a future strategic emphasis.
(continued)
92 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
QUALITY AND ETHICS
Quality appears to be good business. Quality is also good ethics. It is unethical to ship defective products knowingly to a customer. Reliable products and low defect rates reflect an ethical approach of management’s care for its customers. This ethic is stated in the well-known mission statement of a New Bedford, Massachusetts, shipbuilder: “We build good ships. At a profit if we can, at a loss if we must. But, we build good ships.”
Companies focusing on their customers often develop a set of ethics that includes valuing employees. This is reflected in education, training, health, wellness, and compensation programs that show empathy for the employees. Increasingly, environmental friendliness is seen as an ethical concern. As a result, more companies are implementing recycling programs and making efforts to improve environmental practices.
Good quality management is good ethics. Would we want to knowingly provide poor ser- vice or ship bad product? J. R. Simplot made a promise to Ray Kroc at McDonald’s that McDonald’s would never run out of French fries. With a handshake, they sealed their deal, and Simplot has kept his promise.
In a study of service companies, Babbar 8 found that unethical conduct result in tarnished customer experiences and customer dissatisfaction, and resulted in customer defections.
Integrity gets down to honesty. Are we honest with our customers, employees, colleagues, family members, and ourselves? This must be the basis for business. There is not a new business model that obviates the need for integrity.
QUALITY AS A STRATEGY
In Chapter 1 we raised the question of whether quality is sufficient to win orders in the market- place. As you will recall, we stated that although quality can still win orders in some markets, in many markets quality has become an order qualifier. This means that high-quality production is an essential ingredient to participation in the market. In Chapter 3 we discussed research show- ing that quality is still an effective tool in successfully exporting in the international market.
We now discuss quality as a strategy from the perspective of generic strategies. These generic strategies are cost, differentiation , and focus .
Costs of Quality
One of the generic means of competing is cost. Traditionally, this meant the lowest-priced items in the industry. Many companies compete on cost (e.g., Kmart). New definitions of cost are expansive, considering the summation of costs over the life of a product. This includes service, maintenance, and operating costs for the product. For example, it is recognized that ink-jet color computer printers are relatively inexpensive to purchase. However, owners of these machines have found that the color cartridges dry up rapidly and the replacement costs for the cartridges are quite high. As we discuss later, the life-cycle costs for many products may be staggering
Solectron performs strategic planning in selecting its future technological choices. Investments in advanced technologies are guided by an evaluation of the customer’s future requirements and top man- agement’s emphasis on enhancing manufacturing capability. All this effort is paying off for Solectron. As indicated by its chief quality measure, customer satisfaction, the company has won scores of superior performance awards in recent years. After a quality audit, a major customer rated Solectron as the “best contract manufacturer of electronic assemblies in the U.S.” Solectron’s strategic focus is now expanding as it adds production facilities around the world.
8 Babbar, S., “Teaching Ethics for Quality as an Innovation in a Core Operations Management Course,” Decision Sciences Journal of Innovative Education 8, 2 (2010): 14–19.
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 93
when environmental costs are considered. In this section we discuss the cost of quality and how quality can help decrease the cost of doing business.
There are two broad categories of cost: costs due to poor quality and costs associated with improving quality. At a minimum, management must understand these costs to formulate policy concerning quality improvement. In addition, Taguchi and others have provided insights into the issue of quality costs. As an example, the title of the classic book by Crosby, Quality Is Free , reveals an interest in the costs of quality.
PAF Paradigm
The PAF paradigm 9 translates quality costs into three broad categories, which are then subdi- vided into other categories. The three categories are prevention, appraisal, and failure costs (hence the acronym PAF).
Prevention costs are those costs associated with preventing defects and imperfections from occurring. Prevention costs are the most subjective of the three categories of costs. Preven- tion costs include costs such as training, quality planning, process engineering, and other costs associated with assuring quality beforehand (see Table 4-2 ).
Two caveats associated with the collection of quality-related costs include (1) there may be some debate as to whether these costs are all related to quality and (2) persons who work in pre- vention often do not keep accurate records of all costs.
Appraisal costs are associated with the direct costs of measuring quality. These can include a variety of activities such as lab testing, inspection, test equipment and materials, losses because of destructive tests, and costs associated with assessments for ISO 9000:2008 or other awards (see Table 4-3 ).
These costs have undergone a fundamental change as U.S. companies have progressed in quality. For example, these costs were traditionally uncomplicated to assess because appraisal was performed by a centralized quality control function. The concept of in-process inspection has made it difficult to measure appraisal costs accurately. In addition, appraisal and auditing costs have been impacted by assessment activities associated with ISO 9000:2008 and the Malcolm Baldrige award as companies have undertaken these assessment programs.
9 For a more in-depth discussion of quality-related costs, see Carson, J. K., “Quality Costing: A Practical Approach,” International Journal of Quality and Reliability Management 3, 1 (1986): 54–65; Foster, S., “An Examination of the Relationship between Conformance and Quality Related Costs,” International Journal of Quality and Reliability Man- agement 13, 4 (1996): 50–63; and Williams, A. Vander Wiele, A., and Dale, B., “On Quality Costing: A Management Review,” International Journal of Management and Reviews , 1, 4 (1999): 441–460.
TABLE 4-2 Prevention Costs The cost of setting up, planning, and maintaining a documented quality system Quality planning: establishing production process conformance to design specification procedures, and designing of test procedures and test equipment Quality and process engineering (including preventive maintenance) Calibration of quality-related production equipment Supplier quality assurance Supplier assessment All training Robust design Defect data analysis for corrective action purposes
Time spent on quality system audits
94 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Failure costs are roughly categorized into two areas of costs: internal failure costs and external failure costs. Internal failure costs are those associated with online failure, whereas external failure costs are associated with product failure after the production process. This includes failure after the customer takes possession of the product (see Table 4-4 ).
Accounting for Quality-Related Costs
One of the impediments to the collection of quality cost data has been the lack of acceptable accounting standards for these costs. For example, the standard accounting definition for quality is “meeting specifications.” This narrow definition limits organizations desiring to quantify and measure customer requirements as a means of improving service to the customer. A reason for this is that accounting rules require definitions that are not open-ended or open to alternative interpretations.
TABLE 4-3 Appraisal Costs Laboratory acceptance testing Inspection and tests by inspectors Inspection and tests by noninspectors Setup for inspection and test Inspection and test materials Product quality audits Review of test and inspection data On-site performance tests Internal test and release Evaluation of materials and spares Supplier monitoring ISO 9000:2008 qualification activities Quality award assessments
TABLE 4-4 Failure Costs Cost of troubleshooting Reinspection of stocks after defect detection Disruption of production schedules Complaint handling and replacements plus extra time with customers Warranty (taking care not to duplicate previous item) Cost of holding higher levels of stock as a buffer against quality failure Cost of corrective maintenance to plant Cost of corrective action to product (redesign, repair)
Lost production because of labor availability problems (this refers to idle time brought about by failure to plan labor efficiently) Lost production caused by system problems (i.e., material or instructions not available; cost of idle time only) Concessions (design and engineering time) Process waste (including the waste commonly regarded as unavoidable) Cost of product scrapped at product audit Cost associated with disposition of all scrap
EXAMPLE 4-1 Quality Costs in Action
Problem: Macaluso’s manufacturing company has gathered the following quality-related costs. You are hired as a consultant to evaluate these costs and to make recommendations to manage- ment. Compute the ratios of prevention and appraisal costs to failure costs.
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 95
Annual Quality Costs Failure costs Defective products $ 5,276 Engineered scrap 17,265 Nonengineered scrap 125,274 Consumer adjustments 623,980 Downgrading products 1,430,678 Lost goodwill Not evaluated Customer policy changes Not evaluated TOTAL 2,202,473 Appraisal costs Receiving inspection $ 35,765 Line 1 inspection 42,234 Line 2 inspection 53,567 Spot checking 63,766 TOTAL 195,332 Prevention costs Quality training $ 14,500 Process engineering Corporate 125,678 Plant 39,124 Product redesign 16,422 TOTAL 195,724 Grand total 2,593,529
This analysis shows that failure costs are very high compared with the prevention and appraisal costs. Increasing prevention and appraisal activities (and costs) could result in a sig- nificant decrease in failure costs.
Lundvall–Juran Quality Cost Model
The PAF categorization of costs is a useful way of understanding costs. Using the law of dimin- ishing marginal returns, quality costs can be modeled to show the trade-offs between these costs. This trade-off model, called the Lundvall–Juran model , is shown in Figure 4-1 .
The Lundvall–Juran model is a simple economic model. It states that as expenditures in prevention and appraisal activities increase, quality conformance should increase. For example,
Solution: Ratio of appraisal to failure costs:
195,332>2,202,473 ! .0887 Ratio of prevention to failure costs:
195,724>2,202,473 ! .0889 Ratio of prevention and appraisal to failure costs:
(195,332 " 195,724)>2,202,473 ! .1776 Proportion of total quality costs:
Prevention: 195,724>2,593,529 ! .0755 Appraisal: 195,332>2,593,529 ! .0753 Failure: 2,202,473>2,593,529 ! .8492
96 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
the more we spend on training and developing our employees, the more benefit we should get. As conformance improves, failure costs will lessen as well. This is an interesting case because if these statements are true, there should be an economic quality level that minimizes quality- related costs, and this flies in the face of the idea of continuous improvement proposed by Dem- ing and others.
Differentiation through Quality
Think of a product you have been desiring for some time that is priced significantly above the average market price for such a product. It might be a very expensive, brand-name digital music player or TV that you want because of its special appeal. Chances are that such a product benefits from differentiation. A Harley-Davidson is an example of a product that is priced far above the average price for a motorcycle, yet dealers seem to have trouble keeping enough of them in stock. Differentiation is achieved by a competitor if the consumer perceives the product or ser- vice to be unique in an important way. Neiman-Marcus, the retailer, charges many times the prices charged by its competitors for some products. A Rolex watch or iPhone invests the owner with a certain status that other products do not. These are examples of differentiated products.
In the early 1980s, Japanese automakers differentiated their products based on mileage and quality. The quality aspect allowed Japanese automakers to gain significant market share in the United States. There is evidence that eventually, U.S. automakers had closed the quality gap suf- ficiently so that the Japanese could no longer differentiate on quality. This is the case in many markets. It is increasingly difficult to differentiate products based on quality alone. However, there is still much room to differentiate based on service to the customer in many markets.
Focus through Quality
The third generic strategy is to focus the product. For example, think of a product that is particu- larly regional or is marketed to a particular segment of the population. This limited customer group or segment of the market is the object of the focus strategy. As the baby-boom generation ages, many more companies are segmenting products that can be marketed to this age group. For example, more fitness clubs for seniors are springing up around the country. Such a focus strategy
Cost
Conformance Ratio
Cmin
q0 1
C1 = Prevention and appraisal costs
C2 = Failure costs
C1 + C2
FIGURE 4-1 Lundvall–Juran Model
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 97
can be very profitable. GfK Custom Research Incorporated reports that they reduced the number of customers they served by 40% while at the same time doubling profits. They found that by focusing on only their very large clients for advertising services, they were able to get more business with these clients and simultaneously achieve higher service ratings.
The three generic strategies of cost, differentiation, and focus have been identified as important strategic decisions. A company that emphasizes cost will use different approaches to producing quality products than will a company that emphasizes differentiation or focus.
Order Winners
Terry Hill 10 of the London Business School defined a process for setting strategy that is centered on the identification of the order-winning criterion (OWC). Although the OWC is generally asso- ciated with manufacturing strategy, the same concept can be applied to service strategy.
Table 4-5 provides an overview of the planning framework defined by Terry Hill. This framework addresses several of the problems occurring in manufacturing. At times, there is a mismatch or misalignment between corporate objectives and decisions and operational subplans. A close relationship exists between the Hill model and generic strategies that we have discussed. First, the organization determines its competitive priorities and defines how it wins orders in the marketplace. For example, if the company wins orders based on focusing on small niche mar- kets, marketing strategies will be developed to market a wide variety of specialized products. At the same time, this agreement on order winners allows the manufacturing people to make process choices and infrastructural decisions that support wide variety. The process choice then might be a flexible manufacturing system using short setup and change-over times.
The key to the Hill model is reaching consensus on the OWC. The process for doing this involves segmenting the business into smaller markets that can each be identified with an order- winning criterion. This provides an understanding of the markets the company is serving. Prod- ucts are chosen for each market, and marketing provides sales forecasts for the identified markets.
10 Hill, T. J., Manufacturing Strategy (Homewood, IL: Irwin, 2000).
TABLE 4-5 Hill’s Strategy Framework
Corporate Objectives
Marketing Strategy
How Do Products Win Orders in the
Marketplace?
Manufacturing Strategy
Process Choice Infrastructure
Growth Survival Profit Return on investment Other financial measures
Product markets and segments Range Mix Volumes Standardization versus customization Level of innovation Leader versus follower alternatives
Price Quality Delivery speed reliability Demand increases Color range Product range Design leadership Technical support being supplied
Choice of alternative processes Trade-offs embodied in the process choice Process positioning Capacity size timing location Role of inventory in the process configuration
Function support Manufacturing planning and control systems Quality assurance and control Manufacturing systems engineering Clerical procedures Payment systems Work structuring Organizational structure
Source: Terry J. Hill, Manufacturing Strategy (Homewood, IL: Irwin, 2000). IBSN: 0256 230722.
98 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Strategic debate then occurs, resulting in the selection of an OWC. From this, manufacturing strategy is formulated.
Quality as a Core Competency
Prahalad and Hamel 11 have identified the strategic concept of core competence:
[Core competence consists of] communication, involvement, and a deep commitment to working across organizational boundaries. It involves many levels of people and all func- tions. World class research in, for example, lasers or ceramics can take place in corporate laboratories without having an impact on any of the businesses of the company. The skills that together constitute core competence coalesce around individuals whose efforts are not so narrowly focused that they cannot recognize the opportunities for blending their func- tional expertise with those of others in new and interesting ways.
Core competencies do not diminish with use. Unlike physical assets, which do dete- riorate over time, competencies are enhanced as they are applied and shared. But compe- tencies still need to be nurtured and protected; knowledge fades if it is not used. Competencies are the glue that binds existing businesses. They are also the engine for new business development. Patterns of diversification and market entry may be guided by them, not just by the attractiveness of markets. (p. 79 )
Using the Prahalad and Hamel definition of competency, quality—in and of itself—proba- bly is not a core competency. However, for firms operating in rapidly evolving markets or indus- tries, the ability to change can be more important than the actual changing technology of the moment. Hence organizations producing outstanding products or services with a good under- standing of processes are better positioned to operate in the changing market because they can introduce new products rapidly with fewer quality-related holdups. Therefore, core competency is built on the foundation of a long-term commitment to quality and continual process improvement.
QUALITY STRATEGY PROCESS
For the most part we have been discussing strategy content so far in this chapter. Content refers to the variables, definitions, components, and concepts that are included in the strategy. With the discussion of the Hill model and core competency, we are now ready to discuss strategy process. Process consists of the steps for developing strategy within an organization.
There are many different processes for developing strategy. We highlight a strategic pro- cess for firms having little or no experience developing strategy, known as the forced-choice model . Afterward, we present a comprehensive strategy development process that has been used in companies with mature quality processes.
Forced-Choice Model
The forced-choice model of strategic planning is one of several strategic planning models that could be adapted to demonstrate integrated quality planning. The forced-choice model is selected here because of its simplicity and its usefulness for firms that are beginning strategic planning. The forced-choice model is generic and is used simply for explanation purposes. It is simple when compared with other strategic planning models that are generally more complicated. Figure 4-2 provides an outline of the forced-choice strategic planning model.
The forced-choice model is particularly useful for companies that are relatively inexperi- enced in strategic planning. The process begins by sequestering 6 to 12 members of upper
11 Prahalad, C., and Hamel, G., “The Core Competence of the Corporation,” Harvard Business Review (May–June, 1990): 79–91.
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 99
management to a retreat. An organizational assessment is performed to identify strengths and weaknesses within the firm. Next, management performs an environmental assessment to evalu- ate the company’s relative position in the marketplace. In the wrap-up session, alternative strate- gies are developed by executives.
DEPLOYING QUALITY (HOSHIN KANRI)
Hoshin is Japanese for a compass , a course , a policy , or a plan . This is to indicate a vision or purpose to an existence. Kanri refers to management control . In English, this is generally referred to as policy deployment . Hoshin has been used in Japan since the 1960s as a means of implementing policy. Implicit in the Hoshin Kanri (or Hoshin for short) is the use of the basic seven tools of quality (discussed in Chapter 10 ), the new tools of quality, and quality function deployment.
In the Hoshin process, the company develops a three- to five-year plan, and senior execu- tives develop the current year’s Hoshin objectives. Then the process of catchball occurs. Catch- ball is the term used to describe the interactive nature of the Hoshin planning process . Catchball involves reporting from teams and feedback from management. The development of the Hoshin plan results in the cascading of action plans that are designed to achieve corporate goals (see A Closer Look at Quality 4-2 ) .
6. Broad economic assumptions
7. Key government and regulatory issues
8. Major technological forces
9. Significant market opportunities and threats
10. Explicit strategies of competitors
1. Statement of mission
2. Interrelated set of financial and nonfinancial objectives
3. Statement of strengths and weaknesses
4. Forecast of operational needs
5. Major future programs
11. Strategic options Requirements for implementing options
Contingency plans
Organization’s Position Environmental Assessment
FIGURE 4-2 Forced-Choice Model
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 4-2 A Mature Strategic Planning Process
The strategic planning process contains quality concerns at every step of the process. XYZ Corpo- ration is a nationally known organization that has been very successful in implementing quality strategy throughout the entire organization. (The company identity is disguised because of confi- dentiality reasons.) The company uses an annual strategy development cycle. However, part of the annual cycle involves “roll-ups” of 5-year and 10-year planning projections. The strategic planning process for XYZ is coguided by the CFO and vice president of marketing, under direction of the corporate CEO.
(continued)
100 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
As shown in Figure 4-3 , the planning process begins with an annual manage- ment retreat in October to review the current year’s mission statement, vision state- ment, values statement, and strategy. Using professional facilitators, the strategic management team reviews the current year’s performance against projections and makes adjustments to the current year’s plan. Once this is completed, the mission, vision, and values are reviewed and updated. Year-to-year revisions in these state- ments generally have been incremental and adaptive as the market has changed over the years. Another major undertaking during the management meeting is the review of key customer requirements and key business factors for the company. Once this is completed, progress against these factors is reviewed.
The second step in the process occurs during the fall strategic planning meeting and is finalized during the following months. This step involves forecasting market demand and reassessing the position of XYZ in the industry. During this step in the process, discussion of core competencies occurs, and the company develops visions and expectations for each of its product lines. Revenue projections are made by prod- uct line, and plans are made to extend core competencies.
The third step in the XYZ strategic planning process is an assessment of future markets in each of the product divisions. This occurs in January and involves an analy- sis of capacity needs for the coming year based on projections, changes in customer needs, technological needs assessment, profiling major competitors, assessment of the customers of major competitors, and the development of new marketing plans. Based on these marketing plans, information technology and operations decisions are made concerning capital investments for the coming year.
The fourth step involves the development of broad goals and plans by product line. These plans are used to develop separate missions, visions, values, and plans by product line on a very broad basis. Key business factors and key customer require- ments are reviewed and updated at this point as management has evaluated formalized input from the customers. These plans are reviewed by upper management to ensure alignment with overall corporate goals. This step generally occurs during the first quarter of the year.
The fifth step is to develop the coming year’s annual strategic plan. This plan includes market and product projections, plant and equipment projections, labor projec-
tions, projections of needed competencies and capabilities, as well as the development of Hoshin plans. Hoshin plans are deployment plans for the XYZ corporate objectives.
At this point we should mention that XYZ Corporation has many metrics, measures, and indica- tors in place to monitor performance as it relates to the strategic business plan. These measures and indicators, which are quality-related, financial, delivery-related, and so forth, are monitored by manage- ment on a daily basis using an enterprise resource planning (ERP) system. Indicators relating to key business factors are also monitored by the ERP. Feedback from the quarterly customer surveys is used to update key customer requirements.
Finally, the last stage of the annual strategic planning process is a review of the strategic planning process itself to see where potential improvement can be made. Once goals have been completed for the coming year, corporate, divisional, and departmental meetings are held to ensure that the corporate plan is distributed and discussed with employees at all levels.
Although this is a thumbnail sketch of a strategic planning process, the management of XYZ Corporation feels strongly that this process has set the stage for its global success. Financial results have been impressive for the company.
Step 1
Step 2
Market assessment
Step 3
Set goals by assessing future markets
Step 4
Develop broad goals and plans by product line
Review and monitor implementation of strategic plan
Pr ep
ar e
fo r n
ex t p
la nn
in g
cy cl
e
Mission, vision, values, and current strategy
Step 5
FIGURE 4-3 Mature Strategic Planning Process
As shown in Figure 4-4 , functional managers also should develop Hoshins in conjunction with upper management. This results in the development of specific plans for action and post- implementation review of Hoshins to evaluate the success of the process.
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 101
Problems
Development of 3- to 5-year Hoshin goals
Senior management develops 1-year
Hoshin goals
Product management develops 1-year
Hoshin goals
Senior management action plans
Product management action plans
Review by CEO
Review by senior
management
Catchball: Top management 1-year Hoshin goals, targets, measurements to ensure alignment
Catchball: Product management
Yes Yes
No
Quarterly
R ev
ie w
H os
hi n
Pr oc
es s
FIGURE 4-4 Hoshin Planning
DOES QUALITY LEAD TO BETTER BUSINESS RESULTS?
One of the most common questions posed by executives seeking improvement is “Will this qual- ity effort pay off?” An answer to this question was provided by W. Edwards Deming with the Deming value chain, which we consider in Chapter 1 . Deming proposed a theoretical basis for concluding that quality will pay off.
The effects of quality on business results are mixed; some firms have been wildly success- ful with their quality efforts, and other companies have been unsuccessful in gaining bottom-line results. There are two primary reasons for this. First, many variables affect profitability besides quality . You might produce the highest-quality, obsolete product in the world. If you produce a
102 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
high-quality product or service that no one wants to buy, quality management systems likely will not save you. Macroeconomic factors, such as the recession–boom business cycle, affect profit- ability. American Motors products of the early 1980s were given awards for outstanding design (e.g., the Renault Alliance). At the same time, these products were not well accepted by their customers, and the company went out of business.
Second, many companies implement quality incorrectly . That you can claim you are implementing quality does not guarantee you will be successful. Quality improvement takes a long time, and many firms desire quick returns on investment for quality training programs. When these returns are slow in coming, the companies give up in midstream and wonder why their quality efforts were ineffective. At the same time, quality programs have been shown to be effective in a variety of cultures and industries when implemented correctly. Hence the mixed results. As a result, we need to understand the relationships between quality and other variables.
Quality and Price
The relationship between price and quality has long been studied. Indeed, the laws of supply and demand lead to a natural ordering of competing products on a price scale such that a superior product would be the most highly priced. Another view is that high price is a psychological enabler allowing perceptions of high quality to result. However, the price–quality relationship becomes increasingly unclear when cultural differences in an international setting are consid- ered. Kettinger et al. 12 found that in different cultures the relative ordering of customer priorities differed. The implication is that different cultures could perceive the price–quality relationship either positively or negatively, resulting in variations in financial performance.
Another reason that the price–quality relationship might be difficult to assess has to do with the increase in high-quality, low-priced goods over the past decades. It is expected that if this trend continues, the relationship between price and quality will decrease. Other interven- ing variables in the international markets are the prevalence of price supports for various prod- ucts and “dumping” practices by international firms. Price supports often take the form of governmental subsidies that allow producers to sell products below cost internationally. Although some higher-cost products clearly have better quality, such as a $60,000 BMW ver- sus a $17,000 Ford Focus, it is not clear that a bottle of shampoo that costs $4.00 is better than a bottle of shampoo that costs $3.00 all the time. Therefore, at best, this relationship is some- what tenuous.
Quality and Cost
A fundamental difference exists between a low-price strategy, which is based on competitive pricing, and a low-cost orientation that is based on continual learning and production com- petence. Because of the possible relationship between pricing and low-cost structure, we anticipate that quality will tend to provide a competitive advantage relative to other com- petitors by allowing firms with a high-quality strategy to incur lower costs they can pass along to the customers.
Quality and Productivity
The relationship between quality and productivity is clearer and has been demonstrated over time. The elimination of waste results in higher productivity. Simplification of processes also results in flows that are simpler and of higher productivity. Some care should be taken to recognize
12 Kettinger, W., Lee, C., and Lee, S., “Global Measures of Information Service Quality: A Cross-National Study,” Deci- sion Sciences 26, 5 (1995): 569–588.
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 103
there are many different measures of productivity, such as labor productivity, productive use of energy, technological productivity, efficiency, multifactor productivity, and total-factor produc- tivity. Total-factor productivity measures generally are considered the most robust means of measuring productivity. Several measures have been developed that simultaneously monitor the relationship between quality and productivity. 13
There is one caveat when evaluating the relationship between quality and productivity. It appears that changes to processes and procedures often result in a temporary worsening of pro- ductivity. Hayes and Clark, 14 in a study of engineering change orders and productivity, found a temporary decrease in productivity as a result of too many simultaneous changes.
Quality and Profitability
Many quality enthusiasts have declared that quality will always result in improved profitability. They will further state that those cases where quality does not lead to improved profits are the fault of the offending implementer. There are some facts to substantiate this claim. Every year the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), the administrator of the Baldrige award, touts the outstanding stock performance of Baldrige winners. In addition, the U.S. Gen- eral Accounting Office 15 performed a study of 30 Baldrige award winners and found the effects of quality improvement to include improved employee relations, lower cost, greater customer satisfaction, and improved market share. In a study of quality and profitability, Adam 16 found quality improvement in specific firms to be more long term rather than immediate. This makes some intuitive sense because quality improvement may not be recognized by the customers for some time. A study of 41 companies 17 implementing Six Sigma found somewhat mixed results. However, Six Sigma significantly affected free cash flow, earnings before interest, taxes, depre- ciation, and amortization (EBITDA), and asset turnover. However, it should be stated that high quality is no guarantee of success. Firms must still successfully market, manage cash, and do the many other things that ensure profitability.
Quality and Sustainability
Another strategic imperative receiving increasing attention is the effect of business on the envi- ronment. Because of regulatory pressures—both domestic and international—firms realize they must integrate environmental concerns into their strategic plans. When addressing emissions, Ed Woolard of DuPont Corporation stated the following:
As we move closer to zero, the economic cost which society must ultimately bear may be very high (when considering reduction of pollution). Or the energy expenditure nec- essary to eliminate a given emission may have more ecological impact than trade emis- sions themselves. Society will have to decide where the balance will be struck, and may conclude in some cases that zero emissions is neither in the environment’s nor the pub- lic’s best interest. 18
Companies have to address many environmental issues. Besides the regulatory require- ments, firms realize more and more that environmental friendliness is part of being a good
13 See Adam, E., Hershaurer, J., and Ruch, W., Productivity and Quality: Measurement as a Basis for Improvement (Columbia: Research Center, University of Missouri–Columbia, 1986). 14 Hayes, R., and Clark, K., “Why Some Factories Are More Productive Than Others,” Interfaces 64 (September–October 1986): 66–73. 15 U.S. General Accounting Office, “Management Practices: U.S. Companies Improve Performance through Quality Efforts” (Washington, DC: GAO Report to the Honorable Don Ritter, House of Representatives, 1991). 16 Adam, E., “Alternative Quality Improvement Practices and Organization Performance,” Journal of Operations Man- agement 12 (1994): 27–44. 17 Foster, S. T., “Does Six Sigma Improve Performances,” Quality Management Journal , 14, 4 (2007):7–20. 18 Holusha, J. “Ed Woolard Walks Du Pont’s Tightrope,” New York Times , 14 April 1990.
104 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
corporate citizen. Therefore, tasks such as environmental protection, waste management, prod- uct integrity, worker health, government relations, and community relations compose the envi- ronmentally related strategic issues that must be addressed. As a result, firms are implementing quality-based environmental management systems, sometimes referred to as total quality envi- ronmental management (TQEM). These systems involve a holistic “systems” view of the pro- cesses causing environmental degradation. Measurements are implemented that identify indicators of environmental performance. This involves a focus on preventive rather than reactive cleanup.
A trend in companies is to strengthen the link between quality practices and sustainability. We define sustainability as the ability to meet the needs of the current generation without com- promising the ability of future generations to meet their needs. Most often, this relates to envi- ronmental management.
At its core, sustainability has to do with improving environmental performance and reduc- ing waste. This seems consistent with Lean and quality management philosophies relating to waste reduction and continual improvement. ISO 14000 links quality and sustainability in a unique way by applying ISO 9000: 2008 approaches to improving environmental performance. While the literature is not clear in linking better environmental performance to enhanced finan- cial performance, some encouraging results have come out of applying teams and continuous improvement methodologies taught in this book to environmental sustainability. For example, firms such as Hewlett Packard have reduced packaging materials in the shipment of their printers as a result of applying continuous improvement principles and methods.
SUPPLY CHAIN STRATEGY
Strategic planning is important for effective supply chain management. Figure 4-5 shows various things to consider in supply chain strategy. First, you need to understand the different classes of sourced items. Next, you need to identify your supply chain’s optimal performance levels. This means you should know your objectives and metrics for performance. Third, you should under- stand your current levels of performance and where you can improve. Fourth, organize team projects and plans for achieving desired supply chain objectives. Fifth, implement your improve- ment teams and plans. Finally, you monitor your results and take corrective action where needed. Notice that this process has its roots in Deming’s plan-do-check-act cycle.
Among the questions to be answered in a supply chain strategy are these 19 : How many plants are needed? Should we add new plants? Should we close plants? Should I stock inventory? For which products? In which locations? Should I outsource the task of transporting goods throughout my networks? Should I make subassemblies or purchase them? From whom? As you can see, a good deal of planning is needed to adequately address these questions. In general, these questions fall into the following groupings:
• Logistics When will we ship? What mode of transportation will we use? How do we opti- mize our shipping practices?
• Suppliers Who are our preferred suppliers? What is our process for supplier selection? How do we develop suppliers? How do we link with our suppliers? Do we source globally?
• Inventory management Where do we optimally store inventory? How much? How long? Do we have perishable stocks? Where do we carry safety stocks? Are we maintaining good levels of services?
• Information flows What kinds of enterprise resource planning systems are needed? How do we link upstream and downstream? What are data relations? What data do we need to manage our supply chain effectively?
19 Hicks, D., “The State of Supply Chain Strategy,” IIE Solutions 31, 8 (1999): 24–30.
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 105
Define types of sourced items
Identify optimal state for the
supply chain
Observe current and desired levels of
performance
Organize improvement
teams and projects
Implement teams and
improvement projects
Monitor results and take
corrective action where needed
FIGURE 4-5 Supply Chain Strategic Planning
Summary This chapter discussed quality from the perspective of strategy. One of the fundamental themes of this text is that quality improvement is a managed process. Although this may seem obvious now, a framework is needed to help achieve desired results. This chapter provided a strategic planning framework for this to occur. Future chapters focus on the implementation of these strategies.
We discussed various strategic issues relating to strategy content and process. Two pro- cesses were discussed: the forced-choice model and Hoshin plan. Finally, we discussed the results associated with quality. Results are of strategic importance because they help us to deter- mine if we have accomplished what we wanted to.
• Products How many products do we stock? What product variety is necessary? How do we win orders? Where are our products in their life cycles?
• Service How do we define service along the supply chain? What do our customers want? Can we segment the supply chain? Who are our customers?
106 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Discussion Questions 1. The Malcolm Baldrige award changed the name of the “Strategic Quality Planning” category to sim-
ply “Strategic Planning.” Why was this change made? Do you agree or disagree with the committee’s rationale?
2. A study by the U.S. General Accounting Office reported that, on average, a firm takes 3.5 years to see significant results from a quality improvement program. Why do you think it takes so long to see sig- nificant results? Make your answer as substantive as possible.
3. According to the quality literature, without top management leadership, quality improvement will not occur. Why do you believe this is the case?
4. Explain the hazards of the “management by dictate” model. 5. Trust has been identified as a very important attribute for leaders who are initiating quality improve-
ment efforts. Why do you believe trust is such an important attribute? 6. Why is commitment an important variable in quality improvement initiatives? 7. Discuss some of the ways leaders resolve conflict in organizations. Which of these ways have you
found to be most effective? Why? 8. Do you agree with the statement “quality is good ethics”? Explain your answer. 9. Why do companies that focus on their customers often develop a set of ethics that includes valuing
employees? Make your answer as substantive as possible. 10. Discuss the concept of prevention cost. Why is prevention cost such a pervasive consideration in qual-
ity programs? 11. Describe the difference between external and internal failure costs. Is one cost more important than the
other? Explain your answer. 12. What are the quality costs incurred when your hard drive crashes? 13. Think of a product you buy that is differentiated through quality. Do you believe the manufacturer’s
strategy to differentiate this product through quality is sustainable, or will the manufacturer eventually have to find other ways to attract you to the product? Explain your answer.
14. Describe the concept of core competency. Using the Prahalad and Hamel model, can quality be consid- ered a core competency? Why or why not?
15. Describe the difference between “strategy content” and “strategy process.” Describe examples of quality- related strategy content and strategy process issues.
16. Describe the benefits of strategic planning. 17. Why is the forced-choice model particularly useful for companies that are relatively inexperienced in
strategic planning? Explain your answer. 18. Should the strategic planning process consider quality concerns at every step of the process? Why or
why not? 19. Describe the concept of catchball. 20. Juran argues that both incremental (continuous) improvements and stepwise (breakthrough)
improvements are needed in a strategic framework. Do you agree with Juran’s assessment? Why or why not?
Key Terms Appraisal costs Catchball External failure costs Failure costs
Hoshin planning process Internal failure costs Leadership Leader skills
Leading PAF paradigm Prevention costs Superordinate goals
Sustainability Trait dimension
Problems 1. The Colorado Manufacturing Company of Boulder, Colorado, has gathered the following quality-
related costs. You are hired as a consultant to evaluate these costs and to make recommendations to management.
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 107
Annual Quality Costs
Failure costs
Defective products $ 4,234
Engineered scrap 21,265
Nonengineered scrap 224,123
Consumer adjustments 125,654
Downgrading products 2,125,328
Lost goodwill Not evaluated
Customer policy changes Not evaluated
TOTAL
Appraisal costs
Receiving inspection $ 24,138
Line 1 inspection 7,256
Line 2 inspection 8,543
Spot checking 2,766
TOTAL
Prevention costs
Quality training $ 25,500
Process engineering
Corporate 132,678
Plant 44,124
Product redesign 10,422
TOTAL
a. Compute the ratios of prevention and appraisal costs to failure costs. b. Identify strategies for reducing failure costs.
2. The Aggie Remanufacturing Company of College Station, Texas, has gathered the following quality- related costs data:
Annual Quality Costs
Failure costs
Defective products $ 4,234
Engineered scrap 21,265
Nonengineered scrap 24,123
Consumer adjustments 25,654
Downgrading products 0
Lost goodwill Not evaluated
Customer policy changes Not evaluated
TOTAL
Appraisal costs
Receiving inspection $ 10,155
Line 1 inspection 9,225
Line 2 inspection 7,455
Spot checking 9,766
TOTAL
(continued)
108 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
a. Compute the ratios of prevention and appraisal costs to failure costs. b. What would you recommend that this company do?
3. The Gorilla Manufacturing Company of Pittsburg, Kansas, recently studied its expenditures and losses relative to quality for the month of October. They found they had lost $300,000 in scrap and rework. They had spent $40,000 for inspection and $25,000 in prevention-related activities. Evaluate their cost ratios and suggest whether or not the expenditures are warranted.
4. The Buffalo Machine Works of Boulder, Colorado, was evaluating its cost structure relating to quality costs. In the prior year, the company had lost $500,000 in warranty and scrap. They didn’t have good numbers for rework costs. In the prior year, they had spent $100,000 training employees in quality tools and $200,000 for quality assurance personnel. Inspection costs were 2% of sales of $50 million. Evaluate these costs and recommend what actions should be taken to upper management. (Hint: The average company loses about 20% of sales due to poor quality.)
Annual Quality Costs
Prevention costs
Quality training $ 25,500
Process engineering
Corporate 132,678
Plant 44,124
Product redesign 10,422
TOTAL
CASES
Case 4-1 Ames Rubber Corporation: Realizing Multiple Benefits through Improved Quality Ames Rubber Homepage: www.amesrubber.com
Ames Rubber, headquartered in Hamburg, New Jersey, produces rubber rollers for office machines and special- ized parts for the assembly of front-wheel-drive vehi- cles. The company was founded in 1949, has annual sales of $45 million to $50 million, and employs 445 people at three New Jersey sites. At first glance, Ames Rubber appears to be a typical small- to medium-sized manufacturing firm. However, the company has some truly extraordinary aspects that make it deserving of a second look, particularly in the area of quality.
Unlike other companies that have used quality as part of a turnaround strategy, Ames Rubber has been successful throughout its corporate life. During its early history, the company flourished by providing compo- nent parts to the high-growth copier and printer indus- tries. In the early 1980s, the global environment changed, and even though the company had achieved benchmark status in the copier industry, its customers were demanding products that met more stringent qual- ity requirements at a lower cost. This challenge was exacerbated by the emergence of increased competition
from foreign competitors. It was clear to the managers at Ames that “business as usual” was no longer suffi- cient to satisfy their customers’ needs.
The company conducted an internal review of its operations. At this point, the company was unsure of how to improve its product quality in a cost effective manner. The review indicated that Ames was expending considerable effort to meet the quality, cost, and deliv- ery requirements of its customers with no coherent quality plan in place to guide its efforts or anticipate customer requirements. As a result of this analysis, Ames decided to focus on the effectiveness of its manu- facturing operations and quality efforts. Remembering that Xerox had launched a program called Leadership through Quality, Ames’ CEO Joe Marvel put his entire management team through Xerox’s supplier training program. Using Xerox as its benchmark, Ames announced that it was embarking on a new quality pro- gram entitled Excellence through Quality. The program was designed to achieve one common goal—the satis- faction of both internal and external customers.
Chapter 4 • Strategic Quality Planning 109
Discussion Questions
1. In developing its Excellence through Quality pro- gram, Ames initially benchmarked against Xerox. Is benchmarking against another company’s qual- ity program a good idea? What are the potential hazards and benefits involved?
2. Discuss the manner in which Ames implemented its Excellence through Quality program. Did the
company place its emphasis in the right areas? Explain your answer.
3. Discuss the benefits that Ames Rubber achieved from its quality program. Are these benefits more encompassing than you would have expected? Why or why not?
Case 4-2 MidwayUSA 20 www.midwayusa.com
MidwayUSA is the world leader in its industry with $185 million in revenue. It is a catalog and Internet retailer offering everything for shooters, reloaders, gun-
smiths, and hunters. MidwayUSA has the vision to be the best-run business in America. To achieve this goal, the company adopted the Baldrige Core Values and
Since it was introduced, the Excellence through Quality program has been effectively embraced by the entire Ames Rubber organization. The program involved the following key initiatives:
• Involvement groups. Everyone at Ames is a member of an involvement group, which meets a minimum of once a month. Involvement groups use team processes to improve product quality.
• Cost of quality and reject tracking. Reject track- ing and cost of quality collection systems were established.
• Yield improvement teams. The company isolates the processes causing the greatest problems (“Pareto thinking”).
• Strategy review/operations review. Strategy review and operations review meetings were established to review short- and long-term prog- ress toward quality objectives.
• Extensive training. The company provides its employees extensive training in such areas as sta- tistical quality control, communication skills, leadership skills, and quality management.
Cultural changes also were made to facilitate the Excellence through Quality program. All Ames’s employees are called “teammates” to promote an egali- tarian philosophy. Safety committees, made up of rank- and-file employees, were set up to ensure safety throughout the company’s facilities. To demonstrate his personal commitment to satisfying internal and external customers, CEO Marvel redesigned the company’s organization chart, with external customers on the top,
the firm’s employees in the middle, and himself at the bottom.
Ames Rubber has found that the benefits of its Excel- lence through Quality program have transcended its origi- nal objectives. At a minimum, the company has become more disciplined, knows its customers and employees bet- ter, and produces a better product than it has at any time in its history. In addition, according to the company’s applica- tion summary for the Malcolm Baldrige award, an empha- sis on quality has produced the following benefits:
• Cultural change is happening, and it is being mea- sured.
• Employee involvement groups are flourishing. • Morale is at an all-time high because of involve-
ment, improved communication, and improved recognition.
• A system for total quality and beyond is in place. • The company has reorganized and decentralized. • Prioritization of effort has become routine. • Rejected products have been reduced by more
than 50%. • Financial results have improved.
The legacy of Ames Rubber Corporation and its experience with quality is twofold. First, regardless of how successful a company is, environmental change may result in pressures to improve quality. This includes a strong emphasis on employees as a conduit for change. As a result, maintaining a quality-minded culture is a prudent business practice. Second, there are multiple potential benefits to remaining attentive to quality issues that transcend improved operations management.
20 Based on NIST, Profiles of Baldrige Winners, 2010.
110 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Concepts and made them an integral part of the compa- ny’s culture. The values and concepts are displayed in 30 locations throughout the company.
MidwayUSA’s quality efforts are customer focused. One of its core values is “customer-driven excellence.” This strategy resulted in a customer reten- tion rate of 98% in 2009, an all-time high. To maintain a customer focus, MidwayUSA provides customers multiple opportunities to give feedback. Customers receive help through its complaint center. The company conducts surveys. Customers can also submit reviews of items and suggest new product lines.
MidwayUSA understands the value of its employ- ees. A component of quality customer service is employee interaction. MidwayUSA wants employees passionate about hunting, shooting, and so on. This pas- sion can be felt when employees interact with custom- ers. Also, the employees are able to offer personal
insight and knowledge about products. MidwayUSA encourages its workforce to join the National Rifle Association and to participate in hunting and shooting events. This passion and level of interaction has contrib- uted to a customer satisfaction rating of 93%.
MidwayUSA takes a robust approach to assess its current and future needs. Information incorporated into these projections is regularly monitored. All processes are aligned to customer needs and the company’s goals. To meet production capability and capacity, the com- pany maintains a skills inventory matrix. There are reg- ular reviews of the company’s performance and results. With this systematic approach, MidwayUSA has exceeded its nearest competitor in multiple financial categories: gross sales, net income as a percentage of net sales, earnings distribution, and inventory turns. MidwayUSA’s customer focus and approach to quality position the company for continual sales growth.
Discussion Questions
1. How does MidwayUSA engage the customer in its focus on quality?
2. MidwayUSA has incorporated quality and customer focus into its culture. How does MidwayUSA ensure employees support the culture? Also, how do employees contribute to quality customer service?
3. MidwayUSA wants to be the best-run company in America. Is this a useful vision statement? Are
there benefits to this vision instead of being the best-run company in the industry?
4. Effective quality and strategic planning are not a onetime event. In looking at MidwayUSA and other companies, what can companies do to make these a continual process?
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 111
The customer is always right.
—Macy’s Slogan
We start with a list of our customers. “Tire-kicker. Mooch.” The names come faster now, shouted out by the car dealership employees,
“Dreamer. Stroker. Lookie-Lou.” Then we ask, what do customers think of car salespeople? Silence. Then a few suggestions:
“Snake oil salesman. Sleaze-bag. Crook.”
—Infiniti Boot Camp for Dealers
The customer is the enemy.
—Reportedly a Motto among Certain Managers
at Archer Daniels Midland Corporation
The quotes at the top of the chapter demonstrate that different employees have different views of their customers. We have all experienced instances of great or lousy customer service. Customer service is important for these reasons 1 : • Customers tell twice as many people about bad experiences as good experiences. • A dissatisfied customer tells 8 to 10 people about the bad experience. • Seventy percent of upset customers will remain your customer if you resolve the complaint
satisfactorily. • It’s easier to get customers to repeat than it is to find new business. • Service firms rely on repeat customers for 85% to 95% of their business. • Eighty percent of new product and service ideas come from customer ideas. • The cost of keeping an existing customer is a sixth of the cost of attracting a new customer.
C H A P T E R 5
The Voice of the Customer
111
1 Kabodian, A., The Customer Is Always Right. (Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA 1996).
112 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
A customer is the receiver of goods or services. Typically, this involves an economic transaction in which something of value has changed hands.
Often customers are defined as internal or external customers. Internal customers are employees receiving goods or services from within the same firm. For example, management information systems (MIS) technicians and programmers view the users within their company as internal customers. Accounting departments and finance departments often have very little inter- action with the bill-paying customer. However, they have customers within the firm who use their services daily. In a sense, an economic transaction takes place in internal services in that service providers are funded as a result of the service they provide to the organization as a whole. Some have used an abstraction of the term internal customer to include the person at the next step in the supply chain. Therefore, the person who works at workstation 3 can be considered the customer of the worker at workstation 2.
External customers or end users are the bill-paying receivers of our work. The external customers are the ultimate people we are trying to satisfy with our work. If we have satisfied exter- nal customers, chances are we will continue to prosper, grow, and fulfill the objectives of the firm.
CUSTOMER-DRIVEN QUALITY
Customer-driven quality represents a proactive approach to satisfying customer needs that is based on gathering data about our customers to learn their needs and preferences and then pro- viding products and services that satisfy the customers. Customer-driven quality is one of the core values of the Malcolm Baldrige award. A Closer Look at Quality 5-1 shows that companies have taken differing approaches to handling customer feedback.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 5-1 Online Review of Merchandise 2
Consumers have multiple avenues to express their opinions about products and services they receive: Facebook, Twitter, YouTube, blogs, and so on. Online reviews can provide valuable insight about a product. In a survey by E-tailing Group, for 71% of online shoppers the most influential factor was cus- tomer reviews. Online reviews are another opportunity for retailers to gain customer feedback. Instead of scouring the Web for the information, retailers have created online reviews on their Web sites.
There are pros and cons to online reviews. Product reviews have been shown to boost loyalty and sales with customers. Retailers and designers can respond quicker to quality issues by receiving nearly instantaneous feedback. Online customers are able to learn about products without seeing and touching them. Some retailers believe online reviews will reduce return rates and increase “conversion,” the per- centage of browsers who actually buy.
On the downside, there is the potential of a negative review, though reviews tend to be over- whelmingly positive. Anyone who has purchased the product can review it. As designer Carmen Marc Valvo said, “Style is a very subjective matter.” In some industries, producers would prefer leaving the reviews to the experts.
As online sales increase, elite luxury stores such as Neiman Marcus and Nordstrom are changing their tune and are embracing online reviews. Nordstrom was the first in the industry to do this by adding product reviews to its Web site in the fall of 2009. Neiman Marcus has taken a modified approach by only allowing an elite group of customers to post reviews. Luxury stores are known for customer inter- action and their need to realize online reviews are a new component of providing quality customer ser- vice. Customers want an objective voice and reviews give them that. In the end, elite stores may have different motivations for adding online reviews. Some may want the direct customer feedback and others may do it in an attempt to boost sales.
2 Based on Dodes, R., “Luxe Lowdown: Tony Sites Begin to Invite Buyer Reviews” Wall Street Journal, 16 October 2010.
Video Clip: Customer Satisfaction at Marriott
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 113
The Pitfalls of Reactive Customer-Driven Quality
Even though it is generally understood that listening to and understanding the customer is a good thing, some companies implement customer feedback mechanisms incorrectly. As a result, these companies are placed in a reactive rather than a proactive mode with their customers.
One of the difficulties in satisfying customer requirements is that in a dynamic environ- ment, customer needs are constantly changing. Consider the example of military suppliers. For many years, cost overruns and missed schedules were allowed by the military customers. When the purchasing standards were changed by the military, many suppliers such as Boeing were incapable of adequately responding. The results have been layoffs, corporate restructuring, and mergers. Figure 5-1 shows a model of reactive customer-driven quality (RCDQ) . This model shows that a firm’s quality performance is increasing while customers’ expectations also are increasing. Problems occur when customer requirements increase at a faster rate than quality and service improvement. This places a firm in a reactive mode that may signal the need for major process and service redesign.
The RCDQ model demonstrates conceptually and graphically the primary pitfalls and dangers of RCDQ. In a sense, manufacturers and service organizations attempting to meet customer expectations are pursuing a moving target. As the supplier’s competitors improve quality and competition increases, customers demand higher levels of quality and service. The difference between world-class and ordinary suppliers lies in whether suppliers stay ahead of the target or fall behind the target. Although a supplier to a customer might desire to provide high-quality service to the customer, the reactive posture engendered in the RCDQ approach will cause the supplier to fall farther and farther behind the moving target over time.
Region of complacency
Quality
Time Tt0
Region of dissatisfaction Customer expectations
Supplier performance
FIGURE 5-1 Reactive Customer-Driven Quality Model Source: S. T. Foster, “The Ups and Downs of Customer-Driven Quality,” Quality Progress (October 1998):70. © 1998 American Society for Quality. Reprinted with permission.
114 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
CUSTOMER-RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Much of the focus in marketing today is on maintaining the existing customer base that a firm has established. If it is true that 90% of the business for many service firms is in the form of repeat business, the focus of process and system design must be on developing relationships with customers rather than simply providing clean transactions at each stage of the process.
Process design in services often has focused on the transaction. For example, a university might focus on discrete processes for improvement in areas such as registration, financial aid, test taking, and so forth. However, some universities have learned that focusing on these internal processes does not help in the retention of students. Therefore, new programs for student reten- tion focus on familiarizing the student with the university and developing the skills students need to be successful in a college setting. Some of these skills might involve study skills, social skills, or managing on a limited budget. In this way, the university begins to look at the whole system relating to the student and not just internal university processes.
For many firms, the focus on process design includes the aspect of customer-relationship management (CRM). This view of the customer asserts that he or she is a valued asset to be managed. This is relationship management. The tangibles (such as facilities and machinery) meet the intangibles (such as professionalism and empathy) to provide a satisfying experience for the customer. There are four important design aspects (see Figure 5-2 ) to customer-relationship management that we address here: complaint resolution, feedback, guarantees, and corrective action or recovery. For practical reasons, we distinguish between CRM and customer relation- ship management systems (CRMS). CRMS are systems used for capturing customer-related data. CRMS are discussed later in the chapter.
Complaint Resolution
As the famous saying goes, “You can please some of the people some of the time, but you can’t please all of the people all of the time.” As a result, complaint resolution is an important component of a quality management system. Complaints come in many forms. For our discussion, we focus on three types of complaints that need to be resolved: regulatory complaints, employee complaints , and customer complaints . Although the focus of this chapter is on the customer, it is important to recognize all three types of complaints as potential sources of information for improvement. Donald Beaver, the owner of New Pig Corporation of Tipton, Pennsylvania, has the right attitude about complaints. He states, “You should love complaints more than compliments. A complaint
Complaint resolution
Feedback
Closed-loop CRM
Corrective action
Guarantees
Customer- Relationship Management
FIGURE 5-2 Four Components of Customer-Relationship Management
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 115
is someone letting you know that you haven’t satisfied them yet. They have gold written all over them.”3 Complaints should be viewed as opportunities to improve. Because only a small percent- age of customers ultimately will complain, they should be taken very seriously. This small percent- age of customers may represent a much larger population of dissatisfied customers.
The complaint-resolution process involves the transformation of a negative situation into one in which the complainant is restored to the state existing prior to the occurrence of a problem. In extreme cases, the complainant has incurred a loss, as in the case of a malfunctioning product lead- ing to injury and liability. In the case of personal injury, if the complainant was injured as a result of the malfunction of a product, it is ethical that the company should restore the person by reimbursing him or her for the product, any medical expenses, and other costs such as lost time from work.
Typically, losses incurred by customers are not quite so dramatic. The losses are smaller, such as lost time, lost money, or lost patience. The first component of a complaint-resolution process is to compensate people for losses. This may be as small as an easy return policy with no questions asked. The second component to complaint resolution is contrition . The firm should apologize to the customer for the mistakes made and invoke the Macy’s mantra, “The customer is always right.” Third, the complaint-resolution process must be designed to make it easy for complainants to reach resolution to simple complaints.
The process associated with resolving complaints is called the complaint-recovery pro- cess . Recovery design is an important activity for many firms. Complaints can come from a variety of sources, such as questionnaires (low scores on key quality indicators can be considered complaints), formal direct inquiries, or informal channels. The recovery process must be devel- oped for documenting complaints, resolving the complaint, documenting recovery, and feedback for system improvement.
Feedback
To understand customer behavior, wants, and needs, data about the customer are necessary. Some of these data come directly from the customer. Some customer data are solicited, and other data are provided without solicitation. The following pages discuss different approaches to collecting and analyzing customer data. One way to gather data is to receive customer feedback. There are two main types of feedback: feedback to the customer and feedback to the firm as a basis for process improvements. The customer-feedback loop includes reporting the resolution of the complaint to the customer. Many times this requires a data-gathering mechanism, such as a com- puterized information system, to ensure that the customer complaint has been resolved ade- quately. Feedback to the firm should occur on a consistent basis with a process to monitor changes resulting from the process improvement.
Guarantees
Another important aspect of customer service is the guarantee. Many firms offer service guaran- tees. A guarantee outlines the customer’s rights. Even with high-quality companies, such as Motorola, there are product and service failures. To design a process that ignores this fact is a form of denial. The guarantee is both a design and an economic issue that must be addressed by all companies before the first sale occurs. Guarantees should be designed prior to beginning busi- ness so that employees can be trained to implement the guarantee and marketing can advertise the guarantee properly. This is an important economic issue because of the sales potential that is created by a guarantee and the costs associated with fulfillment of the guarantee.
High Street Emporium sells products on United Airlines flights via catalog and extends a sim- ple guarantee: “The Best Products from the Best Catalogs at the Best Prices—Guaranteed.” This is a nice example of a simple, understandable guarantee. To be effective, a guarantee should be 4
3 Whitely, R., The Customer-Driven Company: Moving from Talk to Action (Boston: Addison Wesley, 1991). 4 Chase, R., Operations and Supply Chain Management (Homewood, IL: Irwin, 2010).
116 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
• Unconditional. No “small print.” Inconsistent application can make the guarantee less compelling.
• Meaningful. To be meaningful, customer grievances must be fully addressed. For exam- ple, any financial loss must be fully recovered by the complainant.
• Understandable. The customer must be able to understand easily the parameters of the guarantee and how to achieve resolution quickly.
• Communicable. The phrasing of a guarantee should resonate with the customer. “The best quality at the lowest prices—I guarantee it,” is the famous motto at the Men’s Wearhouse. Not only is this a great guarantee, but it also is a great marketing line.
• Painless to invoke. The customer must not be inconvenienced too much. Costco has a “no questions asked” return policy that allows customers to return or exchange merchandise with a minimum of hassle. This return policy was an early service linchpin that differenti- ated its service from other retailers.
Corrective Action
An important aspect of customer-relationship management is corrective action. This means that when a service or product failure occurs, the failure is documented and the problem is resolved in a way that it never happens again. Corporate teams or committees should be in place to regularly review complaints and to improve processes so that the problems don’t recur.
Referring to Figure 5-2 , the corrective action results in gathering complaint and war- ranty data and determining the causes of these problems. Often, teams of employees and man- agers study complaints, do Pareto cost analysis of the complaints, and recommend improvements to the customer service delivery system. Such systems are often referred to as closed-loop corrective action . The loop is in effect closed because a process is in place that ensures this information is used for improvement. This is why complaint and field repair data are so golden.
THE “GAPS” APPROACH TO SERVICE DESIGN
The gap has been recognized in the quality literature for some time. Typically, the gap refers to the differences between desired levels of performance and actual levels of performance. This could be something like the difference between the desired conformance level versus the existing conformance level in a manufacturing environment. In services, this is the difference between the expected and the actual level of service provided. Gaps are important in that once a gap is identified, it is a candidate for corrective action and process improvement. The formal means for identifying and correcting these gaps is called gap analysis .
One of the differences studied by gap analysis identifies the difference between managerial and customer perceptions of what the customer wants (gap 1). When this gap is large, service providers are likely producing excellent services that no one wants. The other gaps and gap analysis are discussed in depth in Chapter 8 .
In addition to the gaps model, Parasuraman, Zeithamel, and Berry contributed a number of important concepts to managing service quality. These include 10 determinants of service quality ( Table 5-1 ), service quality dimensions discussed in Chapter 1 , and a questionnaire to test the hypothesized relationships in Figure 5-3 . The survey instrument is called SERVQUAL.
Another approach to identifying and measuring gaps in quality service is found in the two- dimensional gaps model shown in Figure 5-4 . Surveys using this approach measure customer satisfaction perceptions on the y axis and ratings of relative importance on the x axis. This approach is presented in depth in Chapter 8 , but it is presented here in the context of gathering customer data to better understand the customer.
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 117
TABLE 5-1 Determinants of Service Quality
Reliability involves consistency of performance and dependability. It means that the firm performs the service right the first time. It also means that the firm honors its promises. Responsiveness concerns the willingness or readiness of employees to provide service. Competence means possession of the required skills and knowledge to perform the service. Access involves approachability and ease of contact. Courtesy involves politeness, respect, consideration, and friendliness of contact personnel (including receptionists, telephone operators, and so on). Communication means keeping customers informed in language they can understand and listening to them. It may mean that the company has to adjust its language for different
consumers—increasing the level of sophistication with a well-educated customer and speaking simply and plainly with a novice.
Credibility involves trustworthiness, believability, honesty. It involves having the customer’s best interests at heart. Security is the freedom from danger, risk, or doubt. Understanding/knowing the customer involves making the effort to understand the customer’s needs. Tangibles include the physical evidence of the service.
Source: Based on A. Parasuraman, V. Zeithamel, and L. Berry, “SERVQUAL: A Multiple-Item Scale for Measuring Customer Perceptions of Service Quality,” Journal of Retailing (Spring 1988): 12–40.
Sources of Information: Word of Mouth, Personal Needs, Past Experience
Gap 1 Expected service versus
management perception of consumer expectations
Gap 2 Management perceptions of
consumer expectations versus service quality specs
Gap 3 Service quality specs versusservice delivery
Gap 4 Service delivery versus externalcommunication to customers
Gap 5 Expected service versusperceived service
FIGURE 5-3 Service Quality Model Gaps
118 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
TABLE 5-2 Sample Consumer Market Segments
Respondent-related
Geographic region Pacific, Mountain, West North Central, West South Central, East North Central, East South Central, South Atlantic, Middle
Atlantic, New England, Midwest City, county, area Under 5,000; 5,000–19,999; 20,000–49,999; 50,000–99,999;
100,000–249,999; 250,000–499,999; 500,000–999,999; 1,000,000–3,999,999; 4,000,000 or more
Demographic age Infant, under 6; 6–11; 12–17; 18–24; 25–34; 35–49; 50–64; 65 and over
Sex Male; female Family size 1–2; 3–4; 5! Family life cycle Young, single; young, married, no children; young, married,
youngest child under 6; young, married, youngest child 6 or over; older, married, with children; older married, no children under 18; older, single; other.
SEGMENTING CUSTOMERS AND MARKETS
One of the preliminary steps that many analysts overlook is segmenting data. Data about custom- ers can be gathered from a number of sources, such as industry groups, external sources, the Internet, commercial CD-ROM databases, or questionnaires. The Baldrige criteria emphasize data segmentation of customers and customer markets. The segmentation is simple (e.g., con- sumer, commercial, or wholesalers).
To segment markets means to distinguish customers or markets according to common characteristics. Personal computer markets are segmented into home and business markets. Sometimes segmentation is more complex, involving customer characteristics and demograph- ics, psychographics, or benefits desired. Table 5-2 shows examples of segments for consumer
Relative Importance
Low
Customer Perceptions
Good
Poor
High
Relative strengths
I
Areas for improvement
II
Minor annoyances
III
Wasted time IV
FIGURE 5-4 Gaps Model
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 119
Income Under $5,000; $5,000–$7,999; $8,000–$9,999; $10,000–$14,999; $15,000–$24,999; $25,000–$39,999; $40,000 or over
Occupation Professional and technical; managers, officials, and proprietors; clerical, sales; crafts- people, supervisors; operatives; farmers;
retired; students; homemakers; unemployed Education Grade school or less; some high school; high school graduate; some
college; college graduate; postgraduate Religion Catholic; Protestant; Jewish; Latter-Day Saint; other Race White; African American; Asian American; other Nationality American; British; French; German; other Social class Lower-lower; upper-lower; lower-middle; upper-middle; lower-
upper; upper-upper Product-related Benefits offered
Need satisfiers Motives: economic and more detailed needs Product features Situation specific, but to satisfy specific or general needs
Consumption/use patterns Rate of use Heavy; medium; light; nonusers Use with other products Situation specific (e.g., gas with a traveling vacation) Brand familiarity Insistence; preference; recognition; nonrecognition; rejection
Buying situation Kind of store Convenience; shopping; specialty Kind of shopping Serious versus browsing; rushed versus leisurely Depth of assortment Out of stock; shallow; deep Type of product Convenience; shopping; specialty; unsought
TABLE 5-2 Continued
markets. Notice how consumer markets can be segmented. This segmentation implies that data are gathered separately for each of these segments and analyzed separately. Table 5-3 shows examples of segments for commercial markets. Therefore, you may segment your markets according to consumer markets or commercial markets. You also may segment further within these markets.
STRATEGIC SUPPLY CHAIN ALLIANCES BETWEEN CUSTOMERS AND SUPPLIERS
Traditionally, the customer–supplier relationship has been viewed as a relationship in which one party attempts to gain advantage over the other. The customer obtains advantage over the sup- plier by exercising the ability to change suppliers. At the same time, the supplier attempts to gain power over the customer by increasing switching costs, thereby making it difficult for customers to switch to another supplier.
The theory behind this arrangement was essentially a competitive model because competi- tion among the suppliers drives costs lower and quality higher. However, this theory ignores the costs associated with variability created by using multiple suppliers. This variability can be seen in process industries such as steel production, where customers use sheet steel raw materials from suppliers. Even though the dimensions and specifications for sheet metal are the same, if different suppliers are used, there will be increased variability in the physical properties of the
120 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
materials, such as tensile strength. For example, one manufacturer found that by limiting the number of suppliers of sheet steel, it reduced its defects by 40%. This demonstrated that vari- ability in sourced materials was a major cause of defects.
Today many companies use single sourcing as a way to reduce the number of suppliers. Single sourcing is a process for developing relationships with a few suppliers for long contract terms. Historically, this was the Japanese method of purchasing.
Increasingly, single-sourcing arrangements are developing into strategic alliances where the suppliers become de facto subsidiaries to their major customers. In these arrange- ments, not only are suppliers single-source providers, but they also integrate information systems and quality systems that allow close interaction at all levels. Single-source suppliers to Ford are increasingly trained by Ford representatives concerning the preferred and required organizations, processes, and delivery systems. Suppliers also enter into agreements to reduce costs and improve productivity and are graded on an annual basis concerning the attainment of these targets.
Toyota employs an extensive supplier development program for each of its suppliers. As a result, variability to Toyota is reduced as the relationship between customer and supplier is enhanced over time. It is to the benefit of both parties to continue this relationship over a long period of time. In addition, some Japanese companies actually include their suppliers on their organization charts. Therefore, the task of managing suppliers is simplified over time. Variability and complexity are reduced.
Bose Company, a speaker and sound systems manufacturer, broke new ground in dealing with its suppliers. Bose actually has delegated many purchasing responsibilities to its suppliers. Using this approach, major suppliers are provided office space and are authorized to make pur- chases for their own accounts. Using the vendor managed inventory (VMI) approach, Bose suppliers provide only what is needed, when it is needed.
The Role of the Customer in the Supply Chain
The goal of supply chain management is customer satisfaction. But who is the customer? Figure 5-5 shows a picture of a supply chain for yogurt. Notice that the supply chain consists of several
TABLE 5-3 Sample Commercial Market Segments Type of organization Manufacturing, institutional, government, public utility, military, farm, other Demographics Size
Employees Sales volume Standard Industrial Classifications (SIC) code Number of plants Geographic location East, Southeast, South, Midwest, Mountains, Southwest, West Large city or rural area
Type of product Installations, accessories, components, raw materials, supplies, services Buying situation Decentralized versus centralized
Multiple buying influence Straight rebuy, modified rebuy, new buy
Source loyalty Weak versus strong loyalty Last resort, second source, first source
Kind of commitments Contracts, agreements, financial aids Reciprocity None versus complete
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 121
parts. In one, the farmers are providing product to a dairy. On another part of the supply chain, a chemical company provides plastic pellets to a converter who molds the cups. The label maker also provides labels to the converter. Do you suppose the converter is primarily concerned with the final consumer who buys the yogurt? Likely not. The supply chain can be segmented. The chemical company is primarily focused on the converter. The dairy company schedules ship- ments to the distributors and the distributors handle shipments to the store. The dairy works with the distributors and retailers to understand consumer preferences and to provide the flavors desired by the customers.
Customer satisfaction from a supply chain perspective is made more difficult because of the realities of the market. There are over 200 flavors of yogurt today. Forty years ago, there was only one flavor. In many industries there are now many more high-priced premium items that must be considered. Shipping costs are also higher now. In addition, as we have discussed previ- ously, customers are now more demanding than ever. It is clear that although much of the focus in supply chain management has been on cost reduction, supply chain managers must now focus more on service and product quality.
COMMUNICATING DOWNSTREAM
Marketing views every dollar of income equally, but operations does not. Operations views the costs and confusion associated with trying to satisfy diverse customer groups. It is less expen- sive to produce one item that satisfies a larger segment of the market than it is to produce sev- eral products that please several niche markets. Therefore, the operations professional does not view a dollar of income from diverse customers equally. Customer rationalization results from agreement between marketing and operations as to which customers add the greatest advantage and profits over time. This does not necessarily mean pursuing customers who are currently the most profitable. It could mean pursuing customers that cause the company to improve in ways necessary for continued survival. For example, consulting firms often have to turn away customers desiring services in areas outside the expertise of the company. Customer rationalization ensures that a high-quality product is provided and the service provider stays within its field of expertise. Also, this allows firms to focus on a smaller number of key customers
Farmer Nonfat Yogurt
Milk
Converter
Paint/Stencil
Chemical Mfg. (plastic pellets)
Farmer
Farmer
Color/ Design
Store
Store
Store
Store
Customer
Dairy Facility
Distributor
Distributor
Distributor
Distributor
FIGURE 5-5 Segmenting the Supply Chain to Define Customers
122 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
and to develop an annuity relationship , in which the customer provides a long-term, steady income stream to the provider.
As suppliers focus on satisfying their customers, these customers are recognized as pri- mary sources of information. To better understand the customer, data about the customer must be gathered, analyzed, and used for improvement. The rest of this chapter is concerned with gathering and analyzing customer data in such a way that the data can be used for improvement. There are a variety of means for gathering data from customers. These include active data gathering , such as through focus groups and surveys, and passive data gathering , such as through customer comment cards.
ACTIVELY SOLICITED CUSTOMER-FEEDBACK APPROACHES
Actively solicited customer feedback includes all supplier-initiated contact with customers. The three most common arenas for this are telephoning customers, conducting focus groups, and sending out surveys.
Phone contacts, focus groups, and survey results are referred to as soft data . As opposed to soft data, hard data are measurement data such as height, weight, volume, or speed that can be measured on a continuous scale. Soft data are not continuous and are, at best, ordinal. Ordi- nal data are ranked so one measure is higher than the next. For example the continuum of “strongly disagree–disagree–neutral–agree–strongly agree” is a five-point scale that is ordinal. However, the interval between disagree and neutral is not equal to the interval between agree and strongly agree in the same way that the interval between 50 and 60 pounds is equivalent to the interval between 667 and 677 pounds. The weight measure of pounds is a hard measure. Because the ordinal scale is based on perception, measurements using ordinal data are subject to greater error than hard measurement data.
In spite of the error associated with soft data, soft data are useful in measuring the percep- tions of customers. One use of this soft data is to compare employee and customer perceptions of quality. In a recent survey of hospital patient and employee perceptions of quality, it was found that patients consistently rated service quality higher than did the nurses and other employees in the survey. This can be explained in a services environment by the fact that employees have a view of the whole system, including customer contact activities and background activities that the patients do not see. Also, extremely dissatisfied customers of hospitals may not be able phys- ically to respond to the survey.
Telephone Contact
Telephone surveys are often used to gather information related to customers. Most often these are used for surveys or structured interviews. This is a type of convenience survey method. The major problem with telephone surveys is bias. Often major segments of the population of interest are not available via telephone at certain times. This makes random sampling difficult. Also, customers resent being called at inconvenient times. With recent changes in laws, ser- vice providers can be asked to remove customers from contact lists if this method is used. In addition, phone surveyors must respect state and federal do-not-call lists. However, it is often helpful to call respondents prior to sending a survey to see if they are willing to respond to a survey.
Focus Groups
A focus group allows a supplier to gather feedback from a group of consumers at one time. The groups are focused in two ways: First, focus groups narrowly address a single topic or group of topics. Second, focus groups draw individuals with similar characteristics or demographics. This limits the discussion to subjects and market segments that are of particular interest to the firm. Figure 5-6 shows
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 123
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 5-2 Misusing Surveys
Figure 5-7 shows a letter received by this author from a Chrysler dealer. The representative from the Chrysler dealer understands that surveys are used to evaluate dealer performance. It is unclear if finan- cial incentives are linked to the surveys. However, it is clear that there must be a “hammer” that comes down on the dealer when less-than-perfect responses are received by Chrysler. Therefore, this represents both a misuse of the survey data by Chrysler and a feeble attempt by the dealer to distort the process for collecting data in a way that is unhelpful to them. Remember that survey information is only useful if the data are unbiased. This is an attempt by the dealer to bias their results. This is not unusual. Hilton Cor- poration does the same thing with signs in the elevators encouraging guests to “check excellent” on questions on their surveys. Both Chrysler and Hilton need to reevaluate how they use survey data to improve service performance.
the steps included in performing a focus group session. After identifying the purpose of the focus group, a set of questions is developed that sequences from broad to specific. After the focus group sessions are completed with multiple groups, the notes from the sessions are reviewed to find com- mon themes. These common themes become the basis for planning and improvement.
Focus groups are often used by business and government agencies to gauge topics or issues that elicit the strongest emotional responses from the subject. Focus groups need to be carefully facilitated so that the objectives of the research are met.
Customer Service Surveys
In Chapter 1 we said that quality ultimately is as the customer perceives it. The customer service survey is an important tool for determining customer perceptions of customer service and quality and is used by marketers and quality professionals in defining areas of strength and areas for improvement in quality systems. It is disappointing that surveys are sometimes misused as is shown in A Closer Look at Quality 5-2 . A survey (or instrument) consists of a series of items (or questions) designed to capture perceptions. The number of items is determined by the purpose of the instrument and the willingness of respondents to spend time filling out the survey.
(continued)
Summarize and Develop Common Themes
Run Multiple Groups
Develop Questions
Select Target Population
Narrow Scope of Questions
Identify Purpose FIGURE 5-6 Focus Group Steps
124 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
FIGURE 5-7 Misusing Surveys
July 2, 2008
Tom Foster
Dear Tom, Thank you for your recent visit to our service department. I am following-up to ensure that you were completely satisfied with the service.
Chrysler may contact you requesting your participation in a survey. Thank you in advance for tak- ing your time to complete their report card on Jim’s performance during your last visit. Hopefully you can give him an excellent as anything less means he failed in the eyes of the manufacturer.
In our continuing effort to find new ways to improve, we value your opinion or suggestions that would allow us to better serve our customers. May we ask you, what was the one thing we could have done better on your last service visit?
If for any reason you were not completely satisfied, please feel free to rectify any concerns so you would feel comfortable giving us a perfect score. If I am not available, please leave me a message and I will be glad to get back to you. Or, you can e-mail me.
Sincerely,
Customer Care Manager
FIGURE 5-8 Timeliness at Henry’s Fast Food: Specific- Example Approach
Timeliness Dimension
________ I received my food quickly. ________ The server responded in a timely manner. ________ The line moved quickly. ________ I was served rapidly. ________ The food service at Henry’s is quick.
There are four steps to developing a useful survey: identifying customer requirements, develop- ing and validating the instrument, implementing the survey, and analyzing the results.
1. Identifying customer requirements. Customer requirements include the dimensions of quality, service, and performance that are necessary to satisfy the customer. Identifying customer requirements initially involves reviewing the purchase orders and contracts established when the relationship with the customer begins. Second, customer needs are reviewed with marketing and production. Third, interviews are conducted with a sampling of customers to determine what to add to the list of customer requirements.
2. Developing and validating the instrument. Once dimensions of customer requirements are identified, specific examples are developed to measure the particular dimensions. As shown in Figure 5-8 , the dimension of timeliness is important for a fast-food restaurant. In a survey of their patrons, they had several items relating to the timeliness dimension (among others).
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 125
Notice that the survey items are not questions. They are simple declarative sentences that use action verbs. Declarative statements are easy to understand and fit well with five- or seven- point scales. Each statement is a specific example of the quality dimension being measured.
An alternative means of developing survey items is the critical-incident approach . The critical-incident approach involves obtaining information from customers about the process they use to receive goods and services. The critical incidents are aspects of organizational perfor- mance with which the customers come in direct contact. These are important for monitoring and measuring process performance as it relates to customer service. In your baselining system, this approach is important in determining whether your process performance is improving. Figure 5-9 shows the same dimension of timeliness for the fast-food restaurant. Notice that the items relate to specific steps in the process of purchasing product in a fast-food restaurant. As with the specific-example approach, the items relating to timeliness can be averaged to determine if the process is performing well on some dimension.
3. Implementing the survey. Reliability and validity are two different but interrelated issues of survey development. We use the traditional target approach to explain this relationship. If the target in Figure 5-10 is the dimension of customer service that you are trying to measure, each arrow mark represents a single response using the survey instrument. If the measure of the dimension ascertains the dimension perfectly, the shot will be right in the center of the target. If you don’t hit the center, you are not perfectly measuring the quality dimension. The more imperfect the measurement, the farther the shot will be from the center of the target.
Figure 5-10 shows four different situations. In target one, the arrows consistently hit the target in the same area but were off center. The instrument developed was reliable but not valid. In other words, the responses were consistent, but they were not measuring the right thing. In target two, the responses were all over the target. The average responses will hit the exact center of the target; however, there is a great deal of variability in responses. In this case, the group estimate is valid, but the measurement is not reliable. This shows that reliability is directly related to variability in responses from the respondents. Target three is neither reliable nor valid because the group averages will be off center and the variability is high. Target four is both reliable and valid because the survey is both centered and there is little variability in the responses. We briefly address these two issues separately.
Reliable Valid
Not reliable Not valid
Valid Not reliable
Reliable Not valid
FIGURE 5-10 Reliability and Validity
FIGURE 5-9 Timeliness at Henry’s Fast Food: Critical-Incident Approach
________ I was greeted on entering Henry’s. ________ There was a server available when I approached the service counter. ________ My line had less than three people when I arrived. ________ As soon as I reached the counter, the server requested what
I wanted immediately. ________ My food was delivered within 60 seconds of entering Henry’s.
126 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
An instrument with low reliability is a problem; the great deal of unwanted noise or vari- ability in the responses hides the data’s message. Two approaches to testing for reliability are test/retest reliability and interjudge assessment. With test/retest, the instrument is administered to a group of respondents randomly selected from the population of interest in a pretest. The same instrument is administered to the same group of individuals at a later point after some time has passed (say two weeks). The responses are then analyzed statistically.
Sloppy or unreliable adjectives, such as quality, outstanding, and acceptable should be avoided as much as possible in designing surveys. With interjudge assessment, the survey is administered to multiple respondents and analyzed to gauge consistency of response among the respondents.
Validity is related to reliability, but a reliable instrument is not guaranteed to be valid. There are different types of validity; for example, construct validity refers to the use of certain terms and whether terms really measure what it is we want to measure. For example, self-reported measures of percentage growth in sales may not be a valid measure of success in customer satis- faction. Sales increases may instead reflect favorable market conditions. Criterion validity indi- cates that your measuring instrument has the ability to predict or agree with constructs external to that which you are measuring. Content validity refers to whether the item really measures what we want to measure. To help ensure (but not guarantee) content validity, it is helpful to ask some outside individuals to externally validate an instrument. Usually, this includes asking five or six “experts” to review the instrument and determine whether the instrument is valid. The experts are people who are familiar with the firm’s customers or have done previous surveying in a related area. Pretesting to externally validate the instrument can include asking managers and customers to review the instrument for understandability and completeness. Ask them what questions they would change, delete, or add. In validating a quality-related questionnaire, we found that respondents did not understand the term conformance . Once we replaced the term conformance with meets specifications , the survey instrument was improved.
Most of the questions will be close-ended because close-ended questions provide a better basis for data analysis. It is preferable to have at least one open-ended question in the customer service survey to allow customers to vent frustrations or make suggestions or other comments. Open-ended questions allow respondents to offer extemporaneous responses and comments.
4. Analyzing the results. For business purposes, data analysis generally should be kept simple. Means, histograms or numerical responses, and simple correlations are best for analyzing survey responses. Open-ended questions are analyzed with Pareto analysis using bar charts of the various categories of responses. More extensive data analysis using advanced statisti- cal techniques, such as multiple regression, analysis of variance, or other procedures, should be performed if necessary. Explanations of these statistics can be found in introductory statis- tics textbooks. However, business experience has shown that simpler analysis is better because simple statistical results are easy to communicate to managers and coworkers.
PASSIVELY SOLICITED CUSTOMER-FEEDBACK APPROACHES
Customer-initiated contact, such as filling out a restaurant complaint card, calling a toll-free complaint line, or submitting an inquiry via a company’s Web site, is considered passively solicited customer feedback . 5 According to recent research in the area of passive data collec- tion, it was found that passive collections resulted in lower ratings of quality than active col- lections. It is not clear which approach is more biased. However, it is expected that people who fill out customer response cards based on their own initiative probably have issues they would like resolved.
5 Sampson, S., “Ramifications of Monitoring Service Quality through Passively Solicited Customer Feedback,” Decision Sciences 27, 4 (1996): 601–622.
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 127
Customer Research Cards
Figure 5-11 shows an example of a customer research card. As you might guess, the card is from a local pizzeria catering to a college student population. We are all familiar with customer cards. We see them at many services companies and receive them with products. They are often a cheap way to involve the customer in the process. Research shows that respondents to these cards tend to be expressing extreme responses—either very highly pleased or extremely displeased. Response cards provide an opportunity for the service provider to develop a relationship with a customer through properly recovering from an extremely poor service encounter. Companies should have a method for logging, resolving, and tracking complaints. Resolved complaints also should be used for future feedback for systems improvement.
Customer Response Lines and Web Sites
Many companies provide websites and toll-free phone lines for customer complaints, questions, and inquiries. These services are offered by many third parties or can be offered in-house. For example, Heinz Frozen Food Company uses a third party to handle and resolve complaints. If complaints are not resolved to the customer’s satisfaction by the third party, the quality manager resolves complaints personally. Common problems with complaint lines occur when there are insufficient phone lines, long waits, poorly trained personnel, or unresponsive personnel.
The Good Stuff
The Bad Stuff
© 2012 Flying Pie Pizzeria
TALK BACK TO FLYING PIE!
Please relate to us your overall experience by completing the
little face. It can be as simple as a smile or as creative as you like.
If you’d like a reply, please write your full name, address,
and phone number on the back.
Date Time
FIGURE 5-11 Pizzeria Complaint Card Source: © 2011 Flying Pie Pizzeria. Used by permission of Howard Olivier, owner ( www.flyingpie.com ).
128 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
MANAGING CUSTOMER RETENTION AND LOYALTY
An important indicator of customer satisfaction is customer retention . Customer retention is measured as the percentage of customers who return for more service. Such customer retention will increase by application of the service tools and concepts contained in this chapter, such as tools for data gathering and analysis. This is an important indicator that every company should track. In services, where the customers are an input to the process, variability can be reduced by maintaining a stable pool of customers who are familiar with the transaction processes.
Customer loyalty can be instilled by offering specialized service not available from com- petitors. This can take many forms, including high customer contact or technology advance- ments. If a customer and supplier are linked through electronic data interchange (EDI), it is more difficult to switch to an alternative supplier because information systems have to be upgraded to work with new suppliers. This also speeds up data transmission between supplier and customer, reducing cycle times and lead times for delivery of products and services.
There is an intangible aspect to customer loyalty. Harley-Davidson is probably the best example of brand loyalty. After all, how many products induce the kind of loyalty that causes people to tattoo the company logo on their bodies or buy garish clothing reflecting their love of the product? It is difficult to isolate the ethos that results in this type of customer loyalty. Honda, Yamaha, and Kawasaki don’t elicit the same passion. Some automobile brands such as Volkswa- gen Beetle, Ford Mustang, Chevrolet Corvette, and more recently, Smart Car, create such cus- tomer loyalty that people travel great distances to go to national expositions and jamborees that center on these products. There is a certain intrigue about these products that results in this level of excitement and loyalty.
CUSTOMER-RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
With business information systems—especially over the Internet—companies are receiving vol- umes of customer-related data. These data include personal, Internet, process, and customer- preference information. As a result, systems have been created to mine these data to improve customer service and retention. These systems are called customer-relationship management systems (CRMS). CRMS use data to manage the three phases of customer-relationship manage- ment. These three phases are acquisition, retention , and enhancement .
CRMS technologies are used in customer data-acquisition and data-mining efforts. All firms desire profitable customers. Customer self-service and product customization are ways to acquire new customer data. Another means is to provide customer access to information technol- ogy (IT) systems for configuring orders or researching information online. Customer retention is enhanced through a variety of activities. Because it costs six times as much to acquire customers, it is cost effective to retain customers. Frequent-flier programs and grocery discount cards are examples of information-based methods for retaining customers. Enhancement involves improv- ing service to the customer through the use of information systems. On Amazon.com, users can customize their desktops. Also, advertisements for new books in the area of interest for the cus- tomer are created based on the customer’s historical purchase patterns. This is accomplished through CRMS.
In terms of functionality, CRMS allow for providing customer contact, product configura- tion, campaign management, dealer/distribution management, pipeline management, telemarket- ing, customer interaction centers, customer analysis, field service management, self-service, personalization, and supply chain management. Table 5-4 provides a more detailed listing of CRMS functions. These are listed by category.
CRMS is used to monitor customer interactions, preferences, and relationships through media such as customer transaction records, call center logs, searches, and Web site clicks. The activities monitored include customer defections . These are customers who do not repeat
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 129
business in some fixed period of time. This involves determining who are active versus inactive customers. Personalized service to those who are in danger of becoming inactive is used to achieve churn reduction —that is, reduction of the loss of customers.
CRMS are used to determine which customers are profitable and those who are unprofit- able. Personalized communication can take place with customers, which serves them better and
TABLE 5-4 CRMS Functions by Category Customer-centric activities Consolidate customer information from multiple channels—including e-mail, call centers,
mobile devices, the Internet, and in-person encounters. Give all departments a composite image of the customer’s purchasing and service history, as
well as the customer’s buying, delivery, and contact preferences. Support coordinated interactions throughout all customer touch points, including field sales,
telesales, customer service, billing, and order fulfillment. Analyze data to determine your most valuable customers, target services to them, and use
their behavior to predict new products that will succeed in their marketplace. Enterprise capabilities Marketing automation to let marketers analyze customer purchasing trends, design targeted
sales and marketing campaigns, and then measure results. Customer service software to create customer profiles and to provide scripts to help representatives
solve customers’ problems and cross-sell to promote new purchases. Sales automation tools to help the team manage accounts and prospects, as well as check
metrics and inventories. Partner relationship management solutions that link together vendors and other partners with
your systems. Customer acquisition Marketing automation Campaign management Customer analysis Web measurement tools Advertising management Sales management Sales process automation Configuration tools Order management Sales compensation Channel management Sales planning and analysis Wireless device support Customer retention and enhancement Customer contact center Web/telephone self-service E-mail management Web/interactive chat Workflow analysis Field service
Source: Microsoft Corporation, 2011.
130 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Summary This chapter defined the voice of the customer and presented techniques such as surveys for learning and understanding this voice. Customer focus and satisfaction are key for companies to be successful. Tools such as complaint mechanisms, feedback, guarantees, and corrective action are necessary to develop annuity relationships with customers.
There are several ways to gather data about customers, including active and passive data- gathering techniques. These activities should be a part of an ongoing process for gathering cus- tomer data, analyzing the data, and implementing improvements to processes and design.
Finally, it is through focus on the customer and ingenuity that we find better ways to serve our customers. The corporate battleground in the new century is in the area of service. Customers are demanding more, and suppliers are responding by giving better and better service.
helps to maintain them as customers. For companies such as Amazon.com, clickstream infor- mation is kept that demonstrates how a customer navigates the Web site. This allows tailoring of the Web site to the preferences of the customer.
Maintaining these types of information is referred to as knowledge management . This involves managing the mountain of information generated by Web site usage in a way to improve marketing to key customers. The sales activities are managed specifically to each customer’s preferences. This includes transactional analysis , which consists of customer service policies, sales processes, service process design, and after-sales service.
Like many newer technologies such as enterprise resource planning systems, CRMS implementations often result in failure. To implement CRMS properly requires an understanding of your business, your customers, competitors, culture, and processes. Many of the project man- agement, team management, and change management techniques discussed in this book can be extremely helpful for CRMS implementation. This requires strong planning and project manage- ment skills. There are many vendors of CRMS, such as Oracle, IBM, Siebel, and others.
A WORD ON EXCELLENT DESIGN
Note that not all good ideas come from customers. Some excellent products arise from advances in technology resulting from good engineering. IBM, in the early days of the computer, would not have pursued the computer as a viable product if it had relied on customers to tell the com- pany their needs. For this purpose, many high-technology companies have adopted the ready– fire–aim approach as the best way to market their goods.
Other new products are developed by identifying a need that customers do not necessar- ily recognize. There is much work being performed in alternative technologies to be used in developing countries that do not have the infrastructure of developed countries. In these coun- tries, short-wave radios or personal computers that create their own electricity using a hand crank help educate people about sanitation and disease prevention. BayGen has developed a radio that, after 20 seconds of winding, will play for a half hour. Trevor Bayless invented the radio as he pondered the need for a technology to help stem the growth of AIDS on the African continent. The company now produces 1,000 radios a day and donates 10% of the radios to charity. This alternative technology was developed by an engineer. Others are discovering that this type of technology is friendly to the environment, and demand is increasing. The BayGen radio has been called the environmental radio for the coming decade. Good customer intelli- gence coupled with innovative research and development programs appears to be the best mar- riage of resources.
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 131
Discussion Questions 1. Describe the difference between the internal and the external customers of a business organization.
Why is it important to distinguish between internal and external customers? 2. Describe some of the potential pitfalls of customer-driven quality. Can you think of any ways to avoid
or lessen the impact of these potential pitfalls? 3. How can a supplier avoid settling into a reactive customer-driven quality (RCDQ) mode? 4. What industries pose the greatest challenge for suppliers in terms of anticipating customer needs and
requirements? What are the distinctive characteristics of these industries? 5. When was the last time you purchased a product and were asked to provide the seller or manufacturer
of the merchandise information about yourself, such as your name, address, and telephone number? Did the request for information seem intrusive to you? Did you have any idea why you were being asked for the additional information?
6. Reflect on the last time that you complained to the manager of a store, restaurant, or other business about something that dissatisfied you. Was the complaint resolved to your satisfaction? Did the com- plaint-resolution process tell you something about the quality of the organization that you were deal- ing with?
7. Can you think of an example of an experience you have had with a firm in which the difference between the espoused and the actual level of service provided was great in either a positive or negative way? If so, did this experience influence your perception of the business? Has this experience affected your willingness to do business with this company again?
8. Describe the basic concept behind strategic alliances. In what ways can strategic alliances facilitate a firm’s quest for quality?
9. Describe some great service experiences and some horror stories you have experienced. What were the variables that in your mind differentiated between the great and the horrible companies?
10. Suppose that the marketing department of a large manufacturing firm decided to adopt the motto “We will build a product to suit any buyer’s needs.” What type of difficulties could this philosophy impose on the operations department? Through what process could the marketing department and the operations department determine which customers add the greatest advantage and profits over time?
11. Describe the basic idea behind a focus group. Are focus groups an effective way of gathering data about customer preferences and tastes?
12. Should focus group settings be formal and highly structured? Explain the rationale for your answer. 13. How can firms gain an overall understanding of the market segments they serve? Make your answer as
substantive as possible. 14. Why is it important that the facilitator of a focus group not bias the discussion in any manner? How
could the results of a focus group analysis be tainted if the facilitator biased the discussion? 15. Describe a situation in which the use of an Internet customer response might be appropriate. 16. Describe the difference between actively solicited customer feedback and passively solicited customer
feedback. Which type of feedback results in a lower rating of quality? Explain why.
Key Terms
Active data gathering Actively solicited customer
feedback Annuity relationship Churn reduction Clickstream Closed-loop corrective
action Compensate Complaint-recovery process Contrition
Customer Customer defections Customer-driven quality Customer rationalization Customer-relationship
management (CRM) Customer-relationship
management systems (CRMS)
Customer retention End user
External customers Focus group Gap Gap analysis Hard data Internal customers Knowledge management Ordinal data Passive data gathering Passively solicited customer
feedback
Reactive customer-driven quality (RCDQ)
Ready–fire–aim Single sourcing Soft data Strategic alliances Transactional analysis Vendor managed inventory
(VMI)
132 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Problems 1. One of the problems encountered by universities is developing reliable and valid course evaluation
survey instruments. Choose a class you took last semester. For that class, identify two dimensions rela- tive to course delivery. Now, develop five valid survey items for each of your two dimensions. Defend why you think these items are valid.
2. For the class you chose in Problem 1, develop five valid critical-incident survey items for each dimen- sion. Defend why you believe your items are valid.
3. A manager for the Golden Bear publishing company found out that you are taking quality manage- ment. The manager desires to improve her supply chain performance by employing you as a consultant to provide quality improvement training to the supply chain employees. As a result, you now have to create a survey instrument to gauge the effectiveness of your training sessions. Choose four dimen- sions relative to your quality management training and develop five valid survey items for each dimen- sion. Defend why you feel your survey items are valid.
4. For your performance dimensions in Problem 3, develop five critical-incident survey items for each dimension. Explain how you would demonstrate that these items are reliable.
17. Describe the difference between hard data and soft data. What are the unique advantages of each type of data in terms of obtaining information about customer perceptions?
18. Are customer surveys better suited for accessing customer perceptions in services or manufacturing? Explain your answer.
19. Explain the concepts of reliability and validity. Why is it important that survey instruments be both reliable and valid?
20. Why is it important to have open-ended questions in survey instruments?
CASES
Case 5-1 Customer Quality Feedback at Apple Computer Apple Computer Homepage: www.apple.com
(continued)
In the fast-paced personal computer industry, it would be very tempting for a computer company to rush a new product to market without taking the time to solicit cus- tomer input and feedback during the product develop- ment cycle. To avoid this temptation and to highlight its commitment to customer satisfaction, Apple Computer has developed a program called Customer Quality Feedback (CQF). CQF is a hands-on program providing Apple engineers with the ability to communicate with potential end users during the entire development cycle of an Apple product. The program integrates many of the features of a focus group but is sustained on an ongoing basis. It is also a very substantive and useful tool for Apple because it keeps the company attuned to the needs, preferences, and desires of its end users.
For people interested in participating in the pro- gram, Apple has posted an application form on its Web site. The application form is fairly comprehen- sive and outlines the terms and conditions of participa- tion. Although the program is open to anyone, it is clear that Apple wants well-informed participants who will stick with the program. Participants are selected
based on their interest, ability to provide timely infor- mation, commitment to working with Apple person- nel, and the suitability of their computing environment as it relates to Apple’s current needs. Once selected, the participants become an integral part of the devel- opment process for the products they are evaluating. They are provided early prototypes of Apple products and are asked to provide feedback pertaining to the product’s features, interaction with employees, ease of use, performance, compatibility with third-party soft- ware, and other topics. The participants are also asked to provide suggestions as the product development cycle matures. The information provided by the par- ticipants is fed directly to the Apple engineers who are developing and testing the products. The overriding objective of the program is to incorporate customer input into the development of Apple products before they are shipped, rather than waiting for customers to react to the company’s products after they are made available for sale. Prior to a product launch, the CQF participants involved with the product are asked to write testimonials about their input into the product’s
Chapter 5 • The Voice of the Customer 133133 Part 1 • Understanding Quality Concepts
final design. These testimonials are used by Apple to demonstrate to other potential end users how Apple incorporates user feedback into the design and devel- opment of its products.
Apple’s CQF program is a good example of a pro- active approach to satisfying customer needs. It is also
evidence of the company’s willingness to “listen to the voice of the customer” in its product development and design. These are important steps in the development of a customer-driven approach to quality.
Case 5-2 Chaparral Steel: Achieving High Quality through a Commitment to Both External and Internal Customers Chaparral Steel Homepage: www.gerdauameristeel.com .
Chaparral Steel Company, located near Dallas, Texas, is a steel minimill producing a variety of steel products by recycling scrap steel. The company, founded in 1973, sells to a diverse group of industries, including con- struction, railroad, defense, mobile homes, and appli- ances. Chaparral has received a great deal of attention in the media and among business leaders because it has been relatively successful in an industry beset by a mul- titude of problems. Much of the company’s success can be attributed to a focus on customer service and product quality through a commitment to both its external cus- tomers and internal customers.
To ensure that external customers are satisfied, Chaparral routinely conducts customer surveys, sends employees on site visits, and listens carefully to cus- tomer comments and suggestions. In addition, the com- pany practices a number of quality-minded manufacturing techniques to reduce defect rates and prevent problems from occurring. Chaparral is very efficient, and new ideas and manufacturing techniques are transferred very quickly to the factory floor. As a result, the company remains on the leading edge of steel manufacturing technology and can adapt as customer requirements change. The company continues to improve its products and operations by benchmarking against world-class producers and giving employees paid sabbaticals where they learn about new work prac- tices and technologies from academic institutions and industry leaders.
Although these efforts are commendable, the company’s commitment to its internal customers is equally important. At any one time, approximately
85% of Chaparral’s employees are enrolled in some type of class ranging from electronics to Spanish. If the training is off-site, the company reimburses employees for their tuition costs. In the plant, the majority of the employees are cross-trained, which enhances their individual job skills. The company ben- efits through consistency in operations because one employee can step in and perform the job of another employee if the need arises.
In many instances, Chaparral’s commitment to its employees directly contributes to its employees’ ability to contribute to company objectives of customer service and product quality. All of Chaparral’s employees, from the CEO to the maintenance crew, have business cards they can give to customers to promote interaction. Frontline employees are periodically sent on customer site visits to answer questions, observe the customer’s manufacturing process, or simply to see how Chaparral products perform. Every employee is salaried, and merit increases are tied to a variety of factors, including indi- vidual performance, versatility of skills, and training credits earned through the company’s continuing educa- tion program. All these practices serve the dual purpose of increasing quality while at the same time enriching the jobs of the employees. Through its commitment to its internal customers, Chaparral has obtained some remarkable results. For example, a group of Chaparral employees recently developed a proprietary system for manufacturing wide-flange steel beams resulting in a substantial cost savings for the company. Chaparral credits its training program, along with individual effort on the part of its employees, for this accomplishment.
Discussion Questions
1. Explain how Apple’s Customer Quality Feedback program helps the firm hear the voice of the customer.
2. In your opinion, what are the most important aspects of Apple’s program? Would you make any changes or modifications?
3. If you were an Apple user, would you enjoy par- ticipating in the Customer Quality Feedback pro- gram? Why or why not?
(continued)
134 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Discussion Questions
1. For a company like Chaparral Steel, why is a commitment to both its internal and external cus- tomers necessary?
2. As mentioned in the case, Chaparral periodically sends frontline employees on trips to visit the
manufacturing sites of the company’s customers. In your opinion, is this a justifiable expense? Why or why not?
3. Compare Chaparral’s employee commitment to your current employer or a recent employer.
Overall, Chaparral’s commitment to both its internal and external customers has produced impressive results, particularly as they relate to firm productivity and product quality. The company’s daily absentee rate is less than 1%, and the average yearly turnover rate is only 5%. These rates are far lower than industry aver- ages. These low rates provide for continuity in opera- tions. Partially as a result of this, Chaparral produces steel at a lower cost per ton than its rivals. At Chaparral, it takes 1.4 hours to produce a ton of steel, as com-
pared with an average of 2.4 hours per ton at other steel minimills. Chaparral was awarded the Japanese Indus- trial Standard Certification on its general structural steel products, becoming the only steel company outside Japan given that recognition. Similarly, Chaparral is the only steel company of its type to be certified by the American Institute of Mining, Metallurgical, and Petro- leum Engineers to manufacture its products for nuclear applications.
135
C H A P T E R 6
The Voice of the Market
And he said unto them, What have I done now in comparison of you? [Is] not the gleaning of the grapes of Ephraim better than the
vintage of Abiezer?
—Judges 8:2
Different people have different ideas about how to perform similar work. As a result, we can benefit by exploring different perspectives in designing products and processes. In the same sense, different organizations solve problems differently and take different approaches toward their work. For this reason, it can be helpful to observe how different firms perform tasks.
For example, a small computer software firm must consider many things when establishing a customer service unit. Some questions they must ask themselves include, What type of equip- ment would be needed? How should customer service specialists be trained? How would cus- tomer complaints be settled? How should refunds be handled? What procedures should be established to resolve customer issues? And what is an acceptable response time for returning customer calls? One method could be for the firm to blaze forth with the new customer service department and make mistakes as it goes along. A wiser approach would be to benchmark exter- nal customer service units in other companies first.
WHAT DO WE MEAN BY THE VOICE OF THE MARKET?
Strategy formation results from understanding customers and the marketplace (see Figure 6-1 ). The marketplace includes immediate customers as well as competitors, the customers of competitors, potential competitors, and potential customers. In every market, advances shape and reshape the markets. Each firm strives to introduce new products, develop innovative processes, and find better ways to satisfy the customer. Customers can be good sources of information about competitors. This type of data gathering should include both strengths and weaknesses of your competitors. Some customers might be reticent to share this information. However, most cus- tomers realize that it is in their best interest to improve the performance of suppliers and will eagerly help. Information from lost customers also can be extremely useful for targeting weak- nesses and improving products and services.
136 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
In Chapter 5 we considered how customers shape markets and how information about cus- tomers is obtained. However, customers are not the only source of information about the market. One of the best sources of information can be other companies. By understanding our competi- tors, we begin to understand the marketplace better and what it takes to compete successfully in the marketplace.
GAINING INSIGHT THROUGH BENCHMARKING
Suppose that you wanted to learn how to snow ski during your winter break. There are a few options available to you: You could teach yourself how to ski, you could enlist the help of your friend who learned how to ski last week, or you could take ski lessons with a certified instructor. Perhaps you could become a decent skier using any of these methods; however, your odds of suc- cess in learning quickly, avoiding injury, and gaining an appropriate respect for the sport would be greatest if you opt for the lessons.
The same is true in business. For a start-up firm, a rapidly growing company, or an organi- zation in need of some improvements, the opportunity to observe and learn from a master could be invaluable. A benchmark is an organization recognized for its exemplary operational perfor- mance. There are many benchmarks in the world, including Toyota for processes, Intel for design, Scandinavian Airlines for service, and Honda for rapid product development.
To be a benchmark, a company must be willing to open its doors and allow others to view its operations and tour its facilities. Thus a distinguishing feature of benchmarks is their amazing openness to other firms. Consider Toyota Motor Company. From the 1960s to the 1980s, Toyota developed the world-class production system known as just-in-time or lean. This production system resulted in previously unseen levels of productivity, minimal cost, and a source of com- petitive advantage. Some companies might have put barbed wire and guard dogs around their lean facilities to keep this technology to themselves and maintain their competitive advantage. Instead, Toyota allowed employees such as Taiichi Ohno and Shigeo Shingo to write books explaining the lean concept to the rest of the world. Toyota also allowed thousands of visitors to tour its facilities and learn about the lean system. The company even entered into strategic alli- ances with chief competitors so that they could learn about lean production.
Two rationales explain why benchmarking is good business. The first originates from Deming’s thought that “the worst thing for a business is a weak competitor.” Therefore, strength- ening the competition forces everyone to improve in order to maintain a competitive edge. As such, openness provides an impetus to continual improvement . An opposite view is that openness can create a competitive advantage through creating psychological barriers to competition . A manager of a high-technology firm marketing a new product once said, “We do not mind if the others come to see how we produce our product. Once they see what we can do, they will not want to compete against us.” In other words, the large amount of work it would take to establish
Strategic Quality Plan
Company Mission
Strategic Plan
Competitive Forces
Customer Needs
FIGURE 6-1 Strategic Quality Planning Model
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 137
and develop the systems that a truly outstanding competitor already has in place can be daunting and discouraging to its competitors.
Benchmarking is the sharing of information between companies so that both can improve . The first step a benchmarking firm must take is to document current performance. This activity will allow the company to pinpoint its goals and find a company (inside or out- side the industry) that already excels at what it is trying to accomplish, study what it does, and gather ideas for improvement. Benchmarking is useful for externally validating an organiza- tion’s approach to its business. If the managers in a firm are unsure that they are pursuing a useful plan of action, benchmarking can help them understand how what they are doing stacks up against the masters.
There are two parties to each benchmarking relationship: an initiator firm and a target firm . The initiator firm initiates contact and studies another firm. The target firm is the firm being studied (also called a benchmarking partner ). These are not static roles. Often the target firm enters into a reciprocal agreement to observe the initiator firm. As shown in Table 6-1 , there are several types of benchmarking. Note that they are not all mutually exclusive.
Process Benchmarking
In process benchmarking , the initiator firm focuses its observation and investigation on busi- ness processes. This can involve studying process flows, operating systems, process technolo- gies, and the operations of target firms or departments. The goal is to identify and to observe the best practices from one or more benchmark firms. By improving core processes, overall business performance is enhanced.
Financial Benchmarking
The goal of financial benchmarking is to perform financial analysis and to compare the results in an effort to assess your overall competitiveness. This type of benchmarking need not involve direct interaction between the initiator firm and the target firms. There is, however, interaction between the initiator and a third party that gathers this information. Usually the information can be gathered using CD-ROM databases such as Lexis/Nexis or Compact Disclosure. As more companies place annual reports online, the Internet has become an important tool for bench- marking financial performance.
Performance Benchmarking
Performance benchmarking allows initiator firms to assess their competitive position by com- paring products and services with those of target firms. Performance issues may include cost structures, various types of productivity performance, speed of concept to market, quality mea- sures, and other performance evaluations. For example, an initiator firm may be interested in identifying other firms that have implemented effective cost accounting practices such as activity- based costing systems to observe and compare the performance of various cost drivers.
TABLE 6-1 Benchmarking Types Process benchmarking—comparing processes Financial benchmarking—comparing business results Performance benchmarking—comparing cost structures, speed, quality levels, etc. Product benchmarking—comparing product attributes and functionality Strategic benchmarking—comparing firm competitiveness along several dimensions Functional benchmarking—comparing or learning how another firm performs a particular function
138 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Product Benchmarking
Many firms perform product benchmarking when designing new products or upgrades to cur- rent products. Product benchmarking often includes reverse engineering , or dismantling com- petitors’ products to understand the strengths and weaknesses of their designs. By observing the designs of others, the initiator firm can develop new ideas for product and service design. Micron Technologies maintained a cost advantage in producing DRAM computer chips because of its ability to produce chips with fewer mask levels than its competitors. To compete with Micron, competitors would have to analyze their chips and try to understand their chip-making processes.
Strategic Benchmarking
Strategic benchmarking involves observing how others compete. This often is not industry- specific because firms go outside their own industries to learn lessons from companies and orga- nizations in different industries. This typically involves target firms that have won prestigious honors such as the Malcolm Baldrige award, the Shingo Prize, or the Deming Prize. The focus of this type of benchmarking is to identify the mix of strategies that makes these firms successful competitors. Such benchmarking can be very time-consuming and costly. At Boise Cascade Company, when establishing a quality management process, the firm took a team of executives to Japan and visited several firms to get a sense of what a high-quality firm looked like. Although firms were from other industries, the executives returned with a very realistic idea of the task they faced in establishing quality processes. Pal’s Sudden Service ( Quality Highlight 6-1 ) uses strategic benchmarking.
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 6-1 Pal’s Sudden Service 1
www.palsweb.com
A privately owned, quick-service restaurant chain, Pal’s Sudden Service serves primarily drive-through customers at 21 locations, all within 60 miles of Kingsport, Tennessee, where its first restaurant opened in 1956. Carefully following its formula for standardizing high levels of product and service quality, Pal’s has since grown to become a major regional competitor.
Today, Pal’s employs about 650 people, 95% of whom are in direct production and service roles. The company competes directly with national fast-food chains, earning a steadily increasing—and, now, second best in its region—market share of almost 19%, doubling since 1994.
Featuring hard-to-miss exteriors festooned with larger-than-life menu items, Pal’s restaurants sell hamburgers, hot dogs, chipped ham, chicken, French fries, and beverages, as well as breakfast biscuits with country ham, sausage, and gravy. The company aims to distinguish itself from fast-food competi- tors by offering competitively priced food of consistently high quality, delivered rapidly, cheerfully, and without error. The majority of customers live or work within three miles of Pal’s locations, and nearly two thirds are women.
Pal’s is the first business in the restaurant industry to receive a Malcolm Baldrige award. For everything organizational and operational, Pal’s has a process. Almost nothing—from new product introductions to hiring decisions to the design of support processes and work systems—is done without a thorough understanding of likely impacts on customer satisfaction.
The company’s Business Excellence Process is the key integrating element used in every transac- tion. Carried out under the leadership of Pal’s two top executives and its 21 store owner/operators, the Business Excellence Process spans all facets of the operation—from strategic planning (done annually with two-year horizons) to online quality control. Every component process, including those for con- tinual improvement and product introduction, is interactively linked, producing data that directly or indirectly inform the others.
1 From NIST, Profiles of Baldrige Winners, 2011.
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 139
Benchmarking underpins the entire Business Excellence Process. Managers are continually on the lookout for benchmarking candidates, and each one compiles a running list of potential subjects. For the leadership team, benchmarking yields meaningful competitive comparisons, new best practices for achieving higher performance goals, or new organizational directions. For the entire organization, benchmarking results are a constant reminder that performance always can be improved.
Pal’s is exhaustive in its pursuit of useful data, the basis for sound planning and decision making. In particular, customer, employee, and supplier feedback is central to all processes, and it is gathered in numerous formal and informal ways. For example, Pal’s owner/operators must devote part of every workday to “marketing by wandering around.” A portion of this period is spent engaging employees and customers to hear their views on how a location is performing and to solicit ideas for improvement.
Owner/operators also go door-to-door within a three-mile radius of their restaurants, seeking direct input on customer requirements and satisfaction levels. Answers to predesigned questions are recorded, compiled, and later analyzed at the store and corporate levels.
Owner/operators also maintain a communications log. They record what they have learned about sales, expenses, customers, staff, products, services, equipment, and suppliers, and they list ideas for improvement. Weekly logs are sent to senior Pal’s executives, who comb the entries for issues and oppor- tunities to be addressed at formal monthly management reviews of organizational and business results.
Data are gathered systematically at all levels—process, shift, individual store, and entire busi- ness. The company’s enterprise resource planning system, SysDine, is a key tool, generating store-level and company-wide data on sales, customer count, product mix, ideal food and material cost, and turn- over rates. This information supports daily operational decisions. It also is used to update Pal’s Balanced Scorecard of Core Performance Measures, which links directly to its key business drivers: quality, ser- vice, cleanliness, value, people, and speed.
Managers regularly review the value of the data collected, and the company employs an outside statistician to evaluate the type of information tracked, how it is used, and how it is collected.
Developed with the aid of benchmarking studies, the company’s training processes support improve- ment in operational and business performance. Owner/operators and assistant managers have primary responsibility for staff training. They use a four-step model: show, do it, evaluate, and perform again. Employees must demonstrate 100% competence before they are certified to work at a specific work station.
In customer satisfaction, including food quality, service, and order accuracy, Pal’s is outperform- ing its primary competitor. For example, customer scores for quality averaged 95.8%, as compared with 84.1% for its best competitor.
Pal’s order handout speed has recently improved more than 30%, decreasing from 31 to 20 seconds, almost four times faster than its top competitor. Errors in orders are rare, averaging less than 1 for every 2,000 transactions. The company aims to reduce its error rate to 1 in every 5,000 transactions. In addi- tion, Pal’s has consistently received the highest health inspection scores in its market and in the entire state of Tennessee.
Functional Benchmarking
Another type of benchmarking is referred to as functional benchmarking , where a company focuses its benchmarking efforts on a single function to improve the operation of that function. An example of functional benchmarking occurs in purchasing. Often purchasing managers use their networks to share information about the purchasing function in many different organiza- tions. The Institute for Supply Management (ISM) provides a framework for networking pur- chasing professionals that facilitates the sharing of information about the purchasing function. In addition, the ISM gathers information about purchasing departments and makes this information available to members of the organization.
PURPOSES OF BENCHMARKING
There are seven primary purposes for benchmarking. These purposes require different levels of involvement in the benchmarking activities. Time consumption and costs may vary according to the purpose of benchmarking.
140 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
The purposes of benchmarking range from basic learning to achieving world-class leader- ship. The life cycle in Figure 6-2 shows that benchmarking purposes evolve as the firm becomes more mature in its quality journey.
DIFFICULTIES IN MONITORING AND MEASURING PERFORMANCE
Many times firms desire to compare financial measures between companies when benchmark- ing. This can be a useful activity; however, there can be problems. One of the most significant problems stems from limitations of accounting systems. Often companies have variations in the way they compute their measures that affect the results.
Consider the computation of scrap in which a company computes the ratio of cost of goods sold to scrap. The formula for this computation is
Scrap efficiency = cost of goods sold>scrap (6.1) This formula normalizes the cost of scrap based on the volume of business that a firm does. The resulting ratio is the proportion of the material inputs to production that is wasted as scrap. The higher the ratio, the more efficient is the use of these materials.
Now consider two companies, A and B. Company A uses Equation 6.1 and computes scrap by weighing discarded materials at a standard cost of $.15 per pound of scrap. However, Com- pany B has a variation in its measures. Company B computes scrap at the industry standard of $.15 per pound, less $.03 per pound (the amount it receives from a recycling company that pur- chases its scrap). Therefore, Company B’s account equation would be
Computed ratio for Company B = cost of goods sold>(scrap - recovery) (6.2)
I Learning
from successes
II Borrowing
ideas
III Best-in-
firm
IV Beating industry standards
V Best-in-
class
VI National
leadership
VII Best-in- world
World- Class
Lead ersh
ip L ife C
ycle
Benchmarking Purpose
Quality Maturity
World-Class
Outstanding
Industry Competitive
Internally Focused
FIGURE 6-2 Benchmarking Purpose and Quality Maturity
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 141
The resulting equations are
Company A ratio = cost of goods sold>.15 Company B ratio = cost of goods sold>.12
If the cost of goods sold is the same for both companies, the ratio will be higher for Company B. In this case, Company A is at a disadvantage because of the differences in the ways that scrap is costed. These differences might be more apparent if a careful benchmarking study is performed in which the participants know exactly what the numbers mean and what the differences in accounting systems are. However, if a great number of data, ratios, measures, and numerical statistics are shared between the companies, the differences in accounting methods might not be as obvious.
The ratio we have focused on is a type of productivity ratio. The cost of goods sold to scrap ratio measures the efficient use of materials. One remedy for the effects of accounting differ- ences on productivity ratios is to compute total-factor productivity measures. To understand total factor productivity measures, we first must understand single factor productivity measures. Single factor productivity measures are computed as
Single factor productivity = output>(a single input) (6.3) The cost of goods sold to scrap ratio is a single factor ratio in that it focuses on scrap material alone. Multiple factor productivity measures use multiple inputs in their computation. For example,
Multiple factor productivity = output>(the sum of multiple inputs) (6.4) Multiple inputs might include scrap, labor, energy, materials, equipment, and other mea-
sures of inputs. Hayes and Wheelwright 2 suggest that it is better for firms to use multiple factor productivity measures in making comparisons because these measures are more robust. The total factor productivity measure is similarly computed as
Total factor productivity = output>(sum of all inputs to production) (6.5) Total factor productivity, although still subject to the “apples and oranges” problems of compari- sons, is less sensitive to differences in costing conventions and accounting practices.
Notice that if you focused on plant and equipment productivity, the conclusion would be that the competitor is lagging in productivity. Also notice that labor productivity may be a small part of total productivity. 3
3 Some firms are using a method called data envelopment analysis (DEA) to improve comparisons between firms. This is a linear programming approach that can potentially be used to eliminate the “apples and oranges” problem.
2 Hayes, R., and Wheelwright, S., Dynamic Manufacturing (Boston: Free Press, 1988).
EXAMPLE 6-1 Computing Productivity
A company has gathered the following financial information for itself and a competing firm. The company wishes to compare productivity for the two firms (all the following numbers are in 000s).
Firm A Competition
Labor $ 20,000 $ 15,000 Plant and equipment (P&E) 100,000 145,000 Energy 5,500 10,500 Materials 220,000 190,000 Sales 425,000 500,000
142 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Labor and other productivity ratios for the two firms are computed as
Firm A labor productivity = (sales>labor) = 425,000>20,000 = 21.25 Competitor labor productivity = (sales>labor) = 500,000>15,000 = 33.33 Firm A P&E productivity = (sales>P&E) = 425,000>100,000 = 4.25 Competitor P&E productivity = (sales>P&E) = 500,000>145,000 = 3.45 Firm A energy productivity = (sales>energy) = 425,000>5,500 = 77.27 Competitor energy productivity = (sales>energy) = 500,000>10,500 = 47.62 Firm A materials productivity = (sales>materials) = 425,000>220,000 = 1.93 Competitor materials productivity = (sales>materials) = 500,000>190,000 = 2.63 Total factor productivity for Firm A = (sales>total of inputs) = 425,000>345,500 = 1.23 Total factor productivity for the competitor = (sales>total of inputs) = 500,000>360,500 = 1.39
21.25
33.33
4.25
3.45
77.27
47.62 1.93
2.63
1.23
1.39
Firm A Firm B Firm A Firm B Firm A Firm B Firm A Firm B Firm A Firm B Labor Productivity Overall ProductivityMaterial ProductivityEnergy ProductivityP & E Productivity
As you can see, the total factor productivity measure provides a more complete picture of firm productivity.
Another caveat for comparing measures between companies is based on the Deming argu- ments against such things as work measurement and management by objective. To concentrate too much on comparative measures might focus managers on results and not causes. This could result in the unfortunate development of numerical goals that ignore the necessity of improving the system of production.
Because of the possibility of serial correlation of data, even greater care should be taken when analyzing longitudinal (time-series) data. For example, company researchers might want to compare rates of growth for two companies in assets, sales, and other measures. If the data have serial correlation, they might reach the wrong conclusions.
Problems in comparisons are even more pronounced when comparing U.S. firms with for- eign companies. The cost accounting conventions and accepted accounting principles can vary greatly between countries. For this reason, it is best not to compare accounting figures with for- eign companies. However, if you must, take great care as to how the results of the comparisons are used in formulating policy.
COMMONLY BENCHMARKED PERFORMANCE MEASURES
Different firms in different industries use thousands of different benchmarking measures. The measures a firm chooses depend on the key business factors (KBFs) of each particular firm. The key business factors are factors significantly related to the business success of the firm. For example, in a given firm, customer satisfaction might be significantly related to market share. If this is the case, then a company would be very interested in tracking its customer satisfaction.
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 143
Table 6-2 shows the categories of measures that are often gathered in benchmarking stud- ies. Financial ratios such as return on assets (ROA) or return on investments (ROI) are probably the easiest to obtain and compare. For many financial ratios, all that is needed is an income state- ment of a firm and a balance sheet. Many of these statistics are available in annual reports and on the Internet. Generally, senior management is keenly interested in these measures to guide their decision making.
Productivity ratios are useful in measuring the extent to which a firm effectively uses the scarce resources that are available to the firm. As we have previously discussed, these include single-factor, multifactor, and total-factor productivity measures.
Customer-related results include customer satisfaction, customer dissatisfaction, and comparisons of customer satisfaction relative to competitors. These measures may be in the form of retention, gains, losses, customer-perceived value, competitive awards, competitive customer ratings, and independent organization evaluations. Customer satisfaction measures are important for gauging the effectiveness of quality improvement because they are good indicators of finan- cial performance.
Operating results are important for monitoring and tracking the effectiveness of company operations. These might relate to cycle times, waste-reduction measures, value-added measures, lead times, time from concept to market, setup times, percent reduction in setup times, and myr- iad other operating results.
Often, one of the key aspects of running a business involves the people employed by the organization. Therefore, human resources measures provide important insights into how effec- tively the business is being run. Employee satisfaction is significantly related to business perfor- mance in many firms. Therefore, employee satisfaction measures, training expenditures, training hours per year, work system performance, employee effectiveness measures, turnover, safety statistics, absenteeism, and many other data might be important measures for benchmarking.
Of course, quality measures are often compared between firms. These can include conformance-based quality information such as reject rates, capability information, performance information, or other measures. These quality measures also can include scrap and rework mea- sures, percentage of defectives, field repairs, costs of quality, and many other metrics. The qual- ity measures also may include data concerning the performance of processes and time-related statistics. Where customer service quality is important, the types of data that are captured often include such things as percentage of customers whose phone calls are answered within seven seconds, average response time for phone inquiries, number of people a caller must contact to get a problem resolved, and many other metrics (or measures).
Market share data are an essential indicator of business success. This has resulted from the change in competition because of increased global competition. However, market share does not encompass only a single measure. Because markets are segmented, market share includes shares in the different markets served by the firm. Market share comparisons also are made to determine where the initiator firm ranks in the market.
TABLE 6-2 Benchmarking Data Financial ratios Productivity ratios Customer-related results Operating results Human resources measures Quality measures Market share data Structural measures
144 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Finally, with the advent of ISO standards and a move to formalized production systems, structural measures often are benchmarked. Structural measures include objectives, policies, and procedures followed by a firm. They may include safety, production, accounting, financial, engineering, and other types of structural measures that are used in determining competitiveness.
Why Collect All These Measures?
Management by fact dictates that decisions are made based on the sound collection and analy- sis of data. The Malcolm Baldrige criteria are clear about this:
Data and analysis support a variety of company purposes, such as planning, reviewing company performance, improving operations, and comparing company performance with competitors or with “best practices” benchmarks. 4
A major consideration in performance improvement involves the creation and use of per- formance measures or indicators. Performance measures or indicators are measurable character- istics of products, services, processes, and operations the company uses to track and improve performance. The measures or indicators should be selected to best represent the factors that lead to improved customer, operational, and financial performance. A comprehensive set of measures or indicators tied to customer and/or company performance requirements represents a clear basis for aligning all activities with the company’s goals. Through the analysis of data from the track- ing processes, the measures or indicators themselves may be evaluated and changed to better support such goals.
Key Business Factors
When benchmarking, it is important to understand your target firm’s key business factors (KBFs) as well as your own. Key business factors are important attributes of a business that influence its operations and decision making. Examples of KBFs include mission, vision, values, key customer segments, core capabilities, culture, governance, and other facets of a business. KBFs are not to be confused with key measures (the metrics that need to be monitored to gauge the health of the business) and critical success factors (factors that help to determine the success of the firm).
BUSINESS PROCESS BENCHMARKING
Many benchmarking professionals believe that the most important type of benchmarking is busi- ness process benchmarking. There is good reason for this. Suppose that you compare your cus- tomer service quality with a competitor’s. You find out that your competitor is using a standard survey instrument to gauge customer satisfaction. You then administer the survey to your cus- tomers and find out that on a 5-point scale your company rates a 4.3 and your chief competitor rates a 4.7 (with equal dispersion). Now what do you do with this information? The fact that your score differs from your competitor’s tells you nothing about how the competitor is achieving these higher scores. To understand how your competitor has achieved these scores, business pro- cess benchmarking is necessary.
Business process benchmarking is based on the concept of 5w2h developed by Alan Robinson. 5 The 5w2h concept is labeled as such because a business process benchmarking proj- ect should result in the answers to seven questions. Five of these questions begin with the letter w ( w ho, w hat, w hen, w here, w hy), and the remaining two questions begin with the letter h ( h ow and h ow much).
4 2006 Criteria for Performance Excellence (Gaithersburg, MD: National Institute of Standards and Technology, 2006), p. 4 . 5 Robinson, A., Continuous Improvement in Operations: A Systematic Approach to Waste Reduction (Cambridge, MA: Productivity Press, 1991), p. 245 .
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 145
The 5w2h concept is a good starting point because it focuses the participants in the bench- marking process on the nuts and bolts of what is being done. If the initiator organization can answer the 5w2h questions at the end of a benchmarking process, then information will be in place that could, for instance, help a company improve its customer satisfaction.
The 5w2h questions should be viewed in the context of a process. Figure 6-3 contains a diagram of a generic process. In a broad sense, inputs include the equipment, people, machines, materials, and design that combine to form a product or service. The inputs are combined in what is known as the conversion process . In the conversion process, we align the inputs together to form the product or service. Conversion processes might include turning sheet steel into chimney pipes or turning wood pulp into paper or, for a shipping service, moving materials from point A to point B.
The conversion process results in outputs that are eventually sold to customers. Notice in Figure 6-3 that there are two feedback loops in the process. The first feedback loop results from gathering data from the process. This is known as the control process . As we explained in Chapter 1 , the control process involves gathering, analyzing, and using the data to adjust the process. This is often the result of using process control charts.
The second feedback loop in the process is the customer feedback loop and results from gathering data from the customers. Using these data, the control process is improved to give the customer greater satisfaction. A third feedback process can be added by gathering information from competitors through benchmarking.
Figure 6-4 shows what to benchmark at each stage. Again, the questions asked are similar to the 5w2h questions posed earlier.
Robert Camp’s Business Process Benchmarking Process
We have already defined process benchmarking. We now discuss the benchmarking process developed by Robert Camp. Xerox was an early adopter of benchmarking and has used bench- marking effectively to improve processes. This approach includes a formal 10-step process to benchmarking, as shown in Table 6-3 .
Step 1: Decide what to benchmark. There are innumerable areas for improvement in every company. Obviously, not all of these can be tackled at once. Too many simultaneous changes can result in a confused organization and actually can hurt performance. There- fore, you must prioritize those processes that offer the greatest potential for improve- ment. To do this, you must have identified your key processes and charted those processes for future analysis.
Step 2: Identify whom to benchmark. This involves identifying those competitors in your industry and those firms outside your industry that have outstanding results and processes for study. Those companies that have developed best practices are prime candidates for benchmarking.
Inputs Conversion
Process
After- Sales
Processes
Other Firms
Output
Control Process Loop
Customer Feedback Loop
Benchmarking Feedback
FIGURE 6-3 Process Model
Video Clip: Benchmarking at Xerox
146 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
TABLE 6-3 Benchmarking Steps at Xerox
1. Decide what to benchmark 7. Revise performance goals 2. Identify whom to benchmark 8. Develop action plans 3. Plan and conduct the investigation 9. Implement specific actions and 4. Determine the current performance gap monitor progress 5. Project future performance levels 10. Recalibrate the benchmarks 6. Communicate benchmarking findings
and gain acceptance
ResultsProcesses
Source
Market
Produce
Service
Invoice
Deliver
(What is supplied)
Customer inquiries
Customer requirements
Orders
Maintenance request
Completed orders
(Sequence of work steps)
Problem resolution process
Product development
process
Order picking process
Broken parts (cull)
process
Billing process
(What is delivered)
Satisfied customers
Product features
Order complete
Uptime increased
Billing quality
(Performance measure)
Percent customer repurchasing
Unit manufacturing
cost
Percent accuracy
Percent parts filled from service-
person's inventory
Percent invoices error free
Outputs
Feedback
Inputs
FIGURE 6-4 Process Information Source: R. Camp, Business Process Benchmarking (Milwaukee, WI: ASQ Quality Press, 1995), p. 26 . Reprinted with permission from the Quality Press. © 1995 American Society for Quality.
Step 3: Plan and conduct the investigation. To complete this step, identify data to be col- lected. Next, develop a method with the target firms to determine how the data are to be collected. Once the data are selected, observe the practices of the target firm and docu- ment the best practices that are observed.
Step 4: Determine the current performance gap. Once you have collected the data about the processes, a determination is made as to which processes in the initiator company have the greatest performance gap with the target company. Brainstorming can help make this determination. This step helps to prioritize which areas are the first candidates for change and improvement.
Step 5: Project future performance levels. Predict whether the performance gap for the benchmarked processes will narrow or widen in the coming years. If the performance gaps are likely to widen in the future, project how this will affect the company.
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 147
Step 6: Communicate benchmarking findings and gain acceptance. This step begins the communication of the benchmarking findings to those who will be affected by the results. This can be done through meetings and written media. Communication keeps the process as open as possible, which minimizes uncertainty and fear.
Step 7: Revise performance goals. Once best practices are identified, operational goals are revised. This establishes measures for evaluating the results of improvements based on benchmarking.
Step 8: Develop action plans. Action plans are the specific steps and objectives for imple- mentation. Assignments to personnel and timetables for implementation are used with a project management approach.
Step 9: Implement specific actions and monitor progress. As implementation proceeds, progress is reported to management and stakeholders.
Step 10: Recalibrate the benchmarks. Continued benchmarking with the best firms helps to identify new best practices. This “raises the bar” for higher levels of future performance.
LEADING AND MANAGING THE BENCHMARKING EFFORT
Like other quality management efforts, benchmarking is a managed process. Therefore, manage- ment must have an understanding of the benchmarking process, the participants involved, and the objectives of the exercise.
Managing the benchmarking process involves establishing, supporting, and sustaining the benchmarking program. To begin the management process, a strategy statement outlining the goals and strategies to be used is developed (see A Closer Look at Quality 6-1 ).
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 6-1 Benchmarking at Intuit 6
Intuit’s new CEO Brad Smith was faced with the challenge of reshaping the company. Intuit has found success with products such as QuickBooks, TurboTax, and Quicken. However, the company’s revenue growth has slowed and Wall Street viewed the company as short on ideas. In addition, Intuit and other tech companies are faced with a new generation of customers who prefer online tools and technologies that emphasize design and online user interaction.
In order to complete Intuit’s transformation, Brad Smith did not limit himself to the company’s collective knowledge. Smith sought the counsel from several tech industry icons. Some viewed this move as risky, but Intuit has experienced positive results.
Smith reached out to Hewlett Packard to study how to measure Intuit’s spending on procurement, marketing, legal services, information technology, and HR. The effort resulted in a benchmarking study of comparing Intuit with 1,000 other companies. At the end Smith noted, “In many cases we were over- investing.”
Smith discovered that Google was known for allowing employees time to work on personal proj- ects. Adopting a similar policy at Intuit resulted in launching cellphone banking software. In adapting to its customer base, Intuit developed more online services. A new version of QuickBooks includes soft- ware that enables small businesses to create Web sites. Intuit will be responsible for hosting the sites and managing the customers who use these services. To better understand how to manage online communi- ties, Brad Smith talked with Facebook’s COO.
As Smith continues to reach out to other tech companies, outsiders feel Intuit is planting seeds for new ideas. Time will tell when Intuit’s transformation is complete. No matter the result, CEO Brad Smith recognizes the importance of benchmarking and seeking advice from other companies in order to improve Intuit.
6 Based on Ricadela, A., “Intuit Taps Hewlett-Packard and Google for Advice,” Bloomberg BusinessWeek, 30 September 2008.
148 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 6-2 The Legal Environment of Benchmarking
Legal issues such as antitrust, intellectual property, and trademark issues are central concerns for firms entering into benchmarking agreements. To overcome these issues, benchmark practitioners should fol- low a code of conduct. One such code of conduct for benchmarking has been proposed by the Strategic Planning Institute Council on Benchmarking. 7
The Benchmarking Code of Conduct Principles
To contribute to efficient, effective, and ethical benchmarking, individuals agree for themselves and their organization to abide by the following principles for benchmarking with other organizations:
• Principle of legality. Avoid discussions or actions that might lead to or imply an interest in restraint of trade: market or customer allocation schemes, price fixing, dealing arrangements, bid rigging, bribery, or misappropriation. Do not discuss costs with competitors if costs are an ele- ment of pricing.
• Principle of exchange. Be willing to provide the same level of information that you request in any benchmarking exchange.
• Principle of confidentiality. Treat benchmarking interchange as something confidential to the indi- vidual and organizations involved. Information obtained must not be communicated outside the partnering organizations without prior consent of participating benchmarking partners. An organi- zation’s participation in a study should not be communicated externally without their permission.
• Principle of use. Information obtained through benchmarking partnering should only be used for the purpose of improving operations within the partnering companies themselves. External use or communication of a benchmarking partner’s name with their data or observed practices requires permission of that partner. Do not, as a consultant or client, extend one company’s benchmarking study findings to another without the first company’s permission.
7 www.apqc.org
With the strategy statement in place, management sets expectations for performance relat- ing to the benchmarking project. At a minimum, the expectations for benchmarking are that this is an ongoing process that serves as a basis for improvement (not a onetime event) and that spe- cific deliverables are to be identified by management that must be fulfilled.
Other activities for management include providing management awareness training, establishing a benchmarking competency center, developing guidelines for information shar- ing, and overseeing the development of a visit protocol. Once this benchmarking infrastructure is in place, benchmarking teams are commissioned and trained to perform the benchmarking project.
Training
Training is a key to success in all quality management approaches. This is especially true for benchmarking. Participants must have project management skills and be familiar with bench- marking approaches and protocols. Benchmarking carries with it legal liabilities that should be addressed during the training (see A Closer Look at Quality 6-2 ). Training should include mana- gerial training, cross-functional benchmarking skills training, team training, and documentation training (flowcharting). Many of these training courses are available from many different con- sulting organizations. It is best to obtain training from organizations that are experienced with benchmarking. Many companies have established external training arms that can be hired by competing firms.
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 149
• Principle of first-party contact. Initiate contacts, whenever possible, through a benchmarking contact designated by the partner company. Obtain the permission of the contact before relaying any information or delegating any responsibility to other parties.
• Principle of third-party contact. Obtain an individual’s permission before providing their name in response to a contact request.
• Principle of preparation. Demonstrate commitment to the efficiency and effectiveness of the benchmarking process with adequate preparation at each process step; particularly, at initial part- nering contact.
• Principle of completion. Keep your commitments with your benchmarking partner in a timely fashion and keep your agreements.
• Principle of understanding and action. Follow the golden rule with benchmarking partners. Strive to understand how your benchmarking partner wants to have information handled.
Remember:
• Keep it legal. • Be willing to give what you get. • Respect confidentiality. • Keep information internal. • Use benchmarking contacts. • Don’t refer without permission. • Be prepared at the initial contact.
Etiquette and Ethics
Benchmarking partners must make themselves vulnerable to one another in order to gather useful infor- mation. Therefore, a level of trust must be established. The following general guidelines should be fol- lowed by both partners in a benchmarking encounter:
• Establish specific ground rules up front (e.g., “We don’t want to talk about those things that will give either of us a competitive advantage; rather, we want to see where we both can mutually improve or gain benefit”).
• Do not ask competitors for sensitive data or cause the benchmarking partner to feel that sensitive data must be provided to keep the process going.
• Use an ethical third party to assemble and blind-review competitive data, with inputs from legal counsel, for direct competitor comparisons.
• Consult with legal counsel if any information-gathering procedure is in doubt before contacting a direct competitor.
• Any information obtained from a benchmarking partner should be treated as internal, privileged information.
There are also some general rules of etiquette to be followed. On the one hand, never disparage a competitor’s business or operations to a third party, nor should you attempt to limit competition or gain busi- ness through the benchmarking relationship, nor misrepresent yourself as working for another employer.
On the other hand, always know and abide by the benchmarking code of conduct; have a basic knowledge of benchmarking and follow a benchmarking process; have determined what to benchmark, identified key performance variables, recognized superior performing companies, and completed a rig- orous self-assessment; have developed a questionnaire and interview guide and shared these in advance if requested; have authority to share information; work through a specified host; and have mutually agreed on scheduling and meeting arrangements. For face-to-face visits, the following guidelines are essential: Provide a meeting agenda at least a week in advance; be professional, honest, courteous, and prompt; introduce all attendees and explain why they are present; adhere to the agenda and maintain the focus on benchmarking issues; use language that is universal, not a company’s specialized jargon; do not share proprietary information without prior approval from the proper authority of both parties; and share information about your benchmarked processes.
Outside consultants can be useful in providing training and coaching on benchmarking and other quality-related efforts. However, it is best for the firm that is interested in benchmarking to
150 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
perform the benchmarking with its own employees rather than through consultants because a self-perpetuated approach creates the best platform for organizational learning. It may take lon- ger; however, it probably will be more useful to do it yourself.
BASELINING AND REENGINEERING
Many firms are facing the important decision to reengineer business processes to enhance pro- ductivity, to reduce cost, to improve quality, and to achieve better customer service. Reengineer- ing (see Chapter 2 ) is defined as a fundamental rethinking and redesign of business processes. Such change is often accompanied by the automation of business processes. Two factors are critical to achieving success through reengineering: breadth and depth. Breadth refers to the impact of the reengineering process to the entire organization. Depth refers to organizational ele- ments such as responsibilities, measurements, information technology, and skills. These dichoto- mous factors imply that business process reengineering will result in both localized (such as the affected work areas) and generalized (or organization-wide) performance impacts. However, these impacts are difficult to assess. Therefore, appropriate, effective methodologies are needed to assess the impacts of business process reengineering.
A methodology that can be applied in assessing business process reengineering impacts is baselining. Baselining , which has been discussed in other chapters, requires the monitoring of key internal firm performance measures over time to identify trends such as improvement (or decline) to inform managerial decision making. The baselining process involves identifying measures, establishing time frames for future data collection, gathering data, and analyzing data on an ongoing basis to identify performance trends and changes (see Figure 6-5 ).
Because business process reengineering affects multiple levels in a firm, abrupt organiza- tional changes are reflected in baselining results. If changes are effective in improving the orga- nization, the data collected will reflect this improvement.
PROBLEMS WITH BENCHMARKING
Benchmarking is not a simple activity, and it can be difficult to implement any of these tools and concepts. There are four key problems with benchmarking:
1. There may be substantial difficulty obtaining cooperation from other firms in your own industry—unless you happen to be a Fortune 100 firm. Most organizations have much less clout. The thing to remember is reciprocity . To be effective, you must have something to offer the target firm in return for sharing information. For example, a small firm may feel that it has little to offer a larger firm. If the small firm is flexible, the Goliath firm may want to learn how to achieve that flexibility.
2. The predominance of functional benchmarking with firms in noncompeting industries makes it difficult to benchmark with these firms. It takes much ingenuity to identify
Identify Measures
Establish Time Frames
Gather Data
Analyze Data to Identify Trends
FIGURE 6-5 Baselining Process
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 151
benchmarks properly from noncompeting firms. This is where the business and industry lit- erature is very helpful in trying to identify benchmarking firms in noncompetitive industries.
3. Your efforts will be wasted unless you fully understand your own processes before you benchmark someone else. Using tools such as business process maps, it is possible to iden- tify the exact performance measures and metrics needed from the target firm.
4. Benchmarking is time-consuming and costly. A recent benchmarking project between two firms took nearly two years to complete and cost each of the firms more than $250,000. Of course, this was a major benchmarking project. Other projects have been completed at lower costs. However, some have been much more expensive. Costs of benchmarking include time for planning, travel, documentation, and implementation. By far, the largest costs are associated with implementa- tion. The investment is lost if benchmarking data are not used to drive improvement.
Summary In this chapter we discussed an important method for listening to the voice of the market. We discussed the purposes of benchmarking. Most often companies benchmark processes. They also benchmark many performance measures such as productivity.
The goal of benchmarking is to become best in class and then best of the best. Benchmark- ing is more effective for firms that have been pursuing quality and process improvement over time. This is certainly not a starting point for quality improvement efforts.
Remember that the use of data and measures can result in undesired outcomes as individu- als attempt to exploit the measurement system to reflect well on them. Baselines and other mea- sures should be implemented carefully with attention to the possibility of unintended outcomes.
Key Terms Baselining Benchmark Control process Conversion process Critical success factors Customer-related results Financial benchmarking
Financial ratios 5w2h Functional benchmarking Human resources measures Initiator firm Key business factor (KBF) Key measures
Management by fact Market share data Operating results Performance benchmarking Process benchmarking Product benchmarking Productivity ratios
Quality measures Reverse engineering Strategic benchmarking Structural measures Target firm
Discussion Questions 1. Describe the concept of benchmarking. Provide an example of how a restaurant you are familiar with
could use benchmarking to improve its performance. 2. What is a benchmark firm? Why is it good practice for a benchmark firm to open its doors and allow
others to view its operations and tour its facilities? 3. What are the pros and cons of becoming a benchmark firm? If you were the manager of a highly suc-
cessful company, would you want other companies benchmarking against your firm? Why or why not? 4. In the context of benchmarking, describe the distinction between an initiator firm and a target firm. 5. Describe how benchmarking can be used by a firm to validate externally the value of its present busi-
ness practices. 6. Describe the concept of process benchmarking. How does process benchmarking improve a company’s
overall business performance? 7. Is the growing popularity of the Internet a positive development or a negative development for the
future of benchmarking? Explain your answer.
152 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
8. Compare and contrast process benchmarking, product benchmarking, and strategic benchmarking. 9. When benchmarking, what is the primary hazard in comparing measures across companies to gauge
performance differences? 10. How do a firm’s key business factors help direct its benchmarking program? 11. Provide several examples of the types of measures that are often gathered in benchmarking studies.
How does a firm determine which measures should be included in its benchmarking program? 12. Imagine yourself in the role of the CEO of a medium-sized auto parts company. Briefly describe how
you would set up a benchmarking program. Include in your description an analysis of how you would determine “what” to benchmark and how you would determine “whom” to benchmark against.
13. Consider the following: “Despite its many advantages, benchmarking is not an appropriate technique for all firms. Some firms are so unique that it is impossible for them to find benchmark firms that experience the same challenges they do. As a result, it is impractical for these firms to participate in benchmarking.” Do you agree or disagree? Explain your answer.
14. Many scholars believe business process benchmarking is the most important type of benchmarking. Do you agree with this particular belief? Why or why not?
15. Describe the concept of 5w2h. 16. What management activities can be undertaken to support a firm’s benchmarking activities? Make
your answer as substantive as possible. 17. What are some of the pluses and minuses of the benchmarking code of conduct? Would you add any
other points to the code? If so, what? 18. Although benchmarking is a popular management technique, many firms are not engaged in the
benchmarking process. Why do you think some firms avoid benchmarking? Are any of the reasons valid? Why or why not?
Problems 1. A company has gathered the following financial information for itself and a competing firm. They
wish to compare productivity for the two firms (all numbers in 000s).
Firm A Firm B
Labor $30,000 $16,000 Plant and equipment 200,000 150,000 Energy 17,500 20,500 Materials 200,000 180,000 Sales 1,200,000 900,000
a. Compute partial and total factor productivity measures for Firms A and B. b. What is the picture you get of the two firms? c. What would you suggest to the management of Firm B?
2. For the firms in Problem 1, you have been asked to make a report to the management of Firm A. What are some of the caveats relating to accounting practices that you would include in the report? Which numbers should be interpreted cautiously?
3. For the data in Problem 1, suppose Firm B is a foreign firm. What additional caveats would you place on interpretation of the data?
4. A domestic company operating a subsidiary in an LDC (less-developed country) has shown the fol- lowing financial results:
Parent (Domestic) Subsidiary (LDC)
Sales (units) 200,000 80,000 Labor (hours) 40,000 60,000 Materials (currency) $40,000 FC40,000 Equipment (hours) 120,000 10,000
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 153
a. Calculate partial labor and capital productivity numbers for the parent and subsidiary. Interpret the results.
b. Compute total factor productivity figures. Does your interpretation change? c. If $1 ! 10 FC units, calculate materials productivity figures. Explain your finding.
5.
Marketing Manufacturing Engineering Supply Chain
Aerospace 4.8 12.5 10.0 Automotive 8.5 5.0 6.0 Communications 11.6 11.8 20.0 Components 3.0 2.4 5.5 Computer 5.0 8.0 12.5 Electromechanical 6.3 6.0 10.0 Electronic Subsystems 4.2 4.5 8.0 Heavy Mechanical 6.0 9.0 9.0 Instrumentation 7.5 4.8 6.1 Light Assembly 2.8 2.5 3.3 Medical 3.8 4.0 13.4 Cross-Industry 4.9 6.0 8.2
Above are industry comparisons of the percentage of sales spent on salaries for marketing employees, manufacturing engineering employees, and supply chain employees for several different industries. Rank these industries by the amount spent in each of the areas and report your findings to manage- ment. What can you infer from your findings about each of the industries?
6. Using the data from Problem 5, suppose you are a computer company that spends 9% on marketing staff, 6% on manufacturing engineering, and 8% on supply chain staff. Comparing your expenditures with the above averages, what would you recommend to management? What more information would you want?
7. Following is an announcement from a study from The Benchmarking Network, Inc.
5th Annual Shared Services Measures The Benchmarking Network and the Shared Services Benchmarking Association announced they will be kicking off the fifth Annual Shared Services Measures benchmarking study. Now is the time to join and become involved in setting the focus and direction of the study by attending the kickoff meet- ing. The study will review Shared Services Measures including research into:
• Accounting; • Finance and Treasury; • Human Resources; • Information Technology; • Procurement and Supply Chain; • Legal; • Regulatory; • Auditing; • Corporate Communications/External Affairs; • Facilities, Real Estate, Security; • Environmental; • Fleet; and • Other Shared Services Measures.
Put yourself in the place of the Benchmarking Network researchers. How would you design this study? What would you have to consider in undertaking such a study?
8. Below are enrollment data from several British universities.
154 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Change in Student Numbers
99/2000 to 2000/01 98/99 to 99/2000
Supporting Data 2000/01 Student Numbers FT PT FT PT ALF
Institution % % % % £ FT PT
Abingdon and Witney College b b 0 -7 b b b Accrington and Rossendale College -16 -1 7 -1 17.22 1246 8896 Alton College 2 34 11 10 17 1478 1522 Amersham and Wycombe College -4 -6 5 21 17.07 1762 5064 Aylesbury College -14 11 -5 -2 22.63 800 3117 Barking College -6 6 2 -68 17.05 2193 8638 Barnet College -7 -2 5 -22 17 4383 13189 Barnfield College 3 7 7 24 17 2601 15480 Barnsley College -3 -85 -9 -24 17 3084 6029 Basildon College -8 -43 -12 41 17 583 5695 Basingstoke College of Technology -4 2 -6 8 17 1463 7670 Bedford College -1 19 -3 -7 17.32 1855 8524 Beverley College of Further Education 17 6 31 4 17 851 3972
ALF = Average Level of Funding FT = Full Time PT = Part Time b = Not Available
Compare the data from these schools and present them in a way that is useful for the administrators in these schools.
9. Suppose the chancellor of Bedford College asks you to infer meaning from the data in Problem 8. Put together a report for the chancellor explaining how Bedford is performing relative to the other schools.
10. Choose a company in your local area. Develop a list of five companies among the best in class in their industry and the best of the best. Explain how you chose the benchmarking targets you chose. Identify a list of 20 benchmarking questions. What kind of data would you select? How would you contact the target firms?
11. Following are financial statements from American Ecology. Studying these figures, what are some possible financial benchmarks this firm might want to develop?
American Ecology Corporation Consolidated Statements of Operations: Proforma and Unaudited ($ in 000s except per share amounts)
2003 2004 2005
Revenues 38,960 41,522 49,972 Operating costs 23,545 23,219 33,571 Gross profit 15,415 18,303 16,401 Selling, general, and administrative expenses 15,702 21,909 24,187 Impairment loss on long-lived assets — — 7,451 Loss from operations (287) (3,606) (15,237) Investment income (618) (1,203) (932) Gain (or loss) on sale of assets (72) (136) (55) Other expense (414) (1,723) (1,326) Gain (or loss) before income taxes 817 (544) (12,924) Income tax expense (benefit) 55 132 (1,517) Net income (or loss) 762 (676) (11,407) Preferred stock dividends 417 760 465 Net income (or loss) available to common shareholders 345 (1,436) (11,872) Basic earnings per share 0.03 (0.17) (1.47) actual dollars Diluted earnings per share 0.03 (0.17) (1.47) actual dollars
12. Baseline the data from Problem 11. Is the company’s performance improving or worsening?
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 155
CASES
Case 6-1 Amgen Corporation: Using Benchmarking as a Means of Coping with Rapid Growth Amgen: www.amgen.com American Productivity and Quality Center: www.apqc.org
Chemical, Lexus, Lucent Technologies, Motorola, Anheuser-Busch, Eastman Chemical, and IBM. Four of the companies invited Amgen personnel to visit their facilities, and the other three participants were inter- viewed over the phone. The study was successful, and Amgen redesigned its sales training and development department as a result of the benchmarking initiative.
Amgen has found other opportunities to use bench- marking to help cope with the challenges of rapid growth in a high-technology industry. For example, the company used benchmarking to study the way it moves its products from production to the end user, and it conducted a bench- marking study that examined its marketing practices. Through its experiences, Amgen has learned some of the barriers to effective benchmarking and some of the global benefits. In terms of barriers, Amgen learned that a benchmarking study is only as good as its implementa- tion. If the implementation stage is lengthy or is not taken seriously by the people involved, the study will not be useful. Another potential barrier is finding companies that are similar enough to your company to benchmark against and that are willing to participate. Having a partner like the American Productivity and Quality Center that main- tains a best-practice database to draw from helps address this concern. Amgen has learned there are also global benefits to benchmarking, beyond the specific ideas and techniques that are gleaned from a particular benchmark- ing study. Benchmarking helps a firm gain visibility and sends a clear message to its stakeholders that the firm is interested in continuous improvement. In addition, bench- marking helps a firm determine whether its best-in-class activities are truly best in class. Often, it is difficult for a firm to know just how good (or poor) it is at some activity until it measures its activity against a similar firm.
Amgen has been successful in its early experi- ences with benchmarking and serves as a model for how to initiate a benchmarking program. Although Amgen excels in the development of high-potential pharmaceu- tical products, it recognizes that it has a lot to learn about other management issues. Benchmarking has been a useful tool for the company in its learning efforts.
8 Powers, V. J., “Amgen Succeeds with Benchmarking through Outside Facilitation, Hard-Working Teams,” American Productivity and Quality Center 8 (October 1997): 1.
Amgen Corporation is the largest biotechnology company in the world. Founded in Thousand Oaks, California, the company produces lifesaving pharmaceutical prod- ucts based on advances in cellular and molecular biol- ogy. One of the company’s products, EPOGEN, is a product used for the treatment of anemia associated with chronic renal failure and is one of the top-selling pharmaceutical products in the world.
Although Amgen is very good at developing cutting-edge pharmaceutical products, the company has struggled at times with the demands of managing a rap- idly growing workforce. In the past 20 years, the com- pany has grown from a workforce of 400 employees to 7,500. In particular, Amgen has faced challenges in terms of making the transition from a single-product company to a multiproduct company and in staffing and training its growing divisions. To deal with these challenges, Amgen decided to turn to benchmarking. The first department involved with the benchmarking initiative was sales train- ing and development because the company’s employees believed that improvement was needed in that area. There also was recognition within Amgen that training and development needed to be strengthened. Commenting on the merits of the first benchmarking study, Ellen Nichols, the director of the sales training and development depart- ment, said, “We’d been clearly focused on our products and customers, but perhaps we haven’t had as focused an effort on developing our people.” 8
To conduct its first benchmarking study, Amgen solicited help from the American Productivity and Qual- ity Center (APQC) in Houston, Texas. APQC is a non- profit organization that provides benchmarking training, maintains a best-practice database, and helps firms locate businesses to benchmark against. APQC helped Amgen develop a list of 40 potential benchmark targets, based on Amgen’s criteria for selection. Amgen wanted to bench- mark against companies that were high-growth, high- tech, successful, and had a geographically dispersed sales force. Eventually, Amgen narrowed the list to seven companies and benchmarked its sales training and devel- opment department against similar departments at Dow
(continued)
156 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Discussion Questions
1. Why was benchmarking so important for Amgen at the point in the company’s history when bench- marking was initiated? Do you believe that benchmarking will contribute to Amgen’s long- term success?
2. Was it a good idea for Amgen to solicit the help of the American Productivity and Quality Center? Do you think that Amgen would have been suc- cessful without the APQC’s involvement?
Case 6-2 AT&T Teleholdings: Making Benchmarking a Part of the Process Improvement Tool Kit AT&T: www.att.com
AT&T Teleholdings offers local telecommunications services to people in Illinois, Indiana, Ohio, Michigan, and Wisconsin. The company has a rich history of inno- vation and customer service. For example, they were the first U.S. company to offer commercial cellular ser- vice. Today, the company offers a broad array of ser- vices to its customers and is an industry leader in productivity and financial performance.
AT&T Teleholdings is firmly committed to benchmarking. To maximize the potential of its bench- marking efforts, the company employs internal bench- marking experts and conducts benchmarking forums for its employees. Stories about successful benchmarking efforts in the company are always included in the forums. According to Orval Brown, the company’s manager of business process architecture and bench- marking, “Other people’s success stories (about bench- marking) get people interested and excited about the possibility of improvement.”
The company has found three approaches helpful in the attainment of quality improvements:
Internal (best-of-breed) benchmarking involves a comparison of processes between different busi- ness units within the firm.
External (best-in-class) benchmarking involves finding companies to benchmark against, even if the company is in an unrelated industry.
Competitive (industry best) benchmarking against a leader in the same industry.
Each of these types of benchmarking has unique challenges and rewards. Internal benchmarking is the simplest because there is typically no problem getting access to information. External benchmarking is more challenging because of access and confidentiality issues, but the rewards can be quite good. Competitive benchmarking is the toughest because a direct competi- tor typically will go only so far in terms of sharing information. The rewards, however, can be substantial.
Because the company is multifaceted in its bench- marking efforts and because a lot of employees are involved, the firm uses a benchmarking code of conduct to maintain strict control of its benchmarking efforts. The benchmarking code of conduct (reflecting the guidelines from the Strategic Planning Institute Council of Benchmarking) is as follows:
• Keep it legal. • Be willing to provide the same information you
request. • Respect confidentiality. • Keep information internal for your use only. • Initiate contact through benchmarking contacts. • Don’t refer possible benchmarking candidates
without their permission. • Be prepared at initial contact. • Have a basic knowledge of benchmarking, and
follow the process.
This code of conduct provides a measure of conti- nuity across the company’s benchmarking efforts that is very helpful in developing a consistent set of bench- marking behaviors. It also helps ensure that benchmark- ing will in no way impinge on the ethical standards of the firm.
One component of the benchmarking process that the company has become very good at over the years is finding suitable firms to benchmark against. They typi- cally look for the following types of companies to include in benchmarking studies: companies that have received quality or business awards, companies with excellent financial results, companies with success sto- ries published in major periodicals, and companies that are top-rated in their industries. These criteria help to select firms that have the highest potential to provide successful benchmarking results.
Management is also keenly aware of the fact that the litmus test of any management initiative is effective implementation. The company typically takes the
(continued)
Chapter 6 • The Voice of the Market 157
following steps in implementing what it learns from a benchmarking initiative:
Select implementation alternatives.
Assign resources and create a schedule.
Establish goals.
Develop a monitoring plan.
Gain appropriate approval to alter current practices.
Implement the plan.
Communicate the benchmarking findings.
This formalized process of implementation helps ensure that a benchmarking effort translates into actual change.
As the telecommunications industry continues to become more competitive, the company’s reliance on benchmarking as part of its process improvement tool kit will probably become even more pronounced.
Discussion Questions
1. Is AT&T Teleholdings’ benchmarking code of conduct a good idea? What types of ethical abuses potentially could occur in benchmarking if a firm did not follow a strict code of conduct?
2. This case describes benchmarking as an impor- tant part of the company’s “tools” of quality.
What other tools of quality does benchmarking complement?
3. Telecommunications is a fast-paced, rapidly changing industry. Do you believe that bench- marking is particularly important in a fast-paced industry? Why or why not?
We all prefer copiers whose copies are clear under low power; we all prefer cars designed to steer safely and predictably, even on roads that
are wet or bumpy. . . . We say the products are robust. They gain steadfast customer loyalty.
—Genichi Taguchi and Don Clausing 1
C H A P T E R 7
Quality and Innovation in Product and Process
Design
158
Have you ever needed a copy quickly but the copy machine was jammed? Have you ever worked against an impending deadline only to have a computer or a printer fail? Have you ever gotten into your car on a cold day to find it would not start? These annoyances are relatively minor. However, other examples of product failures can be catastrophic. If a lum- berjack uses a defective chainsaw, he or she might lose an arm. If a heart monitor malfunctions, the results might be fatal to a patient. A race car driver’s tires blow at 210 miles per hour, and a spinout results. A faulty fire alarm fails to alert the home’s occupants until it is too late. These are major product failures that can result in severe injury or death.
In this chapter we focus on quality assurance. We have already learned that we cannot ensure quality at the final stages of inspection. After all, assurance is best achieved at the design stage.
DESIGNING PRODUCTS FOR QUALITY
In designing products, we must first answer many questions. For example, what are the functions the customer wants? What are the capabilities of current products? What are the limitations of the materials we have selected for the product? Are there better materials available? How much will the product cost to make? How much must the product cost to make it successful in the marketplace?
What does it mean to design products for quality? As we have already said, quality has many different dimensions. David Garvin’s dimensions of quality from Chapter 1 make it clear that each dimension poses different design problems. Take the first dimension of performance.
1 Taguchi, G., and Clausing, D., “Robust Quality,” Harvard Business Review 68 (1990): 65–75.
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 159
What are the critical measurements of performance? How much performance does the customer want? How much performance is overkill? How do we balance competing dimensions of perfor- mance (e.g., audio output versus distortion)? Similar questions could be constructed concerning any of Garvin’s product quality dimensions. All these questions must be answered early in the design process. For example, if durability is an important quality dimension for the producer of an electronic calculator, then the design team might actively investigate new polymers to find a durable housing for the internal electronics.
It might seem that materials choices are technical and should be made by engineers. How- ever, engineers need input from marketing and operations to understand customer needs, market- ing requirements, and the realities of production. Supply chain functions provide inputs on needs such as sourcing, logistics, and collaborations. Given free rein, engineers would design many products to the n th degree. If you don’t believe this, look at a remote control for a DVD player or a television set. You will never use many of the buttons on the remote. A study was performed by Sony Corporation to determine which buttons were actually used by the customer. Based on the results of the study, the remotes for Sony televisions were simplified.
Professor Noriaki Kano of the Science University of Tokyo illuminates the relationship between quality and design with the Kano Quality/Design Model in Figure 7-1 . The Kano model shows that quality is a function of fulfilling customer requirements and achieving high levels of satisfaction. He then distinguishes between basic quality, performance quality, and exciting quality. The goal should be exciting quality. As you contemplate the Kano model, you should realize that as time passes, customer demands will increase and what was once exciting will become a basic expectation.
THE DESIGN PROCESS
There are many different approaches to designing products. Even within the same industries, the approaches vary in some important ways. Yet there are some similarities across the board. For example, design projects often involve a project team rather than a single designer working inde- pendently. Preferably, these teams will work closely with customers to ensure that customer needs are met.
Satisfaction
Exciting Quality
Performance Quality
Dissatisfaction
Basic Quality
R eq
ui re
m en
t U
nf ul
fi lle
d
R eq
ui re
m en
t Fu
lf ill
ed
FIGURE 7-1 The Kano Model
160 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Figure 7-2 shows a generic approach to designing products. The design process includes nine phases that are interrelated. These stages begin with product idea generation and end with manufacture, delivery, and use. Project managers monitor design projects at each stage for cost and adherence to schedules.
Product idea generation is the first step. During this stage, external and internal sources brainstorm new concepts. Internal sources include marketing, management, research and devel- opment (R&D), and employee suggestions. The primary source for external product ideas is the customer. Original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) and contract manufacturers work closely with customers to develop new products. In other circumstances, customer needs are identified to generate product ideas. Other external sources for product ideas can be market-related sources such as industry experts, consultants, competitors, suppliers, and inventors. There are fundamen- tal differences between R&D-generated ideas (known as R&D push ) and marketing-generated ideas (known as marketing pull ). R&D-generated ideas tend to be groundbreaking, risky, and technologically innovative. An example of R&D-based development was the Altair microcom- puter. In the mid-1970s, the MITS (Micro Instrumentation and Telemetry Systems) Altair 8800 appeared on the cover of Popular Electronics. At the time, there was a very small market for this
Manufacturing System Design
Marketing Plan Design
Final Product Definition
Process Technology Selection
Technology Feasibility Statement
Project Customer Needs
Generate Product Ideas
Product Evaluation
Manufacture, Delivery, and Use
FIGURE 7-2 Product Development Process
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 161
product. However, the article inspired two computer whizzes named Paul Allen and Bill Gates to develop a BASIC Interpreter for the Altair. The rest is history. Although there was not a large established market for personal computers, they have radically affected business and home life since their introduction.
Marketing-generated ideas tend to be more incremental—that is, they build on existing designs—and are better aligned with customer needs. For example, at the product idea-generation stage, a gap in the market or a customer need should be identified. Preliminary assessment of the marketability of the product is performed and funding provided for beginning development of a prototype of the product. Recent developments in computers have included technological devel- opments such as improved multimedia capabilities and faster speeds as well as cosmetic changes in casings such as tablet designs and the use of clear plastics. These are marketing-oriented changes. As shown in Quality Highlight 7-1 , new product ideas have enhanced the bottom line.
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 7-1 A Turnaround at Kellogg’s Cereals: Driven by Design 2
www.kelloggcompany.com
Due to the leadership of Carlos Gutierrez, former CEO, Kellogg has regained the top spot in sales in the highly competitive cereal industry. Driving the turnaround is research and development (R&D). In the 1990s, the company only introduced two new products: Nutri-Grain Bars and Raisin Bran Crunch. Since 2000, over 100 food scientists have been busily working at the new R&D center in Battle Creek, Michi- gan. The results are evident—Kellogg generates over 100 new products per year! In addition, over 20% of Kellogg’s sales are from new products—up from less than 5% in prior years.
Here is one example of a new product: Special K with Red Berries. When Kellogg marketers in France decided to jazz up Special K by adding freeze-dried berries, headquarters took notice. Cereal makers had tried using freeze drying in the 1970s, but freeze drying was more primitive back then and wreaked havoc with moisture levels in the cereal boxes, turning flakes into mush. Now, food scientists at Kellogg have perfected the technology, and the R&D folks in Battle Creek and Europe tinkered with a mix of tart raspberries and sweet cherries until they had the right blend. The cereal now generates over $100 million in sales according to figures that exclude Walmart sales.
2 Adapted from “The Man Who Fixed Kellogg,” Fortune , 6 September, 2004: 218–226.
Source: LiPo Ching/MCT/Newscom.
162 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Stage 2 is customer future needs projection . This uses data to predict future cus- tomer needs. Designers for Intel, the maker of the microprocessors for personal computers, have been masters at this. They have been able to project and introduce new products that are well timed to fit with changes in the technology requiring them. With the explosion of graphics in programs and on the Internet, Intel developed new chips to fit these needs. The company also has introduced these microprocessors at a rate that has not outstripped the ability of the market to absorb the new technology. At the same time, the company has been able to outpace competing microprocessor developers by staying slightly ahead of the tech- nological curve.
The task of the product designer is to offer products with value that exceed customer needs at any point in time by careful planning and thought as to what future customer needs will be. There is no single approach to gathering information about future customer needs. Surveys might give insights, but they are usually insufficient to uncover emerging customer needs.
During technology selection for product development , designers choose the materi- als and technologies that will provide the best performance for the customer at an acceptable cost. A technology feasibility statement is used in the design process to assess a variety of issues such as necessary parameters for performance, manufacturing imperatives, limitations in the physics of materials, special considerations, changes in manufacturing technologies, and conditions for quality-testing the product. At this stage, preliminary work can be per- formed to identify key quality characteristics and potential for variability with each of the different materials.
Technology development for process selection means choosing those processes used to transform the materials picked in the prior step into final products. Careful technology selection of both automated and manual processes is key from a quality perspective because machinery, processes, and flows need to be developed that will result in a process insensitive to variations in ambient and material-related conditions.
Final product definition results in final drawings and specifications for the product with product families by identifying base product and derivative products.
Product marketing and supply chain preparation are marketing-related activities such as developing a marketing plan. The marketing plan should define customers and distri- bution streams. The production-related activities are identifying supply chain activities and defining distribution networks. Nowadays, this step often requires the design of after-sales processes such as maintenance, warranties, and repair processes that occur after the customer owns the product.
Product design and evaluation requires definition of the product architecture, the design, production, testing of subassemblies, and testing of the system for production. A product design specification (PDS) demonstrates the design to be implemented with its major features, uses, and conditions for use of the product. The PDS contains product characteristics, the expected life of the product, intended customer use, product development special needs, production infrastruc- ture, packaging, and marketing plans.
Manufacturing system design is the selection of the process technologies that will result in a low-cost, high-quality product. The selection of process technology is a result of projected demand and the finances of the firm. Processes must be stable and capable of producing products that meet specification. One of the major developments in this area is that firms now desire the ability to change over to new products with a minimum of cost associated with defects. In the past, it was considered standard operating procedure to produce a certain amount of bad product to prove that the system works. For example, a producer of stove pipe would process a small batch of pipe, inspect the pipe and then adjust the line, produce another small batch and rein- spect, and so forth until they proved the process. This is no longer considered a cost-effective means of introducing new products.
Finally, product manufacture, delivery, and use finish this process. The consumer then enjoys the result of the design process.
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 163
QUALITY FUNCTION DEPLOYMENT (QFD)
When you have determined customer needs, those needs must be translated into functional product design. Quality function deployment (QFD) describes a method for translating cus- tomer requirements into functional design. Sometimes this process of translation is referred to as the voice of the customer . The quality function deployment approach was developed by Dr. S. Mizuno, 3 a former professor of the Tokyo Institute of Technology. Since then, this approach has been used extensively throughout the world. In the United States, Hauser and Clausing, 4 two MIT professors, were central in researching and publishing articles describing this approach. 5
Designers need a means for implementing customer requirements into designs. The house of quality illustrated in Figure 7-3 shows how QFD is used to accomplish this. The left wall on the house of quality contains a listing of customer requirements. The roof on the house of quality
3 Mizuno, S., and Akao, Y., “QFD: The Customer-Driven Approach to Quality Planning and Development,” Asian Productivity Organization, Tokyo, Japan, 1994. 4 Hauser, J., and Clausing, D., “The House of Quality,” Harvard Business Review (May–June 1988): 63–73. 5 Ibid.
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Te ch
ni ca
l R
eq ui
re m
en ts
C om
pe tit
iv e
A ss
es sm
en t
1 2
3 4
5 Competitive Assessment
1 2 3 4 5
Im po
rt an
ce Ta
rg et
v al
ue Sa
le s
po in
t A
bs ol
ut e
w ei
gh t
Absolute weight Absolute factor Relative weight Relative factor
FIGURE 7-3 QFD Layout: The House of Quality
164 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
lists technical requirements. We introduce QFD step by step so that you can see how a house of quality is developed and analyzed. Following are steps in performing a QFD: 1. Develop a list of customer requirements. The list of customer requirements includes the
major customer needs as they relate to a particular aspect of a process. In Figure 7-4 , a part of a QFD house of quality is shown with customer requirements for a restaurant. Custom- ers want to have a clean restaurant, a comfortable seating arrangement, delicious food, and responsive servers.
2. Develop a listing of technical design elements along the roof of the house. These are the design elements that relate to customer needs. Figure 7-5 shows the design elements for the restaurant that may affect the customers’ requirements. These design elements are building materials such as type of tile, dirt resistance of floor tiles, material used in making seats, training for servers, and standardization of menu.
3. Demonstrate the relationships between the customer requirements and technical design elements. A diagram can be used to demonstrate these relationships. The symbols shown in Figure 7-6 are used, and scores are assigned relating to these symbols (i.e., 1, 3, and 9).
Clean facilities
Comfortable seating
Delicious food
Responsive servers
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
FIGURE 7-4 QFD Customer Requirements
Clean facilities
Comfortable seating
Delicious food
Responsive servers
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Ty pe
o f t
ile
D ir
t r es
is ta
nc e
of fl
oo r t
ile s
Se at
m at
er ia
l
Se rv
er tr
ai ni
ng
M en
u st
an da
rd iz
at io
n
Te ch
ni ca
l R
eq ui
re m
en ts
FIGURE 7-5 QFD Technical Requirements
Clean facilities
Comfortable seating
Delicious food
Responsive servers
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Ty pe
o f t
ile
D ir
t r es
is ta
nc e
of fl
oo r t
ile s
Se at
m at
er ia
l
Se rv
er tr
ai ni
ng
M en
u st
an da
rd iz
at io
n
Te ch
ni ca
l R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Symbols = 9 (Strong association) = 3 (Somewhat associated) = 1 (Weak association)
FIGURE 7-6 QFD Technical Requirements and Customer Requirements Relationships
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 165
Where 9 means strongly associated, 3 is somewhat associated, and 1 is weakly associated. Notice that tile and dirt resistance are strongly associated to clean facilities.
4. Identify the correlations between design elements in the roof of the house. Using the symbols identified in Figure 7-6 , show whether different design elements are positively or negatively correlated. As shown in Figure 7-7, positive and negative scores are assigned to each symbol as shown. Notice that seat material and type of tile are negatively related, whereas type of tile is strongly positively related to dirt resistance. Server training and menu standardization are also strongly positively related.
5. Perform a competitive assessment of the customer requirements. On both the right side and in the lower middle portion of Figure 7-8 , there is an assessment of how your product compares with those of your key competitors. These comparisons are on a 5-point scale with 5 being high. A stands for competitor A, B means competitor B, and Us stands for the company in question. Note that there are two assessments, one for customer requirements and another for technical requirements.
6. Prioritize customer requirements. On the far right side of Figure 7-9 are customer require- ments priorities. These priorities include importance to customer, target value, sales point, and absolute weight. A focus group of customers assigns ratings for importance. This is a subjective assessment of how critical a particular customer requirement is on a 10-point scale, with 10 being most important. Customer requirements with low competitive assess- ments and high importance are candidates for improvement. Target values are set on a 5-point scale (where 1 is no change, 3 is improve the product, and 5 is make the product better than the competition). With the target value, the design team decides whether to change the product.
The sales point is established by the QFD team members on a scale of 1 or 2, with 2 meaning high sales effect and 1 being low effect on sales. The absolute weight is then found by multiplying the customer importance, target factor, and sales point. This is expressed in the following equation:
Absolute weight ! customer importance " target value " sales point (7.1)
Clean facilities
Comfortable seating
Delicious food
Responsive servers
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Ty pe
o f t
ile
D ir
t r es
is ta
nc e
of fl
oo r t
ile s
Se at
m at
er ia
l
Se rv
er tr
ai ni
ng
M en
u st
an da
rd iz
at io
n
Te ch
ni ca
l R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Intercorrelations = + 9 (Strong positive) = + 3 (Positive) = 3 (Negative) = 9 (Strong negative)*
Symbols = 9 (Strong association) = 3 (Somewhat associated) = 1 (Weak association)
FIGURE 7-7 QFD Technical Requirements Interrelationships
166 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
7. Prioritize technical requirements. As shown in Figure 7-10 , technical requirements are prioritized by determining degree of difficulty, target value, absolute weight, and relative weight. The degree of difficulty is assigned by design engineers on a scale of 1 to 10, with 1 being least difficult and 10 being most difficult. The target value for the technical require- ments is defined the same way the target values for the customer requirements were assigned.
The values for absolute and relative weights are now established. The value for the absolute weight is the sum of the products of the relationship between customer and tech- nical requirements and the importance to the customer columns (fourth column from the right). The value for relative weight is the sum of the products of the relationship between customer requirements and technical requirements and the customer requirements absolute weights (the farthest right column).
8. Final evaluation. The relative and absolute weights for technical requirements are evalu- ated to determine what engineering decisions need to be made to improve the design based on customer input. This evaluation is performed by computing a percentage weight factor for each of the absolute weight and relative weight numbers (see Figure 7-11 ).
As you can see in this example, the standardized menu has a very high relative importance. This gives the restaurant a focus for the coming period.
Finally, the house of quality we have shown is only the first level. As shown in Figure 7-12 , a similar process is followed in rolling out a new design. The first stage we have discussed is the technical requirement stage. During the second stage, a house of quality is completed for
Symbols = 9 (Strong association) = 3 (Somewhat associated) = 1 (Weak association)
Clean facilities
Comfortable seats
Delicious food
Responsive servers
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Ty pe
o f t
ile
D ir
t r es
is ta
nc e
of fl
oo r t
ile s
Se at
m at
er ia
l
Se rv
er tr
ai ni
ng
M en
u st
an da
rd iz
at io
n
Te ch
ni ca
l R
eq ui
re m
en ts Us = Our companyA = Company A
B = Company B
C om
pe tit
iv e
A ss
es sm
en t
1 2
3 4
5
U s
B A
U s
B A
B U
s A
BU s
A
B A
U s
Competitive Assessment
1 2 3 4 5
Us
A
B A
Us B
AB Us
B Us A
Intercorrelations = + 9 (Strong positive) = + 3 (Positive) = 3 (Negative) = 9 (Strong negative)*
FIGURE 7-8 Competitive Assessment
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 167
component attributes to prioritize components and subsystems. At the third level, process opera- tions, process engineers use QFD to prioritize process points that can lead to better customer satisfaction. At the fourth stage, the quality control plan is put in place to ensure that customer needs are given proper priority.
TECHNOLOGY IN DESIGN
No longer are the tools of the designer a square, a pencil, and a drafting table. Today, a designer is much more likely to use a computer-aided design (CAD) system . These systems are used in designing anything from an ultralight airplane, to a hamburger, to a home, or to a new intersec- tion that can handle higher volumes of traffic. Computer-aided tools greatly improve the ability of designers to generate new and varied designs. In addition, they simplify the design process. For example, auto designers once had to place mock-ups of automobiles into wind tunnels to test the aerodynamics of a design. However, now the wind resistance coefficients for automobiles can be simulated on computers, cutting costs and design times and allowing for quick adjust- ments to the design. CAD systems help to develop more reliable and robust designs.
Im po
rt an
ce Ta
rg et
v al
ue Sa
le s
po in
t A
bs ol
ut e
w ei
gh t
Symbols = 9 (Strong association) = 3 (Somewhat associated) = 1 (Weak association)
Clean facilities
Comfortable seating
Delicious food
Responsive servers
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Ty pe
o f t
ile
D ir
t r es
is ta
nc e
of fl
oo r t
ile s
Se at
m at
er ia
l
Se rv
er tr
ai ni
ng
M en
u st
an da
rd iz
at io
n
Te ch
ni ca
l R
eq ui
re m
en ts
C om
pe tit
iv e
A ss
es sm
en t
1 2
3 4
5
U s
B A
U s
B A
B U
s A
BU s
A
B A
U s Competitive
Assessment
1 2 3 4 5
Us
A
B A 9 3 1 27
6 5 1 30
8 4 2 64
7 4 2 56
Us B
AB Us
B Us A
Intercorrelations = + 9 (Strong positive) = + 3 (Positive) = 3 (Negative) = 9 (Strong negative)*
FIGURE 7-9 Competitive Assessment Requirement Priorities
168 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
An important advance in CAD systems has been the advent of multi-user CAD systems . Using a common database in a network, multiple designers in locations worldwide can work on a design simultaneously around the clock. Consider a multinational corporation developing a new product. When the U.S. designers sleep, Asian and European designers work. When the U.S. designers return to work, they can see the progress that has been made overnight. For exam- ple, when developing a new airplane, Boeing used hundreds of designers on the project simulta- neously. These designers used their CAD systems to ensure there were no inconsistencies in design that would render the airplane unusable.
CAD systems are used in geometric design, engineering analysis, design review and auto- mation, and automated drafting. Geometric modeling is used to develop a computer-compatible mathematical description of a part. 6 The image developed is typically a wire-frame drawing of a component. This part may appear in two dimensions, as a two-dimensional drawing of a three- dimensional object, or in full three-dimensional view with complex geometry.
Im po
rt an
ce Ta
rg et
v al
ue Sa
le s
po in
t A
bs ol
ut e
w ei
gh t
Absolute weight
Relative weight Symbols = 9 (Strong association) = 3 (Somewhat associated) = 1 (Weak association)
Clean facilities
Comfortable seating
Delicious food
Responsive servers
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Ty pe
o f t
ile
D ir
t r es
is ta
nc e
of fl
oo r t
ile s
Se at
m at
er ia
l
Se rv
er tr
ai ni
ng
M en
u st
an da
rd iz
at io
n
Te ch
ni ca
l R
eq ui
re m
en ts
C om
pe tit
iv e
A ss
es sm
en t
1 2
3 4
5
U s
B A
U s
B A
B U
s A
BU s
A
B A
U s Competitive
Assessment
1 2 3 4 5
Us
A
B A 9 3 1 27
6 5 1 30
8 4 2 64
7 4 2 56
Us B
AB Us
B Us A
81
243
81
243
81
351
80
595
93
744
Computing Relative Weight:
9 27 = 243
Computing Absolute Weight:
9 9 = 81
Intercorrelations = + 9 (Strong positive) = + 3 (Positive) = 3 (Negative) = 9 (Strong negative)*
FIGURE 7-10 QFD Example
6 Stroud, I., and Nagy, H., Solid Modelling and CAD Systems (New York: Springer, 2011).
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 169
Engineering analysis may involve many different engineering tests such as heat-transfer calculations, stress calculations, or differential equations to determine the dynamic behavior of the system being designed. Analysis-of-mass-properties features in CAD systems automatically identify properties of a designed object such as weight, area, volume, center of gravity, and moment of inertia. CAD systems allow for the automatic calculation of these properties.
Designs are checked for accuracy during design review . Using CAD, the designer can zoom in on any part of design detail for close inspection of a part. Layering also is performed during design review by overlaying the geometric images of the final shape of a part over an image of a rough casting. This layering validates the design by ensuring that enough material is available on the casting to accomplish the final machined dimensions of the part.
Examining a design to see if different components in a product occupy the same space is called interference checking . Interference checking is of major importance in an design of air- planes. Hundreds of pipes and thousands of wires occupy the walls of the aircraft. Interference checking in design review ensures that designs are feasible. This is especially important for air- plane makers because so many engineers are participating in the design. Automated drafting results in the creation of a final drawing of the designed product and its components. Some of the features of an engineered drawing include automated dimensioning, generation of cross-hatched
Im po
rt an
ce Ta
rg et
v al
ue Sa
le s
po in
t A
bs ol
ut e
w ei
gh t
Symbols = 9 (Strong association) = 3 (Somewhat associated) = 1 (Weak association)
Clean facilities
Comfortable seating
Delicious food
Responsive servers
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Ty pe
o f t
ile
D ir
t r es
is ta
nc e
of fl
oo r t
ile s
Se at
m at
er ia
l
Se rv
er tr
ai ni
ng
M en
u st
an da
rd iz
at io
n
Te ch
ni ca
l R
eq ui
re m
en ts
C om
pe tit
iv e
A ss
es sm
en t
1 2
3 4
5
U s
B A
U s
B A
B U
s A
BU s
A
B A
U s Competitive
Assessment
1 2 3 4 5
Us
A
B A 9 3 1 27
6 5 1 30
8 4 2 64
7 4 2 56
Us B
AB Us
B Us A
Absolute weight Absolute factor Relative weight Relative factor
81
.19
243
.11
81
.19
243
.11
81
.19
351
.16
80
.19
595
.27
416
2176
Sums 93
.22
744
.34
Computing Absolute Factor:
81/416 = .19
Computing Relative Factor:
243/2176 = .11
*
Intercorrelations = + 9 (Strong positive) = + 3 (Positive) = 3 (Negative) = 9 (Strong negative)
FIGURE 7-11 QFD Example
170 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
areas, scaling of the drawing, development of sectional views, and enlarged views of particular part areas.
CAD systems can be stand-alone or tied into computer-assisted manufacturing (CAM) systems that are used in automated production systems. Another important component of a CAD system is the group technology component that allows for the cataloging and standardization of parts and components for complex products. Standard parts can result in fewer suppliers, simpler inventory, and less variability in processes.
CAD/CAM systems are often tied together in a closed-loop system with computer-aided inspection (CAI) and computer-aided testing (CAT) quality control systems. CAI and CAT allow for 100% inspection of products at a relatively low cost. Inspection is performed by infra- red and noncontact sensors that allow for parts to be inspected without handling, thereby reduc- ing the chance of damage to products.
OTHER DESIGN METHODOLOGIES
Organizing the Design Team
If the design process steps discussed previously are performed sequentially, the design process will be very time-consuming. Therefore, the steps are performed simultaneously as often as pos- sible. This approach is called concurrent engineering and has been very helpful in speeding up the design life cycle. Products such as John Deere tractors and all-new automobiles have been designed using this strategy. Teams are a primary component of concurrent engineering and include program management teams, technical teams, and design-build teams.
Technical Requirements
1
C us
to m
er
A tt
ri bu
te s
Component Attributes
2
Te ch
ni ca
l R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Key Process Variables
Y
X
C om
po ne
nt A
tt ri
bu te
s
Process Operations
3
Quality Control Plan
4
Pr oc
es s
O pe
ra tio
ns
Key Manufacturing Processses
Critical to Quality Characteristics
(CTQs)
FIGURE 7-12 The Houses of Quality
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 171
The benefits of concurrent engineering primarily include communication among group mem- bers and speed. By working on products and processes simultaneously, the group makes fewer mis- takes, and the time to get the concept to market is reduced drastically. The team concept joins people from various disciplines, which enhances communication and the cross-fertilization of ideas.
Another benefit of concurrent engineering is increased interaction with the customer. Often customers are included in concurrent engineering teams to give immediate feedback on product designs. This requires contractual agreements between suppliers and customers because the cus- tomer representatives may work for the design team on a contract basis. However, the immediate feedback is very helpful.
The Product Life Cycle
As is shown by the ski industry (see A Closer Look at Quality 7-1 ), product development is not a static process. Once new products are developed, work may already be under way to introduce the next generation of products. The product life-cycle concept demonstrates the need for devel- oping new products by showing product design, redesign, and complementary product develop- ment on a continuum. Figure 7-13 shows a product life cycle for a typical product. As soon as a product is developed, it is on its way to decline.
Start-up Growth Maturity Decline
FIGURE 7-13 Phases of the Product Life Cycle
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 7-1 Ski Design
www.rossignol.com
During the 1930s and 1940s, skiing in the United States was a sport for the very wealthy, who could afford to take a train to Sun Valley, Idaho, or a resort in Colorado. By the 1950s and 1960s, middle-class people had taken up skiing. By the 1970s, skiing was at the peak of its popularity. People in the 1960s and 1970s began spending more time outside and were living a less sedentary lifestyle. However, by the 1980s, skiing had begun to decline. Other winter sports were becoming popular. The baby boomers were aging, and many downhill skiers were turning to cross-country skiing. This resulted in a decline of sales for ski mak- ers such as K2 and Rossignol. These companies responded by pouring more money into research and development. One development was the introduction of snowboards. Snowboards appealed to skate board- ers and young people. This market grew steadily, and now almost all ski areas in the United States have snowboard parks with half-pipes (a snowboarding area) and other amenities for snowboarders. In the early 1990s, ski sales were still flat, and “capped” skis were introduced. The theory behind capping of skis was that shock was more evenly dispersed throughout the skis. However, it was suspected that the real appeal of the capped ski was that it could hold 30% more graphics than the traditional models. In the mid-1990s, “fat boy” skis were introduced. These were skis that were much shorter and wider than traditional skis, and they made it much easier to ski in deep-powder snow and frozen, chunky, icy snow.
(continued)
Video Clip: Product Life Cycles at Regal Marine
172 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Product Families and the Product Life Cycle
Two imperatives have come to the forefront in the study of product life cycles. The first is that product life cycles are becoming shorter. This means that obsolescence is a greater problem for designers and that the speed at which new product concepts are delivered to market is becoming much more important for companies around the world. The second imperative is that as product life cycles shorten, product variety and change become much more important to the successful competitor because complementary products are needed to consume productive capacity. Com- plementary products are needed for two reasons. First, as discussed, product obsolescence requires that products be updated. Second, some products have seasonal demand necessitating counterseasonal products. Variety refers to the differences in products that are produced and marketed by a single firm at any given time. Change is the magnitude of the differences in a product when measured at two different times. 7 Using the framework for variety and change developed by Sanderson and Uzumeri, 8 variety is the range of different items produced by a firm. Variety is related to a specific family of products. Change can occur as a result of evolutionary small changes to a product or drastic big changes to a product.
Complementary Products
What do we mean by managing product life cycles? Don’t they just occur naturally? Well, yes, they do occur naturally. There probably isn’t a lot you can do to control the rate at which the life cycle occurs. However, we can plan to introduce new and complementary products, which are new products using similar technologies that can coexist in a family of products. These products extend the life of the product line by offering new features or improvements to prior versions of the product. At times, these improvements are cosmetic, and at times, they are substantive. One exam- ple of a complementary product is a product that has a counterseasonal demand when compared with a base product such as motorcycles and snowmobiles. Arctic Cat produces ATVs for summer use and snowmobiles for winter use. This allows for level production rates throughout the year.
When we study issues such as variety and change, it becomes clear that at a strategic level, the problem of the product life cycle is not that a single product is becoming obsolete. Rather, if a variety of products are produced by a given company, management must be aware that several product life cycles must be managed simultaneously.
Designing Products That Work
As A Closer Look at Quality 7-2 shows, there are many things to consider when designing prod- ucts. One of the biggest considerations is design for manufacture (DFM) —“Now that we have
7 Ashby, W. R., An Introduction to Cybernetics (New York: Methuen, 1956). 8 Sanderson, S. W., and Uzumeri, M., Managing Product Families (Chicago: Irwin, 1997).
Later, the industry introduced a radical change in ski design known as parabolic , or shaped, skis. The shaped skis have wider tips and tails that provide ease in turning and greater stability in the snow. “Rocker” design makes it easier to ski in deep snow. One interesting variation of this growth in ski designs is the “parabolic fat boy” manufactured by Rossignol and others. The parabolic skis have adapted snowboard technology into skis and make skiing much easier. Although this ski is recom- mended for expert skiers, it is great for intermediate skiers who want to improve. This is a pleasure to aging baby boomers, whose legs enjoy the relief provided by these technological design changes. These design changes have reinvigorated the ski industry.
Source: Rossignol S3 Freeride Ski.
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 173
designed it, can we make it?” Loosely speaking, design for manufacture means to design prod- ucts so that they are cost-effective and simple to build. However, there are many other consider- ations in a design. One consideration is how we design the product so it is easy to maintain. After all, maintenance, if required, can be very expensive. Another aspect is designing for reliability. It makes little sense to design a product that is capable and stable but not reliable. Another issue relating to design is speed, the time it takes for a concept to reach the market. If it takes a long time for products to reach the market, competitiveness may be hampered. Product designs must be simple. Designing for simplicity means standardizing parts, modularizing, and using as few parts as possible in a design. Environmental issues also have become key considerations for com- panies designing products. With changes in regulations around the world, products must be designed for reuse, disassembly, and remanufacture.
Design engineers, operations managers, supply chain managers, and others involved in the design process must consider each of these topics simultaneously. Although this may seem com- plicated, in fact, design’s cycle times have improved for many companies.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 7-2 It Takes a Scientist to Design a Winter Coat 9
If you think that it is easy to design products such as clothing, it’s not just about style and fit. There is a lot of technology that goes into keeping skiers warm. First, there is a need. For example, Vermont’s Jay Peak is known as one of the coldest ski areas in the United States. Where else can you find a lift nick- named “The Freezer”? Temperatures can hit minus 30 with 50-mph winds. Last winter a group of frigid skiers had to be rescued by ski patrol. “They were so cold,” says patrol director Peg Doheny, “that their brains were freezing up.”
Cold and skiing go together like noses and sniffles. Now, thanks to advances in the science and technology of skiwear, modern skiers can stay warmer longer. “If your clothing performs at a higher level, you can accomplish more and enjoy skiing more,” says Tom Duguid, brand-marketing director for Arc’teryx. Battling the cold is big business. Consumers spent more than $1.1 billion on cold-weather apparel last winter. “We want to keep people warm, dry and protected,” says Woody Blackford, vice president of innovation at Columbia Sportswear.
Modern ski clothing is an amalgam of synthetics, insulations, and chemical treatments that make the best down jackets of only a few years ago seem like wool knickers. Take Patagonia’s Nano Storm jacket. It has a breathable waterproof H2No barrier bonded to a 2.6-ounce, 50-denier nylon shell. Beneath is a layer of 60-gram PrimaLoft One polyester insulation. To shed moisture, the shell and 22-denier polyester lining are treated with Deluge DWR water-repellent finish. You almost need a PhD to buy cold-weather apparel these days.
Not surprisingly, textile companies, such as GoreTex, have chemists devising new fabrics, insula- tions, membranes, and coatings. Polartec works with military researchers. PrimaLoft uses technology from the aerospace industry. Others turn to physiologists to understand how the body reacts to tempera- ture changes. Columbia Sportswear has hired electrical engineers to develop heated garments. On the materials front, the company’s Omni Heat jackets and gloves have metallic-dot linings to reflect and preserve warmth.
Sewing machines? Ha. Manufacturing modern ski garments requires machines that spray, heat, inflate, and laminate the layers together. Columbia Sportswear uses high-pressure compressors to adhere the interior membrances and baniers of its gloves to the outer fabric layers. The gloves are then baked to activate adhesives.
“Body mapping”—structuring a garment to provide heat retention in some zones, breathability in others—is a recent development. Body-mapped jackets often have waterproof fabric on the shoulders
9 Based on Tolme, P., “The Cold War,” Ski (January 2011): 24–26.
(continued)
174 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Design for Manufacture Method
The overriding concept to consider when discussing DFM is to make it easy to build . This may seem intuitive; however, it is sometimes difficult to be intuitive when you are too close to a pro- cess (like people who design products). The reason for this may be more behavioral or organiza- tional rather than technical. In the old world of designing products, there existed a hierarchy of engineers. At the top of this hierarchy was the product design engineer. Lower down the hierar- chy were the process design engineers. Often these different engineers worked in totally different departments. The fact that they were in different departments often impeded communication.
This organizational problem has been referred to as the over-the-wall syndrome . The over- the-wall syndrome is demonstrated by looking at the design process sequentially. First, the prod- uct design engineers developed a design. This product design would then be approved by the manager or the vice president of product design. The design would then go to the manager or vice president of process design. Process design engineers would then develop the processes to make the product. If at any point a problem with the product design was found by the process engineers, a request for redesign would be sent to the manager of product design. Product design engineers would solve the problem and send the new product design back to the process design- ers. The process designers would then continue their work of developing the process. When
and breathable fabric on the core and sides, mimicking the body’s own natural heat-retention systems. Wet skin loses heat 30 times faster than dry skin. “Staying dry is paramount to staying warm,” says Dr. Gregory Haggquist, founder and chief scientist of Cocona, a fabric technology company.
Insulation is where the big advances are taking place. Powderhorn weaves ceramic yarn into its goose down to better disperse heat. To mimic down, synthetic insulation makers combine a variety of fiber and filament sizes. Electronic apparel is the new frontier. Until now, electrically heated apparel has suffered from short battery life and electronics that were too bulky, not durable, or had burn risks. But modern materials are making heated garments, or “wearable technology,” more viable.
Columbia Sportswear’s Circuit Breaker Softshell uses lithium polymer batteries and carbon fiber instead of metal wire to conduct heat. Carbon fiber is stronger, lighter and corrosion resistant. “In 10 years, heated products will be commonplace,” Columbia Sportswear’s Blackford predicts.
“Today’s ski apparel is light-years better,” says John Seifert, an associate professor at Montana State University, who has done research for The North Face in the school’s Subzero Lab, a 2,700-square- foot meat locker. The facility has cold rooms, environmental chambers, CT scanners, a treadmill, and medical devices to measure cold’s impact on performance.
While modern lab research is vital, nothing can replace fieldwork. That’s why garment makers have teams of product testers. Columbia has 300 worldwide. Greg Hill is Arc’teryx’s star tester. He’s attempting to skin 2 million vertical feet in one winter, providing product feedback and marketing buzz.
Companies use a range of tests to quantify a garment’s performance. The hydrostatic resistance test, for instance, measures how hard it is to force water through fabric at high pressure. Other tests include the dynamic moisture permeation cell, which changes humidity and air pressure levels to mimic weather conditions. The moisture-vapor transmission-rate test involves heating water beneath a piece of fabric and measuring how much vapor moves through the material in 24 hours.
But are the marketing hype and performance pledges just hot air? Sometimes. Many companies, for instance, cite their garments’ wicking abilities. “A paper towel wicks,” says Polartec’s Simmons, “but you’re not going to wear paper-towel underwear.” What matters most is a garment’s ability to trans- port moisture away from the body after it’s been wicked.
There isn’t government oversight of marketing claims for ski apparel. “This is where consumers get left out in the cold,” Cocona’s Haggquist says. Testing standards organizations, such as ASTM, ensure that everyone uses the same protocols.
But not everyone agrees on the best tests. Sometimes tests developed for other industries are used by apparel makers. One example is the ASTM E96 test, which was developed to measure vapor trans- mission in building materials. With a combination of proper design and testing, we will see better options for winter wear in the future.
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 175
other problems occurred, they would have to be referred back to the product design engineers. Many times it took years to develop a new product, and the result was processes that built poorly functioning products. DFM methods are designed to eliminate the over-the-wall syndrome and radically reduce design cycle times.
Many firms use enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems to integrate financial, plan- ning, and control systems into a single architecture. As a result, there is an effort in the business world to include computerized design systems in these ERP systems. An important component of such design software is the product data management (PDM) tool. PDM is a general exten- sion of techniques commonly known as engineering data management, document management , and other similar names. PDM helps manage both product data and the product development process by tracking the masses of data needed to design, manufacture, support, and maintain products. It does this in part using a bill of materials that is later transferred to manufacturing, planning, and control systems after the design phase of the product life cycle. 10
Design for Maintainability
One of the major concerns with new products is ease of maintainability. It often seems cheaper to replace a product than to repair it. This certainly is true for inexpensive products such as elec- tric can openers, transistor radios, and other small appliances. However, the cost of repairing relatively expensive products such as personal computers, automobiles, and large appliances is also becoming prohibitive. Consider a broken video camcorder. A new, relatively inexpensive camcorder may cost $250. If the camcorder breaks, a repair may cost half to two-thirds that. The decision to repair is essentially an economic decision involving costs, benefits, and trade-offs. This decision becomes particularly difficult when the product life cycle is short. Suppose you owned a personal computer for the past few years. You purchased the computer for $1,000, and it satisfied your needs at the time. Now you realize that you need more memory, your sound card is inadequate, and you need a larger hard drive. If you go to a discount store, you can purchase the upgrades you need for about $500. At the same time, for a little more money you can pur- chase a new computer that has all the desired features as well as many others. For example, the new computer will be faster than your old computer. Should you spend $1,000 on a new com- puter or $500 to upgrade your old computer? One solution to this problem is design for maintain- ability. Design for maintainability concepts include
Components that are easily replaced
Components that are easily removed with standard tools
Adequate space to perform the maintenance function
Nondestructive disassembly
Safe maintenance
Available adequate owners’ manuals and documentation (e.g., wiring diagrams, help facil- ities, or videos showing how to perform minor repairs)
Many personal computer manufacturers include how-to videos in their memory that dem- onstrate maintenance functions such as adding memory, connecting interfaces, and other simple maintenance functions. Craftsman tractors sold by Sears include videos that demonstrate how to change oil, how to operate the tractor, and how to perform other service functions. The bottom line is that customers should be provided with the necessary information and ease of access to the product that allow for simple or preventive maintenance.
An important issue is ease of delivery of more serious maintenance. Many repairs can be performed only by trained professionals. Many personal computer companies offer at-home
10 Bourke, R. “PDM and ERP Continuing to Converge,” APICS: The Performance Advantage (August 1997): 66–67.
176 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
maintenance for their personal computers. It is common for auto repair facilities to offer rides and loaner cars for customer use. Car rental companies typically offer on-the-road repair and towing service when their cars break down. It is important to recognize that service is also a design issue. At the design phase, after-sale processes must be designed such that maintenance is received simply, rapidly, and cost effectively. Experience has shown that consumers are willing to pay more for products that are supported by outstanding service.
A recent trend in service is remote monitoring of products that diagnoses problems and dispatches repair people before breakdowns occur. BMW has experimented with this approach. One of the leaders in this area is Otis Elevator, with its Remote Elevator Montoring System (REM). REM tracks system function on elevators. The system diagnoses an emerging problem in an elevator and automatically makes a service call to a repair person. Often problems are fixed before elevator owners know that a problem has occurred.
DESIGNING FOR RELIABILITY
Reliable products are always available when you need them, and you can depend on them to work properly. Reliability, as it relates to products, results from the interaction of multiple com- ponents in a system. Quality Highlight 7-2 shows how a luxury product is designed to be reliable at Vuitton. Reliability has two dimensions, failure rate and time , both of which can be applied to components and to systems. Component reliability is defined as the propensity for a part to fail over a given time. System reliability refers to the probability that a system of components will perform the intended function over a specified product life. It is important to recognize the dif- ference between component reliability and system reliability. The levels of measurement are different for system and component reliability. When we talk of component reliability, we refer to a finite aspect of the overall product. System reliability is computed from the aggregation of multiple components. Reliability models are discussed in Chapter 13 .
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 7-2 Designing Reliable Luxury at Vuitton 11
www.louisvuitton.com
Behind a locked door in the basement of Louis Vuitton’s elegant Paris headquarters, a mechanical arm hoists a brown and tan handbag a half meter off the floor and drops it. The bag, loaded with an eight- pound weight, will be lifted and dropped, over and over again, for four days. This is a type of rapid-life- testing usually reserved for designing reliability into machinery and vehicles. Here it is being used on elegant handbags.
Vuitton has designed a high-tech torture chamber for testing its products. A piece of lab equip- ment bombards handbags with ultraviolet rays to test resistance to fading. Still another machine tests zippers by tugging them open and shutting them 5,000 times. There’s even a mechanized mannequin hand, with a Vuitton charm bracelet on its wrist, being shaken vigorously to make sure none of the charms falls off.
If you think about Louis Vuitton, you likely don’t think about robots beating up on bags. Likely, you think of waiflike supermodels or lithe Hollywood celebs toting Vuitton luggage to Palm Springs. However, to understand what makes Vuitton tick, you have to look behind the glittery façade and look closely at the world’s most profitable luxury moniker.
Vuitton focuses relentlessly on quality in design and performance. Remember that the robot makes sure that Vuitton rarely has to make good on its lifetime repair guarantee. The supply chain
11 Adapted from Matlack, C., “The Vuitton Machine,” BusinessWeek , (22 March, 2004): 98–102. Used with permission.
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 177
Reliability Analysis Tools
There are many ways to make designs more reliable. These methodologies include failure modes and effects analysis; fault-tree analysis; and failure modes, effects, and criticality analysis.
Failure Modes and Effects Analysis
Failure modes and effects analysis (FMEA) systematically considers each component of a system, identifying, analyzing, and documenting the possible failure modes within a system and the effects of each failure on the system. It is a bottom-up analysis beginning at the lowest level of detail to which the system is designed and works upward. The FMEA process results in a detailed description of how failures influence system performance and personnel safety. FMEA answers the question, “How do the systems or components fail?”
Failure modes and effects analysis was created by the aerospace industry in the 1960s and is used extensively in Six Sigma (see Chapter 14 ). An early application of FMEA occurred when Ford Motor Co. used it to analyze engineering design. Ever since, Ford has tried to refine FMEA through continued use in its operations, as many software applications have evolved recently that aid in the use of FMEA. Some benefits that can be derived through the use of FMEA include
1. Improvement of the safety, quality, and the reliability of products 2. Improvement of a company’s image and its competitiveness 3. Increased satisfaction from a user standpoint 4. Reduction in product development cost 5. Record of actions taken to reduce a product risk
There are five basic areas where FMEA can be applied: concept, process, design, service, and equipment.
Concept. FMEA is used to analyze a system or its subsystems in the conception of the design.
Process. FMEA is applied to analyze the assembly and manufacturing processes. Design. FMEA is used for analysis of products before mass production of the product starts.
Service. With respect to services, FMEA is used to test industry processes for failure prior to their release to customers.
Equipment. A company also can use FMEA to analyze equipment before the final purchase.
is rigorously controlled and no bag is ever discounted. Above all, there’s the efficiency of a finely tuned machine, fueled by ever-increasing productivity in design and manufacturing—and, as Vuitton grows bigger, the ability to step up advertising and global expansion without denting the bottom line.
Following are some examples of how attention to design detail sets the Vuitton bag apart:
• Zipper: Laboratory equipment randomly tests zippers by opening and closing them 5,000 times. • Production: Manufacturing methods adopted from automakers and other industries are boosting
productivity by 5% per year. • Handle Metal Ring: To cut costs, Vuitton pressured supplier of metal rings to improve production
efficiency. • Leather Trim: Vuitton uses hides from northern European cattle, which have fewer blemishes
from insect bites. • Price Tag: Forget bargains: Vuitton never holds sales and price increases are common.
178 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
How FMEA Works
As is shown in Figure 7-14 , failure modes and effects analysis uses a nine-step process:
1. The first FMEA step is to give each component in the system a unique identifier; this is so that none of the parts will be overlooked in the analysis.
2. In the second step, list all the functions each part of the system performs. This step requires you to develop a block diagram for the description of your design.
3. List the one or two failure modes for each function from the second step. The best descrip- tion of a failure mode is a short statement of how a function may fail to be performed. What a product does or does not do when it fails describes the failure mode.
4. The fourth step describes what effects each failure mode of the component will have, espe- cially the effects perceived by the user or operator. Analysis of the effects should follow a hierarchical order because any effect should be fairly detailed so that the severity of each effect can be judged. Some of these effects measure the consequence of failures on a com- ponent or part of a device, the whole system, the user, and/or the public.
5. Determine whether the failure will result in a potential hazard to personnel or the system. Then categorize how severe each hazard will be. There are four basic categories that haz- ards fall into: catastrophic, critical, marginal, and negligible.
6. Estimate the relative likelihood of occurrence for each failure. The likelihood of occur- rences is estimated using a 10-point scale and described in steps 4 and 5, ranging from highly unlikely (1) to very likely (10).
7. Estimate the ease with which the failure may be detected. If the failure takes so long to be detected that it becomes too late to replace or repair, the magnitude of the problem is likely to be much greater than if the failure can be easily detected.
8. Use the estimates from steps 5, 6, and 7 to identify the highest risks related to the system. 9. Decide what action will be taken to eliminate or reduce the highest risks in the system. The
most common decision made is to alter the design to reduce the likelihood of occurrence and failure severity or simply to bring about easy failure detection. Figure 7-15 shows an example of an FMEA form.
Fault-Tree Analysis
Fault-tree analysis (FTA) is an analytical tool that graphically renders the combinations of faults that lead to failure of a system. This technique is useful for describing and assessing the
1. Assign each component an identifier.
2. List functions for each part.
3. List one or two failure modes for each function.
4. Describe effects of each failure mode.
5. Determine hazard likelihood and categorize.
6. Estimate likelihood of failure.
7. Estimate failure detection.
8. Identify highest risks.
9. Eliminate or reduce highest risks. FIGURE 7-14 FMEA Steps
FIGURE 7-15 FMEA Form Source: FMEA Handbook, “Environmental and Safety Engineering” (Dearborn, MI: Ford Automotive Operations, 1995). Reprinted from Potential Failure Mode and Effects Analysis , 4th ed., 2008 Manual, with permission of DaimlerChrysler, Ford, and GM Supplier Quality Requirements Task Force.
Potential Failure Modes and Effects Analysis
(Concept FMEA) _X_System FMEA Number: (1) __Subsystem Page 1 of 1 __Component:000000/COMPLETE VEHICLE SYSTEM. Design Responsibility: (3) Prepared by: (4) Model Year/Vehicle(s): / (3) Key Date: (6) FMEA Date (Orig.): 94.06.06 (Rev.): 94.06.06 Core Team: (0)
Item C O D I c e Responsibility Action Results Potential Potential S a c t R. Recom- & Target S O D R. Failure Effect(s) of e s Potential Cause(s)/ u Current Design e P. mended Completion Actions Taken e c e P. Function Mode Failure v s Mechanism(s) Failure r Controls c N. Action(s) Date v c t N.
( 9 ) ( 10 ) ( 11 ) ( 14 ) ( 16 ) 0 ( 19 ) ( 20 ) ( 21 ) Enter a Enter the For each failure From the block diagram, Enter the analytical Enter the Enter Enter a brief system potential mode, list its determine if/how each method, test, or recommended —System design description of the function. failure consequences element can cause the technique used to design actions Dept —System action taken and Use the mode(s) for on: System failure mode. (The detect the cause intended to design its completion verb-noun the system —Other Systems cause will be a failure mode of the System reduce one or Eng —Target date. format. function. —The Vehicle of the element.) failure mode. more of the Completion date —The Customer If no detection Severity, If known, Describe the —Government Typical causes (element methods are Occurrence, Revised ( 22 ) —> enter the failure mode Regulations failure modes) will be: known, enter and/or Detection RPN Engineering in terms of —fails to operate “None identified ratings. After actions require- “loss of Severity ( 12 ) —operates prematurely at this time” have been taken, ments and function,” or —> —operates intermittently If no actions reestimate the constraints as the For each failure —fails to stop operating Detection ( 17 ) —> 0 can be listed, ratings for Severity, associated negative mode, rate the —loss of signal to next element Estimate the likeli- enter “None Occurrence, with each of the most serious hood the Detection at this time.” and Detection. function. function. effect. Enter Occurrence ( 15 ) —> method(s) will Enter the revised rating in Estimate the rate at which detect the cause <— ( 10 ) RPN ratings in column 12. a cause is expected to of the System Risk Priority the columns occur over the design failure mode. If Number to the right. Use Severity life of the element. several methods If no actions Rating Table are listed, enter are listed, for System Use Occurrence Rating the lowest (best) leave these FMEA. Table for System FMEA. rating. columns blank. If no information is Use the Detection available to estimate the Rating Table for Occurrence rating, enter System FMEA. a rating of 10. If no methods can <— ( 13 ) Reserved for be listed, enter future use. a rating of 10
179
180 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
events within a system. Such events can be either normal or abnormal, but it is their sequence and combination that are important. FTA shows the probabilities of systems failure caused by any event and is widely used in the aerospace, electronics, and nuclear industries. A fault tree is a qualitative model that also can be evaluated quantitatively. FTA is used for reliability, maintain- ability, and safety analysis and was used originally in 1961 at Bell labs to evaluate Minuteman Launch Control Systems to avoid inadvertent missile launches.
Failure Modes, Effects, and Criticality Analysis
Failure modes, effects, and criticality analysis (FMECA) is an extensive but simple method for identifying ways in which an engineered system could fail. As in FMEA, failures, effects, and causes are identified. FMECA rates failure modes by ranking each possible mode accord- ing to both the probabilities of its occurrence and the severity of its effects. The primary goal of FMECA is to develop priorities for corrective action based on estimated risk. FMECA is used to analyze a probable cause of a product failure, to determine how the problem affects a cus- tomer, to identify the probable manufacturing or assembly processes responsible, to identify which process control variable to focus on for prevention detection, and to quantify the effects on the customer.
Criticality in FMECA is important because it prioritizes how the design team should be spending its resources. In general, criticality refers to how often a failure will occur, how easy it is to diagnose, and whether it can be fixed. Criticality assessment is somewhat subjective because it depends on the viewpoint of a service or field engineer. This view is markedly different from the designer or marketing manager. All members of an interdisciplinary team should participate in ranking criticality so that their concerns are factored into rankings. As a design team considers the various failure modes in the ramifications, one or more of the team members fills out a struc- tured FMECA form that summarizes all that is involved in what can go wrong. In general, a design FMECA includes
1. A description of the product’s function 2. Listings of the potential failure modes 3. Potential effects each failure mode could have on the end user 4. Potential causes of each failure mode with the likelihood ranking for each 5. Preventive measures in place for firmly scheduling by the time production starts 6. Ranking of the effectiveness of each preventive measure 7. A ranking of the difficulty of detection 8. An estimate of the probability that the cause of a potential failure will be detected and cor-
rected before the product reaches the end user
Product Traceability and Recall Procedures
Although FMEA and FTA help predict where defects will occur and what their effects will be, from time to time unforeseen defects occur that can result in dangerous and costly results that can subject the firm to liability.
For example, one cool summer morning a young pilot was asked to fly some hunters over some extremely remote wilderness territory. The pilot was rather inexperienced at flying in these types of conditions; after all, backcountry flying is dangerous, and experience is hard to obtain. However, the temperature and weather conditions were perfect. The adventure proceeded with- out incident until the final leg of the trip over some of the most extreme country. The wind began to pick up and gusted to more than 100 miles per hour. The light aircraft had never experienced these types of winds before. The young pilot pulled out of the mountainous canyon to get well above the mountaintops. This caused the aircraft to pitch and roll, and the wind shear coming over the mountaintops stressed the plane. The plane’s vertical stabilizer was rendered useless by the powerful winds, but the team was able to return to the airport safely.
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 181
Subsequent investigation showed that an alloy structural support had been stressed to the breaking point in the plane’s vertical stabilizer. The plane’s manufacturer issued a recall of 1,200 planes fitted with the same special alloy in the vertical stabilizer. The problem occurred in one piece used in the manufacturing process. This piece had been produced by another vendor. An identification number allowed the plane manufacturer to track the purchase of this part back to its supplier. All aircraft built with the weak structural piece were recalled to replace the defective vertical stabilizer. Without proper identification techniques and sufficient tracking systems, poten- tially hazardous products could remain in use without any way of recalling or repairing them.
This characteristic is called product traceability . Product traceability and recall proce- dures are important aspects of product design. Because companies are liable for the products they create, it is important to be able to identify the origins of defective products or components through product traceability procedures.
In 1972, Congress created the Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) to protect citizens from unreasonable risks of injury and death. To avoid being listed on the CPSC list of hazardous products, a company must have a system in place for tracing components. When a recall is demanded by the CPSC, a company needs to narrow its recall to a particular identifica- tion (ID) number or product line. Therefore, a good ID system can help isolate where the break- down in the product occurred.
A major goal of product traceability and recall procedures is to be able to trace products with a minimum of cost. Product traceability also helps limit product liability relating to safety hazards.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS IN DESIGN
Currently, society demands much more from product designers than just high-quality products. Many manufacturers have turned to a more environmental form of manufacturing that offers positive returns on investment. Many companies, such as Siemens, Caterpillar, Xerox, Eastman Kodak, Hewlett Packard, and others, are using environmentally friendly forms of manufacturing.
The move to green manufacturing began in Germany with requirements for importers to remove packaging materials. Using a life-cycle approach to product design causes designers to focus not only on incoming materials, manufacturing processes, and customer use but also on the eventual disposal of the product. This life-cycle approach has led to practices known as design for reuse , design for disassembly , and design for remanufacture .
Design for reuse refers to designing products so they can be used in later generations of products. One example is the Kodak FunSaver camera. 12 Initially, the camera was made so it could be disposed of after use. Although Kodak had experimented with recycling the cameras, the cameras really ended up in landfills. Kodak received a wake-up call when it received the dreaded “wastemaker of the year” award for the disposable cameras, and it responded by con- verting the design from disposable cameras to recyclable cameras. Initially, the camera had been ultrasonically welded. Through design-for-disassembly processes, the camera case is now made so it snaps apart easily. There is great potential for reuse of products. Consider that currently two computers are discarded for every three computers purchased. The method for designing for reuse involves analyzing existing products for materials, identifying other uses for these materi- als, and developing a disassembly process to sort out these materials. This is good business for the producers of personal computers because if chemicals used in making PCs were to find their way into groundwater, the manufacturers could be held liable. The resulting costs could be in the billions of dollars.
The principles for design for disassembly include using fewer parts and fewer materials, using snap-fits instead of screws, making assembly efficient and improving disposal, using design for disassembly experts in concurrent design teams, and eliminating waste through better design.
12 Office of Technology Assessment, Green Products by Design (Washington, DC.: Congress of the United States, 2005).
182 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Key Terms Change Complementary products Component reliability Computer-aided design
(CAD) system Computer-aided inspection
(CAI) Computer-aided testing
(CAT) Concurrent engineering Consumer Product Safety
Commission (CPSC) Criticality Customer future needs
projection Design for disassembly
Design for manufacture (DFM)
Design for remanufacture Design for reuse Design review Engineering analysis Enterprise resource
planning (ERP) systems Failure modes and effects
analysis (FMEA) Failure modes, effects, and
criticality analysis (FMECA)
Fault-tree analysis (FTA) Final product definition Geometric modeling
Green manufacturing Group technology House of quality Interference checking Kano Quality/Design Model Manufacturing system
design Multiuser CAD systems Over-the-wall syndrome Product data management
(PDM) Product design and
evaluation Product idea generation Product manufacture,
delivery, and use
Product marketing and supply chain preparation
Product traceability Quality function
deployment (QFD) Recall procedures System reliability Technology development
for process selection Technology feasibility
statement Technology selection for
product development Variety
Discussion Questions 1. Product idea generation initiates the process of designing a product by generating ideas from external
and internal sources. What are some examples of external and internal sources that are used in this process?
2. Discuss the concept of consumer future needs projection. Does a firm that excels in this area have a competitive advantage? Explain your answer.
3. What is a technology feasibility statement? Why is it important? 4. Briefly describe the role of computer-aided design (CAD) in the product design process. How has
CAD changed the way that product designers go about their jobs? 5. Describe the concept of concurrent engineering. How does concurrent engineering improve the prod-
uct design process? 6. The product life cycle for many products is getting shorter. In what ways does this trend complicate the
product design process? Can you think of any advantages to shorter product life cycles for firms that have exemplary product design processes?
7. What is the role of complementary products in managing the product life cycle? 8. What is meant by design for manufacture?
Summary As life cycles for products become shorter, a focus on quality in the product design process is necessary to remain competitive. Many of the dimensions of quality we discussed in Chapters 1 and 2 are addressed in the design phase of the product life. By focusing on issues such as main- tainability, assembly, reliability, and product traceability, we are able to continually improve our ability to make things.
We have said that you should design products so they are easy to build. By simplifying design processes (through concurrent design teams, by standardizing, and through the use of modular designs), we make products that are more reliable.
Companies have implemented these processes with great results. These results have facili- tated huge increases in production capacity, coupled with a reduction in cost. These cost savings do not always result in higher profits. As we have seen, the costs of computer chips dropped consistently. However, a company that does not become better at design will simply not be com- petitive in the future.
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 183
9. The design for maintainability concept states that a product should be designed in a way that makes it easy for a consumer to maintain it. What product attributes make it easy for a product to be serviced or maintained?
10. What is the over-the-wall syndrome? How can the over-the-wall syndrome be avoided? 11. Define component reliability and system reliability. What is the major difference between these two
concepts? 12. Describe the concept of failure modes and effects analysis (FMEA). What is the end result of an FMEA
analysis? What are some of the ancillary benefits that can be derived through engaging in FMEA? 13. What is the primary purpose of conducting a fault-tree analysis? 14. Describe a method for identifying ways in which an engineered system could fail. What is the primary
goal of this method of analysis? 15. Discuss the importance of product traceability and recall procedures. Why is product traceability con-
sidered an important consumer safety issue? 16. What environmental considerations are important for product designers? Do you believe that environ-
mental considerations will become more important or less important in the future? Explain your answer. 17. Compare the job of a product designer 20 years ago to the job of a product designer today. In your
opinion, what has been the single most significant technological advancement that has changed the job of a product designer?
Problems 1. Flowchart the design and production processes for writing a book such as Managing Quality: Integrat-
ing the Supply Chain. Use the standard process for designing products in the chapter. 2. Define key customer requirements for a pen. Next, define key technical requirements for the pen. Create
a matrix showing the relationships between technical and customer requirements using the QFD format. 3. Define key customer requirements for an automobile windshield. Next, define key technical require-
ments. Create a matrix showing the relationships between technical and customer requirements using the QFD format.
4. For the QFD Problem 4 Matrix, compute the a. Customer requirements absolute weight. b. Technical requirements absolute weight and factor. c. Technical requirements relative weight and factor. d. Which design and technical factors should be emphasized? Why?
A
B
C
D
E
Difficulty
Target
Absolute weight
Absolute factor
Relative weight
Relative factor
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Technical Requirements
1 2
2
3
3
4 5
5
24 4
27 3
12 2
11 1
1 2 3 4 5
Im po
rt an
ce
C om
pe tit
iv e
A ss
es sm
en t
Ta rg
et
Sa le
s po
in t
A bs
ol ut
e w
ei gh
t
Problem 4 Matrix
184 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
5. For the QFD Problem 5 Matrix, compute the a. Customer requirements absolute weight. b. Technical requirements absolute weight and factor. c. Technical requirements relative weight and factor. d. Which design and technical factors should be emphasized? Why?
6. For the QFD Problem 6 Matrix, compute the a. Customer requirements absolute weight. b. Technical requirements absolute weight and factor. c. Technical requirements relative weight and factor. d. Which design and technical factors should be emphasized? Why?
A
B
C
D
E
Difficulty
Target
Absolute weight
Absolute factor
Relative weight
Relative factor
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Technical Requirements
1 2
2
3
2
4 5
1
18 1
25 5
23 4
12 3
1 2 3 4 5
Im po
rt an
ce
C om
pe tit
iv e
A ss
es sm
en t
Ta rg
et
Sa le
s po
in t
A bs
ol ut
e w
ei gh
t
Problem 5 Matrix
A
B
C
D
E
Difficulty
Target
Absolute weight
Absolute factor
Relative weight
Relative factor
C us
to m
er R
eq ui
re m
en ts
Technical Requirements
1 2
1
3
6
4 5
4
29 5
29 3
14 4
22 2
1 2 3 4 5
Im po
rt an
ce
C om
pe tit
iv e
A ss
es sm
en t
Ta rg
et
Sa le
s po
in t
A bs
ol ut
e w
ei gh
t
Problem 6 Matrix
Chapter 7 • Quality and Innovation in Product and Process Design 185
7. What are important design elements for a pair of pants? a. Define the customer requirements. b. Define technical requirements. c. Using the QFD format, show the relationships (with strengths, i.e., 1, 3, or 9) between a and b
above. 8. Using the format in Figure 7-15 , develop an FMEA for a pair of women’s panty hose.
CASES
Case 7-1 Keeping Apple’s iPhone Competitive 13 www.apple.com
The past several years have seen an increase in smart- phone ownership by cellphone users. In its infancy, few companies produced the smartphone, such as RIM’s Blackberry and Motorola. However, the market is getting crowded. Still, Apple’s introduction of the iPhone changed the industry. The purpose of a smartphone has shifted from e-mail and business to apps and functionality.
The cellphone industry must be in tune with the customer. Apple attempts to incorporate popular fea- tures in its designs. The iPhone includes Apple staples of app capability and interfacing with other Apple prod- ucts. The iPhone is operated using a touchscreen and plays music and video. Like other smartphones, the iPhone can manage e-mail accounts.
With a new generation introduction, customers expect improvements to the features. Recent improve- ments include front and back cameras for video confer- ences. Including dual cameras in the design required Apple to create new software for the video conferenc- ing. This feature is only available between iPhones, but Apple hopes to expand to other cellphone users. Cam- era quality in phones is improving as people rely on them more than handhelds. Knowing this is important to some customers, a reviewer of the iPhone com- mented, “It isn’t the best cellphone camera I’ve tested, but it is a big improvement.” This is an example of the
trade-offs that may occur in product design. With so many features to incorporate, it may not be possible for a company to have the best for each. A company must decide which areas to focus on in the design.
The iPhone has addressed other areas of cell- phone design. Apple claims that the iPhone is the world’s thinnest smartphone and sports the world’s highest-resolution smartphone screen. The high-resolution screen helps compensate for its smallish screen. Talk- time battery life has been increased. New multitasking software manages apps to reduce battery drain. Battery life is a concern for all cellphone designs.
The iPhone incorporates some features over which Apple has limited control. Facebook, Twitter, and Pandora are popular apps among customers. Incor- porating these features requires limiting battery con- sumption, but allowing for frequent updates. Some users want to be constantly connected to their social networks. Apple’s multitasking feature addresses some of these issues but may still disappoint some users.
With all of the care and attention a new product receives, it still isn’t perfect. The iPhone had a famous “reception bar” bug that showed the wrong level of sig- nal reception. For Apple, there is still a need to improve iPhone design. Even with its limitations, Apple’s iPhone continues to push the limits of smartphone design.
Discussion Questions
1. The case discusses the issues of trade-offs in design. What are some smartphone trade-offs? Why are these important to consider in design.
2. Choose another product besides a smartphone. What are some important trade-offs for that prod- uct design?
3. How should Apple evaluate the “quality” of its iPhone?
4. How could Apple improve its design processes for the iPhone?
13 Mossber, W., “Thinner, Faster, Smarter iPhone Raises the Stakes” Wall Street Journal , 20 June 2010.
186 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Case 7-2 Nucor Corporation: Producing Quality Steel by Stressing Sound Management Practices Nucor Corporation: www.nucor.com
Nucor Corporation, headquartered in Charlotte, North Carolina, is the largest manufacturer of steel and steel products in the United States. The company received a great deal of attention because of its impressive perfor- mance in an industry plagued by a multitude of prob- lems, especially in recent years. Since the 1970s, Nucor pioneered the minimill concept, which is a method of making steel by melting scrap metal in electric arc fur- naces at a fraction of the cost of conventional steelmak- ing. Nucor is admired for its quality products, its state-of-the-art manufacturing processes, and its industry- leading productivity ratios.
It is difficult to find a single reason that explains Nucor’s success. Although the company has recently made key acquisitions and has modern facilities and equipment, competitors that have the same level of tech- nology do not fare as well. What Nucor does have that is unique is a set of sound management principles and a somewhat novel approach to employee relations. Although Nucor is a $4.8-billion-per-year company, there are only four management layers between the CEO and frontline employees, and the general managers on the plant floor make the day-to-day decisions. Rank-and- file employees are involved in devising methods to improve operations. The company has a very egalitarian culture. There are no company cars, company planes, assigned parking spaces, hunting lodges, or other indica- tions of status. All the employees wear the same color hard hat (with the exception of maintenance workers and visitors, who must be easily recognizable in case of an emergency), have the same group insurance program, have the same holidays, and have the same vacation plan.
There are other areas in which Nucor is distinct. The company has a well-developed employee incentive plan that aligns the interests of the employees with the interests of the firm. The typical millworker at Nucor
receives a base pay that is slightly below the industry standard, but the firm’s bonus plan is very generous when the company is doing well. Two distinctive fea- tures of Nucor’s bonus system are that it is all written down and is totally objective, based on firm perfor- mance criteria. There is no subjectivity involved. If the firm reaches certain performance levels, a bonus will be paid, period. With bonuses figured in, Nucor employees typically lead the steel industry in terms of average pay. Yet the company’s total cost per ton of steel produced is lower than that of other integrated producers.
In return for the generous compensation package, Nucor holds its employees to a high standard. Decision making is pushed down to the factory floor in many instances, requiring mental toughness and continuous education on the part of the company’s employees. The company also asks its employees to be prompt and fully engaged in their jobs. For example, if an employee is late to work, he or she loses his or her bonus for the day. If the employee is more than 30 minutes late, the bonus is lost for a week. In return for this level of employee commitment, Nucor has not laid off a single employee for lack of work in 20 years. A very unusual indication of what Nucor thinks of its employees is evidenced in the company’s Annual Report for 2006 14 (and in many previous years). The name of each of the company’s 10,600 employees is written on the front and back cover of the Annual Report. Nucor produces high-quality products by stressing sound management techniques. Commenting on this issue in a book about Nucor, Jeffery L. Roengen wrote, “The amazing thing about Nucor’s success is that it is so simple: Give employees a stake in the company’s growth; focus on the business at hand; keep red tape and bureaucracy to a minimum.” Apparently, this formula has continued to work for Nucor.
14 Nucor Annual Report, 2006.
Discussion Questions
1. This chapter has emphasized process design. At Nucor, do human resources processes affect prod- uct quality?
2. How do Nucor’s management practices affect its ability to produce high-quality products? Make your answer as substantive as possible.
3. Would you enjoy working at Nucor? Why or why not?
Encouraging employees to solve customer problems and eliminate the source of complaints allows them to be “nice,” and customers treat them better in return. Not just customers but also employees want to
continue their relationship with the business.
—Frederick Reichheld and W. Earl Sasser 1
187
High-quality service is essential for competitiveness and can even improve employee satisfaction. However, service, like quality, is a multidimensional term. To provide high-quality service, we need a profound understanding of the needs, wants, and desires of the customer and an understanding of who the customer is.
Quality service is not only an imperative for competitiveness but also a sign of quality maturity. As we have discussed previously, even manufacturing firms—after reliability, confor- mance, design, and other requirements have been met—eventually focus on service throughout the supply chain. In today’s economy, service still is a major differentiator that allows firms to beat competitors in the marketplace. 2
Figure 8-1 shows the power of satisfied customers. If customers are satisfied, they will be loyal. Revenue streams will increase—as will profits. If a credit card customer leaves after one year, the credit card firm will lose money. For example, for every dollar lost in year one of card membership, 60 cents is made in year two and the profits grow as time passes. Profit per cus- tomer for the laundry industry increases steadily year after year as well. This principle is the same for other service industries.
In this chapter we discuss services in general first and then services from a quality perspec- tive. Tools such as the SERVQUAL, gap analysis, and services blueprinting will be developed. The central theme of this chapter is to understand customers’ needs and to use that understanding to design services that will satisfy customers.
1 Reichheld, F., and Sasser, E., “Zero Defections: Quality Comes to Services,” Harvard Business Review (September– October 1990): 105–113. 2 Heskett, J. L., et al., “Putting the Service-Profit Chain to Work,” Harvard Business Review (March–April 1989): 164–174.
C H A P T E R 8
Designing Quality Services
188 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SERVICES AND MANUFACTURING
In Chapter 1 we talked about the multidimensional nature of quality. If quality is multidimen- sional for manufactured products, it will be more so for services. Understanding some of the differences between manufacturing and services helps to design useful approaches to quality improvement in services. Using a contingency perspective, we understand that the nature of services causes us to approach service quality improvement from a different direction from manufacturing.
Services are distinguished from manufacturing on several dimensions. First, many service attributes are intangible . This means that they cannot be inventoried or carried in stock over long periods of time. However, all services have some tangible aspects as well. The outputs of ser- vices are also heterogeneous . This means that for many companies, no two services are exactly the same. Consider, for instance, an advertising firm. No two advertising campaigns are alike. Customer requirements are different, and different campaigns are launched for different custom- ers according to their needs. A third factor is that production and consumption of services often occur simultaneously . If you hire someone to mow your grass, you’ll receive the service exactly at the same time it is produced.
The term service is very broad and covers many diverse industries, such as hotels, hospi- tals, financial services, and even prisons. Are financial services distinctly different from trans- portation, health care, or law firms? Certainly, there are similarities among the problems faced by these different categories of firms. However, there are also many dissimilarities.
One useful distinction between services and manufacturing centers on the aspect of cus- tomer contact . Customers tend to be more involved in the production of services than they are in production of goods. For instance, you probably have never seen anything you own during its manufacturing stage. In fact, many of the products you own were manufactured overseas. How- ever, you probably are actively involved in the production of services you receive. If you work for a firm that hires a consultant, you will work closely with the consultant as he or she provides the services you purchased. When you receive a haircut, you are actively involved in the service by providing information and sitting still. In many restaurants it is not uncommon for the cus- tomers to fill their own drinks. This is called customer coproduction .
$1 1.15 1.33 1.54
1.78
1 2 3
Year
4 5
0
A vg
. P ro
fi t p
er C
us to
m er
0
A vg
. P ro
fi t p
er C
us to
m er
$(1)
0
.60
1
.83
2
.86
3
Year
.96
4
1.01
5
Credit Card Industrial Laundry
FIGURE 8-1 Profit Growth over Time Based on F. Reichheld and E. Sasser, “Zero Defections: Quality Comes to Services,” Harvard Business Review (September–October 1990): 106. Copyright 1990 by the Harvard Business School Publishing Corporation. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 189
Because customers are actively involved in producing the services they consume, they cre- ate problems for service providers. For example, the time required to serve different customers can vary widely, making it difficult to plan capacity. The varying demands of customers also contribute to process variability that makes quality production of services difficult. Therefore, even though customers are the reason for the existence of services firms, they also make provid- ing good service difficult.
The good news for customers is that by being actively involved in the production of the service, they can exert control over the service provider and achieve customization. This control can be manifested in a variety of different ways. For instance, if you have never visited the pro- ducer of a food product you purchase, you may not be aware of many issues concerning the products, such as sanitation or environmental pollution. However, you are not likely to remain a customer of a restaurant that is unclean or creating environmental problems. As a result of this greater customer control, service facilities, processes, and interactions must be designed in a way that promotes a positive encounter with the customer.
Internal versus External Services
An aspect of services that affects the definition of quality is whether a service is internal or exter- nal. External services are those whose customers pay the bills. Internal services are in-house services such as data processing, printing, and mail. Typically, these services are separate from the external customer. However, customer service to internal customers is very important to internal service because their services often can be outsourced. There is a trend in companies to outsource internal services. In a sense, this presents a competitive pressure on internal services. Although internal and external services may be very different, they do have many similarities. In both cases, competitive pressures can result in the possible loss of customers.
Voluntary versus Involuntary Services
Another way services differ is by being voluntary or involuntary. Voluntary services are ser- vices that we actively seek out and employ of our own accord. Generally, we research a voluntary service, such as a gas station, a restaurant, or a hotel, and have certain expectations when we engage its services. Even doctors often provide many voluntary services because patients can choose among different doctors to some extent.
The quintessential example of an involuntary service is a prison. Other involuntary ser- vices include hospitals, the IRS, the police department, the fire department, and other services that you do not choose. If you have the chance to engage this type of service at some point, you likely will have vague expectations about the experience. It is generally more difficult to achieve high levels of customer satisfaction in involuntary services. For example, does anyone really enjoy visiting a hospital or a dental clinic? A customer service survey would be laughable for a county jail. Yet employees of these organizations often desire to provide better service to the patrons. For example, many IRS agents are involved in quality improvement activities. Certainly, our perceptions and expectations of service quality can be affected by whether the service is voluntary or involuntary.
How Are Service Quality Issues Different from Those of Manufacturing?
We’ve identified three major realities in services that affect the approaches to quality adopted by service providers; these are intangibility, simultaneous production and consumption, and cus- tomer contact. Not surprisingly, they lead us to the major differences between services and man- ufacturing when it comes to quality.
Because services’ attributes can be intangible, it is sometimes difficult to obtain hard data relating to services. In manufacturing, dimensions such as height, weight, and width are avail- able for measurement. Conformance to these measurements implies a certain dimension of
190 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
quality. However, in services, such measurable dimensions are often unavailable. For this reason, many services organizations that use quality control charts encounter difficulty in using them, or they use them incorrectly. This is not to say that control charts cannot be used in services. How- ever, compared with manufacturing, their use in services is quite low. Generally speaking, time (such as cycle time or response time) is a primary measurement available in service environments.
Simultaneous production and consumption of services means that you have to do it right the first time. You can’t easily inspect and rework defects in a hair salon the way you can in manufacturing.
Customer contact leads to an increase in variability in the process. This leads to a high degree of customization in services as well as great variability in the time required to perform services. In manufacturing, repetitive tasks are easily measured, and cycle times are generally consistent. When customers are intimately involved in processes, there is much more customiza- tion and much more variability than in manufacturing.
Services design, as is discussed in this chapter, is also very different from design in manu- facturing. Because services involve intangibles, warranty or repair processes are not as important as recovery or reimbursement processes (see A Closer Look at Quality 8-1 ). Also, the design of the services must take into account such variables as customer moods and feelings because these affect customer perceptions of service quality.
Product liability issues in services are very different from manufacturing. Whereas in manufacturing liability issues center around safety concerns, in services liability issues often relate to malpractice , which refers to the professionalism of the service provider and whether reasonable measures were taken to ensure the customer’s well-being. However, services also may have liability issues. In the Rocky Mountains, ski areas are sued regularly by customers
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 8-1 Service Warranties: Profitable or a Rip-off—You Decide 3
Here’s a secret one of the nation’s largest consumer electronics retailers doesn’t want you to know: Many times, they make more money off service contracts than they do selling products. Best Buy Co. isn’t banking on sales of TVs, computers, and DVD players to make profits. They are counting on the service contracts to make them profitable.
Just look at the numbers. At Best Buy, service contracts are 4% of sales but provide 45% of profits. Before bankruptcy at Circuit City, the numbers were 3.3% and 100%! The profit margins on these contracts are between 50% and 60%. If you spend $400 on a service contract, Best Buy keeps $240 itself and gives $160 to the insurer. As profitable as these are, it is interesting that Walmart has been slow to jump aboard. However, unlike Best Buy, they don’t have as many salespeople to pitch these contracts.
As service contracts have become more profitable, Best Buy has cut back on disclosure. The company no longer reports its warranty profits separately. Best Buy’s spokesperson says the products and contracts should be seen as inseparable.
So, as a consumer, when do service contracts make sense? Most often, the correct answer is “Never!” Typically, only 20% goes to repair or replacement of products. That’s why consumer organiza- tions generally counsel against service contracts. According to one consumer advocate, “The worst rip- off is on appliances because they have gotten so reliable.”
Consumer Reports cites four products for which contracts might make sense—these are tread- mills, elliptical trainers, plasma TVs, and laptop computers. Remember, most products come with man- ufacturer warranties. Many times, extended warranties can be purchased more cheaply directly from the manufactuer.
3 Adapted from Symonds, W. “The Warranty Windfall,” BusinessWeek (20 December, 2004): 84–89.
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 191
who are injured. In many states, laws protect ski areas from such lawsuits by limiting liability for injuries.
Services do not have as long a history of quality practice as does manufacturing. Although many quality techniques such as control charts have been adopted by services companies, this trend is still new. Certainly, as time passes, more quality techniques are being developed specifi- cally for services. For example, a new tool is emerging for service supply chains known as pro- cess chain network (PCNP diagrams).
How Are Service Quality Issues Similar to Manufacturing?
For both manufacturing and service firms, the customer is the core of the business, and customer needs provide the major input to design. By focusing on the customer, many manufacturers and services firms have come to view themselves as service providers. Companies from Harley- Davidson to Hewlett Packard have spent extraordinary amounts of time designing services for their customers.
WHAT DO SERVICES CUSTOMERS WANT?
In Chapter 1 we considered the different quality dimensions relating to services. These were
Tangibles
Reliability
Responsiveness
Assurance
Empathy
Parasuraman, Zeithamel, and Berry 4 provided this list of dimensions of service quality after extensive research in a number of services sectors, and they have become widely accepted. How- ever, this does not mean that your particular services industry does not include other dimensions. Therefore, the adoption of these dimensions in your service should include a careful consider- ation of the applicability of these and other dimensions.
As in any industry, the concept of leadership is one that Parasuraman, Zeithamel, and Berry believe is the key to success. However, they define this leadership role in a way that is quite interesting. The key aspects of a leader in services are given in Table 8-1 .
First, a leader has a service vision . Such leaders really view service quality as the force underlying profitability and business success. When selecting strategies for improvement, lead- ers see quality as the winning strategy. Such a vision can be translated into action and excitement for others in the company. To win in services, a firm must develop a passion for service quality within the entire workforce. When there is intense interaction between customers and service providers, the attitude of employees is the key element in achieving service success. Active and involved leadership is very important to attaining this important organizational attribute.
Services leaders have high standards . In services, you will notice that some firms are better equipped and maintained than others. Sometimes this is evident in the small details. Some doctors’ offices have a better selection of magazines than others; some restaurants are more comfortable
4 Zeithamel, V., Parasuraman, A., and Berry, L., Delivering Quality Service (New York: Free Press, 1990).
TABLE 8-1 Attributes of Services Leaders
Service vision High standards In-the-field leadership style
192 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
than competitors; some grocers have a better selection of products; the list goes on and on. Those things don’t happen by magic. They are the result of a leader with high standards and a focus on details. Have you noticed that some professors come to class impeccably prepared and others appear somewhat disorganized? This is so because the student/customer-oriented professor has higher standards for preparation and presentation than other professors. Think about yourself in a work situation. Do you provide a high level of service that reflects a high standard?
Outstanding services leaders have an in-the-field style of leadership . Because there is so much contact with the customer in a service system, the field is where the action is. Sam Skaggs, the founder of American Stores Corporation in Salt Lake City, Utah, was famous for stopping by his stores to make sure that things were in order. He viewed this as an important way of keeping the management on its toes. If Skaggs showed up at a single store in Kansas City, Missouri, for example, the manager immediately contacted all the other managers in town to give them a “heads up” that Skaggs was in town. Too often owners can become isolated from their busi- nesses. By being in the field, they gain a better understanding of the business and how to serve the customer. Quality Highlight 8-1 shows how Ritz-Carlton uses a gold standard to keep its managers in touch with its customers.
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 8-1 Ritz-Carlton Hotels 5
www.ritzcarlton.com
The Ritz-Carlton hotel company is a success in one of the economy’s most logistically complex service businesses. Targeting primarily industry executives, meeting and corporate travel planners, and affluent business travelers, the Atlanta-based company manages more than 60 luxurious hotels that pursue the goal of being the very best in each market. Ritz-Carlton does so on the strength of a comprehensive service quality program that is integrated into marketing and business objectives.
Hallmarks of the program include participatory executive leadership, thorough information gath- ering, coordinated planning execution, and a trained workforce that is empowered to satisfy customers. Quality planning begins with the president, the CEO, and the 13 senior executives who make up the corporate steering committee. This group, which doubles as the senior quality management team, meets weekly to review the quality of products and services, satisfaction, market growth and development, organizational indicators, profits, and competitive status. Each year executives devote about one-quarter of their time to quality-related matters.
The company’s business plan demonstrates the value placed on goals for quality products and services. Quality goals draw heavily on consumer requirements derived from extensive research by the travel industry and the company’s customer reaction data, focus groups, and surveys. The plan relies on a management system designed to avoid the variability of service delivery traditionally associated with hotels. Processes are well defined and documented at all levels of the company.
Key products and service requirements of the travel consumer have been translated into Ritz- Carlton gold standards, which include a credo, three steps of service, and 20 “Ritz-Carlton basics.” Each employee is expected to understand and adhere to the standards with defined processes for solving guests’ problems as well as detailed grooming, housekeeping, safety, and efficiency standards. Com- pany studies prove that this emphasis is on the mark, paying dividends to customers and, ultimately, to Ritz-Carlton.
The corporate motto is “ladies and gentlemen serving ladies and gentlemen.” To provide superior service, Ritz-Carlton trains employees with a thorough orientation, followed by on-the-job training, and then job certification. Ritz-Carlton values are reinforced continuously by daily “line-ups,” frequent rec- ognition for extraordinary achievement, and a performance appraisal based on expectations explained during the orientation, training, and certification processes.
5 NIST, Profiles of Baldrige Winners, 2011.
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 193
SERVQUAL
An important tool developed by Parasuraman, Zeithamel, and Berry for assessing services qual- ity is SERVQUAL . The SERVQUAL survey has been used by many firms and is an off-the- shelf approach that can be used in many services situations. The SERVQUAL instrument, a survey, has many advantages. Among these are the following:
• It is accepted as a standard for assessing different dimensions of services quality. • It has been shown to be valid for a number of service situations. • It has been demonstrated to be reliable , meaning that different readers interpret the ques-
tions similarly. • Each instrument is parsimonious in that they have only 22 items. This means that it can be
filled out quickly by customers and employees. • Finally, it has a standardized analysis procedure to aid both interpretation and results.
One of the benefits of statistical quality control (SQC) is that it is an accepted procedure for assessing process variability. One of the comforts of implementing SQC is knowing that many other firms have used this approach and benefited from it. Although the SERVQUAL sur- vey is not as widely used as SQC, it is a standardized approach to gathering information about customer perceptions of service quality. As such, it provides a base, or a means, to get started in assessing customer perceptions of quality.
Expectations
The SERVQUAL survey has two parts: customer expectations and customer perceptions . Before discussing SERVQUAL expectations, we should first discuss the reasons for assessing both expectations and perceptions.
Let’s say that you desire to improve service quality along some dimension—either tangi- bles or reliability. The natural question is “Which will create the greater improvement to the system for service?” If we understand both customer expectations and perceptions, we can assess the gap in these areas. For example, if customers have higher expectations for tangibles than for reliability, and customers perceive tangibles as poor, then a large gap or disconnect exists between the expected and delivered performance on tangibility. Given that this gap is larger, the greater potential for increasing customer satisfaction lies in addressing tangibles first. This type of anal- ysis provides a good way to understand how best to improve customer satisfaction. Figure 8-2 shows the 22 survey items for expectations. The wording of the statements in the expectations survey relates to a generic firm in an industry that interests you. For example, if you were assess- ing customer service for a given grocery store, you might first administer the expectations survey
To ensure that problems are resolved quickly, workers are required to act at first notice regardless of the type of problem or customer complaint. All employees are empowered to do whatever it takes to provide “instant pacification.” No matter what their normal duties are, other employees must assist if aid is requested by a co-worker who is responding to a guest’s complaint or wish.
Much of the responsibility for ensuring high-quality guest services and accommodations rests with the employees. Surveyed annually to ascertain their levels of satisfaction and understanding of quality standards, workers are keenly aware that excellence in guest services is a top hotel and personal priority. At each level in the company—from corporate leaders to managers and employees in individual work areas—teams are charged with setting objectives and devising action plans, which are reviewed by the corporate steering committee. In addition, each hotel has a “quality leader” who serves as a resource and advocate as teams and workers develop and implement their quality plans.
Teams and other mechanisms cultivate employee commitment. For example, each work area is covered by three teams responsible for setting quality-certification standards for each position, solving problems, and planning strategy.
194 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
FIGURE 8-2 SERVQUAL Expectations Survey Source: Based on V. Zeithamel, A. Parasuraman, and L. Berry, “SERVQUAL: A Multiple-Item Scale for Measuring Customer Perceptions of Service Quality,” Journal of Retailing (Spring 1988): 12–40. Copyright Elsevier.
Strongly Disagree
Strongly Agree
1. Excellent ________ companies will have modern-looking equipment. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2. The physical facilities at excellent ________ companies will be visually appealing.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. Employees at excellent ________ companies will be neat-appearing. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4. Materials associated with the service (such as pamphlets or statements) will be visually appealing in an excellent ________ company.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5. When excellent ________ companies promise to do something by a certain time, they will do so.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6. When a customer has a problem, excellent ________ companies will show a sincere interest in solving it.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7. Excellent ________ companies will perform the service right the first time.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8. Excellent ________ companies will provide their services at the time they promise to do so.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
9. Excellent ________ companies will insist on error-free records. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10. Employees in excellent ________ companies will tell customers exactly when services will be performed.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11. Employees in excellent ________ companies will give prompt service to customers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12. Employees in excellent ________ companies will always be willing to help customers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13. Employees in excellent ________ companies will never be too busy to respond to customers’ requests.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14. The behavior of employees in excellent ________ companies will instill confidence in customers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
15. Customers of excellent ________ companies will feel safe in their transactions.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
16. Employees in excellent ________ companies will be consistently courteous with customers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17. Employees in excellent ________ companies will have the knowledge to answer customers’ questions.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
18. Excellent ________ companies will give customers individual attention.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
19. Excellent ________ companies will have operating hours convenient to all their customers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
20. Excellent ________ companies will have employees who give customers personal attention.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
21. Excellent ________ companies will have the customer’s best interests at heart.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
22. The employees of excellent ________ companies will understand the specific needs of their customers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 195
to customers concerning a grocery store in general. Later, the perceptions survey might be administered to the customers of the particular grocery store. Table 8-2 shows the items that address specific service quality dimensions. The averaged scores for these dimensions provide SERVQUAL difference scores (demonstrated later).
Perceptions
The SERVQUAL perceptions survey shown in Figure 8-3 is administered to customers in the same way that the expectations survey was administered. Notice that the perceptions survey also
TABLE 8-2 SERVQUAL Items and Dimensions
Dimension Items
Tangibles 1–4 Reliability 5–9 Responsiveness 10–13 Assurance 14–17 Empathy 18–22
FIGURE 8-3 SERVQUAL Perceptions Survey Source: Based on V. Zeithamel, A. Parasuraman, and L. Berry, “SERVQUAL: A Multiple-Item Scale for Measuring Customer Perceptions of Service Quality,” Journal of Retailing (Spring 1988): 12–40. Copyright Elsevier.
Strongly Disagree
Strongly Agree
1. XYZ Co. has modern-looking equipment. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2. XYZ Co.’s physical facilities are visually appealing. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. XYZ Co.’s employees are neat-appearing. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4. Materials associated with the service (such as pamphlets or statements) are visually appealing at XYZ Co.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5. When XYZ Co. promises to do something by a certain time, it does so. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6. When you have a problem, XYZ Co. shows a sincere interest in solving it. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7. XYZ Co. performs the service right the first time. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8. XYZ Co. provides its services at the time it promises to do so. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
9. XYZ Co. insists on error-free records. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10. Employees in XYZ Co. tell you exactly when services will be performed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11. Employees in XYZ Co. give you prompt service. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12. Employees in XYZ Co. are always willing to help you. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13. Employees in XYZ Co. are never too busy to respond to your requests. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14. The behavior of employees in XYZ Co. instills confidence in you. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
15. You feel safe in your transactions with XYZ Co. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
16. Employees in XYZ Co. are consistently courteous with you. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17. Employees in XYZ Co. have the knowledge to answer your questions. 1 2 3 4 5 6
18. XYZ Co. gives you individual attention. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
19. XYZ Co. has operating hours convenient to all its customers. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
20. XYZ Co. has employees who give you personal attention. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
21. XYZ Co. has your best interests at heart. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
22. Employees of XYZ Co. understand your specific needs. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
196 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
contains 22 items that are matched with the same five service quality dimensions as the expecta- tions survey (the dimensions are listed in Table 8-2 ).
Gap Analysis
The SERVQUAL instrument is useful for performing what is called gap analysis . Because ser- vices are often intangible, gaps in communication and understanding between employees and customers have a serious negative effect on the perceptions of services quality. The model in Figure 8-4 shows the gaps that commonly occur and can affect the perceptions of services quality.
Each of the gaps in the model demonstrates differences in perceptions that can have a det- rimental effect on quality perceptions in services. The SERVQUAL survey instrument can be administered in a variety of ways that examine each of these gaps. For example, SERVQUAL can be used to explore differences in perceptions between customers, between managers, between managers and customers, and between employees. We briefly examine each of the different gaps in the next paragraphs.
Management perceptions
of customer
expectations
Expected service
Gap 1
Service quality
specifications
Management perceptions
of customer
expectations
Gap 2
Gap 3 Service quality
specifications
Service delivery
Gap 4Service delivery
External com- munications to customers
Gap 5 Perceived service
Expected service
FIGURE 8-4 Gaps 1–5
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 197
Gap 1 shows that there can be a difference between actual customer expectations and management’s idea or perception of customer expectations. As a customer, have you ever wanted to tell a service provider, “I don’t want you to do that; I want you to do something else!” It is very difficult for managers or employees to break out of the internal, process-oriented view of the business. Many times, improving processes does not equal improving customer service. To truly improve customer service, we must understand what the customer wants. The SERVQUAL instrument can be used to help in this understanding (see Figure 8-4 ).
Managers’ expectations of service quality may not match service quality specifications. This mismatch is demonstrated in gap 2 . Once managers truly understand what the customer wants, then a system can be developed to help provide exactly what the customer wants. Often, because firms do not specify customer requirements according to a well-defined process, there is no way to know whether customer specifications and management expectations are aligned.
Once services specifications have been established, the delivery of perfect services quality is still not guaranteed. Inadequate training, communication, and preparation of employees who interact with the customer, referred to as contact personnel , can lower the quality of service delivered. This mismatch is gap 3 .
Gap 4 shows the differences between services delivery and external communications with the customer. Companies influence customer expectations of services through word of mouth and through other media such as advertising. As a result, there could be a difference between what customers hear you say you are going to deliver as a service provider and what you actually deliver. Have you ever heard someone say, “They promised me one thing and gave me another.” This gap can lead to seriously negative customer perceptions of service quality.
Gap 5 is the difference between perceived and expected services, which we considered briefly when we introduced the SERVQUAL instrument. Think of the first time you dealt with your university admissions office or financial aid office. In many universities and colleges, these offices are well run and provide great service. However, in other colleges, their service is not so good. The difference between your expectations and your perceptions is directly related to your perception of service quality.
The key to closing gap 5 is to first close gaps 1 through 4 through thoughtful systems design, careful communication with the customer, and a workforce trained to provide consis- tently outstanding customer service. As long as these gaps exist, there will be lowered percep- tions of customer service.
Assessing Differences in Expectations and Perceptions by Using the Differencing Technique
Let’s suppose that you have administered both the expectations and the perceptions SERVQUAL instruments to your customers. Typically, you need a sample size of between 50 and 100 for each of the surveys (i.e., 50 < n < 100, where n is the sample size). The difference score for SERVQUAL is computed by the following steps. Separate the SERVQUAL dimensions as follows:
Dimension Items
Tangibles 1–4 Reliability 5–9 Responsiveness 10–13 Assurance 14–17 Empathy 18–22
For each respondent, sum your SERVQUAL scores for each set of items relating to a given dimension. Sum across the n respondents and divide the total by n .
198 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
EXAMPLE 8-1 SERVQUAL Differencing
Recently, a hospital administered the SERVQUAL survey to its customers as a way to determine where it should focus the training of its employees to best improve customer service. Fifty sur- veys were administered to customers before and after they were treated. In cases where the patients were in too much pain to fill out the perceptions survey after a procedure, they were asked to fill out the survey at the follow-up visit. On the basis of the 50 responses, the following averages were computed for each item:
Item Number Average Perception Average Expectation
1 6.5 6.3 2 6.4 6.4 3 6.9 6.2 4 6.8 6.8 5 3.2 5.2 6 3.4 6.1 7 3.3 6.3 8 3.5 5.9 9 3.6 6.6
10 5.2 2.4 11 5.5 2.2 12 5.6 2.4 13 5.8 2.6 14 4.1 3.2 15 5.5 3.3 16 4.3 3.4 17 4.1 3.2 18 4.2 3.5 19 2.6 6.5 20 2.8 6.6 21 2.5 6.4 22 2.4 6.3
Perception Averages
Average Perception
Average Expectation
Expectation Averages
Tangibles: 6.650 6.5 6.3 Tangibles: 6.425 (Avg. items 1–4) 6.4 6.4 (Avg. items 1–4) 6.9 6.2 6.8 6.8 Reliability: 3.400 3.2 5.2 Reliability: 6.020 (Avg. items 5–9) 3.4 6.1 (Avg. items 5–9) 3.3 6.3 3.5 5.9 3.6 6.6
On the basis of these means, the following overall averages were computed for the differ- ent dimensions:
(continued)
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 199
Perception Expected
Tangible difference ! 6.65 less 6.425 equals 0.225 Reliability difference ! 3.4 less 6.02 equals "2.62 Responsiveness difference ! 5.525 less 2.4 equals 3.125 Assurance difference ! 4.5 less 3.275 equals 1.225 Empathy difference ! 2.9 less 5.86 equals "2.96
Perception Averages
Average Perception
Average Expectation
Expectation Averages
Responsiveness: 5.525 5.2 2.4 Responsiveness: 2.400 (Avg. items 10–13) 5.5 2.2 (Avg. items 10–13) 5.6 2.4 5.8 2.6 Assurance: 4.500 4.1 3.2 Assurance: 3.275 (Avg. items 14–17) 5.5 3.3 (Avg. items 14–17) 4.3 3.4 4.1 3.2 Empathy: 2.900 4.2 3.5 Empathy: 5.860 (Avg. items 18–22) 2.6 6.5 (Avg. items 18–22) 2.8 6.6 2.5 6.4 2.4 6.3
The averages for each of the dimensions of service quality were computed by averaging the items pertaining to each dimension. Finally, differences for the dimensions were computed as follows:
The differences show that the greatest negative mismatch exists in the dimension of empathy, with reliability as a close second. Therefore, the training program should focus on teaching employees to be empathetic. Also, the process improvement efforts should focus on improving reliability. These changes will lead to the greatest improvements in customer service.
EXAMPLE 8-2 SERVQUAL Two-Dimensional Differencing
If there is enough variation in the responses given to different dimensions, the two-dimensional differencing technique is very useful for evaluating SERVQUAL responses. Note that this tech- nique is also used for specific questionnaires relating to specific services offered by companies. For example, St. John’s Hospital administers surveys to patients asking about several specific services such as food, laundry, nursing, and many other services. The two-dimensional differenc- ing technique allows the hospital to determine which services it should emphasize to improve customer perceptions and those that make little difference.
Using the information from Example 8.1, it is fairly simple to develop a two-dimensional services plane. The vertical axis reflects the expectations score and the horizontal axis relates to the perceptions score ( Figure 8-5 ) using 4 (the neutral response) as the origin. The hospital ana- lyst learns that emphasis is needed in the areas of reliability and empathy as these are areas where expectations are high and perceptions are relatively low.
200 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
DESIGNING AND IMPROVING THE SERVICES TRANSACTION
So far in this chapter we have discussed customer perceptions of quality. One of the ways to improve customers’ perceptions of quality is to improve the process of delivery of the service. Just as teams can succeed in manufacturing, teams in services can develop ways to improve pro- cesses and customer satisfaction.
Other concepts and tools include services blueprinting, moments-of-truth concept, and the Japanese method known as poka-yoke. Each of these is discussed in the following paragraphs.
Services Blueprinting
Lynn Shostack, CEO of Joyce International, Inc., is known for the statement, “The process is the service.” Shostack also developed the process known as services blueprinting . 6 A services blueprint is a flowchart that isolates potential fail points in a process. She recommends that blue- prints be kept on every process in a service and that a “keeper of the blueprint” make the blueprints available for others in the firm. If possible, the blueprint also should be available on a computer network for all to view. There are four steps to developing a services blueprint:
1. Identify processes. In this step, processes are flowcharted so that the bounds of the process are identified. Figure 8-6 shows a simple process used by Shostack to demonstrate services blueprinting, in this case for a hair salon’s processes.
2. Isolate fail points. Notice in Figure 8-6 that the hair coloring stage is a possible fail point. What can happen here? The wrong color could be applied, and the hair style will be ruined. This would be a very expensive mistake.
EXPECTATIONS
TangiblesReliability
Empathy
Assurance
Responsiveness
PERCEPTIONS
5
6
7
3
5 6 7
2
1
321 4
FIGURE 8-5 Two-Dimensional Differencing Plane
6 Shostack, G. L., “Designing Services That Deliver,” Harvard Business Review 62, 1 (1984): 135.
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 201
Make reservation
4 Minutes
Seen by customer
30 Seconds 5 Minutes 108 Minutes 2.5 Minutes 2 Hours total
execution time
Line of visibilityNot seen by customer but necessary to performance
Enter salon
Redo color by applying
rinse or other chemicals
Hair stylist gathers
information
Select and purchase supplies
Style and color hair
Collect payment
Fail point
Materials (e.g.: supplies, hair
colors, hair care potions)
FIGURE 8-6 Services Blueprinting Example in a Hair Salon
3. Establish a time frame. In a hair salon operation, time is a major determinant of profitability. As a result, those steps that waste time result in lost income. The analyst observing this process should establish a standard time for each step in the process.
4. Analyze profits. The customer spends about two hours in the process. As errors occur in the process, the salon owner becomes liable, and other business is lost.
Notice also that Figure 8-6 includes a line of visibility. The activities below the line of vis- ibility are not seen by the customer, but they influence performance. This is true in many organi- zations. Often, the area above the line of visibility is referred to as the front office , and the area below the line of visibility is referred to as the back office . Many times process improvements focus on back-office activities, whereas front-office activities that involve high customer interac- tion are ignored. Services process blueprinting places the focus on front-office activities.
To understand how you could apply services blueprinting, think about a restaurant. Typi- cally, when you first enter a restaurant, you expect to be greeted at the door. Can you remember a time when you weren’t? This has happened to all of us at some point. A restaurant can install sensors or provide backups for the greeter so that this breakdown never occurs. Services blue- printing is a tool to help with brainstorming activities that lead to customer service improvement.
Moments of Truth
The fail points in the services blueprints are often referred to as moments of truth . These are the times at which the customer expects something to happen. Remember the SERVQUAL items? Expectations are a major determinant of customer perceptions of service quality. Therefore, when the customer expects something to happen, it has to happen. It is that simple! Some com- panies list these moments of truth and define fail-safes and procedures to see that they result in satisfied customers.
202 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 8-2 Quality in Health Care 7
Lynn Shostack’s service blueprinting and failproofing processes can be applied in a wide variety of services settings. One area is health care management. Health care quality management is a vast topic. Many contingencies affect the practice of quality management in health care. For example, look at the wide variety of settings where health care is practiced: clinics, hospitals, trauma centers, doctors’ offices, and in the field. Each of these settings requires differing approaches and has different standards for care.
Medical errors continue to be one of the leading causes of death in the United States. Medical needs are different for specific populations such as women, children, minorities, the aged, and those with chronic conditions. Delivery methods also vary with vehicles such as primary care, managed care, hospitals, health maintenance organizations, and others. Given this diversity of problems relative to health care quality management, much work is needed in this area.
Following is a list of 20 steps to improve health care from the U.S. Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality. Note how these steps appear to walk the patient through the entire health care process to isolate possible fail points.
1. Be an active member of your health provider team. 2. Make sure your doctor knows all medicines you are taking. 3. Let your doctor know about any allergies you have to medications. 4. Read the doctor’s prescriptions. 5. Understand your medications. 6. Make sure you get the right medicine from your pharmacy. An estimated 88% of medicine errors
involve the wrong drug or dosage. 7. Ask pharmacists about your medicines. 8. Ask how best to measure liquid medicines. 9. Understand your medicine’s side effects so you are aware if they occur. 10. If possible, go to a hospital where they often perform the procedures or surgeries you need. 11. Ask your health care personnel if they have washed their hands before they touch you. 12. Understand your treatment plan when you are discharged from a hospital. 13. Understand any surgical procedures you will experience. 14. Speak up if you have questions or concerns. 15. Make sure your personal doctor is in charge of your care. 16. Make sure all of your health care providers know your health history. 17. Get others involved in your health care such as family members in case you are incapacitated. 18. Know that “more is not better.” You may not need some care. 19. If you have a test, don’t assume that no news is good news. They may have failed to contact you. 20. Learn more about your condition and treatments by asking your doctor and nurse and other reliable
sources.
7 Adapted from “20 Tips to Prevent Medical Errors—Patient Fact Sheet,” Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality, 2008.
Customers’ contact with the business can occur in many different ways—face to face, over the Internet, by phone, through a machine such as an ATM, or through the mail. All these moments of truth result in either happy customers or lost customers. Moments of truth also can happen at various stages of the product life cycle, such as when the product is being used, when customer service queries arise, when the product needs repair, and when it is eventually dis- posed of. A Closer Look at Quality 8-2 considers the application of this approach in a health care process.
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 203
Poka-yoke
Dr. Richard Chase and Dr. John Grout have been influential in promoting the use of poka-yokes (fail-safes) in services. 8 The idea behind fail-safing is to ensure that certain errors will never occur. Just as many processes seem to be designed to fail, they also can be designed not to fail. In services, Chase defines different classifications for fail-safe devices. These are
Warning methods
Physical contact methods
Visual contact methods
Fail-safe methods can also be defined by the “ three Ts ” (see Figure 8-7 ):
Task to be performed
Treatment provided to the customer
Tangibles provided to the customer
These poka-yoke classifications and Ts occur in many different forms. Some examples include 9 beepers in ATM machines that warn you to remove your card, toilets and sinks that automatically flush and shut off, the mechanism that stops you from inserting a disk upside- down in a computer, surgical trays that have indentations for different instruments, needle remov- ers that prevent accidental needle pokes, requirements that bank tellers enter a customer’s eye color before beginning a transaction so that identity is confirmed, or a file cabinet that locks the other drawers when any one drawer is opened so the cabinet doesn’t fall over.
Poka-yokes such as these represent a good amount of creativity and are very often used by Japanese and American companies to help ensure quality service. In a nutshell, you should iso- late fail points in a process and then fail-safe the process to make sure that errors don’t occur.
Tangibles
Task Treatment
FIGURE 8-7 The Three Ts
8 Chase, R., and Stewart, D., “Make Your Service Fail-Safe,” Sloan Management Review 35, 3 (1994): 35–44. 9 For an extensive literature review and interesting information about poka-yoke, check out Dr. John Grout’s homepage on the Internet (facultyweb.berry.edu/jgrout/pokayoke.html). He has devoted a great deal of time to developing this resource, and it is the most concise one on poka-yoke available. Grout is currently Dean of the Campbell school of Busi- ness at Berry College in Mount Berry, Georgia.
204 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Thinking back to Lynn Shostack’s hair salon process, how would you fail-safe the process so that the wrong color would never be applied?
THE CUSTOMER BENEFITS PACKAGE
Just as many organizations have employee benefits packages, services firms can develop cus- tomer benefits packages (CBPs) . A customer benefits package consists of both tangibles that define the service and intangibles that make up the service. The tangibles are known as goods- content . Intangibles are referred to as service-content . The only difference between an employee benefits package and a services benefits package is the ultimate recipient of the ben- efits package.
CBPs are important not only in that they help define what it is that your service firm will provide to the customer but also in helping to define what will not be provided to the customer. More and more, firms are focusing on better defining the niches that they serve. As a result, the question of what they will not provide the customer is often as important as what they will pro- vide the customer. By helping to answer this question, CBPs provide a foundation for developing a service strategy. The four stages of the service benefit package design process are as follows (see Figure 8-8 ):
1. Idea/concept generation 2. The definition of a services package 3. Process definition and selection 4. Facilities requirement definition
As defined by David Collier, 10 a professor at Florida Gulf Coast University, the objectives of customer benefits package design are to
• Make sure the final CBP attributes you are using are the correct ones. • Evaluate the relative importance of each attribute in the customer’s mind. • Evaluate each attribute in terms of process and service encounter capability. • Figure out how best to segment the market and position CBPs in each market.
Idea/ concept
generation
Define services package
Select and define process
Define facility
requirements
FIGURE 8-8 CBP Design Process
10 Collier, D., The Service/Quality Solution (Milwaukee, WI: Irwin/ASQC, 1994).
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 205
• Avoid CBP duplication and proliferation. • Bring each CBP, and associated process and service encounters, to market as quickly as
possible. Use the CBP framework and final attributes to design facilities, processes, equip- ment, jobs, and service encounters.
• Maximize customer satisfaction and profits.
The CBP is defined largely by the degree of freedom allowed by the firm in the customiza- tion of the services package. Deborah Kellogg and Winter Nie 11 provided a services process/ services package matrix. As shown in Figure 8-9 , firms will offer unique services packages , selective services packages , restricted services packages , or generic services packages . Generic services packages are of the one-size-fits-all variety. Unique services packages are espe- cially tailored for each customer. Your firm’s ability to custom-tailor a benefits package depends on the amount of flexibility you have as a service provider. Strategic issues such as organiza- tional flexibility, top-management skill, employee motivation, training, hiring practices, culture of the service customer, nature of the service, and technological choice affect your ability to provide unique services packages.
Table 8-3 shows a customer benefits package from the Slide-Master firm. Notice that Slide-Master has taken great care in defining tangibles and intangibles for its CBP. Slide-Master evaluates its CBP performance using monthly surveys of employees and customers.
SERVICE TRANSACTION ANALYSIS
Because we have now discussed design of services processes and improving services processes, we can now present service transaction analysis (STA) . 12 This is a service improvement tech- nique that allows managers to analyze their service processes at a very detailed level. As we stated, Crosby views service encounters as a series of transactions (or moments of truth). STA is a method for identifying these transactions and evaluating them from the customer’s perspective to determine if there is a gap between service design and what the customer perceives as the service.
Expert service
Service shop
Service factory
Unique services packages
Selective services packages
Restricted services packages
Generic services packages
Services Process Structure
Doctor’s office
Mass entertainment
Home repair
Services Package Structure
FIGURE 8-9 Service Process/Service Benefits Package Matrix Source: Based on D. Kellogg and W. Nie, “A Framework for Strategic Service Management,” Journal of Operations Management 13, 4 (1995): 323–327.
11 Kellogg, D., and Nie, W., “A Framework for Strategic Service Management,” Journal of Operations Management 13, 9 (1995): 323–337. 12 Johnston, R., “Towards a Better Understanding of Service Excellence,” Managing Service Quality 14, 2/3 (2004): 129–134.
206 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
TABLE 8-3 Final CBP Attributes for Slide-Master Tangible (Goods-Content) Intangible (Service-Content)
Slides Convenience and timeliness
Quality, durable, clean, new film, and cardboard Facility close to downtown High-resolution pictures and slides Pickup and delivery service Multiple color combinations (6 million) Telephone/fax order capability Slide properly centered and focused Standard 3-day service
Equipment/technology Latest computer hardware State-of-the-art software High-quality camera Superior maintenance of all equipment Well-maintained delivery vehicles with ads on the sides Flexible for custom designs People Clean and very well groomed Attractive uniforms
Packaging Heavy, clear, high-quality sleeves Sequenced and numbered properly Loaded in attractive boxes or slide carousels
Facilities Ample parking spaces Secure parking lot Attractive signs Clean, attractive building—outside Upscale indoor wall pictures and decor Reception area and service counter—clean and professional appearance Soft, relaxing background music Plush furniture Bright lighting Complimentary coffee and soft drinks Restrooms, soap, etc.—clean
Rush 1-day service
Really try to handle last-minute customer changes Accurate, itemized billing by fifth working day of each month
Professionalism Absolutely confidential services Emphasis on telephone courtesy Refer to client by name
Client order documentation correctly filled out and processed Flexible to customer needs
Consulting services Artistic expertise History of previous jobs Technical knowledge Nonbusiness hours on-call professional Service attitude User-friendliness Polite, responsive attitude Do exactly what we promise Script dialogues for order taking and postpurchase callbacks Confident but relaxing behavior
Source: Adapted from David Collier, The Service/Quality Solution (Milwaukee, WI: Irwin/ASQC, 1994). Used with permission of David Collier.
Figure 8-10 shows a service transaction analysis sheet. This sheet is a tool in STA. Once you have specified the service process to be studied, “mystery shoppers,” or independent consul- tant-customers, walk through the entire process. After receiving the service, they then rate each transaction in the process with either a “+” (delighting), “0” (satisfactory), or “−” (unsatisfac- tory). The rationales for these scores are entered into the right side of the sheet, and an overall evaluation is provided in the bottom of the sheet. Using these sheets, service designers, manag- ers, and staff can attempt to understand why the customer did not like certain aspects of the service and use this as an input into improving the process.
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 207
Imposing oak entrance door, firmly shut.
Second door with advertisement for a lending company.
Receptionist behind desk ignores customer and continues typing.
Carpeted corridor but no sign of receptionist.
She says, “Yes?”
Phone rings, which receptionist answers.
“Trustworthy, professional but a little formidable.”
Message Score:
Process: Legal Firm:
Customer type:
SERVICE TRANSACTION ANALYSIS SHEET
Lawyer Reception Personal client
Service concept: General legal services for personal customers in a user- friendly, sympathetic, and nonintimidating way
Transaction 0+ –
“They like constructing barriers.” “They may not be impartial.”
“They don’t seem to care about me.” “They don’t think I am important.”
“Homey but is this the right place?” “Unhelpful.”
“Not very welcoming.” “I feel like I am intruding on her work.”
“I am not important.” “Other people have prority on her time.”
Overall evaluation Poor service design. Little thought or concern for clients. Unfriendly and intimidating service.
FIGURE 8-10 STA Sheet
EXAMPLE 8-3 Service Transaction Analysis in Action
In the transaction analysis sheet in Figure 8-10 , the large oak door, although professional, looks forbidding. When going to this lawyer’s office, the client is probably nervous about approaching the attorney and can find the décor daunting and scary. The message on the second door made it appear that the attorneys may not provide impartial advice due to their relationships with a lending company. The not-so-subtle message sent by the rude receptionist demonstrated a mismatch
208 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
IMPROVING CUSTOMER SERVICE IN GOVERNMENT
If customer service is the battlefield for business in the twenty-first century, then government is probably the last frontier. There are some evidences of improvement in several aspects of gov- ernment. The National Productivity Review 13 reports that some federal government agencies have adopted quality management (see A Closer Look at Quality 8-3 ). Quality professionals know that the military has long been an early adopter of statistical quality techniques. Many standards have been established. The government has developed a searchable list of 4,000 cus- tomer service standards for 570 federal departments and agencies. This effort started with an executive order for a “customer-driven government that matches or exceeds the best service available in the private sector.” In the first year, only three agencies responded with agreements to commit to service standards. These early adopters were the Social Security Administration, the IRS, and the Postal Service.
between the service design and execution . . . and so forth. The application of this technique alerted the partners to what was really going on in their own office. Changes were made to address these problems.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 8-3 Government Service Quality: A Stop-and-Go Process 14
Quality improvement in the U.S. government has been a hit-or-miss proposition. Serious and significant efforts have been implemented since the Reagan administration. Whereas the Reagan and Bush (GHW) administrations promoted the Baldrige and Deming approaches to improvement, Clinton emphasized improvement via Executive Order. The G.W. Bush administration did little to improve government ser- vice quality.
During the Obama administration, governmental improvement has not been a top priority but has followed six main themes:
– Putting performance first with a new performance improvement and analysis framework. – Ensuring responsible spending. – Focusing on retaining and recruiting federal employees who are ready to implement twenty-first
century systems. – Partnering with private and nonprofit organizations. – Reforming federal contracting and acquisition emphasizing competition. – Increasing transparency in government .15
During the Clinton administration, the major improvement effort was called “Reinventing Gov- ernment.” Among the triumphs of reinventing government were the IRS TeleFile program and the Social Security Administration telephone answer lines. However, the reinventors also avoided contact with traditional good-government groups, such as the National Academy of Public Administration and the Council for Excellence in Government, and wanted little to do with the Office of Management and Budget, the Office of Personnel Management, the federal inspectors general, and the General Account- ing Office, all of which they viewed more as part of the problem than of the solution. Created as a quasi- independent unit appended to the vice president’s office, the campaign to reinvent the government
13 Milakovich, M., “The State of Results-Driven Customer Service Quality in Government,” National Productivity Review 17, 2 (1998): 47–54. 14 Based on “Requiem for Reinvention, Government Executive,” www.govexec.com/dailyfed/0201/021201ff.htm , 12 February, 2001. 15 Based on Balutis, A., “The Obama Agenda: Five Steps Towards Transformation,” Public Manager 38, 4 (2009): 43–47.
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 209
States are also jumping on the bandwagon. By 2011, 32 states had established quality award programs. Many state agencies around the country have adopted quality techniques. How- ever, many of these implementations appear to be in the early stages. Overall, government is lagging behind the private sector in quality adoption. Although the results are mixed, it is clear that private-sector quality management practices are being adopted in government. Why is this progress occurring? Many used to question whether the government had the inclination to adopt quality techniques, given the lack of profit motive. However, several factors seem to be driving this change:
• People want and desire to do good quality work. • Because quality management is associated with improved employee satisfaction, there is a
major impetus to improve. • Government leaders are mandating standards, strategic plans, and new levels of perfor-
mance at all levels of government. These standards are being adopted in government agen- cies because of the mandates.
• Demand for government services is growing at a faster rate than funding for them. The natural reaction is to simplify processes that have become bloated.
• Finally, the threat of privatization in government has led to an improvement in service in many areas.
QUALITY IN HEALTH CARE
Another area of services that is receiving much attention is health care. Several factors have con- tributed to this phenomenon:
• Health care is facing the same “cost squeeze” that government is facing. • A move toward health maintenance organizations (HMOs) is causing hospitals to stream-
line operations. • There is increasing diversity in health care.
operated with enormous autonomy. Its leaders could not, and would not, testify before Congress, and its directives were kept in virtual space at a Web site whose days were numbered when the Bush adminis- tration arrived.
Convinced that statutory reform was either impossible or unnecessary, the reinventors were left with a number of weak devices for spurring change. Reinventing was poorly linked, if at all, to the employee performance appraisal process and carried few, if any, budgetary or personnel consequences. It simply did not matter to the things that matter to agencies—money and headcounts. Federal employ- ees could earn Hammer awards for reinventing government but not bigger budgets or a more forgiving congressional committee.
Customer satisfaction surveys were the one piece of reinvention to have survived in the Bush administration. Few would expect the administration to interview the same customers, however. The Environmental Protection Agency surveyed reference librarians under Clinton, for example, but a sur- vey of regulated parties was more plausible under Bush.
According to Paul C. Light, vice president and director of governmental studies at the Brookings Institution, the experience from reinventing government suggests at least three ingredients needed for more vibrant efforts in future administrations:
• Statutes. Although congressional action is always difficult, it outlives the ends of administrations in a way that executive directives cannot.
• Structure. The federal hierarchy is just as thick today as it was prior to reinventing government. Indeed, considerable evidence suggests that the most senior levels of the hierarchy are even thicker. This is the cost of letting a thousand flowers bloom without doing any weeding.
• Bipartisanship. Reinventing government would be alive today if it had been rooted in a bipartisan agreement on the need for big-government reforms. It is a lesson well worth remembering for future efforts.
210 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
In some cases, insurers such as Blue Cross are encouraging the use of quality management approaches. Health care workers are becoming increasingly knowledgeable about quality man- agement practices and concepts. In fact, the very nature of health care requires careful and well- planned procedures.
Many health care customers, however, are uncomfortable with these changes to govern- ment and health care. If quality approaches are applied, it is probably best that efforts not focus entirely on efficiency. Reliability and empathy are dimensions that can only be good for health care.
SUPPLY CHAIN QUALITY IN SERVICES
As we have talked about before, one of the major differences between services and manufactur- ing is the involvement of the customer in the process. As shown in Figure 8-11 , service supply chains are bidirectional. This means that service customers actually provide inputs to the supply chain. Many times, these inputs can be information or, in some cases, labor—as in the case of a self-service gas station. Therefore, effective communication is necessary between customers and suppliers to prevent inadequate fulfillment of customer expectations. The concept of gar- bage in, garbage out implies that the quality of a service supply chain will be limited by the quality of the supplied inputs. Even if customers provide poor inputs (inaccurate information), they may still expect accurate outputs. This expectation has implications for service design. In an integrated supply chain, the service provider still has greater responsibility for verifying cus- tomer inputs to ensure they are accurate. In some cases, the service provider may be able to initiate communication of customer-input delivery expectations, such as through reservation systems. This may be complicated by the fact that many times, service delivery systems are inherently just-in-time. Of course, in services, there are other suppliers besides the customers. Often, these are managed in a more traditional supply-chain manner. However, the customer- supplier linkage makes services unique.
A THEORY FOR SERVICE QUALITY MANAGEMENT
As we studied in Chapter 2 , theory development in the area of quality is an important work that continues. Dr. Scott Sampson of Brigham Young University is a researcher who is developing theory in services management. His unified theory for services management provides inter- esting insights for quality management. 16 This theory consists of several propositions. These
Material and equipment supplies
Service provider
Service customer supplying inputs
Service customer consumes outputs
FIGURE 8-11 Bidirectional Services Supply Chain Source: S. E. Sampson, “A Customer-Supplier Paradigm for Service Science,” in (refereed) Proceedings of the DSI Services Science Miniconference, Pittsburgh, PA, May 2007.
16 Sampson, S., “Understanding Service Supply Chains,” Proceedings of the 3 rd International Conference on Operations and Supply Chain Management, Wuhan, China, 2009, p. 54 .
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 211
propositions are based on the definitions of services that were introduced early in this chapter. Some of the propositions are as follows:
Proposition 1: The Unified Services Theory. “With services, the customer provides sig- nificant inputs into the production process. With manufacturing, groups of customers may contribute ideas to the design of the product; however, individual customers’ only part in the actual process is to select and consume the output. Nearly all other managerial themes unique to services are founded in this distinction.”
Proposition 2: The Unreliable Supplier Dilemma. “With services, the customer- suppliers often provide unreliable inputs.” “The Unreliable Supplier Dilemma” occurs because service customers provide themselves, their belongings, and/or their information as process inputs (by the Unified Services Theory). This simultaneous relationship as supplier and customer makes it diffi- cult for the service provider to control the supplied inputs.
Proposition 3: Capricious Labor. “With services, customer-labor may ignore, avoid, or reject technologies or process improvements which are intended to increase quality and productivity. As a result, customer buy-in to process changes must be carefully addressed.” Capricious labor occurs because many services customers provide themselves as labor inputs into the production process. In manufacturing organizations, labor is expected to conform to corporate policy. If the manufacturer mandates that a quality initiative be implemented, labor is generally expected to conform, even when labor thinks the initiative is a bad idea. Imagine a manufacturer who invests in technology that will improve quality of pro- duction. Then imagine that some of the employees reject the technology, stating, “I am more comfortable doing it the old way,” even though the old way is inefficient and results in poor quality. How would management respond to those self-willed employees? Unless those employees were children of the owner, one might suspect their jobs would be in jeopardy. In services, much labor is performed by customers who coproduce. Therefore, they can adopt or reject what they don’t like. For example, customers don’t have to stand in line if they don’t wish.
Proposition 4: Everyone Presumes to Be an Expert. “With services, the customer often provides product specifications (what to make) and process design (how to make it), often without the invitation of the service provider.” “Everyone thinks they’re an expert” occurs because the necessity for customer inputs in service processes means that most customers have extensive experience with the service process. This experience breeds process knowledge and ideas for improvement. The words of Richard Chase capture this idea well: “Everyone is an expert on services. We all think we know what we want from a service organization and, by the very process of living, we have a good deal of experience with the service creation process.” 17
17 Jacobs, H., and Chase, R., Operations and Supply Chain Management (Homewood, IL: Irwin, 2010), p. 56 .
Summary In this chapter we have studied quality in services. Because services involve intangibles, they are different from manufacturing. Because of the lack of hard measures, statistical quality control techniques are not always as successful in services as they are in manufacturing. This doesn’t mean that statistical thinking is not extremely useful in services.
212 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Services definitions and classifications were presented that help us better understand ser- vices. We have provided tools for services such as SERVQUAL, services blueprinting, moments of truth, poka-yokes, and customer benefits packages.
The bottom line is a satisfied customer. Customers pay the bills. They are the object of our efforts. At times, all the customer wants is a caring ear to bend. In our race for profits, efficien- cies, and better processes, let’s not forget the human touch.
Key Terms Contact personnel Customer benefits
packages (CBPs) Customer contact Customer coproduction Customer expectations Customer perceptions External services Gap
Gap analysis Generic services packages Heterogeneous Intangible Internal services Involuntary service Malpractice Moments of truth Poka-yoke
Product liability Reinventing government Restricted services
packages Selective services packages Service transaction
analysis (STA) Services blueprinting SERVQUAL
Three Ts Unified theory for services
management Unique services packages Voluntary services
Discussion Questions 1. Discuss the ways in which services are unique in comparison with manufactured goods. How do these
differences affect the management of service quality? 2. Provide an example of customer coproduction other than the example provided in the text. What are
the advantages and disadvantages of customer coproduction for service providers? 3. Are quality techniques in the service industry well developed or still fairly immature? If you believe
that they are immature, why do you think this is the case? 4. Why do you believe that quality techniques in the service industry are less mature than quality tech-
niques for manufactured products? What can be done to bring quality techniques for the services industry up to a higher level?
5. Discuss the distinction between voluntary services and involuntary services. Why is this distinction important in our understanding of service quality?
6. Are the Baldrige criteria applicable to service situations? If so, how? 7. List Zeithamel, Parasuraman, and Berry’s five dimensions of service quality. Is the list identical for
every service provider, or does it vary from company to company? Explain your answer. 8. Discuss some of the qualities of an effective leader in a service context. 9. What is SERVQUAL? How does SERVQUAL help a firm assess its service quality? 10. What are the advantages of the SERVQUAL instrument? 11. Discuss the concept of gap analysis in the context of a SERVQUAL assessment. 12. What is a services blueprint? How is a services blueprint developed? 13. Describe the concept of moment of truth in a service context. Describe a moment of truth that you
recently experienced as a consumer. Was your service experience satisfactory or unsatisfactory? Explain your answer.
14. How can the moment-of-truth concept be used as a training tool in a service setting? 15. What is a customer benefits package? What is the purpose of developing customer benefits packages
in a service context? 16. In what ways will the globalization of services alter the way that businesses manage their service
quality?
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 213
Item Perception Average Expectation Average Differences
1 5.5 2.3 3.2 2 5.4 2.4 3.0 3 5.9 2.2 3.7 4 5.8 2.8 3.0 5 3.2 3.2 0 6 4.4 4.1 0.3 7 4.3 5.3 −1.0 8 2.5 4.9 −2.4 9 4.6 5.6 −1.0
10 6.2 3.4 2.8 11 6.5 3.2 3.3 12 6.6 3.4 3.2 13 6.8 3.6 3.2 14 3.1 3.2 −0.1 15 4.5 3.3 1.2 16 3.3 3.4 −0.1 17 3.1 3.2 −0.1 18 3.2 3.5 −0.3 19 1.6 6.5 −4.9 20 1.8 6.6 −4.8 21 1.5 6.4 −4.9 22 1.4 6.3 −4.9
17. Discuss the initiatives that the U.S. government has taken to increase its emphasis on service quality. Are they effective?
18. Discuss several of the factors that have contributed to an increase in attention directed toward quality in health care.
19. Discuss the unified theory for services management developed by Dr. Scott Sampson. Do you agree or disagree with the principles underlying Sampson’s theory? Explain your answer.
20. In your judgment, will the management of “service quality” ever progress as far as the management of “manufactured goods quality”? Make your answer as substantive as possible.
Problems 1. A national electronics retail chain charges $350 for a service contract. Of this, the company sends
$120 to an insurer. Calculate the profit margin for the service contract. 2. Using the example of the service transaction analysis (STA) worksheet in Figure 8-10 , chart and evalu-
ate the transactions for your university or college advising office. Report your findings and overall evaluation.
3. Develop a consumer benefits package for a service business in your community. Be exhaustive and explicit in your package identification.
4. Develop a services blueprint for a local car wash. Identify possible fail points, back-office processes, and fail-safes.
5. Recently, a medical office administered the SERVQUAL survey to its customers as a way to determine where it should focus the process improvement. Forty surveys were administered to customers before and after they were treated. On the basis of the 40 responses, averages were computed for each item. Using the averages in the table that follows, compute dimension averages. Based on your findings, which dimensions should be emphasized?
214 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
6. For the data in Problem 5, perform a two-dimensional differencing analysis. Do your results differ from your answer in Problem 5?
7. The averages for different dimensions of service quality were computed by averaging the items per- taining to the dimension. Use the following data to determine which dimensions to emphasize.
Perceptions Expectations
Tangibles ! 5.40 1.42 Reliability ! 3.20 6.40 Responsiveness ! 2.45 2.30 Assurance ! 5.60 3.30 Empathy ! 1.90 6.40
Lifelong Learning Teamwork Innate Abilities Cognitive Abilities
Respondent Expectations Perceptions Expectations Perceptions Expectations Perceptions Expectations Perceptions
1 8 0 8 10 2 5 3 9 2 7 4 9 9 6 5 4 8 3 9 2 9 10 4 5 2 7 4 10 5 10 9 7 4 3 8 5 5 1 8 7 5 6 4 9 6 9 1 7 9 2 7 2 10 7 9 3 9 10 2 5 3 10 8 8 2 10 10 3 6 2 10 9 7 0 9 10 2 5 4 9
Average 8.00 2 8.78 9.33 3.67 5.33 3.00 8.89
a. Using simple differencing, determine which dimensions should be emphasized. b. Use two-dimensional differencing to determine which dimensions should be emphasized. c. Based on your findings, choose the most important dimension and describe how you would develop
a process improvement program to address the dimension that needs to be improved. 8. A state university wants to perform a gap analysis to determine what student traits corporate CEOs
find most important. The exercise is to be administered to CEOs and involves two surveys: an expectations survey and a perceptions survey. All questions are answered on a 10-point scale. The attributes the CEOs are asked to rate are propensity for lifelong learning, ability to work in teams, innate ability, and cognitive ability. The results of nine surveys are synopsized in the fol- lowing table:
Perform a gap analysis by developing a two-dimensional differencing plane, and evaluate the results. 9. Following is a transaction analysis for a movie theater. Please answer the following questions:
a. Based on the service transaction analysis, what is your assessment of the movie theater? b. In what areas can the movie theater improve? c. Are there any additional customer touch points you can think of in this process? What could the
company do to make them a positive experience? 10. Following is a service transaction analysis for a lube shop. Answer the following questions:
a. Based on the service transaction analysis, what is your assessment of the lube shop? b. In what areas can the lube shop improve? c. Are there any additional customer touch points you can think of in this process? What could the
company do to make them a positive experience?
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 215
Exterior façade with movie posters.
A single, windy ticket line with multiple tellers at the end.
Ticket collectors near ticket booth tell where the theater is.
Concession stand in the middle of open area and brightly lit.
“See what is playing or coming soon.” “We are showing the movies you want to watch.”
Message Score:
Process:
Organization:
Customer Type:
SERVICE TRANSACTION ANALYSIS SHEET FOR PROBLEM 9
Movie Theater
Buying Ticket Movie Goer
Service Concept: Provide comfortable experience in viewing today’s current releases.
Transaction 0+ –
“Everyone is herded together.” “Ticket booth was crammed in the corner of theater.” “They just wanted my money.”
“They want me to spend more money.” “The movie won’t be the same without snacks and drinks.”
“Employees very knowledgeable and care that I get to the correct theater.” “They want me to enjoy the movie/experience right away.”
“I feel like this is the movie I’m supposed to see next. The company doesn’t care if it is good, as long as I come and see it.” “The movie display was offensive and not appropriate for all ages.”
“Only the big items are worth our time to pick up.” “Cleanliness isn’t as important in the movie-going experience.” “Once I start watching the movie, they don’t care as much about the experience.”
Overall Evaluation: The movie theater is about selling tickets. They are helpful until I am done spending my money. More consideration is needed to keep me coming back to this theater.
Large displays of coming attractions posted at theater entrance. Some movies have offensive words and pictures.
Movie theater has food on floor and is sticky.
216 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Open bay door.
Mechanic guides me in and walks me to waiting room.
Mechanic confirms oil change and asks about additional work.
Waiting room is plain, but has a TV, magazines, and drinks.
Reviewed work done on the car: oil change, tire pressure, and fluid check.
“I can get in quickly.” “They want me to see what is happening so I can decide if now is the right time to enter.”
Message Score:
Process:
Organization:
Customer Type:
SERVICE TRANSACTION ANALYSIS SHEET FOR PROBLEM 10
Auto Service
Oil Change Average Driver
Service Concept: Provide speedy service that keeps cars running properly. Inform customer of potential issues.
Transaction 0+ –
“They are concerned about my safety.” “My comfort is more important than starting the job and getting me out the door.”
“We want you to enjoy your stay.” “This is a time to relax while we do all the work.”
“Explaining the different oil options makes sure I am making the best choice for the vehicle.” “The upselling is annoying. They ask to do the same thing every time I come in.”
“Our service extends beyond the oil change.” “Your overall safety is the most important to us.” “We want to see you again.”
“We appreciate your business.” “Your car is important to us, too.”
“Safety is a priority.” “Our service to you doesn’t have an end point.”
Overall Evaluation: The service was very quick and professional. The focus is on the clients and having them come back—not because they have to, but because they want to.
Presented coupon for free car wash.
Walked to car and guided out of bay.
CASES
Case 8-1 Yahoo! Designs Quality Services with Customers in Mind Yahoo!: www.yahoo.com
Millions of people log on to the Internet every day and use the services of Yahoo!, one of the World Wide Web’s most popular portals. Yahoo! has evolved quickly into a firm that provides comprehensive
Internet services to a global clientele. The story of how Yahoo! started and how it has attracted such a loyal clientele in an extremely competitive industry is quite amazing.
Chapter 8 • Designing Quality Services 217
Discussion Questions
1. Think about the Internet search engine you use the most often. If it is Yahoo!, what is it about Yahoo! that attracts you as a user? If it is not Yahoo!, what could Yahoo! learn from the search engine you use that could help make it better?
2. What parallels do you see between developing a high-quality service product and a high-quality
manufactured product? Make your answer as sub- stantive as possible.
3. Is Yahoo! a company that was simply at the right place at the right time, or are many of its ser- vice innovations truly unique? Explain your answer.
Case 8-2 UPS: Delivering the Total Package in Customer Service UPS: www.ups.com
In 1907 there was a great need in the United States for private messenger and delivery services. The U.S. Postal Service was not yet offering parcel delivery, and
few offices and private homes had telephones, so mes- sages had to be delivered by hand and packages by courier. To help meet customers’ communication needs,
Yahoo! started in 1994 as a hobby of its cofound- ers, Jerry Yang and David Filo. Both individuals were doctoral students in electrical engineering at Stanford University who took time off from writing their disser- tations to surf the Web, classify the content, and create categories. As the two students started classifying more and more Web sites, the product they were developing started to attract the attention of other people. This attention provided the two individuals the motivation to continue to expand their efforts, and Yahoo! as a com- pany was born.
Yahoo! is free to its users. The company gener- ates revenue by selling advertising space on the Yahoo! search engine. What is particularly remarkable about Yahoo! is the customer base that the company estab- lished in only a few short years. Yahoo! attracts hun- dreds of millions of users per month.
How has Yahoo! established such a large cus- tomer base? Largely by trying very hard to determine what its customers want and then designing quality ser- vices to meet its customers’ needs. For example, Yahoo! follows the traffic patterns of its search engine very carefully in an attempt to determine the types of infor- mation its users are seeking. Early on, the company noticed that many of its users were searching for stock quotes by typing in either a company’s name or its ticker symbol. Yahoo! created a financial site on its search engine and partnered with the major stock exchanges to get direct feeds of stock quotes. The result—Yahoo! now gets more than 1 million queries per day just for stock quotes. Yahoo! offers similar levels of service for news, weather, and sports.
Particularly striking is the way that Yahoo! has customized its search engine to appeal to different demographic groups. The majority of Yahoo!’s offerings,
including search engines, are available in more than 25 languages. There are 44 different homepages around the world. Also, Yahoo! is tailored to specific cities. If you click on Yahoo! Seattle, for example, you instantly have at your fingertips a vast amount of information specifi- cally about the Seattle area. Yahoo! also has segmented its market by age and area of interest. Yahooligans is a search engine designed specifically for children, with kid-safe content presented in a manner that they can use. Similarly, Seniors’ Guide is a directory designed with information of interest to older users.
A challenge for Yahoo! is staying current with its customers’ preferences and demands. To accomplish this, the company encourages input from its users and gets thousands of e-mail messages per day. The users simply tell Yahoo! what they like and what they don’t like. Another thing that Yahoo! does is move very quickly to get a product to market. The corporate cul- ture does not demand that a product be perfect before it is placed on the search engine. The company is willing to take chances and will simply pull a product from its Web site if its users don’t like it.
As a result of its success, Yahoo! has attracted many competitors, such as Excite, Lycos, Infoseek, and WebCrawler. Several of these companies have now partnered with large firms (e.g., Infoseek with Disney and AOL with Time Warner), so the heat will remain on Yahoo! to continue to design high-quality Internet ser- vices and products. What other companies can learn from Yahoo! is that a thorough understanding of cus- tomer needs is the first step toward designing high- quality service products. Also, a strong follow-through and a willingness to listen to customer suggestions and complaints are key attributes to a service company’s success.
218 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Discussion Questions
1. Based on the description of UPS, what do you believe are UPS’s strengths and weaknesses?
2. How has UPS used technology in its design of quality services? Make your answer as substan- tive as possible.
3. Describe a positive or negative experience that you have had with UPS (or one of its competitors
such as FedEx or the U.S. Postal Service). If the experience was positive, reflect on whether the experience is consistent with UPS’s new empha- sis on customer needs. If the experience was neg- ative, what could UPS have done to better satisfy your needs?
an energetic 19-year-old, James (Jim) E. Casey, started the American Messenger Company in Seattle. Although the company began with a small staff and faced stiff competition, it did fairly well, primarily because of Casey’s strict policies. He built his business on four principles: customer courtesy, reliability, around-the- clock service, and low rates.
Casey’s company eventually became United Par- cel Service, or UPS. The name United Parcel Service was chosen to draw attention to the words United , to emphasize the fact that shipments were consolidated to increase efficiency, and Service , because the company recognized that service was all it had to sell. UPS grew quickly through the years and became well known for its chocolate-colored delivery vans and courteous driv- ers. The public also liked UPS’s business concept. It was convenient to send packages by UPS, and people trusted UPS to deliver packages safely to their destina- tions. All kinds of people and businesses used UPS’s services, from pharmaceutical companies that shipped lifesaving drugs across country to grandparents who sent their grandchildren birthday presents and boxes of candy at Christmas.
Although UPS has always been a friendly com- pany, until the mid-1980s it relied primarily on technol- ogy to maintain efficiency, keep prices low, and provide new services. A major internal change took place at UPS in the mid-1980s when the company decided to
shift its emphasis from technology to satisfying cus- tomer needs. This shift represented a recognition that UPS customers were becoming more sophisticated and had a variety of needs the company was uniquely equipped to satisfy. Paramount among these were an increased need for information, a desire to move pack- ages even more quickly and efficiently, tremendous competitive pressure from Federal Express, and a demand for customized prices and services.
UPS moved quickly to satisfy its customers’ needs by developing new service products. For exam- ple, TotalTrack, which is available at UPS’s Web site, can instantly provide customers with tracking informa- tion on all bar-coded UPS packages. This service helps vendors know when their buyers have received their shipments. Inventory Express is a contract logistics management service in which UPS stores a customer’s merchandise and then ships it when it is needed, often on a just-in-time basis.
UPS also has improved its basic package pickup and delivery services. Customers with urgent shipments can telephone UPS to take advantage of On-Call Air Pick Up, which provides fast pick up at the customer’s home and overnight delivery of packages. To accommo- date customers who ship to sparsely populated areas in the United States and abroad, UPS has improved its geo- graphic reach to every address in the United States and locations in more than 185 countries and territories.
Chapter 9 • Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 219
We define a supply chain as a network of facilities that procures raw materials, transforms them into intermediate subassemblies and final
products and then delivers the products to customers through a distribution system.
—Corey Billington of Hewlett Packard 1
C H A P T E R 9
Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply
Chain
219
As you can tell from the introductory quote, a great deal of thought has gone into manag-ing the supply function at Hewlett Packard Corporation (HP). HP uses analytical, accounting, and managerial tools to improve its performance. HP is known for its com- mitment to its customers and for understanding that quality performance is closely related to supply chain activities. HP, therefore, focuses a lot of attention on those supply chain activities.
In this chapter we discuss the roles of purchasing, supplier development, logistics, and other supply chain functions. In the appendix to Chapter 9 , we also introduce some statistical quality control tools that are used to evaluate the inputs provided from suppliers. Remember that the performance of your suppliers directly affects your reliability and your ability to satisfy cus- tomers. As a result, the supplier is key. This connective relationship between suppliers, produc- ers, and consumers is both important and timely as firms are attempting to improve quality along with on-time performance. This is a major theme of this chapter.
THE VALUE CHAIN
To understand the supply chain , we first discuss the economic concept of the value chain. Michael Porter, 2 the noted economist and author, identified a systematic means for examining all the activities a firm performs and how those activities interact. The value chain is a tool that disaggregates a firm into its core activities to help reduce costs and identify sources of competi- tiveness. It is part of the value system that consists of a network of value chains. The value chain and core activities that are performed by any company include inbound logistics, operations, outbound logistics, marketing and sales, and service.
1 Billington, C., “Strategic Supply Chain Management,” OR/MS Today (April 1994): 20–26. 2 Porter, M., On Competition (Cambridge, MA: Harvard School Press, 2008).
220 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Figure 9-1 shows Porter’s value chain. Notice that this is a chain for a single firm; however, the firm’s suppliers have value chains also. The core activities shown in the figure are termed value-chain activities because they are the tasks that add value for the customer. If a firm performs these core functions well, the result is high customer satisfaction. Non-value-chain activities typi- cally have costs but no effect on the customer and are referred to as the hidden factory . The hidden factory contains all the bureaucratic processes that are not part of the core activities in Figure 9-1 .
The Chain of Customers
From a quality perspective, an interesting variation of the value chain is the concept of the chain of customers . 3 Looking at the activities along the value chain sequentially, we see that the links in the value chain are really people performing different functions. The chain of customers is revealed when you view the step in the chain after you as your own customer. This means that if you work at workstation 4 in a process at the core of the value chain, you will make sure that the work you do is absolutely impeccable before you release it to your “customer” in workstation 5. This chain extends from raw materials through supplier firms to the producing firm, with the final link in the chain being the ultimate consumer of the product. The notion is that if each of us along a chain works to satisfy our own customer, the final customer will be very satisfied, and our products and services will be free of defects and mistakes.
Managing the Supply Chain
The concept of supply-chain management extends the economic concept of the value chain. Figure 9-2 shows a rendering of a supply chain. Notice that it includes several suppliers, plants, distribution centers, and customer groups. This is a useful extension of the value chain because it provides a more realistic picture of the value chain. Notice that the value chain focuses on activ- ities such as inbound and outbound logistics. These are supply-chain activities. One of the most significant aspects of the value chain is the linkage between a series of suppliers and consumers. This linkage is especially tenuous because it involves the complex interaction of logistics, sys- tems, and human behavior. These linkages and relationships between suppliers and customers have undergone radical changes in the past decade. Much of this chapter focuses on this linkage.
SUPPLIER ALLIANCES
Managing inbound logistics in the supply chain involves working with suppliers who provide parts, raw materials, components, and services. As we have already discussed, there has been a trend toward developing closer working relationships with fewer suppliers. Given this new
Support activities include accounting, legal, design, advertising, etc.
After- Sales Service
Inbound Logistics
Supplier Management
Transformation Processes
Outbound Logistics
FIGURE 9-1 Value Chain Activities Source: Based on M. Porter, Competitive Advantage: Creating and Sustaining Superior Performance (New York: Free Press, 1995).
3 Schonberger, R., Building a Chain of Customers (New York: Free Press, 2007).
Chapter 9 • Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 221
approach to suppliers, a big part of quality improvement requires developing and assisting sup- pliers so they can provide needed products with low levels of defects, in a reliable manner, while conforming to requirements. Several approaches to improving suppliers result in what are called supplier alliances . Inspired by lean purchasing approaches learned from Japanese industry, supplier–alliance relationships have emerged that treat suppliers as de facto subsidiaries of the customer organization. We say de facto subsidiaries because as information is shared and
Raw Materials
Factory
Warehouse
Wholesale Distributors and Retailers Retailers
FIGURE 9-2 A Supply Chain
222 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
communications are improved, the relationship begins to resemble a parent/subsidiary instead of separate firms.
As shown in Table 9-1 , a number of systems are used to help develop suppliers. Single sourcing refers to narrowing down the list of approved suppliers for a single component to just one supplier. Companies that are uncomfortable with using a single supplier may use dual sourc- ing , where the number of approved suppliers is reduced to just a few. Dual sourcing reduces the exposures of having a single supplier.
Supplier evaluation is a tool used by many firms to differentiate and discriminate between suppliers. Supplier evaluations are often recorded on report cards in which potential suppliers are rated based on criteria such as quality, technical capability, or ability to meet schedule demands.
Sole-source filters that are used in many companies rely on external validation of quality programs. The external validation comes from outside examiners and registrars that are used in these processes. This gives customers the comfort that outside authorities have given your com- pany a sort of seal of approval. Two of the most commonly used filters are the Baldrige criteria and ISO 9000:2008 ( Chapter 3 ). In these cases, companies must show either that they are using the Baldrige criteria to improve or that they have become ISO 9000:2008 registered. The ISO 9000:2008 filter is used commonly in the international community.
Many companies perform lengthy inspections of their suppliers that involve long-term visits and evaluations. These programs are often called supplier certification or qualification programs if the focus is entirely on evaluation. If the focus is on helping the supplier to improve by training the supplier over long periods of time, they are termed supplier development programs .
Another tool used often is the supplier audit . This is similar to supplier certification except that a team of auditors visits the supplier and then provides results of the audit to the cus- tomer. The audits are performed to ensure that product quality and procedural objectives are being met. Supplier audits tend not to have the developmental component that is found in sup- plier development programs.
We should mention there are drawbacks to single sourcing. When there are few suppliers, there is more exposure to interruption of supply. For example, General Motors experienced a major shutdown as a result of single sourcing from a single supplier named Delphi. If labor rela- tions are not solid, single sourcing can have the effect of shifting negotiating power to unions in supplier plants. Other problems include possible interruptions because of transportation prob- lems, quality problems, disagreements concerning pricing, or global security problems (see A Closer Look at Quality 9-1 ).
TABLE 9-1 Supplier Development Approaches Single sourcing Dual sourcing Supplier evaluation Sole-source filters ISO 9000:2008 Baldrige Award Supplier certification or qualification programs Supplier development programs Supplier audits Alliances
Video Clip: Supplier Development at Nylamode
Chapter 9 • Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 223
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 9-1 Supply Chains and Terrorism 4
Since the terrorist attacks on New York and Washington in 2001, many companies are shifting their sup- ply chain priorities from squeezing costs through inventory reduction to limiting the consequences of transportation disruptions on production. The concept of lean-inventory management systems feeding directly into production lines—in other words, lean manufacturing—has been the goal of companies looking to save money through more efficient supply chains. However, the September 11 tragedy intro- duced a new reality for supply chain managers faced with grounded flights, closed borders, and lengthy inspections of truck cargoes. “People are coming to see they need contingency plans so that in case something happens, there’s a stockpile of critical parts somewhere,” says Bruce Bond, a supply chain analyst at Gartner Group, a tech-consulting leader.
To minimize the effect of such transportation disruptions, companies are reconsidering their lean inventory strategies in favor of storing larger quantities of critical parts closer to manufacturing facili- ties. Arrow Electronics, Inc., a $13-billion electronic components distributor in Melville, New York, that has 13 distribution centers around the United States, is working with customers to determine whether it can help them maintain miniwarehouses near production lines through the use of Arrow’s proprietary inventory management software. Arrow might open and manage such a warehouse, or a customer might open it, and Arrow might provide the management services.
Bill Forster, Arrow’s vice president of worldwide logistics, says that the company is increasing the inventory of parts it holds for customers and sees the same trend among some of its largest custom- ers. For Arrow, decisions about whether to increase inventory depend on a number of factors, including the importance of a given part to one or more customers and whether an inability to deliver the part could halt production.
Boosting stores of easily accessible inventory may become necessary as tighter security results in more frequent—and longer—cargo inspections by U.S. Customs at airports, on highways, and at shipping ports. “Every day we hear different requirements for the inspection of materials,” Forster says. Among those requirements are hand searches and x-ray examinations of cargo, as well as additional testing, such as passing shipments through compression chambers to make sure that no device being shipped is set to explode at reduced atmospheric pressure. One airline that before September 11 required no waiting time for cargo inspection now requires at least 24 hours, Forster says.
Ford Motor Company is one company that has adjusted its lean-inventory model. The automaker has stockpiled engines from Canada and other critical parts manufactured outside the United States. Ford is also reevaluating its global-sourcing strategy for critical parts.
Experts say that the ability to adapt quickly to sudden changes in supply chain activity and cus- tomer demand will be imperative. Hon Industries, a $2.04-billion office furniture manufacturer in Muscatine, Iowa, is an example of this adaptability. The day of the attacks, the company received a 20-truckload rush order for office furniture from a customer in the Northeast. The customer that placed the order was setting up offices for companies affected by the World Trade Center attack, and it needed the furniture within five days. Jim McKeone, Hon’s investor relations manager, says filling the order was a daunting task, considering that the company is a lean manufacturer, generally requiring two weeks to build orders and not holding inventory of its products.
Many CFOs, says Gartner’s Bond, are starting to think that it is more economical to minimize supply chain disruptions by building up inventory selectively, deploying supply chain software that allows flexibility in production scheduling, and working closely with suppliers to meet unexpected needs rather than to be forced to halt production at a factory with a lean manufacturing model. Agility once meant the ability to respond to whatever a customer wanted. Now, Bond says, people are saying it “has to include the idea of planning for disruptions in the supply chain that could keep you from serving your customer at all.”
4 Adapted from Gonsalves, A., and Konicki, S., “In Search of the Big Picture: Supply Chains,” Information Week , 8 October, 2001: 34–40.
224 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Single-Sourcing Examples
In the 1980s, a defective rate of 5% for a supplier was acceptable. In this new century, parts- per-million levels of quality are expected from suppliers. In addition, many companies such as Mercedes-Benz are moving to single-source suppliers. However, outsourcing is not with- out its difficulties (see Quality Highlight 9-1 ). Other changes have occurred as well. Pur- chasing groups were viewed in the past as in-house experts who expedited orders and solved materials supply problems. The dollars spent on supply were not critical as long as parts were available for manufacture. Strategies are different now. The way to develop a supplier is to have adequate communications, linear production schedules, and time to make neces- sary changes. Supplier contacts are one way to ensure adequate communication. Assigning one person or a team to each supplier can reduce the potential for miscommunication. Another way to communicate is through supplier programs where the product or service producer ensures supplier access to information. This provides open communication on mutually critical issues between the customer and the supplier. Another issue of communica- tion between suppliers and customers is that production schedules must match. Suppliers constantly must be updated as to when the customers need products with lead times becom- ing shorter.
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 9-1 A Bumpy Ride at Boeing 5
While we have discussed alliances and partnering with suppliers, if not managed correctly this practice is not without its problems. Consider the case of the Boeing 787 Dreamliner. What was initially viewed as a smooth journey to the Valhalla of energy efficiency and high-tech wizardry, the trip for Boeing has been turbulent indeed. One of the contributors to Boeing’s poor performance in this project may be poorly managed outsourcing.
Boeing’s last major aircraft, the 777, was hailed as a model of effective project management. This included a series on PBS extolling Boeing’s success on the 777. However, as of this writing, the 787 is over three years overdue and billions of dollars over budget.
The culture of Boeing was deeply ingrained in engineering and design. Most of this was centrally located in Seattle. With the 787, much of their engineering and production were outsourced to a com- plex supply chain of about 50 suppliers.
According to Tom McCarty, president of the Society of Professional Engineering Employees in Aerospace, “Plane-making is best done by a group of engineers and builders working in close proxim- ity without the distractions of language barriers, cultural differences, and bureaucracy.” While this is the expected view of labor unions, international outsourcing is very much a political as well as an operational necessity as over 80% of Boeing’s sales are outside of the United States. However, Boeing may have been overly aggressive in outsourcing two-thirds of its production. According to McCarty, “Now with the 787, management felt they knew how to outsource the design jobs. Turns out they didn’t.”
Figure 9-3 shows a picture of Boeing 787 subsystems and suppliers. As you can see, this is a large number of suppliers to manage. Often, there is not a playbook that shows the best way to manage such large networks of suppliers. Boeing has acknowledged these problems and the criticism they have received. Boeing CEO Jim McNerney stated, “In retrospect, our 787 game plan may have been overly ambitious, incorporating too many firsts all at once—in the application of new technologies, in revolu- tionary design-and-build processes, and in increased global sourcing of engineering and manufacturing content.”
5 Based on Peterson, K., “A Wing and a Prayer: Outsourcing at Boeing,” Reuters (January 2011).
Chapter 9 • Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 225
Electronic data interchange (EDI) is a system that aids customer and supplier communi- cation by linking together supplier and customer information systems. Customers now are help- ing suppliers to isolate bottlenecks in the operation, balance production systems, and reduce setup times in an effort to reduce lead times. For example, suppliers of seats to Chrysler Motor Corporation must be able to meet the schedule changes within 36 hours. Schedules are commu- nicated through an electronic data interchange link on a real-time basis.
Single sourcing has changed the landscape of purchasing. Prior to single sourcing, Xerox used 5,000 suppliers. Since implementing single sourcing, Xerox uses only 300 suppliers. Sup- pliers were chosen for their current quality practices and their willingness to work with Xerox to implement a quality improvement program. In Britain, dual or multisourcing has been chosen by many major customers, predominantly to avoid unfair pricing and the possibility of the custom- er’s production being disrupted by suppliers’ labor disputes. Having a limited set of suppliers also reduces shopping around for the best price.
The Dell Computer Company’s goal was to work with suppliers to figure out how to mini- mize the supply chain and hold the least amount of inventory. Personal computer production is characterized by a tremendous inventory control problem. Suppliers who win in this industry are suppliers who are able to help the personal computer producers to overcome this inventory con- trol problem. Dell is responding by bringing in suppliers who understand the personal computer production business. If suppliers don’t understand your business, you end up creating buffers that translate into inventory.
Lockheed-Martin was a defense contractor (now merged with Boeing) that worked closely with its suppliers. At its Aeronautics Materials Management Center, a special program for sup- pliers was developed. This program was called the Star Supplier Program. Lockheed-Martin developed criteria that each supplier had to meet. Quality was a top requirement. Each Star Sup- plier was required to use statistical process control, have a 0% rejection rate at the point of inspection for six months, and achieve zero nonconformance—documented at the Aeronautics Materials Management Center. The next requirement was to meet scheduled delivery dates. A supplier had to maintain a 98% concurrency to contract delivery schedules. Finally, the cost cri- teria were used, which showed favorably improving price trends and favorable purchase order administration.
Forward fuselage Spirit (Wichita, Kan.)
Center wing box Fuji (Japan)
Wing Mitsubishi (Japan)
Fixed and movable leading edge Spirit(Tulsa, Okla.)
Main landing gear wheel well Kawasaki(Japan)
Aft fuselage Vought (Charleston, S.C.)
Fixed trailing edge Kawasaki(Japan) Movable trailing edge Boeing (Australia)
Forward fuselage Kawasaki (Japan)
Wingtips KAL-ASD (Korea)
Center fuselage Alenia (Italy)
Horizontal stabilizer Alenia (Italy)
Tail fin Boeing (Frederickson, WA)
PARTS NOT SHOWN Landing gear Messier-Dowty (England) Wing/body fairing Boeing (Canada) Landing gear doors Boeing (Canada) Cargo access doors Saab (Sweden) Passenger entry doors Latecoere (France) Engines GE (Evendale, Ohio) Engines Rolls-Royce (England) Engine nacelles Goodrich (Chula Vista, Calif.)
FIGURE 9-3 Boeing 787 Suppliers Source: Based on www.seattlepi.com/ .
226 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Perhaps the most extreme example of supplier partnering comes from the Bose Corpora- tion. Bose has implemented what it terms JIT II. In this effort, Bose eliminated a large part of its purchasing department and empowered suppliers to write their own purchase orders. This in effect made the suppliers responsible for managing inventories and keeping inventory costs low. This is now called vendor-managed inventory (VMI) .
SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT
Supplier development has to do with the activities a buyer undertakes to improve the perfor- mance of its suppliers. Some of these activities may include supplier evaluation, supplier training, consultation, sharing data, and sharing processes. Companies such as Toyota and Honeywell have become very good at developing suppliers. However, recent data suggests that many companies do not have adequate supplier development programs. There is much work left to be done in this area.
There are seven steps for supplier development. First, you identify critical products and services . This involves identifying strategic products and components (those that are difficult to obtain, high costs, or high volume). Second, identify critical suppliers . These may be suppliers who provide strategic components but do not meet quality or reliability objectives or suppliers who do not meet schedules. Third, form crossfunctional teams . The buyer forms a cross- functional team to work with the supplier. Fourth, meet with supplier top management . This meeting is to discuss details of strategic alignment, performance expectations and measurement, and processes for improving. Fifth, identify key projects . These occur when there is agreement about how the supplier needs to improve and where. Projects are selected in the same way Six Sigma projects are selected, by criteria such as impact, ROI, feasibility, and required invest- ments. Sixth, define details of agreement . This definition involves cost (and benefit sharing), commitments of resources, metrics for improvement, project charters, accountability, and deliv- erables. Finally, monitor status and modify strategies . To ensure success, management must actively monitor progress and revise strategies as needed.
There are some dimensions of supplier development that have emerged in the literature. These include providing resources for development programs, trying to determine the right num- bers of suppliers to use, and finding ways to measure procurement efficacy. 6
Note that many companies confuse supplier evaluation with supplier development. These are not synonyms. Implicit to supplier development is the expenditure of resources designed to improve the performance of the supplier. This improvement may occur over a long period of time—sometimes months or years. Many companies couple this with expectations for shared cost reductions. For example, Toyota sets goals for cost reductions with its suppliers. If the target is 10%, Toyota may ask for a cost reduction of 5% and provide the other 5% benefit to the sup- plier. Suppliers who successfully complete development activities are often designated as pre- ferred suppliers due to their alignment with customer needs. Quality Highlight 9-2 shows how 3M evaluates its suppliers.
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 9-2 Integrating Forward along the Supply Chain: 3M Dental Products Division 7
A customer satisfaction rating of “good” is no longer good enough for 3M Dental Products Division (DPD), a Minnesota-based supplier of products used around the world. The 700-employee division of 3M has determined that only by striving to earn grades of “excellent” in all product and service areas can
6 Foster, S. T., “Furthering the Study of Global Supply Chain Quality Management,” Volume 18, Number 2 Quality Management Journal pages 7–10, (2011). 7 Adapted with permission from the Malcolm Baldrige Award Profiles of Winners, 2011.
Chapter 9 • Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 227
it set clear goals for performance improvement, continue to increase sales, and boost productivity at industry-leading rates.
Pursuit of excellence explains why 3M DPD’s customer surveys no longer combine “good” and “excellent” responses in a single category, why it has developed a comprehensive network of customer “listening posts,” and why it has built an information system that tracks the purchasing decisions of dentists. It also accounts for how 3M DPD sets its priorities—by concentrating people and resources on opportunities most likely to improve products and services beyond customer expectations.
The division’s careful reading of customer requirements drives a finely tuned innovation process that delivers a steady stream of new or improved products. Products introduced within the last five years now account for 45% of total annual sales, up from 12% in 1992.
3M DPD manufactures and markets more than 1,300 dental products, including restorative materials, crown and bridge materials, dental adhesives, and infection-control products. Most of its 700 employees are based at its St. Paul, Minnesota, headquarters and at its manufacturing and distribu- tion facility in Irvine, California.
In the United States, where it has a leading share of the market, 3M DPD competes with more than 100 manufacturers of dental products. Sales and distribution to U.S. dentists are carried out through a network of independent distributors. In foreign markets, the division uses 3M subsidiaries for sales, marketing, and customer support. Sales of 3M DPD products outside the United States account for 65% of the division’s total sales.
3M DPD aims “to become THE supplier of choice” of dental professionals worldwide. Setting a clear course to achieve this aim is the objective of the division’s systematic strategic planning process, cited as an industry best practice by Fortune magazine. Led by a steering committee of top executives and senior managers, the process is designed to build consensus on what needs to be improved and how it will be accomplished. More than 20% of employees participate. The result is a 10-year vision, a detailed 5-year strategic plan, and a 1-year operating plan.
For each priority improvement, the steering committee negotiates with the appropriate depart- ment or functional unit to establish the anticipated business impact, determine resource allocations, and set metrics and target values for assessing progress.
The Employee Contribution and Development Plan is the division’s chief personnel appraisal tool. It sets individual goals in the areas of business results, team effectiveness, and employee develop- ment and is used to determine performance ratings and to guide promotion decisions.
3M DPD’s measurement system—the Business Performance Management Matrix—provides an easy-to-grasp framework for aggregating performance measures and for directly linking these measures to key business drivers and goals.
Most dentists in the United States and Europe—the division’s largest markets—already use 3M DPD products. Future growth will depend largely on expanding existing customers’ options—and spending—for 3M dental products. To do this, the division must have a thorough knowledge of cus- tomer requirements.
The division has graded the dentist market, resulting in five groups that reflect differences in satisfaction, purchasing behavior, referrals, repurchases, and number of 3M DPD products used. In- house and third-party surveys, focus groups, and hands-on evaluations are among the wide variety of methods that the division uses to listen to and learn from dentists in each segment. In addition, virtually all customer contacts—from visits by field representatives to calls to the technical hotline—provide additional information that also is entered into the division’s customer information system. This extensive database provides the information necessary to determine whether specific products and services are meeting key customer satisfaction goals and to spot opportunities for new products.
Insights into changing customer requirements—combined with knowledge of technological, societal, and environmental trends—are the starting point for product and process innovations. Dentists, distributors, and major suppliers are involved in the division’s systematic approach to translating key customer requirements into design requirements, prototypes, and—ultimately—reliable, quality products.
Continually raising the bar for performance improvement, 3M DPD is realizing benefits in nearly all facets of its business. Over the last 10 years the division has doubled global sales and market share.
228 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Supplier Awards
Many times, companies will provide awards to outstanding suppliers. This provides an opportu- nity to celebrate supplier performance that is best of the best. Some of these awards are based on the Baldrige criteria or are decided by a committee within the buyer’s company. An example of a supplier award is the Ford World Excellence Award. Their program includes Gold, Silver, and Recognition level awards.
Supplier Relationship Management Systems (SRMS)
Elsewhere in this text, we discuss customer relationship management systems (CRMS). For upstream activities, there are similar systems called supplier relationship management sys- tems (SRMS) . These systems include spend analytics, sourcing execution, procurement execu- tion, payment, supplier scorecarding, and performance monitoring. In SAS ERP systems, the SRMSs have the following capabilities:
• Create complete spend transparency. • Develop a comprehensive, accurate profile of the supplier base. • Identify opportunities for optimal sourcing of materials, equipment, and services. • Consolidate and prioritize suppliers based on quality, performance, and on-time delivery. • Ensure contract compliance and reduce maverick spending. • Ensure the quality of purchased items. • Ensure appropriate levels of supply.
APPLYING THE CONTINGENCY PERSPECTIVE TO SUPPLIER PARTNERING
Different firms take different approaches to supplier development. Remembering the contin- gency perspective discussed in Chapter 1 , you should not be surprised. Apparently, one variable that affects what customers want from their suppliers is the customer’s position in the supply chain.
A SUPPLIER DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM: ISO/TS 16949:2009
Now that we have discussed supplier development conceptually, let’s look at a specific example of a supplier development program—ISO/TS 16949. The goal of developing your suppliers is based on the need to provide high quality to the customer. Because variability is anathema to quality, the supplier’s processes must be consistent with those of the customer. In the late 1980s, U.S. automakers developed certification programs for suppliers. The General Motors program was called “Targets for Excellence,” and Ford used a program called “Q1.” With the increase in popularity of ISO 9000, suppliers asked auto companies to adopt a single standard for certifying suppliers. The result, called QS 9000 , provided a common standard for DaimlerChrysler, Gen- eral Motors, and Ford. This standard has gone through an update and was supplanted by ISO/TS 16949. The original ISO/TS 16949 was last updated in 2009.
ISO/TS 16949
The ISO/TS 16949 standard applies only to automotive companies. ISO/TS 16949 is an Interna- tional Standards Organization (ISO) Technical Specification that aligns existing automotive quality system requirements within the global automotive industry. ISO/TS 16949 specifies the quality system requirements for the design/development, production, and, where relevant, instal- lation and servicing of automotive-related products.
ISO/TS 16949 was written by the International Automotive Task Force (IATF). The IATF consists of an international group of vehicle makers including Ford, General Motors, and
Chapter 9 • Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 229
Chrysler, as well as several automotive trade associations. Representatives and subcommittees of TC 176 also helped to prepare ISO/TS 16949. We discuss ISO/TS 16949 in more depth later.
ISO/TS 16949 is based on the model in Figure 9-4 . This model shows that ISO/TS 16949 is closely aligned with ISO 9000:2008 in that it is founded on a systems view of automotive pro- duction. This system for continual improvement involves management responsibility; resource management; product realization; and measurement, analysis, and improvement.
The sections of ISO/TS 16949 8 are shown in Table 9-2 . We discuss sections 4 through 8 in more detail.
Continual Improvement of the Quality Management System
Customers
Customers
Value-Adding Activities Information Flow
Input
Key
Output Requirements
SatisfactionResource Management
Measurement, Analysis, and Improvement
Management Responsibility
Product Realization
Product
FIGURE 9-4 Model of a Process-Based Quality Management System
8 The facts for this section are drawn from Technical Specification ISO/TS 16949, International Standards Organization, 2006.
TABLE 9-2 ISO/TS 16949 Sections 0. Introduction 6. Resource management 1. Scope 7. Product realization 2. Normative reference 8. Measurement, analysis, and improvement 3. Terms and definitions Annex—Control plan 4. Quality management system Bibliography 5. Management responsibility
230 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Quality Management System
For the quality management system, suppliers must recognize key processes and document these processes. They must establish sequences and linkages for these processes. The organization must determine how effective their operations are; make resources and information available in sufficient quality and quantity to run the business; monitor, measure, and analyze the business to ensure effective operations; and take actions to ensure the planned results are attained and con- tinual improvements are being made.
Management Responsibility
For this section of ISO/TS 16949, the extent to which management is committed to the develop- ment and implementation of quality management and continuous improvement is documented. Management is responsible for developing policy, communicating with the organization relative to customer service, establishing quality objectives, conducting managerial reviews, and provid- ing resources. For example, managers with responsibility and authority for corrective actions will need to be informed when products do not meet specifications and see that corrective action is taken to ameliorate the problems.
Resource Management
For management to fulfill its responsibility, it must provide resources. These resources are used to maintain the quality management system and to meet customer requirements. This includes train- ing and development for human resources. Management is required to provide infrastructure such as bricks and mortar, equipment, and support systems. These must be planned and implemented properly. A safe, clean, and adequate work environment is established for worker satisfaction.
Product Realization
Product and processes should be adequately planned, including quality objectives for the prod- ucts. Customer-related processes should be designed in a way that customer needs are fully considered and regulatory requirements are met. This section considers all aspects of product and process design as well as purchasing, suppliers, control plans, setups, preventive mainte- nance, traceability, and many other aspects of designing and producing products.
Measurement, Analysis, and Improvement
For this requirement, the company needs to provide documentation that it can demonstrate prod- uct conformity, quality management system conformity, and continual improvement of the qual- ity management system. This includes aspects such as statistical tools, measurement systems, customer satisfaction measurement, internal audits, and other considerations.
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND STATISTICAL SAMPLING TECHNIQUES
Although we have focused on developing standards so that the receiving firm has confidence in the quality of materials received from the supplier, there are times when the receiving firm must inspect incoming materials from its suppliers. Acceptance sampling is the technique used to verify that incoming goods from a supplier adhere to quality standards. Acceptance sampling inspection can range from 100% of the delivery to a relatively few items from which the receiv- ing firm draws inferences about the whole shipment.
Is Acceptance Sampling Needed?
Acceptance sampling is controversial. Some critics of the technique believe the assumption in acceptance sampling that a percentage will be defective or less than perfect (called acceptable
Chapter 9 • Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 231
quality level , or AQL) is counter to Deming’s concepts of continual improvement. However, there is still need for acceptance sampling in many different circumstances. See a situation where acceptance sampling and testing may be needed in A Closer Look at Quality 9-2 . Following are some examples of when acceptance sampling might be needed:
When dealing with unproven suppliers
During start-ups and when building new products
When products can be damaged in shipment
When dealing with extremely sensitive products that can be damaged easily
When products can spoil during shipment
When problems with a certain supplier have been noticed in the production process that bring the supplier’s performance into question
We have provided a short discussion of acceptance sampling in this chapter. For more detail on acceptance sampling, see the Appendix at the end of this chapter.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 9-2 For RFID to Take Hold, Reliability Needs to Improve 9
Radio frequency identification (RFID) tags are an important technology for supply chain management. For example, consider the supply chain of a hospital where the patient flows through the process. An elderly woman dozes quietly in her hospital bed, tucked under layers of blankets. Her doctor stops by on his rounds and clicks on a wireless tablet PC, which is equipped with an RFID reader. This device trans- mits a signal to an RFID tag in the woman’s hospital bracelet, although it’s hidden by the bedding. The tag transmits information to the PC, which is integrated with the hospital’s information management system. On the display, the doctor sees the patient’s name, her previously administered medications, plus recently collected vital information, such as temperature, heart rate, and blood pressure. Without disturbing the patient or having to check back at the nursing station, the doctor has received the accurate, up-to-date information needed to monitor the patient’s progress.
The patient may not be real but the application is. The hospital, Jacobi Medical Center in the Bronx, benefits tremendously from an RFID system. According to CIO Daniel Morreale, “We get 100% accuracy in identifying patients and an overall savings of clinician time because doctors and nurses get the patient information they need at the bedside.” This is just one example of RFID usage in business. Businesses with logistics operations have been quick to embrace RFID. Large organizations such as Walmart and the U.S. Department of Defense are mandating the use of RFID in their supply chain activities. However, there are concerns about RFID. They need to be nearly 100% reliable. The current standard is that pallet labels need to have a 100% read rate. That read rate is also nearly the expectation for individual items. Cost is also a consideration with one major retailer stating that they will adopt RFID as soon as the technology cost drops below 1 cent per tag.
It is expected that “RFID will go through a process similar to what happened 20 years ago with bar-codes,” says Dan Mullen, president of AIM Global. “Initially, people thought they couldn’t afford the technology. As it became more widespread, the payback grew. Now companies couldn’t do without it. The emergence of RFID in the retail supply chain will drive further adoption. As companies imple- ment the technology deeper within their own operations, the return on investment will grow and applica- tions will expand.” However, they need to be reliable.
9 Adapted from “RFID After Compliance: Integration and Payback,” BusinessWeek, 20 November, 2004: 91–98.
232 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
BUILDING AN UNDERSTANDING OF SUPPLY CHAIN QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Recent work has been performed in the area of supply chain quality management that is helping us to understand this field better. A question remains that as business and engineering schools place more emphasis on supply chain management, what impact will this have on how we approach and teach quality management? Although our understanding is still preliminary, we are beginning to create a body of knowledge in this area. Supply chain quality management (SCQM) is defined as a systems-based approach to performance improvement that leverages opportunities created by upstream and downstream linkages with suppliers and customers. 10
In a recent study of supply chain quality practices, we asked supply chain managers to rank the quality tools they used. The ranking is shown in Table 9-3 . Note that all of these approaches and topics are addressed in this book.
10 For a review of recent research in supply chain quality, see Journal of Operations Management 26, 4 (2008) [special issue on supply chain quality], edited by S. Thomas Foster, Jr.
TABLE 9-3 Rankings of Tools for Supply Chain Professionals
Variable Ranking
Training 1 Data management 2 Supply chain management 3 Customer relationship management 4 Leadership 5 Benchmarking 6 Project management 7 Surveys 8 Complaint resolution 9 Supplier development 10
Summary In this chapter we focused on the front end of the supply chain. Supplier development holds the greatest quality-related benefit for manufacturing and services firms wishing to improve quality. After all, if you purchase components or supplies from another firm, to ensure high quality you need a process for making sure you can believe in the products and services you are receiving.
The ISO standard TS 16949 was presented here as a good example of how automakers are developing and evaluating their suppliers. Supplier development efforts have resulted in greatly improved product quality for many firms. Although this is one representative example, several firms are using approaches that are extensions of ISO 9000:2008. For newer suppliers, or where the situation dictates, acceptance sampling may be needed. This is discussed further in the appen- dix to this chapter.
As firms learn more about developing suppliers, new practices will emerge. The eventual goal of supplier development is that the supplier resembles a de facto subsidiary of your com- pany. This closer relationship between supplier and customer holds great potential for improved quality in products and services.
Chapter 9 • Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 233
Key Terms Acceptance sampling Chain of customers Dual sourcing Electronic data interchange
(EDI) Hidden factory ISO/TS 16949 QS 9000
Single sourcing Sole-source filters Supplier alliances Supplier audit Supplier certification or
qualification programs Supplier development
Supplier development programs
Supplier evaluation Supplier relationship
management systems (SRMS)
Supply chain
Supply chain quality management (SCQM)
Value chain Value-chain activities Value system Vendor-managed inventory
(VMI)
Discussion Questions 1. What is the supply value chain? How does the supply value chain help organizations manage their sup-
ply chains? 2. Describe the concept of the hidden factory. How can a realization that the hidden factory exists help
managers? 3. Think about a job you have had or an organization where you volunteered. Did this organization have
a hidden factory? If so, describe at least two activities that you would associate with the organization’s hidden factory.
4. Describe the concept of chain of customers. How does this concept benefit the ultimate consumer of a product or service?
5. What is the purpose of single sourcing? How can single sourcing help firms meet their quality objectives?
6. What are two of the most commonly used single-source filters? Do you believe these sources are appropriate? Explain your answer.
7. What is the purpose of a supplier certification or qualification program? What is the difference between a supplier certification program and a supplier development program?
8. How does electronic data interchange facilitate the supply chain process? 9. How does the contingency perspective apply to supplier partnering? 10. What is a supplier audit? How does a supplier audit differ from a supplier certification program? 11. Describe the concept referred to as supplier alliances. How does this concept differ from the tradi-
tional form of the supplier–customer relationship? 12. ISO/TS 16949 is a concept developed by Chrysler, Ford, and General Motors. Explain what ISO/TS
16949 is and how it has helped its developers. 13. Is ISO/TS 16949 a good thing for auto suppliers as well as auto manufacturers? Explain your answer. 14. How does ISO/TS 16949 differ from ISO 9000:2008? Is the distinction between the two quality con-
cepts important for the adopters of ISO/TS 16949? 15. What is acceptance sampling? Is acceptance sampling needed?
CASES
Case 9-1 AT&T: Setting High Standards for Suppliers and Rewarding Supplier Performance AT&T: www.att.com/wireless
with telephone service, the company provides a full array of wireless communications products for individ- uals and businesses.
If you live in California or frequently call someone in the California area, you have invariably done business with AT&T (formerly SBC). AT&T provides telephone service to the majority of California’s residents. Along
234 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
In an effort to increase quality and decrease costs, AT&T has been working hard to find new ways to man- age its supply chain. The result has been the develop- ment of a comprehensive program that sets high standards for suppliers and rewards exemplary supplier performance. The program begins with training. All of AT&T’s procurement managers are required to partici- pate in an Applied Total Quality program. The program consists of six 30-hour courses that teach TQM and supplier management. Suppliers also are encouraged to participate in the program at no cost.
The requirements that AT&T places on its sup- pliers are demanding but are communicated clearly to the suppliers in advance. For its top suppliers, a con- tract is negotiated on a yearly basis that defines the objectives of the relationship between AT&T and the supplier for the next year. Senior managers from AT&T and the supplier meet twice a year to discuss the performance of the relationship and iron out any problems that have occurred. AT&T’s minor suppliers receive a one-page Supplier Quality Report every month. AT&T and the supplier agree on criteria for performance in advance (e.g., on-time delivery, invoic- ing accuracy), and the supplier receives a score each month from AT&T based on its record. Both the com- pany and its suppliers take these reports very seriously. If a supplier receives a poor score, it typically calls AT&T to provide an explanation or ask for suggestions for improvement.
Although the company’s approach to supply management sounds rigid, the company works hard to develop lasting positive relationships with its suppli- ers. The company maintains a steady flow of commu- nications with its suppliers to work through any problem that might arise. For example, the company
has a toll-free 800 number that suppliers and potential suppliers can use to familiarize themselves with com- pany requirements. AT&T also asks its suppliers to tell it how it is doing, although this program has been only partially successful. According to the former executive director of contracting and supplier manage- ment at AT&T, “Suppliers are always leery of telling customers about their problems.” 11 As a result of sup- plier reluctance in this area, they are thinking about making the supplier feedback reports a requirement for certification.
To its credit, AT&T goes to great lengths to reward supplier performance. Goals are in place:
1. To communicate to suppliers that their internal quality processes and performance results are critical.
2. To demonstrate that quality pervades all aspects of the business relationship.
3. To share expectations and information to build partnerships toward world-class performance.
4. To recognize a supplier’s overall level of quality. There are three levels of recognition including the Gold Award, the Silver Award, and the Bronze Award. The Gold Award is awarded to the com- pany’s top suppliers. To win this award, a supplier must “delight” the company by providing supe- rior products/services and customer service for more than a year.
As the telecommunications industry continues to become more competitive, AT&T’s efforts to maximize the performance of its supply chain will undoubtedly intensify. Setting high standards for suppliers and reward- ing performance are the essence of this philosophy of supply chain management.
Discussion Questions
1. Do you believe that AT&T’s standards for its sup- pliers are too rigid? Why or why not?
2. Is the “Supplier Quality Report” a good idea or are monthly reports too frequent and intrusive? Explain your answer.
3. Do you believe suppliers should receive awards and designations of merit from the companies that purchase their products? Explain your answer.
Case 9-2 Managing the Supply Chain at Honeywell Honeywell: www.honeywell.com
If you own a home, work in an office building, or travel by air, the chances are excellent that a Honey-
well product has affected your life. The Honeywell Corporation is the world’s leading maker of control
11 George, S., and Weimerskirch, A., Total Quality Management (New York: Wiley, 1994), p. 190 .
Chapter 9 • Managing Supplier Quality in the Supply Chain 235
systems and related components for buildings, homes, industry, space, and aviation. The most recognizable Honeywell product is the automatic thermostat control for home heating that can be found in millions of U.S. homes. Less recognizable Honeywell products are used in commercial and military aircraft, industrial applications, home security systems, and the U.S. space program.
Like many companies, Honeywell is in a com- petitive environment that demands high-quality products at affordable prices. To meet these challenges, Honeywell has worked hard on its supply chain man- agement. In an effort to maximize the value that suppliers make to its business units, Honeywell has developed a distinctive approach to supplier manage- ment. The distinctive approach contains the following key components:
The company is shifting from a focus on price to a focus on total cost. As a result, the company does not always buy from the lowest price suppli- ers. Instead, it buys from the supplier that it believes will provide it the lowest cost in the “long term.”
The company is shifting toward longer- term relationships with its suppliers and is treat- ing its suppliers as if they are extensions of its own businesses rather than vendors.
The company is asking its suppliers to pro- vide business solutions, rather than simply drop- ping products off at the loading dock.
Rather than treating suppliers in an adver- sarial manner, Honeywell is treating its suppliers like business partners and is looking for opportu- nities to partner with suppliers in a wide variety of areas.
The motivation for these criteria is not grounded in better public relations or altruism, but in the belief that prudent supply chain management saves money and creates a competitive advantage. The company’s willingness to focus on issues other than price is cen- tral to the success of this philosophy. Commenting on this issue, a supply chain manager at Honeywell remarked, “We have to reengineer our mindset to focus on improving the benefits we can receive from the
suppliers versus just concentrating on prices. Many business organizations hold price so sacred that they miss the free things that suppliers will do for you.” 12 Good suppliers want to be closely scrutinized by their buyers, because it gives the suppliers a chance to showcase their on-time performance and other positive attributes.
The consistent theme that is reflected in all aspects of Honeywell’s approach to supply chain man- agement is an effort to maximize the value of its supplier relationships. The company asks a lot of its suppliers, from on-time deliveries to providing input on the design of Honeywell products. In exchange, Honeywell gives its preferred suppliers millions of dollars a year in business and conducts itself in a responsible manner by making payments on time and treating its suppliers with respect. This overall approach to supplier manage- ment creates what Honeywell believes is a win-win partnership between itself and its suppliers. The more Honeywell’s suppliers contribute to the profitability of its businesses, the more business Honeywell will give to its suppliers.
Although Honeywell is fully vested in its distinc- tive approach to supply chain management, the com- pany is also firmly committed to cost containment. Fortunately, supply chain management and cost con- tainment are not at odds at Honeywell. The firm is very careful about the suppliers it chooses and works hard to find the right mix of price and performance. Honeywell involves its suppliers in every aspect of improving the efficiency of the supply chain. This creates a healthy working relationship between Honeywell and its chan- nel partners.
Honeywell is firmly committed to prudent supply chain management. The company has quantified the results of its initiatives in several areas. For example, in terms of treating suppliers like business partners rather than arm’s-length vendors, the company has learned that “partners” rather than “vendors” produce more cost sav- ings, have better on-time delivery, supply better-quality products, and provide more suggestions for supply chain improvements. These results, along with positive results in other areas of the company’s approach to supply chain management, have affirmed to the company the value of its approach to supply chain management.
12 “How Honeywell Works to Gain Greater Value from Their Suppliers,” Supplier Selection & Management Report , The Institute of Management and Administration, http://www.ioma.com (2000).
236 Part 2 • Designing and Assuring Quality
Discussion Questions
1. Why does Honeywell spend so much time dealing with supply chain management issues? Wouldn’t the company be better off focusing on its own manufacturing operations? Explain your answer.
2. What aspect or aspects of Honeywell’s approach to supply chain management appear to be particularly
prudent? Can you suggest any additions to Hon- eywell’s supply chain management program?
3. Do you believe that Honeywell’s approach to sup- ply chain management creates a win-win situa- tion between the company and its suppliers? Why or why not?
CHAPTER 9 APPENDIX
Acceptance Sampling Fundamentals
Our problem is not just the outgoing; it starts with the incoming.
—S. T. Foster
In Chapter 9 , we introduced acceptance sampling. In this appendix, we start by discussing supply chain fundamentals. We then move into creating sampling plans. To understand when you should use these tools, refer to the discussion in Chapter 9 .
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING FUNDAMENTALS
We define acceptance sampling as a statistical quality control technique used in deciding to accept or reject a shipment of input or output. When compared with statistical quality control, acceptance sampling is defined by its occurrence after production has been completed. Accep- tance sampling inspection can occur at the beginning of the process, such as when receiving components, parts, or raw materials from a supplier. Or it can occur at the end of production, as in the case of final inspection. Again, we focus here on inspection of incoming materials. One interesting application of acceptance sampling occurs with seed producers. Because of the bio- logical nature of seed, a supplier can place the seed on a truck in perfect condition, and the seed can arrive in an unsuitable state. Therefore, large bulk purchasers of seed and other agricultural products are avid users of acceptance sampling techniques.
Note that there are different methods for developing sampling plans. We discuss how to develop sampling plans using Dodge and Romig tables and OC curves.
PRODUCER’S AND CONSUMER’S RISK
Producer’s risk is the risk associated with rejecting a shipment of materials that has good qual- ity. Think of it this way. You are the producer of a product that has high quality. However, your customer has concluded that your product has poor quality and returns the product to you. In this case, you have been judged inaccurately. Consumer’s risk is the exact opposite. As a consumer, you receive a shipment of poor-quality product and believe it has good quality. Therefore, you pay for the product, use it in your production process, and suffer the consequences.
Producer’s risk is denoted by alpha (!) and is called a type I error . Consumer’s risk is denoted by beta (") and is referred to as a type II error . Table 9A-1 contrasts alpha and beta risk. The goal of acceptance sampling is to reduce producer’s risk to low levels while maintaining consumer’s risk at acceptable levels.
TABLE 9A-1 Alpha and Beta Risk
State of Nature
Product Is Good Product Is Defective
Outcome Consumer accepts product OK Consumer’s risk "
Consumer rejects product Producer’s risk ! OK
9A-1
9A-2
ACCEPTABLE QUALITY LEVEL
The acceptable quality level (AQL) is the maximum percentage or proportion of nonconform- ing items or number of nonconformities in a lot or batch that can be considered satisfactory as a process average. The AQL concept has been troublesome to many who consider it to condone an acceptance of less-than-perfect quality. To statisticians, AQL simply denotes an economic deci- sion that is associated with producer’s risk.
LOT TOLERANCE PERCENT DEFECTIVE (LTPD)
Lot tolerance percent defective (LTPD) is the level of poor quality included in a lot of goods. The difference between AQL and LTPD is sometimes confusing to students. Lots of AQL or bet- ter usually should have an alpha (that is, for example, a 5%) or less chance of rejection. AQL relates to type I error or producer’s risk. Producer’s risk is the probability that good products will be rejected by the consumer. For example, if a consumer concludes that an automobile is a lemon even though it is a great vehicle, a type I error has occurred. Lots of LTPD or worse should have a beta (that is, say, a 10%) or less chance of acceptance. LTPD relates to type II error or con- sumer’s risk. Conversely, consumer’s risk is the chance that an automobile that seems perfect is really a lemon. There is, theoretically, only one combination of sample size ( n ) and acceptance number ( c ) that meets both conditions simultaneously. In practice, we will be unable to meet both conditions precisely and must choose a combination of n and c that approximates both con- ditions simultaneously.
n AND c
For the most part, the assignment of AQL, LTPD, alpha (!), and beta (") is a management deci- sion. Once these values have been determined, n and c can be determined; these values in turn define the sampling plan. The bottom line in acceptance sampling is that acceptance sampling plans are designed to give us two things: n and c , where
n # the sample size of a particular sampling plan
c # a number that, if exceeded by the number of defectives in the sample, causes rejection of the lot (acceptance number)
The average sampling plan can be stated in simple terms: n # 20 and c # 2. This clearly communicates the bounds of the sampling plan. That is, take a sample of 20 items, and if more than 2 are defective, reject the lot of materials. Remember that you should always randomize when selecting products from a supplier to be inspected.
OC CURVES
The operating characteristic (OC) curve provides an assessment of the probabilities of accep- tance for a shipment, given the existing quality of the shipment. An OC curve is constructed to show the probability of accepting individual lots when the percent defective of the various indi- vidual lots is known or assumed to be at a given level. These curves also can be used to develop sampling plans.
Figure 9A-1 shows an OC curve for an optimal sampling plan. This ideal sampling plan shows that given a probability of acceptance of 98%, this sampling plan should be used. In this example, the probability of accepting a lot of goods with less than 3% defective is 100%. This means the customer has considered the trade-offs and has determined that a lot of materials with only 3% defective is acceptable given the circumstances.
However, OC curves never appear like the ideal case. Figure 9A-2 shows OC curves for a sample size of n # 100 and c # [0, 1, 2, 3]. Notice that as c gets smaller, the OC curve gets
Chapter 9 • Appendix 9A-3
steeper. Generally speaking, this means that higher values of c lead to higher probabilities of accepting bad shipments (consumer’s risk). Also, higher values of n affect the OC curves in such a way that we have greater confidence we have accepted a good shipment.
Figure 9A-3 shows an OC curve for n # 50 and c # 2 (for a lot of size 200; N , the entire population # 200). This shows that the probability of accepting (Pa) a lot with 2% defective product is 92%. Also, the chance of accepting a lot of 12% defective product is 6%. This means that if a lot has 2% defective, and this sampling plan is used (i.e., n # 50, c # 2), then the pro- ducer’s risk is 8%. Notice that if the lot really has much poorer quality—say, 8% defective—the chance of acceptance is quite low, about 24%. This means that there is a consumer’s risk of 24% with the poor-quality lot.
Pr ob
ab ili
ty o
f a cc
ep ta
nc e
Lot fraction nonconforming
P'
Pa
.01
1.00
.02 .03 .04
FIGURE 9A-1 Perfect Operating Characteristic (OC) Curve
Sample size n = 100
c = 3
c = 2 c = 1
c = 0
1.0
.8
.6
.4
.2
0 .10 .20 .30 .50 .60 .70 .80 Quality of shipment
Pr ob
ab ili
ty o
f a cc
ep tin
g sh
ip m
en t
.40
FIGURE 9A-2 Various OC Curves
9A-4
BUILDING AN OC CURVE
There are two ways to construct OC curves. The first uses the binomial distribution, and the sec- ond, the Poisson distribution. For simplicity, we use the Poisson distribution. Using a sample size n and average percent defective p , we can develop an OC curve using a Poisson approximation of a binomial distribution.
EXAMPLE 9A-1 OC Curves
Problem: Let’s suppose we use a sampling plan with N # 200, n # 50, and c # 2. In the past, good-quality shipments from suppliers had about 1% defective, and poor-quality shipments had about 6% defective. We desire to know producer’s and consumer’s risk. Using Figure 9A-3 , compute these probabilities.
Solution: From Figure 9A-3 , it appears that the probability of acceptance of a good lot is 99%. This translates to a producer’s risk of 1%. It also appears that the probability of accepting a poor lot is 42%. This is consumer’s risk.
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0 0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14
Pr ob
ab ili
ty o
f a cc
ep ta
nc e,
P a
Fraction nonconforming
Good quality (AQL)
Poor quality (LTPD)
Producer’s Risk = = .08
Consumer’s Risk = = 0.24
α
β
FIGURE 9A-3 OC Curve for the Sampling Plan N ! 200, n ! 50, c ! 2
Chapter 9 • Appendix 9A-5
Rather than computing the distributions from formulas, we rely on tables that have been developed for simplicity in computing single-sampling plans . Single sampling means that we use only one value of c to make a decision. Multiple-sampling plans are discussed later. The Dodge–Romig table 1 in Figure 9A-4 shows a table that was developed to simplify such calcula- tions. While holding c and n constant, we can vary the percent defective p to calculate various points on the OC curve.
Steps in using Figure 9A-4 to develop an OC curve:
1. Select values of p for percent defective in a shipment. 2. Multiply these values of np (where n is your sample size). 3. Using these values of np , go to Figure 9A-4 and find Pa (probability of acceptance). 4. Draw the OC curve.
1 Dodge, H., and Romig, H., Sampling Inspection Tables (New York: Wiley, 1959).
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 0.00001
0.0001
0.001
0.01 0.1
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
0.9
0.99
0.999
0.9999
0.99999
0.00001
0.0001
0.001
0.01 0.1
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
0.9
0.99
0.999
0.9999
0.99999 c = 50c = 3
c = 2
c = 1
c = 0
c = 5
c = 0 c = 5
c = 6
0
1 2
3 4
5 6 7
89 10
15
20
30
40
30
20
15
10
4030201510987
10 9
8 7
6 5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
4 Pr
ob ab
ili ty
o f a
cc ep
tin g
sh ip
m en
t w ith
c or
fe w
er d
ef ec
tiv e
un its
. P a
Value of np
50
FIGURE 9A-4 Probability Curves for Poisson Distribution Source: H. F. Dodge and H. G. Romig, Sampling Inspection Tables (New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1959). Reprinted by permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
EXAMPLE 9A-2 Developing Single-Sampling Plans Using OC Curves and the Dodge-Romig Table
Problem: We would like to develop an OC curve for a good single-sampling plan using the Dodge-Romig table provided in Figure 9A-4 . Our sample size n is 60 and maximum c is 2.
Solution: Table 9A-2 shows the resulting values needed to construct the OC curve. The values of P a are drawn from the Dodge-Romig graph ( Figure 9A-4 ). Figure 9A-5 shows the resulting OC curve.
9A-6
ESTIMATING AQL AND LTPD
OC curves can be used to estimate both AQLs and LTPDs. MIL STD 105 (also known as ANSI/ ASQC Z1.4) is a military standard for sampling procedures and tables for attributes that state that AQLs and LTPDs of sampling plans should always be documented. Figure 9A-6 shows an OC curve for a single-sampling plan with n # 50 and c # 1. The AQL is generally stated with a 95% chance of acceptance (! # 0.05). In Figure 9A-6 , the AQL value is 72%. The LTPD is gen- erally stated at a 10% chance of acceptance. In this case, the LTPD value is 7.6%. At the LTPD, 90% of the lots are rejected. 2
2 Taylor, W., “Selecting Statistically Valid Sampling Plans,” Quality Engineering 10, 2 (1997): 365–370.
TABLE 9A-2 OC Curve Probabilities ( c # 2)
p n np P a p n np P a
.005 60 0.30 .996 .055 60 3.30 .460 .015 60 0.90 .940 .065 60 3.90 .340 .025 60 1.50 .840 .075 60 4.50 .200 .035 60 2.10 .680 .085 60 5.10 .160 .045 60 2.70 .550 .095 60 5.70 .120 .050 60 3.00 .500 .105 60 6.30 .080
1.00
.90
.80
.70
.60
.50
.40
.30
.20
.10
0 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .10 .11 .12
Pr ob
ab ili
ty o
f a cc
ep ta
nc e
of s
hi pm
en t
Quality of shipment (in fraction defective)
.080 .120
.160 .200
.340
.460 .500
.550
.680
.840
.940 .996
FIGURE 9A-5 Resulting OC Curve for n = 60, c = 2
Chapter 9 • Appendix 9A-7
MORE COMPLEX SAMPLING PLANS
So far we have focused on sampling plans for single samples. This is not the limit of sampling plans. More complex sampling plans are referred to as multiple-sampling plans or sequential- sampling plans. With these sampling plans, the acceptance sampling rules might occur as follows:
n 1 # sample size for sample 1
n 2 # sample size for sample 2
n n # sample size for sample n
c 1 # acceptance number for sample 1
c 2 # acceptance number for sample 2
c n # acceptance number for sample n
r 1 # rejection number for sample 1
r 2 # rejection number for sample 2
r n # rejection number for sample n
Multiple-sampling plans have advantages over single-sampling plans. The sample size used in multiple-sampling plans will be smaller, on average, with the same amount of protection as a single-sampling plan. The decision to use multiple-sampling plans usually will be made in the first phase of the sample. Example 9A-3 provides an illustration of a double-sampling plan.
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 100
Percent defective LTPD = 7.6%3%AQL = 0.72%
0.56 Pr
ob ab
ili ty
o f a
cc ep
ta nc
e
EXAMPLE 9A-3 Demonstrating a Double-Sampling Plan
Problem: An engineer adopted a double-sampling plan with the following values: n 1 # 40, c 1 # 1, n 2 # 60, c 2 # 5. r 1 and r 2 are 5 and 6, respectively. Explain to management how this double- sampling plan works.
Solution: Forty items from the incoming lot are drawn at random. If one or zero defective pieces are found, accept the lot. If five or more defective pieces are found, reject the lot. If between two
FIGURE 9A-6 OC Curve of Single- Sampling Plan n ! 50 and c ! 1 Source: Adapted from W. Taylor, “Selecting Statistically Valid Sampling Plans,” Quality Engineering 10, 2 (1997): 365–370.
9A-8
DEVELOPING DOUBLE-SAMPLING PLANS
Although OC curves can be used to develop double-sampling plans, the calculations to develop the OC curves are much more complex than for single-sample plans. For this reason, we use a standard approach that is used by many practitioners. The main limitation of this plan is that sample sizes must be specified, as well as AQL, LTPD, producer’s risk, and consumer’s risk.
The double-sampling plan we develop has the following parameters:
AQL # 0.020
LTPD # 0.040
Producer’s risk # 0.05
Consumer’s risk # 0.10
n 1 # .5 n 2
First, we start by computing the ratio (R in Table 9A-3) of LTPD to AQL:
LTPD/AQL # 0.040/0.020 # 2 (9A.1)
The parameters for the appropriate double-sampling plan are found in Tables 9A-3 and 9A-4. Table 9A-3 is used when n 1 # n 2 , and Table 9A-4 is used when n 1 # 0.5 n 2 . For this example, we use Table 9A-4 because n 2 is twice the size of n 1 .
and four pieces inclusive are found defective, perform a second sample with 60 pieces. If the combined number of defective pieces in both samples is less than or equal to five, the lot can be accepted.
TABLE 9A-3 Values for Constructing a Double-Sampling Plan Having a Specified p $ 1 and p $ 2 ( n 1 # n 2 , ! # 0.05, " # 0.10)
Plan Number R ! p" 2 /p" 1
Acceptance Numbers
Approximate Values of p "n 1 Approximate
(ASN)/n 1 for 0.95 Point a c 1 c 2 0.95
1 11.90 0 1 0.21 1.170 2 7.54 1 2 0.52 1.081 3 6.79 0 2 0.43 1.340 4 5.39 1 3 0.76 1.169 5 4.65 2 4 1.16 1.105 6 4.25 1 4 1.04 1.274 7 3.88 2 5 1.43 1.170 8 3.63 3 6 1.87 1.117 9 3.38 2 6 1.72 1.248
10 3.21 3 7 2.15 1.173 11 3.09 4 8 2.62 1.124 12 2.85 4 9 2.90 1.167 13 2.60 5 11 3.68 1.166 14 2.44 5 12 4.00 1.215 15 2.32 5 13 4.35 1.271 16 2.22 5 14 4.70 1.331 17 2.12 5 16 5.39 1.452
a ASN is without curtailment on the second sample.
Source: Chemical Corps Engineering Agency, Manual No. 2: Master Sampling Plans for Single, Duplicate, Double and Multiple Sampling (Edgewood Arsenal, MD: Army Chemical Center, 1953).
Chapter 9 • Appendix 9A-9
Because LTPD/AQL was 2, in Table 9A-4 we find we will use double-sampling plan num- ber 15 (because 1.97 is closest to our value of 2). We see immediately that c 1 and c 2 are 4 and 20, respectively. Next, we compute the sample size by using either column 5 or 6 from the table. If we want to use a probability of acceptance of 0.95, we use column 5. For sample plan 15, the value of p$ n 1 is 4.75. Then we compute n 1 as
n1 # p'n0.95/AQL # 4.75/0.020 # 237.5 ! 238 (9A.2)
As we can see, n 1 # 238 and n 2 = 475 (remember that n 2 is twice the size of n 1 ). These are rather large sample plans. We may want to reconsider our parameters to reduce these sample sizes.
We also can use this approach to determine a double-sampling plan if we want to maintain consumer’s risk at a low level. To do this, we use column 7 of Table 9A-4 . If we wish to hold that value of consumer’s risk to 0.10, we can use the column 7 value of plan number 15 of 9.35. Using Formula 9A.2:
n 1 # p$ n 0.95 /AQL
9.35/0.020 # 467.5 or 468 (rounding)
n 2 # 935 (remember that n 2 is twice the size of n 1 , before rounding)
c 1 and c 2 are 4 and 20, respectively
Again, because this sampling plan has large sample sizes, we may be wise to experiment with other parameters to find alternative sampling plans that meet targets for acceptance.
TABLE 9A-4 Values for Constructing a Double-Sampling Plan Having a Specified p $ 1 and p $ 2 ( n 1 # .5 n 2 , ! # 0.05, " # 0.10)
Plan Number R ! p$ 2 /p$ 1
Acceptance Numbers
Approximate Values of p "n 1 Approximate
(ASN)/n 1 for 0.95 Point a c 1 c 2 0.95
1 14.50 0 1 0.16 1.273 2 8.07 0 2 0.30 1.511 3 6.48 1 3 0.60 1.238 4 5.39 0 3 0.49 1.771 5 5.09 1 4 0.77 1.359 6 4.31 0 4 0.68 1.985 7 4.19 1 5 0.96 1.498 8 3.60 1 6 1.16 1.646 9 3.26 2 8 1.68 1.476 10 2.96 3 10 2.27 1.388 11 2.77 3 11 2.46 1.468 12 2.62 4 13 3.07 1.394 13 2.46 4 14 3.29 1.472 14 2.21 3 15 3.41 1.888 15 1.97 4 20 4.75 2.029 16 1.74 6 30 7.45 2.230
a ASN is without curtailment on the second sample.
Source: Chemical Corps Engineering Agency, Manual No. 2: Master Sampling Plans for Single, Duplicate, Double and Multiple Sampling (Edgewood Arsenal, MD: Army Chemical Center, 1953).
9A-10
Summary The single- and double-sampling plans we have discussed are called lot-by-lot sampling plans . As we perform separate samples, we receive additional lots of materials. Sometimes it is not feasible to collect products into lots because they are produced in a continuous manner. In these cases, acceptance sampling procedures for continuous production are used. These procedures typically involve alternating between 100% inspection and sampling inspection. Although we did not develop a methodology for continuous acceptance sampling here, MIL STD 1235C (1988), named “Single and Multiple-Level Continuous Sampling Procedures and Table for Inspection by Attributes,” is available from the Department of Defense. Any of the military stan- dards mentioned in this appendix can be ordered from the Department of Defense directly by accessing the DOD SSP on the Internet (Department of Defense Single Stock Point for Specifi- cations and Standards). The URL is http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil/ .
Key Terms Acceptable quality level
(AQL) Consumer’s risk
Lot tolerance percent defective (LTPD)
Operating characteristic (OC) curve
Producer’s risk Sampling plan
Discussion Questions 1. Define producer’s risk and consumer’s risk. 2. Define the concept of acceptable quality level. Why has this concept been troublesome to many
people? 3. What is the term used to designate the level of poor quality included in a lot of goods? Describe the
role of this term in the quality management process. 4. What is an operating characteristic curve? What is the function of this curve in the quality manage-
ment process?
Problems 1. Using Figure 9A-2 , with a sample size of n # 100 and an acceptance number c # 1, if a good shipment
has no more than 0.05 defective, what is the probability of acceptance? What type of risk is this? 2. Using Figure 9A-2 , with a sample size of n # 100 and an acceptance number of c # 2, if a bad ship-
ment has 40% defective, what is the probability of acceptance? What type of risk is this? 3. Using Figure 9A-2 , with a sample size of n # 100 and an acceptance number of c # 3, if a good ship-
ment has no more than .02 defective, what is the probability of acceptance? What type of risk is this? 4. Using Figure 9A-2 , with a sample size of n # 100 and an acceptance number of c # 1, if a good ship-
ment has no more than .30 defective, what is the probability of acceptance? What type of risk is this? 5. Develop an OC curve using Figure 9A-4 , a sample size of 100, and the following p values: .01, .02,
.03, .05, .07, .09, .11, .13, .15, .17, .19, .21. The maximum acceptance number is c # 2. 6. From the OC curve developed in Problem 5, if a good shipment is 0.02 defective, what is the probabil-
ity of a type I (producer’s) error? 7. From the OC curve developed in Problem 5, if a bad shipment is defined as having at least 10% defec-
tive, what is your estimate of type II (consumer’s) risk? 8. Develop an OC curve using Figure 9A-4 , a sample size of 100, and the following p values: .01, .02,
.03, .05, .07, .09, .11, .13, .15. The maximum acceptance number is c # 4.
Chapter 9 • Appendix 9A-11
9. From the OC curve developed in Problem 8, if a good shipment is .04 defective, what is the probability of a type I (producer’s) error?
10. From the OC curve developed in Problem 8, if a bad shipment is defined as having at least 15% defec- tive, what is your estimate of type II (consumer’s risk) error?
11. Develop an OC curve using Figure 9A-4 , a sample size of 100, and the following p values: 0.01, 0.02, 0.03, 0.05, 0.07, 0.09, 0.11, 0.13, 0.15, 0.17, 0.19, 0.21. The maximum acceptance number is c # 3.
12. From the OC curve developed in Problem 11, if a good shipment has 5% defective, what is the prob- ability of type I error? How is type I error defined?
13. From the OC curve in Problem 11, if a bad shipment has more than 20% defective, what is the proba- bility of accepting a bad shipment?
14. Interpret the following sampling plan in plain English:
n 1 # 50 c 1 # 2 n 2 # 100 c 2 # 5 r 1 # 4 r 2 # 6
15. Interpret the following sampling plan in plain English:
n 1 # 125 c 1 # 3 n 2 # 150 c 2 # 6 n 3 # 200 c 3 # 12
16. We wish to develop a double-sampling plan where n 1 # n 2 (see Table 9A-3 ). Here are the needed parameters:
AQL # .010 LTPD # .030 Producer’s risk # .05 Consumer’s risk # .10
17. Rework Problem 16 where n 2 is twice the size of n 1 (see Table 9A-4 ). 18. We wish to develop a double-sampling plan where n 1 # n 2 ( Table 9A-3 ). Here are the needed
parameters:
AQL # .020 LTPD # .080 Producer’s risk # .05 Consumer’s risk # .10
19. Rework Problem 18 where n 2 is twice the size of n 1 ( Table 9A-4 ). 20. Your boss wants you to develop a double-sampling plan where n 1 # n 2 (using Table 9A-3 ). Here are
some parameters for your use:
AQL # .015 LTPD # .040 Producer’s risk # .05 Consumer’s risk # .10
21. Rework Problem 20 where n 2 is twice the size of n 1 ( Table 9A-4 ).
P A R T T H R E E
Implementing Quality
Everyone will tell you that the conceptual stuff is nice, but how do you actually implement quality throughout your supply chain? Once you understand and have planned and designed where you want to go, the tools of quality provide an important basis for improvement. More than 90% of successful quality implementations involve the basic tools of quality. These should be used and commonly practiced in most companies. Chapter 10 introduces the seven managerial tools for quality improvement. These tools are behavioral and help managers to optimize the use of team processes.
In Chapters 11 and 12 you will learn about an efficient and effective method for teaching statistical quality and x
_ R, p, np, u , and c charts (among others). Many of the
behavioral implications of statistical process control are also discussed. Chapter 13 introduces Lean-Six Sigma. This is a widely adopted method for
improving the designs of products and processes to assure quality.
When we introduce a particular method of doing a job, it is natural to consider whether the method is appropriate or not. The decision is
usually based on past results and experience, or perhaps on conventional methods. Procedures will be most effective if a proper evaluation is
made, and on-the-job data are essential for making a proper evaluation.
—Kaoru Ishikawa,
Quality Tools Inventor 1
C H A P T E R 1 0
The Tools of Quality
238
Quality improvement in manufacturing or services, to be effective, should address the needs of the system as a whole. In this book we have addressed quality management from an integrative perspective. This perspective has encompassed the many functional areas of business, including supply chain management, marketing, accounting, human resources, operations, engineering, and strategy. None of these fields of endeavor operate in a vacuum. They are all interrelated and interdependent.
IMPROVING THE SYSTEM
To be successful, a business or organization must balance the needs of these different functional areas around a coherent business vision and strategy. The objective of the system is to satisfy the customer. Customer satisfaction means higher customer retention, which leads to improved profitability.
A quality system ( Figure 10-1 ) uses the business model with a focus on the customer and includes the dynamics of continual improvement, change, planning, and renewal. Continual improvement is necessary for a company to learn to grow. Companies that are unable to adapt find themselves with stagnant cultures and labor forces. Many managers, on discovering that their organization has reached this point, believe they must resort to draconian measures such as layoffs and organizational reengineering to achieve change. If they had pursued continual improvement and learning in the first place, they might not have reached this juncture.
1 Ishikawa, K., “Guide to Quality Control,” Asia Productivity Organization, Tokyo, Japan, 1985.
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 239
This quality system (which is discussed in greater depth in Chapter 15 ) is not just a series of variables and relationships. It is an interconnected, interdisciplinary network of people, tech- nology, procedures, markets, customers, facilities, legal requirements, reporting requirements, and assets that interact to achieve an end. The most important aspect of the system is the people. People are the engine of creativity and innovation. Technology is very good at performing rote tasks; however, technology in and of itself cannot innovate. Therefore, how we manage people may be the most important key in this system to unlock an organization’s potential. W. Edwards Deming was always adamant that we should continually and forever improve the system of pro- duction. The system includes people.
In this chapter we introduce the basic seven (B7) tools of quality and the new seven (N7) tools (also referred to as the managerial tools ). The seven basic tools are simple to use in con- tinuous improvement efforts. The tools often are used by individuals and in teams, are useful at all levels of the organization, and can be applied by people of different educational levels. As you learn and apply the tools of quality, you, too, will appreciate their wide application and usefulness.
ISHIKAWA’S BASIC SEVEN TOOLS OF QUALITY
The basic seven tools of quality may be used in a logical order. Note that this is only a “typical” order of use for these tools. They can be used in almost any order. Figure 10-2 shows this order. The flowchart gives the team the big picture of the process to be improved. Process data are col- lected using a check sheet. The data are analyzed using either histograms, scatter plots, or control
Processes
Information and Finance
Closeness to Customers
Culture
Organizational Learning and Knowledge
People
Customer Service
Enterprise Capabilities Quality
Planning and
Management
Quality Control
Quality Assurance
Integrative Approach
FIGURE 10-1 Quality System Model
240 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
charts. The root causes of the problems associated with the process are identified using a cause- and-effect diagram. Finally, causes are prioritized using Pareto analysis. These tools are dis- cussed in more depth on the following pages.
Process Maps
A process map is a picture of a process. The first step in many process improvement projects is to create a map of the process as it exists. This useful step also determines the parameters for process improvement. The concept is that we must know the process before we can improve it.
The language of process maps can vary from the simple to the complex. A simple set of symbols is provided in Figure 10-3 . The diamond indicates there is a decision to be made. Often these identify different paths of sequences in the process map. The parallelogram appears when- ever materials, forms, or tools enter or leave the process. The rectangle is the processing symbol— the work that is actually performed. The start/stop symbol and the page connector are used for the convenience of the people using the process map. A few simple rules for process maps follow:
• Use these simple symbols to chart the process from the beginning, with all arcs in the pro- cess map leaving and entering a symbol. The arcs represent the progression from one step to the next. (See A Closer Look at Quality 10-1 .)
• Develop a general process map and then fill it out by adding more detail or a subflowchart to each of the elements.
Process Maps
Check Sheets
MediumEarly Stages Final Stages
Histo- grams
Scatter Plots
Cause &
Effect Diagrams
Control Charts
Pareto Analysis
FIGURE 10-2 Logical Map of the Order for the Basic Seven (B7) Tools Source: Based on M. Brassard, The Memory Jogger II , published by GOAL/QPC, 2 Manor Parkway, Salem, New Hampshire, 2004. Reprinted with permission of GOAL/QPC.
Decision
Input/Output
Flowline
Processing
Start/Stop
Page connector
FIGURE 10-3 Basic Mapping Symbols
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 241
• Step through the process by interviewing those who perform it—as they do the work. • Determine which steps add value and which don’t in an effort to simplify the work. • Before simplifying work, determine whether the work really needs to be done in the first
place.
The process map in Figure 10-4 shows a simple process used in a city planning department to issue permits allowing applicants to take possession of newly built homes. Figure 10-4 shows the current process. In Figure 10-5 the process is simplified because the front desk is given more authority and training to process the forms without assigning them for analyst review. The analyst review does not add value for the organization or the customer. Therefore, it can be eliminated. Steps in process mapping include
1. Settling on a standard set of process mapping symbols to be used. 2. Clearly communicating the purpose of the process map to all the individuals involved in
the exercise.
Start
Customer submits
application
Complete? No
Yes
Log-in by department specialist
Action letter
Analyst reviews
Deputy director assigns
Action? No
Yes
Site visit
Appealed
Back to beginning depending on appeal
Withdrawn by applicant
Research
FIGURE 10-4 Process Mapping: Home Occupation Process— Current
242 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
3. Observing the work being performed by shadowing the workers performing the work. 4. Developing a map of the process. 5. Reviewing the process map with the employees to make needed changes and adjustments
to the process map. (Note that it is often helpful to chart processes from the customer’s point of view in addition to the worker’s point of view.)
6. Develop a map of the improved process.
A special type of process map is called a SIPOC diagram. SIPOC is an acronym for sup- pliers, inputs, processes, outputs, and customers. This type of diagram is useful when it is not clear who are your customers, where specifications for inputs exist, and in clarifying customer requirements. SIPOC diagrams are often used in Six Sigma projects.
Start
Customer submits
application
Complete? No
Front desk
reviews
Action letter
Front desk for decision
Department specialist
logs in
Action? Denied
Yes
Yes
Appealed
Back to beginning depending on appeal
Withdrawn by applicant
FIGURE 10-5 Process Mapping: Home Occupation Process— Proposed
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 243
C le
ri ca
l S ta
ff A
pp lic
an t Drilling permit application submitted to Department of Water
Resources by owner, representative, or driller (application package may include other documents such as maps
and schematics)
Application for drilling permit received with fee
Receipt printed
Fee processed
Is fee required?
Yes
Yes
No
No
Application reviewed for completeness
Pull tag Scan permit documents
and enter data into required fields
Send e-mail to professional staff that permit documents are available
on computer for review
Box paper permit documents for storage
Send tag and receipt to professional staff A
Return to applicant
Application complete?
FIGURE 10-6 Process Map with Responsibility of Existing Process
EXAMPLE 10.1 Process Maps
Problem: The well construction unit of a state department of water resources entered into a mul- tiyear project to update its database management system. As part of the process, the well con- struction staff was asked to document its current process flows.
Solution: The resulting process map is shown in Figure 10-6 . Through a brainstorming process, the well construction team was asked to rethink its processes to simplify the work- flow and to take advantage of new technology. The team worked together to develop the new process. This resulted in a streamlined flow that required less time for drillers to receive permits.
244 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
P ro
fe ss
io na
l S ta
ff A
Review application package images on computer for regulatory compliance
Check drill site location relative to ADC, GWMA,
or CGWA using spatial computer tools
Is monitoring the well program required by government
or in an ADC?
Send back for certification
Are documents certified
by P.E. or P.G.? Develop conditions for permit approval
Prepare draft permit for management review
Approve? Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Print permit copies for applicant signature;
original to files
Paper files Prepare letter
of denial Return to applicant
Petition for reconsideration
St af
f M
an ag
er
No
FIGURE 10-6 (Continued)
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 10-1 Extended Value Stream Mapping of Supply Chains
Process maps are being used in the improvement of supply chain processes. Customers and suppliers can collaborate to improve supply chains. This type of mapping has been referred to as extended supply chain mapping. Figure 10-7A shows a supply chain map for Global Corp. This includes supplier processes, receiving, internal processes, shipping, and customer service processes.
Figure 10-7B shows a map of the improved process. Some comparisons of the existing and improved processes are as follows:
Results Metrics Prior State Improved State % Improvement
Lead time (days) 54 18 60 WIP (days) 11 1 91 Flexibility Limited 9% increase per week 300/year Unit price $12,000 $10,000 16
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 245
Global Corp. Mexico
Assembly Distribution
Assembly Distribution Global Corp.
Central American HQ
8 Wk Forecast
Monthly
5 Wk Forecast
Global Corp. Warehousing
Twice Weekly
Daily
INTER MODAL CHANGE
Central American Supplier
Assembly Plant USA
Distance Traveled: 70 miles
Lead Time = 54 days12 days
6X/YR
3 days
4 days
35 days
Travel
Distance Traveled: 2000 miles Transport Time: 12 days
Distance Traveled: 700 miles, Transport Time: 3 days
3 days
Weekly
Lead Time = 23.0 days VA/T = 118.0 seconds RM = 10.0 days WP = 3.0 days FG = 10.0 days PCE = 0.0194%
FIGURE 10-7A Global Corp. Prior-State Extended Value Stream Map
Central American
Aluminium Company
Once Weekly
3 days
5 days
Mexico
Distribution USAGlobal Corp.
C.A. PROD CTRL
Sales
PROD CTRL
Daily
Daily
Daily
Assembly Plant USA
Global Corp. Canada
(Ontario)
Global Corp. Mexico
14 days
3 days 1 day Lead Time = 18 days
FIGURE 10-7B Global Corp. Ideal-State Extended Value Stream Map
246 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Check Sheets
Check sheets are data-gathering tools that can be used in forming histograms; they can be either tabular, computer based, or schematic. An example of a tabular check sheet for a Pareto chart is shown in Figure 10-8 . This provides a chart for copier operators to mark each time a delay occurs in setting up new jobs.
Setting up a check sheet involves the following steps:
1. Identify common defects occurring in the process. 2. Draw a table with common defects in the left column and time period across the tops of the
columns (see Figure 10-8 ) to track the defects. 3. The user of the check sheet then places checkmarks on the sheet whenever the defect is
encountered.
EXAMPLE 10.2 Check Sheets
Problem: A copying company desires to set up a check sheet so that it can keep track of the sources of errors. Below are the major error types with frequencies.
Solution: Figure 10-8 showed a check sheet for these data. The check sheet will be kept to monitor how well workers are adhering to the new procedures.
Problem Type
Setup routines not standardized
M on
da y
Tu es
da y
W ed
ne sd
ay
T hu
rs da
y
Fr id
ay
To ta
l
Missing equipment for setup
Failure to separate internal and external tasks Extensive machine resetting and paper change
Other
FIGURE 10-8 Copier Problem Check Sheet
Type of Problem Frequency Percentage
Setup routines are not standardized 315 52.1% Equipment needed for setup is missing 124 20.5 Internal and external setup tasks are not separated 87 14.4 Extensive machine resetting and paper change are needed 56 9.2 Other 23 3.8 Total 605 100%
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 247
Histograms
As shown in Figure 10-9 , histograms are simply graphical representations of data in a bar format. (Note that a frequency chart is used for categorical data, while histograms are used for continuous numerical data.) Histograms are also used to observe the shape of data (see Figure 10-9 ). For example, how are the data in an interval scale distributed? There are several rules for developing histograms:
• The width of the histogram bars must be consistent (i.e., class widths are the same where each bar contains a single class).
• The classes must be mutually exclusive and all-inclusive ( or collective exhaustive) . • A good rule of thumb for the number of classes is given by the model
2k ! n (10.1)
where n is the number of raw data values and k is the number of classes. Solving this equa- tion for k , we obtain
k ! log n/ log 2 (10.2)
Using this formula, we find
0.75 2.15 3.55 4.95 6.35 7.75 9.15
FIGURE 10-9 Histogram from Example 10.3
Number of Observations Number of Classes
9 to 16 4 17 to 32 5 33 to 64 6 65 to 128 7 129 to 256 8
EXAMPLE 10.3 Histograms
Problem: The Big City Cafeteria wants to determine the distribution of its sales during lunch- time. On a given day the manager randomly selects 40 sales from the sales register receipt. The following table shows the sales (in dollars):
248 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Develop a histogram of the sales.
Solution: It is helpful to compute the mean, standard deviation, maximum value, and minimum value when developing a histogram because the histogram is often used to determine if the data are normally distributed. Following are these statistics from the previously given data:
Mean " 4.20 Maximum value " 8.95 Minimum value " .79 Difference " 8.16 Sum " 168 Using Formula (10.2)
k ! log 40/log 2 k ! 5.32
The number of classes is 6. Therefore, Classes " 6 Class width " 8.16/6 " 1.36 # 1.40 Classes " 0.76–2.15; 2.16–3.55; 3.56–4.95; 4.96–6.35; 6.36–7.75; 7.76–9.15
The histogram is displayed in Figure 10-9 . Thus the manager finds that sales occur in a skewed distribution with a mean of $4.20.
Scatter Diagrams
The scatter diagram or scatter plot is used to examine the relationships between variables. These relationships are sometimes used to identify indicator variables in organizations. For example, in a hospital, the postoperative infection rate has been found to be associated with many different factors such as the sterile procedures used by the doctors and nurses, cleanli- ness of the operating rooms, and sterile procedures in handling the utensils used in surgery. Therefore, the postoperative infection rate is an important variable for hospital quality measurement.
It is quite easy to develop scatter plots using the charting facilities in spreadsheet packages such as Excel. Figure 10-10 shows a scatter plot of the relationship between conformance data and prevention and appraisal quality-related costs in a real firm. Note that the figure shows the unexpected outcome of higher quality costs with higher levels of conformance. Later analysis showed that this firm was trying to “inspect in” quality, meaning that it was throwing a lot of in-process work away as a result of more rigorous inspection. Use the following steps in setting up a scatter plot:
1. Determine your x (independent) and y (dependent) variables. 2. Gather process data relating to the variables identified in step 1.
4.51 0.79 4.19 2.29 5.96 3.49 2.25 3.45 2.24 5.25 5.36 1.15 7.28 5.25 4.29 5.25 3.96 6.79 4.66 3.56 8.22 2.56 5.25 3.33 5.55 2.24 8.95 2.49 5.25 2.26 0.79 5.25 4.11 6.11 5.25 4.56 1.15 5.25 2.21 5.25
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 249
3. Plot the data on a two-dimensional plane. 4. Observe the plotted data to see whether there is a relationship between the variables.
(Note that it is helpful to plot the data in Excel or another spreadsheet and to perform a correlation test to determine whether the variables have a statistically significant relationship.)
EXAMPLE 10.4 Scatter Diagrams
Problem: Healthy People, Inc., a company specializing in home health care solutions for U.S. consumers, was a growing company. The company wished to study the relationship between absenteeism and the number of overtime hours worked by employees. Thirty employees were randomly selected, and numbers of overtime hours were graphed against numbers of days absent for the previous year (see Figure 10-11 ).
100
80
60
40
20
0 60 70 80
Conformance 90 10050
Pr ev
en tio
n an
d ap
pr ai
sa l c
os ts
FIGURE 10-10 Prevention Costs and Conformance
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 100500 150 200 250 300
Hours of overtime 350 400 450 500
D ay
s ab
se nt
Series 1
FIGURE 10-11 Scatter Plot of Overtime Hours versus Days Absent
250 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
This analysis showed that there appeared to be a positive relationship between number of days absent and hours of overtime. Subsequent analysis showed that, in fact, these variables were significantly related. This led management to recalculate the actual cost of overtime.
Control Charts
Control charts are used to determine whether a process will produce a product or service with consistent measurable properties. Because control charts are discussed in Chapters 11 and 12 , they will not be presented in detail here. Figure 10-12 illustrates two control charts usually used together.
Cause-and-Effect (Ishikawa) Diagrams
Often workers spend too much time focusing improvement efforts on the symptoms of prob- lems rather than on the causes. The Ishikawa cause-and-effect or fishbone or Ishikawa diagram is a good tool to help us move to lower levels of abstraction in solving problems. The diagram looks like the skeleton of a fish, with the problem being the head of the fish, major causes being the “ribs” of the fish, and subcauses forming smaller “bones” off the ribs.
Employee Hours of Overtime Days Absent
1 243 3 2 126 2 3 86 0 4 424 6 5 236 3 6 128 0 7 0 0 8 126 2 9 324 3 10 118 0 11 62 0 12 128 3 13 460 6 14 135 1 15 118 1 16 260 2 17 0 1 18 126 1 19 234 2 20 246 3 21 120 1 22 80 0 23 112 1 24 237 3 25 129 2 26 24 1 27 36 0 28 128 2 29 246 3 30 326 6
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 251
A facilitator or designated team member draws the diagram after questioning why certain situations occur. It has been said that for each circumstance, the facilitator should ask “Why?” up to five times. This is sometimes referred to as the “five whys.” Fishbone (cause- and-effect) diagrams are created during brainstorming sessions with a facilitator by follow- ing these steps:
1. State the problem clearly in the head of the fish. 2. Draw the backbone and ribs. Ask the participants in the brainstorming session to identify
major causes of the problem labeled in the head of the diagram. If participants have trouble identifying major problem categories, it may be helpful to use materials, machines, people, and methods as possible bones.
3. Continue to fill out the fishbone diagram, asking “Why?” about each problem or cause of a problem until the fish is filled out. Usually it takes no more than five levels of questioning to get to root causes—hence the “five whys.”
4. View the diagram and identify core causes. 5. Set goals to address the core causes.
Figure 10-13 shows an Ishikawa diagram prepared for a wood mill that was experiencing problems with wobbling blades in its saws. The symptom of the problem was the wobbly blades. The major causes were associated with machines, materials, people, and methods. Concerning people, it was found that workers were not properly trained. For machines it was found that the blades were being incorrectly set up off-center.
50
40
30
20
10
60
40
20
0
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 29
.0 0
(A )
56 .0
0 (A
)
3. 00
2. 00
10 .0
0
3. 00
29 .0
0 (A
)
12 .0
0
7. 00
20 .0
0
0. 00
22 .0
0
3. 00
36 .0
0 (A
)
6. 00
10 .0
0
7. 00
40 .2
0 (A
)
32 .8
0 (A
)
22 .8
0 (A
)
35 .6
0 (A
)
29 .8
0 (A
)
28 .8
0 (A
)
32 .8
0 (A
,D )
41 .8
0 (A
,D )
14 .2
0
15 .0
0
20 .6
0
11 .8
0 (A
)
18 .2
0
20 .2
0
13 .8
0
15 .6
0
18 .0
0
X chart
LCL = 12.55
Mean = 19.94
UCL = 27.33
Range chart
LCL = 0
Mean = 12.81
UCL = 27.08
FIGURE 10-12 Partial X _ and R Charts for a Process
252 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
EXAMPLE 10.5 Ishikawa Diagrams
Problem: A team of employees from the adjudication team at a department of water resources was assigned to improve its process. Adjudication is a process of going through the courts to settle legal disputes, in this case concerning water rights. Prior to brainstorming improvements for the process, the employees were asked to brainstorm some of the causes of problems with the existing system. A fishbone (Ishikawa) diagram was used to help to identify causes of problems they were experiencing.
Solution: Figure 10-14 shows the resulting fishbone diagram. The fishbone diagram shows that three major areas of concern are contractors, region office–state office communication, and database management. The facilitator used the “five whys” to get team members to reach lower levels of abstraction. After reaching these lower levels of abstraction, participants were asked to identify what they felt were major causes of the problems. This fishbone diagram was later complemented with further brainstorming for issues relating to the adjudication process.
Pareto Charts
Pareto charts are used to identify and prioritize problems to be solved. These are actually fre- quency charts that are aided by the 80/20 rule adapted by Joseph Juran from Vilfredo Pareto, the Italian economist. As you may remember, the 80/20 rule states that roughly 80% of the problems are created by roughly 20% of the causes. This means that there are a vital few causes that create most of the problems. This rule can be applied in many ways, and 80% and 20% are only esti- mates; the actual percentages may vary.
In a positive sense, a store manager could understand that 20% of the stock in a store holds 80% of the value of the store inventory; 20% of the customers might provide 80% of the revenue. In a grocery store, a small number of quality problems created 80% of the complaints. The good
Machines Materials
Methods People
Saw Blade Wobbles
Lubrication Off-center Loose connectors
Bearings out
Crooked blade
Shaft wear
Tilt
Technique
Tool
Wet wood
Wrong size washers
Vision
Lack of proper training Judgment
Me asu
rem ent
Ins pec
tio n
Axle hole wrong size
Health
Attitude
New worker Content
Quantity
Training
FIGURE 10-13 Cause-and-Effect Diagram: Wobbling Saw Blade Example Source: Patrick Shannon, Boise State University, 2011.
C
hapter 10 • T he Tools of Q
uality
253
Contractors
Don't Know Expectations More Technical
Reviews
Communication Loss of Control
Stuff Not Entered on Database Hard to Know
Which Records Are "in Play"
Too Many Tools
Database Management
Cost/expectations QC for data
GIS Collection, analysis,
field examsAccountability
QC monitoring
Not clear who should do it
Get lost in other work
Low priority
Storing and filtering tough
Can't know everything
No documentation or help
Can't keep up
Training
GIS and WR
Two Databases
Training Not at Office
Length of contract
Need minimum qualifications
Disparate Sources
Differences between
Region Offices
Tech Sec Mgr Bottleneck
Progress a Moving Target
Technical People and Lawyers
Laws and Rules Differ by Region
Region Offices/ State Offices
Lack of coordination/ consistency
No central focal point
Not availableCommunication mostly through section manager
Hard to stay current
TrainingOverlap in activities
Don't have region managers compare
practices
No liaisons with region
offices
Preferences
Not defined
No process to deal with this
ADJUDICATION CONCERNS
FIGURE 10-14 Adjudication Fishbone Diagram [Example 10.7]
254 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
news is that by focusing on the vital few , inventory can be controlled, satisfaction of the most important customers can be increased, or 80% of the complaints can be eliminated. There are some rules for constructing Pareto charts:
• Information must be selected based on types or classifications of defects that occur as a result of a process. An example might be the different types of defects that occur in a semiconductor.
• Data must be collected and classified into categories. • A frequency chart is constructed showing the number of occurrences in descending order.
The steps used in Pareto analysis include
1. Gathering categorical data relating to quality problems. 2. Drawing a frequency chart of the data. 3. Focusing on the tallest bars in the frequency chart first when solving the problem.
EXAMPLE 10.6 Pareto Charts
Problem: A copying company is concerned because it is taking too long for operators to set up new printing jobs. They decide to use Pareto analysis to find out why setup times are taking so long. The data gathered reflect the following major causes:
Type of Problem Frequency (Number of Times)
Equipment needed for setup is missing 124 Internal and external setup tasks are not separated 87 Setup routines are not standardized 315 Extensive machine resetting and paper change are needed 56 Other 23
Solution: First, order the problems by frequency, and compute the percentage of problems related to each cause:
Type of Problem Frequency Percentage
Setup routines are not standardized 315 52.1% Equipment needed for setup is missing 124 20.5 Internal and external setup tasks are not separated 87 14.4 Extensive machine resetting and paper change are needed 56 9.2 Other 23 3.8 Total 605 100%
Next, draw a frequency chart of the results ( Figure 10-15 ). This Pareto chart shows that nonstan- dardized procedures for setting up copying jobs are the most frequently occurring problem causing slow setups. Therefore, the company can institute a training program to routinize its setups. This program will result in a significant reduction in setup slowdowns.
Two points should be made. We also could analyze these data from a number of different perspectives, such as average time per type of delay or cost per type of delay. Also, this chart shows graphically that the law of diminishing marginal returns does have a place in quality
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 255
thinking. As the group addresses each problem, the savings from correcting the problems decreases. There is no guarantee, however, that addressing the fourth problem will take any less effort than the first.
THE SEVEN NEW TOOLS FOR IMPROVEMENT
In addition to the basic seven tools of quality there is another set of tools that focuses on group pro- cesses and decision making. These are the new tools for management. The new seven (N7) tools were developed as a result of a research effort by a committee of the Japanese Society for QC Tech- nique Development. They are shown in Figure 10-16 and are discussed in the following pages.
350
Frequency
300
250
200
150
100
50
0 Setup routines
are not standardized
Equipment needed for setup
is missing
Internal and external setup tasks are not
separated
OtherExtensive machine resetting and paper change are needed
FIGURE 10-15 Pareto Analysis
Affinity diagram
Matrix diagram
Interrelationship digraph
1 2 3 4 5 6
a b c d e f g h
FIGURE 10-16 Seven New Tools for Management Source: From M. Brassard, “The Memory Jogger™ Plus+,” GOAL/QPC, Boston, 2004. Reprinted with permission of GOAL/QPC.
256 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
GOAL/QPC, the consulting firm, is a major force for disseminating information about the N7 tools. GOAL/QPC recommends that the N7 tools be used in a “cycle of activity,” 2 in which one tool provides inputs to another tool. One possible cycle is shown in Figure 10-17 , where the affinity diagram or interrelation digraph is being used as inputs to the tree diagram, and so forth. Let us discuss each of these tools and the purposes they serve.
Tree diagram Prioritization matrices
Process decision program chart Activity network diagram
a b c d
X X 0
FIGURE 10-16 (Continued)
2 Brassard, M. “The Memory Jogger II,” GOAL/QPC, Boston, 2004. Reprinted from “The Memory Jogger Plus+” with permission of GOAL/QPC, 12B Manor Parkway, Salem, NH 03079, www.goalqpc.com .
Known
Activity network diagram
Affinity diagram Interrelationship digraph
Tree Diagram/ systems flow
Prioritization matrices
Matrix diagram
Process decision program chart
Creative Logical
Unknown
FIGURE 10-17 Seven Management and Planning Tools: Typical Flow Source: From M. Brassard, “The Memory Jogger™ Plus+,” GOAL/QPC, Boston, 2004. Reprinted with permission of GOAL/QPC.
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 257
The Affinity Diagram
When we are solving a problem, it is often useful to first surface all the issues associated with the problem. A tool to do this is the affinity diagram , which helps a group converge on a set number of themes or ideas that can be addressed later. An affinity diagram creates a hierarchy of ideas on a large surface, as shown in Figure 10-18 . The steps used in establishing an affinity diagram are as follows:
1. Identify the problem to be stated. Create a clear, concise statement of the issue that is understood by everyone.
2. Give the team members a supply of note cards and a pen. Ask them to write down issues that relate to the problem. There should only be one idea per card. Ask them to use at least four or five words to clearly explain their thinking.
3. Allow only about 10 minutes for this writing activity. 4. Place the written cards on a flat surface. 5. Lay out the finished cards so all participants can see and have access to all the cards. 6. Let everyone on the team move the cards into groups with a similar theme. Do this work
silently because it does not help to discuss your thinking. Work and move quickly. 7. If you disagree with someone else’s placement of a note card, say nothing, but move it. 8. You reach consensus when all the cards are in groups, and the team members have stopped
moving the cards. Once consensus has been reached concerning placement of the cards, you can create header cards.
9. Draw a finished affinity diagram, and provide a working copy for all participants.
As illustrated in Figure 10-18 , you should have a table with an issue statement, subissue header cards, and note cards with ideas. This will provide the basis for further discussion and brainstorming.
Zoo personnel at a zoological park used an affinity diagram to help develop a mission statement. The problem was stated as “Issues surrounding the mission of the Metropolitan City Zoo.” The managers and zoo workers filled about 80 sticky notes with issues concerning the zoo’s mission. Next, the team members placed the sticky notes into groups and ultimately defined a mission with six major elements. This provided a foundation for a final mission statement.
Issue
Ideas
Subissue 1
Ideas
Subissue 2
Ideas
Subissue 3
IdeasIdeas
Subissue 4
FIGURE 10-18 Affinity Diagram
258 Part 3 • Im
plem enting Q
uality
Evaluation
Important to do it close to right the first time, but be flexible to
make changes later.
How do we know people are using it?
We should have a party when it starts working well.
Does it solve the problem of
not being able to find documents
needed?
Testing guide before it's
implemented for everyone.
Process for feedback for fine-tuning
guide.
Evaluate it once it's in
place.
Do we need additional hardware/ software to
build it? Cost?
Support
We'll need a backup
system to administer.
What do we do if the system goes down?
What about system
crashes and availability?
Available in print when systems are
down?
What do we do if the network
is down?
What costs are involved?
Training
What is the best way to train?
Train backups for administrative
support of guide (i.e., Sheilah).
Selecting someone to
provide training.
Amount of training time needed for learning.
Train backups to update for all teams having ownership of
links.
Training staff, both on-site and off-site
(owners who use it).
Remote users: Enabling them. Making it work
for them. Want more than
sales stuff.
Affinity Diagram: Issues with Implementing the Sales Reference Tool
Current Information
Becoming confident that
data/documents are current.
Maintaining it: Who will
maintain it and keep it
current? Will it be done on
a regular basis?
Purging out-of- date or obsolete
information.
Getting other departments to update out-of-
date documents.
Process to avoid
duplication.
Is it clear and concise?
Is it cluttered with items that
aren't sales tools?
Keeping the links current.
Group versus individual training.
Buy-In
Avoid perception of taking
creativity from salesperson.
Getting support from internal
systems.
Getting other departments to
keep information current, put
documents in our directory,
and utilize similar
development tools.
Get buy-in and support from users (other teams and
information suppliers).
How to introduce?
Will people use?
Building in ramifications if old or bad
data used from another
source.
Size
Keeping scope limited to sales tools
and processes.
It is more accessible for
senior management to make changes.
Keeping the size and scope manageable.
Users will want write- access to it.
We can't be too fancy (i.e.,
graphics).
Features
Keeping search engine as a
priority.
Finding a format
everyone likes.
Building in the solution selling
process and making sure the
guide has all the tools
people need.
Needs to be fast and
responsive.
Do we have resources to build it in a
timely manner?
How does it fit with other
programs being
developed?
Making resources
available on demand.
How can we get
international to duplicate or use as is?
Timing
Timing to implement and get the work
done.
Allotting enough
resources to build the
tool.
FIGURE 10-19 Affinity Diagram: Issues with Implementing the Sales Reference Tool
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 259
EXAMPLE 10.7 Affinity Diagrams
Problem: The sales team at HealthPeople Corporation, a supplier of medical information, decided to develop a sales reference tool (SRT) as a means of improving its training processes for new sales people in the field. It was decided that this SRT would be available on the company intranet. A team of experienced salespeople was assembled who cataloged all the current sales material in many different locations. These materials were then reviewed by the team. Prior to performing preliminary design work for the SRT, the team members had to identify issues relat- ing to the implementation of the SRT. The results are shown in Figure 10-19 .
Solution: This analysis helped team members identify key issues in the design and implementa- tion of the SRT. It was discovered that they needed to focus on eight issues in implementation: evaluation, support, training, current information, buy-in, size, features, and timing. The notes underneath the headers present some of the issues identified by the participants.
The Interrelationship Digraph
After completing the affinity diagram, it might be useful to understand the causal relationships between the different issues that surfaced. Also, it is helpful to identify the most important issues to be focused on in pursuing the solution to a problem. A finished interrelationship digraph is shown in Figure 10-20 . This interrelationship digraph shows the relationships between different issues. We will address how to develop this digraph, but note that the shaded boxes are major
Many simultaneous
jobs Poor needs definition
Customers don’t know
what they want
Lack of communications
What are issues with missed
delivery dates?
Marketing forecasts
inaccurate
Difficult to phase in jobs
Too many options
Frequent updates to editions
Short of staff
Too many hands in pot
FIGURE 10-20 Interrelationship Digraph
260 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
issues that need to be addressed in developing improvement strategies. The steps to complete the interrelationship digraph are as follows:
1. Construct an affinity diagram to identify the issues relating to a problem. After you have done this, place the cards with related issues in columns with gaps between the cards. It is helpful to use sticky notes on a large piece of flipchart paper.
2. Create the digraph by examining the cards one by one, asking, “What other issues on this digraph are caused or influenced by this issue?” As team members identify issues that are related, draw a one-way arrow from the first issue (the cause) to the second issue (the one influenced by the cause). Do this until all the issues have been discussed.
3. After reviewing the arrows and making needed revisions, count the numbers of arrows pointing to each note, and write the numbers on the notes.
4. Identify the cards with the most arrows as the “key factors.” Experience has shown that there should not be more than 5 to 10 key factors, depending on the issue being discussed. Some cards may have several arrows, but for one reason or another they are not really key factors; these can be dropped from consideration at this point. Boxes with the most outgo- ing arrows tend to be root causes; those with incoming arrows tend to be performance indicators.
5. Draw a double box around the key factors and brainstorm ways to address these issues.
EXAMPLE 10.8 Interrelationship Digraphs
Problem: For the issues relating to sales reference tools in Figure 10-19 , team members were interested in knowing what issues had the greatest effects on other issues. This would help them to know where to focus their efforts in coming weeks.
Solution: The cards from the affinity diagram in Example 10.7 were used to identify the relation- ships between the different issues. For presentation purposes, we only used the cards from the first four columns in the affinity diagram (these were evaluation, support, training, and current information). The relationships were outlined using sticky notes and markers on a large piece of paper. The results, shown in Figure 10-21 , reveal that the need for a backup system, training, and keeping the links current were key issues in developing the SRT. The team paid special attention to these aspects of the project. On a larger project, they might have established subteams to monitor these aspects of the project.
Tree Diagrams
The tree diagram is useful to identify the steps needed to address the given problem. Figure 10-22 shows a tree diagram. A tree diagram is very similar to a work breakdown structure used in plan- ning projects. The following steps should be used to complete a tree diagram.
1. Assemble the header cards from the affinity diagram. From these cards, choose the header card that represents the most important issue.
2. Once the goal statement has been determined, ask, “What are the steps required to resolve or achieve this major objective or goal?”
3. Once the major tasks have been identified, move to the next level under each task, and ask for the second level tasks, “What are the steps required to resolve or achieve this objective or goal?”
4. Continue doing this for successive levels until you have exhausted your ideas for steps.
C
hapter 10 • T he Tools of Q
uality
261
Important to do it close to right the first time, but be flexible to
make changes later.
How do we know people are using it?
We should have a party when it starts working well.
Does it solve the problem of
not being able to find documents
needed?
Testing guide before it's
implemented for everyone.
Process for feedback for fine-tuning
guide.
Do we need additional hardware/ software to
build it? Cost?
What do we do if the system goes down?
Available in print when systems are
down?
Group versus individual training.
What is the best way to
train?
Train backups for
administrative support of guide (i.e., Sheilah).
Selecting someone to
provide training.
Amount of training time needed for learning? Train backups
to update for all teams having ownership of
links. Training staff, both on-site and off-site
(owners who use it).
Remote users: Enabling them. Making it work
for them. Want more than sales
stuff.
Becoming confident that
data/documents are current.
Maintaining it: Who will
maintain it and keep it
current? Will it be done on
a regular basis?
Purging out-of-date or
obsolete information.
Getting other departments
to update out-of-date documents.
Process to avoid
duplication.
Is it clear and concise?
Is it cluttered with items that
aren't sales tools?
Keeping the links current.
What costs are involved?
Evaluate it once it's in place.
We'll need a backup
system to administer.
FIG U
R E 10-21
A ctual Interrelationship D
igraph
262 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Prioritization Grid
A prioritization grid is used to make decisions based on multiple criteria. For example, in choos- ing a technology, we might have a variety of alternative options. Also, the decision criteria vary as to how to choose possible desired outcomes. When there are multiple alternatives and multiple criteria, a prioritization grid is a good method to inform your decision making without resorting to more sophisticated analysis. Following are the steps required to make a prioritization grid:
1. Determine your goal, your alternatives, and the criteria by which a decision is to be made. 2. Place the selection criteria in order from most important to least important. 3. Apply a percentage weight to each of the criteria for each option. Apply a weight to each
of the criteria such that all the weights add up to 1 (for example, [criteria] A = .40, B = .30, C = .25, D = .05).
4. Average the individual ratings for each criterion, then rank those average scores, with the highest average ranked as 1, to determine final criteria rankings.
5. Rank each alternative with respect to the criteria. Add the rates for each alternative and rank the sum of the scores for each alternative to determine final criteria rankings.
6. Multiply the final criteria ranking (from Step 4) by each corresponding alternative’s rank (from Step 5). The result in each cell of the grid is called an importance score .
7. Add the importance scores for each alternative. 8. Rank each alternatives according to importance. (The lower the score, the better.)
EXAMPLE 10.9 Prioritization Grid
A company had to choose between five possible machines for a service process with five criteria. The criteria were ease of use, necessary maintenance, cost of the machine, expected life of the machine, and reputation for the quality of the machine (see Table 10-1 ).
The three team members provided subjective importance ratings for each of the different decision criteria. These are in Table 10-2 .
TABLE 10-1 Decision Criteria
Alternatives Criteria
Machine A Ease of use Machine B Maintenance Machine C Cost Machine D Expected life Machine E Reputation
Major Issue
Other minor tasks
Topics Topics
Subissues
Topics Topics Topics
Subissues
Topics Topics Topics
Subissues
Topics
FIGURE 10-22 Tree Diagram
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 263
TABLE 10-2 Importance Ratings
Criteria Person 1 Person 2 Person 3 Average Score Final Criteria Ranking
Ease of use 0.4 0.2 0.5 0.366 1 Maintenance 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.300 2 Cost 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.166 3 Expected life 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.066 5 Reputation 0.05 0.2 0.05 0.100 4
1 1 1
TABLE 10-3 Final Rankings
Ease of Use
Alternatives Person 1 Person 2 Person 3 Sum of Scores Final Ease of Use Ranking
Machine A 1 1 1 3 1 Machine B 2 3 2 7 2 Machine C 4 4 4 12 4 Machine D 5 5 5 15 5 Machine E 3 2 3 8 3
Maintenance Final Maintenance Ranking Alternatives Person 1 Person 2 Person 3 Sum of Scores
Machine A 2 2 1 5 1 Machine B 1 3 2 6 2 Machine C 5 5 4 14 5 Machine D 4 4 5 13 4 Machine E 3 1 3 7 3
Cost
Alternatives Person 1 Person 2 Person 3 Sum of Scores Final Cost Ranking
Machine A 4 4 5 13 5 Machine B 5 3 4 12 4 Machine C 1 1 2 4 1 Machine D 2 2 1 5 2 Machine E 3 5 3 11 3
Expected Life Final Expected Life Ranking Alternatives Person 1 Person 2 Person 3 Sum of Scores
Machine A 1 2 1 4 1 Machine B 2 3 2 7 2 Machine C 3 4 5 12 4 Machine D 4 5 4 13 5 Machine E 5 1 3 9 3
Reputation
Alternatives Person 1 Person 2 Person 3 Sum of Scores Final Reputation Ranking
Machine A 4 4 5 13 5 Machine B 5 3 4 12 4 Machine C 1 1 2 4 1 Machine D 2 2 1 5 2 Machine E 3 5 3 11 3
The team members then provided ratings for each of the different machines as they related to each criterion (see Table 10-3 ).
264 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
The final rankings were computed by multiplying the various rankings by their impor- tance. It looks like alternative C is the best choice. Note that the lowest score is the best (see Table 10-4 ).
Matrix Diagram
The matrix diagram is similar in concept to quality function deployment in its use of symbols, its layout, and its application. Because the matrix diagram is one of the N7 tools, we mention it here. However, the prior presentation of QFD is much more complete, so we will keep this short. Like the other N7 tools, the matrix diagram is a brainstorming tool that can be used in a group to show the relationships between ideas or issues. Matrix diagrams are simple to use and can be used in two, three, or four dimensions. The steps are as follows:
1. Determine the number of issues or dimensions to be used in the matrix. 2. Choose the appropriate matrix. 3. Place the appropriate symbols in the matrix.
Figure 10-23 shows a responsibility matrix diagram. The legend at the bottom of the figure shows the extent of responsibility among the different people. No example is provided here because we discussed QFD earlier in Chapter 7 . This grid in Figure 10-23 gives a simplified ver- sion of a QFD matrix.
TABLE 10-4 Combining Rankings
Final Criteria Ranking
Final Ease of Use Ranking
Final Maintenance Ranking
Final Cost Ranking
1 1 1 5 2 2 2 4 3 4 5 1 5 5 4 2 4 3 3 3
Final Expected Life Ranking Final Reputation Ranking
1 5 2 4 4 1 5 2 3 3
Scores
Machine A: 1(1) + 2(1) + 3(5) + 5(1) + 4(5) = 43 Machine B: 1(2) + 2(2) + 3(4) + 5(2) + 4(4) = 44 Machine C: 1(4) + 2(5) + 3(1) + 5(4) + 4(1) = 41 Machine D: 1(5) + 2(4) + 3(2) + 5(5) + 4(2) = 52 Machine E: 1(3) + 2(3) + 3(3) + 5(3) + 4(3) = 45
Final Rankings
1 C 2 A 3 B Machine C is the best choice. 4 E 5 D
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 265
Process Decision Program Chart
A process decision program chart is a tool to help brainstorm possible contingencies or prob- lems associated with the implementation of some program or improvement. Figure 10-24 shows such a chart in tree form (the outline form is not presented here). The steps are as follows:
1. In developing the tree diagram, place the first-level boxes in sequential order. (These are the boxes in the first column in Figure 10-24 .)
2. Moving to the second level, list implementation details at a fairly high level. Try to be all- inclusive at a macro level.
3. At the third level, ask the questions “What unexpected things could happen in this imple- mentation?” or “What could go awry at this stage?”
4. At the fourth level, brainstorm possible countermeasures to the problems identified at the third level.
5. Evaluate the countermeasures for feasibility, and mark those that are feasible with an O and those that are not feasible with an X .
Activity Network Diagram
The activity network diagram is also known as a PERT (program evaluation and review tech- nique) diagram or critical-path (longest path in time from beginning to end) diagram and is used in controlling projects. Figure 10-25 shows an activity network PERT diagram with its nodes and times. The nodes are circles and the times are given in days. Activity network diagrams are dis- cussed in depth in Chapter 14 .
Reducing the Number of Billing Errors
Layout engineers
Software designers
Engineers
Human resources
Options
People needed
Systems
18
22
24
4
6
Total
Si m
pl if
y pr
oc es
s
R ev
is e
pr ic
in g
L es
se n
op tio
ns
Sp ec
if y
co st
s
Im pr
ov e
de fi
ni tio
n
Im pr
ov e
da ta
ba se
High (9) [Prime responsibility]
Medium (3) [Secondary responsibility]
Low (1) [Kept informed]
FIGURE 10-23 Responsibility Matrix Diagram
266 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Update job descriptions
Define job requirements
Develop new pay scales
Payroll systems need to be updated
It is difficult to differentiate job grades
Could result in a redefinition
of departments
Refuse to make changes
Get early consensus
Employees fear changes in job assignments
Have an employee meeting
Establish a no-grade-change
policy
Budget allocations need to be revisited
No budget available
Violates budget cycle
X
O
X
X
O
O
FIGURE 10-24 Process Decision Program Chart
b 4
f 4
a 10
d 8
e 15
i 3
j 9
h 6 k
10
c 6
g 8
FIGURE 10-25 Activity Network Diagram
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 267
Reflections on the Managerial N7 Tools
As you can see, the N7 tools are useful for managing long projects that involve teams. With the B7 and N7 tools, you have a reasonably good set of skills that will help in managing many projects. They have been used successfully in many different settings and for many different purposes.
The power of these tools is that with The Plan–do–check–act (PDCA) cycle , they give companies a simple, easy-to-understand methodology for solving unstructured problems. They are especially useful when used in teams. Many of these tools are also fun to use. By using them effectively, managers can reduce unproductive meeting time to a minimum and make good, fact- based decisions.
OTHER TOOLS FOR PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
There are other tools used in communicating performance to employees. The justification for these tools is to present data in an economical and understandable way. We present three such tools.
Spider Charts
Spider charts are graphs that present multiple metrics simultaneously in a two-dimensional plane. Figure 10-26 shows a spider chart. In this case, we show six different metrics (A–F) and report goals and results. A quick review of the figure shows that the firm has not met perfor- mance goals on metrics A, B, D, and E. The firm has met the goal relative to metric C and has exceeded the goal on metric F.
Other values that might be included on spider charts besides current performance and results are baseline performance measures and benchmark values. At times, this information can be found in QFD matrices.
Balanced Scorecards
A very important tool for measuring performance is a balanced scorecard . Balanced scorecards are usually spreadsheets that are communicated to management on a regular basis—weekly, monthly, quarterly, and annually. The usefulness of the balanced scorecard comes from integrating financial measures of business success, such as key metrics, along with nonfinancial, operational information about the business, such as customer satisfaction and process performance measures.
Metric A
Metric D Goal
Current
Metric F
Metric E
Metric B
Metric C
FIGURE 10-26 Spider Chart Example
268 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Objectives Measurement Target Initiative
Financial Performance Profitability
More Customers Less Investment
Market Value Truckload Rev.
EVA Charge
Increase Market Share by 5%
Increase Truck Revenue by 10%
Promote Delivery Service
Establish Specific Delivery Routes
by Customer
Optimize Order Prestaging Process
Teamwork and Communication Skills Training
Exceed Customer Expectations 95%
85% by June 20XX
90% by June 20XX
Number of Orders Delivered on
Date Promised
Number of Orders Prestaged on
Time for Loading
Percent of Staff Trained in Teamwork
Orders Delivered on Time
Lowest Prices
Efficient Staging and Loading of Customer Orders
Improved Communication
Channels
Customer Satisfaction
Process Improvement
Employee Satisfaction
Strategic Theme
FIGURE 10-27 Balanced Scorecard Example
Financial
Customer
Satisfaction
Process
Improvement
Performance
Employee
Satisfaction
Overall
Performance
Revenue $
200,000,001
FIGURE 10-28 Dashboard Example
Figure 10-27 shows a very simplified layout for a balanced scorecard. Notice that this balanced scorecard combines financial, customer, process, and employee information into a single form. Often these forms are color-coded to show if goals are being met or if performance is unsatisfactory. Scorecards, if used effectively, can be used to monitor and drive improvements in performance.
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 269
Dashboards
Dashboards look like electric meters or car dashboards. Figure 10-28 shows a dashboard that looks like an electric meter. Each of the “gauges” on the dashboard shows a different metric.
Notice in this case that the gauges in Figure 10-28 match the metrics reported in our bal- anced scoreboard discussed in Figure 10-27 . This dashboard quickly communicates performance levels. Again, the focus is on easy, clear communication.
Summary In this chapter we have briefly introduced the basic tools of quality. These tools should be adapted to the specific needs of your company. You also do not need always to use all the tools in a single project.
The B7 and N7 are useful in their simplicity and power. It is an easy undertaking to train employees to use these tools. However, many companies provide the training and then wonder why the employees don’t use them. The reason is that along with the tools, cultural change is needed to ensure that implementation can be successful. Also, if management doesn’t support the use of the tools in all possible situations, they do not become inculcated in the organization. In the following chapters, we discuss the context within which these tools can be successful.
Key Terms Activity network diagram Affinity diagram Balanced scorecard Basic seven (B7) tools
of quality Cause-and-effect (or fishbone
or Ishikawa) diagram
Check sheets Control charts Dashboards Histogram Interrelationship digraph Matrix diagram New seven (N7) tools
Pareto charts Plan–do–check–act (PDCA)
cycle Prioritization grid Process decision
program chart Process map
Scatter diagram or scatter plot
SIPOC Spider charts Tree diagram
Discussion Questions 1. Why is it important to pursue quality management from a systems perspective? 2. Why is continual improvement necessary for a business organization? 3. The statement has been made that “A quality system is not just a series of boxes and arrows. It is an
interconnected, interdisciplinary network of people, technology, procedures, markets, customers, facilities, legal requirements, reporting requirements, and assets that interact to achieve an end.” What does this statement mean to you?
4. How do the basic tools work within W. E. Deming’s plan–do–check–act (PDCA) cycle as a process for continual improvement?
5. What are the seven basic tools of quality? Who developed these tools? 6. Describe the purpose of a histogram. 7. Describe the purpose of a Pareto chart. Describe an instance (other than the one in the book) in which
a Pareto chart could be effectively used. 8. What are the three basic rules for constructing Pareto charts? 9. What is the purpose of a cause-and-effect (Ishikawa) diagram? 10. Describe the purpose of a check sheet. Describe an instance (other than the ones in the book) in which
a check sheet could be effectively used. 11. Describe the purpose of a scatter diagram. 12. Describe the purpose of a flowchart. What are three of the rules for designing and using flowcharts? 13. What is the purpose of a control chart? 14. Which of the seven (Ishikawa) tools of quality described in the chapter have been the most helpful to
you in your experiences? Make your answer as substantive as possible. 15. What is the purpose of an affinity diagram?
270 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
16. Describe the purpose of an interrelationship digraph? 17. Describe the purpose of tree diagrams. Describe an instance in which a tree diagram could be used. 18. Describe the purpose of a prioritization grid. 19. Describe the purpose of a matrix diagram. In what ways is the matrix diagram a brainstorming tool? 20. What is the purpose of a process decision program chart?
Problems 1. Develop a process map of washing a car. Include a high level of detail in your map. Make six recom-
mendations for improvements to your process. 2. Take the process map from Problem 1 and develop it into an extended process map. Make five recom-
mendations for simplifying the extended process as it exists. 3. Develop a process map for making chocolate chip cookies. Include a high level of detail if you need to.
You may need to consult a cookbook. Make three recommendations for improvements to your process. Discuss these with the class.
4. Take the process map from Problem 3 and develop an extended value stream process map. Make rec- ommendations for three improvements to the extended process. Be sure to include all suppliers and logistics associated with the customers.
5. Develop a check sheet for defects in a flat-screen computer monitor. 6. Develop a check sheet for defects in a quality management class exam. Identify how you would use the
check sheet to improve performance on future exams. 7. Develop a histogram for the following data:
Employee Hours of Overtime Days Absent
1 243 3 2 126 2 3 86 0 4 424 6 5 236 3 6 128 0 7 0 0 8 126 2 9 324 3
10 118 0 11 62 0 12 128 3 13 460 6 14 135 1 15 118 1 16 260 2 17 0 1 18 126 1 19 234 2 20 246 3 21 120 1 22 80 0 23 112 1 24 237 3 25 129 2 26 24 1 27 36 0 28 128 2 29 246 3 30 326 6
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 271
Develop two separate histograms for hours of overtime and days absent. How do the data appear to be distributed?
8. Using the data in Problem 7, develop a scatter plot of hours of overtime versus days absent. Do the data overtime hours and days absent appear to be correlated?
9. Develop a histogram using the following data: 4.7, 4.7, 5.0, 5.6, 5.6, 5.6, 5.9, 5.9, 5.9, 5.9, 6.2, 6.2, 6.2, 6.2, 6.2, 6.2, 6.5, 6.5, 6.5, 6.5, 6.5, 6.5, 6.8,
6.8, 9.8, 9.8, 9.8, 9.8, 6.8, 6.8, 6.8, 6.8, 6.8, 6.8, 6.8, 6.8, 6.8, 6.8, 6.8, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.1, 7.4, 7.4, 7.4, 7.4, 7.4, 7.4, 7.4, 7.4, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 7.7, 8.0, 8.0, 8.0, 8.0, 8.0, 8.0, 8.3, 8.3, 8.3, 8.3, 8.3, 8.3, 8.6, 8.6, 8.6, 8.6, 8.6, 8.6, 8.9, 8.9, 8.9, 9.2, 9.2, 9.8.
Do the data appear to be normally distributed?
10. If you have 60 data points, use the log formula to determine how many classes you should use in your histogram.
11. Use the logarithmic formula in the chapter to determine how many classes you should use for the fol- lowing numbers of data: a. 35 b. 200 c. 600
12. Think about the following questions, and develop fishbone diagrams for each of them: a. What is the major service problem in your university? b. What is the major thing that interferes with your study? c. What is the major problem with your school newspaper? d. What is the major social problem in society?
13. For the following data, develop a Pareto analysis. The letters A, B, C, D, E, and F are problems that occur in a process. Which cause should you focus on first?
A B B C A A C A D A A C B A D C B B A A A C B D D B C E A F B E C A D B A A A C A D B B C B B A C A A A B D A C C B A E
272 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
14. For the following data, develop a Pareto chart. The letters V, X, Y, and Z are problems that occur in a process. Which cause should you address first if the fixes for the problems are $1.00, $1.20, $.90, and $2.00, respectively?
VXZZZYYXXYVVYYXXZZYZZYXXVYVYVYVYXXXYVYZVYXXXYVYVYVXXXXV- VVVYYYYVYVYVYXYXYXVXVZZZXYXYXYVYYXZZZ
15. Either alone or as a team, draw a fishbone diagram about the following topics: a. What are the causes of poor grades? b. Why do college students drink too much? c. Why do I not have enough money? d. What are the causes of poor response times on the Internet?
16. Quality Is Personal by Roberts and Sergesketter is a popular book. In it they recommend using the basic tools of quality in our personal lives. Develop a check sheet to keep track of personal defects you have in your life (such as sleeping too late, being too grumpy, and so on). Use this check sheet for two weeks to track these personal defects. After two weeks, perform a Pareto analysis to determine where you have the greatest need for improvement. Next, use the fishbone diagram to identify the underlying causes of the personal defects. After making changes, use a control chart to track your defects.
17. For the following data, draw a scatter diagram to see if time lost because of injuries and overtime hours are related. What do you conclude?
Plant Lost Time Days Overtime Hours
A 5 254 B 3 114 C 6 350 D 4 219 E 10 496 F 5 218 G 7 279
18. Develop a process map for the registration process at your university. Analyze the number of value- added and non-value-added steps.
19. Develop a process map for receiving financial aid at your university. Analyze the process and develop a proposal for improvement.
20. With a team of students, develop an affinity diagram relating to the following statement, “What are issues relating to finding a job in the current economy?” What did you find?
21. Form a team and develop an affinity diagram for the following problem statement: What are issues associated with completing a university or college degree in a reasonable amount of time?
22. Using the affinity diagram from Problem 21, develop an interrelationship digraph. What do you gener- alize from the interrelationship digraph?
23. Deveop a tree diagram for building a home. 24. Develop a tree diagram for writing a major research paper. Now take the steps you identified for this
project and develop an activity network diagram. 25. Complete the analysis for the following prioritization grid information by finding the final ranking:
Decision Alternatives
Machine 1 Machine 2 Machine 3 Machine 4
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 273
26. Develop a process decision chart for completing your college degree.
Decision Criteria Importance
A .3 B .2 C .5
Final Rankings
Criterion A Ranking
Machine 1 1 Machine 2 2 Machine 3 3 Machine 4 4
Criterion B Ranking
Machine 1 3 Machine 2 2 Machine 3 4 Machine 4 1
Criterion C Ranking
Machine 1 4 Machine 2 2 Machine 3 1 Machine 4 3
CASES
Case 10-1 Corporate Universities: Teaching the Tools of Quality Motorola Solutions Learning: www.motorolasolutions.com/US-CN/Home Sears University: www.searsholdings.com
Although most of us are familiar with major public uni- versities like Penn State, Colorado–Boulder, Georgia, and Ohio State, we are typically unfamiliar with corporate universities such as Motorola Solutions Learning, Intel University, and the AT&T Learning Center. This is because corporate universities are a fairly new concept, and they are created to serve the needs of a particular company’s employees and other stakeholders.
The term corporate university has been adopted by firms that have significantly upgraded their training and development activities by creating learning centers within their corporations. These learning centers are typically designed to prioritize a firm’s training initia- tives, and to quickly share with a firm’s employees the skills, techniques, and best practices that are necessary
to remain competitive. For example, when a new qual- ity tool or technique is developed, it is often the respon- sibility of a firm’s corporate university to develop a plan to equip the firm’s employees with the skills necessary to quickly incorporate the new tool or techniques into their work areas.
Following are brief descriptions of two corporate universities. After reading these descriptions, ask your- self the following rhetorical question: “Are these corpo- rations well equipped to teach their employees the tools of quality?”
Motorola Solutions Learning (MSL) Motorola Solutions Learning (MSL) began as the Motorola Training and Education Center. Initially, the
274 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
purpose of MSL was to help Motorola strengthen its training efforts and build a quality-focused corporate culture. Through the years, MSL has grown in both size and stature and now has a staff of more than 400 employ- ees and seven facilities across the world. The stated objectives of MSL are as follows:
• To provide training and education to all Motorola employees.
• To prepare Motorola employees to be best-in- class in their industries.
• To serve as a catalyst for change and continuous improvement to position Motorola Corporation for the future.
• To provide added value to Motorola in the mar- keting and distribution of products throughout the world.
To accomplish these objectives, MSL does many things. For example, each of the company’s employees is required to take a minimum of 40 hours a year of job- relevant training and education. MSL also provides its employees consulting services in a number of areas, including benchmarking, cycle time reduction, quality improvement processes, and statistical tools and prob- lem-solving techniques.
One unique aspect of MSL is that it reaches beyond the Motorola Corporation. MSL provides train- ing and certification programs for Motorola suppliers
and also provides consulting services and training for other corporations on a fee basis.
Sears University Sears University was established with the ambitious goal of becoming an integral part of the company’s turn- around efforts. The university was opened with the idea of offering a wide selection of formal training and self- study courses for Sears’s employees. In its first year of operation, approximately 10,000 of the company’s employees participated in formal programs ranging from one day to one week in duration. Another 4,000 employ- ees completed self-study courses each month.
In addition to offering training programs in areas such as merchandising, operations, customer service, and human resources management, Sears University also provides the company’s employees programs designed to help them function as change agents and strategic leaders within the corporation. For example, participants in financial management training programs use computer-based simulations to model the impact of various financial strategies on business unit perfor- mance. Particular attention is paid to trying to help employees see the company’s operations from the cus- tomer’s perspective. The courses are taught by seasoned line managers along with professional facilitators and Sears University personnel.
Discussion Questions
1. Are corporate universities a good idea? If so, why?
2. How can a corporate university do a better job of teaching a firm’s employees the “tools of quality” than traditional training programs?
3. Select a corporate university and visit its Web site. How does the company’s corporate university facilitate the company’s overall quality-related goals and initiatives?
Case 10-2 Lanier: Achieving Maximum Performance by Supporting Quality Products with Quality Services Lanier home page www.lanier.com
Lanier, a wholly owned subsidiary of Harris Corpora- tion, is the largest independent distributor of office equipment in the world. The company, which is head- quartered in Atlanta, Georgia, has more than 1,600 sales and services centers in more than 100 countries world- wide. Lanier’s product mix includes copy machines, fax machines, voicemail, dictation/ transcription systems, presentation systems, and other related office products and services.
Throughout most of its corporate history, Lanier has been a sales-driven organization. The company was founded in 1934 by Tommy Lanier and his two brothers as the distributors of “Ediphone” dictation machines in the southeastern portion of the United States. In 1955 Lanier entered the copier business as an independent distributor of 3M “Thermofax” dry process copiers. Through the years, the company’s product line has broadened, and it has experienced consistent growth
Chapter 10 • The Tools of Quality 275
and profitability. Lanier also has earned for itself an excellent reputation in the office products industry.
Rather than manufacturing its own products, Lanier’s business strategy has been to partner with companies like 3M, Toshiba, and Canon to develop a cohesive line of high-quality office equipment. The biggest challenge for Lanier has been to differentiate itself from its competitors. Although the company sells good quality products, its products are similar to the products sold by other office equipment vendors. To find a point of differentiation from its competitors, in the early 1990s Lanier decided to shift from a sales- driven company to a company focused on customer satisfaction. The company realized that to make this shift successfully, it had to build a corporate culture that supported its products with quality customer service.
Lanier worked hard to develop quality services to complement its products. To accomplish this, the company developed several specific quality-related programs. These programs included the following:
• Customer Vision • Performance Promise • 100 Percent Sold • Lanier Team Management Process
The premise behind the Customer Vision pro- gram was to encourage each employee to see the company’s business through the customers’ eyes and respond appropriately. The Performance Promise
program was designed to offer the industry’s best perfor- mance pledge by guaranteeing total product satisfaction (or replacement at no charge); and by providing a 24-hour, toll-free helpline; free loaners when repairs are necessary; and a 10-year guarantee on the availability of service, parts, and supplies for all Lanier products. The 100 Percent Sold program challenged the company’s employees with the goal of having every Lanier customer buy all of their office products from Lanier. Finally, the Lanier Team Management Process was a quality pro- gram that stressed a never-ending process of continuous improvement in quality, reliability, and performance in all things Lanier did at all levels within the company.
In addition to specific programs to support ser- vice and product quality, the company also started to see itself as a consulting organization rather than a sales organization. By giving potential customers good advice before the sale, the company found that it could create a seamless stream of Lanier involvement in satis- fying a customer’s office product needs. The stream includes presale advice, the actual sale, and after-sale service. Lanier also has coupled its new initiatives with extensive training for its employees and incentive pro- grams tied to the company’s quality-related goals.
Lanier has been successful in complementing its quality products with quality customer service. As evi- dence of this, the company received several prestigious awards from its customers including DuPont’s “Part- ners in Excellence Award,” Pacific Bell’s “Quality Part- ner Award,” and Chevron’s “Alliance Supplier Award.”
Discussion Questions
1. Why was it important for Lanier to develop spe- cific programs, such as Customer Vision and Per- formance Promise, to facilitate its dual emphasis on quality products and quality services?
2. What steps has Lanier taken to reinforce the importance of quality services to its employees?
3. Do you believe that Lanier continued to be suc- cessful? Why or why not?
Data are required to obtain the average dimensions and the degree of dispersion (in a process) so that we can determine . . . whether the
production process used for manufacturing the lot was suitable, or if some action must be taken. in other words, action can be taken on a
process on the basis of data gained from the samples.
—Kaoru Ishikawa
C H A P T E R 1 1
Statistically Based Quality Improvement
for Variables
276
As we view the world about us, statistics are everywhere. We hear statistics about politics, health, inflation, or the economy on the radio or TV on a daily basis. Yet many people view the topic of statistics with fear, loathing, and trembling. The purpose of statistics is clear. Statistics are a group of tools that allow us to analyze data, make summaries, draw infer- ences, and generalize from data.
Statistics are very important in the field of quality. In fact, during the first half century of the quality movement, nearly all the work done in the field of quality related to statistics. This work resulted in a body of tools that are used worldwide in thousands of organizations.
This chapter focuses on the use of statistical tools, not as control mechanisms, but as the foundation for continual improvement. We present many statistical techniques and different types of control charts. These tools represent powerful techniques for monitoring and improving processes. We also discuss the behavioral aspects of statistical process improvement. It is impor- tant to recognize that it is not enough to learn the different charts and statistical techniques. We also must know how to apply these techniques in a way that will document and motivate contin- ual improvement in organizations.
These techniques can be enjoyable to use, and we present them in a way that is intuitive and easy to understand. Where possible, we develop shortcuts and simple statistical techniques instead of more complex models. The primary goal is that these tools be used.
STATISTICAL FUNDAMENTALS
What Is Statistical Thinking?
Statistical thinking is a decision-making skill demonstrated by the ability to draw conclusions based on data. We make a lot of decisions based on intuition and gut feelings. Often we choose friends, homes, and even spouses based on feelings. Therefore, intuition and feelings are very important in making good decisions in certain circumstances.
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 277
However, intuitive decisions are sometimes biased and wrong-headed. Consider the case of government. Many times it is the most vocal groups that seem to control political agendas. It is difficult for mayors, governors, or presidents to determine exactly what the voting public wants on any issue. As a result, decisions are sometimes made that satisfy the few but irritate the many. Statistical thinking is based on these three concepts:
• All work occurs in a system of interconnected processes. • All processes have variation (the amount of variation tends to be underestimated). • Understanding variation and reducing variation are important keys to success.
In business, decisions need to be made based on data. If you want to know how to sat- isfy your customers, you need to gather data about the customers to understand their prefer- ences. It is one thing to watch a production process humming along. It is a completely different thing to gather data about the process and make adjustments to the process based on data. Statistical thinking guides us to make decisions based on the analysis of data (see Quality Highlight 11-1 ).
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 11-1 Statistical Tools in Action
Statistical tools have long been staples of the quality professional. Around the world, many firms have adopted statistical tools with good results. One of the appealing features of statistical tools is that they can be adapted and used in a wide variety of situations. For example, Ore-Ida Corporation, a subsidiary of Heinz Corporation and a nationally known producer of consumer food products, uses statistics to ensure that its food meets weight and measure requirements. One of the products that Ore-Ida produces is called a Pita Pocket Sandwich. The problem with the Pita sandwich was that if the sandwiches were too large, they would not fit into the formed plastic Pita-holding package, and excess costs would be incurred. If the sandwiches were too small, customers would perceive them as having less value. As a result, Ore-Ida used statistical process control, experimental design, and process capability studies to ensure that the sandwiches met requirements.
Statistical process control is not always immediately successful. Simplot Corporation, a competi- tor of Ore-Ida’s, attempted statistical process control and other tools of quality in its Caldwell, Idaho, facility. According to Bob Romero, manager of total quality management services, the company had to do an educational assessment of its employees, which resulted in a picture that was anything but flatter- ing. Many of Simplot’s employees had marginal literacy skills. As a result, the company undertook a lengthy program of training and education in literacy, after which new standards were created for employees that included overall standards for literacy and the ability to use word-processing software and spreadsheets. After completing this program, management again implemented statistical process control and other quality management tools. This time they were successful in improving processes and reducing costs.
Jaco Manufacturing Company, a producer of industrial components, tube fittings, and injection- molding machines, implemented statistical process control, process capability studies, and quality man- agement tools as a means for improving customer service. G. K. Products, Inc., of Ann Arbor, Michigan—a Jaco customer—asked Jaco to reduce its costs by improving its inspection of plastic float bodies. These float bodies are used in gas tanks so that in the case of rollover the flow of fuel to the car’s engine will shut off. Benefits that were achieved through this program included a 14% reduction in cycle time, a decrease in scrap, thousands of dollars in cost savings, improved morale, and improved customer satisfaction.
As we learn from these examples and countless others, companies around the world either now have implemented statistical quality tools or are in the process of adopting these tools. All processes exhibit variability. This fact alone makes statistical process tools invaluable to manufacturing and ser- vices companies alike.
278 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Why Do Statistics Sometimes Fail in the Workplace?
Before beginning a discussion of statistical quality improvement, we must remember that many times statistical tools do not achieve the desired results. Why is this so? Many firms fail to imple- ment quality control in a substantive way. That is, they prefer form over substance. We provide several reasons as a guide. You can use this guide to assess whether your organization will be successful in using statistics to improve. Reasons for failure of statistical tools include the following:
• Lack of knowledge about the tools; therefore, tools are misapplied. • General disdain for all things mathematical creates a natural barrier to the use of statistics.
When was the last time you heard someone proclaim a love for statistics? • Cultural barriers in a company make the use of statistics for continual improvement
difficult. • Statistical specialists have trouble communicating with managerial generalists. • Statistics generally are poorly taught, emphasizing mathematical development rather than
application. • People have a poor understanding of the scientific method. • Organizations lack patience in collecting data. All decisions have to be made “yesterday.” • Statistics are viewed as something to buttress an already-held opinion rather than a method
for informing and improving decision making. • People fear using statistics because they fear they may violate critical statistical assump-
tions. Time-ordered data are messy and require advanced statistical techniques to be used effectively.
• Most people don’t understand random variation, resulting in too much process tampering. • Statistical tools often are reactive and focus on effects rather than causes . • Another reason people make mistakes with statistics is founded in the notions of type I and
type II errors. In the study of quality, we call type I error producer’s risk and type II error consumer’s risk . In this context, producer’s risk is the probability that a good product will be rejected. Consumer’s risk is the probability that a nonconforming product will be avail- able for sale. Consumer’s risk happens when statistical quality analysis fails to result in the scrapping or reworking of a defective product. When either type I or type II errors occur, erroneous decisions are made relative to products. These erroneous decisions can result in high costs or lost future sales. Given these problems, we adopt the approach that statistics should be used, they should be used correctly, and they should be taught correctly.
Understanding Process Variation
All processes exhibit variation. There is some variation that we can manage and other variation that we cannot manage. If there is too much variation, process parts will not fit correctly, prod- ucts will not function properly, and a firm will gain a reputation for poor quality.
Two types of process variation commonly occur. These are random and nonrandom varia- tion. Random variation is uncontrollable, and nonrandom variation has a cause that can be identi- fied. The statistical tools discussed later in this chapter are useful for determining whether variation is random.
Random variation is centered around a mean and occurs with a somewhat consistent amount of dispersion. This type of variation cannot be controlled. Hence we refer to it as “uncon- trolled variation.” The amount of random variation in a process may be either large or small. When the variation is large, processes may not meet specifications on a consistent basis.
The statistical tools discussed in this chapter are not designed to detect random variation. Figure 11-1 shows normal distributions resulting from a variety of samples taken from the same population over time. We find a consistency in the amount of dispersion and the mean of the process. The fact that not all observations within the distributions fall exactly on the target line
Video Clip: Behavioral Aspects of SPC
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 279
shows that there is variation. However, the consistency of the variation shows that only random causes of variation are present within the process. This means that in the future when we gather samples from the process, we can expect that the distributions associated with such samples also will take the same form.
Nonrandom (or “special cause”) variation results from some event. The event may be a shift in a process mean or some unexpected occurrence. For example, we might receive flawed materials from a supplier. There might be a change in work shift. An employee might come to work under the influence of drugs and make errors. The machine may break or not function prop- erly. Figure 11-2 shows distributions resulting from a number of samples taken from the same population over time where nonrandom variation is exhibited. Notice that from one sample to the next, the dispersion and average of the process are changing. When we compare this figure to random variation, it is clear that nonrandom variation results in a process that is not repeatable.
Target
Sample 3
Sample 2
Sample 1
Consistent means and consistent dispersion
FIGURE 11-1 Random Variation
Target
Sample 3
Sample 2
Sample 1 Initial process state
Smaller variance and shift in mean
Increased variance and shift in mean
FIGURE 11-2 Nonrandom Variation
280 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Process Stability
Process stability means that the variation we observe in the process is random variation (com- mon cause) and not nonrandom variation (special or assignable causes). To determine process stability, we use process charts. Process charts are graphs designed to signal process workers when nonrandom variation is occurring in a process.
Sampling Methods
To ensure that processes are stable, data are gathered in samples. Process control requires that data be gathered in samples. For the most part, sampling methods have been preferred to the alternative of 100% inspection. The reasons for sampling are well established. Samples are cheaper, take less time, are less intrusive, and allow the user to frame the sample. In cases where quality testing is destructive, 100% inspection would be impossible and would literally drive the company out of business. In some processes, chemicals are used in testing or pull tests are applied to cables. These destructive tests ruin the sample but are useful to show that a good product is being made.
However, recent experience has shown that 100% inspection can be effective in certain instances. One hundred percent samples are also known as screening samples, sorting samples, rectifying samples, or detailing samples . They have been most common in acceptance sampling ( Chapter 9 Appendix), where a lot of material has been rejected in the past and materials must be sorted to keep good materials and return defective materials for a refund.
Another example of 100% inspection is used when performing in-process inspection. Many companies have asked their employees to inspect their own work as the work is being per- formed. This can result in 100% inspection at every stage of the process! We should clarify that in-process inspection also can be performed on a sampling basis. Because sampling is so impor- tant, let’s look at some different types of samples.
Random Samples
Randomization is useful because it ensures independence among observations. To randomize means to sample in such a way that every piece of product has an equal chance of being selected for inspection. This means that if 1,000 products are produced in a single day, each product has a 1/1,000 chance of being selected for inspection on that day. Random samples are often the preferred form of sampling and yet often the most difficult to achieve. This is especially true in process industries where multiple products are made by the same machines, workers, and pro- cesses in sequence. In this case, there is not independence among observations because the pro- cess results in ordered products that can be subject to machine drift (going out of adjustment slowly over time).
Systematic Samples
Systematic samples have some of the benefits of random samples without the difficulty of ran- domizing. Samples can be systematic according to time or according to sequence . If a sample is systematic according to time, a product is inspected at regular intervals of time, say, every 15 minutes. If a systematic sample is performed according to sequence, one product is inspected every tenth iteration. For example, every tenth product coming off the line is sampled.
Sampling by Rational Subgroups
A rational subgroup is a group of data that is logically homogeneous; variation within these data can provide a yardstick for computing limits on the standard variation between subgroups. For example, in a hospital it may not make sense to combine measurements such as body temperature
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 281
or medication levels taken in the morning with measurements taken in the evening. Morning measurements occur before medications are given and before the first meal of the day and con- stitute a rational subgroup. Evening measurements, another such subgroup, are taken after treat- ment has been provided during the day, medications have been administered, and patients have been nourished. If data are gathered that combine these two subgroups (e.g., the night and day measurements), then differences between morning results and evening results will not be detected. If variation among different subgroups is not accounted for, then an unwanted source of nonrandom variation is being introduced.
Planning for Inspection
As you can see, much planning must be performed in developing sampling plans. Questions must be answered about what type of sampling plan will be used, who will perform the inspec- tion, who will use in-process inspection, sample size, what the critical attributes to be inspected are, and where inspection should be performed. There are rules for inspection that help to priori- tize where inspection should be performed. Many firms compute the ratio between the cost of inspection and the cost of failure resulting from a particular step in the process, in order to pri- oritize where inspection should occur first.
Control Plans
Control plans are an important part of a quality control system and are a required part of an ISO 9000 quality management system (QMS) . After performing process failure modes and effects analysis (PFMEA), inspection is put in place at critical points in a process. Control plans pro- vide a documented, proactive approach to defining how to respond when process control charts show that a process is out of control.
Figure 11-3 shows a sample control plan. In the production of a sprinkler head, four machines are used. The control plan outlines critical product characteristics that can be observed or measured at each stage of the process. It shows how inspection is to be performed and pre- scribes reactions when a problem is detected.
The far right column is referred to as the reaction plan . Control plans are usually kept by the quality assurance people involved with ISO 9000 and are made available to line workers who are responsible for executing process controls.
PROCESS CONTROL CHARTS
Now that we have learned about variation, it is time to learn about the tools used to under- stand random and nonrandom variation. Statistical process control charts (also referred to as process charts or control charts) are tools for monitoring process variation. Figure 11-4 shows a control chart . It has an upper limit, a center line, and a lower limit. Several different types of control charts are discussed later. In this chapter we introduce different statistical charts one by one. However, you should know there is a generalized process for implement- ing all types of process charts that we introduce first. This is a useful approach to learning control charts because the process for establishing different types of control charts is the same. Although the process for establishing different control charts is the same, the formulas used to compute the upper limit, center line, and lower limit are different. You will learn the formulas later.
Variables and Attributes Control Charts
To select the proper process chart, we must differentiate between variables and attributes. As we already stated, a variable is a continuous measurement such as weight, height, or volume. An attribute is an either-or situation. Here are examples of attributes: The motor is either starting or
282 Part 3 • Im
plem enting Q
uality
Part Number: Part Name Description: Plant:
Sprinkler Head
Characteristics Methods
Process Machine/ Name/ Tools Specifications/ Measurement Sample Sample Control Reaction Plan Operation Fixture Product Process Tolerance Technique Size Freq. Method
Plastic Machine 1 Appearance Free of Blemishes Visual Inspection 100% Continuous 100% Notify Injection Inspection Supervisor Molding
Flow Marks 1st Piece Check Adjust Machine Inspection Sheet
Pot Holes 1st Piece Check Adjust Machine Inspection Sheet
Machine 2 Mounting Nozzle Diameter Vernier Caliper Rectifying Check Adjust Machine Hole Location Sample Sheet
15 ± 1 mm Every X & R Chart Quarantine and 1/2 Hour Cause-and-Effect Analysis
Machine 3 Dimensional 6 ± 1 mm Fixture 2 Sample Check Adjust/Recheck Sheet
Fixture #1 Perimeter 6 ± 1 mm Check Gap to Every X & R Chart Quarantine and Fixture and Datum 1/2 Hour Cause-and-Effect Analysis
FIGURE 11-3 Control Plan
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 283
not starting, or either the lens is scratched or it is not. We discuss measurements in this chapter and attributes in Chapter 12 . While discussing attributes, we will also introduce reliability theory.
Table 11-1 shows the most common types of variable and attribute charts. The variables charts are X , x -bar (x), R , MR , and s charts. The attributes charts are p , np , c , and u charts. In the following pages we introduce and develop these basic charts. We begin by introducing the generic process for developing all charts and then discuss the charts individually. There are four central requirements for properly using process charts:
1. You must understand this generic process for implementing process charts. 2. You must know how to interpret process charts. 3. You need to know when different process charts are used. 4. You need to know how to compute limits for the different types of process charts.
We treat each of these topics separately.
A Generalized Procedure for Developing Process Charts
The process for developing a process chart is the same for almost all charts. The only differences are in the actual statistical computations. Following are steps used in developing process control charts:
1. Identify critical operations in the process where inspection might be needed. These are operations in which, if the operation is performed improperly, the product will be nega- tively affected.
2. Identify critical product characteristics . These are the aspects of the product that will result in either good or poor functioning of the product.
3. Determine whether the critical product characteristic is a variable or an attribute. 4. Select the appropriate process control chart from among the many types of control charts.
This decision process and the types of charts available are discussed later. 5. Establish the control limits and use the chart to continually monitor and improve . 6. Update the limits when changes have been made to the process.
Understanding Process Charts
Before showing how to establish process charts, we need to understand what process charts are and how they work. We use the chart to illustrate the fact that the process chart is nothing more
TABLE 11-1 Variables and Attributes
Variables Attributes
X (process population average) p (proportion defective) x– (mean or average) np (number defective or number nonconforming ) R (range) c (number nonconforming in a consistent sample space) MR (moving range) s (standard deviation) u (number defects per unit)
Upper Control Limit (UCL)
Center Line (CL)
Lower Control Limit (LCL)
Each point represents data from a sample that are plotted
sequentially
The UCL, CL, and LCL are
computed statistically
FIGURE 11-4 Control Chart
284 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
than an application of hypothesis testing where the null hypothesis is that the process is stable. An x chart is a variables chart that monitors average measurements. For example, suppose you were a producer of 8½-inch ! 11-inch notebook paper. Because the length of paper is measured in inches, a variables chart such as the x chart is appropriate. If the length of the paper is a key critical characteristic, we might inspect a sample of sheets to see whether the sheets are indeed 11 inches long.
To demonstrate how a process control chart works, we could use a hypothesis test instead of a process chart to determine whether the paper is really 11 inches long. Therefore, the null hypothesis is
H0:m = 11 inches
The alternative hypothesis is
H1:m ! 11 inches
To perform the hypothesis test, we establish a distribution with the following 95% (Z = 1.96) rejection limits. If the standard error of the sample distribution ( n = 10) is .001 inch, the rejection limits are 11 ± 1.96(.001) = {11.00196, 10.99804}. Figure 11-5 shows the distribution with its rejection regions.
Next, to test this hypothesis, we draw a sample of n = 10 sheets of paper and measure the sheets. The measurements are shown in the following table:
Sheet Number Measurement
1 11.0001 2 10.9999 3 10.9998 4 11.0002 5 11.0004 6 11.0020 7 10.9980 8 10.9999 9 10.9870
10 11.0004 Sum 109.9877
Sample mean 10.99877
11.00 µ
11.00196 µ + 1.960 σ
10.99804 µ – 1.960 σ
Rejection region
Rejection region
10.99877 (sample mean)
FIGURE 11-5 Hypothesis Testing
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 285
Because 10.99877 does not fall within either of the rejection regions shown in Figure 11-5 , we fail to reject the null hypothesis and conclude that the sheets do not differ significantly from an average of 11 inches.
This is a basic hypothesis test. Now we use a process control chart to monitor this paper production process. With process charts, we place the distribution on its side, as shown in Figure 11-6 . We draw a center line and upper and lower rejection lines, which we call control limits . We then plot the sample average (10.99877) on the control chart. Because the point falls between the control limits, we conclude that the process is in control. This means that the varia- tion in the process is random (common).
Notice that the preceding example was based on a sample of n = 10. This means that the distribution we drew was a sampling distribution (not a population distribution). Therefore, we can invoke the central limit theorem . The central limit theorem states that when we plot the sample means, the sampling distribution approximates a normal distribution.
x _
and R Charts
Now that we have developed a process chart, we need to understand the different types of charts. First we discuss two charts that go hand in hand: x and R charts. We developed an x chart in the prior example. When we are interested in monitoring a measurement for a particular product in a process, there are two primary variables of interest: the mean of the process and the dispersion of the process. The x chart aids us in monitoring the process mean or average. The R chart is used in monitoring process dispersion.
The x chart is a process chart used to monitor the average of the characteristic being mea- sured. To set up an x chart, select samples from the process for the characteristic being measured. Then form the samples into rational subgroups. Next, find the average value of each sample by dividing the sums of the measurements by the sample size, and plot the value on the process control x chart.
The R chart is used to monitor the dispersion of the process. It is used in conjunction with the x chart when the process characteristic is a variable. To develop an R chart, collect samples from the process and organize them into subgroups, usually of three to six items. Next, compute the range R by taking the difference of the high value in the subgroup minus the low value. Then plot the R values on the R charts.
A standard process chart form is shown in Figure 11-7 . This form has spaces for measure- ments and totals. In the example in Figure 11-8 , our control chart form is filled out with measure- ments from a process. Notice that there are k = 25 samples of size n = 4. For each of the samples, totals, ranges, and averages are computed. The range is the difference between the largest mea- surement and the smallest measurement in a particular sample.
Now that we have measurements, we need to compute a center line and control limits for our x and R charts. The center line is the process average. The upper and lower control limits are usually located three standard deviations from the center line. The formulas for computing these lines are given in Figure 11-9 . Figure 11-10 shows the completed formulas for the example in Figure 11-8 . Notice that the A2 and D4 table values come from the Factor for Control Limits
Upper control limit
Center line
Lower control limit10.99804 10.99877
11
11.00196
FIGURE 11-6 Process Chart
286 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Date Time 1 2 3 4 5 Sum Average, x Range, R Notes
Part number Chart number
Part name (product) Operation (process) Specification limits
Operator Machine Gauge Unit of measure Zero equals
Sa mp le
me as ur em en ts
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
R a n g e s
A v e r a g e s
Variables Control Chart (x and R)
FIGURE 11-7 x and R Chart
table in the lower right corner of Figure 11-10 . These table values provide estimates for the three standard deviation limits for the x and R charts [when combined with R -bar (the mean of the R values)]. You also may notice that no formula is given for the lower limit of the R chart. This is because the lower limit of R is zero for sample sizes less than or equal to six. For sample sizes greater than six, D 3 values must be used from Table A-1 in the appendix (the formula for the lower control limit is shown in Table A-1 ). Notice that we have superimposed the control limits computed in Figure 11-10 on the charts in Figure 11-8 .
Interpreting Control Charts
Before introducing other types of process charts, we discuss the interpretation of the charts. Figure 11-11 shows several different signals for concern that are sent by a control chart, as in the second and third boxes. When a point is found to be outside of the control limits, we call this an “out-of-control situation.” When a process is out of control, variation is probably no longer random. If there are three standard deviation limits, the chance of a sample average or range being out of control when the process is stable is less than 1%. Because this probability
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 287
is so small, we conclude that this was a nonrandom event and search for an assignable cause of variability.
Figure 11-11 presents examples of where nonrandom situations occur. You need not only have an out-of-control situation to signal that a process is no longer random. Two points in suc- cession farther than two standard deviations from the mean likely will be a nonrandom event because the chances of this happening at random are very low. Five points in succession (either all above or below the center line) are called a process run . This means that the process has shifted. Seven points that are all either increasing or decreasing result in process drift . Process drift usually means that either materials or machines are drifting out of alignment. An example might be a saw blade that is wearing out rapidly in a furniture factory. Large jumps of more than three or four standard deviations result in erratic behavior . In all these cases, process charts help us to understand when the process is or is not in control.
If a process loses control and becomes nonrandom, the process should be stopped immedi- ately. In many modern process industries where lean is used, this will result in the stoppage of several workstations. The team of workers who are to address the problem should use a control planning structured problem-solving process using brainstorming and cause-and-effect tools
Date
Time
1
2
3
4
5
Sum
Average, x
Range, R
Notes
Sa mp le
me as ur em en ts
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
R a n g e s
A v e r a g e s
Part number Chart number
Part name (product) Operation (process) Specification limits
Operator Machine Gauge Unit of measure Zero equals
Variables Control Chart (x and R)
FIGURE 11-8 Completed x and R Chart
288 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
AmR = = ___________ AmR = ______
URLx = US – AmR = LRLX = LS + AmR =
Control Limits Subgroups included
Modified Control Limits for Averages Based on specification limits and process capability Applicable only if US – LS > 6σ
Factors for Control Limits
Limits for Individuals Compare with specification or tolerance limits
R = —– = ———————— = ——– ΣR k
US =
US – LS =
LS = ———
X =
x (Midspec or std) =
A2R = = ———
UCLx = X + A2R =
LCLx = X – A2R =
UCLR = D4R = =
X = —– = ———————— = ——– Σx k
or
US = LS =
A2 1.880 1.023 0.729 0.577 0.483
D4 3.268 2.574 2.282 2.114 2.004
d2 1.128 1.693 2.059 2.326 2.534
d2 2.659 1.722 1.457 1.290 1.184
Am 0.779 0.749 0.728 0.713 0.701
n
2 3 4 5 6
3—
—R = = ——— 3 d2
6 d2
ULx = x + R = 3 d2
LLx = x – —R =3d2
6 = — R =σ
FIGURE 11-9 x and R Chart Calculation Work Sheet
AmR = = ___________ AmR = ______
URLx = US – AmR = LRLX = LS + AmR =
Control Limits Subgroups included
Modified Control Limits for Averages Based on specification limits and process capability Applicable only if US – LS > 6σ
Factors for Control Limits
Limits for Individuals Compare with specification or tolerance limits
R = —– = = ΣR k
US =
US – LS =
LS =
X =
x (Midspec or std) =
A2R = = ––––––
UCLx = X + A2R =
LCLx = X – A2R =
UCLR = D4R = =
X = —– = = Σx k
or
US = LS =
A2 1.880 1.023 0.729 0.577 0.483
D4 3.268 2.574 2.282 2.114 2.004
d2 1.128 1.693 2.059 2.326 2.534
d2 2.659 1.722 1.457 1.290 1.184
Am 0.779 0.749 0.728 0.713 0.701
n
2 3 4 5 6
3—
—R = = 3 d2
6 = — R = 6 d2
ULx = x + R = 3 d2
LLx = x – —R =3d2
σ
FIGURE 11-10 Calculation Work Sheet for Figure 11-8 Data
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 289
UCL = Upper control limit CL = Center line LCL = Lower control limit
UCL
CL
LCL Normal behavior. One data point out, above.
Investigate for cause of poor performance.
One data point out, below. Investigate for cause of improvement.
Erratic behavior. Investigate.
Seven successive data points on increasing or decreasing line. Investigate for cause of progressive change.
UCL
CL
LCL Two data points near upper limit (beyond 2 standard deviations from the mean). Investigate for cause of poor performance.
Two data points near lower limit (beyond 2 standard deviations from the mean). Investigate for cause of improvement.
Five successive data points above central line. Investigate for cause of sustained poor performance.
UCL
CL
LCL Five successive data points below central line. Investigate for cause of sustained below-mean performance.
UCL
CL
LCL Sudden change in level. Investigate.
FIGURE 11-11 Control Chart Evidence for Investigation Source: Bertrand L. Hansen, Quality Control: Theory and Applications, © 1964, p. 65 . Pearson Education, Upper Saddle River, NJ. ISBN: 013745208X.
such as those discussed in Chapter 10 to identify the root cause of the out-of-control situation. Typically, the cause is somewhere in the interaction among processes, materials, machinery, or labor. Once the assignable cause of variation has been discovered, corrective action can be taken to eliminate the cause. The process is then restarted, and people return to work.
The cause of the problem should be documented and discussed later during the weekly departmental meeting. All workers should know why a problem in the process occurred. They should understand the causes and the corrective actions that were taken to solve the problem.
Production companies that embark on this level of delegation of authority and develop- ment of employees find the transition difficult because the process is often stopped and work is interrupted. However, as time passes, the processes become more stable as causes of errors are detected and eliminated. One manufacturer regularly produced poor-quality material that needed
290 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
7.583
6.125
4.667
1 2 3 4
AmR = = ___________ AmR = ______
URLx = US – AmR = LRLX = LS + AmR =
Control Limits Subgroups included
Modified Control Limits for Averages Based on specification limits and process capability Applicable only if US – LS > 6σ
Factors for Control Limits
Limits for Individuals Compare with specification or tolerance limits
R = —– = ———————— = ——– ΣR k
US =
US – LS =
LS = ———
X =
x (Midspec or std) =
A2R = = ———
UCLx = X + A2R =
LCLx = X – A2R =
UCLR = D4R = =
X = —– = ———————— = ——– Σx k
or
US = LS =
A2 1.880 1.023 0.729 0.577 0.483
D4 3.268 2.574 2.282 2.114 2.004
d2 1.128 1.693 2.059 2.326 2.534
d2 2.659 1.722 1.457 1.290 1.184
Am 0.779 0.749 0.728 0.713 0.701
n
2 3 4 5 6
3—
—R = = ——— 3 d2
6 = — R = 6 d2
ULx = x + R = 3 d2
LLx = x – —R =3d2
σ
FIGURE 11-12 Calculation Work Sheet and x Chart
to be scrapped. As a result, it had increased its master production schedules by 20% to cover up this problem. The company decided instead to embark on a lot-size reduction program coupled with giving the workers line-stop authority. During the first shift, the company reduced the number of scrapped pieces from an average of more than 1,000 to 6! At first, production suffered. How- ever, within two weeks of implementation, output volume had increased by more than 30%. This was the result of less rework, scrap, and other problems because of poor quality. It is interesting to note that staff and machinery were not changed during this period. At first, management thought its workers were unmotivated, resulting in the poor work. It wasn’t the people; it was the process and the management.
EXAMPLE 11-1 Using x– and R Charts
Problem: The Sampson Company produces high-tech radar that is used in top-secret weapons by the Secret Service and the Green Berets. They have had trouble with a particular round compo- nent. The target diameter for this component is 6 centimeters. Samples of size four were taken during four successive days. The results are in the following table.
Active Model: Example 11-1
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 291
Day x Means Ranges
1 6 6 5 7 6 2 2 8 6 6 7 6.75 2 3 7 6 6 6 6.25 1 4 6 7 5 4 5.5 3
Solution: The grand mean is 6.125. R is 2.
Excel File: Example 11-1
Develop a process chart to determine whether the process is stable. Because these are mea- surements, use x and R charts. Using the calculation work sheet, Figure 11-12 shows the values for the process control limits.
The x control chart for this problem is shown with the appropriate limits. The R chart is also in control. The sample averages were placed on the control chart, and the process was found to be historically in control. Because the averages and ranges fall within the control limits and no other signals of nonrandom activity are present, we conclude that the process variation is random. Note that this example is very simple. Generally, you use 15 to 20 subgroups to establish control charts.
Using Excel to Draw x– and R Charts
The problem in Example 11-1 can be solved easily using Excel. While there are more elegant ways to develop control charts in Excel, 1 we will demonstrate a simple “brute force” method for creating x and R charts in Excel.
As you can see in Figure 11-13 , we place the data in rows. From this we compute aver- ages ( x s), R s, and R. Using these data, the center line (CL), the upper limits (UCL), and lower
FIGURE 11-13 Example 11-1 Using Excel
1 There are several software packages and Excel add-ins that create control charts. A good place to find free Excel control chart templates is www.freequality.org or on www.pearsonhighered.com/foster .
292 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
limits (LCL) are computed. Figure 11-13 provides all the needed equations. Try doing this for yourself.
X and Moving Range ( MR ) Charts for Population Data
At times it may not be possible to draw samples. This may occur because a process is so slow that only one or two units per day are produced. If you have a variable measurement that you want to monitor, the X and MR charts might just be the thing for you.
Important caveats are associated with the X and MR charts. Because you will not be sam- pling, the central limit theorem does not apply. This may result in the data being nonnormally distributed and an increase in the likelihood that you will draw an erroneous conclusion using a process chart. Therefore, it is best to first make sure that the data are normally distributed.
If data are not normally distributed, other charts are available. A g chart is used when data are geometrically distributed, and h charts are useful when data are hypergeometrically distrib- uted. Figure 11-14 presents geometric and hypergeometric distributions. If you develop a histo- gram of your data and it appears like either of these distributions, you may want to use either an h or a g chart instead of an X chart.
In statistics, an X is an individual observation from a population. Therefore, the X chart reflects a population distribution. We call the three standard deviation limits in an X chart the natural variation in a process. This natural variation can be compared with specification limits. So, strictly speaking, X chart limits are not control limits; they are natural limits .
Geometric distribution
Hypergeometric distribution
FIGURE 11-14 g and h Distributions
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 293
The formula for the center line and the natural limits for an X chart is as follows:
x { E2(MR) (11.1) where
x = "X k
and
X = a population value
k = the number of values used to compute x
E 2 = 2.66 ( n = 2) (see Table A-1 in the Appendix)
The formula for the MR chart is similar to that for the R chart (where n = 2 ), only, the ranges are computed as the differences from one sample to the next [n = 2; UCL = D4(MR); LCL = 0].
EXAMPLE 11-2 X and MR Charts in Action
Problem: The EA Trucking Company of Columbia, Missouri, hauls corn from local fields to the SL Processing Plant in Lincoln, Nebraska. The trucks generally take 6.5 hours to make the daily trip. However, recently there seems to be more variability in the arrival times. Mr. Everett, the owner, suspects that one of his drivers, Paul, may be visiting his girlfriend Janice en route in Kansas City. The driver claims this is not the case and that the increase is simply random varia- tion because of variability in traffic flows. The drivers keep written logs of departure and arrival times. Mr. Everett has listed these times in the following table. You are chosen as the analyst to investigate this situation. What do you think?
Date Travel Times (Hrs) Moving Range
1 6.4 — 2 6.2 0.2 3 5.8 0.4 4 7.3 1.5 5 8.6 1.3 6 6.0 2.6 7 6.5 0.5 8 6.3 0.2 9 7.2 0.9
10 7.3 0.1 11 7.5 0.2 12 7.2 0.3 13 8.0 0.8 14 7.8 0.2 15 8.2 0.4 16 7.0 1.2 17 7.8 0.8
x = 7.1235 MR = .725
Excel File: Example 11-2
Active Model: Example 11-2
294 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Solution: You decide to develop an X and MR process chart to test the hypothesis concerning the change. You conclude that, in fact, a run (from point 9 to point 15) indicates that trip times may be increasing. However, this does not imply that the girlfriend is the cause. Further investiga- tion may be needed. (Note that E 2 = 2.66 and D 4 = 3.268).
Using Excel to Draw X and MR Charts
The problem in Example 11-2 is now solved using Excel. Again, we use the “brute force” method for creating X and MR charts in Excel. The process is very similar to what we did before. Notice that E 2 and D 4 are both constants.
Interpreting the charts, there is a run on the X chart and an out-of-control point on the sixth (fifth observation in the graph because there was no moving range for the first). This was because of the jump from 8.6 hours down to 6 hours. It might be that our hero thought he should be on better behavior after the long day on the fifth (see Figure 11-15 ).
Median Charts
Although x charts generally are preferred for variables data, sometimes it is too time consuming or inconvenient to compute subgroup averages. Also, there may be concerns about the accuracy of computed means. In these cases, a median chart may be used (aka an x~ chart). The main limitation is that you will use an odd sample size to avoid calculating the median. Generally, sample sizes are 3, 5, or 7. Like the x chart, small sample sizes generally are used, although the larger the sample size, the better is the sensitivity of the chart as a tool to detect nonrandom (spe- cial cause) events (this is also true for x charts).
FIGURE 11-15 Example 11-2 Using Excel
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 295
To prepare median charts, determine your subgroup size and how often you will sample. The rule of thumb to establish a median control chart is to use 20 to 25 subgroups and a total of at least 100 individual measurements.
Equations for computing the control limits are
Mean of medians = sum of the medians>number of medians = "x (11.2) LCL#x = "x + #A2R (11.3)
UCL#x = "x - #A2R (11.4)
à 2 values are found in Table 11-2 . Median charts are usually used with R charts.
TABLE 11-2 Median Chart Values
n A#2 D4
3 1.187 2.575 5 0.691 2.115 7 0.508 1.924 9 0.412 1.816
EXAMPLE 11-3 Median Charts in Action
Problem: The Jeffrey Luftig food company has gathered the following data with weights of its new health food product. Because the published weight on the package is 6 ounces, Mr. Luftig wants to know if the company is complying with weight requirements. Twenty samples of size 5 were drawn.
Solution: The data are given here. Twenty samples of size 5 were drawn. Results show that the pro- cess is not in control, with an average median of 6.23. The median process chart (see Figure 11-16 ) does show that some product is being made that is below 6 ounces. Also, points 4, 7, and 10 are out of control.
Excel File: Example 11-3
Active Model: Example 11-3
Sample Observation 1 Observation 2 Observation 3 Observation 4 Observation 5
1 6.2 6.1 6.3 6.5 6.4 2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.3 6.4 3 6.3 5.9 6.2 6.4 6.3 4 5.3 5.1 5.3 5.1 5.3 5 6.1 6.6 6.3 6.2 6.4 6 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 7 5.8 5.7 5.9 7.2 5.2 8 6.3 5.9 6.2 6.4 6.3 9 6.3 5.9 6.2 6.4 6.3
10 7.4 7.4 7.1 7.3 7.1 11 6.2 6.3 6.2 6.3 6.2 12 6.4 6.3 6.2 6.1 6.1 13 6.3 6.4 6.2 6.3 6.1 14 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 15 6.3 6.4 6.1 6.3 6.1 16 6.4 6.2 6.4 6.2 6.2 17 6.2 6.4 6.3 6.4 6.2 18 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 19 6.2 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 20 6.4 6.3 6.2 6.5 6.3
296 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Using Excel to Draw Median Charts
Figure 11-16 shows the results for Example 11-3 . Again, the columns are ordered such that the data can be grouped properly and drawn using Excel. Excel makes creation of the chart quick and easy. You will have the best results if you start with Example 11-1 and work all the Excel examples. By now you should have the hang of it. A good shortcut is to highlight the data in columns B through F prior to invoking the Chart function.
x _ and s Charts
When you are particularly concerned about the dispersion of the process, it might be that the R chart is not sufficiently precise. In this case, the x chart is recommended in concert with the s chart or standard deviation chart . The standard deviation chart is often used where variation in a process is small. For example, s charts are often used in monitoring the production of silicon chips for computers.
Unfortunately, when using the s chart, because we do not compute ranges, new formulas are used to compute the x limits. We introduce the formulas for the x and s charts because of their importance for high-tech production.
FIGURE 11-16 Example 11-3 Using Excel
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 297
The control limits for the s chart are computed using the formulas:
UCLs = B4 * s (11.5)
LCLs = B3 * s (11.6)
where B 3 and B 4 come from Table 11-3 ;
and s = "si>k (11.7) where
s i is the standard deviation for sample i k is the number of samples.
Note that it is easy to find the sample standard deviation in Excel. If you don’t have Excel, use the usual formulas for computing the sample standard deviations. We will show you how to do this in Excel in Example 11-4 .
After computing the limits, plot your sample means to see if the process is in control. If the s chart is not in control, determine the cause for the out-of-control point, eliminate the cause, and then recompute your control limits by throwing out the out-of-control data point(s). Do not elim- inate samples with out-of-control points if a cause cannot be identified.
When your s chart is in statistical control, use the following formula to estimate the pro- cess standard deviation:
sest = s * 2(1 - C24)>C4 (11.8) where C 4 can be found in Table 11-3
Formulas for the x chart can now be created using the following formulas:
UCL =x = x + A3(s) (11.9)
LCL =x = x - A3(s) (11.10)
where A 3 can be found in Table 11-3 and x = is the grand mean.
TABLE 11-3 Values for x and s Charts
n B 3 B 4 C 4 A 3
2 0 3.267 0.7979 2.659 3 0 2.568 0.8862 1.954 4 0 2.266 0.9213 1.628 5 0 2.089 0.9400 1.427 6 0.030 1.970 0.9515 1.287 7 0.118 1.882 0.9594 1.182 8 0.185 1.815 0.9650 1.099 9 0.239 1.761 0.9693 1.032
EXAMPLE 11-4 s and x– Charts in Action
Problem: Twenty samples were taken for a milled rod. The diameters are needed to determine if the process is in control. Because these milled rods must be measured within 1/10,000 of an inch, it is determined that the process dispersion is important. Therefore, you need to use an s and x chart to monitor the process. The data are found in Figure 11-17 . We have 20 samples with n = 3 .
Active Model: Example 11-4
298 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Solution: The control charts in Figure 11-17 show that the process is in control. There is no need for corrective action. The solution method is demonstrated in the next section.
FIGURE 11-17 Example 11-4 Using Excel
Using Excel to Draw s and x– Charts
Figure 11-17 shows the solution method for Example 11-4 . Using the preceding formulas, we computed the CL, UCL, and LCL for each chart. Notice that the LCL for the s chart is zero. Also, notice that we have taken some shortcuts here compared with some of the other charts we have drawn.
Other Control Charts
Table 11-4 shows all the formulas for the process charts we have discussed in this chapter. These are the major charts that are used the vast majority of times. Some other charts that are used more rarely should be mentioned.
Moving Average Chart
The moving average chart is an interesting chart used for monitoring variables and measurement on a continuous scale. This chart uses past information to predict what the next process outcome will be. Using this chart, we can adjust a process in anticipation of its going out of control.
Excel File:
Example 11-4
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 299
Cusum Chart
The cumulative sum, or cusum, chart is used to identify slight but sustained shifts in a universe where there is no independence between observations. A cusum chart looks very different from a Shewhart process chart as shown in Figure 11-18 .
SOME CONTROL CHART CONCEPTS FOR VARIABLES
Choosing the Correct Variables Control Chart
Now that we have developed control charts, we are in a position to discuss briefly some impor- tant control chart concepts before moving to process capability. The first concept has to do with choosing the correct chart. Obviously, it is key to choose the correct control chart. Figure 11-19 shows a decision tree for the basic control charts. This flowchart helps to show when certain charts should be selected for use.
TABLE 11-4 Summary of Variables Chart Formulas
Chart LCL CL UCL (Appendix Table A-1)
x x= - A2R x= x= + A2R (Appendix Table A-1) R D3R R D4R (Appendix Table A-1) x (with s) x= - A3s x= x= + A3s (Appendix Table A-3 ) X x= - E2(MR) x= =x + E2(MR) (Appendix Table A-1)
s B3s s B4s (Appendix Table A-3 ) Median x" - #A2R "x x" + A
# 2R (Appendix Table A-4)
40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
–5 –10 –15 –20 –25 –30 –35 –40 –45
1 5 10 15 20 25 30 Subgroup Number i
C um
ul at
iv e
Su m
Lower control limit
Upper control limit
P d
A
B
θ θ
A'
B'
O
FIGURE 11-18 Cusum Chart
300 Part 3 • Im
plem enting Q
uality
Are the data
Variable or Attribute?
Are you interested in
defects per unit or defective
units?
Attributes
Variables
Is the sample size
constant?
Defective Units
Use p chart
Use np or p charts
Yes
No
Is the sample
space constant?
Defects per unit
Use c charts
Use u charts
Yes
No
Can subgroup averages be
computed?
Use
median
charts
No
Is the subgroup
size 9 or more? Yes
x/R charts
No
Is it possible to
compute s for every subgroup?
Yes
x/s charts
x/R charts
Yes
No
FIGURE 11-19 Process for Selecting the Right Chart
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 301
Corrective Action
When a process is out of control, corrective action is needed. Corrective action steps are similar to continuous improvement processes:
1. Carefully identify the quality problem. 2. Form the correct team to evaluate and solve the problem. 3. Use structured brainstorming along with fishbone diagrams or affinity diagrams to identify
causes of problems. 4. Brainstorm to identify potential solutions to problems. 5. Eliminate the cause. 6. Restart the process. 7. Document the problem, root causes, and solutions. 8. Communicate the results of the process to all personnel so this process becomes reinforced
and ingrained in the organization.
How Do We Use Control Charts to Continuously Improve?
One of the goals of the control chart user is to reduce variation. Over time, as processes are improved, control limits are recomputed to show improvements in stability. As upper and lower control limits get closer and closer together, the process is improving. There are two key con- cepts here:
• The focus of control charts should be on continuous improvement. • Control chart limits should be updated only when there is a change to the process. Other-
wise any changes are unexpected. 2
Tampering with the Process
One of the cardinal rules of process charts is that you should never tamper with the process. You might wonder, “Why don’t we make adjustments to the process any time the process deviates from the target?” The reason is that random effects are just that—random. This means that these effects cannot be controlled. If we make adjustments to a random process, we actually inject nonrandom activity into the process. Figure 11-20 shows a random process. Suppose that we had decided to adjust the process after the fourth observation. We would have shifted the process— signaled by out-of-control observations during samples 12 and 19.
PROCESS CAPABILITY FOR VARIABLES
Once a process is stable, the next emphasis is to ensure that the process is capable. Process capa- bility refers to the ability of a process to produce a product that meets specification. A highly capable process produces high volumes with few or no defects and is the result of optimizing the
2 Wheeler, D., “When Do I Recalculate My Limits?” Quality Progress (May 1996): 79–80.
2321191715131197531
UCL
Target
LCL
FIGURE 11-20 The Effects of Tampering
302 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
interactions between people, machines, raw materials, procedures, and measurement systems. World-class levels of process capability are measured by parts per million (ppm) defect levels, which means that for every million pieces produced, only a small number (less than 100) are defective. A Closer Look at Quality 11-1 looks at the need for capability in software.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 11-1 A Justification for Meeting Standards in Software Quality 3
In this chapter, we discuss the importance of meeting standards and having controlled processes. We see all around us the results of poor quality and defects. Among the areas where this is important is software quality. Consider the following examples.
Poor software design in a radiation machine, known as Therac-25, contributed to the deaths of three cancer patients. The Therac-25 was built by Atomic Energy of Canada Ltd., which is a Crown corporation of the government of Canada. In 1988, the company incorporated and sold its radiation- systems assets under the Theratronics brand. According to Nancy Leveson, now a professor at MIT, the design flaws included the inability of the software to handle some of the data it was given and the deliv- ery of hard-to-decipher user messages.
During Operation Desert Storm, an Iraqi Scud missile hit a U.S. Army barracks in Saudi Arabia, killing 28 Americans. The approach of the Scud should have been noticed by a Patriot missile battery. A subsequent government investigation found a flaw in the Patriot’s weapons-control software, however, that prevented the system from properly tracking the incoming missile.
During Operation Iraqi Freedom, the Patriot missile system mistakenly downed a British Tornado fighter and, according to the LA Times , an American F/A-18c Hornet. Reports show that investigators were looking at a glitch in the missile’s radar system that made it incapable of properly distinguishing between a friendly aircraft and an enemy missile.
In 2002, the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), which oversees medical-device software, said of 3,140 medical-device recalls, 242 were attributed to software failures. The FDA also says the number of software-related recalls may be underreported as it is often hard to determine the exact cause of a problem in the immediate aftermath of an accident.
It is expected that these types of losses are likely to mount as complex software programs are tied across networks. Imagine all of the various pieces of corporate data that come together in systems for CRMSs, SCMs, or ERPs. “Software is the most complicated thing that the human mind can come up with and build,” says Gary McGraw, the chief technology officer at Citigal, a consulting firm specializ- ing in improving software quality. Tools introduced in this chapter will be key in detecting if future software is functioning properly.
Video Clip: Process Capability
3 Gage, D., and J. McCormick, “Why Software Quality Matters,” Baseline 28 (March 2004): 34–59.
Six Sigma programs, such as those pioneered by Motorola Corporation, result in highly capable processes. Six Sigma is a design program that emphasizes engineering parts so that they are highly capable. As shown in Figure 11-21 , these processes are characterized by specifica- tions that are ±6 standard deviations from the process mean. This means that even large shifts in the process mean and dispersion will not result in defective products being built. If a process average is on the center line, a Six Sigma process will result in an average of only 3.4 opportuni- ties for defects per million units produced. The Taguchi method is a valuable tool for achieving Six Sigma quality by helping to develop robust designs that are insensitive to variation.
Population versus Sampling Distributions
To understand process capability, we must first understand the differences between population and sampling distributions. Population distributions are distributions with all individual
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 303
responses from an entire population. A population is defined as a collection of all the items or observations of interest to a decision maker. A sample is a subset of the population. Sampling distributions are distributions that reflect the distribution of sample means. We can demonstrate the difference between a sample and a population. Suppose you want to understand whether a product conforms to specifications. Over a month’s time, a firm produces 10,000 units of product to stock. Because the product is fragile, it is not feasible to inspect all 10,000 units and risk dam- aging some of the product in the inspection process. Therefore, 500 units are randomly selected from the 10,000 to inspect. In this example, the population size N is 10,000 and the sample size n is 500.
We now demonstrate the difference between a sampling distribution and a population dis- tribution. Understanding the differences between sampling and population distributions is impor- tant: Population distributions have much more dispersion than sampling distributions. Consider a class of 40 students where the tallest student is 6 feet 4 inches and the shortest is 5 feet in height. As shown in Figure 11-22 , student height for this population is normally distributed, with a mean of 5 feet 8 inches and a distribution ranging from 5 feet to 6 feet 4 inches.
Now suppose you draw samples of size five from the population (with replacement). Notice in Figure 11-22 that the mean of the sample is still 5 feet 8 inches, but the distribution ranges only from 5 feet 4 inches to 6 feet. This is so because it is difficult to randomly obtain a sample average that is more than 6 feet or less than 5 feet 4 inches. As a result, we see that sam- pling distributions have much less dispersion than population distributions.
Process
mean
(m)
m + 3s Upper specification
(m + 6s )
m – 3sLower specification
(m – 6s )
Population
distribution
FIGURE 11-21 Six Sigma Quality
5' 0" 5' 4" 5' 8" 6' 0" 6' 4"
Sampling distribution
(n = 5)
Population distribution
(N = 40)
FIGURE 11-22 Population and Sampling Distributions for Class Heights
304 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
In the context of quality, specifications and capability are associated with population distributions. However, sample-based process charts and stability are computed statistically and reflect sampling distributions. Therefore, quality practitioners should not compare pro- cess chart limits with product specifications . To compare process charts limits with specifica- tion limits is not so much like comparing apples to oranges as it is comparing apples to watermelons. We later show that process chart limits are statistically computed from sample data. Specification (or tolerance) limits are set by design engineers who establish limits based on the design requirements for a product. These design requirements might have to do with making parts fit together properly or with the properties of certain materials used in making products.
Capability Studies
Now that we have defined process capability, we can discuss how to determine whether a process is capable. That is, we want to know if individual products meet specifications. There are two purposes for performing process capability studies:
1. To determine whether a process consistently results in products that meet specifications 2. To determine whether a process is in need of monitoring through the use of permanent
process charts
Process capability studies help process managers understand whether the range over which natural variation of a process occurs is the result of the system of common (or random) causes. There are five steps in performing process capability studies:
1. Select a critical operation. These may be bottlenecks, costly steps of the process, or places in the process where problems have occurred in the past.
2. Take k samples of size n , where x is an individual observation. • Where 19 < k < 26 • If x is an attribute, n > 50 (as in the case of a binomial) • Or if x is a measurement, 1 < n < 11
( Note : Small sample sizes can lead to erroneous conclusions.) 3. Use a trial control chart to see whether the process is stable. 4. Compare process natural tolerance limits with specification limits. Note that natural toler-
ance limits are three standard deviation limits for the population distribution. This can be compared with the specification limits.
5. Compute capability indexes: To compute capability indexes, you compute an upper capa- bility index (Cpu), a lower capability index (Cpl), and a capability index (Cpk) . The formulas used to compute these are
Cpu = (USL - m)>3sn (11.11) Cpl = (m - LSL)>3sn (11.12) Cpk = min5Cpu, Cpl6 (11.13) where
USL = upper specification limit LSL = lower specification limit
m = computed population process mean
ns = Estimated process standard deviation = sn = R>d2 (11.14) Make a decision concerning whether the process is capable. Although different firms use
different benchmarks, the generally accepted benchmarks for process capability are 1.25, 1.33,
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 305
and 2.0. We will say that processes that achieve capability indexes (Cpk) of 1.25 are capable, 1.33 are highly capable, and 2.0 are world-class capable (Six Sigma) .
EXAMPLE 11-5 Process Capability
Problem: For an overhead projector, the thickness of a component is specified to be between 30 and 40 millimeters. Thirty samples of components yielded a grand mean (x) of 34 millimeters with a standard deviation ( ns) of 3.5. Calculate the process capability index by following the steps previously outlined. If the process is not highly capable, what proportion of product will not conform?
Solution:
Cpu = (40 - 34)>(3)(3.5) = .57 Cpl = (34 - 30)>(3)(3.5) = .38 Cpk = .38
The process capability in this case is poor. To compute the proportion of nonconforming prod- uct being produced, we use a Z table (Appendix A-2) with a standardized distribution. The formula is
Z = (x - m)>sn (11.15) Thus, for the lower end of the distribution
Z = (30 - 34)>3.5 = -1.14 and for the upper end of the distribution
Z = (40 - 34)>3.5 = 1.71 Using a Z table (as shown in Figure 11-23 , using Table A-2 from the Appendix), the prob-
ability of producing bad product is .1271 + .0436 = .1707. This means that, on average, more than 17% of the product produced does not meet specification. This is unacceptable in almost any circumstance.
m = 34 USL = 40 (m + 1.710s)
m + 3 = 44.5LSL = 30 (m – 1.140s)
m – 3s = 23.5
p = .3729 p = .4564
.5 – .4564 = .0436.5 – .3729 = .1271
s
FIGURE 11-23 Proportion of Product Nonconforming for Example 11-5
306 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Ppk
If your data are not arranged in subgroups and you only have population data to compute your capability, use Ppk to compute your capability. Ppk stands for population capability index . Rather than using the within-groups variation to estimate the sigma that you used in Cpk, you use the population standard deviation to compute your capability. Otherwise, the computations are the same as Cpk. Here are the formulas:
Ppk = min5Ppu, Ppl6 (11.16) Ppu = (USL - m)>3s (11.17) Ppl = (m - LSL)>3s (11.18) s = 2g (xi - x)2/(n - 1) (11.19) where
USL # upper specification limit
LSL # lower specification limit
µ # population mean
s # population process standard deviation
Interpretation for Ppk is the same as for Cpk. The only difference is the use of population parameters in computing the indexes.
EXAMPLE 11-6 Population Process Capability
Problem: The upper and lower specification limits (tolerances) for a metal plate are 3 millime- ters ±0.002 millimeters. A sample of 100 plates yielded a mean x of 3.001 millimeters. We know that the population standard deviation is .0002. Compute the Ppk for this product.
Solution:
Ppu = (3.002 - 3.001)>(.0002 * 3) = 1.67 Ppl = (3.001 - 2.998)>(.0002 * 3) = 5 Ppk = 1.67
Therefore, the process is highly capable.
The Difference between Capability and Stability
Once again, a process is capable if individual products consistently meet specification. A process is stable if only common variation is present in the process . This is an important distinction. It is possible to have a process that is stable but not capable. This would happen where random varia- tion was very high. It is probably not so common that an incapable process would be stable.
OTHER STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Throughout this chapter we have focused on hypothesis testing and process charts. In Chapter 13 we discuss experimental design and off-line experimentation. Correlation and regression also can be useful tools for improving quality, particularly in services.
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 307
Although it is almost never appropriate to use regression on process data used in develop- ing control charts, other types of data can be correlated and regressed to understand the customer. For example, Figure 11-24 shows where conformance rates and quality costs were correlated in one company. As conformance increased, costs increased as well. Table 11-5 shows that these variables were significantly and positively related. The R 2 values show the strength of the rela- tionships between the variables for linear and nonlinear (quadratic) models. 4
Such correlation is called interlinking . 5 Interlinking is useful in helping to identify causal relationships between variables.
100 Pr
ev en
tio n
an d
ap pr
ai sa
l c os
ts
Conformance
80
60
40
20
0 50 60 70 80 90 100
3
FIGURE 11-24 Plot of Prevention and Appraisal Costs with Conformance Source: Based on S. T. Foster, Quality Costs Working Paper.
TABLE 11-5 Relationship between Conformance and PA Costs
Model R 2 p
First order 0.4002 0.0001 Quadratic 0.4675 0.0001
Source: Based on S. T. Foster, Quality Costs Working Paper.
4 To learn more about this, see Foster, S. T., “An Examination of the Relationship between Conformance and Quality- Related Costs,” International Journal of Quality and Reliability Management 13, 4 (1996): 50–63. 5 Collier, D., The Service/Quality Solution (Homewood, IL: Irwin, 1994).
Summary In this chapter we have introduced the basic process charts and the fundamentals of statistical quality improvement. The process for developing process charts is the same regardless of chart. Therefore, the things that are required are:
You need to know the generic process for developing charts.
You need to be able to interpret charts.
308 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
You need to be able to choose which chart to use.
You need the formulas to derive the charts.
You need to understand the purposes and assumptions underlying the charts.
We have given you all these things for variables in this short chapter. You have everything you need to get started. Have fun and enjoy yourself. Remember, the purpose of process charts is to help you continually improve.
Key Terms Attribute Capability Consumer’s risk Control chart Control plan Cpk Median chart
Nonrandom variation Ppk Process charts Producer’s risk Quality management
system (QMS) R chart
Random variation Reaction plan s chart or standard
deviation chart Sample Stability Statistical thinking
Variable X chart x chart
Discussion Questions 1. Discuss the concept of control. Is control helpful? Isn't being controlling a negative? 2. The concept of statistical thinking is an important theme in this chapter. What are some examples of
statistical thinking? 3. Sometimes you do well on exams. Sometimes you have bad days. What are the assignable causes
when you do poorly? 4. What is the relationship between statistical quality improvement and Deming’s 14 points? 5. What are some applications of process charts in services? Could demerits (points off for mistakes) be
charted? How? 6. What is random variation? Is it always uncontrollable? 7. When would you choose an np chart over a p chart? An X chart over an x chart? An s chart over an
R chart? 8. Design a control chart to monitor the gas mileage in your car. Collect the data over time. What did you
find? 9. What does “out-of-control” mean? Is it the same as a “bad hair day”? 10. Design a control chart to monitor the amounts of the most recently charged 50 debits from your debit
card. What did you find?
Problems 1. Return to the chart in Figure 11-8 . Is this process stable? Explain. 2. Return to the data in Figure 11-8 . Is this process capable? Compute both Cpk and Ppk. 3. For the following product characteristics, choose where to inspect first:
Characteristic Cost of Inspection Cost of Failure
A $2.50 $20 B $2.00 $19 C $4.00 $37 D $3.00 $38
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 309
4. For the following product characteristics, choose where to inspect first:
Characteristic Cost of Inspection Cost of Failure
A $35 $200 B $37 $225 C $38 $175 D $40 $182
5. Interpret the following charts to determine if the processes are stable.
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
(a) (d)
(b) (e)
(c) (f)
6. Interpret the following charts to determine if the processes are stable.
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
UCL
CL
LCL
(a) (d)
(b) (e)
(c) (f)
7. Tolerances for a new assembly call for weights between 32 and 33 pounds. The assembly is made using a process that has a mean of 32.6 pounds with a population standard deviation of .22 pounds. The process population is normally distributed. a. Is the process capable? b. If not, what proportion will meet tolerances? c. Within what values will 99.5% of sample means of this process fall if the sample size is constant at
10 and the process is stable?
310 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
8. Specifications for a part are 62$ +/− .01.$ The part is constructed from a process with a mean of 62.01$ and a population standard deviation of .033. The process is normally distributed. a. Is the process capable? b. What proportion will meet specifications? c. Within what values will 95% of sample means of the process fall if the sample size is constant at 5
and the process is stable? 9. Tolerances for a bicycle derailleur are 6 cm +/− .001 cm. The current process produces derailleurs with
a mean of 6.0001 with a population standard deviation of .0004. The process population is normally distributed. a. Is the process capable? b. If not, what proportion will meet specs? c. Within what values will 75% of sample means of this process fall if the sample size is 6 and the
process is stable? 10. A services process is monitored using x and R charts. Eight samples of n = 10 observations have been
gathered with the following results:
Sample Mean Range
1 4.2 .43 2 4.4 .52 3 3.6 .53 4 3.8 .20 5 4.9 .36 6 3.0 .42 7 4.2 .35 8 3.2 .42
a. Using the data in the table, compute the center line, the upper control limit, and the lower control limit for the x and R charts.
b. Is the process in control? Interpret the charts. c. If the next sample results in the following values (2.5, 5.5, 4.6, 3.2, 4.6, 3.2, 4.0, 4.0, 3.6, 4.2), will
the process be in control? 11. A production process for the JMF Semicon is monitored using x and R charts. Ten samples of n = 15
observations have been gathered with the following results:
Sample Mean Range
1 251 29 2 258 45 3 233 36 4 275 25 5 234 35 6 289 20 7 256 3 8 265 19 9 246 14
10 323 46
a. Develop a control chart and plot the means. b. Is the process in control? Explain.
12. Experiment : Randomly select the heights of at least 15 of the students in your class. a. Develop a control chart and plot the heights on the chart. b. Which chart should you use? c. Is this process in control?
13. A finishing process packages assemblies into boxes. You have noticed variability in the boxes and desire to improve the process to fix the problem because some products fit too tightly into the boxes and others fit too loosely. Following are width measurements for the boxes.
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 311
Sample
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
68.51 68.94 68.66 68.49 68.64 68.34 68.99 68.92 68.46 68.20 68.44 68.94 68.63 68.42 68.94 68.91 68.54 68.54 68.55 68.56 68.62 68.99 68.95 68.97 68.34 68.56 68.77 68.62 68.32 68.02 68.95 68.93 68.46 68.70 68.70 68.69 68.34 68.03 68.94 68.96 68.46 68.70 68.64 68.56 68.24 68.47 68.97 68.95
Using x and R charts, plot and interpret the process. 14. For the data in Problem 13, if the mean specification is 68.5 ± .25 and the estimated process standard
deviation is .10, is the process capable? Compute Cpu, Cpl, and Cpk. 15. For the data in Problem 13, treat the data as if they were population data, and find the limits for an
X chart. Is the process in control? Compare your answer with the answers to Problem 14. Hint : Use the formula CLx = x { (3>d2)R ( Figure 11-9 ).
16. A Rochester, New York, firm produces grommets that have to fit into a slot in an assembly. Following are dimensions of grommets (in millimeters):
Sample x
1 46 33 54 46 64 2 52 45 54 75 64 3 34 64 36 46 63 4 34 45 47 37 62 5 46 64 75 55 16
a. Use x and R charts to determine if the process is in control. 17. Using the data from Problem 13, compute the limits for x and s charts. Is the process still in control? 18. Using the data from Problem 16, compute the limits for x and s charts. Is the process still in control? 19. Use a median chart to determine if the process for the following data is centered.
Sample Observation 1 Observation 2 Observation 3 Observation 4 Observation 5
1 8.06 7.93 8.19 8.45 8.32 2 8.06 8.06 8.06 8.19 8.32 3 8.19 7.67 8.06 8.32 8.19 4 6.89 6.63 6.89 6.63 6.89 5 7.93 8.58 8.19 8.06 8.32 6 8.06 8.06 8.06 8.06 8.06 7 7.54 7.41 7.67 9.36 6.76 8 8.19 7.67 8.06 8.32 8.19 9 8.19 7.67 8.06 8.32 8.19
10 9.62 9.62 9.23 9.49 9.23 11 8.06 8.19 8.06 8.19 8.06 12 8.32 8.19 8.06 7.93 7.93 13 8.19 8.32 8.06 8.19 7.93 14 7.93 7.93 7.93 7.93 7.93 15 8.19 8.32 7.93 8.19 7.93 16 8.32 8.06 8.32 8.06 8.06 17 8.06 8.32 8.19 8.32 8.06 18 7.93 8.06 8.19 8.32 8.45 19 8.06 7.93 7.93 7.93 7.93 20 8.32 8.19 8.06 8.45 8.19
312 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
20. Use an x chart to determine if the data in Problem 19 are in control. Do you get the same answer? 21. The following data are for a component used in the space shuttle. Because the process dispersion is
closely monitored, use an x and s chart to see if the process is in control.
Sample Observation 1 Observation 2 Observation 3
1 4.8000 4.7995 4.8005 2 4.7995 4.8007 4.8005 3 4.7995 4.8002 4.8012 4 4.7993 4.8000 4.8010 5 4.8007 4.8007 4.8005 6 4.8010 4.8007 4.8000 7 4.7995 4.7995 4.7995 8 4.8000 4.8002 4.8002 9 4.8012 4.8000 4.7998
10 4.7988 4.7995 4.8002 11 4.8005 4.7998 4.8002 12 4.8005 4.7995 4.8012 13 4.8000 4.8002 4.7995 14 4.8000 4.8005 4.8010 15 4.7986 4.8002 4.7990 16 4.7998 4.8007 4.7983 17 4.8005 4.7995 4.8010 18 4.8000 4.8002 4.8002 19 4.7993 4.7986 4.7995 20 4.8007 4.8017 4.7998
22. Develop an R chart for the data in Problem 21. Do you get the same answer? 23. Using the data from Problem 21, compute limits for a median chart. Is the process in control? 24. Design a control plan for exam scores for your quality management class. Describe how you would
gather data, what type of chart is needed, how to gather data, how to interpret the data, how to identify causes, and remedial action to be taken when out-of-control situations occur.
25. For the sampling plan from Problem 24, how would you measure process capability? 26. For the data in Problem 16, if the process target is 50.25 with spec limits +/−5, describe statistically the
problems that would occur if you used your spec limits on a control chart where n = 5. Discuss type I and type II error.
CASE
Case 11-1 Ore-Ida Fries www.heinz.com
An innovation in the frozen french fry industry was the upright bag. When new equipment was introduced to produce the bags, the Heinz Frozen Food Corporation facility in Ontario, Oregon, was selected to produce the new bag type.
When the new bags were produced, there were problems with consistency. It was unclear whether the problem was with the machinery or the “film” (the material used in the bags). One of the key measurements
was the distance from the UPC (universal product code) and a black mark on the bag. A number of rolls of film were randomly selected, and this measurement was taken. The result of this actual study was the data on the next page.
We need to know if the film is consistent. Take the data on the next page and use control charts to deter- mine if the measurements are consistent. Report your results to management.
Chapter 11 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Variables 313
Sample Millimeters from code to UPC Box
1 7 7 8 6 7 2 6 5 6 5 7 3 7 7 8 6 8 4 6 8 8 7 7 5 6 7 6 6 7 6 6 6 5 6 5 7 5 6 4 4 4 8 4 5 5 5 6 9 5 6 5 5 5
10 5 5 5 5 5 11 6 6 7 7 7 12 7 7 6 7 7 13 6 7 7 7 7 14 6 7 7 7 7 15 6 6 6 6 6 16 6 6 6 6 6 17 6 7 7 6 7 18 6 7 6 7 7 19 6 6 6 6 6 20 5 6 5 6 6 21 9 12 10 10 10 22 10 10 9 10 10 23 10 10 10 9 10 24 10 10 10 10 10 25 10 10 10 10 10 26 10 10 10 11 10 27 11 12 10 11 11 28 11 12 10 11 12 29 10 11 11 11 11 30 10 11 12 10 10 31 10 11 11 11 11 32 11 11 11 12 12 33 11 11 0 0 5 34 6 4 4 5 7 35 7 6 6 0 1 36 6 7 6 7 6 37 6 6 5 6 7 38 10 9 10 10 9 39 10 9 8 8 11 40 10 10 10 10 10
Sample Millimeters from code to UPC Box
41 10 10 10 11 10 42 11 11 11 10 10 43 10 10 10 10 10 44 11 10 10 10 10 45 10 10 10 10 10 46 10 10 10 10 10 47 10 10 10 10 10 48 10 10 10 11 12 49 10 11 10 11 11 50 12 12 11 11 11 51 12 11 11 10 10 52 12 12 11 11 10 53 10 11 11 11 11 54 11 10 11 12 11 55 11 10 12 11 11 56 11 11 12 11 11 57 10 10 12 12 11 58 10 11 11 11 11 59 11 11 16 16 17 60 18 17 17 16 16 61 18 17 16 16 16 62 17 17 17 17 16 63 16 16 16 15 16 64 16 17 18 16 16 65 16 17 17 17 16 66 16 17 17 17 17 67 15 15 17 16 17 68 16 15 16 17 17 69 16 16 16 18 16 70 16 15 17 16 16 71 16 15 16 15 16 72 16 16 16 16 16 73 15 15 15 16 16 74 16 15 16 16 16 75 16 16 16 16 15 76 16 16 15 16 17 77 16 16 16 16 16 78 17 16 15 16 16 79 17 17 17 16 16 80 16 16 16 16 16
To be or not to be, that is the question.
—William Shakespeare
C H A P T E R 1 2
Statistically Based Quality Improvement for
Attributes
314
This quote from Hamlet might seem to you like an odd one for a quality management book. However, the quote gets at the core of what is an attribute. In supply chain quality, we are usually asking ourselves, “Is it a defect or not?” Is the piece defective, or is it not? Defined by Webster, an attribute is a “peculiar and essential characteristic.” It is something that either does or does not exist.
As shown in Table 12-1 , there are five types of attributes. Structural attributes have to do with physical characteristics of a particular product or service. For example, an automobile might have electric windows. Services have structural attributes as well, such as a balcony in a hotel room.
Sensory attributes relate to senses of touch, smell, taste, vision, and sound. For products, these attributes relate to form design or packaging design to create products that are pleasing to customers. In services such as restaurants and hotels, atmosphere is very important to the cus- tomer experience.
Performance attributes relate to whether or not a particular product or service performs as it is supposed to. For example, does the lawn mower engine start? Does the sound system meet a certain threshold for low distortion?
TABLE 12-1 Types of Attributes Structural attributes Sensory attributes Performance attributes Temporal attributes Ethical attributes
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 315
Temporal attributes relate to time. Were delivery schedules met? This often has to do with the reliability of delivery.
More and more, ethical attributes are important to firms. Do they report properly? Is their accounting transparent? Is the service provider empathetic? Is the teacher kind or not?
As you can see, all these types of attributes have to do with some state of being. These are often binary in nature. Either the flaw exists, or it does not. From a quality management point of view, we understand there is a difference between attributes that are desired by customers and attributes that are monitored in the production processes. Customer-based attributes are more associated with customer satisfaction. Production-related attributes are more internal and engineering-oriented. Both types of attributes are important. In this chapter we focus more on process-oriented attributes.
First we introduce quality control for attributes. These include four types of control charts. After introducing these control charts, we then present reliability models. We do this because reliability has to do with whether or not products fail—where failure is an attribute.
GENERIC PROCESS FOR DEVELOPING ATTRIBUTES CHARTS
In Chapter 11 we discussed the use of control charts, so we do not repeat control chart basics here. Attribute charts are developed and interpreted the same way as variables charts. The only difference is the statistic of interest. Previously we dealt with measurements. In this chapter we deal with states of being.
To reiterate, the generic process for developing process charts consists of the following six steps:
1. Identify critical operations in the process where inspection might be needed. These are operations that will have a negative effect on the product if performed improperly.
2. Identify critical product characteristics . These are the attributes of the product that will result in either good or poor form, fit, or function for the product.
3. Determine whether the critical product characteristic is a variable or an attribute. 4. Select the appropriate process chart from the many types of charts. The decision process
and the types of charts are defined and discussed in Chapters 11 and 12 . 5. Establish the control limits and use the chart to continually monitor and improve. 6. Update the limits when changes have been made to the process.
UNDERSTANDING ATTRIBUTES CHARTS
Attributes charts deal with binomial and Poisson processes that are not measurements. We will now think in terms of defects and defectives rather than diameters and widths. A defect is an irregularity or problem with a larger unit. The larger unit may contain many defects. For exam- ple, a piece of glass may contain several bubbles or scratches. Some of these may be detectable only with a magnifying glass. Defects are countable, such as six flaws within a particular glass pane. A defective is a unit that, as a whole, is not acceptable or does not meet performance requirements. For example, a letter with a wrong address is defective. Also, a letter could have several defects, but the entire unit is labeled defective if there is a single defect. Defectives are monitored using p and np charts. Defects are monitored using c and u charts.
p Charts for Proportion Defective
The p chart is a process chart used to graph the proportion of items in a sample that are defective (nonconforming to specification). p charts are effectively used to determine when there has been a shift in the proportion defective for a particular product or service. Typical applications of the p chart include late deliveries, incomplete orders, calls not getting dial tones, accounting transac- tion errors, clerical errors on written forms, parts that do not mate properly, and so on.
316 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
The subgroup size on a p chart is typically between 50 and 100 units. The subgroups may be of different sizes for a p chart. However, it is best to hold subgroup sizes constant. Usually at least 25 subgroups are used to establish a p chart. The formulas for the p chart are as follows:
Control limits for p = p { 3231p211 - p2>n4 (12.1) where
p ! the proportion defective p = the average proportion defective n ! the sample size
Sample Number of Cases Reviewed Number of Convictions Proportion
1 100 60 .60 2 95 65 .68 3 110 68 .62 4 142 62 .44 5 100 56 .56 6 98 58 .59 7 76 30 .39 8 125 68 .54 9 100 54 .54
10 125 62 .50 11 111 70 .63 12 116 58 .50 13 92 30 .33 14 98 68 .69 15 162 54 .33 16 87 62 .71 17 105 70 .67 18 110 58 .53 19 98 30 .31 20 96 68 .71 21 100 54 .54 22 100 62 .62 23 97 70 .72 24 122 58 .48 25 125 30 .24 26 110 68 .62 27 100 54 .54
p = 14.63>27 = .54 Sum = 14.63
Active Model: Example 12-1
Excel File: Example 12-1
EXAMPLE 12-1 p Charts in Action
Problem: A city police department was concerned that the number of convictions was decreas- ing relative to the number of arrests. The suggestion was raised that the district attorney’s office was becoming less effective in prosecuting criminals. You are asked to perform an analysis of the situation. The data for the previous 27 weeks are provided in the following table:
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 317
Solution: Notice that in this problem, the sample size is not constant. When this happens, you have at least two options:
1. Compute the control limits using an average sample size (this is easier to understand). 2. Compute the control limits using the different sample sizes (this is statistically more correct).
Based on this analysis, a p charts for this process were established. As seen in Figure 12-1 , the p charts computed using the two methods show that although it is not clear the number of prosecu- tions is declining consistently, the process is becoming much more erratic, resulting in 2 months of particularly poor performance (periods 19 and 25). Investigations should be undertaken to identify assignable causes of variation.
27252321191715131197531
27252321191715131197531
.3978
.54
.54
.6856
b. Control chart using different sample sizes.
CLp = .54 ± 3 (.54)(.46)107.41 .6856 .3978
=
a. Control chart using n = 107.41
CLp = .54 ± 3 (.54)(.46)nk size of sample k, where nk =
FIGURE 12-1 p Charts for Example 12-1
Using Excel to Draw p Charts
Figure 12-2 shows the Excel® solution for Example 12-1 . As in Chapter 11 , we generated this graph using the “brute force” method. Review Example 11-1 ( Figure 11-13 ) for an in-depth dis- cussion of how to generate the charts. Again, the chart shows that the process is erratic and out of control. This chart was drawn using the average sample size to compute the limits.
318 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
np Charts
The np chart is a graph of the number of defectives (or nonconforming units) in a subgroup. The np chart requires the sample size of each subgroup to be the same each time a sample is drawn. When subgroup sizes are equal, either the p or np chart can be used. They are essentially the same chart. Some people find the np chart easier to use because it reflects integer numbers rather than proportions. The uses for the np chart are essentially the same as the uses for the p chart.
Subgroup sizes for the np chart are normally between 50 and 100. Usually, at least 25 sub- groups are used in developing the np chart. Again, subgroup sizes must be equal . To compute the control limits on an np chart, the following formula is used:
CLnp = n1p2 { 3snp (12.2) where
n ! the sample size p ! the average proportion defective
s np ! standard error of 2np(1 - p)
FIGURE 12-2 Example 12-1 Using Excel
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 319
EXAMPLE 12-2 np Charts in Action
Problem: Within the J. Kim Insurance Company of Boston, Massachusetts, management found that too many of its policies were rated incorrectly. Management directed that policy applications be reviewed for the past 24 months on a sampling basis. One hundred policies from each month were selected for review. As an analyst, you are asked to review the policies for correct rating. If any problem is found with the rating of a policy, it is said to be defective.
Month Number of Policies
Reviewed Number of Policies with Rating Errors p
1 100 11 .11 2 100 10 .10 3 100 12 .12 4 100 6 .06 5 100 14 .14 6 100 8 .08 7 100 10 .10 8 100 9 .09 9 100 12 .12
10 100 2 .02 11 100 14 .14 12 100 18 .18 13 100 7 .07 14 100 13 .13 15 100 14 .14 16 100 12 .12 17 100 11 .11 18 100 8 .08 19 100 9 .09 20 100 17 .17 21 100 18 .18 22 100 20 .20 23 100 25 .25 24 100 28 .28
Mean = .13
Active Model: Example 12-2
Excel File: Example 12-2
Solution: The results of the control chart are shown in Figure 12-3 . The chart shows that rating errors are increasing. Assignable causes should be identified through investigation.
21 23191715131197531
2.80
13
22.88
Control Limits np = 100(.13) ± 3 100(.13)(.87) 22.88 2.80
= FIGURE 12-3 np Chart for Example 12-2
320 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Using Excel to Draw np Charts
Figure 12-4 contains the Excel spreadsheet for Example 12-2 . As you can see, the process has drifted out of control.
c and u Charts
The c chart is a graph of the number of defects (nonconformities) per unit. The units must be of the same metric such as size, height, length, volume, and so on. This means that the “area of opportunity” for finding defects must be the same for each unit. Several individual units can comprise the sample, but they will be grouped as if they are one unit of a larger size. If multiple units are used, the same number of units must be in each subgroup. The control limits for the c chart are computed based on the Poisson distribution.
Like other process charts, the c chart is used to detect nonrandom events in the life of a production process. Typical applications of the c chart include number of flaws in an auto finish (for a particular model), number of flaws in a standard typed letter, number of data errors in a standard form, and number of incorrect responses on a standardized test.
Again, the c chart is used when you are always inspecting the same size sample space. When the sample space is varied, such as in the inspection for flaws of different models of cars within a model family, a u chart is used.
FIGURE 12-4 Example 12-2 Using Excel
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 321
The u chart is a graph of the average number of defects per unit. Contrast this with the c chart, which shows the actual number of defects per standardized unit. The u chart allows for the units sampled to be different sizes, areas, heights and so on, and allows for different numbers of units in each sample space. The uses for the u chart are the same as the c chart.
The formulas for the c and u charts are
CLc = c { 32c (12.3) CLu = u { 3Aun (12.4) where
n ! average sample size c = process average number of nonconformities u = process average number of nonconformities per unit
As Example 12-3 shows, the limits for the u chart are more conservative than are the limits for the c chart.
Item Number Demi Defects Streakless Defects
1 5 6 2 4 4 3 6 7 4 3 9 5 9 5 6 4 8 7 5 7 8 4 4 9 3 5
10 7 4 11 9 5 12 12 4 13 3 5 14 6 6 15 2 4 16 8 8 17 5 5 18 7 7 19 12 10 20 4 5 21 6 4
EXAMPLE 12-3 c and u Charts in Action
Problem: The J. Grout Window Company makes colored-glass objects for home decoration. J. Grout, the owner, has been concerned about scratches in the finish of recently made product. The company makes two products. These are the Demi-Glass, which comes in one standard configuration, and the Streakless-Glass, which comes in three similar models. Using high-power magnifying glasses, the company examined 25 each of both the Demi (one style only) and the Streakless (randomly selected in all three styles). As an analyst, you are asked to evaluate the process by determining whether the processes are stable. Assume that, on average, the Streakless are 1.5 times the size of the Demis.
Active Model: Example 12-3
Excel File: Example 12-3
(continued)
322 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Using Excel to Draw c and u Charts
Figure 12-7 shows the Excel c and u charts from Example 12-3 . As you can see, these charts are drawn using the typical method. Formulas are provided in the figure. Note that because the lower control limits were computed to be negative numbers, zero is used as the lower limit for both charts.
Solution: As shown in Figures 12-5 and 12-6 , the process for Demis appears to be in control. However, the process for Streakless shows a run of five points below the mean. An assignable cause should be sought.
Item Number Demi Defects Streakless Defects
22 8 7 23 5 5 24 7 6
Sum c = 144 Sum u = 140 c = 6 u = 5.83
2321191715131197531
0
5.83
11.74
CLu = 5.83 ± 3 5.831.5 11.74
0 =
FIGURE 12-6 u Chart for Streakless
2321191715131197531
0
6
13.35
CLc = 6 ± 3 6 13.350=
FIGURE 12-5 c Chart for Demis
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 323
ATTRIBUTES CHARTS SUMMARY
Table 12-2 shows all the formulas for the process charts we have discussed in this chapter. These are the major attributes charts used the vast majority of the time.
CHOOSING THE RIGHT ATTRIBUTES CHART
Figure 12-8 provides a flowchart for choosing the correct attributes chart. The key questions are whether you are interested in defects or defectives and whether your sample sizes are con- stant. As we said before, for c and u charts, we are more interested in whether or not the sample
FIGURE 12-7 Example 12-3 Using Excel
TABLE 12-2 Summary of Chart Formulas
Chart LCL CL UCL
p p - 32p11 - p2 > n p p + 32p11 - p2 > n np np - 32np11 - p2 np np + 32np11 - p2 c c - 32c c c + 32c u u - 34u>n u u + 34u>n
324 Part 3 • Im
plem enting Q
uality
Are the data variable or attribute?
Are you interested in defects per unit or defective
units?
Attributes
Variables
Is the sample size constant?
Defective units
Use p chart
Use np or p charts
Yes
No
Is the sample space constant?
Defects per unit Use c charts
Use u charts
Yes
No
Can subgroup averages be computed?
Use median charts
No
Is the subgroup size 9 or more?
Yes
Use x/R charts
No
Is it possible to compute s for every
subgroup?
Yes
Use x/s charts
Use x/R charts
Yes
No ¯̄
¯̄
¯̄
FIG U
R E 12-8
Process for Selecting the Right Chart Source: “Fundam
ental Statistical Process Control,” A utom
otive Industry A
ction G roup (D
etroit, M I: 1991); the figure is on the inside heat. A
utom otive Industry A
ction G roup (1991). Fundam
ental Statistical Process Control Reference M
anual. A .I.A
.G ., D
etroit, M I.
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 325
space is constant. This is the standardized chart used by auto companies such as Ford in select- ing charts.
RELIABILITY MODELS
Although there are several reliability models, we only discuss some of the simpler ones. The first model is graphic (see Figure 12-9 ) and called the bathtub-shaped hazard function . The vertical axis on the bathtub function is failure rate. The horizontal axis is time. This model shows us that products are more likely to fail either very early in their life or late in their use- ful life. Consider this function when you purchase major appliances. It is now very common for appliance vendors to offer service contracts at an additional cost. However, notice from the bathtub function that products likely will fail either very early in their life or after their expected useful life. Because most major appliances include a one-year warranty that covers all the labor and parts needed to repair the appliance and most appliances are made to last several years, by purchasing a service contract, you are really insuring the product during the part of its life when it is least likely to fail. This appears to be a very good deal for the appli- ance vendor.
Series Reliability
Components in a system are in series if the performance of the entire system depends on all the components functioning properly. The components need not be physically wired sequentially for the system to be in series. However, all parts must function for the system to function. Figure 12-10 shows n components in a series. System reliability for the series is expressed as 1
Rs = P(x1x2 gxn) (12.5) = P1x12P1x2 ! x12P1x3 ! x1x22 g P1xn ! x1x2 c xn -12 (12.6)
1 2 n
FIGURE 12-10 n Components in Series.
1 Ramakumar, R., Engineering Reliability (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1996).
Failure Rate
Time Initial Use
Useful Life
Replacement Phase
FIGURE 12-9 Bathtub- shaped Hazard Curve
326 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
where
R s ! system reliability P ( x ) ! 1 − probability of failure for component x i
By the same token, system unreliability can be modeled as
Qs = 1 - Rs (12.7)
where Q s = system unreliability. These reliability models assume independence between failure events. This means that the
failure of one component does not influence another component to fail. Following is an example of simple reliability for one component: Imagine a component with 99% reliability over 5 years. This component will have a 99% chance of lasting 5 years—only a 1% chance of failure. This probably sounds pretty good to you. However, consider a television set made up of 700 compo- nents with each component having a 99% reliability. If this is a series system, where the failure of any one component will cause the entire system to fail, the overall reliability will be .99 700 ! .00088 or .088% reliable. In other words, the television has less than a 1% chance of surviving 5 years—not so good. To compare, think of an automobile with 17,000 parts or a space shuttle with millions of components. This gives you an understanding of how difficult it is to make a product that will last.
Now let’s suppose that we wanted this television with 700 components to have 90% overall reliability. If we want 0.90 ! R 700 , we find that R ! (0.90) 1>700 ! .99985, which is the required component reliability.
Parallel Reliability
As we have already seen, a high-reliability system often requires extremely high component reli- ability. At times when such high reliability is an impossibility, an alternative is to use a backup system. Other words for a backup system are redundant or parallel systems . If a set of compo- nents is in parallel, as opposed to being in series, the system can function if a given component in the system fails. System reliability is then expressed as
RP = P(x1 + x2 + g + xn) = 1 - P(x-1x-2 g x-n) (12.8) Given that component failures are independent of one another, redundant reliability is
modeled as
Rp = 1 - P1x12P1x2 ! x12P1x3 ! x1x22 gP1xn! x1x2 g xn -12 (12.9) Therefore, system unreliability is modeled as
Qp = n p
i = 1 Qi (12.10)
EXAMPLE 12-4 Parallel and Series Reliability
At times, systems have some components in series and some components in parallel (or redun- dancy). Figure 12-11 has one such system.
Overall reliability for this system is
R = .98 * .99 * (1 - (.1 * .1)) * .97 = .932
To continue the example, it is interesting to compare the overall reliability of this system without component C 2 . This equals
R = .98 * .99 * .90 * .97 = .847
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 327
Thus the overall improvement in system reliability by adding the additional component is
D = .932 - .847 = .085
This is an 8.5% improvement in system reliability resulting from the additional component.
A B D
C1
C2.98 .99 .97
.90
.90
FIGURE 12-11 Series and Redundant Reliability
A space shuttle would be unreliable using a series system, given the millions of compo- nents contained in the shuttle. Therefore, many redundant systems are used in the shuttle. This choice only improves the likelihood that the shuttle will function properly; however, it is not a guarantee. For example, the O-rings that exploded on the space shuttle Challenger included a second set of redundant O-rings. It has been suggested that the engineers working for NASA made the mistake of concluding that failure of the redundant O-rings would be independent of the failure of the original O-rings. However, they were not independent, and both sets of O-rings failed. This demonstrates the importance of the independence assumption. These formulas assume that the failure of one component is independent of another component. Independence is modeled using conditional probability notation as
If P(x1 0 x2) = P(x1), then events x1 and x2 are independent (12.11) where P ( x ) is the probability of some event ( x ).
Measuring Reliability
Let’s discuss some basic reliability functions. Failure rate is measured using the following equation:
Failure rate = l = number of failures>(units tested * number of hours tested) (12.12) Note that some care should be exercised in using this function because there is no distinction as to whether the hours of testing are continuous or performed at separate times. For example, there is no difference in testing hours if five units are tested for 100 hours each or if one unit is tested for 500 hours.
EXAMPLE 12-5 Reliability Measurement—Failure Rates
Problem: Suppose we tested 25 ski exercise machines under strenuous conditions for 100 hours per machine. Of the machines tested, 3 experienced malfunctions during the test. What is the failure rate for the exercise machines?
Solution: Failure Rate = 3>(25 * 100) = .0012 failures per operating hour
328 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Mean Time to Failure (MTTF)
Because reliability can be defined as the probability that a product will not fail over its defined product life, if " is the product failure rate, the function representing failure can be modeled using the following exponential function:
R(T) = 1 - F(T) = e-lT (12.13)
where
R ( T ) ! reliability of the product F ( T ) ! unreliability of a product
" ! failure rate T ! product’s useful life expressed as a function of time
Using another useful function, 1/" is called the mean time to failure (MTTF) . This is the average time before the product will fail.
EXAMPLE 12-6 MTTF
Problem: Suppose a product is designed to operate for 100 hours continuously with a 1% chance of failure. Find the number of failures per hour incurred by this product and the MTTF.
Solution:
0.99 = e-l(100) ln 0.99 = - 100l l = - (ln 0.99)>100 = .01005>100 = .0001005
MTTF = 1> .0001005 = 9950.25 = 1>l (12.14) This means that the failure rate for this product is .0001005 and that the average time before fail- ing is 9950.25 hours.
Another function of interest is the mean time between failures (MTBF) . This tells us the average time from one failure to the next when a product can be repaired. The formula is
MTBF = total operating hours>number of failures This formula is important in scheduling service calls. Consider the plight of Otis Elevator
company in trying to determine the number of service representatives needed in New York City. If they know their MTBF, the number of elevators in service, and the hours those elevators are in use, they can calculate how many service reps are needed. A Closer Look at Quality 12-1 looks at fail- ures and reliability from a more macroperspective. What do you think? Is quality getting worse?
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 12-1 Is Quality on the Decline? 2
Has quality been on the decline in the past decade? Some say, “Yes!” Admittedly, some of the evidence is anecdotal. But its sources are diverse: repair shop techs, blog gripes, current and former quality management consultants, and others. Lamp housings crack, VCRs rewind slowly and haltingly, cell
2 Based on news.cnet.com, 30 March 2005—from Booz Allen Hamilton.
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 329
EXAMPLE 12-7 MTBF
Problem: A product has been operated for 10,000 hours and has experienced four failures. What is the MTBF?
Solution:
MTBF = 10,000>4 = 2,500 hours between failures The failure rate is then calculated as l = 1>2,500 = .0004 failures per hour.
phone batteries fall out, shirt buttons crumble, washing machines falter, and TVs render flesh tones in rainbow hues.
Overall, automobile performance is improved, but many components are still very fragile. For instance, the dashboard “idiot light” on many cars signals a mysterious computer-detected malfunction somewhere in the engine (often in sensors tied to a catalytic converter). It typically requires a repair shop visit to diagnose and shut off the light. But then, a day or two after the ostensible repair, the light reacti- vates itself, like the villain in a Halloween movie who cannot be escaped.
The American Society for Quality and the University of Michigan have cosponsored the American Customer Satisfaction Index (ACSI) based on customer surveys. They show recent declines in customer perceptions of quality for many sectors of the economy. Some big-name companies showing declines include Hewlett-Packard and General Electric.
Many product manufacturers are lowering engineering standards to shave costs. “One thing that often goes wrong with VCRs is the loading mechanism,” says Tod Marks, an author for Consumer Reports magazine. “That used to be metal, attached with screws. Now it’s a piece of extruded plastic fused to the chassis.”
Some evidence indicates that warranty costs are increasing—although these have been reported for some time. “It’s happening on so many dimensions,” says Greg Brue, president of Albuquerque- based Six Sigma Consultants. “Companies are going to shorter and shorter warranties, and dealing with more and more repairs, and responding with rebates and price promotions instead of improving their products—and they feel like they are getting away with it.”
The bottom line is that we need to be demanding of those who provide products.
System Availability
Remember that mean time between failures is a useful measure for many products. In Example 12-7 , 2,500 hours between failures may not make sense because many products are never used that many hours. To clarify, MTBF generally is used as an average over several products.
A useful measure for maintainability of a product is system availability, which considers both MTBF and a new statistic, mean time to repair (MTTR) . System availability (SA) gives us the “uptime” of a product or system. Here is the formula:
SA = MTBF>(MTBF + MTTR) (12.15) EXAMPLE 12-8 System Availability
Problem: Jami Kovach has to decide between one of three suppliers for a server for a network. Other factors equal, she is going to base her decision on system availability. Given the following data, which supplier should she choose?
330 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Solution: Using Formula 12.15, we find the following solutions:
SAA = 67>(67 + 4) = .944 SAB = 45>(45 + 2) = .957 SAC = 36>(36 + 1) = .973
Choose supplier C. As you can see, service does matter.
Supplier MTBF (h) MTTR (h)
A 67 4 B 45 2 C 36 1
Summary In Chapter 11 and in this chapter, we introduced the basics of quality control. Remember that the object of using process charts is to continually improve your processes. Monitoring processes is not enough. As we make changes and improvements to the processes, our attributes charts will improve—there will be fewer defects and defectives. As this improvement takes place, the con- trol limits constrict and draw closer to zero (for attributes charts). This is the goal. If you are not seeing this type of improvement in your processes, you should work more to improve processes.
We also introduced a number of reliability models. These included series reliability, paral- lel reliability, and reliability functions. Reliable processes are cost effective and productive.
In the last few chapters we have introduced several quality tools and models. In the next chapter we apply these in a Six Sigma setting.
Key Terms Bathtub-shaped hazard
function c chart Ethical attributes Mean time between
failures (MTBF)
Mean time to failure (MTTF)
Mean time to repair (MTTR)
np chart p chart
Parallel reliability Performance attributes Sensory attributes Series reliability Structural attributes System availability (SA)
Temporal attributes u chart
Discussion Questions 1. What are key attributes for a high-quality university? 2. What are some attributes you can identify for an automobile tire? 3. What are some attributes for a university financial aid process? 4. What are some personal attributes you could monitor using control charts? Which control chart would
you use? 5. What are examples of structural attributes? 6. What are some examples of sensory attributes? 7. What are some examples of performance attributes? 8. What are some examples of temporal attributes? 9. What are some examples of ethical attributes? 10. What ethical attributes might you use to determine where you should go to work after graduation?
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 331
Problems 1. Suppose you want to inspect a lot of 10,000 products to see whether or not they meet requirements.
Design a sampling plan used to test these products. 2. Suppose a product is made of 100 components, each with a 97% reliability. What is the overall reli-
ability for the product? 3. Suppose a product is made of 1,000 components, each with .999 reliability. What is the unreliability of
this product? Is this acceptable? Why or why not? 4. A product consists of 45 components. Each component has an average reliability of .97. What is the
overall reliability for this product? 5. A radio is made up of 125 components. What would have to be the average reliability for each compo-
nent for the radio to have a reliability of 98% over its useful life? 6. List five products with low reliability. List five that have high reliability. What are the elemental design
differences between these products? In other words, what are the factors that make some products reli- able and others unreliable?
7. An assembly consists of 240 components. Your customer has stated that your overall reliability must be at least 99%. What needs to be the average reliability factor for each component?
8. A product is made up of six components. They are wired in series with reliabilities of .95, .98, .94, .96, .98, and .97. What is the overall reliability for this product?
9. Suppose that redundant components are introduced for each of two components in Problem 8 with the lowest reliability. What is now the overall reliability for this product?
10. Suppose that redundant components are introduced for all of the components in Problem 8. What is now the overall reliability for the product?
11. A product is made up of components A, B, C, and D. These components are wired in series. Their reli- ability factors are .98, .999, .97, and .989, respectively. Compute the overall reliability for this product.
12. A product is made up of components A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, and J. Components A, B, C, and F have a 1>10,000 chance of failure during useful life. D, E, G, and H have a 3>10,000 chance of failure. Components I and J have a 5>10,000 chance of failure. What is the overall reliability for this product?
13. For the product in Problem 12, if parallel components are provided for components I and J, what is the overall reliability for the product?
14. A product is made up of 20 components in a series. Ten of the components have a 1>10,000 chance of failure. Five have a 3>10,000 chance of failure. Four have a 4>10,000 chance of failure. One compo- nent has a 1>100 chance of failure. What is the overall reliability for this product?
15. For the product in Problem 14, if parallel components are used for any component with worse than a 1>1,000 chance of failure, what is the overall reliability? How many components will the new design have? What will be the average component reliability for the redesigned product?
16. An inspector visually inspects 200 sheets of paper at a time for aesthetics. Using trained judgment, the inspector will either accept or reject sheets based on whether they are flawless. Following are the results of recent inspections:
Sample 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Defectives 10 15 12 14 26 3 10 14 12 11
a. Given these results, using a p chart, determine if the process is stable. b. What would need to be done to improve the process?
17. Using the data in Problem 16, compute the limits for an np chart. 18. Suppose a company makes the following product with the following numbers of defects. Construct a
p chart to see if the process is in control. n ! 100
Sample Defectives
1 67 2 28 3 45
(continued)
332 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
19. Using the data from Example 12-3 , evaluate the Demis using a u chart and evaluate the Streakless using a c chart. Assume that the Demis are twice the size of the Streakless on average.
20. Politicians closely monitor their popularity based on approval ratings. For the previous 16 weeks, Governor Johnny’s approval ratings have been (in percentages):
Sample Defectives
4 32 5 30 6 48 7 32 8 24 9 25
10 27 11 28 12 29 13 65 14 66 15 69 16 70 17 26 18 13 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 28 24 29 25 75
Week 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Approval % 65 62 59 64 61 60 58 52 51 53 54 52 62 65 66 67
a. Prepare a report for the governor outlining the results of your analysis. Use control charts to ana- lyze the data ( n = 200).
b. What action would you propose to the governor based on your analysis? 21. Construct and interpret a c chart using the following data:
Sample Defects
1 6 2 5 3 7 4 6 5 8 6 5 7 6 8 7 9 6
10 8 11 7 12 6 13 7 14 8 15 7
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 333
22. Construct and interpret a u chart using the following data. Assume that the average size is two times the original product.
Sample Defects
16 6 17 5 18 2 19 1 20 0 21 12 22 4 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 3 27 2 28 3 29 2 30 3
Sample Defects
1 4 2 7 3 6 4 7 5 4 6 5 7 7 8 4 9 5
10 7 11 5 12 3 13 5 14 6 15 3 16 7 17 6 18 8 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 3 24 2 25 3 26 2 27 3
23. Dellana company tested 50 products for 75 hours each. In this time, they experienced four break- downs. Compute the number of failures per hour. What is the mean time between failures?
24. The Collier company tested 200 products for 100 hours each. In this time, they experienced 12 break- downs. Compute the number of failures per hour. What is the MTBF?
334 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
25. Crager company tested 100 products for 50 hours each. During the test, three breakdowns occurred. Compute the number of failures per hour and MTBF.
26. Suppose a product is designed to function for 10,000 hours with a 3% chance of failure. Find the aver- age number of failures per hour and the MTTF.
27. Suppose a product is designed to function for 100,000 hours with a 1% chance of failure. Suppose six of these are in use at a facility. Find the average number of failures per hour and the MTTF.
28. Suppose there are 42 pumps used in a refinery. These pumps are continuously being used with a 2% chance of failure over 50,000 hours. If repair time is 10 hours to install a new rebuilt pump, how many pumps should be kept on hand to keep the chance of a plant shutdown to less than 1%. (Hint: Treat this problem as a traditional safety stock problem and use a z table.)
29. Suppose a product is designed to work for 1,000 hours with a 2% chance of failure. Find the average number of failures per hour and the MTTF.
30. A product has been used for 5,000 hours with 1 failure. Find the mean time between failures (MTBF) and ".
31. You are to decide between three potential suppliers for an assembly for a product you are designing. After performing life testing on several assemblies, you find the following:
Supplier MTBF (hr) MTTR (hr)
A 45 2 B 100 6 C 150 9
Supplier MTBF (hr) MTTR (hr)
1 45 2 2 90 2 3 120 6 4 200 6
Based on system availability, which supplier should you choose? 32. You are to choose a supplier of a copier based on reliability and service. After gathering data about the
alternatives, here is what you found. What do you recommend?
CASE
Case 12-1 Decision Sciences Institute National Conference www.decisionsciences.org
f ! full session presentation
fy ! full session and recommended for best paper contest
One of the difficulties of statistical analysis is to figure out how to analyze, interpret, and present the results of your analysis. Take these raw data and develop research questions. Next, using the statistical tools from this chapter, analyze the data. Finally, put the data into a form that will be useful for decision makers. Good luck.
During a recent Decisions Sciences Institute National Conference, I served as a track chair for the Manufac- turing Track. Papers were submitted by 174 authors to this track of the conference with the hopes their papers would be accepted and they would be given the oppor- tunity to present their research to colleagues from around the world at the conference in Las Vegas.
The 174 papers were sent to reviewers with the results shown in Table 12-3 . Following is a key to understanding the codes:
r ! reject
t ! table topic (a lower level of acceptance)
Chapter 12 • Statistically Based Quality Improvement for Attributes 335
TABLE 12-3 DSI Review Results
Paper Number Reviewer 1 Reviewer 2 Reviewer 3
52 f f f 53 t f f 54 f t f 55 f f 56 f f 57 f f 58 t f f 59 t f f 60 fy f f 61 f f f 62 fy fy f 63 f f 64 t f t 65 f r f 66 fy f t 67 r f t 68 f f f 69 f f 70 f f 71 t Workshop 72 t t t 73 f t 74 t f t 75 t f 76 f f 77 r 78 r f r 79 f f f 80 f f 81 fy f 82 f f 83 84 t t 85 f f f 86 f f 87 fy f f 88 fy f 89 fy fy f 90 f f f 91 r r 92 t t 93 f f f 94 t t t 95 t t 96 f f f 97 f f 98 f f f 99 t f f
100 r t t 101 t f f 102 f f f
(continued)
Paper Number Reviewer 1 Reviewer 2 Reviewer 3
1 r f t 2 3 f f f 4 5 f f f 6 r r 7 t t 8 f f 9 t t t
10 fy f 11 fy fy f 12 f f f 13 f f 14 f f 15 r r 16 f f 17 r f t 18 t f f 19 f f 20 t t 21 f f 22 r r 23 t t 24 f t f 25 fy f 26 t t 27 f f f 28 29 30 fy fy f 31 fy fy f 32 t t 33 f f 34 f f f 35 f f f 36 f f f 37 fy fy f 38 fy f 39 f fy f 40 f t f 41 f fy f 42 43 f f 44 f f 45 f f f 46 r f t 47 48 r r 49 f t f 50 fy f 51 f f f
336 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Paper Number Reviewer 1 Reviewer 2 Reviewer 3
103 f f 104 f r t 105 f t f 106 t t t 107 f t f 108 f f 109 f f 110 fy f f 111 f f f 112 t f f 113 r f t 114 f f f 115 t t t 116 t f f 117 t f f 118 t f f 119 t t 120 121 f f 122 t t 123 f f f 124 125 f t f 126 127 f f f 128 129 f f f 130 fy f 131 f r t 132 t t t 133 fy f 134 f fy f 135 r r r 136 f f 137 f f f 138 f f
Paper Number Reviewer 1 Reviewer 2 Reviewer 3
139 t t 140 t f f 141 r r 142 fy f f 143 f f 144 r f t 145 f t f 146 f t f 147 f f 148 149 fy f f 150 fy f f 151 f f f 152 t t 153 f f 154 t f f 155 t r t 156 t f f 157 158 f f f 159 160 fy f f 161 t f f 162 f f f 163 164 f f f 165 f f f 166 f f 167 r f t 168 f f f 169 f f 170 r t t 171 f f f 172 t t 173 f f 174 f f
Note: If a space is blank, the reviewer failed to return a review. Consider this a missing value.
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 337
I look at Six Sigma as a foundation on which you can build more innovation.
—Jeffrey R. Immelt, Chairman General Electric
C H A P T E R 1 3
Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools
337
As you can see by the preceding quote, General Electric (GE) places a lot of importance on Six Sigma as a method for improvement. They initiated the Six Sigma program in 1995 with a goal of being a Six Sigma company by 2000. As evidenced by a quick Internet search, Six Sigma is a very popular approach to improv-
ing quality. Several distinctions about Six Sigma differentiate it from traditional continuous improvement. First, Six Sigma represents a well-thought-out packaging of quality tools and philosophies in an honest effort to provide rigor and repeatability to quality improvement efforts.
Second, Six Sigma is much more cost-reduction-oriented than traditional continuous improve- ment. It is this second aspect of Six Sigma that has made it so popular with CEOs. In fact, many quality practitioners are uncomfortable with the focus on results, stating that this approach violates several of Deming’s points, especially in setting targets and goals for cost reduction. But proponents of Six Sigma state that this focus on profits is one of the strengths of a Six Sigma approach.
The third fundamental nuance of Six Sigma is the way it is organized. Six Sigma is a bonanza for consultants and providers of training because it is organized around creating cham- pions, black belts, green belts, and in some situations, yellow belts. Later in the chapter we dis- cuss how Six Sigma efforts are normally organized.
Fourth, Six Sigma and lean production have been combined into an approach termed Lean-Six Sigma. It is Six Sigma with an increased emphasis on reducing waste.
For this text, we approach Six Sigma from a contingency perspective. This is simply one of the more popular current approaches to quality improvement. If after studying this chapter you feel the Six Sigma approach will be helpful to your company, then you can strongly support implementation.
WHAT IS SIX SIGMA?
The sigma in Six Sigma refers to the Greek symbol !, which designates a standard deviation in statistics. The six refers to the number of standard deviations from a specification limit to the mean of a highly capable process.
338 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
midspec µ (a)
LSL − 3µ σ
USL + 3µ σ
(b)
midspec µ
LSL − 6µ σ
− 3µ σ + 3µ σ USL + 6µ σ
Three Sigma producing some product out of spec
Six Sigma producing almost no product out of spec
FIGURE 13-1 Six Sigma Variation
TABLE 13-1 Sigma Levels and ppm Defects
Sigma Level Long-Term ppm* Defects
1 691,462 2 308,538 3 66,807 4 6,210 5 233 6 3.4
*ppm " parts per million.
There are two key versions of Six Sigma. From one perspective, Six Sigma is a program begun at Motorola in 1982. That year, Motorola’s CEO requested that costs be cut in half. He then repeated the same request the following year. These efforts pointed out that Motorola needed to improve its product designs and analytical techniques to achieve these goals. Motorola empha- sized designing products to achieve Six Sigma. Figure 13-1 shows what this means. In the figure, distribution a shows a typical product design with 3-standard-deviation specifications (or toler- ances). If this is the case, about 0.5% of products will not meet specification. As shown in part b of the figure, if the tolerances are 6 standard deviations, the probability of producing a bad part is very low. Notice how in part b the mean or dispersion of the process could change significantly, and the product still would meet specs. Table 13-1 shows the number of defective parts per million (ppm) that are produced between one and Six Sigma levels. Using this definition, Six Sigma translates into more robust designs, radically lower defect levels, and lowered costs of poor quality (COPQ).
From the early days of improving the robustness of design at Motorola, Six Sigma has morphed into an organization-wide program for improvement involving hierarchical training, organizational learning, and pay for learning. As you will see in this chapter, none of the ana- lytical tools used in Six Sigma efforts are new. What is new is how they are packaged and deployed within a company.
Some argue that Six Sigma is an advanced quality improvement approach designed to help tackle the most difficult quality problems. As you can see in the pyramid in Figure 13-2 , the basic tools of quality can be used to handle 90% of quality problems. Most of the next 10%
Video Clip: Six Sigma at Kurt Manufacturing
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 339
requires advanced training and analytical techniques. Beyond that, there are a few problems that require expertise that may not be found within the company. Thus you can see that care should be taken in determining what projects should be undertaken by Six Sigma specialists.
At the core of Six Sigma is the following equation:
Y " f(X) (13.1)
Strictly speaking, this means that Y (the dependent variable) is a function of X (an independent variable). To Six Sigma practitioners, this means that an output is a function of inputs and processes, where
Y " output (key business objectives and measures) f " function (interrelationships to be controlled and managed) X " controllable and noncontrollable variables that affect Y
For example, the profitability of a company ( Y ) is affected by several variables ( X s), includ- ing customer retention, inventory turnovers, rolled throughput yield, production costs, and many others. If our objective is to improve profits, we focus on these variables on a project-by-project basis and improve our performance. In this scenario, the job of management is to identify and prioritize projects to achieve the goal of lowered costs and higher profits. The job of employees is to obtain the training and expertise required to meet these objectives.
As you can see, Six Sigma started as a single firm’s approach to reducing costs and improv- ing quality. Currently, it is much more. It involves planning, organization, training, human resources planning, and pay for knowledge. This requires both organizational and individual cooperation to achieve a goal. At GE, management made it clear that participation in Six Sigma was a prerequisite for advancement within the company.
ORGANIZING LEAN-SIX SIGMA
Probably you have heard about lean-Six Sigma black belts. This is the designation for a person who has completed rigorous (and costly) black-belt training and has completed one or more lean-Six Sigma projects (depending on the company providing the training and the certificate) with demonstrated results. The cost of training generally runs between $10,000 and $20,000 for a single black belt. Expected returns from Six Sigma projects can run into the hundreds of
Basic Tools of Quality
(90%)
Six Sigma
(<10%)
Outside specialists (<1%)
FIGURE 13-2 Six Sigma Effectiveness
340 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
thousand dollars. Although these payoffs are attractive to management, they do provide quite a bit of pressure for the organization to achieve outstanding results from their Six Sigma efforts.
Below we list some of the key players in Six Sigma efforts:
Champion. The job of the champion is to work with black belts and potential black belts to identify possible projects. They get information from a variety of sources such as the voice of the business (VOB), the voice of the customer (VOC), and the voice of the employee (VOE) for potential project ideas. As shown in Figure 13-3 , they act as a funnel for project ideas and use Pareto analysis ( Chapter 10 ) to analyze the ideas to determine where the best return on investment lies. This can involve COPQ analysis and regression studies to deter- mine the main causes of quality-related losses. From the champion’s perspective, Six Sigma is not so much about tools. It is about managing the process for improvement. The cham- pion provides continuing support for the project and validates the results at the end of the project. In a small company, the champion might be the CEO. In larger companies, they may be senior executives.
Master black belts. In some firms, experienced black belts are designated master black belts . In these cases, master black belts serve as mentors and trainers for new black belts. This brings the training in-house and can reduce costs.
Black belt. The black belt is the key to lean-Six Sigma. These are specially trained indi- viduals. The training usually lasts about four months. After completing training, these individuals are committed full time to completing cost-reduction projects. At GE, black belts were expected to complete two more projects after their certification. Each project
VOB
VOC VOE
IDEAS
Scarce resources
Black-belt projects
Champion
Financial data
Strategic direction
FIGURE 13-3 Champion Decision Making
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 341
lasts from two months to a year depending on the project scope. The black belt is a special- ist. Within nine months of beginning Six Sigma within its appliance division, GE had advertised, created, and filled 115 black belt positions. 1 It has been suggested that small to midsized companies may only need between one and five black belts at one time. Individu- als usually spend about 2 years as a black belt and are then moved into management jobs. The black-belt designation is also very valuable for finding new jobs.
Green belts. Green belts are trained in basic quality tools and work in teams to improve quality. Green belts are assigned part time to work on process and design improvement. In some cases, the results of green-belt activities are the same as black belts. In other organiza- tions, green belts are involved in less critical projects. In a small company of 100 employees, there might be 1 black belt and 60 green belts. Some companies also have yellow belts , who are employees familiar with improvement processes.
Packaging Lean with Six Sigma
When firms undertook implementing Six Sigma, many saw that it had many things in common with lean manufacturing. Rather than having two competing models for improvement, many have combined Six Sigma with lean . This is often referred to as lean-Six Sigma . In this section, we elaborate on the concepts relating to lean production. Companies who implement lean-Six Sigma still generally follow the DMAIC process described in the next section. However, with lean, the focus of Six Sigma becomes more oriented toward reducing wastefulness in organiza- tions. In lean-Six Sigma, the Japanese term muda is often used to describe process waste.
Lean focuses on continually pursuing the reduction of waste with an emphasis on just-in- time practices such as pull production . This recognizes that all processes are inherently waste- ful and include the possibility of improvement. As a starting point, Shingo’s seven wastes of overproduction, defects, inventory, motion, overprocessing, conveyance, and waiting are tar- geted as opportunities for improvement.
Although lean and Six Sigma approaches have been combined, lean especially utilizes value stream and SIPOC diagrams to identify and isolate steps in key processes that do not add value for customers. By isolating and identifying these non-value-added activities, Lean can result in lower costs, lower defects, and improved customer value. Figure 13-4 shows a simpli- fied value-stream map for a typical process. This shows information flows, process steps, and average times relating to different steps in the value stream. Often, value stream maps show cycle times for particular tasks, costs, and work-in-process (WIP) inventory at each stage of the process. This provides a basis for studying the value stream and identifying its costs and inefficiencies.
DMAIC OVERVIEW
Table 13-2 shows the steps in the DMAIC process . DMAIC stands for define, measure, analyze, improve, and control. This is very similar to the PDCA cycle proposed by Shewhart and Deming. We discuss each of these steps in two parts. Here we define each of the steps. Then we fit quality tools to each of these steps. Figure 13-5 shows an overview of the tools used at each stage of the DMAIC process. We discuss these in much more depth over the next several pages. In some cases, where we have already presented a tool, such as the basic seven (B7) tools, we mention the tool. However, it is up to you to refer to the other chapter where the tool is defined and explained. A Closer Look at Quality 13-1 shows some results of DMAIC processes in different companies.
1 Hendricks, C. A., and Kelbaugh, R. L., “Implementing Six Sigma at GE,” Journal for Quality and Participation 21, 4 (1998): 48–53.
342 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Suppliers
Raw Materials Storage
Database
Collate Components
Logistic Systems
Warehouse Management Systems (WMS)
Materials Management Systems (MMS)
Material Requirement Plans (MRP)
Machine Processing Testing
Automated Testing
Point-of-Sale Data
Warehouse Management Systems (WMS)
Retail
Distribution Centers
Packing and
Shipping
15 min30 min14 min
13 min
10 min
5 min
1 day
Delivery Information
3 days3 days1 day
Assembly Processes
FIGURE 13-4 Simple Value-Stream Map
TABLE 13-2 The Six Sigma Process—DMAIC DMAIC Define Define the project goals and customer (internal and external)
deliverables Measure Measure the process to determine current performance Analyze Analyze and determine the root cause(s) of the defects Improve Improve the process by eliminating defects Control Control future process performance
Source: www.freequality.org (2009).
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 13-1 DMAIC In Action
While Kevin Colby was working on a Six Sigma project at the Truck Components Automated Products Division of Eaton Corporation, the company was examining cost savings opportunities. The division produced transmissions that included speed sensors, which measure shaft speeds and work in conjunc- tion with the gears produced by the Cleveland, Ohio-based company. The gears with holes caused signal fluctuations that affected the sensors. Two electronic control units (ECUs) with different circuit speeds were manufactured to allow the sensor to work with both types of gears.
Engineers within the division’s design group who were involved with the gear project realized that they could simultaneously have an impact on two divisions. Jerry Ganski, principal engineer who led the effort to eliminate the second ECU, said, “We realized that removal of the holes in the gears would allow the Automated Products Division to eliminate the special ECU we had to manufacture to
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 343
Define Measure Analyze Improve Control
Key Tools
Business Case • Project Desirability Matrix • Problem/Objective Statement • Primary/Secondary Metric • Change Management • VOC/OFD • SIPOC • Process Mapping
XY Matrix • Process FMEA • Basic Statistics • Decision Making • Nonnormal Data Graphical
• Measurement System Analysis • Process Capability Assessment
Data Analysis • Time Series Chart • Control Chart • Pareto Chart • Histogram • Scatter Diagram • Box Plot • Marginal Plot
• Graphic Data Analysis • Multi-Vari Analysis • Inferential Statistics
• Confidence Intervals • Sample Size
• T-Tests • Hypothesis Tests
• Test for Equal Variance • Chi-Square • Proportion
• Correlation • Regression • Process Modeling and Simulation
• Solution Selection • Countermeasure Matrix • Risk Management
• Solution Implementation • Mistake-Proofing
• Control Plans • Visible Enterprise
• Training • Documentation
• Response • Monitoring
• Systems and Structures • Control Charts • Hypothesis Tests • Process Capability Assessment • Best Practice
Sharing/Translation
• Hypothesis Tests • ANOVA • Nonparametric Tests
• Design of Experiments (DOE) • Advanced Regression
Simulation • Process Modeling and
• Pilot and Test
FIGURE 13-5 Overview of the Six Sigma Process
DEFINE PHASE
In the define phase , projects are identified and selected. Project selection is performed under the direction and with the participation of the champion. Also involved in selection are master black belts and black or green belts. We discuss this in four phases:
1. Developing the business case 2. Project evaluation 3. Pareto analysis 4. Project definition
Developing the Business Case
Business case development involves
• Identifying a group of possible projects • Writing the business case • Stratifying the business case into problem statement and objective statements
deal with the holes. We now use a common ECU for all our platforms and thus save the money it took to build, stock, and handle two ECU styles where the only difference between them was the speed sensor circuit. The savings is estimated at approximately 12 percent.” Based on the improvements realized from these three projects, Eaton is investigating other gear-related projects for potential improvement opportunities.
344 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Following is a sample business case. As you can see, the business case is a short statement outlining the objectives, measurables, and justification for the project.
Business Case: During the four-week period from January 1, 2011, to February 1, 2011, the throughput yield for plant number 3 in region 4 was at 57% of capacity, resulting in an annualized COPQ of $5.6 million. This gap of rolled throughput yield mandates a business objective to improve throughput by 50% from 57% of design capacity to 85% by February 1, 2012, representing $3 million in savings. This project will increase the throughput for plant 3 in region 4 to meet the year 2012 corporate goal of increasing sales in region 4 by $10 million.
The mnemonic device RUMBA is used to check the efficacy of a business case. Evaluat- ing your business case, is it
• R ealistic—Are the goals attainable, is the time line feasible? • U nderstandable—Do I understand the case? • M easurable—Do we show the measures? • B elievable—That is a lot of money. Can it be done? • A ctionable—Can it be implemented?
If the business case meets all these requirements, it probably will be a good project.
Project Evaluation
There are several methods for evaluating a project. Here we demonstrate a project risk assess- ment for a potential Six Sigma project in Example 13-1 .
EXAMPLE 13-1 Project Risk Assessment
Problem: Figure 13-6 shows a sample risk assessment for your candidate project. Using man- agement input, you determine a rating of yes, uncertain, or no for each of the questions. Each item is weighted on a scale of 1 to 10 for importance, where a yes is 0 points, uncertain is 3 points, and no is valued 5 points.
Solution: The 0-, 3-, and 5-point scale values are multiplied by their related weights. Notice that the weights sum to 200 points and that the sum of the weighted scaled values is 390 points. Because the possible total points is 200 # 5 " 1000 points, dividing 390 by 1000 gives 39%. Therefore, 39% is our risk factor. We use this later to determine the attractiveness of the potential project.
Figure 13-7 shows the Six Sigma project return analysis. For this analysis, the potential project is evaluated in three dimensions—growth, urgency, and impact. We demonstrate this in Example 13-2 .
EXAMPLE 13-2 Project Return Assessment
Problem: For our project we have performed a project return assessment (see Figure 13-7 ). As is shown, using the return scales for growth, urgency, and impact each time the project rates a 2.
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 345
Six Sigma Project Risk Worksheet Project Name: Plant 3 Throughput
Belt: Foster
Sponsor(s): Shannon
Mentor(s):
Date: Sept. 12, 2011
Risk Value: 39%
Before worksheet can be completed, the following questions must be answered
1. Is the defect/key characteristic known? 2. Is the defect/key characteristic measurable? 3. Is the solution to the problem unknown?
For questions 1 through 3... If you answered Yes, proceed with answering each criteria question below. If you answered No, see your mentor. Your project may be better completed by means other than Six Sigma.
Category Criteria Rating Weight Total
Define Opportunity
Customer Focus
(Six Sigma Risk Rating Scale: Yes = 0; Uncertain = 3; No = 5) Scale values 1 Are we currently measuring the defect(s)/key characteristic(s)? Yes 0 2 Is historical data currently available? 3 Is it easy to acquire additional data? 4 Are the specifications for the process or product defined? 5 Do you know how the specifications were defined? 6 Is the defect measured where it occurs in the process? 7 Is the defect frequency continuous? ("No" for sporadic or cyclical)
Yes 0 Uncertain 3 No 5 No 5 No 5 No 5
10 10 10 5 5
10 5
30 25 25 50 25
8 Has/have the customer(s) been identified? 9 Have you verified what is important to the customer?
10 Is this defect/key characteristic important to the customer? 11 Will the customer see the result of eliminating/reducing the defect?
Yes 0 Yes 0 Yes 0 Uncertain 3
5 10 10 10
0 0 0
30
Company Benefit / Leveraging 12 Does the defect relate to the mission, a business driver, or a reliability measure?
13 Does the defect impact operations? 14 Can the results of the project be applied to other processes or products? 15 Can the impact be quantified in dollars?
Yes 0 Yes 0 Yes 0 Uncertain 3
10 10 5
10
0 0 0
30
Project Leadership/ Global Bounding
16 Are all managers, at all levels, in agreement that your project is important? No 5 5 25 17 Is your team the only effort currently pursuing this defect? Yes 0 10 0 18 Can adequate visibility for the problem and solution be created? Uncertain 3 10 30 19 Is the team comprised of representatives from only one location/business function? Uncertain 3 10 30 20 Are appropriate resources available to participate on the team? Uncertain 3 10 30 21 Can the project be bounded to an effective size? Yes 0 10 0 22 Can the project be completed on schedule within 4-6 months? Uncertain 3 5 15 23 Do we know the boundaries of the process(es)? Uncertain 3 5 15 24 Can process changes be implemented within the project schedule? Uncertain 3 10 30
Totals 200 390 390/(200 × 5) = 39%
0 0
FIGURE 13-6 Risk Assessment
Solution: Totaling the score, 6 out of a possible 15 points yields a return factor score of 40%. Combining our scores for both risk and return into a project risk and return matrix ( Figure 13-8 ), we see that this project is classified as low-hanging fruit. This means that this project is worth- while if it can be completed quickly.
346 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Six Sigma Project Return Before this worksheet can be completed, the following questions must be answered: Does the defect / key characteristic
for this project relate to one of the company’s business drivers, or a reliability or service measure?
If you answered Yes, proceed with the worksheet. If you answered No, see your sponsor or mentor. This project may not provide appropriate returns.
Growth = Competitive Advantage Choose the single best answerReturn Scale
Project: Plant 3 Throughput
Belt: Foster
Sponsor(s): Shannon
Date: Sept. 12, 2011
Growth Score: 2/5
Urgency Score: 2/5
Impact Score: 2/5
Return Value: 6/15 = 40%
The project does not result in incremental sales with paying customer(s).0
The project does not create incremental sales with paying customer(s), but does improve the competitive position of the company by improving operating efficiencies that bear on competitive performance.
1
Urgency = Competitive Response Choose the single best answerReturn Scale
The project can be postponed for at least 12 months without affecting competitive position, or existing processes or procedures can produce substantially the same result and will not affect competitive position.
0
The postponement of the project does not affect competitive position, and minimal incremental operating costs are expected to be incurred to produce substantially the same result.
1
The postponement of the project does not affect competitive position; however, operating costs may escalate to produce substantially the same result.
2
If the project is postponed for now, the company remains capable of responding to the needed change without affecting its competitive position. However, it is expected the company will be substantially hindered in responding rapidly and effectively to future changes in the competitive environment.
3
The postponement of the project may result in further competitive disadvantage to the company, or in a loss of competitive opportunity; or existing successful activities in the company may be curtailed because of the lack of the proposed system.
4
The postponement of the project will result in further competitive disadvantage to the company, or in a loss of competitive opportunity; or existing successful activities in the company must be curtailed because of the lack of having a solution to this problem.
5
The project does not create incremental sales with paying customer(s), but does improve the competitive position of the company by improving operating efficiencies in a key strategic area.
2
The project provides some degree of incremental sales with paying customer(s) and moderately improves the competitive position of the company.
3
The project provides a moderate degree of incremental sales with paying customer(s) and substantially improves the competitive position of the company by providing a higher level of service.
4
The project provides a high degree of incremental sales with paying customer(s) and greatly improves the competitive position of the company by providing a level of service unmatched by competitors.
5
Return Scale Less than $20,000* $20,000-$99,999* $100,000-$200,000 $200,001-$300,000 $300,001-$400,000 Over $400,000
0 1 2 3 4 5
(*Projects are expected to have, on average, an annual expected savings of $100,000 or more. If the project does not meet this criteria, it should have significantly high scores in the Growth and Urgency categories)
Impact ! Annual Expected Financial Savings Choose the single best answer
FIGURE 13-7 Project Return Analysis
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 347
Pareto Analysis
Part of the responsibility of the champion is to perform a cost of poor quality (COPQ) analysis. This is based on the PAF categorization of costs (see Chapter 4 ). Performing a study of internal and external failure costs will help determine where the most benefit can be found. Figure 13-9 shows a two-level Pareto analysis of COPQ. The first-level analysis shows $5.6-million quality costs in plant A. This is the plant with the highest losses. When we study causes of poor quality in plant A, it becomes clear that operation P accounts for about 62% of the $5.6 million loss (in the second-level analysis). For this reason, this project holds great promise for breakthrough improvement.
Problem Definition
Once the risk analysis and Pareto analysis have been completed for the project, a project definition consists of a problem statement, project goals/objectives, primary metrics, second- ary metrics, and team member identification. Figure 13-10 shows an example of problem definition.
MEASURE PHASE
The measure phase involves two major steps:
1. Selecting process outcomes 2. Verifying measurements
We discuss these separately.
Selecting Process Outcomes
Table 13-3 shows the tools often used in the measure phase. To define process outcomes, you first need to understand the process. This involves process mapping. The process map uses the same approach defined in Chapter 10 . A process map is a flowchart with responsibility.
0 0
10 20
Stars
Low-Hanging Fruit
?
Dogs
30 40 50 Risk Factor
R et
ur n
Fa ct
or
60 70 80 90 100
10
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
FIGURE 13-8 Project Risk and Return Matrix
348 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
1st Level
00
A
5,610,500 2,900,900 1,056,526 861,022 746,912 700,300 658,086 512,156 461,947 241,938Dollars
A B C D E F G H I OthersDept.
41.1 21.3 7.7 6.3 5.5 5.1 4.0 3.8 3.4 1.8Percent
41.1 62.4 70.1 76.1 81.9 87.0 91.1 94.8 98.2 100.0Cum%
D B E
Pareto Chart for Plants A–I
C Plants
H G F I Others
$4 m
$8 m
$12 m
Dollars
20
40 Pe rc
en ta
ge
60
80
100
(a)
(b)
2nd Level
00
Pareto of Dollars by Operations Plant A Breakdown
3,478,510 791,081 409,566 364,683 263,693 168,315 140,263Dollars
P Q R S T U OthersOperation
62.0 14.1 7.3 6.5 4.7 3.0 2.5Percent
62.0 76.1 83.4 89.9 94.5 97.5 100.0Cum%
Operations OP-P OP-Q OP-R OP-S OP-T OP-U Others
$2 m
$4 m
Dollars
20
40 Pe rc
en ta
ge
60
80
100
FIGURE 13-9 Pareto Analysis
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 349
In Figure 13-11 there is a high-level process map showing champion responsibilities in the Six Sigma process. Notice that any of the individual steps could be broken out into lower-level process maps. The goal with a process map is to identify non-value-added activities. Two important measures that are monitored are defects per unit (DPU) and defects per million opportunities (DPMO) .
The XY matrix is used to identify inputs ( X s) and outputs ( Y s) from a project you have mapped and are desiring to pursue. Figure 13-12 shows an XY matrix for a potential project. The inputs include dimensions, standard operating procedures (SOPs), and other inputs along the left- hand column. Output variables include key dimensions, sizes, flashing, and the presence of all needed welds. Each of the outputs is provided an importance weight (1–10). The relationship between each of the X s and Y s is placed in the matrix (1–10 scale). These are multiplied horizon- tally, with ranks and scores computed by multiplying each matrix cell by its weight and summing the products horizontally. As you can see, the most important aspects of the process are SOPs, weld schedules, and daily tip dressing.
Problem Statement: In 2011, plant A lost $5.6 million on COPQ. Of this, almost $3.5 million occurred in operation P (see Figure 13-9). This has resulted in a loss of profitability for the firm.
Project Goals/Objective: Reduce COPQ for operation P by 30% by year end.
Primary Metrics:
Team Members:
COPQ
Bill S.
Cynthia W.
Scott W.
Scott S.
Rework (% of sales)
Scrap (% of sales)
Downtime for process
Plant sales
Labor productivity
Secondary Metrics:
FIGURE 13-10 Problem Definition
TABLE 13-3 Measure-Phase Tools Process map XY matrix FMEA Gauge R&R Capability assessment
350 Part 3 • Im
plem enting Q
uality
Is form complete and
legible?
Is technical information
correct?
Note exceptions, make copy, and return to driller
for revisions
File for permanent
storage
Sort and categorize by
PLS
Prepare Drill Report Form
Well Driller
Region Clerk
Region Resource Manager
State Office Clerk
Microfiche Operator
Enter data into WD system
(ADABASE)*
Make copy of original report and forward to
region
*In some cases data are entered by resource agent instead of clerk Microfiche
recording
No
No
Yes
Yes
FIG U
R E 13-11
H igh-Level Process M
ap
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 351
EXAMPLE 13.3 XY Matrix in Action
Problem: Figure 13-13 shows a matrix for a services process. On the left, inputs A through G are listed with their associated correlations with five different outputs.
Solution: Figure 13-14 shows the solution for Example 13-3 . As you can see, inputs F and D should be studied especially closely.
Inputs Rank 5 7
7
7
9 10
O ut
pu t
V ar
ia bl
es
W id
th D
im en
si on
L en
gt h
D im
en si
on
9
10
10
5 5 5
10 5
6
5 5
5 5 5
8
9
A ss
em bl
y Si
ze
8
Fl as
h Fr
ee
10
A ll
W el
ds Pr
es en
t
Pr od
uc t
R an
k
Width Grommet 1 Length Grommet 1 Subassembly Width Subassembly Length
All SOPs Weld Schedule
Air Pressure Line Voltage
H2O Circulation Width Bracket 2 Length Bracket 2
Daily Tip Dressing
1 10
10
7
9
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
50
49 35 70 240 190 135 135 135 50 49 154
8
10 12 1 1* 2* 4 4 4 8 10 3*
13 14 15
Project:XY Matrix Welding Operation
Date: Oct. 14, 2011
Relationship weights
Importance weights
(9"5)#(9"7) #(9"8) #(6"10) ! 240
FIGURE 13-12 XY Matrix
FMEA
FMEA is used to identify ways a process or product can fail to meet critical customer requirements.
Verifying Measurements
When measuring critical characteristics of processes, it is necessary to use gauges, calipers, and other tools. Although these tools are often very accurate, there can be problems with variation in measurements. As a result, measurement system analysis (MSA) is used to determine if
352 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
O ut
pu t
V ar
ia bl
es
V en
do r
Se le
ct io
n
C om
po ne
nt Se
le ct
io n
In te
rn al
L ea
d Ti
m e
C os
t
Sh if
t t o
L oc
at io
n
To ta
l
R an
k
Rank 7
10
4 10 9 8
8 3
7
7 2
7 5
10 10 10
9 8
10 4 4 3
Inputs A1 B2 C3 D4 E5 F6 G7
4 5
10 8 9 5
177 5 137 6 186 3 224 2 102 7 257 1 181 4
*
*
Project: Service Process Date: Oct. 14, 2011
8 9
FIGURE 13-14 Solution to Example 13-3
Inputs Rank 7 10
4 9
10
O ut
pu t
V ar
ia bl
es
V en
do r
Se le
ct io
n
C om
po ne
nt Se
le ct
io n
8
8 3
4 7
8
10 10
10
10
5
2 5
In te
rn al
L ea
d Ti
m e
9
C os
t
5
Sh ip
to L
oc at
io n
A B C D E F G
1 9
4 4 3
7 7
8 10
2 3 4 5 6 7
Project: Service Process
Date: Oct. 14, 2011
8 9
FIGURE 13-13 XY Matrix for Example 13-3
measurements are consistent. Another approach for verifying measurements is to perform prod- uct and process capability analysis.
Gauge R&R
The most commonly used MSA is gauge repeatability and reproducibility analysis (gauge R&R, sometimes referred to as gage R&R) . Gauge R&R is used to determine the accuracy
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 353
and precision of your measurements. If your measurements are imprecise, there will be a large amount of variation as a result of measurement error. Obviously, you do not want to draw incor- rect conclusions as a result of measurement error. Problems in measurement can result for a variety of reasons:
• The measurement gauges are faulty. • Operators are using gauges improperly. • Training in measurement procedures is lacking. • The gauge is calibrated incorrectly.
Statistical experiments using analysis of variance (ANOVA) are useful in performing gauge R&R. Two-way ANOVA is used to determine whether variation comes from the part being measured, differences in operator measurements, or the measurement instrument.
TABLE 13-4 Gauge R&R Data
Part Number Operator 1 Operator 2 Operator 3
1 21 20 19 20 20 21
2 24 24 23 23 24 24
3 20 19 20 21 21 22
4 27 28 27 27 26 28
5 19 19 18 18 18 21
6 23 24 23 21 21 22
7 22 22 22 21 24 20
8 19 18 19 17 20 18
9 24 25 24 23 23 24
10 25 26 24 23 25 25
11 21 20 21 20 20 20
2 Montgomery, D., Design and Analysis of Experiments (New York: Wiley, 1997), p. 473 .
EXAMPLE 13-4 Gauge R&R in Action
Problem: Table 13-4 contains measurement data for a particular operation with three operators taking two measurements per part. 2 In other words, there are three operators and 20 parts. Each operator measures each part twice using a gauge and logs these measurements. For example, operator 1 measures part 1 twice, with resulting measurements of 21 and 20 millimeters. The same operator measures part 2 and gets the results of 24 and 23 millimeters. As we can see, there is measurement variation. However, we do not know whether the variation comes from the gauge, the part, or the operators.
(continued)
354 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
FIGURE 13-15 Gauge R&R in Excel
Part Number Operator 1 Operator 2 Operator 3
12 18 17 18 19 19 19
13 23 25 25 25 25 25
14 24 23 24 24 25 25
15 29 30 31 30 28 30
16 26 25 25 26 26 27
17 20 19 20 20 20 20
18 19 19 21 21 19 23
19 25 25 25 26 24 25
20 19 18 19 19 17 17
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 355
Solution: Figure 13-15 shows the ANOVA table for these data. From the ANOVA table we can see that parts contribute most of the variation (sample row in the ANOVA table, p " .000), operator effect is insignificant (columns row in the ANOVA table, p " .275), and part–operator interactions are insignificant (p " .881). As a result, we conclude that the gauge measurement is repeatable and reproducible.
Using Excel to Perform Gauge R&R Analysis
The data need to be entered into an Excel spreadsheet exactly as shown in Figure 13-15 . The labels for the operators are inserted in row 1. The part numbers are listed only once in column A as shown. And the data are entered as shown. This problem is set up for only two measurements per part. Follow the steps outlined in the figure. Note : Use two-factor analysis of variance with replication.
The results for Example 13-4 are shown in Figure 13-15 . The P -value column in the ANOVA table shows what variables significantly contribute to variation.
ANALYZE PHASE
The analyze phase involves gathering and analyzing data relative to a particular black-belt project. Following are the analyze-phase steps:
1. Define your performance objectives. 2. Identify independent variables ( X s). 3. Analyze sources of variability.
We discuss each of these steps separately. Because the tools used in this analysis were already discussed in Chapters 10 , 11 , and 12 , we only refer to these tools. You may need to refer to the other chapters to refresh your memory about these tools.
Defining Objectives
When defining performance objectives, you are attempting to determine what characteristics of the process need to be changed to achieve improvement. First, capability analysis is reviewed to determine where the processes are incapable. These areas are prioritized in order of importance. As shown in Figure 13-16 , capability analysis demonstrates whether certain quantitative param- eters or discrete events are meeting specification. It helps to determine whether these parameters or events are centered on the mean and whether or not they meet specification. If they are not cen- tered on the desired mean, the process mean needs to be adjusted. If there is too much variability, then the variability is reduced. We discuss means for reducing variation in the improve phase.
Identifying X s
This step involves identifying the independent variables where data will be gathered. These are variables that contribute significantly to process or product variation. Process maps, XY matrices, brainstorming, and FMEAs are the primary tools used in identifying X s.
Analyzing Sources of Variation
The goal of this step is to use visual and statistical tools to better understand the relationships between dependent and independent variables ( X s and Y s) for use in future experimentation. A number of tools are used in this analysis. They include histograms, box plots, scatter plots, regression analysis, and hypothesis tests.
356 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
IMPROVE PHASE
The improve phase of the DMAIC process involves offline experimentation. Offline experimen- tation involves studying the variables we have identified and using ANOVA to determine whether these independent variables significantly affect variation in our dependent variables. We intro- duce an important method for performing offline experiments, the Taguchi method.
CONTROL PHASE
The control phase involves managing the improved processes using process charts and imple- menting control plans. These topics were covered in Chapters 11 and 12 .
Shift Mean
Reduce Variance
Eliminate Outliers
FIGURE 13-16 Capability Results
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 357
TAGUCHI DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS
Many different factors, inputs, or variables need to be considered when making a product. For example, suppose that you wanted to bake a cake. How much flour should you use? How many eggs? How long should it bake? At what temperature should you set the oven? Probably you would find a recipe to follow. What if there were no recipes, and you were the pioneer trying to invent the best combinations of inputs to bake a cake? Likely you would have to resort to trial and error. However, there is a better way to design an experiment to find out the best combination of variables to make your product (cake).
The Taguchi method is a standardized approach for determining the best combination of inputs to produce a product or service. This is accomplished through design of experiments (DOE) for determining parameters. DOE is an important tool in the arsenal of tools available to the design and process engineer. It provides a method for quantitatively identifying just the right ingre- dients that go together to make a high-quality product or service. In this section we discuss first the Taguchi definitions, stages, and behavioral issues that form Taguchi’s approach to design of exper- iments. The purpose here is to introduce concepts and processes relating to the Taguchi method from a managerial perspective. The more technical engineering explanation is available in a variety of engineering books. Taguchi approaches design from four perspectives: robust design, concept design, parameter design, and tolerance design. These are defined in the following paragraphs.
Robust Design
The Taguchi concept of robust design states that products and services should be designed so that they are inherently defect-free and insensitive to random variation. The concept is not neces- sarily new. The notion that products and services should be designed to be of high quality or that processes should be defect-free is as old as mass assembly. However, Taguchi has provided new approaches for creating robust designs through a three-step method of concept design, parameter design, and tolerance design.
Concept design is the process of examining competing technologies to produce a product. Concept design includes process technology choices and process design choices. Appropriate choices in these areas can reduce production costs and result in higher-quality products. In a copy- ing store, concept design includes layout choices and choices of technology. Each candidate copying machine is tested separately to determine its suitability for the job. In financial services companies, this step likely will involve user groups, MIS staff, and systems analysts in defining processes and choices of equipment and technology.
Parameter design refers to the selection of control factors and the determination of opti- mal levels for each of the factors. Control factors are those variables in a process that manage- ment can manipulate. For example, the type and amount of training provided to customer service representatives is controlled by management. If it is determined that the amount of training received by customer service representatives determines the quality of service provided the cus- tomer, then training is identified as a control factor. Control factors do not affect production costs. Optimal levels are the targets or measurements for performance. For example, a sheet of paper is 8.5 inches wide. This would be the target. The goal is to find the most efficient process and service design. Parameter design involves selecting the best level for performance. For example, in baking cookies, what is the best temperature and time for baking? These parameters can be determined through experimentation.
Tolerance design deals with developing specification limits. Tolerance design occurs after parameter design has been used to reduce variation and the resulting improvement has been insufficient. This often results in an increase in production costs. For example, in tolerance design, engineers selectively tighten specified tolerances and require the use of higher-grade materials in production.
Of these four design considerations, the Taguchi method focuses primarily on parameter design. Getting back to our cake-baking example, using the Taguchi method, we could identify
358 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
the best amounts of heat, baking time, flour, eggs, and other ingredients to make the best tasting cake. These ingredients are called parameters. Their best amounts are referred to as levels or settings.
BACKGROUND OF THE TAGUCHI METHOD
The Taguchi method was first introduced by Dr. Genichi Taguchi to AT&T Bell Laboratories in 1980. Thanks to its wide acceptance and utilization, the Taguchi method for improving quality is now commonly viewed as comparable in importance to statistical process control (SPC), the Deming approach, and the Japanese concept of total quality control. From a historical perspec- tive Taguchi’s method is a continuation of the work in quality improvement that began with Shewhart’s work in statistical quality control (SQC) and Deming’s work in improving Japanese quality. The Taguchi method provides
1. A basis for determining the functional relationship between controllable product or service design factors and the outcomes of a process.
2. A method for adjusting the mean of a process by optimizing controllable variables. 3. A procedure for examining the relationship between random noise in the process and prod-
uct or service variability.
Among the unique aspects of the Taguchi method are the Taguchi definition of quality, the quality loss function (QLF), and the concept of robust design. These are discussed briefly in the following paragraphs.
Taguchi Definition of Quality
The traditional definition of quality was conformance to specification. However, Taguchi diverges from the traditional view of conformance quality. In Taguchi terms, ideal quality refers to a reference point or target value for determining the quality level of a product or service. This reference point is expressed as a target value. Ideal quality is delivered if a product or a tangible service performs its intended function throughout its projected life under reasonable operating conditions without harmful side effects. In services, because production and consumption of the service often occur simultaneously, ideal quality is a function of customer perceptions and satis- faction. Taguchi measures service quality in terms of loss to society if the service is not per- formed as expected.
Quality Loss Function
In Figure 13-17 a measurement is taken of the critical product characteristic. This is shown in the figure as A. If A is within the specification limits, the traditional conclusion was that it wasn’t a problem. However, point A is closer to being out of specification than to being at the target mea- surement. This means that over time it might cause a problem. Taguchi calls this potential for
Q(c)
Scrap Cost
LSL USL Target
A
FIGURE 13-17 Classical QC-Step Function
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 359
problem a potential loss to society . In a “hard-core” manufacturing operation, Taguchi identifies these losses to society not only in terms of rejection, scrap, or rework but also in terms of pollu- tion that is added to the environment, products that wear out too quickly, or other negative effects that occur. Loss to society is the cost of a deviation from a target value.
To quantify loss to society, Taguchi used the concept of a quadratic loss function. Figure 13-18 shows that any variation from the target of six (where T " 6) results in some loss to the company. The quality loss function (QLF) focuses on the economic and societal penalties incurred as a result of purchasing a nonconforming product. Losses may include maintenance costs, failure costs, ill effects to the environment such as pollution, or excessive costs of operating the product. The QLF is determined by first computing the constant
K " C!T2 (13.2)
where
K " a constant C " the unit repair cost T " a tolerance interval (the allowable variation in a parameter)
After computing the constant, next compute
L " K * V2 ($!unit)
where
L " the economic penalty incurred by the customer as a result of the product quality deviation
V 2 " the mean squared deviation from the desired target value
The application of this concept is demonstrated in the followed example.
Q(c)
0 LSL USL Target (6)
FIGURE 13-18 Taguchi Quadratic Loss Function
EXAMPLE 13-5 Application of the QLF
Problem: Suppose the cost to repair a radiator on an automobile is $200. Compute the QLF for losses incurred as a result of a deviation from a target setting where a tolerance of 6 $ 0.5 mm is required and the mean squared deviation from the target is (1/6) 2 .
Solution:
K " 200!.52 " 800, and
L " K * V 2 " 800 * (1!6)2 " $22.22!unit
Therefore, the loss caused by deviation from the target standard is $22.22 per unit. When we can compare the costs of other defectives, we can establish priorities for implementing product design improvement.
360 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
The QLF deviated from the historical concept of statistical based control charting and the establishment of specification limits in that any deviation from the target or mean specification is expressed in terms of an economic loss to the customer.
THE TAGUCHI PROCESS
An outline is presented here of the steps in the Taguchi process. Although the Taguchi process is viewed as fairly technical and statistical, a major component involves behavioral steps such as teamwork and brainstorming. We now examine the steps in the Taguchi process. As shown in Figure 13-19 , a series of six steps is followed in the initial phase of the Taguchi experiment. These steps are described in the following paragraphs.
1. Problem identification. First, the production problem must be identified. The problem may have to do with the production process or the service itself.
2. Brainstorming session. Second, a brainstorming session to identify variables that have a critical effect on service or product quality takes place. At a minimum, the brainstorming ses- sion is attended by the project facilitator/leader and workers taking part in the process to be changed. Managers attending the brainstorming session should be careful that their attendance does not stifle frank discussion among the session participants. In services and manufacturing environments, managerial practices are often critical variables impeding ideal, quality results. When appropriate, technical staff members such as computer programmers or systems analysts also attend. The role of the facilitator is to initiate the brainstorming session, to maintain a non- judgmental environment conducive to discussion, and to document the discussion for future use.
The critical variables identified in this session are referred to by Taguchi as factors. These may be identified as either control factors (variables that are under the control of management) or noise factors (uncontrollable variation). Examples of control factors within a production pro- cess might be procedures, amount of lighting, or ambient temperature setting. Noise-factor examples include uncontrollable variation in temperature, variations in human performance, or environmental variables that cannot be controlled.
Once these factors have been identified, different levels or settings of the control factors are defined. For example, three or four possible levels of ambient temperature settings may be identified for the production of silicon wafers. At least three levels should be used for each factor in order to identify functional forms (such as interactions) of the effects more clearly. Possible
1. Problem Identification
2. Brainstorming Session (Identify: factors, factor settings, possible interactions, objectives)
3. Experimental Design (Choose orthogonal arrays, design experiment)
4. Run Experiment
5. Analyze Results
6. Confirmation Runs
Initiating Steps
FIGURE 13-19 Taguchi Process
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 361
interactions between factors should be identified during the brainstorming session. Noise factors can be measured at the time of the experiment and included in the analysis.
Once the decision variables are established, objectives of the experiments should be defined. Examples of objectives are the less the better, nominal is best, or the more the better. These objectives are defined as follows:
• The less the better. This desired level of defectives or errors is as close to zero as possi- ble. For example, in a cake-baking process, we may want zero “fallen” cakes. In an egg- packaging process, we desire the lowest number possible of broken eggs.
• Nominal is best. This desired outcome usually relates to a measurement. For example, we may desire to have all boards exactly 0.75 inches thick or all sheets of paper 8.5 inches wide.
• The more the better. This desired outcome is the opposite of the less the better. We may desire the maximum number of computer chips per lot without defects. We may want maximum weight gain from a nutrient we give to a farm animal.
3. Experimental design. Using the factors, factor levels, and objectives from the brain- storming session, the experiment is designed. The Taguchi method uses offline experimenta- tion as a means of improving quality. This contrasts with traditional online (in-process) quality measurement. For this reason, the experimental design is a key consideration in conducting a Taguchi experiment. As with any experiment, care should be taken in selecting an appropriate number of trials and with the conditions for each trial, such as means of performing measure- ments, maintaining continuity with objectives, and reducing random noise by providing suffi- cient controls. The number of replications to be used in the experiment should be established beforehand.
4. Experimentation. Different Taguchi analysis approaches use quantitatively rigorous techniques, such as ANOVA, signal-to-noise (S/N) ratios, and response charts. These approaches, although not always theoretically sound, 3 are useful in engineering related projects involving engineered specifications, torques, and tolerances.
For services, the approach advocated by Ross 4 may be the most useful. This methodology is more intuitively understandable for management and provides essentially the same results as ANOVA and S/N ratios. What is compromised with the Ross methodology is the additional information provided by the more quantitative results of ANOVA and S/N ratios. Here are the experimental steps used in this methodology:
a. Choose the appropriate orthogonal array for the experiment. ( Orthogonal arrays are tools to maintain independence between the successive trials of a Taguchi experiment.) The appropriate orthogonal array is determined by the number of factors and levels chosen from the brainstorming session. A number of standard orthogonal arrays can be found in the book mentioned in the footnotes.
b. Run the experiment for the appropriate number of replications and record the results. c. Compute average performance levels for each of the factors and levels. d. Plot the average responses on a response chart showing the best outcomes in accor-
dance with the objective of the experiment.
5. Analysis. Experimentation is used to identify the factors that result in closest-to-target performance. In essence, the best levels for all factors are determined. If interactions between factors are evident, two alternatives are possible. Either ignore the interactions (there is inherent risk to this approach) or, provided the cost is not prohibitive, run a full factorial experiment to detect interactions. The full factorial experiment tests all possible interactions among variables.
3 Box, G. E. P., and Bisgaard, S., “The Scientific Context of Quality Improvement,” Quality Progress 20, 6 (June 1987): 54–61. 4 Ross, P., Taguchi Techniques for Quality Engineering (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1988).
362 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
6. Confirming experiment. Once the optimal levels for each of the factors have been determined, a confirming experiment with factors set at the optimal levels should be conducted to validate the earlier results. If earlier results are not validated, the experiment may have some- how been significantly flawed. If results vary from those expected, interactions also may be pres- ent, and the experiment should, therefore, be repeated.
Factors
Trials A B C Responses
1 1 1 1 25 2 1 2 2 30 3 2 1 2 28 4 2 2 1 36
EXAMPLE 13-6 The Taguchi Method in Action
Problem: Here is a standard Taguchi problem. In this experiment it was determined that there were three important factors ( X s) in producing a wood product. These factors were
• A : Pressure applied in treatment • B : Drying temperature • C : Process time
For each of these factors, two levels were established for each setting:
• A : 250 psi, 300 psi • B : 150 degrees, 180 degrees • C : 3 hours, 4 hours
We need to determine the best levels for each of the settings. The objective is the more the better.
Solution: When performing a Taguchi experiment, you need to use an orthogonal array. Because we have three levels with two factors, a full-factorial experiment would require 2 3 " 8 trials. The Taguchi method is much more economical, so the L 4 (2
3 ) orthogonal array (the right array for the job) is used to perform this experiment. The array looks like this:
Interpreting the orthogonal array, you see there are three factors and only four trials are needed to run the experiment. Following the first line, this means that for the first trial we use settings A 1 , B 1 , and C 1 . This means we use pressure applied at 250 psi, drying temperature at 150 degrees, and a process time of 3 hours. We then measure the outcome, and the responsiveness of the wood prod- uct is rated at 25. Similarly, for trial 2, we set the pressure at 250 psi, the temperature at 180, and the time at 4 hours. As you can now see, the 1s and 2s in the orthogonal array correspond to lev- els for each of the factors to be used during each trial of the experiment. Remember that a trial is an iteration or “run” of the experiment.
Determining the best levels for each factor requires computing averages and analysis of variance. We demonstrate this in Excel.
Using Excel to Solve Taguchi Experiments
Figure 13-20 shows the results of our Taguchi experiment. To compute our mean scores, we aver- aged the responses for each factor and level. That is, in trials 1 and 2, factor A was set at level 1.
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 363
25
A1 A2 B1 B2 Response Table
C1 C2
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
FIGURE 13-20 Example 13-6 Results
364 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Therefore, the average response when factor A was at level 1 was (25 % 30)/2 " 27.5. However, when factor A was set at level 2, the mean response was 32. Because our objective is the more the better, the higher response is preferred. Similarly, B 2 and C 1 are preferred settings. This means that the best settings are as follows:
• Pressure applied in treatment " 300 psi • Drying temperature " 180 degrees • Process time " 3 hours.
DESIGN FOR SIX SIGMA
Design for Six Sigma (DFSS) is used in designing new products and services with high perfor- mance as measured by customer-based critical-to-quality metrics. Instead of the DMAIC meth- odology, DFSS requires the DMADV process (design, measure, analyze, design, verify). Another method for DFSS is IDOV (identify, design, optimize, verify). IDOV is focused on final engineering design optimization. These methods are customer-focused, encompassing the entire business-to-market process, and pertain to both services and products. Whereas DMAIC pertains to improving existing processes and products, DMADV pertains to developing new processes and products.
LEAN-SIX SIGMA FROM A CONTINGENCY PERSPECTIVE
As we stated early in the chapter, lean-Six Sigma is a very popular approach for improving the robustness of designs and processes. As you have seen, this approach is very technical and requires special expertise in the form of black-belt specialists. This method can be very useful for companies that need to improve their cost and efficiency through quality efforts.
As with any quality improvement approach, when people implement lean-Six Sigma with- out thoroughly understanding their processes, sometimes processes fail. Some reasons for lean- Six Sigma failures include
• Lack of leadership by champions • Misunderstood roles and responsibilities • Lack of appropriate culture for improvement • Resistance to change and the Six Sigma structure • Faulty strategies for deployment • Lack of data
As with any quality improvement approach, a culture, leadership, and commitment need to be in place to make the effort successful. Also, key to lean-Six Sigma success is the availability of data for projects. Companies where good process data are not available will struggle getting outstanding results from their lean-Six Sigma efforts.
Summary In this chapter we discussed lean-Six Sigma. We emphasized both managerial and technical requirements for lean-Six Sigma. The process for Lean-Six Sigma is define, measure, analyze, improve, and control.
Many companies have reported outstanding results with lean-Six Sigma. There are also many failures. Keys to lean-Six Sigma success are skilled management, leadership, and long- term commitment.
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 365
Key Terms Analyze phase Black belt Business case Champion Concept design Control factors Control phase Defects per million
opportunities (DPMO) Defects per unit (DPU) Define phase Design for Six Sigma
(DFSS) Design of experiments
(DOE)
DMADV (design, measure, analyze, design, verify) process
DMAIC (define, measure, analyze, improve, control) process
Gauge repeatability and reproducibility analysis (gage R&R)
Green belts Ideal quality IDOV (identify, design,
optimize, verify) Improve phase Lean
Lean-Six Sigma Loss to society Master black belts Measure phase Measurement system
analysis (MSA) Muda Noise factors Offline experimentation Optimal levels Orthogonal arrays Parameter design Project risk assessment Pull production Quality loss function (QLF)
Replications Robust design RUMBA (realistic,
understandable, measurable, believable, actionable)
Six Sigma Taguchi method Tolerance design XY matrix Yellow belts
Discussion Questions 1. Can you think of an example where the Taguchi quality loss function (QLF) would work in real life?
Discuss how it might work. 2. How does the Taguchi concept of ideal quality compare to other definitions of quality discussed in
Chapter 1 ? 3. How could the Taguchi method be used to design a course in quality management? Identify all the
variables, measures, and objectives. 4. Why are behavioral processes such as brainstorming important for the Taguchi method? 5. How would you cost-benefit a Taguchi experiment? What might be some of the quantifiable parame-
ters you would use in evaluating the worth of a Taguchi experiment? 6. The chapter cites different services implementations of the Taguchi method. Do you think the Taguchi
method is useful for services? Why or why not? Why do you think the technique has not been widely adopted in services?
7. Where do you think that lean-Six Sigma can be used effectively? 8. How will risk assessments vary from industry to industry? 9. What industries would be the best candidates for the lean-Six Sigma approach? Why? 10. What is different between lean-Six Sigma and traditional quality improvement?
Problems 1. Part of a Six Sigma project is to identify X s and Y s. What are the X s you can identify for student satis-
faction with a quality management course? Use the Y (dependent variable) of student satisfaction with a quality management class.
2. Part of a Six Sigma project is to identify X s and Y s. Identify X s and Y s for an athletic director of a major university (insert the name of your university here) who is interested in increasing attendance at football games.
3. Part of a Six Sigma project is to identify X s and Y s. Identify these variables for the owner of a copy shop who is interested in reducing mistakes in orders.
4. Develop a problem definition (see Figure 13-10 ) for the project in Problem 3.
366 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
Which inputs are the most important? 6. Complete the XY matrix for the following data:
XY Matrix
Outputs
A B C D Total Rank
Ranks: 4 6 5 9
Inputs
1 10
2 5
3 7
4 8
5 3 5
XY Matrix
Output
A B C D E Total Rank
Ranks: 3 8 9 6 7
Inputs
1 4 3 5 1 2
2 5 3 6 2
3 7 9 2
4 3 5 4 8 2
5 1 3 5 1 2
2.04 2.05 2.03 2.04 1.96 1.97 1.95 1.96 2.03 2.04 2.02 2.03 2.02 2.03 2.01 2.02 1.99 2.00 1.98 1.99
Which inputs are the most important? 7. Find the QLF for the following information:
C " 300 T " .25 V " 1!3
8. Compute the QLF for the following information: C " 250 T " .40 V " 1!6
9. It costs $50 to repair a component in a VCR. Compute the QLF for losses incurred as a result of a deviation from a target setting with a nominal tolerance of 10 $ 0.25 mm required. The mean squared deviation is 1!2.
10. It costs $350 to repair a refrigerator compressor. Compute the QLF for losses incurred as a result of a deviation from a target setting with a nominal tolerance of 60 amps, where a 2-amp variation is accept- able. The mean squared deviation is 1!5.
11. For a component, the following measurements were taken:
If the nominal target value is 2 $ .05, compute the QLF for this component where the repair cost is $200.
5. Complete the XY matrix for the following data:
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 367
12. Here are answers to the worksheets in Figures 13-6 and 13-7 . Using these responses, develop a risk assessment for this project. Produce a risk and return matrix to determine if this project is worth pursu- ing. Use the weights in Figure 13-6 .
1. Yes 2. No 3. No 4. Uncertain 5. Yes 6. No 7. No 8. No 9. Uncertain 10. Yes 11. No 12. Uncertain 13. Yes 14. Yes 15. Yes 16. No 17. No 18. No 19. Yes 20. Yes 21–24. All Uncertain
Return scale A: 1 (growth) Return scale B: 4 (urgency) Return scale C: 3 (impact)
13. Here are answers to the worksheets in Figures 13-6 and 13-7 . Using these responses, develop a risk assessment for this project. Produce a risk and return matrix to determine if this project is worth pursu- ing. Use the weights in Figure 13-6 .
1. No 2. Yes 3. No 4. Yes 5. Uncertain 6. Yes 7. No 8. No 9. Uncertain 10. No 11. Yes 12. Yes 13. Yes 14. Yes 15. Yes 16. Yes 17. Uncertain 18. Yes 19. Yes 20. Yes 21–24. All Uncertain
Return scale A: 3 (growth) Return scale B: 4 (urgency) Return scale C: 5 (impact)
368 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
14. Using the following data, perform a gauge R&R analysis where there are two replications for each part number.
Part Number Operator 1 Operator 2 Operator 3
1 28.35 27.20 26.03 27.00 27.20 28.77
2 32.40 32.64 31.51 31.05 32.64 32.88
3 27.00 25.84 27.40 28.35 28.56 30.14
4 36.45 38.08 36.99 36.45 35.36 38.36
5 25.65 25.84 24.66 24.30 24.48 28.77
6 31.05 32.64 31.51 28.35 28.56 30.14
7 29.70 29.92 30.14 28.35 32.64 27.40
8 25.65 24.48 26.03 22.95 27.20 24.66
9 32.40 34.00 32.88 31.05 31.28 32.88
10 33.75 35.36 32.88 31.05 34.00 34.25
11 28.35 27.20 28.77 27.00 27.20 27.40
12 24.30 23.12 24.66 25.65 25.84 26.03
13 31.05 34.00 34.25 33.75 34.00 34.25
14 32.40 31.28 32.88 32.40 34.00 34.25
15 39.15 40.80 42.47 40.50 38.08 41.10
16 35.10 34.00 34.25 35.10 35.36 36.99
17 27.00 25.84 27.40 27.00 27.20 27.40
18 25.65 25.84 28.77 28.35 25.84 31.51
19 33.75 34.00 34.25 35.10 32.64 34.25
20 25.65 24.48 26.03 25.65 23.12 23.29
Part Number Operator 1 Operator 2 Operator 3
1 21 20 19 20 20 21 21 20 21
2 24 24 23 23 24 24 22 23 24
15. Perform a gauge R&R analysis for the following data where there are three replications. What are your findings?
Chapter 13 • Six Sigma Management and Lean Tools 369
Part Number Operator 1 Operator 2 Operator 3
3 20 19 20 21 21 22 22 22 22
4 27 28 27 27 26 28 26 25 26
5 19 19 18 18 18 21 19 18 16
6 23 24 23 21 21 22 22 22 21
7 22 22 22 21 24 20 24 24 23
8 19 18 19 17 20 18 19 18 19
9 24 25 24 23 23 24 24 25 24
10 25 26 24 23 25 25 25 24 26
11 21 20 21 20 20 20 26 26 25
12 18 17 18 19 19 19 18 19 20
13 23 25 25 25 25 25 24 24 24
14 24 23 24 24 25 25 23 23 24
15 29 30 31 30 28 30 25 26 31
16 26 25 25 26 26 27 26 25 28
17 20 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
18 19 19 21 21 19 23 22 22 22
19 27 26 25 25 25 25 26 24 25
20 19 18 19 19 17 17 18 19 18
370 Part 3 • Implementing Quality
CASE
Case 13-1 The Neiman-Marcus Cookie
One of the fun urban legends to pop up on the Internet has been the Neiman-Marcus Cookie. This work is in the public domain and you might have seen it before. We present the legend here and propose that you develop a Taguchi experiment based on this recipe. It is written in the first person by an anonymous author.
My daughter and I had just finished a salad at Neiman-Marcus in Dallas and decided to have a small dessert. Because our family are such cookie lovers, we decided to try the “Neiman-Marcus Cookie.” It was so excellent that I asked if they would give me the recipe, and the server said with a small frown, “I’m afraid not.” Well, I said, would you let me buy the recipe? With a cute smile she said, “Yes.” I asked how much, and she responded, “Two-fifty.” I said with approval, just add it to my tab.
Thirty days later, I received my Visa statement from Neiman-Marcus, and it was $285. I looked again and I remembered I had only spent $9.95 for two sal- ads and about $20 for a scarf. As I glanced at the bot- tom of the statement, it said, “Cookie Recipe—$250.” Boy, was I upset!! I called Neiman’s accounting department and told them the waitress said it was “two-fifty,” and I did not realize she meant $250 for a cookie recipe.
I asked them to take back the recipe and reduce my bill, and they said they were sorry, but because all the recipes were this expensive so that not just anyone could duplicate any of the bakery recipes, . . . the bill would stand.
I waited, thinking of how I could get even or even try and get any of my money back.
I just said, “Okay, you folks got my $250, and now I’m going to have $250 worth of fun.” I told her that I was going to see to it that every cookie lover will have a $250 cookie recipe from Neiman-Marcus for nothing. She replied, “I wish you wouldn’t do this.”
I said, “I’m sorry, but this is the only way I feel I can get even,” and I will.
So here it is, and please pass it to someone else or run a few copies . . . . I paid for it; now you can have it for free.
The Neiman-Marcus Cookie (recipe may be halved)
5 cups blended oatmeal
2 cups brown sugar
2 cups sugar
2 cups butter
2 tsp. soda
1 8-oz. Hershey bar, grated
2 tsp. baking powder
2 tsp. vanilla
4 cups flour
24 oz. chocolate chips
1 tsp. salt
4 eggs
3 cups chopped nuts
Measure oatmeal and blend in a blender to a fine powder. In a separate bowl, cream the butter and both sugars. Add eggs and vanilla, mix together with oat- meal, flour, salt, baking powder, and baking soda. Add chocolate chips, Hershey bar, and nuts. Roll into balls and place two inches apart on a cookie sheet. Bake for 10 minutes at 375 degrees. Makes 112 cookies.
Using this recipe and these production proce- dures, develop a Taguchi experiment to find the optimal process for making chocolate chip cookies. Be careful in identifying control factors, noise factors, objectives, and design the whole experiment.
P A R T F O U R
Forever Improving the Quality System
This section is for the organizations that have gone through the hard work outlined in the first 13 chapters of this book and are trying to get to the next level—managing the growth of the individuals within the organization.
Chapter 14 takes a hard look at team facilitation and organizational improvement. As a manager, the future will demand that you can effectively assess, develop, and train your employees. This certainly is a key aspect of quality management. Many of the quality concepts you have learned in this text need to be taught to your fellow employees. Managing organizational learning is key to your success as a manager— regardless of whether you specialize in quality. It is interesting that this concept is largely overlooked in the quality literature. Yet everyone in quality is involved in training.
Finally, Chapter 15 provides a means for outstanding companies to assess themselves and to determine where they need to improve. If you are the benchmark or standard, you often have to look within to see where to improve. Here you will find a method for accomplishing this important task.
Teamwork is sorely needed throughout the company. Teamwork requires one to compensate with his strength someone else’s weakness, for
everyone to sharpen each other’s wits with questions.
—W. Edwards Deming
C H A P T E R 1 4
Managing Quality Improvement Teams
and Projects
372
In their classic article on quality and participation, Robert Cole 1 and his coauthors explained
the need for employee participation as a key element in managing changing organizations in an increasingly complex world. As this chapter’s opening quote shows, W. Edwards Deming
also argued for employee participation and teamwork. Why do you suppose so many influential voices call for participation and teamwork to
manage businesses today? There are several reasons. One of the biggest is complexity in the workplace. Given the large volumes of data available to managers, is it any surprise that unilat- eral decision making is a thing of the past? Also, business is transforming itself from a “com- mand and control” environment to one of collaboration. Such collaboration is needed as complexity drives workers from routine work to knowledge work , or work that involves the development and transmission of knowledge and information. Knowledge work implies a greater amount of ambiguity, searching, researching, and learning in the job environment.
Knowledge work is effective when workers are given a certain amount of autonomy and decision- making authority. Companies such as 3M encourage their employees to become more entrepreneur- ial in their approach to work. This regularly results in new products and markets for the company.
As more collaborative practices are being adopted in business, teamwork is the natural result. For our purposes, a team is defined as a finite number of individuals who are united in a common purpose. This chapter discusses an approach to improving quality that uses teams and collaboration as a means for improvement. Often these team approaches are used in conjunction with the tools of quality as discussed in Chapter 10 .
Joseph Juran long emphasized the importance of teams and projects in the improvement of quality. He stated that the improvement of quality should be approached on a “project-by-project basis, and in no other way.” Teams are a fundamental part of projects. Philip Crosby also supports
1 Cole, R., Bacdayan, P., and White, J., “Quality, Participation, and Competitiveness,” California Management Review 35, 3 (1992): 68–81.
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 373
the use of teams in improving quality. Although there are notable failures of teams, on the whole this is such a widely practiced approach to quality improvement that we discuss teams in some depth.
This chapter focuses on two interrelated topics: leading teams and managing projects. The first half of the chapter focuses on the behavioral aspects of making teams work. The second half of the chapter is about managing and controlling projects. We treat these topics together in the same chapter because they are interrelated.
Why Employees Enjoy Teams
We should note that well-led teams often lead to improved employee morale. Employees like teams for many reasons. In a study of project managers who were involved in project teams, five motivators emerged 2 :
Mutuality. The need for mutual support and encouragement between line management and project managers as well as personal loyalty of project managers to their teams and organizations.
Recognition for personal achievement. The opportunity for personal development as well as recognition for personal achievement through rewards, incentives, or status.
Belonging. The individual’s need for supportive, cohesive, and friendly team relations. This implies clear communications both within the team and within the larger organiza- tion, as well as clear information and project goals.
Bounded power. The need for authority and control over project resources and people, personal accountability and challenge, individuals’ abilities to influence decisions that affect the project, and opportunities for personal growth and development.
Creative autonomy. The need for individuals to have opportunities to use their creativity and potential during the course of a project and to enjoy good working conditions.
These motivators provide strong reasons for individuals to be involved in teams and show why teamwork is often correlated with positive attitudes.
LEADING TEAMS FOR QUALITY IMPROVEMENT
Employee Empowerment and Involvement
When we begin to use teams, decision-making authority is given to team members. Empower- ment means giving power to team members who perhaps had little control over their jobs. When such power is given, management must follow through and give up a reasonable amount of control.
Implicit in empowerment is a series of promises to employees. These implicit promises include
You will have greater control over your own work.
You will not be penalized for making painful change.
Management is changing and becoming more contemporary.
Management is committed to quality improvement over the long haul.
Management will concede more control over company systems to you.
Management values your ideas and opinions and will give them serious consideration.
Management trusts you and is worthy of trust in return.
You will be rewarded for making decisions that benefit the company.
Labor is capable of decision making concerning its own jobs and company processes.
2 Tampoe, M., and Thurloway, L., “Project Management: The Use and Abuse of Techniques and Teams,” International Journal of Project Management 11, 4 (1993): 245–250.
Video Clip: Teams at the Ritz
374 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
This approach to managing labor is an important factor in improving employee morale. It means a lot to employees to be told that their thoughts and ideas are valued. The Baldrige criteria encourage employee participation, adding that
A company’s success depends increasingly on the knowledge, skills, and motivation of its workforce. Employee success depends increasingly on having opportunities to learn and to practice new skills. Companies need to invest in the development of the workforce through education, training, and opportunities for continuing growth. Opportunities might include classroom and on-the-job training, job rotation, and pay for demonstrated knowledge in skills. On-the-job training offers a cost-effective way to train and to better link training to work processes. Workforce education and training programs may need to utilize advanced technologies, such as computer-based learning and satellite broadcasts. Increasingly, train- ing, development, and work units need to be tailored to a diverse workforce and to more flexible, high-performance work practices.
Major challenges in the area of workforce development include: . . . integration of human resources practices—selection, performance, recognition, training, career advance- ment, and the alignment of human resource management with strategic change processes. Addressing these challenges requires use of employee-related data on knowledge, skills, satisfaction, motivation, safety, and well-being. Such data need to be tied to indicators of company or unit performance such as customer satisfaction, customer retention, and pro- ductivity. Through this approach, human resource management may be better integrated and aligned with business directions. 3
A number of preconditions are necessary for empowerment. These are
• Clear authority and accountability. Employees must know what is expected of them and be given authority over their own work.
• Participation in planning at all levels. Employees should be involved in planning related to their jobs. They should be provided with planning tools.
• Adequate communication and information for decision making. If employees are to make decisions related to their jobs, they need the right managerial information.
• Responsibility with authority. Employees should be given a definition of power that focuses on getting things done rather than exerting influence over people. 4
Of course, granting authority to employees doesn’t guarantee that people will work well together or necessarily achieve all the lofty goals that are espoused in this approach. Many issues surround empowerment and teamwork that must be addressed (see A Closer Look at Quality 14-1 ). These issues range from operations and behavior to organizational design. For example, if the existing culture does not reward this type of activity, it is doubtful that participatory approaches will work until the cultural issues are resolved. However, using teams can lead to cultural changes that facilitate improvement. This chapter focuses on the issues related to managing projects and teams to help make the transition succeed.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 14-1 Empowerment in Action 5
www.srcreman.com
Empowerment has been used in a number of companies very successfully. These include Springfield ReManufacturing Corp. of Springfield, Missouri. This company, founded by Jack Stack, has success- fully applied empowerment principles among its employees. Stack uses surprising candor with his
3 2012 Criteria for Performance Excellence, Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award, NIST, Gaithersburg, MD. 4 Adapted from class notes from Dr. Catherine Beise, Kennesaw State College, Kennesaw, GA, 2011. 5 Burlingham, B., Small Giants: Companies That Choose to Be Great Instead of Big (New York: Portfolio Hardcover, 2005).
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 375
From a behavioral perspective, empowerment is a way to enhance organizational learning. Organizational learning leads to change in organizational behavior in a way that improves performance. 6 This type of learning takes place through a network of interrelated components. These components include teamwork, strategies, structures, cultures, systems, and their interac- tions. Corporate learning relies on an open culture where no one feels threatened to expose opinions or beliefs—a culture where individuals can engage in learning, questioning, and not remain constrained by “taboos” or existing norms. This strategy includes continuous improve- ment projects as a governing principle for all team members. 7
Flattening Hierarchies for Improved Effectiveness
Along with the emphasis on teamwork and empowerment, there has been a move toward flatten- ing hierarchies in organizations. Led by consultants such as Tom Peters and others, top managers have eliminated layers of bureaucratic managers in order to improve communication and sim- plify work. Having many layers of management can have the effect of increasing the time required to perform work. For example, it has been reported that in the past, one of the largest automobile manufacturers in the United States required six months to determine its standard colors for office phones. Probably this decision required many, many meetings and proper autho- rization. However, such decisions are minor when compared with competitive decisions that need to be made. The time required to make this decision was excessive.
Too many layers of management also can impede creativity, stifle initiative, and make empow- erment impossible. With fewer layers of management, companies tend to rely more on teams.
Team Leader Roles and Responsibilities
Quality professionals are unanimous—to be successful in achieving teamwork and participation, strong leadership both at the company level and within the team is essential. However, what is not always clear is what it means to be an effective team leader. We know that leaders are respon- sible for setting team direction and seeking future opportunities for the team. Leaders reinforce values and provide a system for achieving desired goals. Leaders establish expectations for high levels of performance, customer focus, and continuous learning. Leaders are responsible for communicating effectively, for evaluating organizational performance, and for providing feedback concerning such performance.
An important aspect of leadership is the organization’s preparedness to follow the leader- ship. The best general is probably not going to be successful if the troops are not well trained or
6 Lichtenthaler, U., “Absorptive Capacity, Environmental Turbulence, and the Complementarity of Organizational Learning Processes,” Academy of Management Journal 52, 4 (2009): 822–846. 7 Deiser, R., Designing the Smart Organization (Pfeiffer, Hoboken, NJ, 2009).
employees, sharing all financial information with them each month. Stack tells how a janitor persuaded him to expand into a new product line. The company experienced difficult times. In order to avoid bank- ruptcy, Stack persuaded his employees to invest in the company. Since that time, monthly bank reports that include cash flow projections have been distributed to all employees. During this period, the com- pany experienced 15% annual growth. The company uses the following credo:
As employees of SRC, we are more than just operators—we’re owners. This gives us the incentive to be disciplined and determined to make SRC the best remanufacturer of engines and components. Each department has a healthy competitive spirit, but we’re all in the game together. Our sole objective is to produce the best remanufactured engines and components that money can buy. As an employee-owned corporation, we at Springfield Remanufacturing Corporation can account our success to the commitment of each SRC employee. Our philosophy is simply, “providing the cus- tomer with the highest quality product possible at a competitive price.”
376 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
prepared. Hersey and Blanchard 8 propose a theory called a situational leadership model that clarifies the interrelation between employee preparedness and effectiveness of leadership. Accord- ing to Hersey and Blanchard, situational leadership is based on interplay among the following:
The amount of guidance and direction a leader gives (task behavior)
The amount of socioeconomic support a leader provides (relationship behavior)
The readiness level that followers exhibit in performing a specific task, function, or objective
Therefore, if team members are trained and prepared so that they are task ready , leadership will be more effective. Readiness , in this context, is the extent to which a follower has the ability and willingness to accomplish a specific task. Readiness is a function of two variables. These are ability and technical skills (job maturity) and self-confidence in one’s abilities (psychological maturity). Therefore, effective leadership helps employees become competent and instills confi- dence in employees that they can do the job.
Figure 14-1 shows the Hersey and Blanchard model of situational leadership with four dif- ferent styles of leadership. As the model shows, different contingencies drive different approaches to leading. According to Hersey and Blanchard, the best approach to leading (i.e., telling, selling, participating, or delegating) depends on the readiness of employees to perform tasks and func- tions or accomplish objectives.
As it relates to quality management, leadership is especially difficult. Leaders are told that they should empower employees. To many leaders this implies a laissez-faire or a hands-off approach to management. In other words, many leaders feel they are to provide resources but should not be involved in overly controlling employee behavior. Although the literature contains examples of companies that have been successful in delegating authority to this extent, quality management is not a vehicle by which leaders abdicate their responsibility.
Team Roles and Responsibilities
Besides team leaders, there are a variety of roles that individuals occupy in teams. Meredith Belbin provides a widely adopted typology of team roles. Table 14-1 contains names and profiles for each of these roles. Belbin notes that each of these roles may be more relevant at different stages during a project. Also, these roles are not mutually exclusive. This means that one person can fulfill different roles on a team.
8 Hersey, P., Blanchard, K., and Johnson, D., Management of Organizational Behavior (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2007).
Low
Low
High
High
Guidance (Structure)
Emotional Support (Consideration)
Participating Selling
TellingDelegating
FIGURE 14-1 Hersey and Blanchard’s Situational Leadership Model
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 377
Also, team roles can be defined functionally. Often teams require different functional tal- ents such as management, human resources, engineering, operations, accounting, marketing, management information systems, and others. In these cases, the managers overseeing the project help to identify the talents needed and then search for the team members to provide these talents.
Team Formation and Evolution
The way a team is formed depends—to an extent—on the objectives or goals of the team. Regard- less of the type of team your firm employs, teams experience different stages of development (see Figure 14-2 ). These stages include the following. Forming , where the team is composed, and the objective for the team is set; storming , where the team members begin to get to know each other, and agreements have not yet been made that facilitate smooth interaction between team members; norming , where the team becomes a cohesive unit, and interdependence, trust, and cooperation develop; and performing , where a mutually supportive, steady state is achieved.
TABLE 14-1 Belbin’s Team Roles
Key Stages of Team Activity Team Roles Relevant to Particular Stages
1. Identifying needs Key figures at this stage are individuals with a strong goal awareness. Shapers and coordinators make their mark here.
2. Finding ideas Once an objective is set, the means of achieving it are required. Here plant and resource investigators play a crucial role.
3. Formulating plans Two activities help ideas turn into plans. One is weighing up the options; the second, making good use of all relevant experience and knowledge to ensure a
good decision. Monitor evaluators make especially good long-term planners, and specialists play a key role at this stage.
4. Making contacts People must be persuaded that an improvement is possible. Champions of the plans and cheerleaders must be found. This is an activity where resource
investigators are in their element. However, to appease disturbed groups, a team worker is required.
5. Establishing the organization Plans must turn into procedures, methods, and working practices to become routines. Implementers are the people required here. These routines, however,
need people to make them work. Coordinators are good at getting people to fit the system.
6. Following through Too many assumptions are made that all will work out well in the end. Good follow-through benefits from the attentions of completers. Implementers, too,
pull their weight in this area, for they pride themselves on being efficient in anything they undertake.
Source: Based on R. M. Belbin, Team Roles at Work (Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann, 2010).
Forming
Storming
Norming
Performing
Mourning
FIGURE 14-2 Stages of a Team’s Development
378 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
And in successful projects, the final stage is mourning , where team members regret the ending of the project and the breaking up of the team.
Team Rules
During the norming stage, teams develop ground rules. Such ground rules can forestall conflict. Common ground rules for teams in projects are shown in Table 14-2 . It is often useful to estab- lish ground rules first in order for a team to be functional. If a team is functional, individual participation enhances the group’s effectiveness. If the team is dysfunctional, such participation reduces the effectiveness of the group. Acts of commission include talking behind the backs of other team members or otherwise acting out one’s feelings. There are also acts of omission in such passive-aggressive behavior as forgetting to attend meetings or withholding information. Counteractive behavior improves the group’s effectiveness by negating dysfunctional behavior. Counteractive behavior can be enacted either by the team, the facilitator, the team manager, or even the offending individual.
TYPES OF TEAMS
At this point we pause to define the various types of teams used in improving quality. Continuous process improvement often requires small teams that are segmented by work areas. Projects with multiple departments in a company require cross-functional teams. Large projects require teams with large budgets and multiple members. Smaller projects, such as “formulating a preventive maintenance plan for oiling the metal lathes,” probably will require a much smaller team. The literature is full of different types of teams and approaches to teamwork. Table 14-3 contains a list of a few of the major types of teams found in the literature. In the following sections we list and define a number of team types.
TABLE 14-2 Ground Rules for Effective Teams
1. Test assumptions and inferences. 2. Share all relevant information. 3. Focus on interests, not positions. 4. Be specifi c—use examples. 5. Agree on what important words mean. 6. Explain the reasons behind one’s statements, questions, and actions. 7. Disagree openly with any member of the group. 8. Make statements, then invite questions and comments. 9. Jointly design ways to test disagreements and solutions. 10. Discuss undiscussable issues. 11. Keep the discussion focused. 12. Do not take cheap shots or otherwise distract the group. 13. All members are expected to participate in all phases of the process. 14. Exchange relevant information with nongroup members. 15. Make decisions by consensus. 16. Do self-critiques.
Source: R. Schwarz, “Ground Rules for Effective Groups,” Popular Government 54, 4 (1989): 25–30. Reprinted by permission of the Institute of Government, the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. Reprinted with permission of the School of Government, copyright 1989 by the Institute of Government. This copyrighted material may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the express written permission of the School of Government, CB# 3330 UNC Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, North Carolina 27599-3330; Telephone: 910-966-4119; Fax: 919-962- 2707; web address: www.sog.unc.edu .
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 379
Process Improvement Teams
Process improvement teams work to improve processes and customer service. These teams may work under the direction of management or may be self-directed. In either case, process improvement teams are involved in some or all of the following activities: identifying opportuni- ties for improvement, prioritizing opportunities, selecting projects, gathering data, analyzing data, making recommendations, implementing change, and conducting postimplementation reviews. Many process improvement teams are an outgrowth of quality-related training. These teams use the basic tools and the plan–do–check–act cycle to effect change relating to processes.
Cross-Functional Teams
Cross-functional teams enlist people from a variety of functional groups within the firm. In the real world, problems often cut across functional borders. As a result, problem-solving teams are needed that include people from a variety of functions. These cross-functional teams often work on higher-level strategic issues that involve multiple functions. Such teams often work on macro- level, quality-related problems such as communication or redesigning company-wide processes.
Tiger Teams
A tiger team is a high-powered team assigned to work on a specific problem for a limited amount of time. These teams are often used in reengineering efforts or in projects where a specific prob- lem needs to be solved in a very short period of time. The work is very intense and has only a limited duration.
Natural Work Groups
Natural work groups are teams organized around a common product, customer, or service. Many times these teams are cross-functional and include marketers, researchers, engineers, and producers. The objective of natural work groups includes tasks such as increasing responsiveness to customers and market demand. In order to implement natural work groups, a great deal of effort is typically expended relating to organizational redesign and systems redesign. Commonly cited outcomes of natural work groups are improved job design and improved work life for employees. The key, elemental impact of natural work groups is to improve service by focusing work units in an organization on the customer. A by-product is improved communication with customers. Often a natural work group is established for a specific customer.
Self-Directed Work Teams
A self-directed work team is chartered to work on projects identified by team members them- selves. There is little managerial oversight except to establish the teams and fund their activities.
Self-directed teams are identified as either little s or big S teams. Little s self-directed work teams are made up of employees empowered to identify opportunities for improvement, select
TABLE 14-3 Types of Teams
Team Type Scope
Process improvement team Local or single department Cross-functional team Multiple departments Tiger team Organization-wide Natural work group Customer- or region-centered Self-directed work team Narrow or broad Virtual team Narrow or broad
380 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
improvement projects, and complete implementation. Big S self-directed teams are involved in managing the different functions of the company without a traditional management structure. These types of teams contain totally self-directed employees who make decisions concerning benefits, finances, pay, processes, customers, and all the other aspects of running the business. Often big S self-directed work teams hold partial ownership of the companies they work for so that they participate in the benefits of their teamwork.
Virtual Teams
The term virtual teams is emerging as more companies become “virtual organizations,” loosely knit consortia that produce products and services. Virtual teams rarely or never physically meet, except in electronic meetings using group decision software. Among virtual organizations, proj- ects often cross organizational boundaries. Today, Internet and intranet-based applications called teamware are emerging that allow us to access the Web and build a team, share ideas, hold virtual meetings, brainstorm, keep schedules, and archive past results with people in far-flung locations around the world. Hectic schedules and the difficulty in finding convenient times to meet to solve problems will make teams of this type more important in the future (see A Closer Look at Quality 14-2 ).
9 Based on Labich, K., “Elite Teams Get the Job Done,” Fortune 133, 3 (1996): 90.
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 14-2 Lessons from Effective Teams Outside the Business World 9
Many teams outside business can serve as examples to business. In this Closer Look at Quality we con- sider several outstanding teams that display many of the attributes needed in quality improvement teams.
Navy SEALs Navy SEALs are an elite team of individuals who perform very dangerous missions for the Navy. Even though the first four weeks of Navy SEAL training are grueling, they pale in comparison with the fifth week, known as hell week. During hell week, recruits swim many, many miles in cold water in the Pacific Ocean, they row rubber boats for hours on end, they run obstacle courses over and over, they perform grueling calisthenics using 300-pound logs, and they sustain personal insults from trainers. During the entire hell week, recruits sleep for, perhaps, four hours.
About 30% of the recruits drop out during the five-day hell week experience. Commitment is needed because hell week is followed by months of rigorous underwater training, weapons training, explosives training, parachute training, and a six-month probationary period. The ultimate success rate for recruits is about 30%.
Teamwork is essential because SEALs never operate on their own, and team members identify totally with the group. Navy SEALs will never leave the battlefield if a fallen SEAL remains. The SEALs teach us about the necessity of training and cohesion among team members.
Massachusetts General Hospital Emergency Room Every day about 200 patients arrive in the emergency room at Massachusetts General Hospital—one of the finest hospitals in the world. Working as a team in an emergency-trauma unit, doctors, nurses, and aides have to deal with great amounts of stress, fatigue, and emotional baggage.
Seamless role playing is important as gurneys are rolled into the trauma center. The triage nurse determines the severity of an injury. Next, the team of doctors, nurses, and aids leaps into action, perform- ing the tasks they have performed many times before. Each person performs his or her task—assessing the patient, starting an IV, scoping the wounds, or hooking up heart monitors. At Mass General, “nobody bosses anybody around; if someone has a thought that’s useful, we are open to suggestions.” As with any effective team, the members understand and flawlessly execute their roles under stressful conditions.
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 381
IMPLEMENTING TEAMS
The teams in our examples have something in common. The performance of the team is essential to their individual success, and in some cases, even lives hang in the balance. If the NASCAR team performs ineffectively, the driver loses. If the Massachusetts General hospital team is inef- fective, people die. If the SEALs don’t function properly, lives are lost, and the mission fails. How do we engender this sense of urgency in quality improvement teams? How do we create a momentum or team ethic that will help us beat the odds and be successful? Accomplishing this often requires facilitation and team building. Facilitation is helping or aiding teams by maintain- ing a process orientation and focusing the group. Team building is accomplished by following a process that identifies roles for team members and then helps them to become competent in achieving those roles.
The role of the facilitator is very important in managing teams, particularly when team members have little experience with teamwork. The role of the facilitator is to make it easy for the group to know where it is going, know why it wants to get there, know how to get there, and know what it is going to do next.
A facilitator focuses the group on the process it must follow. Successful facilitation does not mean that the group always achieves its desired results. The facilitator is responsible for ensuring that the team follows a meaningful and effective process to achieve its objectives.
How is this accomplished? The facilitator should plan how the group will work through a task, help the group stay on track and be productive, draw out quiet members, discourage monopolizers, help develop clear and shared understanding, watch body language and verbal cues, and help the group to achieve closure. Again, facilitators must remain neutral on content. Facilitators cannot take sides or positions on important areas of disagreement. However, facilita- tors should help key members reach points of agreement.
Meeting Management
Effective meeting management is an important skill for a facilitator of quality improvement teams. Often quality improvement involves a series of meetings of team members who meet to brainstorm, perform root-cause analysis, and carry out other activities. Tools for successful meet- ing management include an agenda, predetermined objectives for the meeting, a process for run- ning the meeting, processes for voting, and development of an action plan. Using these tools requires outstanding communication skills as well as human relations skills. These are the steps required for planning a meeting:
1. Defining an agenda 2. Developing meeting objectives
The Childress NASCAR Team Richard Childress, a former racer himself, has taken part in several Winston Cup championships for the top prize in NASCAR racing since founding his Childress Racing maintenance teams. How did he do it?
Childress has a keen eye for young mechanical talent that fits into the team concept he has built. “I’d rather train them our way than try to break old habits,” says Childress.
Almost everyone starts at the bottom—cleaning up after the other mechanics and running for parts and coffee. On the road, they fill water bottles and stack tires. During this time, they are judged less for their actual performance than for their ability to work with the team. Says one team member, “Attitude is more important than expertise—you’ve got to be able to have people who won’t let you down.” The proof of this message is in the results. A team of 17 people, 7 working on the car itself and 10 behind the wall, can change 4 tires, pump 21 gallons of gas, clean the windshield, and give the driver a drink in less than 18 seconds. The Childress team excels because of its focus on detail and maintenance of team member roles.
382 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
3. Designing the agenda activity outline 4. Using process techniques
Structured processes, a set of rules for managing meetings, work well in conducting meet- ings. It is paradoxical that structured processes are inhibiting, time-consuming, and unnatural— which is why they work. Why do we use processes in meetings? The answers are clear. We wish meetings to stay focused, to involve deeper exploration, to separate creative from evaluative activities, to provide equal opportunity for contribution, to encourage reflection, to provide objective ground rules to reduce defensiveness, and to separate the person from the idea.
Table 14-4 identifies some meeting structured process techniques. Tools such as flipcharts, sticky dots, whiteboards, and sticky notes are used commonly in structured process activities. The focus of team meetings moves from clarifying to generating ideas, to evaluating ideas, and to action planning. Some of the techniques, such as silent voting and idea writing, help team members reach consensus rapidly.
Another useful meeting management tool pioneered by Hewlett Packard is the “ parking lot . ” The parking lot (see Figure 14-3 ) is a flipchart or whiteboard where topics that are off the subject are parked with the agreement that these topics will be candidates for the next meeting’s agenda. At the end of the meeting, the group agrees on the agenda for the following meeting, and the parking lot is erased.
Conflict Resolution in Teams
As people work closely together in teams, conflicts arise. Conflict resolution is a hugely impor- tant topic for team leaders and members. Conflicts are endemic to all kinds of team projects. Using team processes, assumptions are questioned, change is brainstormed, and cultures are chal- lenged. This type of creative activity results in possible conflict. It is claimed that team leaders and project managers spend more than 20% of their time resolving conflict. If this is true, then conflict resolution resounds as one of the very important underdiscussed topics in team building.
There are many sources of conflict. Some conflicts are internal, such as personality con- flicts or rivalries; some are external, such as disagreements over reward systems, scarce resources, lines of authority, or functional differentiation (see Figure 14-4 ). Teams bring together individu- als from a variety of cultures, backgrounds, and functional areas of expertise. Being on a team can create confusion for individuals and insecurity as members are taken out of their comfort
TABLE 14-4 Structured Process Activities
By Activity Type Approaches Tools
• Clarify techniques —Lasso • Generate techniques —Structured brainstorming —Round-robin contribution —Silent writing —Sticky notes recording —Brain writing • Evaluate techniques —Reduce list —Pros and cons —Force fi elds —Silent voting —Sticky dots —Idea writing • Action planning
• Individual • Subgroups (“buzz groups”) • Full group
• Verbal • Flipcharts • Whiteboard • Paper pads • Sticky notes • Sticky dots • Computer
Source: Based on Anson, R., “Facilitation Skills for Focussed Meetings,” Working Paper (Boise State University, 2012).
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 383
zones. It is interesting to note that these are also some of the reasons teams are successful. Some organizational causes of differences are more insidious: faulty attribution, faulty communication, or grudges and prejudice.
Four recognizable stages occur in the conflict resolution process 10 :
Frustration. People are at odds, and competition or aggression ensues. Conceptualization and orientation. Opponents identify the issues that need to be resolved. Interaction. Team members discuss and air the problems. Outcome. The problem is resolved.
10 Behfar, K., Peterson, R., Mannix, E., and Trochim, W., “The Critical Role of Conflict Resolution in Teams: A Close Look at the Links between Conflict Type, Conflict Management Strategies, and Team Outcomes,” Journal of Applied Psychology 93, 1 (2008): 170–188.
1 2 3 4 5
"Park ing Lo
t"
6 7 8 9 10
FIGURE 14-3 Parking Lot
Competing Collaborating
Compromising
Avoiding Accommodating
High
High
Low Low
Desire to satisfy our
own concerns
Desire to satisfy other
party’s concerns
FIGURE 14-4 Modes of Conflict Behavior Source: Based on T. L. Ruble and K. W. Thomas, “Support for a Two- Dimensional Model of Conflict Behavior,” Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes 16 (1976): 221–237, with permission of Elsevier Science.
384 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
One of the things a leader must be able to do is manage conflict in the organization. To foster a well-run workplace, leaders must be able to resolve conflict effectively in organizations. Leaders resolve conflict in a variety of ways:
Passive conflict resolution. Some managers and leaders ignore conflict. This is probably the most common approach to working out conflict. There may be positive reasons for this approach. The leader may prefer that subordinates work things out themselves. Or the con- flict may be minor and will take care of itself over time. Leaders may feel that some issues are small enough not to merit micromanagement.
Win–win. Leaders might seek solutions to problems that satisfy both sides of a conflict by providing win-win scenarios. One form of this is called balancing demands for the partici- pants. This happens when the manager determines what each person in the conflict wants as an outcome and looks for solutions that can satisfy the needs of both parties.
Structured problem solving. Conflicts can be resolved in a fact-based manner by gathering data regarding the problem and having the data analyzed by a disinterested observer to add weight to the claims of one of the conflicting parties.
Confronting conflict. At times it is best to confront the conflict and use active listening techniques to help subordinates resolve conflicts. This provides a means for coming to a solution of the conflict.
Choosing a winner. In some cases, where the differences between the parties in the con- flict are great, the leader may choose a winner of the conflict and develop a plan of action for conflict resolution between the parties.
Selecting a better alternative. Sometimes there is an alternative neither of the parties to the conflict has considered. The leader then asks the conflicting parties to pursue an alternative plan of action.
Preventing conflict. Skilled leaders use different techniques to create an environment that is relatively free of conflict. These approaches are more strategic in nature and involve organizational design fundamentals. As shown in Table 14-5 , these organizational design
TABLE 14-5 Constructive Conflict Resolution Components
1. Goal structure —Goals should be well defi ned and operational and should refl ect each unit’s contribution to the total organization. Managers, in turn, should convey to their subordinates as precisely as possible the feeling that their own unit is dependent on the work of other units.
2. Reward systems —Each unit’s contribution to the effectiveness of the total organization should be assessed carefully and rewarded accordingly. Where high levels of interdependence exist, reward systems should be designed specifi cally to refl ect interdependence. Such a reward system will encourage cooperation among organization units.
3. Contact and communication —Frequent contact and communication between organization units needs to be encouraged. Individuals should be rotated through related organization units in order to have them gain experience, understanding, and empathy for the work done and the problems encountered in other units.
4. Coordination —Liaison roles should be established where potential communication and coordination problems exist (e.g., between R&D and manufacturing at the point where a new product moves from advanced development into the pilot stage of production). The liaison role can be used to facilitate necessary interaction, thus reducing the time and informa- tion content lost when using formal channels. In addition, the liaison becomes better acquainted with the work of the different units and can provide continuous updating to each of the other units.
5. Competitive systems —Competition, where it does exist, should be examined carefully. Although competition can facilitate productivity, it can also produce confl ict whenever organization units are interdependent. In such situations, competition need not be eliminated, but its benefi ts should be evaluated against its potential for causing confl ict. Clearly, organization units should not be forced into win-lose situations.
Source: Based on Ronald J. Ebert, Charles N. Greene, and Everett E. Adam Jr., Management for Effective Performance, 1st edition, © 1985, p. 454. (Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education, 1985), p. 454. ISBN: 0135485045.
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 385
fundamentals are useful in reducing conflict in organizations. By carefully defining goals, rewards, communication systems, coordination, and the nature of competition in a firm, conflict can be reduced or eliminated. Conflicts often are the result of the reward systems in the firm. A systems approach will focus attention on organizational design rather than individual interactions.
Generally speaking, these conflict-resolution approaches involve three alternatives: avoid- ance , defusion , or confrontation. Avoidance involves letting things work themselves out without involving a leader. Defusion means smoothing ruffled feelings while getting the team project back on track. Confrontation involves injecting the leader into the conflict to find a solution.
Saving Quality Teams from Failure: Diagnosing Problems and Intervening Before It Is Too Late
In the prior section we talked about handling conflict. Sometimes quality improvement teams embark on improvement projects and, for whatever reason, things begin to fall apart, and the team risks failure. It is usually easy to see when a quality improvement team project is going awry. There are cost overruns. Deadlines and schedules are not met. Frustration abounds. People are trying to deflect responsibility or bailing out. At such times it is critical to be able to diagnose and intervene to save the project.
The diagnosis-intervention cycle must be undertaken by the facilitator, team leader, or the team members themselves. The cycle is followed to diagnose team failure and to intervene before the team fails. This requires observing the behavior of team members—you may see team mem- bers exhibiting nonverbal body language during team meetings. As a facilitator, you may have team members contacting you outside of team meetings to let you know what is “really happen- ing.” Drawing inferences about the meaning of the behavior means that, as a facilitator or team leader, you need to determine and understand the root causes of the behavior you are observing. Is fear present? Are people feeling external pressure? Do certain team members behave in a way that is dysfunctional?
Next, you need to decide whether to intervene to improve the behavior. This is an impor- tant decision that requires insight. Is it better to intervene, or will the problems solve themselves over time? Describing your observations to the team is a means of “putting the issues on the table” so that they can be discussed. When you test inferences about observations, you open up a group discussion to let others understand why they are exhibiting difficult behavior. Helping the group decide whether and how to change the problematic behavior is the remedial step in which the leader or facilitator helps to resolve the problem. 11
Recognition and action are keys to saving teams that are troubled. Eliyahu Goldratt, 12 in his book Critical Chain , a thought-provoking text on project management, demonstrates that people usually blame others when projects fail, or they blame uncertainty. The problem is that uncertainty is common in all projects. Skilled facilitators and team leaders recognize this fact and use effective communication to keep projects on track.
MANAGING AND CONTROLLING PROJECTS
Up to this point we have discussed team building from an organizational behavior perspective. Our discussion has focused on topics such as leadership, team roles, forming teams, facilitating teams, resolving conflict, and intervening to save teams. At this point, we shift our discussion to the activities associated with controlling projects.
Too often companies attempt to implement teams and projects in a poorly planned manner. The ultimate result is a number of operating teams with no clear methodology for coordinating
11 Schwarz, R., The Skilled Facilitator (San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1994). 12 Goldratt, E., Critical Chain (Great Barrington, MA: North River Press, 1997).
386 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
the different activities of the teams. In the following pages we discuss how to coordinate and manage projects. From this perspective, we adopt an organizational theory-based approach to project management. The question is, How can we manage quality improvement projects in a way that they will be coherent, thoughtful, and in alignment with organizational objectives?
We introduce the tools used in controlling projects in order of sequence. Because some of these tools were introduced in Chapter 10 , we now consider them in the context of their implementation.
Qualifying Projects
As we discussed in more detail in Chapter 13 , an important function of management is to select and qualify projects. To qualify a project means to determine the worthiness of a project on dif- ferent dimensions. Commonly used methods for qualifying projects are cost-benefits analysis (CBA) using payback period calculation. Both of these involve identifying direct and indirect project costs and expected returns for projects. Often, these analyses are used for comparing and selecting projects. For these calculations, use the following formulas:
Ct = !(Cd + Ci) (14.1)
where:
C t " total project costs C d " direct project costs C i " indirect project costs
PP = Ct>Ba (14.2) where:
PP " payback period C t " total project costs B a " annualized benefits
When evaluating projects, you need to understand the differences between soft costs and hard costs . Soft costs are costs not easily recovered in project savings. This is usually because the benefits of the project add to organizational slack without resulting in actual dollar savings. An example of soft cost savings is the reduction of task time in a noncritical process task. This means that the process will have more slack. However, it does not mean that cycle time is reduced for production of a particular product—thereby resulting in no actual increase in productive capacity. Hard costs are just that—the reduction of rent, equipment costs, or labor direct costs— hard savings. It is best to justify savings based on hard costs that accrue to the bottom line.
EXAMPLE 14-1 Cost-Benefit Analysis in Action
A Six Sigma master black belt has asked you to help to analyze a possible project. This project involves implementing a computer-based sales system to improve supply chain performance. Some of the direct and indirect costs are as follows:
Direct Costs • 20 networkable PCs—$1,500/each • A server—$2,000 • Peripherals—$2,000 • Network installation—$5,000 • Sales system software—$10,000
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 387
Indirect Costs • Training—$10,000 • Lost time—30 days × $120/day • Sales-related losses during implementation—$25,000
Annualized Benefits • Increased sales capacity—$200,000 • Improved customer retention—$500,000 • Improved follow-up sales opportunities—$100,000
Total costs " $49,000 # $38,600 " $87,600 Benefits " $800,000 per year Payback period = $87,600/$800,000 " .11 years
Project Charters
Project charters are simple tools to help teams identify objectives, participants, and expected benefits from projects. The charter includes spaces for signatures to identify reporting relation- ships for planning purposes. In some firms, these signatures are for approvals and in other firms they are for information only.
Figure 14-5 shows a charter for an actual project. Notice that the prior identification of benefits helps team members and management identify measures for post implementation review to see whether the project reaped the expected benefits.
Project Charter for the Document Checklist Team
Team members: Jody, Hollie, Elaine
Date: June 9, 2012
Projected benefits: Help the Roles and Responsibilities team; clarify status of jobs; enable backup people to take over when needed; reduce time to complete a project; reduce stress; reduce errors, omissions, and rework.
Objective(s): Create document checklists to accompany texts, covers, and fulfillment.
Approvals:
Completion Date: 9/14/12
Responsible Manager Department Head Leadership Council
FIGURE 14-5 An Actual Project Charter
388 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
FORCE-FIELD ANALYSIS
A useful tool for planning projects is force-field analysis . This tool is designed to identify and quantify all of the forces for or against organizational change. This allows you to identify possi- ble project assassins and to fortify support for a project. To perform force-field analysis, perform the following steps:
1. List all forces for change in the first column and all forces against change in the third col- umn.
2. Assign a score for each force, where 1 " weak and 5 " very strong. 3. Sum the forces for and against the change and draw a diagram showing the forces.
EXAMPLE 14-2 Force Fields in Action
A project was performed to determine the feasibility of implementing a new customer relation- ship management system (CRMS). A group of experts within the firm identified major forces for and against implementing the new CRMS. These forces and scores are shown in Figure 14-6 .
Solution: The scores show that there are significant forces that militate against change. Work is needed to develop more forces in favor of change.
Forces for Change Forces against Change
Improve customer service
Customers’ information is lacking
Raise sales
Plan: Upgrade
to a new
CRMS
Fits with mission
Disruption to processes
Cost of software
Labor costs
Fear of new technology
Equipment needs upgrading
Total: 11 Total: 14
1
2
3
5
5
1
2
3
3
FIGURE 14-6 Force-Field Analysis
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 389
Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)
After chartering the project, the next step is to begin planning the project. The work breakdown structure (WBS) introduced in Chapter 10 is an excellent tool for determining the tasks to com- plete a project. Figure 14-7 shows an outline of a WBS for a project. Team members identify the major tasks required to perform the project. The tasks for an actual project—the Document Checklist Project—are listed in Table 14-6 with their appropriate start times, number of work- days, and predecessor tasks. After the tasks were identified, the question was asked, “What sub- tasks will be needed to complete the identified major tasks?” Next, the same questions were asked for the subtasks until we had a complete tree of major tasks, subtasks, and minor tasks.
Note that with large projects it is often best to develop a separate WBS for each of the major tasks because separate individuals or groups may be involved in different tasks. Therefore, the marketing department can develop a WBS for the marketing portion of the project, and oper- ations can develop a WBS for the operations portion. In the end, these WBSs must be combined into an overall WBS for the project.
Identifying Precedence Relationships
The WBS tasks are placed on individual note cards, and precedence relationships are identified for all the tasks. The note cards are placed in order on a large sheet of paper, and arrows are drawn between the tasks.
Identifying Outcome Measures
During the planning stage of the project, the team should refer to the project charter and identify measures against which team performance can be judged. This oft-overlooked step in planning is useful because some needed measures may not exist in current cost accounting systems. It is
TABLE 14-6 Tasks for the Document Checklist Project
Tasks Workdays Start Date End Date Preceding Tasks
1. Use flowcharts to list steps 5 Sat 6/9/12 Fri 6/15/12 2. Preliminary design of form 5 Sat 6/16/12 Fri 6/22/12 1 3. Check against Roles team and Andrea 10 Sat 6/16/12 Fri 6/29/12 4. Develop procedures for using form 10 Sat 6/16/12 Fri 6/29/12 5. Preliminary draft of form completed 5 Sat 6/30/12 Fri 7/6/12 4,2,3 6. Test-run form and procedures 40 Sat 7/7/12 Fri 8/31/12 5 7. Revise and finalize form and procedures 10 Sat 9/1/12 Fri 9/14/12 6
Overall goal
Major task
Major task
Major task
Subtask Subtask Subtask Subtask Subtask Subtask Subtask Subtask Subtask
Other minor tasks
FIGURE 14-7 Work Breakdown Structure
390 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
important to have preliminary and post hoc data so that baselining or intervention analysis can be performed effectively. This involves gathering preliminary data and postimplementation data. Then statistical tests are used to test for improvement. 13
Identifying Task Times
Now we identify completion times for all the tasks. To do this, identify three time estimates for each task:
a = the optimistic completion time m = the most likely completion time b = the pessimistic completion time t = task time T = project completion time
Next, a weighted average of the tasks (te) is calculated using the following formula:
Expected time = (a + 4m + b)>6 (14.3) The task variance is computed as
st 2 = 3(b - a)>642 (14.4)
The project variance is computed as
sT 2 = a
n
t = l st
2 (14.5)
Finally, the project standard deviation is
sT = 2sT2 (14.6)
13 For a good example of project-based intervention analysis, see Foster, S. T., Jr., and Franz, C. R., “Assessing Process Reengineering Impacts through Baselining,” Benchmarking for Quality Management and Technology 2, 3 (1995): 4–19.
Task a m b Expected Times Variances Predecessors
A 1 3 5 3 ((1 + (4)3 + 5)/6) = 3 .444 ((5 - 1)/6)2 = .444 — B 5 6 7 6 .111 — C 6 9 12 9 1.000 — D 3 4 5 4 .111 A E 3 4 23 7 11.111 A F 8 10 12 10 .444 A G 12 17 22 17 2.778 A H 5 9 13 9 1.778 B, D I 13 15 17 15 .444 B, D J 10 11 12 11 .111 B, D K 1 8 15 8 5.444 C, E L 2 3 16 5 5.444 F, H, K M 8 10 12 10 .444 F, H, K N 4 7 11 7.17 1.361 G, I, L O 3 10 11 9 1.778 J P 3 4 5 4 .111 M, N, O
EXAMPLE 14-3 Calculating Task Times
The following tasks were identified for a major project using a WBS. Team members also identi- fied optimistic, most likely, and pessimistic task completion times for each task. They have asked you to compute task times and task variances for this project (solution in italics).
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 391
Activity Network Diagrams
The following steps are used to develop an activity network diagram (PERT chart):
1. Using the inputs from a tree diagram listing tasks to be performed in the project, list all the tasks.
2. Determine task times. 3. Determine the precedence relationships between the tasks; that is, indicate which tasks
depend on the completion of other tasks in the process. 4. Draw the network diagram. 5. Compute early start and early finish times by working from left to right in the network.
These are the earliest times that individual tasks can be started and finished. 6. Compute late start and late finish times by moving from right to left in the network. These
times are the latest times that tasks can possibly be started or finished. 7. Compute slack times and determine the critical path. The critical path links activities with
zero slack.
Slack time = late start - early start (14.7)
EXAMPLE 14-4 Activity Network Diagram
A company developing a new advertising brochure identified the steps in the project. These were placed in the tree diagram shown in Figure 14-8 . Table 14-7 lists all the tasks with their brain- stormed times and predecessors. Figure 14-9 shows the network with tasks. This also shows times and precedence relationships using activity-on-node (AON).
Contract with printer
C
Send out RFPs
G
Select printer
F
Brochure printed
A
Assemble text and artwork
B
Write text in Word format
D Prepare artwork
for printing
E
Gather information from
departments
H
Marketing
J
Finance
K
Operations
L
Receive work from
graphic artist
I
Review text
M Specify artwork needed
N Decide
on format
O
FIGURE 14-8 Tree Diagram of Tasks
392 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
In the next step we compute the early start and early finish times. This shows that the proj- ect is expected to be completed in 14 weeks (see Figure 14-10 ). Next, we compute the late start and late finish times by working from right to left. Notice that the late finish time for task A is 14 and the late start is 10 (see Figure 14-11 ). Task B then has a late finish of week 10 and an early start of week 9.
J 1
G 3
F 2
C 2
K 1
L 1
H 1
D 2
M 1
N 1
O 1
I 4
E 4
B 1
A 4 A 4
FIGURE 14-9 AON Network
TABLE 14-7 Tasks
Task Task IDs Predecessors Expected Time (Weeks)
Brochure printed A B, C 4 Assemble text and artwork B E, D 1 Contract with printer C F 2 Write text in Word format D H 2 Prepare artwork for printing E I 4 Select printer F G 2 Send out RFPs G — 3 Gather information from departments H J, K, L 1 Receive work from graphic artist I M, N, O 4 Marketing J — 1 Finance K — 1 Operations L — 1 Review text M — 1 Specify artwork needed N — 1 Decide on format O — 1
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 393
The slack times for this project are computed by taking the late start times minus the late finish time. From this diagram it appears that initially there is no slack for activities M, N, O, I, E, B, and A and a lot of slack for all other activities. The critical path is the longest path in time from beginning to end, that is, the path of activities with no slack.
J 1
3 3 5 5 7
10 14
109
4221
1
1
1
1
1 1 5
5 9
1
G 3
F 2
C 2
K 1
L 1
H 1
D 2
M 1
N 1
O 1
I 4
E 4
B 1
A 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FIGURE 14-10 AON with Early Times
J 1
0 3
3 6
3 5
6 8
5 7
8 10
10 14
10 14
109
10 9
42
97
21
76
1
1
1
1 1 5
1 5
5 9
5 9
1
0
65
0
65
65
0
10 0
10 0
10
G 3
F 2
C 2
K 1
L 1
H 1
D 2
M 1
N 1
O 1
I 4
E 4
B 1
A 410
FIGURE 14-11 AON with Late Times
394 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
Arrow Gantt Charts
Most college texts covering project management treat PERT (program evaluation and review technique) charts separately from Gantt charts. However, with many new software packages, these differences are becoming inconsequential. In this chapter we demonstrate both methods. Software packages vary, so it is best that you understand both methods.
Continuing our Document Checklist Project example from Table 14-6 , the already- identified tasks have been entered in a planning software package called Microsoft Project. This is a commonly used and inexpensive project control software package that requires little exper- tise to run.
Using the data given in Table 14-6 , the PERT chart for the document checklist project is as shown in Figure 14-12 . The start time was June 9, and the expected completion date was September 14.
Managing Multiple Projects
At times, several projects occur simultaneously in a firm. Coordination can be difficult. Imple- mentations have to be coordinated. Also, individuals within the company should not be involved in too many teams in order for them to remain effective. The multiple project control form 14 in Figure 14-13 is a management tool to aid company-wide coordination of multiple projects. By using this form, management can keep track of the multiple projects and which employees are involved in those projects. Notice that the form identifies participants with varying levels of responsibility as well as the project managers. Also, management’s duty is to ensure that employ- ees have ample time to work on projects so their successful completion is facilitated.
Develop procedures for using form 4 10 days Sat 6/16/12 Fri 6/29/12
Preliminary draft of form completed 5 5 days Sat 6/30/12 Fri 7/6/12
Use flowcharts to list steps 1 5 days Sat 6/9/12 Fri 6/15/12
Check against Roles team and Sat Andrea 3 10 days Sat 6/16/12 Fri 6/29/12
Preliminary design of form 2 5 days Sat 6/16/12 Fri 6/22/12
Test-run form and procedures 6 40 days Sat 7/7/12 Fri 8/31/12
Revise and finalize form and procedures 7 10 days Sat 9/1/12 Fri 9/14/12
FIGURE 14-12 Project PERT Chart Showing Tasks Needed to Perform the Document Checklist Project
14 Van Der Merwe, A. P., “Multi-project Management Organizational Structure and Control,” International Journal of Project Management 15, 4 (1997): 223–233.
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 395
Summary In this chapter we explored the use of teams and collaboration as a means of improvement. We focused on the behavioral aspects of building and leading effective teams. As companies focus on knowledge work and flatten their hierarchies, we have seen a movement toward more teamwork.
Team leaders are responsible for providing leadership and training so that team members have the skills to perform required tasks. Leaders also need to be sensitive to the amount of social support team members need to be effective. Part of this is to identify and assign team roles and to establish team norms and rules.
Once the teams are established, they evolve through the stages of forming, storming, norm- ing, performing, and, with successful projects, mourning. Team members should be aware of these stages so that they can successfully complete each stage.
The type of team should be considered as teams are formed. Teams might be process improvement teams, cross-functional teams, tiger teams, natural work groups, self-directed teams, or virtual teams. The type of team chosen depends on the team objective.
Team leaders may use facilitators and meeting management techniques to help the team achieve success. When teams struggle, conflict resolution might be needed to overcome prob- lems. Before problems threaten the success of a team, the process-intervention cycle provides a basis for recognizing and remediating problems in time.
Finally, we presented some project planning fundamentals that can be combined with the new seven tools discussed in Chapter 10 . These planning tools, such as charters, work breakdown struc- tures, models for determining task times, and PERT/CPM (critical path method), are useful for con- trolling team projects for quality improvement. Note that many projects are controlled using software such as Primavera or MS Project. Figure 14-14 shows an example of a simple project in MS Project.
Project 1 T C S T
Project 2 T S C
Project 3 T S C
.
.
.
C hr
is R
eb a
G ar
th
B ar
ne y
A un
t B A
nd y
H aw
ke ye
H ot
L ip
s K
lin ge
r
B oo
k se
rv ic
es
A cc
ou nt
in g
Sa le
s
D ir
ec to
r
T: Team member
S: Sponsor
C: Champion
: Project manager
FIGURE 14-13 Multiple-Project Control Form
396 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
Teams can either be a drag on an organization’s resources or they can provide the basis for improved competitiveness. There is some ambiguity in the quality literature as to whether man- agers should aggressively manage these teams. In truth, a balance needs to be established between too tight or too loose control. Achieving that balance requires insight and skill. The concepts and tools given here will help you to achieve this balance. Remember that many firms cannot absorb too much change. Therefore, the rate of change needs to be managed and planned.
Key Terms Cost-benefits analysis
(CBA) Cross-functional teams Empowerment Facilitation Facilitator Force-field analysis Forming
Hard costs Knowledge work Meeting management Mourning Natural work groups Norming Organizational learning Parking lot
Payback period Performing Process improvement teams Project charters Readiness Self-directed work team Situational leadership
model
Soft costs Storming Team Team building Teamware Tiger team Virtual teams
Discussion Questions 1. Why has increased complexity in the workplace resulted in an increased emphasis on employee par-
ticipation and teamwork? 2. What is the difference between routine work and knowledge work? Provide examples of each type of work. 3. What is meant by employee empowerment? What is the relationship between employee empowerment
and teamwork? 4. In what ways can employee empowerment facilitate and contribute to organizational learning? 5. What are the major disadvantages of multiple layers of management in a business organization? Is
teamwork typically implemented in organizations that have multiple layers of management or organi- zations that have fairly flat hierarchies? Explain your answer.
FIGURE 14-14 MS Project Gantt Chart
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 397
Problems 1. Perform a cost-benefit analysis with payback period for a project where indirect costs are $50,000,
direct costs are $25,000, and annualized benefits are $60,000. 2. Perform a cost-benefit analysis using the following data:
Direct Costs • 10 laptops—$2,000/each • A server—$2,000 • Network installation—$15,000 • Software—$20,000
Indirect Costs • Training—$15,000
Annualized Benefits • Increased capacity—$100,000
3. Following are activities, precedence relationships, and task times for a number of tasks.
6. Describe the principal attributes of Hersey and Blanchard’s situational leadership model. Is this model of leadership appropriate for a quality-minded company?
7. What does readiness refer to in a leadership context? What are the two variables that an employee’s level of readiness is a function of?
8. In general, do employees enjoy working in teams? Why or why not? 9. Briefly describe the five stages of the life cycle of a team. Is it important for a team to pass through
each of these stages? Why or why not? 10. What is the purpose of a process improvement team? Provide an example of a process improvement
team for a business organization. 11. What is meant by a self-directed work team? In your judgment, are self-directed work teams a good
idea? Explain your answer. 12. Describe the role of the facilitator of a team. Is the role of the facilitator important, or is it primarily ceremonial? 13. What is meant by team building ? Is team building a concept from which all teams can benefit? 14. In a meeting management context, to what does parking lot refer? 15. What are the primary sources of conflict in work teams? What are some of the methods for resolving
team conflict? 16. Describe what is meant by virtual teams . Provide an example of a virtual team in a business organization. 17. How does a project charter help a team identify issues relevant to team success? 18. Describe the critical path method for organizing work projects. When is the use of this method appropriate? 19. Describe the difference between critical tasks and a critical path. 20. Describe an experience you have had working in a team (in a work setting or in a college class).
Describe how your experience either confirms or refutes one of the principles of teamwork described in this chapter.
Task Task Time (days) Preceding Task
A 5 None B 2 A C 4 A D 5 B E 6 C F 7 D G 4 E H 5 D I 1 C J 4 I, F K 3 G, J L 7 H, K M 4 L
398 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
a. Construct a precedence diagram. b. Compute early and late times. c. Compute the slack for each task. d. Which tasks could the project manager delegate? e. Find the critical path. f. Which tasks would you shorten first to shorten the project completion time? g. What is the expected project completion time? h. What is the probability of completing the project in the time identified in g?
4. Following are activities, precedence relationships, and task times for a number of tasks.
Task Task Time (days) Preceding Task
A 70 None B 25 A, C C 89 None D 50 A E 46 B, D F 72 C G 46 E H 25 G I 30 F J 14 I K 36 H, J L 77 J
a. Construct a precedence diagram. b. Compute early and late times. c. Compute the slack for each task. d. Which tasks could the project manager delegate? e. Find the critical path. f. Which tasks would you shorten first to shorten the project completion time? g. What is the expected project completion time?
5. For the following data:
Time Estimates (days)
Task Predecessor t a t m t b
A — 3 5 13 B A 2 5 8 C A 1 4 6 D A 4 6 10 E B 2 8 11 F B 5 9 16 G C 4 12 20 H C 6 9 13 I D 3 7 14 J D 8 14 22 K F, G 9 12 20 L H, I 6 11 15 M E 4 7 12 N J 3 8 16 O M, K, L, N 5 8 10
a. Draw an AON diagram. b. Compute the expected completion time for each task.
Chapter 14 • Managing Quality Improvement Teams and Projects 399
Time Estimates (days)
Task Predecessor t a t m t b
A — 1 2 9 B — 2 5 8 C — 1 3 5 D A 4 10 25 E A 3 7 12 F B 10 15 25 G C 5 9 14 H D, E 2 3 7 I D, E, F 1 4 6 J D, E, F, G 2 5 10 K H, I, J 3 3 3
c. Compute slack for all tasks. d. Identify the critical path and the expected completion time. e. Your project manager wants you to compute a completion time (in days) that gives you a 95%
chance of success. He will use this time estimate in negotiating a completion date for the project. 6. For the following data:
a. Draw a PERT diagram. b. Compute expected completion times for all tasks. c. Find the critical path. d. What is the completion time that gives you a 75% chance of success?
7. (Team project) Develop a project plan for buying a house. Use the following steps: a. Use a work breakdown structure (tree diagram— Chapter 10 ) to identify tasks for completing the
project. Be complete (at least 50 tasks), and use sticky notes. b. Laying out your sticky notes, identify the precedence relationships for each task. c. Brainstorm optimistic time, most likely time, and pessimistic time for each task. d. Compute expected completion time for each task. e. Draw your network diagram, compute early and late times, and find the critical path. f. Compute the 90% completion time for your project.
8. (Team project) Complete the steps in Problem 7 for the following project: completing a university degree program (choose any major).
9. (Team project) Develop a Gantt chart for welcoming a new baby into the world (conception has already occurred). Remember you only have nine months to complete the project.
10. Complete a cost-benefit analysis for a college degree at your university. Be sure to include all direct and indirect costs. Take into account the time value of money for future income.
11. Complete a cost-benefit analysis for a marriage. Be sure to include both the benefits and costs in your model. Model the marriage given two scenarios—a strong marriage and a poor marriage. (Hint: You should find that the benefits for a strong marriage approach infinity and the benefits of a poor marriage approach zero.)
12. Meet with a favorite professor to perform a force-field analysis relating to adding a new course to your major in your university. Would you recommend this project?
CASE
Case 14-1 Whole Foods Market: Using Teamwork as a Recipe for Success Whole Foods Market: www.wholefoodsmarket.com
Whole Foods Market is the nation’s number-one chain of natural foods supermarkets, operating more than 300 stores under the names of Whole Foods Market, Bread &
Circus, Bread of Life, Fresh Fields, Merchant of Vino, and Wellspring Grocery. The stores are much different from the small “health food” stores that sprang up in the
400 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
United States in the past. They are complete supermar- kets with an emphasis on organically grown produce, fresh-baked bread, wholesome deli foods, and other health food products. Conspicuously absent at Whole Foods stores are soft drinks in plastic containers, coupon dispensers for laundry detergent, salted potato chips, sug- ared cereals, and other high-sugar or high-fat products.
Now you know what the customer sees—a com- pany that is passionate about health food and the people who buy health food products. But there is more to the Whole Foods story, which is the part that the customer doesn’t see. In the midst of the aging supermarket indus- try, Whole Foods has created a new approach to manag- ing its employees—an approach based on teamwork and employee empowerment. Here is how it works.
Each of Whole Foods’ stores is an autonomous profit center composed of an average of 10 self-man- aged teams. A separate team operates each of the departments of the store, such as produce, canned goods, the bakery, and so on. Each team has a team leader and specific team goals. The teams function as autonomous units and meet monthly to share informa- tion, exchange stories, solve problems, and talk about how to improve performance. The team concept is pres- ent throughout the organization. The team leaders in each store are a team, store leaders in each geographic region are a team, and the leaders of each of the com- pany’s seven regions are a team.
Why teams? There are two primary benefits that Whole Foods believes result from its emphasis on team- work. First is to promote cooperation among the firm’s employees. The teamwork approach facilitates a strong sense of community, which engenders pride and disci- pline in the work ethic of the employees. An example of this is Whole Foods’ hiring practices. The teams, rather than the store managers, have the power to approve new hires for full-time jobs. The store leaders do the initial screening, but it takes a two-thirds vote of the team, after what is usually a 30-day trial period, for the candidate to
become a full-time employee. This type of exclusivity helps a team bond, which facilitates a cooperative atmo- sphere. Another example of how teamwork promotes cooperation among employees is evident in Whole Foods’ team meetings. Each team holds a team meeting at least once a month. There is no rank at the team meet- ings. Everyone is afforded an equal opportunity to con- tribute to the discussion.
The second benefit that Whole Foods realizes from its emphasis on teamwork is an increased com- petitive spirit among its employees. The individual teams, stores, and regions of the company compete against each other in terms of quality, service, and prof- itability. The results of the competitions determine employee bonuses, recognition, and promotions. To facilitate competition, the company is extraordinarily open in terms of team performance measures. For example, at a Bread & Circus store in Wellesley, Mas- sachusetts, a sheet posted next to the time clock lists the previous day’s sales broken down by team. A separate sheet lists the sales numbers for the same day the previ- ous year. This information is used by the teams to determine “what it will take” to be the top team for the store during a particular week. This type of competition also exists at the store level. Near the same time clock, once a week a fax is posted that lists the sales of every store in the Northeast region broken down by team with comparisons to the same week the previous year. There is one note of caution that Whole Foods has learned through these experiences. Sometimes competition between teams can become too intensive. As a result, the company has had to “tone down” the intensity of the competition between teams and stores on occasion.
The overall results of Whole Foods’ manage- ment practices have been encouraging. The grocery store industry is intensely competitive and Whole Foods’ decision to use teamwork as a “recipe for suc- cess” represents a novel and innovative approach to management.
Discussion Questions
1. Do you believe that Whole Foods’ emphasis on teamwork is appropriate for the grocery store industry? Why or why not?
2. What is your opinion of Whole Foods’ practice of sharing team performance data with all company
employees? Do you believe that this practice risks creating “too competitive” a spirit among the firm’s teams and employees? Explain your answer.
3. Would you enjoy working on a team at Whole Foods? Why or why not?
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 401
The systems approach to quality begins with the basic principle of total quality control that customer satisfaction cannot be achieved by
concentrating upon any one area of the plant or company alone—design engineering, reliability analysis, inspection, quality equipment, reject
troubleshooting, operator education, or maintainability studies— important as each phase is in its own right. Its achievement depends, instead, both upon how well and how thoroughly these quality actions in the several areas of the business work individually and upon how
well and how thoroughly they work together.
—Armand Feigenbaum 1
C H A P T E R 1 5
Implementing and Validating the Quality
System
401
A firm that skillfully implements the tools, philosophies, and techniques in this book will improve its quality management system. Such improvement should result in better per-formance. When you reach best-in-class or best-in-the-world status, how do you get beyond that point? If you have reached the limit of your knowledge and yet feel that more improvement can be made, how do you determine the next step? Answering these questions is the goal of this chapter—that is, to discuss how to discover the next step that will form the foun- dation for continually improving once you have reached quality maturity.
Remember that world-class competitors did not achieve that status by merely adopting tools or techniques. They got there because they were very good at performing the fundamentals. They understand their customers, products, employees, competitors, markets, and technologies. World-class performers have a good understanding of where they are and where they want to be. They are excellent at being creative and devising processes for achieving goals.
This type of progression is like life. Successful people are good at progressing from one plateau to another in a relatively short period of time. Rarely do people become successful over- night; it is more a process of continual growth and improvement. The same holds true for firms. They have to grasp, feel, make mistakes, and stumble on the way to the next level.
1 Feigenbaum, A., Total Quality Control (New York: McGraw-Hill, 2008).
402 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
In this final chapter, we present processes for assessing where you are and identifying how your firm can move to the next level. These include defining, understanding, and assessing the quality system in your organization.
BUILDING BLOCKS FOR THE SYSTEM OF QUALITY IMPROVEMENT
A quality system depends on the interactions of many different variables, as evidenced in the quality system model shown in Figure 15-1 . As we have demonstrated throughout this book, quality improvement is not a stand-alone discipline. Quality improvement requires the interac- tions on a contingency basis of many different disciplines to create products, services, processes, and systems that effectively serve customers. Another factor driving the integrative approach is the increasing complexity of work. Complexity requires people from different disciplines to settle on standardized methods for serving customers that result in work simplification. In the following section we discuss the parts that go together to create a quality system.
People
The model in Figure 15-1 is built on a base of people. People represent the core of a firm’s capa- bilities because they provide the intellect, empathy, and ability that is required to provide out- standing customer service. Therefore, systems must be in place to develop, train, care for, and motivate people to serve the customer properly. The management of a small metal fabrication plant was concerned that a particular production line was exhibiting particularly bad quality.
Processes
Information and Finance
Closeness to Customers
Culture
Organizational Learning and Knowledge
People
Customer Service
Enterprise Capabilities Quality
Planning and
Management
Quality Control
Quality Assurance
Integrative Approach
FIGURE 15-1 Quality System Model
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 403
The managers discussed all they had tried to do to improve quality on this line. They stated that they had even fired all the employees who previously worked on the line and replaced them with new employees. However, they were disconcerted that the quality problems persisted. The man- agers were then told that they were primarily responsible for the poor quality of the production. The employees had changed; however, the management had remained constant. To their credit, they peacefully responded, “We suspected we were the problem.” At this point, they began to change the culture they had created to include improved input from employees.
For a quality system to function effectively, employees must understand they are integral to that system. They must be made to feel important and necessary for the continued survival and growth of the company. This does not mean that management is unnecessary. Remember that employee empowerment does not mean abdicating authority. Rather, it means to share in deci- sion making in areas that affect employees.
Another people-related issue involves corporate restructuring and reengineering. Often, these efforts result in mass layoffs and much turmoil among employees. Although companies must sometimes necessarily take these measures to respond to economic realities such as down- turns in sales or the national economy, layoffs should never be associated with quality improve- ment efforts.
Also, layoffs should occur only as a last resort. Quality improvement efforts, when performed properly, are associated with improved morale and improved confidence among employees that the company is becoming more competitive and the employees’ personal security is improving. Many managers forget that human beings desire security. At the same time, some managers believe that insecurity results in better job performance. However, the opposite is most likely true. At times of high insecurity, the best employees leave and the unmarketable employ- ees remain. As a result, the ability for organizational learning to take place decreases, and even the ability of the firm to attract top talent in the future is impaired.
Recently, a major military contractor announced the layoffs of several hundred engineers in a large metropolitan city. At the same time, the company was recruiting engineers from a nearby engineering school at a major university. Needless to say, the best engineering graduates were not interested in interviewing with this firm. They knew the obvious. This firm did not care about employees’ personal needs over the long term. Therefore, they would not interview nor accept employment with such a firm.
Evidence indicates that some employees will forgo higher wages to achieve higher job security. A good example is the tenured professor who turns down employment that would pay much better in the private sector to enjoy the benefits of tenure. Without tenure, there would be upward pressure on faculty salaries.
Organizational Learning and Knowledge
The second building block of a quality system is organizational learning and knowledge. Knowl- edge is the capital that fuels outstanding quality results. Business leaders report that lifelong learning is a key attribute for employees. These same CEOs and presidents of companies should also carefully consider the organizational and cultural aspects of their companies that inhibit and fail to reward lifelong learning.
A visitor to a manufacturer of components for automobiles heard from the employees that they felt as if they were hired from the “neck down” to do a job and did not feel that management valued their knowledge or opinions. One of the by-products of a quality improvement effort is the realization by managers that rank-and-file employees are primary sources for in-depth knowl- edge relating to processes and that organizational learning is the sum of the learning of individ- ual employees.
Learning needs assessment, training design, and delivery of training are important for competitiveness. Outstanding customer service results from providing employees with outstand- ing knowledge and training. Organizational learning is required for consistency in operations,
404 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
approaches, and customer contact. After developing a new database system to tie together cus- tomer information with production planning, financial planning, and other functions, a service firm recently found the database system was not yielding the expected integration and the desired results. On studying the problem, management found that employees were inputting customer- related information on the system using inconsistent methods. Therefore, customer information was found in inconsistent places in the system. A cause-and-effect study revealed that employees had received minimal and ineffective training on the new system during implementation. Such costly lack of attention to employee needs resulted in greater cost and poor use of information resources.
Culture
Culture refers to the norms and beliefs that lead to decision-making patterns and actions in an organization. Experienced quality practitioners and consultants claim that some organizations have cultures conducive to quality improvement, and others make quality improvement very difficult. Some of the key aspects of culture include attitudes toward change; presence or absence of fear; degree of openness, fairness, and trust; and employee behavior at all levels. Companies that play the so-called blame game end up with cultures where trust is absent and employees act in ways that appear self-defensive. Companies that work in an environment of fear find that dis- trust takes root between labor and management, between midmanagers and vice presidents, and between departments. Such distrust is the opposite of the open and trusting culture that is required for a company to be able to respond rapidly to changing customer needs. When distrust is pres- ent, control systems are put into place that result in lost time, capacity, and flexibility. (Tradi- tional cost accounting systems have been criticized for these reasons.)
Companies that respond quickly to customers’ needs have cultures where decision making is open, information is available to everyone, and risks are rewarded. Some companies have cul- tures that are very control oriented, and a large number of younger companies foster quite differ- ent environments, including “granola cultures,” where managers and employees view the company as a means of achieving happiness for all employees.
Closeness to Customers
Closeness to customers describes the firm’s understanding of the customers, their needs, and their wants. Notice that the building block of “closeness to customers” is built on people, organi- zational learning and knowledge, and culture. All these things result in a supportive environment in which employees can be close to customers. Companies that value knowledge will gather data about customers and will study and understand changing customer needs. Companies that are close to their customers retain those customers. And, as we have seen, customer retention is closely related to profitability.
As we discussed in Chapter 6 , for customer closeness to be achieved, systems must be put in place for gathering data about customers, analyzing the data, and implementing change sys- tems based on the analysis. Not only is an understanding of customers required, but also an understanding of the competitor’s customers. When you understand the customers of your com- petitors, you’ll be able to put into place marketing methods that will attract those customers away from your competitors.
Customer closeness engenders loyalty. People who drive Harley-Davidsons and Mercedes identify with those products. As a result, these customers return to buy new products, replace- ment components, and accessories and to get service. Brand loyalty may become less important as time passes and consumers move to an ethos where product choices are valued over brands. This is particularly true with e-commerce. In this environment, personal relationships between vendors, suppliers, and customers become important differentiators. Consider the example of a doctor. Once patients find a doctor they believe is competent and trustworthy, they will remain with that doctor for many years. How does one achieve such loyalty? The answers are different
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 405
for different markets. However, close, empathic service appears to be one way to achieve close- ness to customers.
Customer closeness is especially key in services. The level of customer contact achieved in services requires an understanding not only of customers’ current wants but also of their emerg- ing wants. Sensitivity to changing needs, moods, stages in life, and environmental conditions are possible only when supported by knowledgeable employees and a culture that values people. This means that a company should be focused on whom it chooses to serve. An understanding of the types of customers that a firm will serve and a focus on key capabilities are important in determining to which customers a firm should become close.
Information and Finance
Information systems provide the core of the support system for satisfying the customer. Well- designed information systems, such as those we’ve described at Ritz-Carlton hotels, become the institutional memory for customer needs. If information systems are not well designed and infor- mation is difficult or slow to obtain, customers will go elsewhere. Banks that do not provide ready account information over the Internet or by phone will find that customers go elsewhere for their banking.
Electronic data interchange (EDI) is of increasing importance for satisfying customer needs. These systems allow customers and suppliers to tie their systems together to enhance planning, purchasing, and coordination. The objective of a quality information system is to gather information relating to the key variables that affect customer services and product quality. The scope of the information system includes the entire organization, linkages to customers, and linkages to suppliers. Better information leads to better customer service. The actions required to make the information system effective are problem identification, analysis, and corrective action.
Finances are listed in the building block in Figure 15-1 with information because financial resources are needed to provide the infrastructure and services that customers want. It takes money for doctors to decorate their offices in a way that is pleasing to patients, to have state-of- the-art technology that will result in state-of-the-art care, and to provide the equipment needed to achieve customer satisfaction. It is interesting to note that most firms that are world-class exam- ples of quality are also financially successful. Research has shown that high quality can improve bottom-line results and enhance financial stability. Therefore, finance is a two-way street. Com- panies that are financially successful are able to invest in systems that will satisfy customers; and high-quality processes, products, and services lead to financial success.
The Three Spheres of Quality
The building blocks we have discussed provide the foundation to the quality system that supports the three key spheres of quality—quality planning and management, quality assurance, and qual- ity control. These spheres were discussed in Chapter 1 . Notice that they are closely related to enterprise capabilities and customer service. Enterprise capabilities are those capabilities firms have that make them unique and attractive to customers. Steven Appleton, the CEO of Micron Corporation, the worldwide cost leader in D-RAM computer chip production, was asked what his firm’s core competency was. Appleton answered, “Micron’s ability to improve productivity at a rate of 14% to 20% per year, year after year.” Such capability is only possible if quality assurance, quality control, and quality management systems are effective. All Micron’s systems and culture are focused on achieving this goal. Customer service is both a goal and an outcome of systems. Processes, procedures, training, and enterprise capabilities must be focused on pro- viding good customer service.
The Integrative Approach
The integrative approach outlined in this book provides the glue binding together the systems that result in high-quality products and services. Because quality is not under the purview of any
406 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
specific functional group and is the responsibility of everyone, cross-functional approaches are required to achieve the desired results. The integrative systems view recognizes that all the build- ing blocks must be in place in all the functional areas and throughout all levels of the organiza- tion for quality improvement to be both horizontally and vertically deployed in world-class companies.
Successful companies that provide high-quality products and services are increasingly able to take the focus away from narrow functional orientations and turn it to broad, customer- centered systems. In such organizations, all the foundation blocks we have identified in Figure 15-1 are in place to support the customer-focused environment.
Alignment between the Quality System and Strategy
The design of the quality system must have focus. A strategic framework is necessary to achieve this focus, which means that the design of the quality system must be in alignment with the stra- tegic objectives and plans of the organization.
Hoshin planning or policy deployment, discussed in Chapter 4 , provides a framework for achieving alignment through the catchball process. Through this process, strategic objectives are translated into specific projects and plans. Project teams are empowered to carry out the strategic objectives. Strategic objectives could be to develop and design a quality management system, a quality assurance system, or a quality control system. See Quality Highlight 15-1 to see how Ford is linking quality and strategy.
QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 15-1 Back to Basics at Ford 2
It was an interesting day when Nick Scheele, COO of Ford Motor Company, announced that the com- pany would move forward by “going back to the basics.” What does this mean? Table 15-1 shows the different phases Ford has gone through—from mass production to the new era. By making the decision to focus more on the basics of running the company, Ford saw a 27% decrease in warranty spending and saved more than $2 billion with Six Sigma.
According to Scheele, “Going back to basics means building quality products on time and at the right price—with a value proposition that is absolutely compelling.” It blends a driving vision with a mission and guiding principles that lead to quality by valuing people, teams, and processes.
According to Ford’s CEO, Jim Padilla, the following are vital priorities:
• Improve quality • Deliver exciting products • Achieve competitive cost and revenue • Build relationships.
Only time will tell if Ford can execute this plan. This focus does show that it is not all about new efforts and programs. It is about understanding your business and establishing a strategy that works for competitiveness.
2 Smith, L., “Back to the Future at Ford,” Quality Progress 38, 3 (2005): 50–56.
INTERNAL VALIDATION: DOCUMENTING AND ASSESSING THE QUALITY SYSTEM
Once a quality system has been established, the system must be allowed to operate effectively over time. Of course, the system is in constant change as continuous improvement efforts occur throughout the organization. At times, managers in firms have difficulty finding new ideas for
TABLE 15-1 Ford’s Timeline
1977 to 1980: Mass production
1981 to 1993: Competitive quality
1994 to 1998: Global economy
1999 to 2004: Niche markets/ acquisitions 2005–Present
Management • Mass production in a captured market, with Big Three competition.
• Reduce short- term cost.
Emphasis on:
• People (employee involvement).
• Teamwork. • Processes. • Systems thinking. • Cost.
• Cycle plan. • Worldwide
centers of excellence.
• Common world vehicles and processes.
• Customer satis- faction emphasis via added vehicle features.
• Emphasis on de- veloping markets and acquisitions.
• Push for youth and diversity in management (outside hires).
• A, B, C ranking of people.
• Bias for actions that provide rapid returns.
Emphasis on:
• People and niche knowledge.
• Teamwork. • Processes. • Systems thinking • Cost/profi t. • Eco-effective
design.
Manufacturing • Reliance on manufacturing experience.
• Inspection de- partment to fi nd and contain de- fective product.
• Quality is job number one.
• Q1: basic quality system.
• Variability reduc- tion using statistical process control (SPC) and design of experi- ments (DOE).
• Process improvement. • Regular senior
management quality meetings.
• Plant vehicle teams established for fi nd and fi x problem solving.
• Focus on top 25 issues.
• Advanced product quality planning. ISO 9000 and lean emphasis.
• Strategy of “seek contain repair” for prod- uct issues and improvement.
• Implementation of lean and fl ex- ible manufactur- ing systems.
• Short-term cost (not profi t) focus.
• Six Sigma used for fi nd and fi x.
• Q1: basic quality system.
• Variability reduction SPC and DOE.
• Process improvement.
• Lean/fl exible manufacturing.
• Six Sigma problem solving.
• Regular senior management quality meetings.
Engineering • Reliance on engi- neers with great experience.
• Find and fi x warranty.
• Push on failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA) and basic reli- ability tools.
• Design standards and verifi cation manuals.
• Increased emphasis on “prevent.”
• Training and books available on statis- tics, learning organi- zation, SPC, quality function deployment (QFD), DOE and Taguchi from world experts.
• Increased interaction with customers, manufacturing, and suppliers.
• Reorganized into platform teams; engineers rapidly rotate jobs.
• Quality training centralized, but no longer taught by subject matter experts.
• QFD replaced with marketing reports activity.
• Program content costly and complex.
• Emphasis on analytical models.
• Heavy cost reduction focus and a cutting of programs.
• Quality training available on the Web.
• Push on FMEA and basic reliabil- ity disciplines.
• Q1 program for engineering.
• A disciplined system to imple- ment “prevent” quality methods tied to reward and recognition (design for Six Sigma).
• Training and soft- ware on power- ful, cutting-edge methods of TRIZ and axiomatic design.
Suppliers • Multiple suppli- ers for each part.
• Most business sourced to the lowest bidder.
• Strive to reduce supply base and establish col- laborative partnerships.
• Increased interaction with Ford engineers in design, quality and cost.
• Transfer of engineer- ing competence to full-service suppliers (FSSs) begins.
• Supplier techni- cal assistance reorganized under purchasing.
• Supplier technical assistance staff greatly reduced; suppliers self-certify.
• Cost reduction emphasis.
• Visteon becomes a supplier.
• Further reductions in supply base emphasize lowest bidder.
• Increased STA staff to deal with program issues.
• Longer term collaborative partnerships op- erating in a lean value stream.
Source: Adapted from L. Smith, “Back to the Future at Ford,” Quality Progress 38, 3 (2005): 50–56.
408 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
improvement. The firm is operating well, is competitive, and is profitable. Benchmarking can be used to observe the practices of others and achieve even higher levels of performance.
Once this higher performance has been achieved, however, what happens? What is next when your firm is the benchmark or at the top of its industry? Where do you go from there? This is a nice problem to have.
When you have achieved benchmark or role model status, the ideas and initiatives for improvement must come from within. In this case, self-assessment is a good tool to spur improve- ment. The goal of self-assessment is to observe current practices, to assess those practices, and to identify gaps in deployment. Once gaps have been identified, new levels of performance can be achieved by filling gaps. It is interesting that Flextronics a California company, is the first two-time Baldrige award winner as of this writing. Solectron management has stated that the Baldrige self-assessment process has resulted in continual improvement over several years.
Figure 15-2 shows a generic process for performing self-assessment in a four-stage process of surveying, categorizing, investigating, and evaluating. In the following pages we discuss various types of audits. The generic process is reflected in each of the audit types. Surveying is the means of generating lists of strengths and weakness for the organization. Some attempt should be made to prioritize these strengths and weaknesses, as many bear no relationship to company competitiveness.
Stage 2 is categorizing the strengths and weaknesses. Strengths can be categorized as strategic resources or strategic capabilities that help define the path for improvement the firm should undertake. The next stage (3) is investigating the sources of competitive advantage. This investigation should answer questions concerning how the firm markets itself, differentiates itself from competitors, wins orders in the marketplace, and achieves competitive advantage over competitors. Companies who are at the later stages of competitive advantage in manufacturing or services should identify internal operational efficiencies that result in competitive advantages. These sources of competitive advantage then are related to the resources and capabilities defined in stage 2. This is done to determine how the competitive factors actually add value for the cus- tomers. If they are not found to add value, adjustments should be made to improve operational focus or become more customer oriented.
Stage 4 relates to evaluation of competitive advantage to assess how relevant resources and capabilities are in terms of generic strategies. Remember from Chapter 3 that the generic strategies are cost leadership, differentiation, and focus. Again, the primary question is the extent to which there is alignment between resource allocation in the firm and primary marketing and operational objectives. A Closer Look at Quality 15-1 shows a simple self-assessment tool.
Stage 2: Categorizing
Reconceptualize list in
terms of resources and
capabilities and complete deeper
inspection with the application of key questions.
Stage 3: Investigating
Determine where, along the firm’s
value chain, potential
competitive advantage lies. Look at each competitively
relevant resource and
capability relative to its potential as a
cost or uniqueness driver.
Stage 1: Surveying
Generate list of strengths and weaknesses
from primary and support activities
of the firm’s value chain.
Stage 4: Evaluating
Choose the appropriate
generic strategy for the firm— cost leadership
or differentiation.
FIGURE 15-2 Internal Environmental Analysis Process Source: Based on W. J. Duncan, P. Ginter, and L. Swayne, “A Competitive Advantage and Internal Organization Assessment,” Academy of Management Executive 12, 3 (1998): 6–16.
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 409
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 15-1 A Simple Self-Assessment Tool
The Malcolm Baldrige office at NIST released the following self-assessment tool for use in companies (see Figure 15-3 ). This is one example of a tool that can be used in improving quality. A good class exercise involves teams performing this assessment and reporting their results to the company.
Your opinion is important to us. There are 40 statements below. For each statement, check the box that best matches how you feel (strongly disagree, disagree, neither agree nor disagree, agree, strongly agree). How you feel will help us decide where we most need to improve. We will not be looking at individual responses but will use the information from our whole group to make decisions. It should take you about 10 to 15 minutes to complete this questionnaire.
Senior leaders, please fill in the following information:
Name of organization or unit being discussed
ARE WE MAKING PROGRESS?
1a I know my organization’s mission (what it is trying to accomplish).
CATEGORY 1: LEADERSHIP
1b My senior (top) leaders use our organization’s values to guide us.
1c My senior leaders create a work environment that helps me do my job.
2a As it plans for the future, my organization asks for my ideas.
CATEGORY 2: STRATEGIC PLANNING
2b I know the parts of my organization's plans that will affect me and my work.
2c I know how to tell if we are making progress on my work group's part of the plan.
1d My organization's leaders share information about the organization.
1e My senior leaders encourage learning that will help me advance in my career.
1f My organization lets me know what it thinks is most important.
1g My organization asks what I think.
Strongly Disagree Disagree
Neither Agree nor Disagree Agree
Strongly Agree
(continued )
FIGURE 15-3 A Simple Self-Assessment Tool Source: NIST, Gaithersburg, MD, 2012.
410 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
3a I know who my most important customers are.
CATEGORY 3: CUSTOMER AND MARKET FOCUS
CATEGORY 4: MEASUREMENT, ANALYSIS, AND KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT
CATEGORY 5: HUMAN RESOURCE FOCUS
Note: Your customers are the people who use the products of your work.
Strongly Disagree Disagree
Neither Agree nor Disagree Agree
Strongly Agree
3b I keep in touch with my customers.
3c My customers tell me what they need and want.
3d I ask if my customers are satisfied or dissatisfied with my work.
3e I am allowed to make decisions to solve problems for my customers.
4a I know how to measure the quality of my work.
4b I know how to analyze (review) the quality of my work to see if changes are needed.
4c I use these analyses for making decisions about my work.
4d I know how the measures I use in my work fit into the organization's overall measures of improvement.
4e I get all the important information I need to do my work.
4f I get the information I need to know about how my organization is doing.
5a I can make changes that will improve my work.
5b The people I work with cooperate and work as a team.
5c My boss encourages me to develop my job skills so I can advance in my career.
5d I am recognized for my work.
5e I have a safe workplace.
5f My boss and my organization care about me.
FIGURE 15-3 (Continued)
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 411
CATEGORY 6: PROCESS MANAGEMENT
CATEGORY 7: BUSINESS RESULTS
Strongly Disagree Disagree
Neither Agree nor Disagree Agree
Strongly Agree
6a I can get everything I need to do my job.
6b I collect information (data) about the quality of my work.
6c We have good processes for doing our work.
6d I have control over my work processes.
7a My customers are satisfied with my work.
7b My work products meet all requirements.
7c I know how well my organization is doing financially.
7d My organization uses my time and talents well.
7e My organization removes things that get in the way of progress.
7f My organization obeys laws and regulations.
7g My organization has high standards and ethics.
7h My organization helps me help my community.
7i I am satisfied with my job.
Would you like to give more information about any of your responses? Please include the number of the statement (for example, 2a or 7d) you are discussing.
FIGURE 15-3 (Continued)
412 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
QUALITY AUDITS
The model in Figure 15-2 is a generic internal assessment model that can be used in many firms. We now discuss specific internal assessment models such as the Baldrige criteria and presiden- tial audits. Note that ISO 9000:2008 also uses repetitive audits to ensure compliance and to maintain registration. However, the approach to auditing used in ISO 9000:2008 has not yet achieved general acceptance as a useful model for internal assessment. The approaches discussed here involve helping competitive organizations to become even more competitive. There are other ways to improve that we will discuss. In the abstract, these techniques involve audit pro- cesses. We start with internal assessment models based on auditing.
There are a number of different approaches to auditing company systems. We should first define what we mean by audits. These are not the compliance audits that internal auditing depart- ments perform to ensure that generally accepted accounting principles are being followed. These are not audits to ensure that companies and employees are acting honestly. These are audits that can be defined as an internal assessment tool to identify areas for improvement.
Quality audits study ways to improve customer service and ascertain whether current cus- tomer service processes are being performed. The audit process is based on a framework of standards, concepts, procedures, and reporting practices. Steps for auditing include familiariza- tion, verification, evaluation, and recommendation (see Figure 15-4 ). This disciplined process relies heavily on evidence, analysis, convention, and informed professional judgment.
Although intuition from past experience has an important role in auditing, intuition alone does not constitute a sufficient conceptual basis for a proper audit. In-depth knowledge of audit- ing standards, proper establishment of audit objectives, carefully planned audit procedures, con- trolled execution of audit steps, and disciplined adherence to proper auditing methods in arriving at conclusions are all requisite for accurate audits. An audit must be both planned and executed in a highly objective and unbiased manner.
Investigations designed to select only the “right” evidence and ignore the “other” cannot be termed audits. An audit must be designed and conducted to gather all the facts relevant to the matter in question, weighing the “good” against the “bad.” Once these objectives are achieved, the auditor then renders professional judgment.
The three main ingredients to an audit are auditing principles, auditing standards, and auditing procedures. An auditing principle is a fundamental truth, primary law, or doctrine. Although an auditing principle is not a primary truth or law in the philosophical sense, it does constitute a rule that is derived from reasoning and experience. Auditing principles guide the auditor. Therefore, auditing principles are basic truths and doctrines that indicate the objective of
Familiarization
Verification
Evaluation
Recommendation
FIGURE 15-4 Generic Auditing Steps
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 413
auditing. They also suggest the manner in which the objectives are achieved. In other words, auditing principles constitute the basis for the application of audit procedures in a logical man- ner, which in turn will fulfill the objectives of the audit. A principle may result from accepted practice or it may develop as a result of general acceptance of a consistently applied procedure.
An auditing standard is a measurement of performance or a criterion establishing profes- sional authority and consent. Therefore, a principle is a primary law, whereas a standard is a performance-measuring device. Some examples of general standards include the following:
• The audit must be performed by a person having adequate technical training and profi- ciency as an auditor.
• In all matters relating to the assignment, independence in mental attitude is to be main- tained by the auditor so as to establish the “third-party viewpoint.”
• Professional care is to be exercised in the performance of the examination and in the prep- aration of the report.
The auditing procedure establishes the courses of action available to the auditor to judge the adherence to the standards and the validity of the application of the principles. Although auditing concepts and methods are not as rigid as methods in the physical sciences, there is a similarity. For example, in auditing there is evidential support for every conclusion; otherwise, there could not be an audit opinion. For auditing purposes, an “audit-scientific” method should be developed and followed, because any scientific method is concerned with searching for the truth based on evidence. In a scientific method, unsupported ideas and prejudices must be excluded from consideration because of lack of evidential support.
Quality Audit Process
Although there are many types of quality-related audit approaches, the basic quality audit follows these steps:
Preparation: Develop lists of questions, gather materials, form a list of candidates for the audit team, establish schedules, and perform the other activities required for beginning an audit.
Audit team selection: Select the right members for the team. Technical and managerial expertise is very important.
Develop checklists: The checklists contain the questions to be studied in the audit. Check- lists also identify who will perform audits in various departments.
The opening meeting: A meeting between the auditing team and the management of the area being audited is called in which ground rules for the audit are established. An espe- cially important agreement is that all pertinent information will be made available to the auditing team.
Implementing the audit: The audit is conducted and pertinent information gathered. Analysis: The data are analyzed and preliminary results are developed. The exit meeting: Preliminary results are shared with management at the exit meeting. Reporting and corrective action: The final report is provided to management and plans are made for taking corrective action. Management implements the corrective action.
Follow-up: A postimplementation review is performed to ensure that the corrective actions were taken and the desired results obtained.
Closure: The audit is closed for the current audit cycle.
Types of Audits
In the following pages we discuss the different approaches to quality auditing that are used most often. Remember the focus is on studying current systems to understand how they can be improved.
414 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
Operational Audits
Quality audits are based on the practice of operational auditing. Operational auditing is the term that was first used by nontraditional internal auditors many years ago to describe the work they were doing. This work includes a specific objective of improving the operations that are being audited. Much of the application of operational auditing has been in industrial companies. However, operational auditing is being used now frequently for services and government.
In a broad sense, the approach and the state of mind of the auditor characterize operational auditing—not the methods. Operational studies are seldom made as special and distinct audits. Instead, operational audits represent the application of the talents, background, and techniques of the auditors to the operating controls that exist in the business.
The general objective of the operational audit is to assist all members of management in the effective discharge of their responsibilities by furnishing them with objective analyses, appraisals, recommendations, and pertinent comments concerning the activities reviewed. Oper- ational audits may follow organizational or functional lines, but the majority are organization- wide because such an audit presents a complete appraisal of the internal operations of an organizational unit. However, the auditor must always have in mind the division of functional responsibilities among organizational units.
Performance Audits
As shown in Table 15-2 , there are several major types of performance audits. Supplier audits are conducted by purchasers of their suppliers. In the automotive industry, for example, these are conducted using the ISO/TS 16949 standards. Toyota Motor Company in the United States spends months developing its suppliers using its own framework. Periodic audits are then per- formed to ensure that the supplier is maintaining standards and to improve the performance of suppliers. This approach is referred to as supplier development.
Certification audits are used to maintain a certification such as ISO 9000:2008, ISO 14000, or other standards. These audits focus on the documentation of systems and adherence to those standards.
Award audits such as the Baldrige, state quality awards, customer awards, and other prizes involve site visits to externally validate the claims made by applicants in their applications. These visits exist to clarify and verify the information that has been provided by the applicant.
Consultant audits are studies performed by consultants to determine the maturity of a company in the quality pursuit and to help identify areas to be addressed in future quality plans. These are sometimes called quality maturity studies.
Presidential audits are audits performed by a team led by the president of the company. These audits are usually operational and quality-related in focus. This gets the president of the firm actively involved in the quality audits and design of the quality system. During a presiden- tial audit, the questions in Table 15-3 are asked. Question-and-answer sessions are held in the
TABLE 15-2 Types of Performance Audits Supplier audits Certification audits Award audits Consultant audits Presidential audits Qualitative audits
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 415
morning with the people who work in the areas being audited. Visits are conducted in the after- noon to areas such as research and development, design, purchasing, manufacturing, quality control, marketing, training, and administrative services. In these audits, an overall assessment of the organization is performed, and this information is inserted into the following year’s strategic plans.
Kaoru Ishikawa was an advocate of presidential audits. Table 15-4 shows expected benefits of presidential audits as he defined them. See A Closer Look at Quality 15-2 .
TABLE 15-3 Questions to Be Answered in a Presidential Audit
1. Under what policies and objectives has the unit proceeded with quality control? 2. What kinds of results have been obtained, and by means of what procedures? (The report
must not consist merely of the results; rather, the unit must show the process through which the results were obtained. The unit should report its efforts as QC stories.)
3. What kinds of problems still exist today? 4. Under what policies and objectives does the unit expect to proceed with quality control in the
future?
5. What suggestions does the unit want to give to the president and to the headquarters staff?
Source: K. Ishikawa, “The Quality Control Audit,” Quality Progress (January 1987): 39–41.
TABLE 15-4 Benefits of Presidential Audits
1. First of all, such an audit is good for the president. The audit depends on him or her, so he or she is forced to study about quality control. He or she can also observe the actual operations of and facts about factories and other units, which deepens his or her under- standing of the company. Knowing everything through paperwork and data is not enough. The president may have an idea of how a particular unit operates and can conceptualize its position in the company, but nothing can replace actual knowledge obtained through fi rsthand experience.
2. The president can discover the true state of her or his company. Normally, the truth is not reported to the president. Bad news is suppressed and only good news is reported. If subor- dinates write candid reports, they risk being scolded. So I advise presidents who are about to begin their own presidential audit, “Never get angry when something bad is reported to you. As long as it is true, never lose your temper. Instead, let your employees report on things that are not going well. Let them give you a candid report of what troubles them. Discuss these problems and try to fi nd solutions together in a spirit of cooperation. After all, the audit by the president is conducted for this very purpose.”
3. There will be an improvement in the human relationship between the president and subordi- nates. The president usually does not have a chance to meet section chiefs, staff members, and supervisors face to face. The audit provides an opportunity to meet, to talk, and to listen. The people involved will develop a feeling for one another and their relations will improve. After the audit, why not have a drink and dinner together?
4. For the people whose QC activities are audited, it is also a signifi cant occasion. There are always ups and downs in human activities. There are times when a person can devote full energy to work, and there are times when a person only goes through the motions. The presidential audit is an occasion for challenging employees and stimulating vigorous activities in total quality control. It also ensures continuation of QC circle activities.
Source: K. Ishikawa, “The Quality Control Audit,” Quality Progress (January 1987): 39–41.
416 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 15-2 Quality Audits in Action 3
Komatsu Ltd.: www.komatsu.com
Boise, Idaho: www.cityofboise.org
Komatsu, Ltd., is a large producer of construction equipment. Established in 1921, the company boasts more than $7 billion a year in sales. Komatsu has extensive experience with quality, having begun implementing quality control in 1961. At that time, Komatsu had very poor quality and began to improve its quality in response to a desire to partner with another firm in a joint venture.
Company managers came to realize that if they were going to improve in stature, they needed to improve quality. Thus, they turned to Kaoru Ishikawa, the late professor at Tokyo University. Ishikawa’s first efforts centered around helping the company to “correctly understand the problems.” This question- ing led to the performance of quality audits.
Ryochi Kawai, Komatsu’s former chairman of the board, reflected on his experiences with qual- ity audits:
When I was in the head office and wanted to know about a plant, I would call the plant manager to obtain the status report, and I could understand the plant’s condition. But when I listened to the exchanges with Ishikawa, I was quite surprised to find that I was able to see through the detail. This did not mean, however, that the report by the plant manager was false. What really happened was that he reported what I liked to hear. Now I had two routes for understanding the true state of the plant. As a result, I now could decide correct policies much faster.
This approach to quality auditing laid the foundation for Komatsu to achieve world-class status in quality products.
Can these approaches also work in government? The answer is, “Yes.” The city of Boise, Idaho, underwent a quality maturity analysis (QMA) . Boise had performed team and quality tools train- ing for a number of years. The QMA allowed a disinterested third party to take a step back and assess the city’s status in terms of improving service to Boise customers. The mayor of Boise commissioned the study. This support was key for the success of the study. With the input of city management, a model for improvement in the city was developed (see Figure 15-5 ). Based on this model, a survey was per- formed asking questions relating to each of the variables in the model. In addition, focus groups with rank-and-file employees were formed and interviews were conducted with city department heads. The study was used to develop strategic planning processes to provide a basis for future improvement.
3 Shimoyamada, K., “The President’s Audit: QC Audits at Komatsu,” Quality Progress (January 1987): 44–49.
Qualitative and Quantitative Elements in Audits
Some audits have more of a quantitative flavor when focusing on issues such as conformance and quality control. These audits may involve reviewing quality control check sheets to model trends in defect rates. Cost-of-quality audits may be conducted to determine whether quality costs are lessening and the programs are working.
Qualitative audits compare current practice against structural measures. Structural mea- sures are the documents relating to processes. These include standards, contracts, procedures, regulatory requirements, and hierarchical standards. In qualitative audits, studies are performed to see that procedures are being followed. For example, as quality improvement becomes more behavioral and emphasizes decision making, it will be important to know whether employees are using structured processes for decision making. Hence qualitative audits should become more important as time passes.
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 417
VALIDATING THE QUALITY SYSTEM
In the following paragraphs, we outline a process for reenergizing quality efforts in organiza- tions. This is a process I have used in actual companies to assess the status of their improvement efforts.
1. Assemble the right team. The reenergizing quality team should be made up of quality managers, people involved in the data analysis, a facilitator, and appropriate operating force par- ticipants. This is quite variable. If your analysis shows that you need to focus on improving design, you may need to include some design engineers. As project leader, you should use your judgment in assembling the team. This is a balancing act between too much involvement and not enough involvement. Make sure that you professionally facilitate all meetings using structured meeting approaches to get the most out of each meeting.
2. Go over your results. This usually takes about half a day. Present your evaluation of the current state of your improvement efforts to the team. This evaluation involves identifying quality-related practices in your organization for relevance and efficacy. Bring everyone up to speed. Use your best judgment as to what level of detail you will provide. You may decide to provide a report to the team and give them a few days to read and internalize the report. This is not an evaluation of the quality management manager and should not be used as such. This is an effort to reenergize your quality approaches.
3. Identify those approaches that are working well. Using your data, gain consensus from the team as to what quality improvement approaches are getting results. Remember that most managers’ eyes glaze over when you discuss p -values and other statistical jargon. Keep your presentations focused and simple.
4. Identify what is not working well. Using your findings, gain consensus among team members as to what approaches should be eliminated. Identify promising approaches that are unsuccessful but hold promise due to high relevance ratings. There may be timing or implemen- tation issues that, if addressed, could turn these results around.
Outcomes
Service/product quality
Employee satisfaction
Customer satisfaction
Process improvement
Enablers
Quality tools
Training and education
Teams
Communication
Information and analysis
Infrastructure
Leadership
Culture
Resources
FIGURE 15-5 City Quality Model
418 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
5. Identify additional areas in quality deployment that are not being addressed. Con- ducting an in-depth study of this type will naturally result in an understanding of areas that need to be addressed that current quality approaches do not address. This is one of the major benefits of validating quality systems. It will help you close the gaps in your quality deployment.
6. Develop your signature strategy . Your signature (or specially tailored) strategy con- tains the bundle of quality improvement approaches that will help you to achieve the outcomes you desire. It links your current states (givens) to your desired states (shoulds) and clearly identi- fies your methods for achieving those results (hows). This is a statement that clearly identifies who you are, where you want to go, and how you are going to get there for the entire organiza- tion. Your signature strategy is a focused strategy that outlines a lean, well-defined, and well- understood approach to improvement of quality in services and processes. The signature strategy is a living document that will change as products and the business realities change.
7. Develop a plan for implementation with time frames and costs. One of the important mantras for any quality effort is to maintain the highest professionalism. Using a modern project management approach, you should develop a project plan. This includes estimating tasks, prece- dence relationships, time frames, and costs. Remember that expenditures for projects of this type are nonlinear. Therefore, you should develop a budget on a monthly basis.
8. Implement the project plan. Get to work and implement your focused signature strat- egy. This is where the fun begins. Remember the fundamentals of change management and polit- ical change management when pursuing the project.
9. Repeat this on an annual basis. By performing this analysis annually, you will be able to baseline your results and establish trends.
Summary In this chapter we identified ways for outstanding firms to get better. Once your firm has achieved role model status, it is difficult to find ways to improve. However, the recognition that there are endless ways to improve should lead firms to audit and self-assess.
The audit processes and Baldrige self-assessment discussed here provide a means for top management to improve its leadership in the area of quality management. These models rein- force the importance of the role of top management leadership in enhancing the system for improvement.
Although the firm that is looking to improve on already-high standards need not be large or world-class, it should be moderately mature in its quality journey. It is unlikely that you would want to perform a full-blown Baldrige assessment if you are a novice to quality improvement. However, once you are at the point where you have measurable results, self-assessment can help to prioritize where to go next.
Companies also should recognize that these approaches are not short-term fixes. They require long-term commitment and support that are probably going to be more obvious in firms that have established quality programs.
Key Terms Award audits Categorizing Certification audits Consultant audits
Enterprise capabilities Evaluation Investigating Operational auditing
Presidential audits Qualitative audits Quality maturity analysis
(QMA)
Supplier audits Surveying
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 419
Discussion Questions 1. The model in Figure 15-1 shows people as the basis of the quality system. Do you agree with this
assertion? Why or why not? 2. There are regions where the three spheres of quality overlap. What are some of the overlaps between
management, assurance, and control? Why are they important? 3. Review the concept of enterprise capabilities. Pick a firm and determine what you think is the enter-
prise capability for that firm. 4. Why is internal assessment a necessary tool for outstanding companies? 5. At what stage do you believe a company would be ready for internal assessment? 6. At what stage does a company become ready for Baldrige-based internal assessment? 7. Define the different types of audits. Pick a company and define which type would be best for it. Sup-
port your answer. 8. The Boise City Leadership model is an interesting model for a governmental entity. Is this model dif-
ferent from a model that would be used for a for-profit firm? Why or why not? 9. What are the enablers for quality improvement in a school? What are they in a firm where you have
worked (see Figure 15-4 )?
Problems 1. Administer the survey instrument in A Closer Look at Quality 15-1 to a local business owner and
report your findings. 2. Administer the survey instrument in A Closer Look at Quality 15-1 to the employees of the business
from Problem 1. Compare the employees’ and owner’s perceptions to see where they differ significantly.
CASE
Case 15-1 Setting Priorities Using the Baldrige Criteria 4 www.nist.gov
On the following pages are examiner evaluation notes for category 2 for a fictional company (the entire report is not provided because of length consideration). Given
this feedback, develop a plan for improvement for NuGrain. Include prioritization of the different new projects.
Discussion Questions
1. How did you select particular projects from the feedback report?
2. What are some of the weaknesses of this approach?
3. Why would it be good to use a mix of internal and external examiners as is recommended in the chapter?
4. How did you prioritize projects for improvement? 5. Was all of the feedback meaningful? What are
some of the attributes of useful feedback?
4NuGrain Feedback Report, NIST. Used with permission 2012.
420 Part 4 • Forever Improving the Quality System
2.1 Strategy Development
STRENGTHS
• NuGrain conducts planning annually through a 12-step SPP. Participants include SLs, the NFU chancellor, industry partners, col- laborating universities, program managers, and agricultural community members. Blind spots are identified through data analysis; the environmental scan; the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT) analysis; and input from stakeholders. SWOT results are used to identify strategic challenges and advantages. The short-term planning horizon is set to allow for rapid changes in the political, economic, or regulatory environment, and the long-term planning horizon is set to align with research timelines and to stretch beyond the USDA (U.S. Department of Agriculture) contract timeline. The SPP is evaluated annually, and improvements include revision of planning horizons, the introduction of the Strategic Alignment Document, and the formation of the Metrics Infrastructure Group (MIG), which is responsible for providing data to leaders for performance review.
• To help ensure that the SPP addresses various key factors, the MIG collects data and information for analysis by SLs one month before the planning retreat. Data are collected on customer needs, industry trends, the competitive environment, technology shifts, human resource needs and capabilities, organizational capabilities, financial capabilities and needs, partner/supplier directions and capabilities, and regulatory issues. These inputs allow NuGrain to perform the SWOT analysis in step 5 of the SPP. To ensure NuGrain’s ability to execute the Strategic Plan, the budget, human resources, and information technology (IT) plans are aligned with the Strategic Plan, and progress is closely monitored throughout the year through NuGrain’s performance review process so that action plans can be modified or added as needed.
• NuGrain utilizes the Strategic Alignment Document to outline the strategic objectives that are determined during the SPP. Each objective is aligned to NuGrain’s core competencies, strategic challenges, and strategic advantages. Each objective has associated key measures with short-term action plans, as well as both short-term and longer-term projections. In many cases, best-in-class or competitors’ projections also are included. NuGrain considers input from all stakeholder groups during step 1 of the SPP, and it includes representatives from industry and the agricultural community in the strategic planning retreat.
OPPORTUNITIES FOR IMPROVEMENT
• Although NuGrain identifies short- and longer-term projections, no goals are presented. Setting goals may serve to focus NuGrain more clearly on achieving its vision to be the premier government-owned laboratory system.
• It is not evident how NuGrain’s strategic objectives balance short- and longer-term challenges and opportunities or address future core competencies. Additionally, while NuGrain uses key stakeholder input in the SPP, it is unclear whether this approach ensures that the strategic objectives balance the needs of all key stakeholders, such as NFU, collaborating universities, and students. This lack of balance may make it difficult to ensures organizational sustainability in light of NuGrain’s key strategic challenges of uncer- tain funding, changing contract performance requirements, and competition with other contractors.
2.2 Strategy Deployment
STRENGTHS
• Short- and long-term action plans are outlined. Key planned changes identified by NuGrain include improving key work processes to address stagnant or declining financial and human resources. SLs lead teams that include staff members, suppliers, and part- ners in developing short-term action plans and measures using the Work System Design Process. A standardized template intro- duced in 2002 is used to record and track action-plan progress, which the SLT senior leadership team reviews monthly as part of an organizational performance review. Action plans are deployed to the entire workforce through interactive Web-based sessions and meetings at each location. Workforce members’ accountability for completion of action plans is incorporated into the perfor- mance plans that are part of the Workforce Performance Management (WPM) Process, and employee incentives are based on completion of action plans. Key supplier and partner responsibilities are reviewed monthly at supplier meetings.
• Human resource allocation occurs in step 8 of the SPP. A 10-year workforce Capability and Capacity Plan is developed and linked to NuGrain’s strategic short- and long-term action plans. For example, key elements of the plan that are aligned with NuGrain’s strategic challenge of a declining number of agricultural graduates include recruitment, a development plan for new hires, scholar- ship support, and incentives.
• To identify the potential need to modify or revise action plans, the SLT conducts a monthly review of action plan templates and the SLT Scorecard as part of the organization’s performance review process. Strategic objective teams routinely review their metrics, and progress is communicated and needed changes identified through regular meetings with the workforce, suppliers, and
Chapter 15 • Implementing and Validating the Quality System 421
partners. Changing customer requirements, including changes related to policy and emergencies, also may necessitate modifica- tion of action plans. When changes are implemented, they are deployed through discussions and meetings.
OPPORTUNITIES FOR IMPROVEMENT
• Although NuGrain notes a few improvements (e.g., the 2002 introduction of a standardized template for action plan design and tracking and its 2003 revision to include budget information), there is no evidence that the approaches used to develop and deploy action plans are evaluated in a fact-based, systematic way to identify opportunities for improvement. A systematic approach in this area may support NuGrain’s principal success factor of strong business practices that provide systematic, repeatable results.
• While strategic objective teams identify the performance projections for the organization and for competitors and best-in-class organizations and many reported results, the approach the teams use to determine NuGrain’s performance projections and those of its key comparisons is not evident. For example, while NuGrain notes that it analyzes its competitive environment and considers prior performance against goals, it is unclear what steps are in place to estimate the organization’s rate of improvement and change. Determining an effective approach may help NuGrain more accurately estimate future performance and its progress on achieving its vision.
• It is not evident that NuGrain has a systematic approach for assessing and managing financial and other risks associated with action plans. While NuGrain has a small contingency fund for unanticipated circumstances, it is not clear how this fund is set up, evaluated to mitigate potential risks, or deployed in times of need. A systematic approach to address these risks may be particu- larly important since upcoming changes may require NuGrain to do more with stagnant or declining resources, and it has identified the uncertain funding environment as a strategic challenge.
APPENDIX
Upper control limit for x = UCLx- = =x + A2R Lower control limit for x = UCLx- = =x - A2R
(If aimed-at or standard value x! is used rather than =x as the central line on the control chart, x! should be substituted for =x in the preceding formulas.)
Upper control limit for R = UCLR = D4R Lower control limit for R = LCLR = D3R
All factors in Table A-1 are based on the normal distribution.
Upper control limit for X = UCLX = =x + E2MR Lower control limit for X = LCLX = =x - E2MR Upper control limit for MR = UCLMR = D4MR Lower control limit for MR = LCLMR = D3MR Upper control limit for x = UCLx- = =x + A3s Lower control limit for x = LCLx- = =x - A3s
422
TABLE A-1 Factors for Determining Control Limits for x _ and R Charts
Number of Observations in Subgroup
n
Factors for R Chart
Factor for x _ Chart
A 2 Factor for X Chart
E 2 Lower Control Limit
D 3 Upper Control Limit
D 4
2 1.88 2.66 0 3.27 3 1.02 1.77 0 2.57 4 0.73 1.46 0 2.28 5 0.58 1.29 0 2.11 6 0.48 1.18 0 2.00 7 0.42 1.11 0.08 1.92 8 0.37 1.05 0.14 1.86 9 0.34 1.01 0.18 1.82
10 0.31 0.98 0.22 1.78 11 0.29 0.26 1.74 12 0.27 0.28 1.72 13 0.25 0.31 1.69 14 0.24 0.33 1.67 15 0.22 0.35 1.65 16 0.21 0.36 1.64 17 0.20 0.38 1.62 18 0.19 0.39 1.61 19 0.19 0.40 1.60 20 0.18 0.41 1.59
Appendix 423
(If aimed-at or standard value x! is used rather than =x as the central line on the control chart, x! should be substituted for =x in the preceding formulas.)
Upper control limit for s = UCLS = B4s Lower control limit for s = LCLs = B3s
All factors in this table are based on the normal distribution. Median chart formulas:
CLx = !x { !A R
Average = sum of medians
number of medians = x!
The numbers represent the proportion of the total area away from the mean, m, to one side. For example, the area between the mean and a point that is 1.55 standard deviations to its right is .43943.
TABLE A-2 Normal z Curve Areas
z .00 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09
0.0 .00000 .00399 .00798 .01197 .01595 .01994 .02392 .02790 .03188 .03586 0.1 .03983 .04380 .04776 .05172 .05567 .05962 .06356 .06749 .07142 .07535 0.2 .07926 .08317 .08706 .09095 .09483 .09871 .10257 .10642 .11026 .11409 0.3 .11791 .12172 .12552 .12930 .13307 .13683 .14058 .14431 .14803 .15173 0.4 .15542 .15910 .16276 .16640 .17003 .17364 .17724 .18082 .18439 .18793 0.5 .19146 .19497 .19847 .20194 .20540 .20884 .21226 .21566 .21904 .22240 0.6 .22575 .22907 .23237 .23565 .23891 .24215 .24537 .24857 .25175 .25490 0.7 .25804 .26115 .26424 .26730 .27035 .27337 .27637 .27935 .28230 .28524 0.8 .28814 .29103 .29389 .29673 .29955 .30234 .30511 .30785 .31057 .31327 0.9 .31594 .31859 .32121 .32381 .32639 .32894 .33147 .33398 .33646 .33891 1.0 .34134 .34375 .34614 .34850 .35083 .35314 .35543 .35769 .35993 .36214 1.1 .36433 .36650 .36864 .37076 .37286 .37493 .37698 .37900 .38100 .38298 1.2 .38493 .38686 .38877 .39065 .39251 .39435 .39617 .39796 .39973 .40147 1.3 .40320 .40490 .40658 .40824 .40988 .41149 .41309 .41466 .41621 .41174 1.4 .41924 .42073 .42220 .42364 .42507 .42647 .42786 .42922 .43056 .43189 1.5 .43319 .43448 .43574 .43699 .43822 .43943 .44062 .44179 .44295 .44408 1.6 .44520 .44630 .44738 .44845 .44950 .45053 .45154 .45254 .45352 .45449 1.7 .45543 .45637 .45728 .45818 .45907 .45994 .46080 .46164 .46246 .46327 1.8 .46407 .46485 .46562 .46638 .46712 .46784 .46856 .46926 .46995 .47062 1.9 .47128 .47193 .47257 .47320 .47381 .47441 .47500 .47558 .47615 .47670 2.0 .47725 .47778 .47831 .47882 .47932 .47982 .48030 .48077 .48124 .48169 2.1 .48214 .48257 .48300 .48341 .48382 .48422 .48461 .48500 .48537 .48574 2.2 .48610 .48645 .48679 .48713 .48745 .48778 .48809 .48840 .48870 .48899 2.3 .48928 .48956 .48983 .49010 .49036 .49061 .49086 .49111 .49134 .49158 2.4 .49180 .49202 .49224 .49245 .49266 .49286 .49305 .49324 .49343 .49361 2.5 .49379 .49396 .49413 .49430 .49446 .49461 .49477 .49492 .49506 .49520 2.6 .49534 .49547 .49560 .49573 .49585 .49598 .49609 .49621 .49632 .49643 2.7 .49653 .49664 .49674 .49683 .49693 .49702 .49711 .49720 .49728 .49736 2.8 .49744 .49752 .49760 .49767 .49774 .49781 .49788 .49795 .49801 .49807 2.9 .49813 .49819 .49825 .49831 .49836 .49841 .49846 .49851 .49856 .49861 3.0 .49865 .49869 .49874 .49878 .49882 .49886 .49889 .49893 .49897 .49000 3.1 .49903 .49906 .49910 .49913 .49916 .49918 .49921 .49924 .49926 .49929
424 Appendix
1.55 standard deviations
Area shaded is .43943
Mean z 0 1.55
TABLE A-3 Factors for Determining the 3-Sigma Control Limits for x and s Charts
Number of Observations in
Subgroup n
Factors for s Chart
Factor for x Chart A 3
Lower Control Limit B 3
Upper Control Limit B 4
Divisors for Estimate of s C 4
2 2.659 0 3.27 0.7979 3 1.954 0 2.57 0.8862 4 1.628 0 2.27 0.9213 5 1.427 0 2.09 0.9400 6 1.287 0.03 1.97 0.9515 7 1.182 0.12 1.88 0.9594 8 1.099 0.19 1.81 0.9650 9 1.032 0.24 1.76 0.9693
10 0.975 0.28 1.72 0.9727 11 0.927 0.32 1.68 0.9754 12 0.886 0.35 1.65 0.9776 13 0.850 0.38 1.62 0.9794 14 0.817 0.41 1.59 0.9810 15 0.789 0.43 1.57 0.9823 16 0.763 0.45 1.55 0.9835 17 0.739 0.47 1.53 0.9845 18 0.718 0.48 1.52 0.9854 19 0.698 0.50 1.50 0.9862 20 0.680 0.51 1.49 0.9869 21 0.663 0.52 1.48 0.9876 22 0.647 0.53 1.47 0.9882 23 0.633 0.54 1.46 0.9887 24 0.619 0.55 1.45 0.9892 25 0.606 0.56 1.44 0.9896
TABLE A-4 Factors for Median Charts
n A"2 D 4
3 1.187 2.575 5 0.691 2.115 7 0.508 1.924 9 0.412 1.816
GLOSSARY
acceptable quality level (AQL) The maximum percentage or proportion of nonconformities in a lot or batch that can be considered satisfactory as a process average.
acceptance sampling Statistical quality control technique used in deciding to accept or reject a shipment of input or output.
active data gathering A method for gathering data that involves approaching respondents to get information.
actively solicited customer feedback Proactive methods for obtaining customer feedback, such as calling customers on the telephone or inviting customers to participate in focus groups.
activity network diagram Also known as a PERT diagram, an activity network diagram is a tool used in controlling projects.
aesthetics A dimension of quality that refers to subjective sensory characteristics such as taste, sound, look, and smell.
affinity diagram A tool used to help groups identify the common themes that are associated with a particular problem.
after-sale service Any service provided to the customer after the customer has purchased a product or service.
alignment Consistency between strategy and operational plans.
analyze phase Six Sigma phase where the collected data are analyzed.
andon A Japanese term that refers to the warning lights on an assembly line that light up when a defect occurs. When the lights go on, the assembly line is usually stopped until the problem is diagnosed and corrected.
annuity relationship This occurs when a business receives many repeat purchases from a customer. The income is received steadily over time from a single customer.
appraisal costs Expenses associated with the direct costs of measuring quality.
assurance A dimension of service quality that refers to the knowledge and courtesy of employees and their ability to inspire trust and confidence.
attribute A binomial state of being.
attrition Reducing headcount by not hiring replacements when people quit.
award audits Site visits relating to award programs.
balanced scorecard A tool for monitoring both financial and operational metrics in one document.
Baldrige-lite Term used to depict states’ quality award programs using the same criteria as the Malcolm Baldrige Award but with a simplified process or application.
Baldrige-qualified Term used by firms that have been granted a site visit by the judges in the Malcolm Baldrige Award competition.
baselining The process of monitoring internal metrics over time.
basic seven (B7) tools of quality These are the fundamental methods for gathering and analyzing quality-related data. They are fishbone diagrams, histograms, Pareto analyses, flowcharts, scatter plots, run charts, and control charts.
bathtub-shaped hazard function Reliability model that shows that products are more likely to fail either very early in their useful life or very late in their useful life.
benchmark An organization that is recognized for its exemplary operational performance in one or more areas and is willing to allow others to view its operations and tour its facilities.
benchmarking The process of finding a company that is superior in a particular area, studying what it does, and gather- ing ideas for improving one’s own operation in that area.
best in class Benchmarks who exhibit performance that is better than competitors.
best of the best Benchmarks who exhibit best in the world performance levels.
425
426 Glossary
black belt A designation given to someone who has completed intensive quality training and has demonstrated results from one or more major projects.
business case A mechanism used in Six Sigma and reengineering to outline a basis for improvement.
c chart A chart used to monitor the number of defects in a production process.
capability Likelihood a product will meet specification.
catchball Term used to describe the iterative nature of the Hoshin planning process.
categorizing The act of placing strengths and weaknesses into categories in generic internal assessment.
cause-and-effect (or fishbone or Ishikawa) diagram A diagram designed to help workers focus on the causes of a problem rather than the symptoms.
certification audits Audits relating to registration (e.g., ISO 9000:2008 audits).
chain of customers A philosophy that espouses the idea that each worker’s “customer” is the next worker in the chain of people that produce a finished product or service.
champion Sponsor of a Six Sigma project.
change In the context of quality management, change means to move from one state of operation to another state of operation.
check sheets Data-gathering tools that can be used in forming histograms. The check sheets can be either tabular or schematic.
churn reduction A process for reducing customer defections.
clickstream The path customers use in navigating Web sites.
closed-loop corrective action The process of ensuring that data and customer feedback are used to improve processes and service.
common cause variation Random variation
compensate (1) To pay or remunerate for some work; (2) to make up for some lack of ability or acuity.
complaint-recovery process Process associated with resolving complaints.
complementary products Products that use similar technologies and can coexist in a family of products.
component reliability The propensity for a part to fail over a given time.
computer-aided design (CAD) system A system for digitally developing product designs.
computer-aided inspection (CAI) A system for performing inspection through the use of technology. For example, some systems use infrared to detect defects.
computer-aided testing (CAT) Technology for conducting tests or examinations.
computer-based training training classes that are usually on-line.
concept design The process of determining which technologies and processes will be used to produce a product.
concurrent engineering The simultaneous performance of product design and process design. Typically, concurrent engineering involves the formation of cross-functional teams. This allows engineers and managers of different disciplines to work together simultaneously in developing product and process designs.
conformance A dimension of quality that refers to the extent to which a product lies within an allowable range of devia- tion from its specification.
consultant audits Inspections that are performed by consultants to determine how an organization should be changed for improvement.
Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) An independent federal regulatory agency that helps keep American families safe by reducing the risk of injury or death from consumer products.
consumer’s risk The risk of receiving a shipment of poor quality product and believing that it is good quality.
Glossary 427
contact personnel The people at the “front lines” who interact with the public in a service setting.
contingency theory A theory that presupposes there is no theory or method for operating a business that can be applied in all instances.
contrition Remorse for error or mistake.
control charts Tools for monitoring process variation.
control factors Variables in a Taguchi experiment that are under the control of the operator. These can include things such as temperature or type of ingredient.
control phase Six Sigma phase where improved process performance is monitored.
control plan The part of the quality management system that outlines how quality control activities will be performed. This is a requirement for ISO 9000.
control process A process involving gathering process data, analyzing process data, and using this information to make adjustments to the process.
conversion process Aligning the inputs of a process together to form a product or service.
core processes Self-identified processes that are central to the organization and its customers.
core values Beliefs central to a company’s identity such that they can provide a basis for decision making.
cost-benefits analysis (CBA) An analysis to determine the efficacy of a proposed improvement.
cpk Capability index.
critical success factors Metrics that companies monitor to determine if their improvement efforts are having positive effects.
criticality A term that refers to how often a failure will occur, how easy it is to diagnose, and whether it can be fixed.
cross-functional teams Teams with members from differing departments and vocations.
cross-training Teaching a person how to perform tasks in more than one job.
customer The receiver of the goods or services that are produced.
customer benefits package (CBP) The package of tangibles and intangibles that make up a service.
customer contact A characteristic of services that notes that customers tend to be more involved in the production of services than they are in manufactured goods.
customer coproduction The participation of a customer in the delivery of a service product. For example, in many restaurants it is not uncommon for customers to fill their own drinks.
customer defections The number of customers who do not repeat with a particular firm.
customer-driven quality Term that refers to a proactive approach to satisfying customer needs.
customer expectations (1) What customers expect from a service provider; (2) a part of the SERVQUAL questionnaire.
customer future needs projection Predicting the future needs of customers and designing products that satisfy those needs.
customer perceptions (1) How customers view products or services; (2) the second part of the SERVQUAL survey.
customer rationalization The process of reaching an agreement between marketing and operations as to which custom- ers add the greatest advantage and profits over time.
customer-related ratios Performance measures that have to do with customer satisfaction.
customer-related results Outcomes that indicate customer satisfaction with a product or service.
customer-relationship management A view of the customer that asserts the customer is a valued asset that should be managed.
customer-relationship management systems (CRMSs) Computerized systems for managing customer-related information.
428 Glossary
customer retention The percentage of customers who return to a service provider or continue to purchase a manufac- tured product.
dashboards Tools for easily tracking metrics.
deduction An approach to theory development based on modeling.
defects per million opportunities (DPMO) Six Sigma measure of the goodness of a product.
defects per unit (DPU) An overall average of number of defects occurring in a particular product.
define phase The first phase of the Six Sigma process where a Six Sigma project is chartered.
Deming Prize A Japanese quality award for individuals and groups that have contributed to the field of quality control.
design for disassembly A method for developing products so that they can easily be taken apart.
design for manufacture (DFM) The principle of designing products so that they are cost effective and easy to make.
design for remanufacture A method for developing products so that the parts can be used in other products. Associated with green manufacturing.
design for reuse Designing products so they can be used in later generations of products.
design for Six Sigma (DFSS) A process for designing products that results in robust designs.
design of experiments (DOE) An approach to product design that involves identifying and testing alternative inputs to the production of a product to identify the best mix of inputs.
design review The process of checking designs for accuracy.
development plan Plans intended to improve employee knowledge.
distance learning Classes provided through technology to people in differing locations.
DMADV process Design for Six Sigma process with the define, measure, analyze, design, and verify stages.
DMAIC process Six Sigma improvement process with define, measure, analyze, improve, and control.
downstream Processes that are closer to the end customer.
dual sourcing Using only a few suppliers for a single component.
durability A dimension of quality that refers to a product’s ability to withstand stress or trauma.
electronic data interchange (EDI) Using computers to share data between customers and suppliers.
empathy A dimension of service quality that refers to the amount of caring and individualized attention exhibited by the service firm.
employee empowerment The act of moving decision-making authority to lower levels in an organization.
empowerment A management initiative designed to move decision making to the lowest level in the organization.
end user The ultimate user of a product or service.
engineering analysis The process of applying engineering concepts to the design of a product, including tests such as heat transfer analysis, stress analysis, or analysis of the dynamic behavior of the system being designed.
enterprise capabilities Capabilities that make firms unique and attractive to customers.
enterprise resource planning (ERP) system A system that integrates financial, planning, and control systems into a single architecture. Examples include the SAP R/3 system and Oracle.
ethical attributes Attributes having to do with the honesty and goodness of people in a firm.
evaluation Assessment of how relevant resources and capabilities are to generic strategies in generic internal assessment.
experiential training techniques Learning by doing.
exporter A firm that sells its product in another country.
extended value stream mapping Flowcharts used to map an entire supply chain.
Glossary 429
external customers The ultimate consumers of the goods that an organization produces.
external events Happenings that affect a firm from the outside.
external failure costs These are monetary losses associated with product failures after the customer has possession of the product. These may include warranty or field repair costs.
external services Services that are provided by companies other than yours.
external validation Operational studies performed by outside entities to improve performance.
facilitation Helping a team or individual achieve a goal. Often used in meetings or with teams to help the teams achieve their objectives.
facilitator The person who performs facilitation. This person may be trained in group dynamics, teamwork, and meeting management methods.
failure costs Two sets of costs—internal failure costs and external failure costs. Internal failure costs include those costs associated with failure during production, whereas external failure costs are associated with product failure after the pro- duction process.
failure modes and effects analysis (FMEA) Method for systematically considering each component of a system by identifying, analyzing, and documenting the possible failure modes within a system and the effects of each failure on the system.
failure modes, effects, and criticality analysis (FMECA) FMECA is an extensive but simple method for identifying ways in which an engineered system could fail. The primary goal of FMECA is to develop priorities for corrective action based on estimated risk.
fault-tree analysis (FTA) An analytical tool that graphically renders the combination of faults that lead to the failure of a system.
features A dimension of quality that refers to those attributes of a product that supplement the item’s basic performance.
final product definition The process of articulating the final drawings and specifications for a product.
financial benchmarking A type of benchmarking that typically involves using CD-ROM databases such as Lexis/Nexis or Compact Disclosure to gather information about competing firms to perform financial analyses and compare results.
financial ratios Numerical ratios of firm performance such as return on equity, return on assets, and earnings per share.
5w2h Who, what, when, where, why, how, and how much.
flowcharts Pictures of a process using a set of icons.
focus group A group of people who are brought together and are asked to share their opinions about a particular product or service.
force-field analysis A tool for evaluating forces for or against change.
forming The first stage of team development, where the team is formed and the objectives for the team are set.
full-Baldrige approach Term used to depict states’ quality award programs using the same criteria as the Malcolm Baldrige award.
5 S’s Techniques designed to improve orderliness in the workplace.
functional benchmarking A type of benchmarking that involves the sharing of information among firms that are inter- ested in the same functional issues.
gage R&R (also gauge R&R) A process for determining if measurements from gauges are repeatable and reproducible. Used during the measurement stage of Six Sigma projects.
gap The difference between desired levels of performance and actual levels of performance.
gap analysis A term associated with the SERVQUAL survey instrument, gap analysis is a technique designed to assess the gap that can exist between a service that is offered and customer expectations.
generic services packages Services packages that can be applied in many circumstances.
430 Glossary
geometric modeling A technique used to develop a computer-based mathematical description of a part.
globalization An approach to international markets that requires a firm to make fundamental changes in the nature of its business by establishing production and marketing facilities in foreign markets.
green belt Someone who has completed green-belt Six Sigma training.
green manufacturing A method for manufacturing that minimizes waste and pollution. These goals are often achieved through product and process design.
group decision support systems Software designed to enhance group decisions making.
group technology A component of CAD that allows for the cataloging and standardization of parts and components for complex products.
hard costs Costs that actually reduce company expenditures. Usually associated with cost-reduction efforts.
hard data Measurements data such as height, weight, volume, or speed that can be measured on a continuous scale.
hardware mock-ups Prototypes designed to look like a final product.
heterogeneous A characteristic of services that means that for many companies, no two services are exactly the same. For example, an advertising company would not develop the same advertising campaign for two different clients.
hidden factory A term introduced by Wickham Skinner that refers to firm activities that have no effect on the customer.
histogram A representation of data in a bar chart format.
horizontal deployment A term that denotes that all of the departments of a firm are involved in the firm’s quality efforts.
Hoshin planning process A policy deployment approach to strategic planning originated by Japanese firms.
house of quality Another name for quality function deployment.
human resource measures Ratios that are used to measure the effectiveness of a firm’s human resource practices.
ideal quality A reference point identified by Taguchi for determining the quality level of a product or service.
IDOV A design for the Six Sigma process with identify, design, optimize, and validate stages.
improve phase Six Sigma phase where improvements to products and processes are implemented.
inbound logistics Associated with the movement of purchased products.
induction An approach to theory development based on observation and description. Although the process of induction is useful, it is subject to observer bias and misperception.
initiator firm The firm that is interested in benchmarking and initiates contact with benchmark firms.
in-process inspection The practice of inspecting work, by the workers themselves, at each stage of the production process.
intangible A characteristic of services that means that services (unlike manufactured goods) cannot be inventoried or carried in stock over a long period of time.
interference checking A feasibility test for product designs to make sure that wires, cabling, and tubing in products such as airplanes do not conflict with each other.
internal customers Individuals within the organization who receive the work that other individuals within the same organization do.
internal failure costs Losses that occur while the product is in possession of the producer. These include rework and scrap costs.
internal services Services that are provided by internal company personnel. For example, data processing personnel are often considered providers of internal services.
international sourcing Purchasing from foreign suppliers.
interrelationship digraph A tool designed to help identify the causal relationships between the issues affecting a particular problem.
Glossary 431
investigation Ability to find sources of competitive advantage in generic internal assessment.
involuntary services A classification for services that are not sought by customers. These include hospitals, prisons, and the Internal Revenue Service.
ISO 9000:2008 The updated registration standard from the International Organization for Standardization.
ISO/TS 16949 A standard for evaluating and improving automotive suppliers.
job analysis The process of collecting detailed information about a particular job. This information includes tasks, skills, abilities, and knowledge requirements that relate to certain jobs.
just-in-time (JIT) (1) A method for optimizing processes that involves continual reduction of waste; (2) the Toyota Motor Company production system; (3) an umbrella term that encompasses several Japanese management techniques.
just-in-time (JIT) purchasing An approach to purchasing that requires long-term agreements with few suppliers.
Kano Quality/Design Model A method for categorizing customer preferences during the design of a product.
key business factors (KBF) Those measures or indicators that are significantly related to the business success of a particular firm.
key measures Important metrics and structural measures that are monitored. These are often associated with the Baldrige process.
knowledge-growth systems A compensation system that increases an employee’s pay as he or she establishes compe- tencies at different levels relating to job knowledge in a single job classification.
knowledge management The process of maintaining and using company information.
knowledge work Jobs that consist primarily of working with information.
law of diminishing marginal returns A law that stipulates there is a point at which investment in quality improvement will become uneconomical.
leader behavior A view of leadership stating that leadership potential is related to the behaviors an individual exhibits.
leader skills A view of leadership stating that leadership potential is related to the skills possessed by an individual.
leadership The process by which a leader influences a group to move toward the attainment of a group of superordinate goals.
leading The act of guiding or directing the activities of others.
lean A waste-free approach to process management.
lean production An approach for reducing waste in production processes using just-in-time concepts.
Lean-Six Sigma Combining the philosophies of lean management with Six Sigma improvement processes.
learning curve effect A theoretical concept that suggests the more you do something, the better you become at doing it.
licensing A method of reaching international markets that does not require the establishment of international supply chains or marketing arms.
life testing A facet of reliability engineering that concerns itself with determining whether a product will fail under controlled conditions during a specified life.
line-stop authority The authority to stop a production line whenever a problem is detected.
loss to society According to Taguchi, this occurs every time a dimension in a product varies from its target dimension. This is associated with Taguchi’s “ideal quality.”
lot tolerance percent defective (LTPD) The maximum level of percent defective acceptable in production lots.
Malcolm Baldrige award A U.S. national quality award sponsored by the U.S. Department of Commerce and private industry. The award is named after former Secretary of Commerce Malcolm Baldrige.
malpractice The result of mistakes made by a professional service provider.
management by fact A core value of the Baldrige award that focuses on data-based decision making.
432 Glossary
manufacturing-based Dimensions of quality that are production related.
manufacturing system design The process of designing a manufacturing system.
market-share data A comparative measure that determines relative positions of firms in the marketplace.
master black belt An experienced black belt who is used as an organizational resource, trainer, and specialist.
matrix diagram A brainstorming tool that can be used in a group to show the relationships between ideas or issues.
mean time between failures (MTBF) The overall average time between product breakdowns. Usually expressed in terms of operating hours.
mean time to failure (MTTF) The average time that has historically lapsed between product or system failures.
mean time to repair (MTTR) The average time it takes before a product needs to be repaired.
measure phase Six Sigma phase for collecting data.
measurement system analysis (MSA) A set of tools for determining the accuracy of measurements.
median chart Control chart for monitoring variation in process central tendency when it is difficult to compute averages.
meeting management A term that refers to the effective management of meetings in an organization.
mission The central thrust of an organization; its raison d’être.
moment of truth In a service context, the phrase “moment of truth” refers to the point in a service experience at which the customer expects something to happen.
mourning The final stage of the team life cycle, where team members regret the ending of the project and the breaking up of the team.
MR chart A chart for plotting variables when samples are not possible.
muda A Japanese term for waste.
multilevel approach Term used to depict state quality award programs that include two levels: a top level based on the full-Baldrige criteria and a second level based on the Baldrige-lite approach.
multiple-skills systems A method for developing employees so that they can perform more than a single task.
multiuser CAD systems Computer-aided design systems that are networked so multiple designers can work on a single design simultaneously.
N = 2 technique An acceptance sampling approach that involves inspecting the first and last items in a conforming shipment.
natural work groups A term used to describe teams that are organized according to a common product, customer, or service.
new seven (N7) tools Managerial tools that are used in quality improvement.
noise factors Factors or variables that exhibit random variation.
nonrandom variation Controllable variation.
norming The third stage of team development, where the team becomes a cohesive unit and interdependence, trust, and cooperation are built.
np chart A chart used to monitor the number of items defective for a fixed sample size.
offline experimentation A method for determining the best configurations of processes. Usually uses a design of exper- iments (DOE) format such as the Taguchi method or Plackett-Burman experiments.
on-the-job training Training that an employee receives at work during the normal workday.
operating characteristic (OC) curve An assessment of the probability of accepting a shipment, given the existing level of quality of the shipment.
operating results Measures that are important to monitoring and tracking the effectiveness of a company’s operations.
operational auditing Modern auditing practices that focus on operational efficiencies.
Glossary 433
optimal levels The best levels or settings of control variables in a Taguchi experiment.
ordinal data Ranked information.
organic organization An organization characterized by a focus on employee development and people-based decision making.
organizational design The process of defining the best structure to meet company objectives.
organizational learning The sum of the changes in knowledge among the employees of a firm.
orthogonal arrays Experimental design tools that ensure independence between iterations of an experiment.
outbound logistics Associated with the movement of products to the customer.
over-the-wall syndrome Difficulties that arise when different types of engineers work in totally different departments in the same firm.
p chart A chart used to monitor proportion defective.
PAF paradigm Refers to prevention, appraisal, and failure costs of quality.
paper prototypes A series of drawings that are developed by the designer on CAD systems and are reviewed by decision makers prior to acceptance.
parallel processing in focused teams Performing work simultaneously rather than sequentially.
parallel reliability This involves the use of backup or redundant components in a system.
parameter design Designing control factors such as product specifications and measurements for optimal product function.
Pareto analysis An economic concept identified by Joseph Juran that argues the majority of quality problems are caused by relatively few causes. This economic concept is called Pareto’s law or the 80/20 rule. Juran dichotomized the popula- tion of causes of quality problems as the vital few and the trivial many.
Pareto chart Chart used to identify and prioritize problems to be solved.
Pareto’s law (the 80/20 rule) States that 80% of the problems are a result of 20% of the causes.
parking lot A term used in meetings that refers to a flipchart or whiteboard where topics that are off-the-subject are “parked” with the agreement that these topics will be candidates for the agenda in a future meeting.
partnering An approach to selling in foreign markets that involves the collaborative effort of two organizations.
passive data gathering This occurs when the customer initiates the data gathering for a firm such as filling out a customer complaint card or sending an e-mail. The firm provides the mechanism for feedback, and the customer must initiate the use of the mechanism.
passively solicited customer feedback A method of soliciting customer feedback that is left to the customer to initiate, such as filling out a restaurant complaint card or calling a toll-free complaint line.
payback period The amount of time required to recoup an investment. Usually associated with projects where costs are saved.
pay-for-learning programs Programs that involve compensating employees for their knowledge and skills rather than singularly for the specific jobs they perform.
perceived quality A dimension of quality identified by David Garvin that refers to a subjective assessment of a prod- uct’s quality based on criteria defined by the observer.
performance A dimension of quality that refers to the efficiency in which a product performs its intended purpose.
performance attributes Attributes having to do with the functioning of a product such as horsepower, signal-to-noise ratio, or decibel output.
performance benchmarking A type of benchmarking that allows initiator firms to compare themselves against bench- mark firms on performance issues such as cost structures, various types of productivity performance, speed of concept to market, and quality measures.
434 Glossary
performing The fourth stage of team development, where a mutually supportive, steady state is achieved.
physical environment The geographic area that is in the proximity of an organization.
plan–do–check–act (PDCA) cycle A process for improvement pioneered by W. E. Deming.
poka-yoke Mistake proofing.
ppk Process capability index.
presidential audits Annual quality audits led by the president of a firm.
prevention costs Costs associated with preventing defects and imperfections from occurring.
preventive maintenance Maintaining scheduled upkeep and improvement to equipment so equipment can actually improve with age.
prioritization grid A tool used to make decisions based on multiple criteria.
process benchmarking A type of benchmarking that focuses on the observation of business processes including process flows, operating systems, process technologies, and the operation of target firms or departments.
process charts Tools for monitoring process stability.
process decision program chart A tool that is used to help brainstorm possible contingencies or problems associated with the implementation of some program or improvement.
process improvement teams Teams that are involved in identifying opportunities for improving select processes in a firm.
process map A process flowchart with responsibilities.
producer’s risk The risk associated with rejecting a lot of material that has acceptable quality.
product A tangible good that is produced for a customer.
product-based The context of Garvin’s quality dimensions.
product benchmarking A type of benchmarking that firms employ when designing new products or upgrades to current products.
product data management (PDM) A method for gathering and evaluating product-related data.
product design and evaluation Activities that include the definition of the product architecture and the design, produc- tion, and testing of a system (including its subassemblies) for production.
product design engineering A form of engineering that involves activities associated with concept development, needs specification, final specification, and final design of a product.
product idea generation The process of generating product ideas from external and internal sources.
product liability The risk a manufacturer assumes when there is a chance that a consumer could be injured by the manufacturer’s product.
product manufacture, delivery, and use Stages of the supply chain.
product marketing and supply chain The process of developing the marketing-related activities associated with a product or service.
product traceability The ability to trace a component part of a product back to its original manufacturer.
productivity ratios Ratios that are used in measuring the extent to which a firm effectively uses its resources.
profound organizational learning Quality-based learning that occurs as people discover the causes of errors, defects, and poor customer service in a firm.
project charter A document showing the purposes, participants, goals, and authorizations for a project.
project risk assessment A method for determining the propensity for a Six Sigma project to achieve desired results.
prototyping An iterative approach to design in which a series of mock-ups or models are developed until the customer and the designer come to agreement as to the final design.
Glossary 435
Pugh matrix A method of concept selection used to identify conflicting requirements and to prioritize design trade-off.
pull production The flow of production is regulated by customer need. Parts or products are not released at any stage of production until the immediate customer or stage of the process has a need for them.
QMS Quality management system. This relates to ISO 9000 requirements.
QS 9000 A supplier development program developed by a Daimler Chrysler/Ford/General Motors supplier requirement task force. The purpose of QS 9000 was to provide a common standard and a set of procedures for the suppliers of the three companies.
quality assurance Those activities associated with assuring the quality of a product or service.
quality at the source A method of process control whereby each worker is responsible for his or her own work and performs needed inspections at each stage of the process.
quality audits Studies performed by auditors, quality specialists, or top managers to observe the quality practices within an organization.
quality circles Brainstorming sessions involving employees of a firm whose goal is improving processes and process capability.
quality control (QC) The process relating to gathering process data and analyzing the data to determine whether the process exhibits nonrandom variation.
quality dimensions Aspects of quality that help to better define what quality is. These include perceived quality, confor- mance, reliability, durability, and so on.
quality function deployment (QFD) QFD involves developing a matrix that includes customer preferences and product attributes. A QFD matrix allows a firm to analyze quantitatively the relationship between customer needs and design attributes.
quality improvement system The result of the interactions between the various components that define the quality policy in a firm.
quality loss function (QLF) A set of Taguchi functions that determine economic penalties that society incurs as a result of producing a nonconforming product.
quality management The management processes that overarch and tie together quality control and quality assurance activities.
quality maturity analysis (QMA) A study in which a firm’s level of maturity relating to quality practices is assessed.
quality measures Ratios that are used to measure a firm’s performance in the area of quality management.
R chart A variables chart that monitors the dispersion of a process.
random variation Variation that is uncontrollable.
reactive customer-driven quality (RCDQ) A state that is characterized by a supplier “reacting” to the quality expecta- tions of a customer rather than proactively anticipating customer needs and expectations.
readiness Used in a leadership context, the term refers to the extent to which a follower has the ability and willingness to accomplish a specific task.
ready–fire–aim A method that focuses on getting new technology to market and then determining how to sell the products.
recall procedures Steps for taking defective products from market. For example, Tylenol and Firestone Wilderness AT tires used these procedures to recall their products.
redundancy A technique for avoiding failure by putting backup systems in place that can take over if a primary system fails. For example, many redundant systems are used on the space shuttle to protect the crew if a primary system fails.
reengineering (1) A method for making rapid, radical changes to a company’s organization and processes; (2) taking apart a competitor’s products to see how they are designed and then designing similar products.
reinventing government Clinton administration effort to reduce government waste.
436 Glossary
relationship management A method for developing long-term associations with customers.
reliability Propensity for failure of a product or component.
replications Number of runs of an experiment.
responsiveness A dimension of service quality that refers to the willingness of the service provider to be helpful and prompt in providing service.
reverse engineering The process of dismantling a competitor’s products to understand the strengths and weaknesses of the designs.
robust design Designing such that an increase in variability will not result in defective products.
RUMBA Realistic, understandable, measurable, believable, actionable.
s chart Standard deviation chart for monitoring changes in process variation.
sample A part representing a whole.
sampling plan A determination of how data are to be gathered and evaluated.
scatter diagram A scatter plot used to examine the relationships between variables.
seiketsu A term that refers to standardization.
seiso A term that suggests that a highly productive workplace should be clean.
seiton A term that refers to neatness in the workplace.
selection The process of evaluating and choosing the best- qualified candidate for a particular job.
selective services packages Service packages that can be selected from a menu of options.
self-directed work teams Work teams that have a considerable degree of autonomy.
self-direction A term that refers to providing autonomy to employees (or other recipients of training) in terms of facili- tating their own training needs.
selri A term that refers to organizing or throwing away things you do not use.
sensory attributes Attributes having to do with our physical senses such as fragrance, taste, or feel.
sequential or departmental approach to design An approach to design that requires product designers, marketers, process designers, and production managers to work through organizational lines of authority to perform work.
series reliability A system in which the failure of any single component causes the failure of the entire system.
service A mix of intangibles and tangibles that are delivered to the customer.
service reliability A dimension of service quality that refers to the ability of the service provider to perform the prom- ised service dependably and accurately.
service transaction analysis (STA) A process for understanding how a firm interacts with customers. For customer service improvement.
serviceability A dimension of quality that refers to a product’s ease of repair.
services blueprinting A chart that depicts service processes and potential fail points in a process.
SERVQUAL A survey instrument designed to assess service quality along five specific dimensions consisting of tangibles, reliability, responsiveness, assurance, and empathy.
shitsuke A term that refers to the discipline required to maintain the changes that have been made in a workplace.
signal factors Factors in a Taguchi experiment that are not under control of the operator. Examples include small varia- tions in ambient temperature and variability in material dimensions.
single sourcing Using only one supplier for a single component.
SIPOC Supplier-inputs-process-outputs-customer diagrams.
situational leadership model A model of leadership proposed by Hersey and Blanchard that clarifies the interrelation between employee preparedness and effectiveness in leadership.
Glossary 437
Six Sigma An approach to process and product design improvement that emphasizes rapid results and payoffs.
social environment The part of an organizational culture that defines the human condition.
societal environment The portion of a firm’s environment pertaining to cultural factors such as language, business customs, customer preferences, and patterns of communication.
soft costs Savings that result in increased organizational slack but not actual cost savings.
soft data Data that cannot be measured or specifically quantified, such as survey data that ask respondents to provide their “opinion” about something.
sole-source filters External validation measures of quality programs such as the Baldrige criteria and ISO 9000:2008.
spider charts Charts used for tracking n metrics in a two-dimensional space.
stability The likelihood a process will be random.
statistical process control (SPC) A technique that is concerned with monitoring process capability and process stability.
statistical thinking Deming’s concept relating to data-based decision making.
storming The second stage of team development, in which the team begins to get to know each other but agreements have not been made to facilitate smooth interaction among team members.
strategic alliances An association between two firms by which they agree to work together to achieve a strategic goal. This is often associated with long-term supplier-customer relationships.
strategic benchmarking A type of benchmarking that involves observing how others compete. This type of benchmark- ing typically involves target firms that have been identified as “world class.”
strategy (1) The art of planning military operations; (2) what a firm does; (3) a firm’s long-term plan for attaining objectives.
stretch target A challenging goal or objective requiring significant effort to achieve.
structural attributes Attributes having to do with physical characteristics of a product such as power steering or red paint.
structural measures Measures that include objectives, policies, and procedures that are followed by a firm.
superordinate goals Goals that transcend individual needs to reflect group objectives.
supplier alliances A term used to characterize the relationship between suppliers and customers when a high degree of linkages and interdependencies exist.
supplier audit The auditing portion of supplier development programs.
supplier certification or qualification programs Programs designed to certify suppliers as acceptable for a particular customer.
supplier development The process of improving supplier performance.
supplier development programs Training and development programs provided by firms to their suppliers.
supplier evaluation A tool used by many firms to differentiate and discriminate among suppliers. Supplier evaluations often involve report cards where potential suppliers are rated based on different criteria such as quality, technical capabil- ity, or ability to meet schedule demands.
supplier filters Hurdles suppliers must pass in order to be considered by a potential customer.
supplier qualification The process of grading suppliers. Usually associated with single sourcing.
supply chain A network of facilities that procures raw materials, transforms them into intermediate subassemblies and final products, and then delivers the products to customers through a distribution system.
supply chain quality management (SCQM) A systems-based approach to performance improvement that leverages opportunities created by upstream and downstream linkages with suppliers and customers.
surveying Generating a list of strengths and weaknesses in a firm in generic internal assessment.
438 Glossary
sustainability The ability of a firm to be environmentally friendly or green.
system availability The proportion of time a system is available.
system reliability The probability that components in a system will perform their intended function over a specified period of time.
systems view A management viewpoint that focuses on the interactions between the various components (i.e., people, policies, machines, processes, and products) that combine to produce a product or service. The systems view focuses man- agement on the system as the cause of quality problems.
Taguchi method An approach to quality management developed by Genichi Taguchi. The Taguchi method provides (1) a basis for determining the functional relationship between controllable product or service design factors and the outcomes of a process, (2) a method for adjusting the mean of a process by optimizing controllable variables, and (3) a procedure for examining the relationship between random noise in the process and product or service variability.
tangibles A dimension of service quality that refers to the physical appearance of the service facility, the equipment, the personnel, and the communications material.
target firm The firm that is being studied or benchmarked against.
task environment The portion of a firm’s environment pertaining to structural issues, such as the skill levels of employ- ees, remuneration policies, technology, and the nature of government agencies.
task needs assessment The process of assessing the skills that are needed within a firm.
team A group of individuals working to achieve a goal with activities requiring close coordination.
team building A term that describes the process of identifying roles for team members and helping the team members succeed in their roles.
teamware Computer software that is used in making group decisions.
technology development for process selection The act of choosing or developing technologies during the design process.
technology feasibility statement A feasibility statement used in the design process to assess a variety of issues such as necessary parameters for performance, manufacturing imperatives, limitations in the physics of materials, and conditions for quality-testing the product.
technology selection for product development The process of selecting materials and technologies that provide the best performance for the customer at an acceptable cost.
temporal attributes Attributes relating to time such as on-time performance and meeting delivery schedules.
360-degree evaluation A method for evaluating performance with input from supervisors, peers, and employees.
three spheres of quality Quality management, assurance, and control.
three Ts The task, treatment, and tangibles in service design.
tiger teams Teams with a specific defined goal and a short time frame to attain the goal.
tolerance design The act of determining the amount of allowable variability around parameters.
total quality human resources management (TQHRM) An approach to human resources management that involves many of the concepts of quality management. The primary purpose of this approach is to provide employees a supportive and empowered work environment.
training needs analysis The process of identifying organizational needs in terms of capabilities, task needs assessment in terms of skill sets that are needed within the firm, and individual needs analysis to determine how employee skills fit with company needs.
training needs assessment A process for gathering organizational data relative to finding areas where training is most needed.
training program design A term that describes the process of tailoring a course or set of courses to meet the needs of a company.
Glossary 439
trait dimension A view of leadership that states leadership potential is related to the “traits” of an individual, such as height.
transactional analysis A method for studying the interaction between customers and service providers to help improve service.
transcendent A definition of quality that states quality is something we all recognize but we cannot verbally define.
tree diagram A tool used to identify the steps needed to address a particular problem.
TS 16949 ISO standard for supplier development and management.
u chart A chart used to monitor the number of defects in sequential production lots.
undeveloped events A term used in fault-tree analysis. Undeveloped events are faults that do not have a significant consequence or are not expanded because there is not sufficient information available.
unified theory for services management A set of propositions relative to managing services.
unique services packages Services packages tailored for a specific customer need.
upstream Processes that are closer to raw materials.
user-based A definition of service or product quality that is customer centered.
value-added A customer-based perspective on quality that is used by services, manufacturing, and public sector organi- zations. The concept of value-added involves a subjective assessment of the efficacy of every step in the process for the customer.
value-based A definition of quality relating to the social benefit from a product or service.
value chain A concept, developed by Michael Porter, that decomposes a firm into its core activities.
value-chain activities Porter’s chain of activities, including inbound logistics, production, and outbound logistics.
value stream mapping Flowcharts used in process improvement.
value system A network of value chains.
variable A measurement.
variety The range of product and service choices offered to customers.
vertical deployment A term denoting that all of the levels of the management of a firm are involved in the firm’s quality efforts.
virtual teams Teams that do not physically meet but are linked together through intranets and the Internet.
voice of the customer A term that refers to the wants, opinions, perceptions, and desires of the customer.
voluntary services Services that are sought by customers of their own volition.
working prototype A functioning mock-up or model of a product.
X chart A chart used to monitor the mean of a process for population values.
x– chart A chart that monitors the mean of a process for variables.
XY matrix A matrix used to demonstrate and quantify the strength of relationships between dependent and independent variables.
Y = f ( X ) A formula used in Six Sigma to illustrate the relationships between dependent and independent variables.
yellow belt One who has completed yellow-belt Six Sigma training.
INDEX
A Acceptance sampling, 7 – 8 , 70 , 280
supplier quality, 230 – 231 Access, 117 ACSI. See American Customer Satisfaction
Index (ACSI) Active data gathering, 122 Actively solicited customer-feedback approaches,
122 – 126 Activity network diagram, 265 , 266 , 391 – 393 Adam, E. E., 87 Aesthetics, 5 Affinity diagram, 257 – 259 After-sale service, 8 Airports, 3 Alignment, 12 Allen, Paul, 161 Amazon.com, 130 American Customer Satisfaction Index (ACSI), 329 American Productivity and Quality Center (APQC),
155 , 156 American quality improvement, 56 – 67 American Society for Quality, 329 American Stores Corporation, 192 Ames Rubber Corporation, 108 – 109 Amgen Corporation, 155 – 156 Analysis, in Taguchi process, 361 Analysis of variance (ANOVA), 353 Analyze phase, of DMAIC process, 355 – 356 Andon, 69 Annuity relationship, 122 AON. See Activity network diagram Apple Computer, 132 – 133 , 185 Appleton, Steven, 405 Appraisal costs, 93 APQC. See American Productivity and Quality
Center (APQC) ARRI. See Automation and Robotics Research
Institute (ARRI) Arrow, 223 Assessment, of quality system, 408 – 411 Assurance, 6 ASTM E96 test, 174 Atomic Energy of Canada Ltd., 302 AT&T, 233 – 234 Attribute chart
development process, 315 selecting right, 323 – 325
summary, 323 understanding, 315 – 323
Attributes ethical, 315 performance, 314 sensory, 314 structural, 314 temporal, 315
AT&T Teleholdings, 156 – 157 Auditing principle, 412 – 413 Auditing procedure, 413 Auditing standard, 413 Audits/auditing
operational, 414 performance, 414 – 415 qualitative, 416 quality, 412 – 413 types, 413 – 416
Automation and Robotics Research Institute (ARRI), 48 – 49
Avoidance, 385 Award audits, 414
B Babbar, S., 92 Back office, 201 Balanced scorecard, 267 , 268 Balancing demands, 384 Baldrige, Howard Malcolm, 61 – 62 Baldrige-lite approach, 66 – 67 Baldrige Performance Excellence Program, 56 – 67 Baldrige qualified firms, 62 Baldrige scoring, 65 Baselining, 150 Basic seven (B7) tools of quality, 239 – 255
cause-and-effect diagams, 250 – 252 , 253 check sheets, 246 control charts, 250 , 251 histograms, 247 – 248 Pareto charts, 252 , 254 – 255 process map, 240 – 245 scatter diagrams, 248 – 250
Bathtub-shaped hazard function, 325 BayGen radio, 130 Bayless, Trevor, 130 Beaver, Donald, 114 – 115 Belbin, Meredith, 376 , 377 Belonging, 373
440
Index 441
Benchmarking, 40 – 41 , 136 – 139 business process, 144 – 147 financial, 137 functional, 139 leadership and management, 147 – 150 legal environment for, 148 – 149 markets, 136 – 139 performance, 137 problems with, 150 – 151 process, 137 product, 138 purposes, 139 – 140 strategic, 138 – 139
Benchmarking: The Search for Industry Best Practices That Lead to Superior Performance (Camp), 40 – 41
Best Buy, 190 Big S self-directed teams, 380 Bisgaard, S., 361 Black belt, 340 – 341 Blackford, Woody, 173 Blanchard, K., 376 Blueprinting, 200 – 201 Boeing Co., 224 Boeing 787 Dreamliner, 224 Bond, Bruce, 223 Bose Corporation, 226 Bounded power, 373 Box, G. E. P., 361 Brainstorming session, in Taguchi process, 360 – 361 Breadth, 150 Breakthrough, 47
control vs., 34 Brown, Orval, 156 Brue, Greg, 329 Burlingham, B., 374 Business case, 343 – 344 Business process benchmarking, 144 – 147
C CAD. See Computer-aided design (CAD) system CAM. See Computer-assisted manufacturing (CAM) Camp, Robert, 40 – 41 , 145 – 147 Campion, M., 16 Capability, 301
vs. stability, 306 Cases
attributes charts, 354 – 356 benchmarking, 155 – 157 customers, 132 – 134 customer service, 217 – 218
international quality standards and global supply chain quality, 82 – 84
process design, 186 product design, 185 quality, 22 – 24 quality improvement tools, 273 – 275 quality system, 419 quality theory, 48 – 50 service quality, 216 – 218 Six Sigma, 370 statistical quality, 312 – 313 strategic quality planning, 108 – 110 supplier quality, 233 – 236 team and project management, 399 – 400
Casey, James E., 218 CAT. See Computer-aided testing (CAT) Catchball, 99 Categorizing, strengths and weaknesses, 408 Cause-and-effect diagams, 250 – 252 , 253 CBA. See Cost-benefits analysis (CBA) CBP. See Customer benefits packages (CBP) c charts, 320 – 323
Excel, 322 – 323 formula, 321
Central limit theorem, 285 Century of Productivity, 35 Certification audits, 414 Chain of customers, 220 Champion, 340 Champy, James, 42 – 43 Change, 172 Chaparral Steel Company, 133 – 134 Chase, Richard, 115 , 203 Check sheets, 246 Childress, Richard, 381 Chinese quality improvement, 78 – 80 Churn reduction, 129 Clausing, D., 163 Clickstream, 130 Closed-loop corrective action, 116 Closeness to customers, 404 – 405 Cocona, 174 Code of conduct, benchmarking, 148 – 149 Coercive power, 89 Colby, Kevin, 342 Cole, Robert, 372 Collaboration, 372
See also Team management; Teams Collier, David, 204 , 307 Columbia Sportswear, 173 , 174 Columbus, 51 Common cause variation, 9
442 Index
Communication conflict resolution, 384 downstream, 121 – 122
Compensation, 115 Competence, 117 Competitive systems, 384 Complaint-recovery process, 115 Complaint resolution, 114 – 115 Complementary products, 172 Component reliability, 176 Computer-aided design (CAD) system, 167 – 170 Computer-aided testing (CAT), 170 Computer-assisted manufacturing (CAM), 170 Concept design, 357 Concurrent engineering, 9 , 170 – 171 Confining quality to the factory, 37 Confirming experiment, in Taguchi process, 362 Conflict resolution, in teams, 382 – 385 Conformance, 4 Confrontation, 385 Confronting conflict, 384 Constancy of purpose, 30 Construct validity, 126 Consultant audits, 414 Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), 181 Consumer’s risk, 278 Contact personnel, 197 Content validity, 126 Contingency perspective, 43 , 364 Contingency theory, 20 Contol phase, of DMAIC process, 356 Contrition, 115 Control charts, 250 , 251
variables, 281 , 283 , 299 – 301 See also Process control charts
Control factors, 357 Control plans, 281 , 282 Control process, 145 Control vs. breakthrough, 34 Conversion process, 145 Coordination, in conflict resolution, 384 COPQ. See Costs of poor quality (COPQ) Core processes, 7 Core values, 11 Corporate universities, 273 – 274 Corrective action, 116 , 301 Cost-benefits analysis (CBA), 386 – 387 Costs
accounting, 94 – 95 appraisal, 93 failure, 94 hard, 386
Lundvall–Juran model, 95 – 96 prevention, 93 soft, 386 strategic quality planning, 92 – 96 , 102
Costs of poor quality (COPQ), 338 , 340 , 347 Covey, Stephen R., 41 CPSC. See Consumer Product Safety Commission
(CPSC) CQF. See Customer Quality Feedback (CQF) Creative autonomy, 373 Credibility, 117 Criterion validity, 126 Critical Chain (Goldratt), 385 Critical-incident approach, 125 Criticality, in FMECA, 180 Crosby, Philip, 38 – 39 , 372 – 373 Crosby and Associates of Winter Park, Florida, 38 Cross-functional teams, 379 Cultural perspectives, 20 Culture
quality approaches and, 80 quality systems and, 404
Cumulative sum (cusum) charts, 299 Customer benefits packages (CBP), 204 – 205 Customer contact, 188 , 190 Customer coproduction, 188 Customer defections, 128 – 129 Customer-driven quality, 112 – 113 Customer expectations, 193 – 195 , 197 – 200 Customer focus, 45 Customer future needs projection, 162 Customer loyalty, 128 Customer perceptions, 195 – 196 , 197 – 200 Customer Quality Feedback (CQF), 132 – 133 Customer rationalization, 121 Customer-related results, 143 Customer-relationship management (CRM), 13 , 114 – 116
complaint resolution, 114 – 115 corrective action, 116 feedback, 115 guarantees, 115 – 116
Customer-relationship management systems (CRMS), 128 – 130
Customer requirements, 124 Customer research card, 127 Customer retention, 128 Customers, 111 – 112
closeness to, 404 – 405 defined, 112 downstream communication, 121 – 122 external, 112 internal, 112
Index 443
segmentation, 118 – 119 strategic supply chain alliances, 119 – 121
Customer service surveys, 123 – 126 Cusum charts. See Cumulative sum (cusum) charts
D DADS. See Digitally Assisted Dispatch System (DADS) Dashboards, 269 Data gathering, 122 Decisions Sciences Institute National Conference,
334 – 336 Deduction, 27 Defects per million opportunities (DPMO), 349 Defects per unit (DPU), 349 Define phase, of DMAIC, 343 – 347 Defusion, 385 Deiser, R., 375 Dell Computer Company, 225 Deming, W. Edwards, 1 , 67 , 80 , 231 , 372
business results, 101 continuous quality improvement, 87 Deming value chain, 14 , 15 financial perspective, 14 14 points for management, 30 – 33 , 69 , 70 improving quality, 358 operations, 10 quality theory, 28 – 33 teamwork, 372
Deming Prize, 67 Deng Xiaoping, 78 Denver International Airport (DIA), 82 – 83 Departmental approach to design, 32 Depth, 150 Design for disassembly, 181 Design for manufacture (DFM), 172 – 173 , 174 – 175 Design for reuse, 181 Design for Six Sigma (DFSS), 364 Design of experiments (DOE), 357 Design review, 169 DFM. See Design for manufacture (DFM) DFSS. See Design for Six Sigma (DFSS) DIA. See Denver International Airport (DIA) Diagnosis-intervention cycle, 385 Digitally Assisted Dispatch System (DADS), 19 DMADV, 364 DMAIC process, 8 , 341 – 343 Documentation, of quality system, 408 – 411 Dodes, R., 112 DOE. See Design of experiments (DOE) Doheny, Peg, 173 Downstream communication, 121 – 122 Downstream processes, 2
DPMO. See Defects per million opportunities (DPMO) DPU. See Defects per unit (DPU) Dual sourcing, 222 Duguid, Tom, 173 Durability, 4
E Eaton Corporation, 342 – 343 EDI. See Electronic data interchange (EDI) Electronic data interchange (EDI), 128 Effectiveness, hierarchy flattening for, 375 80/20 rule. See Pareto analysis Electronic data interchange (EDI), 7 , 225 , 405 Employee empowerment and involvement, 16 , 373 – 375 Employee improvement, 45 Employees, and teams, 373 Empowerment, 16 , 373 – 375 End users, 112 Engineering analysis, 169 Engineering perspective, 8 – 9 Enterprise capabilities, 405 Enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems, 175 Environment, 46
physical, 52 – 53 product design, 181 social, 53 task, 53
EPA. See U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) EPOGEN, 155 EQA. See European Quality Award (EQA) ERP. See Enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems Erratic behavior, 287 E-tailing Group, 112 Ethical attributes, 315 Ethics, 92 , 149 Etiquette, 149 European Quality Award (EQA), 71 – 72 European quality improvement, 71 – 77 Evaluation
of competitive advantage, 408 product design and, 162 supplier, 222
Excel c charts, 322 – 323 gauge R&R, 354 , 355 median charts, 296 np chart, 320 p charts, 317 – 318 process control charts, 298 s and x charts, 298 Taguchi experiments, 362 – 364 u charts, 322 – 323
444 Index
Excel (continued) X and MR charts, 294 x and R charts, 291 – 292
Expectations, of customer, 193 – 195 , 197 – 200 Experimental design, Taguchi process, 361 Experimentation, Taguchi process, 361 Expertise, power of, 89 Exporters, 55 – 56 External customers, 112 External failure costs, 94 External services, 189
F Facilitation, 381 Facilitator, 381 Fact-based improvement, 45 Failure costs, 94 Failure modes, effects, and criticality analysis
(FMECA), 180 Failure modes and effects analysis (FMEA), 177 – 178 ,
179 , 351 Fault-tree analysis (FTA), 178 , 180 FDA. See Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Features, 4 Federal Express, 19 , 22 – 23 Feedback, 115 Feigenbaum, Armand, 17 , 37 – 38 FEMA. See Failure modes and effects analysis
(FMEA) Filo, David, 217 Final product definition, 162 Finances, 405 Financial benchmarking, 137 Financial ratios, 143 Five S ’s, 70 5w2h, 144 – 145 FMECA. See Failure modes, effects, and criticality
analysis (FMECA) Focused teams, parallel processing in, 32 Focus groups, 122 – 123 Food and Drug Administration (FDA), 302 Forced-choice model, 98 – 99 Force-field analysis, 388 – 395 Ford Motor Company, 223 , 406 Forming, 377 Forster, Bill, 223 Foster, S. T., 7 , 55 , 87 , 103 , 226 , 307 Front office, 201 FTA. See Fault-tree analysis (FTA) Full-Baldrige approach, 66 Functional benchmarking, 139 14 points for management, 30 – 33 , 69 , 70
G G. K. Products, Inc., 277 Ganski, Jerry, 342 Gap, 116 Gap analysis, 116 , 196 – 197 Gaps approach to customer service design, 116 – 118 Gartner Group, 223 Garvin, David, 3 , 158 – 159 Gates, Bill, 161 Gauge repeatability and reproducibility analysis (gauge
R&R), 352 – 355 Excel for, 354 , 355
GE. See General Electric (GE) General Electric (GE), 12 – 13 , 339 , 340 – 341 General Motors, 228 Generic services packages, 205 Geometric modeling, 168 GfK Custom Research Incorporated (CRI), 90 Ghosh, S., 87 Globalization, 52 Global supply chain
summary, 81 Global supply chain quality
American quality improvement, 56 – 67 cases, 82 – 84 Chinese quality improvement, 78 – 80 culture and, 80 European quality improvement, 71 – 78 Japanese quality improvement, 67 – 70 multinational firm, 52 – 56
Goal structure, in conflict resolution, 384 Goldratt, Eliyahu, 385 Gonsalves, A., 223 Government, customer service in, 208 – 209 Granite Rock, 23 – 24 Grant, Eugene, 37 Green belts, 341 Green manufacturing, 181 Group technology, 170 Grout, John, 203 Guanxi, 79 Guarantees, 115 – 116 Gurus, 42 Gutierrez, Carlos, 161
H Haggquist, Gregory, 174 Hamel, G., 98 Hammer, Michael, 42 – 43 Hard costs, 386 Hard data, 122 Harley-Davidson, 96 , 128
Index 445
Harris Corporation, 274 Hauser, J., 163 Health care, 202 , 209 – 210 Heinz Frozen Food Corporation, 127 , 312 Hendricks, C. A., 341 Hersey, P., 376 Heterogeneous service output, 188 Hewlett-Packard Corporation, 6 , 382 Hidden factory, 220 Hierarchies, flattening, 375 High Street Emporium, 115 Hill, Greg, 174 Histograms, 247 – 248 Honda, 32 Honeywell Federal Manufacturing & Technologies
(FM&T), LLC, 65 – 66 , 234 – 236 Hon Industries, 223 Horizontal deployment, 70 Hoshin planning process, 99 Hothouse quality, 37 House of quality, 163 HR perspective. See Human resources perspective Human resources measures, 143 Human resources perspective, 16 – 17
I IATF. See International Automotive Task Force (IATF) Ideal quality, 40 , 358 IDOV (identify, design, optimize, verify), 364 Improvement
breakthroughs, 34 , 47 employee, 45 fact-based, 45 project-by-project, 34 – 36 See also Quality improvement
Improve phase, of DMAIC process, 356 Inbound logistics, 7 Induction, 26 Information analysis, 45 Information systems, 405 Infrastructure, 46 Initiator firm, 137 In-process inspection, 69 In Search of Excellence (Peters), 41 – 42 Inspection
in-process, 69 planning, 281
Intangible service attributes, 188 Integrative approach, 405 – 406 Interference checking, 169 Interlinking, 307 Internal customers, 112
Internal failure costs, 94 Internal services, 189 Internal validation, 406 , 408 – 411 International Automotive Task Force (IATF), 228 – 229 International quality standards
American quality improvement, 56 – 67 cases, 82 – 84 Chinese quality improvement, 78 – 80 culture and, 80 European quality improvement, 71 – 78 Japanese quality improvement, 67 – 70 multinational firm, 52 – 56 summary, 81
International sourcing, 8 International trade, 51 Internet
customer service on, 112 team building on, 380
Interrelationship digraph, 259 – 260 , 261 In-the-field style of leadership, 192 Intuit, 147 Involuntary services, 189 IPDP (Individual Personal Development Plan), 24 iPhone, 185 Ishikawa, Kaoru, 36 – 37 ISO 9000:2008, 7 , 71 , 72 – 76 , 412
basics, 72 – 74 principles providing foundation for, 74 – 75 process, 75 – 76 registrar’s selection for, 75
ISO 14000, 76 – 77 ISO 14001, 82 ISO/TS 16949, 228 – 230
J Jaco Manufacturing Company, 277 Japanese quality improvement, 67 – 70 Japanese quality revolution, 35 – 36 Japanese Union of Scientists and Engineers (JUSE), 36 JIT. See Just-in-time (JIT) purchasing Job analysis, 16 Johnson, D., 376 Johnson, J., 13 Joyce International, Inc., 200 Juran, Joseph M., 33 – 36 , 372 Juran trilogy, 33 Just-in-time (JIT) purchasing, 31
K K 2 , 171 Kabodian, A., 111 Kano Quality/Design Model, 159
446 Index
Kawai, Ryochi, 416 Kelbaugh, R. L., 341 Kellogg, 161 Kellogg, Deborah, 205 Key business factors (KBF), 142 , 144 Key measures, 144 King, Carol, 5 Knowledge, 403 Knowledge management, 130 Knowledge work, 372 Komatsu, Ltd., 416 Konicki, S., 223 Kotter, John, 86 Kroc, Ray, 92
L Labor costs, 53 Lanier, 274 – 275 Lanier, Tommy, 274 – 275 Law of diminishing marginal returns, 15 Leadership, 45 , 88 – 90
defined, 89 dimensions, 89 – 90 improving, 31 power and, 89 team, 373 – 378
Leader skills, 90 Lean-Six Sigma, 341 , 364 Lean-Six Sigma black belts, 339 , 340 Leavenworth, Richard, 37 Legitimate power, 89 Leveson, Nancy, 302 Licensing, 52 Lichtenthaler, U., 375 Life testing, 9 Line-stop authority, 69 Little s self-directed work team, 379 – 380 Lockheed-Martin, 225 Loss to society, 359 Louis Vuitton, 176 – 177 Lundvall–Juran quality cost model, 95 – 96
M Magic Kingdom at Walt Disney World, 49 – 50 Maintainability, 175 – 176 Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award, 19 , 31 ,
56 – 67 , 90 , 93 , 112 , 138 , 144 Malpractice, 190 Management by fact, 144 Management by objective, 32 Management responsibility, 230 Manufacturing-based quality, 4
Manufacturing system design, 162 Mao Tse-tung, 78 Marketing-generated ideas, 161 Marketing perspective, 13 – 14 Markets, 135 – 136
baselining and reengineering, 150 benchmarking. See Benchmarking business process benchmarking, 144 – 147 performance monitoring and measurement, 140 – 144 summary, 151
Markets, segmentation of, 118 – 119 Market share data, 143 Marks, Tod, 329 Marvel, Joe, 108 , 109 Massachusetts General Hospital, 380 Master black belts, 340 Matrix diagram, 264 – 265 McCarty, Tom, 224 McDonald, 54 McGraw, Gary, 302 McNerney, Jim, 224 Mean time between failures (MTBF), 328 , 329 Mean time to failure (MTTF), 328 – 329 Mean time to repair (MTTR), 329 Measurement system analysis (MSA), 351 , 352 Measure phase, of DMAIC process, 347 – 355 Median charts, 294 – 296 Meeting management, 381 – 382 Mendez, D., 87 Micron Corporation, 405 MidwayUSA, 109 – 110 Minuteman Launch Control Systems, 180 Mizuno, S., 163 Moments of truth, 201 – 202 Morgeson, F., 16 Morreale, Daniel, 231 Motivators, for employees, 373 Motorola, 302 , 338 Motorola Solutions Learning (MSL), 273 – 274 Mourning, 378 Moving range (MR) charts, 292 – 294 MSL. See Motorola Solutions Learning (MSL) MTBF. See Mean time between failures (MTBF) MTTF. See Mean time to failure (MTTF) MTTR. See Mean time to repair (MTTR) Muda, 341 Mullen, Dan, 231 Multilevel approach, 67 Multinational firms (MNF), quality management
for, 52 – 56 Multi-user CAD systems, 168 Mutuality, 373
Index 447
N Narasimhan, R., 87 NASCAR, 381 National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), 62 National Productivity Review, 208 National Rifle Association, 110 National Semiconductor (NSC), 55 Natural work groups, 379 Navy SEAL, 380 Neiman-Marcus, 96 Neiman-Marcus Cookie, 370 New seven (N7) tools, 255 – 267
activity network diagram, 265 , 266 affinity diagram, 257 – 259 interrelationship digraph, 259 – 260 , 261 matrix diagram, 264 – 265 Plan–do–check–act (PDCA) cycle, 267 prioritization grid, 262 – 264 process decision program chart, 265 , 266 tree diagram, 260 , 262
Nichols, Ellen, 155 Nie, Winter, 205 Nineteen steps outline, to TQC, 38 No Child Act, 88 No Child Left Behind Act, 88 Noise factors, 360 , 361 Nonrandom variation, 279 Noriaki Kano, 159 Norming, 377 np chart, 318 – 320
Excel, 320 formula, 318
NSC. See National Semiconductor (NSC) N = 2 technique, 70 Nucor Corporation, 186 NuGrain, 420 – 421
O Objectives, 355 Offline experimentation, 356 , 361 Operating results, 143 Operational auditing, 414 Operation Desert Storm, 302 Operation Iraqi Freedom, 302 Operations perspective, 9 – 10 Optimal levels, 357 Order-winning criterion (OWC), 97 – 98 Ordinal data, 122 Ore-Ida Corporation, 277 , 312 – 313 Organic view of the organization, 7 Organizational design, 16 Organizational learning, 375 , 403 – 404
Orthogonal arrays, 361 Outbound logistics, 7 Outcome measures, 389 – 390 Outsourcing, 79 – 80 Over-the-wall syndrome, 174
P Padilla, Jim, 406 Pal’s Sudden Service, 138 – 139 Parallel processing, in focused teams, 32 Parallel reliability, 326 – 327 Parameter design, 357 Parameters, 358 Pareto, Vilfredo, 36 Pareto analysis, 36 , 347 , 348 Pareto charts, 252 , 254 – 255 Parking lot, 382 Partnering, 52 Passive conflict resolution, 384 Passive data gathering, 122 Passively solicited customer-feedback approaches,
126 – 127 Patents, 54 – 55 Payback period, 386 p charts, 315 – 318
Excel, 317 – 318 formula, 316
PDM. See Product data management (PDM) PDS. See Product design specification (PDS) People, 402 – 403 People–Service–Profit (PSP) philosophy, 23 Perceived quality, 5 Perceptions, of customer, 195 – 196 , 197 – 200 Performance, 4 Performance attributes, 314 Performance audits, 414 – 415 Performance benchmarking, 137 Performance measurement
commonly benchmarked, 142 – 144 difficulties in, 140 – 142
Performance monitoring, difficulties in, 140 – 142 Performing, 377 , 378 Peters, Tom, 41 – 42 Peterson, K., 224 Physical environment, 52 – 53 Pita Pocket Sandwich, 277 Plan–do–check–act (PDCA) cycle, 267 Planning
inspection, 281 Poisson distribution, 320 Poka-yoke, 203 – 204 Population, defined, 303
448 Index
Population capability index (Ppk), 306 Population distributions, 302 – 303 Power, 89
See also specific power PpK. See Population capability index (Ppk) Prahalad, C., 98 Precedence relationships, 389 Presidential audits, 414 – 415 Prevention costs, 93 Preventive maintenance (PM), 70 Price, 102 Prioritization grid, 262 – 264 Problem definition, 36 , 347 , 349 Problem identification, Taguchi process, 360 Process benchmarking, 137 Process capability for variables, 301 – 306 Process charts, 280 Process control charts, 281 – 299
cusum chart, 299 Excel, 298 interpreting, 286 , 289 – 290 median charts, 294 – 296 moving average chart, 298 procedure for developing process chart, 283 understanding process chart, 283 – 285 variables and attributes control charts, 281 , 283 X and moving range (MR) charts, 292 – 294 x and R charts, 285 – 286 , 288 , 290 – 292 x and s charts, 296 – 298
Process decision program chart, 265 , 266 Process drift, 287 Process improvement teams, 379 Process map, 240 – 245 , 347 , 349 , 350 Process run, 287 Process selection, technology development for, 162 Process stability, 280 Process variation, 278 – 279 Producer’s risk, 278 Producing overseas, 37 Product-based quality, 3 Product benchmarking, 138 Product data management (PDM), 175 Product design, 158 – 159
complementary products, 172 considerations, 172 – 174 design for manufacture (DFM), 172 – 173 , 174 – 175 environmental considerations in, 181 maintainability, 175 – 176 process, 159 – 162 product families and product life cycle, 172 quality function deployment (QFD), 163 – 167 reliability, 176 – 181
team building, 170 – 171 technology in, 167 – 170
Product design and evaluation, 162 Product design engineering, 8 – 9 Product design specification (PDS), 162 Product development, technology selection for, 162 Product families, 172 Product idea generation, 160 – 161 Productivity, 102 – 103 Productivity ratios, 143 Product liability, 190 Product life cycle, 171 – 172 Product manufacture, delivery, and use, 162 Product marketing and supply chain preparation, 162 Product quality dimensions, 3 – 5 Product realization, 230 Product traceability, 180 – 181 Profitability, 103 Project management, 385 – 395
force-field analysis, 388 – 395 multiple projects, 394 – 395 project charters, 387 qualifying projects, 386 – 387 summary, 395 – 396
Project return analysis, 344 , 345 – 347 Project risk assessment, 344 , 345 , 347 Proportion defective, p charts for, 315 – 318 Pull production, 341
Q QAT. See Quality action teams (QAT) QIP. See Quality Improvement Process (QIP) QLF. See Quality loss function (QLF) QMA. See Quality maturity analysis (QMA) QS 9000, 228 Quadratic loss function, 359 Qualifying projects, 386 – 387 Qualitative audits, 416 Quality
cost and, 102 cultural perspectives, 20 engineering perspective, 8 – 9 ethics and, 92 financial perspective, 14 – 16 functional perspectives, 7 – 17 human resources perspective, 16 – 17 marketing perspective, 13 – 14 operations perspective, 9 – 10 perspectives on, 2 – 3 price and, 102 productivity and, 102 – 103 profitability and, 103
Index 449
strategic management perspective, 10 – 13 supply chain perspective, 7 – 8 sustainability and, 103 – 104 Taguchi’s definition of, 40 , 358 three spheres, 17 – 19 value-added perspective, 19 – 20
Quality action teams (QAT), 23 Quality assurance, 18 , 45 Quality at the source, 31 Quality audits, 412 – 413
See also Audits/auditing Quality circles, 70 Quality control, 17 – 18 Quality department, focus of, 46 Quality dimensions
product, 3 – 5 service, 5 – 6
Quality function deployment (QFD), 163 – 167 Quality improvement
American, 56 – 67 Chinese, 78 – 80 European, 71 – 78 Japanese, 67 – 70 philosophy toward, 45 project-by-project, 34 time in, 86 – 88
Quality Improvement Process (QIP), 22 Quality improvement tools
activity network diagram, 265 , 266 affinity diagram, 257 – 259 balanced scorecard, 267 , 268 cause-and-effect diagams, 250 – 252 , 253 check sheets, 246 control charts, 250 , 251 dashboards, 269 histograms, 247 – 248 interrelationship digraph, 259 – 260 , 261 Ishikawa’s basic seven tools of quality, 239 – 255 matrix diagram, 264 – 265 new seven (N7) tools, 255 – 267 Pareto charts, 252 , 254 – 255 Plan–do–check–act (PDCA) cycle, 267 prioritization grid, 262 – 264 process decision program chart, 265 , 266 process map, 240 – 245 scatter diagrams, 248 – 250 spider charts, 267 summary, 269 system improvement, 238 – 239 tree diagram, 260 , 262
Quality Is Free (Crosby), 38 Quality loss function (QLF), 40 , 358 – 360
Quality management, 18 history, 28 quality theory and, 27 – 28 , 47 supplier partnering and, 230 team approach to, 46
Quality management system, 230 Quality maturity analysis (QMA), 416 Quality measures, 143 Quality system
building blocks, 402 – 406 internal validation: documentation and assessment,
406 , 408 – 411 quality audits, 412 – 417 summary, 418 validation of, 417 – 418
Quality system model, 402 Quality theory
Camp, Robert C., 40 – 41 Champy, James, 42 – 43 contingency theory and, 43 Covey, Stephen R., 41 Crosby, Philip, 38 – 39 Deming, W. Edwards, 28 – 33 Feigenbaum, Armand, 37 – 38 Hammer, Michael, 42 – 43 integrative view, 43 – 47 Ishikawa, Kaoru, 36 – 37 Juran, Joseph M., 33 – 36 Peters, Tom, 41 – 42 quality management and, 27 – 28 , 47 Taguchi, Genichi, 39 – 40
R Radio frequency identification (RFID), 231 Random samples, 280 Random variation, 278 – 279 Rational subgroup, 280 – 281 RCDQ. See Reactive customer-driven quality (RCDQ) R charts, 285 – 286 , 288 , 290 – 292 Reaction plan, 281 Reactive customer-driven quality (RCDQ), 113 Readiness, 376 Ready–fire–aim approach, 130 Recall procedures, 180 – 181 Recognition for personal achievement, 373 Reengineering, 42 , 150 Reengineering the Corporation (Hammer and
Champy), 42 Referent power, 89 Reinventing government, 208 , 209 Reliability, 4 , 125 – 126
component, 176
450 Index
Reliability (continued) product design, 176 – 181 system, 176
Reliability analysis tools FEMA, 177 – 178 , 179 FETA, 178 , 180 FMECA, 180 product traceability, 180 – 181 recall procedures, 180 – 181
Reliability management, 4 Reliability models
mean time to failure, 328 – 329 measuring, 327 parallel, 326 – 327 series, 325 – 326 summary, 330 system availability, 329 – 330
Replications, 361 Responsiveness, 6 , 117 Restricted services packages, 205 Return on assets (ROA), 143 Return on investments (ROI), 143 Reverse engineering, 138 Reward power, 89 Reward systems, 384 RFID. See Radio frequency identification (RFID) Rheaco, Inc., 48 – 49 Ritz-Carlton hotel company, 192 – 193 Robinson, Alan, 144 Robust design, 40 , 357 – 358 Roengen, Jeffery L., 186 Romero, Bob, 277 Ross, P., 361 Rossignol, 171 , 172 Rules, for team, 378 RUMBA, 344
S Sample(s)
defined, 303 random, 280 systematic, 280
Sampling acceptance, 230 – 231 rational subgroup, 280 – 281
Sampling distributions, 303 Sampling methods, 280 Sampling plan, 281 Scatter diagrams, 248 – 250 s charts, 296 – 298 Scheele, Nick, 406 Scientific management, 35
SCQM. See Supply chain quality management (SCQM) Sears University, 274 Security, 117 Segmentation, of customers and markets, 118 – 119 Seifert, John, 174 Selection, 16 Selective services packages, 205 Self-assessment tool, 409 – 411 Self-directed work team, 379 – 380 Sensory attributes, 314 September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, 223 Sequential approach to design, 32 Series reliability, 325 – 326 Serviceability, 5 Service quality
customer benefits packages, 204 – 205 customers, 191 – 192 delivery of, 200 – 204 government, 208 – 209 health care, 202 , 209 – 210 manufacturing and, 188 – 191 service transaction analysis, 205 , 206 – 208 SERVQUAL, 193 – 200 summary, 211 – 212 supply chain, 210 theory for, 210 – 211
Service quality dimensions, 5 – 6 Service quality indicators (SQI), 19 , 23 Service quality model gaps, 117 Service reliability, 6 Services
external, 189 internal, 189 involuntary, 189 vs. manufacturing, 188 – 191 voluntary, 189
Services blueprinting, 200 – 201 Service transaction analysis (STA), 205 , 206 – 208 SERVQUAL, 116 , 193 – 200
expectations, 193 – 195 , 197 – 200 gap analysis, 196 – 197 perceptions, 195 – 196 , 197 – 200
The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People (Covey), 41 Shewhart, Walter, 9 Shigeo Shingo, 136 Shingo, S., 87 Shostack, Lynn, 200 Simplot, J. R., 92 Single sourcing, 120 , 222 , 224 – 226 SIPOC diagram, 242 Situational leadership model, 376 Six Sigma, 8 , 302 , 303
Index 451
analyze phase, 355 – 356 concept, 337 – 339 contingency perspective, 364 control phase, 356 define phase, 343 – 347 Design for Six Sigma (DFSS), 364 DMAIC, 341 – 343 improve phase, 356 Lean-Six Sigma, 364 measure phase, 347 – 355 organizing, 340 – 341 Taguchi method, 357 – 364
Skaggs, Sam, 192 Ski design, 171 – 172 Smith, Brad, 147 Smith, Frederick W., 19 , 23 Social environment, 53 Soft costs, 386 Soft data, 122 Solectron Corporation, 91 – 92 Sole-source filters, 222 SOP. See Standard operating procedures (SOP) SPC. See Statistical process control (SPC) Special cause variation, 9 Spider charts, 267 Springfield ReManufacturing Corp., 374 – 374 SQC. See Statistical quality control (SQC) SQI. See Service quality indicators (SQI) SRMS. See Supplier relationship management
systems (SRMS) Stability, 306 Standard operating procedures (SOP), 349 Star Supplier Program, 225 Statistical failures, in workplace, 278 Statistical fundamentals, 276 – 281 Statistical Method from the Viewpoint of Quality Control
(Shewhart), 9 Statistical process control (SPC), 9 , 358 Statistical quality, 276
correlation, 306 – 307 interlinking, 307 process capability for variables, 301 – 306 process control charts, 281 – 299 statistical fundamentals, 276 – 281 variables control chart, 299 – 301
Statistical Quality Control (Grant and Leavenworth), 37 Statistical quality control (SQC), 358 Statistical thinking, 276 – 277 Statistical tools, 277
reasons for failure of, 278 Storming, 377 Strategic alliances, 120
Strategic benchmarking, 138 – 139 Strategic management perspective, 10 – 13 Strategic planning, 45 Strategic Planning Institute Council on
Benchmarking, 148 Strategic quality planning
accounting, 94 – 96 core competency, 98 costs, 92 – 93 differentiation, 96 ethics, 92 focus, 96 – 97 forced-choice model, 98 – 99 Hoshin quality deployment process, 99 – 101 leadership, 88 – 92 Lundvall–Juran quality cost model, 95 – 96 order-winning criterion (OWC), 97 – 98 PAF paradigm, 93 – 94 process, 98 – 99 results, 101 – 104 strategy content, 86 summary, 105 supply chain strategy, 104 – 105 time and quality improvement, 86 – 88
Strategy, 10 Strategy content, 86 , 98 Strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT)
analysis, 420 Strengths and weaknesses, 408 Structural attributes, 314 Structural measures, 144 , 416 Structured problem solving, 384 Structured processes, 382 Sun Tzu, 2 Superordinate goals, 89 Supplier audit, 222 Supplier awards, 228 Supplier certification/qualification programs, 222 Supplier development, 7 , 226 – 228 Supplier development programs, 222 Supplier evaluation, 222 Supplier qualification, 7 Supplier quality
acceptance sampling, 230 – 231 contingency theory and, 228 ISO/TS 16949, 228 – 230 statistical sampling techniques, 230 – 231 supplier alliances, 220 , 221 – 226 supplier development, 226 – 228 supply chain quality management (SCQM), 232 value chain, 219 – 220
Supplier relationship management systems (SRMS), 228
452 Index
Supply chain perspective, 7 – 8 Supply chain quality management (SCQM), 232 Supply chains, 2 Surveying, 408 Sustainability, 103 – 104 Systematic samples, 280 System availability, 329 – 330 System reliability, 176
T Taguchi, Genichi, 39 – 40 Taguchi method, 357 – 364 Taguchi process, 360 – 364
analysis, 361 brainstorming session, 360 – 361 confirming experiment, 362 experimental design, 361 experimentation, 361 problem identification, 360
Taiichi Ohno, 136 Tampoe, M., 373 Tangibles, 6 , 117 Target firm, 137 Targets for Excellence, 228 Task environment, 53 Task times, 390 Taylor, Frederick W., 35 Team approach to quality management, 46 Team building, 381 Team leader, roles and responsibilities of, 375 – 376 Team management
leadership, 373 – 378 summary, 395 – 396 team implementation, 381 – 385 team types, 378 – 381
Team rules, 378 Teams, 372 – 373
conflict resolution in, 382 – 385 defined, 372 employees and, 373 formation and evolution, 377 , 378 roles and responsibilities, 376 – 377 types, 378 – 381
Teamware, 380 Technology development for process selection, 162 Technology feasibility statement, 162 Technology selection for product development, 162 Telephone surveys, 122 Tellis, G., 13 Temporal attributes, 315 Terrorism, 223 Texas A&M University, 5
Theory, defined, 25 – 27 Therac- 25 , 302 360-degree evaluation, 16 3M Dental Products Division (DPD), 226 – 227 Three spheres of quality, 17 – 19 Three Ts, 203 Thurloway, L., 373 Tiger teams, 379 Tolerance, 4 Tolerance design, 357 Toll-free phone lines, 127 Tools. See Quality improvement tools Total Quality Control (Feigenbaum), 37 Total quality control (TQC), 37 – 38
19 steps outline, 38 Total quality environmental management (TQEM), 104 Total quality management (TQM), 17 , 87 Toyota Motor Company, 68 – 69 , 87 , 136 TQEM. See Total quality environmental management
(TQEM) TQM. See Total quality management (TQM) Traceability. See Product traceability Training, 148 Trait dimension, of leadership, 89 Transactional analysis, 130 Transcendent quality, 3 Tree diagram, 260 , 262
U u charts, 320 – 323
Excel, 322 – 323 formula, 321
Understanding/knowing, 117 Unified theory, for services management, 210 – 211 Unique services packages, 205 University of Michigan, 329 UPS. See U.S. Postal Service (UPS) Upstream processes, 2 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 77 U.S. General Accounting Office, 87 , 103 U.S. Postal Service (UPS), 217 – 218 User-based quality, 3
V Value-added perspectives, 19 – 20 Value-based quality, 4 Value chain, 219 – 220 Value-chain activities, 220 Value stream mapping, 8 Value system, 219 Variables control charts, 281 , 283 , 299 – 301 Variation, analyzing source of, 355
Index 453
Variety, 172 Vendor-managed inventory (VMI), 120 , 226 , 228 Vertical deployment, 70 Virtual teams, 380 VMI. See Vendor-managed inventory (VMI) VOB. See Voice of the business (VOB) VOC. See Voice of the customer (VOC) VOE. See Voice of the employees (VOE) Voice of the business (VOB), 340 Voice of the customer (VOC), 340 Voice of the employees (VOE), 340 Voluntary services, 189
W Wainwright, Arthur D., 83 Wainwright Industries, 83 – 84 Wall Street Journal, 17 Walt Disney World, 49 – 50 WBS. See Work breakdown structure (WBS) Web sites, 127 Wheeler, Donald, 87 Whitely, R., 115 Whole Foods Market, 399 – 400 Win–win, 384
Wiseman, Jim, 68 Wishful thinking, 37 Woolard, Ed, 103 Woolpert, Bruce, 24 Work breakdown structure (WBS), 389 Workplace, statistical failures in, 278
X x -bar charts, 285 – 286 , 288 , 290 – 292 , 296 – 298 X charts, 292 – 294 Xerox Corporation, 40 , 225
benchmarking at, 145 – 147 X s, identification of, 355 XY matrix, 349 , 351 , 352 XYZ Corporation, 99 – 100
Y Yahoo!, 216 – 217 Yamaha, 32 Yang, Jerry, 217 Yellow belts, 341
Z Zero defects, 38 , 39
APPENDIX
Upper control limit for x = UCLx- = =x + A2R Lower control limit for x = UCLx- = =x - A2R
(If aimed-at or standard value x! is used rather than =x as the central line on the control chart, x! should be substituted for =x in the preceding formulas.)
Upper control limit for R = UCLR = D4R Lower control limit for R = LCLR = D3R
All factors in Table A-1 are based on the normal distribution.
Upper control limit for X = UCLX = =x + E2MR Lower control limit for X = LCLX = =x - E2MR Upper control limit for MR = UCLMR = D4MR Lower control limit for MR = LCLMR = D3MR Upper control limit for x = UCLx- = =x + A3s Lower control limit for x = LCLx- = =x - A3s
1
TABLE A-1 Factors for Determining Control Limits for x _ and R Charts
Number of Observations in Subgroup
n
Factors for R Chart
Factor for x _ Chart
A 2 Factor for X Chart
E 2 Lower Control Limit
D 3 Upper Control Limit
D 4
2 1.88 2.66 0 3.27 3 1.02 1.77 0 2.57 4 0.73 1.46 0 2.28 5 0.58 1.29 0 2.11 6 0.48 1.18 0 2.00 7 0.42 1.11 0.08 1.92 8 0.37 1.05 0.14 1.86 9 0.34 1.01 0.18 1.82
10 0.31 0.98 0.22 1.78 11 0.29 0.26 1.74 12 0.27 0.28 1.72 13 0.25 0.31 1.69 14 0.24 0.33 1.67 15 0.22 0.35 1.65 16 0.21 0.36 1.64 17 0.20 0.38 1.62 18 0.19 0.39 1.61 19 0.19 0.40 1.60 20 0.18 0.41 1.59
2 Appendix
(If aimed-at or standard value x! is used rather than =x as the central line on the control chart, x! should be substituted for =x in the preceding formulas.)
Upper control limit for s = UCLS = B4s Lower control limit for s = LCLs = B3s
All factors in this table are based on the normal distribution. Median chart formulas:
CLx = !x { !A R
Average = sum of medians
number of medians = x!
The numbers represent the proportion of the total area away from the mean, m, to one side. For example, the area between the mean and a point that is 1.55 standard deviations to its right is .43943.
TABLE A-2 Normal z Curve Areas
z .00 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09
0.0 .00000 .00399 .00798 .01197 .01595 .01994 .02392 .02790 .03188 .03586 0.1 .03983 .04380 .04776 .05172 .05567 .05962 .06356 .06749 .07142 .07535 0.2 .07926 .08317 .08706 .09095 .09483 .09871 .10257 .10642 .11026 .11409 0.3 .11791 .12172 .12552 .12930 .13307 .13683 .14058 .14431 .14803 .15173 0.4 .15542 .15910 .16276 .16640 .17003 .17364 .17724 .18082 .18439 .18793 0.5 .19146 .19497 .19847 .20194 .20540 .20884 .21226 .21566 .21904 .22240 0.6 .22575 .22907 .23237 .23565 .23891 .24215 .24537 .24857 .25175 .25490 0.7 .25804 .26115 .26424 .26730 .27035 .27337 .27637 .27935 .28230 .28524 0.8 .28814 .29103 .29389 .29673 .29955 .30234 .30511 .30785 .31057 .31327 0.9 .31594 .31859 .32121 .32381 .32639 .32894 .33147 .33398 .33646 .33891 1.0 .34134 .34375 .34614 .34850 .35083 .35314 .35543 .35769 .35993 .36214 1.1 .36433 .36650 .36864 .37076 .37286 .37493 .37698 .37900 .38100 .38298 1.2 .38493 .38686 .38877 .39065 .39251 .39435 .39617 .39796 .39973 .40147 1.3 .40320 .40490 .40658 .40824 .40988 .41149 .41309 .41466 .41621 .41174 1.4 .41924 .42073 .42220 .42364 .42507 .42647 .42786 .42922 .43056 .43189 1.5 .43319 .43448 .43574 .43699 .43822 .43943 .44062 .44179 .44295 .44408 1.6 .44520 .44630 .44738 .44845 .44950 .45053 .45154 .45254 .45352 .45449 1.7 .45543 .45637 .45728 .45818 .45907 .45994 .46080 .46164 .46246 .46327 1.8 .46407 .46485 .46562 .46638 .46712 .46784 .46856 .46926 .46995 .47062 1.9 .47128 .47193 .47257 .47320 .47381 .47441 .47500 .47558 .47615 .47670 2.0 .47725 .47778 .47831 .47882 .47932 .47982 .48030 .48077 .48124 .48169 2.1 .48214 .48257 .48300 .48341 .48382 .48422 .48461 .48500 .48537 .48574 2.2 .48610 .48645 .48679 .48713 .48745 .48778 .48809 .48840 .48870 .48899 2.3 .48928 .48956 .48983 .49010 .49036 .49061 .49086 .49111 .49134 .49158 2.4 .49180 .49202 .49224 .49245 .49266 .49286 .49305 .49324 .49343 .49361 2.5 .49379 .49396 .49413 .49430 .49446 .49461 .49477 .49492 .49506 .49520 2.6 .49534 .49547 .49560 .49573 .49585 .49598 .49609 .49621 .49632 .49643 2.7 .49653 .49664 .49674 .49683 .49693 .49702 .49711 .49720 .49728 .49736 2.8 .49744 .49752 .49760 .49767 .49774 .49781 .49788 .49795 .49801 .49807 2.9 .49813 .49819 .49825 .49831 .49836 .49841 .49846 .49851 .49856 .49861 3.0 .49865 .49869 .49874 .49878 .49882 .49886 .49889 .49893 .49897 .49000 3.1 .49903 .49906 .49910 .49913 .49916 .49918 .49921 .49924 .49926 .49929
Appendix 3
1.55 standard deviations
Area shaded is .43943
Mean z 0 1.55
TABLE A-3 Factors for Determining the 3-Sigma Control Limits for x and s Charts
Number of Observations in
Subgroup n
Factors for s Chart
Factor for x Chart A 3
Lower Control Limit B 3
Upper Control Limit B 4
Divisors for Estimate of s C 4
2 2.659 0 3.27 0.7979 3 1.954 0 2.57 0.8862 4 1.628 0 2.27 0.9213 5 1.427 0 2.09 0.9400 6 1.287 0.03 1.97 0.9515 7 1.182 0.12 1.88 0.9594 8 1.099 0.19 1.81 0.9650 9 1.032 0.24 1.76 0.9693
10 0.975 0.28 1.72 0.9727 11 0.927 0.32 1.68 0.9754 12 0.886 0.35 1.65 0.9776 13 0.850 0.38 1.62 0.9794 14 0.817 0.41 1.59 0.9810 15 0.789 0.43 1.57 0.9823 16 0.763 0.45 1.55 0.9835 17 0.739 0.47 1.53 0.9845 18 0.718 0.48 1.52 0.9854 19 0.698 0.50 1.50 0.9862 20 0.680 0.51 1.49 0.9869 21 0.663 0.52 1.48 0.9876 22 0.647 0.53 1.47 0.9882 23 0.633 0.54 1.46 0.9887 24 0.619 0.55 1.45 0.9892 25 0.606 0.56 1.44 0.9896
TABLE A-4 Factors for Median Charts
n A"2 D 4
3 1.187 2.575 5 0.691 2.115 7 0.508 1.924 9 0.412 1.816
- Cover
- Title Page
- Copyright page
- Dedication Page
- Brief Contents
- Contents
- Preface
- Acknowledgements
- About the Author
- Part 1 Understanding Quality Concepts
- Chapter 1 DIFFERING PERSPECTIVES ON QUALITY
- Recognizing Different Perspectives on Quality
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 1-1: What’s in an Airport?
- What Is Quality?
- Product Quality Dimensions
- Service Quality Dimensions
- Why Does It Matter That Different Definitions of Quality Exist?
- Differing Functional Perspectives on Quality
- A Supply Chain Perspective
- An Engineering Perspective
- An Operations Perspective
- A Strategic Management Perspective
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 1-1: Quality Strategy at GE
- A Marketing Perspective
- A Financial Perspective
- The Human Resources Perspective
- Is Quality Management Its Own Functional Discipline?
- Three Spheres of Quality
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 1-2: Federal Express Corporation
- Other Perspectives on Quality
- The Value-Added Perspective on Quality
- Cultural Perspectives on Quality
- Arriving at a Common Understanding of Quality Using a Contingency Perspective of Quality
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- CASE 1-1: FedEx: Managing Quality Day and Night
- CASE 1-2: Granite Rock Company: Achieving Quality through Employees
- Chapter 2 QUALITY THEORY
- What Is Theory?
- Is There a Theory of Quality Management?
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 2-1: Quality and Management Fads
- History of Quality Management
- Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: W. Edwards Deming
- Deming’s 14 Points for Management
- Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Joseph M. Juran
- The Juran Trilogy
- Control versus Breakthrough
- Project-by-Project Improvement
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 2-2: Juran on the Past Century of Quality
- Pareto Analysis
- Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Kaoru Ishikawa
- Basic Tools of Quality
- Ishikawa’s Quality Philosophy
- Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Armand Feigenbaum
- The 19 Steps of TQC
- Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Philip Crosby
- Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: Genichi Taguchi
- Definition of Quality
- Quality Loss Function
- Robust Design
- Leading Contributors to Quality Theory: The Rest of the Pack
- Robert C. Camp
- Stephen R. Covey’s “8” Habits
- Tom Peters
- Michael Hammer and James Champy
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 2-3: Selling Quality Fads
- Viewing Quality Theory from a Contingency Perspective
- Resolving the Differences in Quality Approaches: An Integrative View
- Leadership
- Employee Improvement
- Quality Assurance
- Customer Focus
- Quality Philosophy
- Information Analysis
- Strategic Planning
- Environment or Infrastructure
- Team Approach
- Focus of the Quality Department
- Breakthrough
- Theoretical Framework for Quality Management
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- CASE 2-1: Rheaco, Inc.: Making a Quality Turnabout by Asking for Advice
- CASE 2-2: Has Disney Developed a Theory of Quality Guest Services Management?
- Chapter 3 GLOBAL SUPPLY CHAIN QUALITY AND INTERNATIONAL QUALITY STANDARDS
- Managing Quality for the Multinational Firm (MNF)
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 3-1: Supply Chain Quality in the Global Context
- Quality Improvement: The American Way
- The Malcolm Baldrige Award
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 3-1: Who Was Malcolm Baldrige?
- The Baldrige Process
- Baldrige Scoring
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 3-2: Honeywell Federal Manufacturing & Technologies
- Being a Baldrige Examiner
- State Awards
- Quality Improvement: The Japanese Way
- Deming Prize
- Other Japanese Contributions to Quality Thought
- Lean Production
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 3-3: The Humbling of Toyota
- Japanese Total Quality Control (TQC)
- Quality Improvement: The European Way
- European Quality Award
- ISO 9000:2008
- Quality Management Principles Underlying ISO 9000:2008
- Selecting a Registrar
- The ISO 9000:2008 Process
- ISO 14000
- Quality Improvement: The Chinese Way
- Does Chinese Quality Management Exist?
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 3-2: Outsourcing Woes
- Are Quality Approaches Influenced by Culture?
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- CASE 3-1: Denver International Airport Becomes ISO 14001 Certified
- CASE 3-2: Wainwright Industries: An Entirely New Philosophy of Business Based on Customer Satisfaction and Quality
- Part 2 Designing and Assuring Quality
- Chapter 4 STRATEGIC QUALITY PLANNING
- Strategy Content
- The Importance of Time in Quality Improvement
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 4-1: Problems with Measuring Educational Performance
- Leadership for Quality
- Leadership Dimensions
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 4-1: Solectron Corporation
- Quality and Ethics
- Quality as a Strategy
- Costs of Quality
- PAF Paradigm
- Accounting for Quality-Related Costs
- Lundvall-Juran Quality Cost Model
- Differentiation through Quality
- Focus through Quality
- Order Winners
- Quality as a Core Competency
- Quality Strategy Process
- Forced-Choice Model
- Deploying Quality (Hoshin Kanri)
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 4-2: A Mature Strategic Planning Process
- Does Quality Lead to Better Business Results?
- Quality and Price
- Quality and Cost
- Quality and Productivity
- Quality and Profitability
- Quality and Sustainability
- Supply Chain Strategy
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 4-1: Ames Rubber Corporation: Realizing Multiple Benefits through Improved Quality
- CASE 4-2: Midway USA
- Chapter 5 THE VOICE OF THE CUSTOMER
- Customer-Driven Quality
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 5-1: Online Review of Merchandise
- The Pitfalls of Reactive Customer-Driven Quality
- Customer-Relationship Management
- Complaint Resolution
- Feedback
- Guarantees
- Corrective Action
- The “Gaps” Approach to Service Design
- Segmenting Customers and Markets
- Strategic Supply Chain Alliances between Customers and Suppliers
- The Role of the Customer in the Supply Chain
- Communicating Downstream
- Actively Solicited Customer-Feedback Approaches
- Telephone Contact
- Focus Groups
- Customer Service Surveys
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 5-2: Misusing Surveys
- Passively Solicited Customer-Feedback Approaches
- Customer Research Cards
- Customer Response Lines
- Web Site Inquiries
- Managing Customer Retention and Loyalty
- Customer-Relationship Management Systems
- A Word on Excellent Design
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 5-1: Customer Quality Feedback at Apple Computer
- CASE 5-2: Chaparral Steel: Achieving High Quality through a Commitment to Both External and Internal Customers
- Chapter 6 THE VOICE OF THE MARKET
- What Do We Mean by the Voice of the Market?
- Gaining Insight through Benchmarking
- Process Benchmarking
- Financial Benchmarking
- Performance Benchmarking
- Product Benchmarking
- Strategic Benchmarking
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 6-1: Pal’s Sudden Service
- Functional Benchmarking
- Purposes of Benchmarking
- Difficulties in Monitoring and Measuring Performance
- Commonly Benchmarked Performance Measures
- Why Collect All These Measures?
- Key Business Factors
- Business Process Benchmarking
- Robert Camp’s Business Process Benchmarking Process
- Leading and Managing the Benchmarking Effort
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 6-1: Benchmarking at Intuit
- Training
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 6-2: The Legal Environment of Benchmarking
- Baselining and Reengineering
- Problems with Benchmarking
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 6-1: Amgen Corporation: Using Benchmarking as a Means of Coping with Rapid Growth
- CASE 6-2: AT&T Teleholdings: Making Benchmarking a Part of the Process Improvement Tool Kit
- Chapter 7 QUALITY AND INNOVATION IN PRODUCT AND PROCESS DESIGN
- Designing Products for Quality
- The Design Process
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 7-1: A Turnaround at Kellogg’s Cereals: Driven by Design
- Quality Function Deployment (QFD)
- Technology in Design
- Other Design Methodologies
- Organizing the Design Team
- The Product Life Cycle
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 7-1: Ski Design
- Product Families and the Product Life Cycle
- Complementary Products
- Designing Products That Work
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 7-2: It Takes a Scientist to Design a Winter Coat
- Design for Manufacture Method
- Design for Maintainability
- Designing for Reliability
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 7-2: Designing Reliable Luxury at Vuitton
- Reliability Analysis Tools
- Failure Modes and Effects Analysis
- How FMEA Works
- Fault-Tree Analysis
- Failure Modes, Effects, and Criticality Analysis
- Product Traceability and Recall Procedures
- Environmental Considerations in Design
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 7-1: Keeping Apple’s iPhone Competitive
- CASE 7-2: Nucor Corporation: Producing Quality Steel by Stressing Sound Management Practices
- Chapter 8 DESIGNING QUALITY SERVICES
- Differences between Services and Manufacturing
- Internal versus External Services
- Voluntary versus Involuntary Services
- How Are Service Quality Issues Different from Those of Manufacturing?
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 8-1: Service Warranties: Profitable or a Rip-off—You Decide
- How Are Service Quality Issues Similar to Manufacturing?
- What Do Services Customers Want?
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 8-1: Ritz-Carlton Hotels
- SERVQUAL
- Expectations
- Perceptions
- Gap Analysis
- Assessing Differences in Expectations and Perceptions by Using the Differencing Technique
- Designing and Improving the Services Transaction
- Services Blueprinting
- Moments of Truth
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 8-2: Quality in Health Care
- Poka-yoke
- The Customer Benefits Package
- Service Transaction Analysis
- Improving Customer Service in Government
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 8-3: Government Service Quality: A Stop-and-Go Process
- Quality in Health Care
- Supply Chain Quality in Services
- A Theory for Service Quality Management
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 8-1: Yahoo! Designs Quality Services with Customers in Mind
- CASE 8-2: UPS: Delivering the Total Package in Customer Service
- Chapter 9 MANAGING SUPPLIER QUALITY IN THE SUPPLY CHAIN
- The Value Chain
- The Chain of Customers
- Managing the Supply Chain
- Supplier Alliances
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 9-1: Supply Chains and Terrorism
- Single-Sourcing Examples
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 9-1: A Bumpy Ride at Boeing
- Supplier Development
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 9-2: Integrating Forward along the Supply Chain: 3M Dental Products Division
- Supplier Awards
- Supplier Relationship Management Systems (SRMSs)
- Applying the Contingency Perspective to Supplier Partnering
- A Supplier Development Program: ISO/TS 16949:2009
- ISO/TS 16949
- Quality Management System
- Management Responsibility
- Resource Management
- Product Realization
- Measurement, Analysis, and Improvement
- Acceptance Sampling and Statistical Sampling Techniques
- Is Acceptance Sampling Needed?
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 9-2: For RFID to Take Hold, Reliability Needs to Improve
- Building an Understanding of Supply Chain Quality Management
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- CASE 9-1: AT&T: Setting High Standards for Suppliers and Rewarding Supplier Performance
- CASE 9-2: Managing the Supply Chain at Honeywell
- Part 3 Implementing Quality
- Chapter 10 THE TOOLS OF QUALITY
- Improving the System
- Ishikawa’s Basic Seven Tools of Quality
- Process Maps
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 10-1: Extended Value Stream Mapping of Supply Chains
- Check Sheets
- Histograms
- Scatter Diagrams
- Control Charts
- Cause-and-Effect (Ishikawa) Diagrams
- Pareto Charts
- The Seven New Tools for Improvement
- The Affinity Diagram
- The Interrelationship Digraph
- Tree Diagrams
- Prioritization Grid
- Matrix Diagram
- Process Decision Program Chart
- Activity Network Diagram
- Reflections on the Managerial N7 Tools
- Other Tools for Performance Measurement
- Spider Charts
- Balanced Scorecards
- Dashboards
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 10-1: Corporate Universities: Teaching the Tools of Quality
- CASE 10-2: Lanier: Achieving Maximum Performance by Supporting Quality Products with Quality Services
- Chapter 11 STATISTICALLY BASED QUALITY IMPROVEMENT FOR VARIABLES
- Statistical Fundamentals
- What Is Statistical Thinking?
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 11-1: Statistical Tools in Action
- Why Do Statistics Sometimes Fail in the Workplace?
- Understanding Process Variation
- Process Stability
- Sampling Methods
- Random Samples
- Systematic Samples
- Sampling by Rational Subgroups
- Planning for Inspection
- Control Plans
- Process Control Charts
- Variables and Attributes Control Charts
- A Generalized Procedure for Developing Process Charts
- Understanding Process Charts
- x and R Charts
- Interpreting Control Charts
- Using Excel to Draw x and R Charts
- X and Moving Range (MR) Charts for Population Data
- Using Excel to Draw X and MR Charts
- Median Charts
- Using Excel to Draw Median Charts
- x and s Charts
- Using Excel to Draw s and x Charts
- Other Control Charts
- Moving Average Chart
- Cusum Chart
- Some Control Chart Concepts for Variables
- Choosing the Correct Variables Control Chart
- Corrective Action
- How Do We Use Control Charts to Continuously Improve?
- Tampering with the Process
- Process Capability for Variables
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 11-1: A Justification for Meeting Standards in Software Quality
- Population versus Sampling Distributions
- Capability Studies
- Ppk
- The Difference between Capability and Stability
- Other Statistical Techniques in Quality Management
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 11-1: Ore-Ida Fries
- Chapter 12 STATISTICALLY BASED QUALITY IMPROVEMENT FOR ATTRIBUTES
- Generic Process for Developing Attributes Charts
- Understanding Attributes Charts
- p Charts for Proportion Defective
- Using Excel to Draw p Charts
- np Charts
- Using Excel to Draw np Charts
- c and u Charts
- Using Excel to Draw c and u Charts
- Attributes Charts Summary
- Choosing the Right Attributes Chart
- Reliability Models
- Series Reliability
- Parallel Reliability
- Measuring Reliability
- Mean Time to Failure (MTTF)
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 12-1: Is Quality on the Decline?
- System Availability
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 12-1: Decision Sciences Institute National Conference
- Chapter 13 SIX SIGMA MANAGEMENT AND LEAN TOOLS
- What Is Six Sigma?
- Organizing Lean-Six Sigma
- Packaging Lean with Six Sigma
- DMAIC Overview
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 13-1: DMAIC in Action
- Define Phase
- Developing the Business Case
- Project Evaluation
- Pareto Analysis
- Problem Definition
- Measure Phase
- Selecting Process Outcomes
- FMEA
- Verifying Measurements
- Gauge R&R
- Using Excel to Perform Gauge R&R Analysis
- Analyze Phase
- Defining Objectives
- Identifying Xs
- Analyzing Sources of Variation
- Improve Phase
- Control Phase
- Taguchi Design of Experiments
- Robust Design
- Background of the Taguchi Method
- Taguchi Definition of Quality
- Quality Loss Function
- The Taguchi Process
- Using Excel to Solve Taguchi Experiments
- Design for Six Sigma
- Lean-Six Sigma from a Contingency Perspective
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 13-1: The Neiman-Marcus Cookie
- Part 4 Forever Improving the Quality System
- Chapter 14 MANAGING QUALITY IMPROVEMENT TEAMS AND PROJECTS
- Why Employees Enjoy teams
- Leading Teams for Quality Improvement
- Employee Empowerment and Involvement
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 14-1: Empowerment in Action
- Flattening Hierarchies for Improved Effectiveness
- Team Leader Roles and Responsibilities
- Team Roles and Responsibilities
- Team Formation and Evolution
- Team Rules
- Types of Teams
- Process Improvement Teams
- Cross-Functional Teams
- Tiger Teams
- Natural Work Groups
- Self-Directed Work Teams
- Virtual Teams
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 14-2: Lessons from Effective Teams outside the Business World
- Implementing Teams
- Meeting Management
- Conflict Resolution in Teams
- Saving Quality Teams from Failure: Diagnosing Problems and Intervening Before It Is Too Late
- Managing and Controlling Projects
- Qualifying Projects
- Project Charters
- Force-Field Analysis
- Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)
- Identifying Precedence Relationships
- Identifying Outcome Measures
- Identifying Task Times
- Activity Network Diagrams
- Arrow Gantt Charts
- Managing Multiple Projects
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 14-1: Whole Foods Market: Using Teamwork as a Recipe for Success
- Chapter 15 IMPLEMENTING AND VALIDATING THE QUALITY SYSTEM
- Building Blocks for the system of Quality Improvement
- People
- Organizational Learning and Knowledge
- Culture
- Closeness to Customers
- Information and Finance
- The Three Spheres of Quality
- The Integrative Approach
- Alignment between the Quality System and Strategy
- QUALITY HIGHLIGHT 15-1: Back to Basics at Ford
- Internal Validation: Documenting and Assessing the Quality System
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 15-1: A Simple Self-Assessment Tool
- Quality Audits
- Quality Audit Process
- Types of Audits
- Operational Audits
- Performance Audits
- A CLOSER LOOK AT QUALITY 15-2: Quality Audits in Action
- Qualitative and Quantitative Elements in Audits
- Validating the Quality System
- Summary
- Key Terms
- Discussion Questions
- Problems
- CASE 15-1: Setting Priorities Using the Baldrige Criteria
- Appendix
- Glossary
- A
- B
- C
- D
- E
- F
- G
- H
- I
- J
- K
- L
- M
- N
- O
- P
- Q
- R
- S
- T
- U
- V
- W
- X
- Y
- Index
- A
- B
- C
- D
- E
- F
- G
- H
- I
- J
- K
- L
- M
- N
- O
- P
- Q
- R
- S
- T
- U
- V
- W
- X
- Y
- Z